This is a modern-English version of Lectures on the Science of Language, originally written by Müller, F. Max (Friedrich Max). It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


Lectures on

Talks on

The Science of Language

The Science of Language

Delivered At The

Delivered at the

Royal Institution of Great Britain

Royal Institution of Great Britain

In

In

April, May, and June, 1861.

April, May, and June 1861.

By Max Müller, M. A.

By Max Müller, M.A.

Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford; Correspondence Member of the Imperial Institute of France.

Fellow of All Souls College, Oxford; Correspondence Member of the Imperial Institute of France.

From the Second London Edition, Revised.

From the Second London Edition, Revised.

New York:

NYC:

Charles Scribner, 124 Grand Street.

Charles Scribner, 124 Grand St.

1862

1862


[pg v]

Dedication

Dedicated

Committed

To

To

The Members Of The University Of Oxford,

The Members of the University of Oxford,

Both Resident And Non-Resident,

Both Residents and Non-Residents,

To Whom I Am Indebted

To Whom I Owe Thanks

For Numerous Proofs Of Sympathy And Kindness

For Many Examples of Compassion and Kindness

During The Last Twelve Years,

Over the Last Twelve Years,

In Grateful Acknowledgment Of Their Generous Support

In Grateful Acknowledgment of Their Generous Support

On The

On The

7th Of December, 1860.

December 7, 1860.

[pg vii]

Introduction.

My Lectures on the Science of Language are here printed as I had prepared them in manuscript for the Royal Institution. When I came to deliver them, a considerable portion of what I had written had to be omitted; and, in now placing them before the public in a more complete form, I have gladly complied with a wish expressed by many of my hearers. As they are, they only form a short abstract of several Courses delivered from time to time in Oxford, and they do not pretend to be more than an introduction to a science far too comprehensive to be treated successfully in so small a compass.

My Lectures on the Science of Language are being published here just as I prepared them in manuscript for the Royal Institution. When it was time to present them, I had to leave out a significant part of what I had written. Now, as I share them with the public in a more complete version, I’m happy to fulfill a request made by many of my listeners. As they are, these lectures only provide a brief overview of several courses I delivered periodically in Oxford, and they don’t claim to be anything more than an introduction to a field that’s far too broad to be covered successfully in such a limited space.

My object, however, will have been attained, if I should succeed in attracting the attention, not only of the scholar, but of the philosopher, the historian, and the theologian, to a science which concerns them all, and which, though it professes to treat of words only, teaches us that there is more in words than is dreamt of in our philosophy. I quote from Bacon: “Men believe that their reason is lord over their [pg viii] words, but it happens, too, that words exercise a reciprocal and reactionary power over our intellect. Words, as a Tartar's bow, shoot back upon the understanding of the wisest, and mightily entangle and pervert the judgment.”

My goal, however, will be achieved if I can grab the attention not just of scholars, but also of philosophers, historians, and theologians, towards a field of study that affects them all. This field, while it claims to focus only on words, shows us that there’s much more to words than we can imagine. I quote from Bacon: "People believe their reasoning controls their words, but words also have a mutual and reactive effect on our thinking. Words, like a Tartar's bow, can bounce back and confuse and distort the judgment of even the wisest."

MAX MÜLLER.

Max Müller.

Oxford, June 11, 1861.

Oxford, June 11, 1861.

[pg 011]

Lecture I. The Science of Language as a Physical Science.

When I was asked some time ago to deliver a course of lectures on Comparative Philology in this Institution, I at once expressed my readiness to do so. I had lived long enough in England to know that the peculiar difficulties arising from my imperfect knowledge of the language would be more than balanced by the forbearance of an English audience, and I had such perfect faith in my subject that I thought it might be trusted even in the hands of a less skilful expositor. I felt convinced that the researches into the history of languages and into the nature of human speech which have been carried on for the last fifty years in England, France, and Germany, deserved a larger share of public sympathy than they had hitherto received; and it seemed to me, as far as I could judge, that the discoveries in this newly-opened mine of scientific inquiry were not inferior, whether in novelty or importance, to the most brilliant discoveries of our age.

When I was asked a while ago to give a series of lectures on Comparative Philology at this institution, I immediately agreed to do it. I had spent enough time in England to understand that the unique challenges from my limited grasp of the language would be outweighed by the patience of an English audience. I had such strong confidence in my topic that I believed it could be handled even by someone less skilled at explaining it. I was convinced that the studies into the history of languages and the nature of human speech conducted over the past fifty years in England, France, and Germany deserved more public attention than they had received so far. To me, it seemed that the findings in this newly explored area of scientific inquiry were just as significant and innovative as the most remarkable discoveries of our time.

[pg 012]

It was not till I began to write my lectures that I became aware of the difficulties of the task I had undertaken. The dimensions of the science of language are so vast that it is impossible in a course of nine lectures to give more than a very general survey of it; and as one of the greatest charms of this science consists in the minuteness of the analysis by which each language, each dialect, each word, each grammatical form is tested, I felt that it was almost impossible to do full justice to my subject, or to place the achievements of those who founded and fostered the science of language in their true light. Another difficulty arises from the dryness of many of the problems which I shall have to discuss. Declensions and conjugations cannot be made amusing, nor can I avail myself of the advantages possessed by most lecturers, who enliven their discussions by experiments and diagrams. If, with all these difficulties and drawbacks, I do not shrink from opening to-day this course of lectures on mere words, on nouns and verbs and particles,—if I venture to address an audience accustomed to listen, in this place, to the wonderful tales of the natural historian, the chemist, and geologist, and wont to see the novel results of inductive reasoning invested by native eloquence, with all the charms of poetry and romance,—it is because, though mistrusting myself, I cannot mistrust my subject. The study of words may be tedious to the school-boy, as breaking of stones is to the wayside laborer; but to the thoughtful eye of the geologist these stones are full of interest;—he sees miracles on the high-road, and reads chronicles in every ditch. Language, too, has marvels of her own, which she unveils to the inquiring glance of the patient [pg 013] student. There are chronicles below her surface; there are sermons in every word. Language has been called sacred ground, because it is the deposit of thought. We cannot tell as yet what language is. It may be a production of nature, a work of human art, or a divine gift. But to whatever sphere it belongs, it would seem to stand unsurpassed—nay, unequalled in it—by anything else. If it be a production of nature, it is her last and crowning production which she reserved for man alone. If it be a work of human art, it would seem to lift the human artist almost to the level of a divine creator. If it be the gift of God, it is God's greatest gift; for through it God spake to man and man speaks to God in worship, prayer, and meditation.

I didn’t realize how challenging the task I had taken on was until I started writing my lectures. The scope of language science is so vast that it’s impossible to cover more than a general overview in just nine lectures. One of the most appealing aspects of this field is the detailed analysis of each language, each dialect, each word, and each grammatical form. I felt it was nearly impossible to do full justice to my topic or to properly highlight the contributions of those who established and nurtured language science. Another issue is that many of the problems I’ll discuss are quite dry. You can’t make declensions and conjugations entertaining, and I don’t have the advantages that many lecturers have, who make their talks engaging with experiments and diagrams. So, despite all these challenges, I won’t hesitate to start this course on the basics, on nouns, verbs, and particles—especially when addressing an audience that’s used to hearing the captivating stories of natural historians, chemists, and geologists, and witnessing the exciting outcomes of inductive reasoning presented with eloquence and the flair of poetry and romance. It’s because, although I doubt myself, I can’t doubt my subject. The study of words might seem boring to a schoolboy, like breaking stones is to a laborer by the road. But to a keen geologist, those stones are fascinating; they see miracles on the highway and read stories in every ditch. Language, too, has its own wonders, which it reveals to the curious gaze of the diligent student. There are histories beneath its surface; there are insights in every word. Language has been referred to as sacred ground because it holds the essence of thought. We don’t yet know what language truly is. It could be a natural phenomenon, a product of human creativity, or a divine gift. But whatever its origins, it seems to stand unmatched—indeed, unparalleled—by anything else. If it’s a natural creation, it’s nature’s final and most significant gift to humanity alone. If it’s a human creation, it raises the creator almost to a level of divine architect. If it’s a gift from God, it’s the greatest gift of all; through it, God speaks to humanity, and humanity speaks to God in worship, prayer, and reflection.

Although the way which is before us may be long and tedious, the point to which it tends would seem to be full of interest; and I believe I may promise that the view opened before our eyes from the summit of our science, will fully repay the patient travellers, and perhaps secure a free pardon to their venturous guide.

Although the path ahead might be long and tiring, the destination seems really intriguing; and I think I can promise that the view we’ll get from the peak of our knowledge will fully reward the patient explorers, and maybe even earn a complete pardon for their daring guide.


The Science of Language is a science of very modern date. We cannot trace its lineage much beyond the beginning of our century, and it is scarcely received as yet on a footing of equality by the elder branches of learning. Its very name is still unsettled, and the various titles that have been given to it in England, France, and Germany are so vague and varying that they have led to the most confused ideas among the public at large as to the real objects of this new science. We hear it spoken of as Comparative Philology, Scientific Etymology, Phonology, and Glossology. [pg 014] In France it has received the convenient, but somewhat barbarous, name of Linguistique. If we must have a Greek title for our science, we might derive it either from mythos, word, or from logos, speech. But the title of Mythology is already occupied, and Logology would jar too much on classical ears. We need not waste our time in criticising these names, as none of them has as yet received that universal sanction which belongs to the titles of other modern sciences, such as Geology or Comparative Anatomy; nor will there be much difficulty in christening our young science after we have once ascertained its birth, its parentage, and its character. I myself prefer the simple designation of the Science of Language, though in these days of high-sounding titles, this plain name will hardly meet with general acceptance.

The Science of Language is a relatively new field. We can't trace its origins much further back than the start of this century, and it hasn’t yet been fully accepted as an equal by the older disciplines. The name itself is still up for debate, and the different titles used in England, France, and Germany are so vague and inconsistent that they’ve created a lot of confusion among the public about what this new science really focuses on. It’s referred to as Comparative Philology, Scientific Etymology, Phonology, and Glossology. In France, it’s known by the convenient but somewhat awkward term Linguistics. If we want a Greek title for our science, we could use mythos, meaning word, or logos, meaning speech. However, the title Mythology is already taken, and Logology would sound too jarring to classical ears. There's no point in criticizing these names, as none of them have gained the widespread recognition that titles of other modern sciences, like Geology or Comparative Anatomy, have. It shouldn't be hard to name our emerging field once we determine its origins, ancestry, and essence. Personally, I prefer the straightforward name Science of Language, though in today's world of impressive titles, this simple name may not gain wide acceptance.

From the name we now turn to the meaning of our science. But before we enter upon a definition of its subject-matter, and determine the method which ought to be followed in our researches, it will be useful to cast a glance at the history of the other sciences, among which the science of language now, for the first time, claims her place; and examine their origin, their gradual progress, and definite settlement. The history of a science is, as it were, its biography, and as we buy experience cheapest in studying the lives of others, we may, perhaps, guard our young science from some of the follies and extravagances inherent in youth by learning a lesson for which other branches of human knowledge have had to pay more dearly.

From the name, we now turn to the meaning of our science. But before we dive into defining its subject and deciding on the method we should use in our research, it’s helpful to take a look at the history of other sciences, among which the science of language now, for the first time, claims its place; and to examine their origins, gradual progress, and final establishment. The history of a science is like its biography, and since we gain the most wisdom by studying the lives of others, we might be able to protect our young science from some of the mistakes and excesses that come with youth by learning lessons that other fields of knowledge have had to pay dearly for.

There is a certain uniformity in the history of most [pg 015] sciences. If we read such works as Whewell's History of the Inductive Sciences or Humboldt's Cosmos, we find that the origin, the progress, the causes of failure and success have been the same for almost every branch of human knowledge. There are three marked periods or stages in the history of every one of them, which we may call the Empirical, the Classificatory, and the Theoretical. However humiliating it may sound, every one of our sciences, however grand their present titles, can be traced back to the most humble and homely occupations of half-savage tribes. It was not the true, the good, and the beautiful which spurred the early philosophers to deep researches and bold discoveries. The foundation-stone of the most glorious structures of human ingenuity in ages to come was supplied by the pressing wants of a patriarchal and semi-barbarous society. The names of some of the most ancient departments of human knowledge tell their own tale. Geometry, which at present declares itself free from all sensuous impressions, and treats of its points and lines and planes as purely ideal conceptions, not to be confounded with those coarse and imperfect representations as they appear on paper to the human eye; geometry, as its very name declares, began with measuring a garden or a field. It is derived from the Greek , land, ground, earth, and metron, measure. Botany, the science of plants, was originally the science of botanē, which in Greek does not mean a plant in general, but fodder, from boskein, to feed. The science of plants would have been called Phytology, from the Greek phyton, a plant.1 The founders [pg 016] of Astronomy were not the poet or the philosopher, but the sailor and the farmer. The early poet may have admired “the mazy dance of planets,” and the philosopher may have speculated on the heavenly harmonies; but it was to the sailor alone that a knowledge of the glittering guides of heaven became a question of life and death. It was he who calculated their risings and settings with the accuracy of a merchant and the shrewdness of an adventurer; and the names that were given to single stars or constellations clearly show that they were invented by the ploughers of the sea and of the land. The moon, for instance, the golden hand on the dark dial of heaven, was called by them the Measurer,—the measurer of time; for time was measured by nights, and moons, and winters, long before it was reckoned by days, and suns, and years. Moon2 is a very old word. It was môna in Anglo-Saxon, and was used there, not as a feminine, but as a masculine; for the moon was a masculine in all Teutonic languages, and it is only through the influence of classical models that in English moon has been changed into a feminine, and sun into a masculine. It was a most unlucky assertion which Mr. Harris made in his Hermes, that all nations ascribe to the sun a masculine, and to the moon a feminine gender.3 In Gothic moon is mena, which is a masculine. For month we have in A.-S. mónâdh, in Gothic menoth, both masculine. In Greek we find mēn, a masculine, for month, and mēnē, a feminine, for moon. In Latin we have the derivative mensis, month, and in Sanskrit we find mâs for moon, and mâsa for month, both [pg 017] masculine.4 Now this mâs in Sanskrit is clearly derived from a root , to measure, to mete. In Sanskrit, I measure is mâ-mi; thou measurest, mâ-si; he measures, mâ-ti (or mimî-te). An instrument of measuring is called in Sanskrit mâ-tram, the Greek metron, our metre. Now if the moon was originally called by the farmer the measurer, the ruler of days, and weeks, and seasons, the regulator of the tides, the lord of their festivals, and the herald of their public assemblies, it is but natural that he should have been conceived as a man, and not as the love-sick maiden which our modern sentimental poetry has put in his place.

There’s a consistent pattern in the history of most sciences. If we look at works like Whewell's *History of the Inductive Sciences* or Humboldt's *Cosmos*, we see that the origins, developments, and reasons for failures and successes have been similar across nearly all fields of human knowledge. Each of these fields has three distinct periods or stages that we can label as the Based on evidence, the Classifying, and the Theoretical. As embarrassing as it may sound, every science we have today, no matter how prestigious its name, can be traced back to the simple and everyday tasks of primitive tribes. It wasn't the pursuit of truth, goodness, or beauty that motivated early philosophers to engage in thorough research and bold discoveries. The foundation for the most remarkable achievements of human creativity in later ages was laid by the urgent needs of a patriarchal and semi-barbaric society. The names of some of the oldest areas of human knowledge tell their own story. Geometry, which today claims to be free from all sensory impressions, focusing instead on points, lines, and planes as purely ideal concepts, began with measuring a garden or a field. Its name comes from the Greek guy, meaning land, and metronome, meaning measure. Botany, the study of plants, originally stemmed from the Greek term botany, which doesn’t refer to plants in general, but rather to fodder, derived from boskein, meaning to feed. The study of plants could have been called Phytology, from the Greek python, meaning a plant. The roots of Astronomy were not in poetry or philosophy, but in sailing and farming. While early poets might have marveled at “the complex dance of planets,” and philosophers speculated on celestial harmonies, it was the sailor who cared about understanding the glittering markers of the heavens for survival. He calculated their rises and sets with the precision of a merchant and the shrewdness of an adventurer; the names assigned to individual stars or constellations reflect that they were created by those who cultivated both land and sea. For instance, the moon, which was seen as the golden hand on the dark clock of the sky, was called the Measurer—the measurer of time; for time was once tracked by nights, moons, and winters long before days, suns, and years were counted. The word moon is quite old. It was mona in Anglo-Saxon, used as a masculine term; in all Teutonic languages, the moon was considered masculine. It was only due to the influence of classical languages that in English, "moon" was changed to a feminine term, and "sun" to a masculine. Mr. Harris’s claim in his *Hermes* that all cultures assign a masculine gender to the sun and a feminine one to the moon was quite unfortunate. In Gothic, moon is mena, which is masculine. For month, we have in Anglo-Saxon mónâdh, and in Gothic Menoth, both masculine. In Greek, we find men, a masculine term for month, and mēnē, a feminine term for moon. In Latin, we have the derivative month, meaning month, and in Sanskrit, we see dude for moon, and table for month, both masculine. Now, this más in Sanskrit clearly comes from a root , meaning to measure. In Sanskrit, "I measure" is mommie; "you measure" is mâ-si; "he measures" is mā-ti (or mimî-te). A measuring tool in Sanskrit is referred to as maternity tram, similar to the Greek metronome, which is our metre. If the farmer originally called the moon the measurer, the ruler of days, weeks, and seasons, the controller of tides, the master of their celebrations, and the announcer of their gatherings, it’s only natural he would have envisioned it as a man, rather than the lovesick maiden depicted by modern sentimental poetry.

It was the sailor who, before intrusting his life and goods to the winds and the waves of the ocean, watched for the rising of those stars which he called the Sailing-stars or Pleiades, from plein, to sail. Navigation in the Greek waters was considered safe after the return of the Pleiades; and it closed when they disappeared. The Latin name for the Pleiades is Vergiliæ, from virga, a sprout or twig. This name was given to them by the Italian husbandman, because in Italy, where they became visible about May, they marked the return of summer.5 Another constellation, the seven stars in the head of Taurus, received the name of Hyades or Pluviæ in Latin, because at the time when they rose with the sun they were supposed to announce rain. The astronomer retains these and many other names; he still speaks of the pole of heaven, of wandering and fixed stars,6 but he is apt [pg 018] to forget that these terms were not the result of scientific observation and classification, but were borrowed from the language of those who themselves were wanderers on the sea or in the desert, and to whom the fixed stars were in full reality what their name implies, stars driven in and fixed, by which they might hold fast on the deep, as by heavenly anchors.

It was the sailor who, before trusting his life and belongings to the winds and waves of the ocean, looked for the rise of those stars he called the Sailing-stars or Pleiades, from plain, to sail. Navigation in Greek waters was considered safe after the Pleiades returned; it ended when they disappeared. The Latin name for the Pleiades is Virgil, from virga, meaning a sprout or twig. This name was given to them by the Italian farmer, because in Italy, where they became visible around May, they signaled the return of summer.5 Another constellation, the seven stars in the head of Taurus, was named Hyades or Rain in Latin, because when they rose with the sun, they were believed to announce rain. The astronomer keeps these and many other names; he still talks about the pole of heaven, wandering stars, and fixed stars,6 but he often forgets that these terms didn't come from scientific observation and classification; they were borrowed from the language of those who were themselves wanderers at sea or in the desert, for whom the fixed stars were truly what their name indicates—stars securely anchored, by which they could navigate the depths, as if held by heavenly anchors.

But although historically we are justified in saying that the first geometrician was a ploughman, the first botanist a gardener, the first mineralogist a miner, it may reasonably be objected that in this early stage a science is hardly a science yet: that measuring a field is not geometry, that growing cabbages is very far from botany, and that a butcher has no claim to the title of comparative anatomist. This is perfectly true, yet it is but right that each science should be reminded of these its more humble beginnings, and of the practical requirements which it was originally intended to answer. A science, as Bacon says, should be a rich storehouse for the glory of God, and the relief of man's estate. Now, although it may seem as if in the present high state of our society students were enabled to devote their time to the investigation of the facts and laws of nature, or to the contemplation of the mysteries of the world of thought, without any side-glance at the practical result of their labors, no science and no art have long prospered and flourished among us, unless they were in some way subservient to the practical interests of society. It is true that a [pg 019] Lyell collects and arranges, a Faraday weighs and analyzes, an Owen dissects and compares, a Herschel observes and calculates, without any thought of the immediate marketable results of their labors. But there is a general interest which supports and enlivens their researches, and that interest depends on the practical advantages which society at large derives from their scientific studies. Let it be known that the successive strata of the geologist are a deception to the miner, that the astronomical tables are useless to the navigator, that chemistry is nothing but an expensive amusement, of no use to the manufacturer and the farmer—and astronomy, chemistry, and geology would soon share the fate of alchemy and astrology. As long as the Egyptian science excited the hopes of the invalid by mysterious prescriptions (I may observe by the way that the hieroglyphic signs of our modern prescriptions have been traced back by Champollion to the real hieroglyphics of Egypt7)—and as long as it instigated the avarice of its patrons by the promise of the discovery of gold, it enjoyed a liberal support at the courts of princes, and under the roofs of monasteries. Though alchemy did not lead to the discovery of gold, it prepared the way to discoveries more valuable. The same with astrology. Astrology was not such mere imposition as it is generally supposed to have been. It is counted as a science by so sound and sober a scholar as Melancthon, and even Bacon allows it a place among the sciences, though admitting that “it had better intelligence and confederacy with the imagination of man than with his reason.” In spite of the strong condemnation which Luther pronounced against astrology, [pg 020] astrology continued to sway the destinies of Europe; and a hundred years after Luther, the astrologer was the counsellor of princes and generals, while the founder of modern astronomy died in poverty and despair. In our time the very rudiments of astrology are lost and forgotten.8 Even real and useful arts, as soon as they cease to be useful, die away, and their secrets are sometimes lost beyond the hope of recovery. When after the Reformation our churches and chapels were divested of their artistic ornaments, in order to restore, in outward appearance also, the simplicity and purity of the Christian church, the colors of the painted windows began to fade away, and have never regained their former depth and harmony. The invention of printing gave the death-blow to the art of ornamental writing and of miniature-painting employed in the illumination of manuscripts; and the best artists of the present day despair of rivalling the minuteness, softness, and brilliancy combined by the humble manufacturer of the mediæval missal.

But even though it's historically accurate to say that the first mathematician was a farmer, the first botanist a gardener, and the first mineralogist a miner, one could argue that at that early stage, a science wasn't really a science yet: measuring a field isn’t truly geometry, growing cabbages is far from botany, and a butcher can’t claim to be a comparative anatomist. This is completely true, yet it’s important for each science to remember its humble beginnings and the practical needs it was initially meant to address. As Bacon states, a science should be a valuable resource for the glory of God and improving human life. Now, although it may seem like in our advanced society, students can focus on exploring the facts and laws of nature, or contemplating the mysteries of thought without concern for the practical outcomes of their work, no science or art truly thrives among us unless it somehow serves the practical interests of society. It’s true that a Lyell collects and sorts, a Faraday weighs and analyzes, an Owen dissects and compares, and a Herschel observes and calculates, often without thinking about the immediate market value of their work. However, there is a broader interest that supports and energizes their research, and that interest depends on the practical benefits society gains from their scientific studies. If it were revealed that the geologist's knowledge was misleading to the miner, that astronomical tables had no use for navigators, or that chemistry was just an expensive pastime with no value to manufacturers or farmers—astronomy, chemistry, and geology would quickly fall to the same fate as alchemy and astrology. As long as Egyptian science gave hope to the sick with its mysterious cures (by the way, Champollion traced the hieroglyphics of modern prescriptions back to actual Egyptian hieroglyphics)—and as long as it fueled the greed of its backers with promises of gold discovery, it received generous support from royal courts and monasteries. Even though alchemy didn’t lead to gold, it paved the way for more valuable discoveries. The same goes for astrology. Astrology wasn't merely a scam as it’s often thought to be. It is recognized as a science by respected scholars like Melancthon, and even Bacon includes it among the sciences, though he concedes that "it had better intelligence and alliance with the imagination of man than with his reason.” Despite Luther's strong condemnation of astrology, it continued to influence the fate of Europe; a hundred years after Luther, astrologers were counselors to princes and generals, while the founder of modern astronomy died in poverty and despair. In our time, the very basics of astrology have been lost and forgotten. Even real and useful arts fade away as soon as they lose their usefulness, and their secrets are sometimes lost beyond recovery. After the Reformation, when our churches and chapels were stripped of artistic decorations to restore the simplicity and purity of the Christian church, the colors of the stained glass windows began to fade and have never regained their original richness and harmony. The invention of printing struck a fatal blow to the art of decorative writing and miniature painting used in illuminating manuscripts; today’s finest artists feel they can never replicate the detail, softness, and brilliance achieved by the simple creators of medieval missals.

I speak somewhat feelingly on the necessity that every science should answer some practical purpose, because I am aware that the science of language has but little to offer to the utilitarian spirit of our age. It does not profess to help us in learning languages more expeditiously, nor does it hold out any hope of ever realizing the dream of one universal language. [pg 021] It simply professes to teach what language is, and this would hardly seem sufficient to secure for a new science the sympathy and support of the public at large. There are problems, however, which, though apparently of an abstruse and merely speculative character, have exercised a powerful influence for good or evil in the history of mankind. Men before now have fought for an idea, and have laid down their lives for a word; and many of these problems which have agitated the world from the earliest to our own times, belong properly to the science of language.

I feel strongly about the need for every science to serve a practical purpose because I'm aware that the science of language doesn't have much to offer the utilitarian mindset of our time. It doesn't claim to help us learn languages faster, nor does it promise to achieve the dream of a single universal language. [pg 021] It simply aims to explain what language is, which might not seem enough to gain the sympathy and support of the general public for a new science. However, there are issues that, although they seem abstract and purely theoretical, have had a significant impact—both positive and negative—throughout human history. People have fought for ideas and even given their lives for a single word; many of these issues that have stirred the world from ancient times to the present are fundamentally tied to the science of language.

Mythology, which was the bane of the ancient world, is in truth a disease of language. A myth means a word, but a word which, from being a name or an attribute, has been allowed to assume a more substantial existence. Most of the Greek, the Roman, the Indian, and other heathen gods are nothing but poetical names, which were gradually allowed to assume a divine personality never contemplated by their original inventors. Eos was a name of the dawn before she became a goddess, the wife of Tithonos, or the dying day. Fatum, or fate, meant originally what had been spoken; and before Fate became a power, even greater than Jupiter, it meant that which had once been spoken by Jupiter, and could never be changed,—not even by Jupiter himself. Zeus originally meant the bright heaven, in Sanskrit Dyaus; and many of the stories told of him as the supreme god, had a meaning only as told originally of the bright heaven, whose rays, like golden rain, descend on the lap of the earth, the Danae of old, kept by her father in the dark prison of winter. No one doubts that Luna was simply a name of the moon; but so was likewise Lucina, both derived [pg 022] from lucere, to shine. Hecate, too, was an old name of the moon, the feminine of Hekatos and Hekatebolos, the far-darting sun; and Pyrrha, the Eve of the Greeks, was nothing but a name of the red earth, and in particular of Thessaly. This mythological disease, though less virulent in modern languages, is by no means extinct.

Mythology, which was a curse in the ancient world, is really a sickness of language. A myth means a word, but a word that, from being just a name or a characteristic, has been allowed to take on a more substantial existence. Most of the Greek, Roman, Indian, and other pagan gods are merely poetic names that gradually came to embody a divine persona that their original creators never intended. Eos was just a name for dawn before she became a goddess, the wife of Tithonus, or the dying day. Fate, meaning fate, originally referred to what had been spoken; and before Fate was seen as a power even greater than Jupiter, it meant what had once been uttered by Jupiter and could never be changed—not even by Jupiter himself. Zeus originally referred to the bright sky, in Sanskrit Dyaus; many of the stories about him as the supreme god only made sense when originally referring to the bright sky, whose rays, like golden rain, fall on the lap of the earth, the Danaë of old, kept by her father in the dark prison of winter. No one doubts that Luna was simply a name for the moon; the same goes for Lucina, both derived from shine, meaning to shine. Hecate was also an ancient name for the moon, the feminine of Hecate and Hekatebolus, the far-shooting sun; and Pyrrha, the Greek Eve, was nothing more than a name for the red earth, specifically of Thessaly. This mythological sickness, although less widespread in modern languages, is by no means gone.

During the Middle Ages the controversy between Nominalism and Realism, which agitated the church for centuries, and finally prepared the way for the Reformation, was again, as its very name shows, a controversy on names, on the nature of language, and on the relation of words to our conceptions on one side, and to the realities of the outer world on the other. Men were called heretics for believing that words such as justice or truth expressed only conceptions of our mind, not real things walking about in broad daylight.

During the Middle Ages, the debate between Nominalism and Realism stirred the church for centuries and ultimately paved the way for the Reformation. This controversy, as its name suggests, was about names, the nature of language, and how words relate to our thoughts on one side and to the realities of the outside world on the other. People were labeled heretics for believing that words like justice or truth only represented concepts in our minds, not real entities existing in the world.

In modern times the science of language has been called in to settle some of the most perplexing political and social questions. “Nations and languages against dynasties and treaties,” this is what has remodelled, and will remodel still more, the map of Europe; and in America comparative philologists have been encouraged to prove the impossibility of a common origin of languages and races, in order to justify, by scientific arguments, the unhallowed theory of slavery. Never do I remember to have seen science more degraded than on the title-page of an American publication in which, among the profiles of the different races of man, the profile of the ape was made to look more human than that of the negro.

In modern times, the study of language has been called upon to address some of the most complicated political and social issues. "Nations and languages against dynasties and treaties," this is what has shaped, and will continue to shape, the map of Europe; and in America, comparative linguists have been urged to demonstrate the impossibility of a shared origin for languages and races, in order to scientifically support the unjust theory of slavery. I can’t recall seeing science more degraded than on the cover of an American publication where, alongside the profiles of various human races, the profile of the ape was made to appear more human than that of the Black person.

Lastly, the problem of the position of man on the [pg 023] threshold between the worlds of matter and spirit has of late assumed a very marked prominence among the problems of the physical and mental sciences. It has absorbed the thoughts of men who, after a long life spent in collecting, observing, and analyzing, have brought to its solution qualifications unrivalled in any previous age; and if we may judge from the greater warmth displayed in discussions ordinarily conducted with the calmness of judges and not with the passion of pleaders, it might seem, after all, as if the great problems of our being, of the true nobility of our blood, of our descent from heaven or earth, though unconnected with anything that is commonly called practical, have still retained a charm of their own—a charm that will never lose its power on the mind, and on the heart of man. Now, however much the frontiers of the animal kingdom have been pushed forward, so that at one time the line of demarcation between animal and man seemed to depend on a mere fold in the brain, there is one barrier which no one has yet ventured to touch—the barrier of language. Even those philosophers with whom penser c'est sentir,9 who reduce all thought to feeling, and maintain that we share the faculties which are the productive causes of thought in common with beasts, are bound to confess that as yet no race of animals has produced a language. Lord Monboddo, for instance, admits that as yet no [pg 024] animal has been discovered in the possession of language, “not even the beaver, who of all the animals we know, that are not, like the orang-outangs, of our own species, comes nearest to us in sagacity.”

Lastly, the issue of humanity's place on the threshold between the physical and spiritual realms has recently become a significant focus in both the physical and mental sciences. It has captured the attention of individuals who, after a lifetime of gathering, observing, and analyzing, have brought unmatched qualifications to its resolution. If we can judge by the increased passion in discussions that are usually held with the calmness of judges rather than the fervor of advocates, it seems that the essential questions of our existence, our true nobility, and our origins, whether heavenly or earthly, despite being unrelated to what is typically deemed practical, still hold a unique allure—a charm that will never fade from the minds and hearts of people. Now, despite advances in defining the boundaries of the animal kingdom, where at one point it appeared that the distinction between animals and humans hinged on a mere fold in the brain, there remains one barrier that has yet to be challenged—the barrier of language. Even those philosophers who argue that thinking is feeling, asserting that all thought boils down to feeling, and claim that we share the faculties that generate thought with animals, must admit that so far no animal species has developed a language. Lord Monboddo, for instance, acknowledges that no animal has yet been found to possess language, “Not even the beaver, which among all the animals we know—aside from orangutans, who are of our own species—comes closest to us in intelligence.”

Locke, who is generally classed together with these materialistic philosophers, and who certainly vindicated a large share of what had been claimed for the intellect as the property of the senses, recognized most fully the barrier which language, as such, placed between man and brutes. “This I may be positive in,” he writes, “that the power of abstracting is not at all in brutes, and that the having of general ideas is that which puts a perfect distinction between man and brutes. For it is evident we observe no footsteps in these of making use of general signs for universal ideas; from which we have reason to imagine that they have not the faculty of abstracting or making general ideas, since they have no use of words or any other general signs.”

Locke, who is generally grouped with these materialistic philosophers and who definitely defended a significant part of what had been attributed to the intellect as the domain of the senses, fully acknowledged the barrier that language, in itself, created between humans and animals. "I can say this for sure," he writes, “the ability to think abstractly is completely non-existent in animals, and having general ideas is what clearly sets humans apart from animals. It’s evident that we see no evidence of them using general signs for universal ideas; from this, we can reasonably conclude that they lack the ability to think abstractly or form general ideas since they do not use words or any other general signs.”

If, therefore, the science of language gives us an insight into that which, by common consent, distinguishes man from all other living beings; if it establishes a frontier between man and the brute, which can never be removed, it would seem to possess at the present moment peculiar claims on the attention of all who, while watching with sincere admiration the progress of comparative physiology, yet consider it their duty to enter their manly protest against a revival of the shallow theories of Lord Monboddo.

If the study of language provides us with a clear understanding of what, by general agreement, sets humans apart from all other living beings; if it creates a boundary between humans and animals that can never be crossed, it seems to demand the attention of everyone who, while genuinely admiring the advancements in comparative physiology, also feels it necessary to strongly oppose the return of the simplistic ideas put forth by Lord Monboddo.

But to return to our survey of the history of the physical sciences. We had examined the empirical stage through which every science has to pass. We saw that, for instance, in botany, a man who has [pg 025] travelled through distant countries, who has collected a vast number of plants, who knows their names, their peculiarities, and their medicinal qualities, is not yet a botanist, but only a herbalist, a lover of plants, or what the Italians call a dilettante, from dilettare, to delight. The real science of plants, like every other science, begins with the work of classification. An empirical acquaintance with facts rises to a scientific knowledge of facts as soon as the mind discovers beneath the multiplicity of single productions the unity of an organic system. This discovery is made by means of comparison and classification. We cease to study each flower for its own sake; and by continually enlarging the sphere of our observation, we try to discover what is common to many and offers those essential points on which groups or natural classes may be established. These classes again, in their more general features, are mutually compared; new points of difference, or of similarity of a more general and higher character, spring to view, and enable us to discover classes of classes, or families. And when the whole kingdom of plants has thus been surveyed, and a simple tissue of names been thrown over the garden of nature; when we can lift it up, as it were, and view it in our mind as a whole, as a system well defined and complete, we then speak of the science of plants, or botany. We have entered into altogether a new sphere of knowledge where the individual is subject to the general, fact to law; we discover thought, order, and purpose pervading the whole realm of nature, and we perceive the dark chaos of matter lighted up by the reflection of a divine mind. Such views may be right or wrong. [pg 026] Too hasty comparisons, or too narrow distinctions, may have prevented the eye of the observer from discovering the broad outlines of nature's plan. Yet every system, however insufficient it may prove hereafter, is a step in advance. If the mind of man is once impressed with the conviction that there must be order and law everywhere, it never rests again until all that seems irregular has been eliminated, until the full beauty and harmony of nature has been perceived, and the eye of man has caught the eye of God beaming out from the midst of all His works. The failures of the past prepare the triumphs of the future.

But to get back to our overview of the history of the physical sciences. We had looked at the empirical stage that every science has to go through. We noted that, for example, in botany, a person who has traveled to distant places, collected numerous plants, knows their names, their unique traits, and their medicinal uses, is not yet a botanist, but merely a herbalist, a plant enthusiast, or what the Italians refer to as a dabbler, from dilettante, meaning to delight. The true science of plants, like any other science, starts with the work of classification. An empirical understanding of facts evolves into scientific knowledge when the mind identifies the unity of an organic system beneath the variety of individual occurrences. This realization is achieved through comparison and classification. We stop studying each flower for its own sake; instead, by consistently expanding our observations, we aim to identify commonalities that highlight the essential aspects on which groups or natural classes can be formed. These classes can then be compared in broader terms; new points of difference or broader similarities emerge, allowing us to form classes of classes, or families. Once the entire kingdom of plants has been explored, and a simple structure of names is laid over nature's garden; when we can conceptualize it as a whole, as a clearly defined and complete system, we then refer to it as the science of plants or botany. We have entered a completely new realm of knowledge where the individual is subject to the general, and fact is subject to law; we find thought, order, and purpose permeating the entire natural world, and we see the chaotic mass of matter illuminated by the reflection of a divine mind. These perspectives may be right or wrong. Too hurried comparisons, or overly specific distinctions, may have blocked the observer's vision from seeing the broad strokes of nature's design. However, every system, even if it turns out to be inadequate later, represents a step forward. Once the human mind is convinced that there must be order and law everywhere, it will not rest until all that seems irregular is understood, until the full beauty and harmony of nature are recognized, and humanity perceives the gaze of God shining through all His creations. The setbacks of the past set the stage for the successes of the future.

Thus, to recur to our former illustration, the systematic arrangement of plants which bears the name of Linnæus, and which is founded on the number and character of the reproductive organs, failed to bring out the natural order which pervades all that grows and blossoms. Broad lines of demarcation which unite or divide large tribes and families of plants were invisible from his point of view. But in spite of this, his work was not in vain. The fact that plants in every part of the world belonged to one great system was established once for all; and even in later systems most of his classes and divisions have been preserved, because the conformation of the reproductive organs of plants happened to run parallel with other more characteristic marks of true affinity.10 It is the same in the history of astronomy. Although the Ptolemæan system was a wrong one, yet even from its eccentric [pg 027] point of view, laws were discovered determining the true movements of the heavenly bodies. The conviction that there remains something unexplained is sure to lead to the discovery of our error. There can be no error in nature; the error must be with us. This conviction lived in the heart of Aristotle when, in spite of his imperfect knowledge of nature, he declared “that there is in nature nothing interpolated or without connection, as in a bad tragedy;” and from his time forward every new fact and every new system have confirmed his faith.

So, to return to our earlier example, the organized classification of plants known as Linnaeus's system, which is based on the number and nature of their reproductive organs, failed to reveal the natural order that exists in all living things. The clear divisions that connect or separate large groups and families of plants were not visible from his perspective. However, his efforts were not wasted. It was established that plants worldwide belong to one overarching system, and even in later classifications, many of his categories and divisions have been maintained because the structure of plant reproductive organs coincided with other significant features of true relationships. The same applies to the history of astronomy. Although the Ptolemaic system was incorrect, it still provided insights that revealed the actual movements of celestial bodies. The belief that there is still something unknown will inevitably lead to the realization of our mistakes. Nature cannot be wrong; the error must lie with us. This belief resonated in Aristotle's heart when he stated, despite his limited understanding of nature, that “there is in nature nothing interpolated or without connection, as in a bad tragedy;” and since then, each new discovery and system has supported his conviction.

The object of classification is clear. We understand things if we can comprehend them; that is to say, if we can grasp and hold together single facts, connect isolated impressions, distinguish between what is essential and what is merely accidental, and thus predicate the general of the individual, and class the individual under the general. This is the secret of all scientific knowledge. Many sciences, while passing through this second or classificatory stage, assume the title of comparative. When the anatomist has finished the dissection of numerous bodies, when he has given names to each organ, and discovered the distinctive functions of each, he is led to perceive similarity where at first he saw dissimilarity only. He discovers in the lower animals rudimentary indications of the more perfect organization of the higher; and he becomes impressed with the conviction that there is in the animal kingdom the same order and purpose which pervades the endless variety of plants or any other realm of nature. He learns, if he did not know it before, that things were not created at random or in a lump, but that there is a scale which leads, by imperceptible degrees, from the [pg 028] lowest infusoria to the crowning work of nature,—man; that all is the manifestation of one and the same unbroken chain of creative thought, the work of one and the same all-wise Creator.

The purpose of classification is straightforward. We understand things when we can comprehend them; in other words, if we can grasp and connect individual facts, relate isolated impressions, and differentiate between what's essential and what's just incidental. This allows us to apply general principles to individual cases and categorize individuals under these principles. This is the essence of all scientific knowledge. Many fields of study, when in this second or classificatory phase, take on the label of comparative science. When an anatomist completes the dissection of several bodies, gives names to each organ, and identifies the distinct functions of each, they begin to see similarities where they initially perceived differences. They find in lower animals basic indicators of the more advanced structures found in higher forms of life, leading them to believe that there is a shared order and purpose in the animal kingdom, akin to the immense diversity found in plants or any other part of nature. They realize, if they didn't know it already, that things weren't created randomly or haphazardly, but rather that there is a continuum that smoothly transitions from the simplest microorganisms to the pinnacle of nature—humans; that everything reflects a single, unbroken chain of creative thought, the work of one all-wise Creator.

In this way the second or classificatory leads us naturally to the third or final stage—the theoretical, or metaphysical. If the work of classification is properly carried out, it teaches us that nothing exists in nature by accident; that each individual belongs to a species, each species to a genus; and that there are laws which underlie the apparent freedom and variety of all created things. These laws indicate to us the presence of a purpose in the mind of the Creator; and whereas the material world was looked upon by ancient philosophers as a mere illusion, as an agglomerate of atoms, or as the work of an evil principle, we now read and interpret its pages as the revelation of a divine power, and wisdom, and love. This has given to the study of nature a new character. After the observer has collected his facts, and after the classifier has placed them in order, the student asks what is the origin and what is the meaning of all this? and he tries to soar, by means of induction, or sometimes even of divination, into regions not accessible to the mere collector. In this attempt the mind of man no doubt has frequently met with the fate of Phaeton; but, undismayed by failure, he asks again and again for his father's steeds. It has been said that this so-called philosophy of nature has never achieved anything; that it has done nothing but prove that things must be exactly as they had been found to be by the observer and collector. Physical science, however, would never have been what it is without the impulses which [pg 029] it received from the philosopher, nay even from the poet. “At the limits of exact knowledge” (I quote the words of Humboldt), “as from a lofty island-shore, the eye loves to glance towards distant regions. The images which it sees may be illusive; but, like the illusive images which people imagined they had seen from the Canaries or the Azores, long before the time of Columbus, they may lead to the discovery of a new world.”

In this way, the second or classificatory stage naturally leads us to the third and final stage—the theoretical or metaphysical. When the classification work is done properly, it reveals that nothing exists in nature by accident; each individual belongs to a species, each species to a genus; and there are laws that underlie the apparent freedom and variety of all created things. These laws indicate the presence of a purpose in the mind of the Creator; while ancient philosophers viewed the material world as merely an illusion, a collection of atoms, or the result of an evil principle, we now understand and interpret it as a revelation of divine power, wisdom, and love. This perspective has given the study of nature a new character. After the observer collects facts, and the classifier organizes them, the student seeks to understand the origin and meaning of all this and attempts to reach beyond simple observation through induction or even intuition into areas that are not accessible to the mere collector. In this effort, humanity has often faced failure, much like Phaeton; but undeterred, we keep asking for our father's steeds. It has been said that this so-called philosophy of nature has never accomplished anything and that it merely confirms that things must be exactly as the observer and collector found them. However, physical science would never have developed into its current state without the inspiration it received from philosophers, and even from poets. [pg 029] Humboldt suggested that “at the limits of exact knowledge, as from a lofty island shore, the eye loves to glance towards distant regions. The images it sees may be illusory; but, like the imagined illusions seen from the Canaries or the Azores long before Columbus, they may lead to the discovery of a new world.”

Copernicus, in the dedication of his work to Pope Paul III. (it was commenced in 1517, finished 1530, published 1543), confesses that he was brought to the discovery of the sun's central position, and of the diurnal motion of the earth, not by observation or analysis, but by what he calls the feeling of a want of symmetry in the Ptolemaic system. But who had told him that there must be symmetry in all the movements of the celestial bodies, or that complication was not more sublime than simplicity? Symmetry and simplicity, before they were discovered by the observer, were postulated by the philosopher. The first idea of revolutionizing the heavens was suggested to Copernicus, as he tells us himself, by an ancient Greek philosopher, by Philolaus, the Pythagorean. No doubt with Philolaus the motion of the earth was only a guess, or, if you like, a happy intuition. Nevertheless, if we may trust the words of Copernicus, it is quite possible that without that guess we should never have heard of the Copernican system. Truth is not found by addition and multiplication only. When speaking of Kepler, whose method of reasoning has been considered as unsafe and fantastic by his contemporaries as well as by later astronomers, Sir David Brewster remarks very [pg 030] truly, “that, as an instrument of research, the influence of imagination has been much overlooked by those who have ventured to give laws to philosophy.” The torch of imagination is as necessary to him who looks for truth, as the lamp of study. Kepler held both, and more than that, he had the star of faith to guide him in all things from darkness to light.

Copernicus, in the introduction of his work to Pope Paul III (which he began in 1517, finished in 1530, and published in 1543), admits that he arrived at the idea of the sun being at the center and the earth's daily rotation, not through observation or analysis, but from a sense of something lacking in symmetry within the Ptolemaic system. But who taught him that there must be symmetry in all celestial movements, or that complexity isn’t more elegant than simplicity? Symmetry and simplicity were assumed by philosophers before they were recognized by observers. The initial thought of changing our understanding of the heavens came to Copernicus, as he himself said, from an ancient Greek philosopher, Philolaus the Pythagorean. It's likely that for Philolaus, the earth's motion was merely a conjecture, or, if you prefer, a fortunate instinct. Nonetheless, if we can trust Copernicus's words, it's quite possible that without that intuition, we might never have known about the Copernican system. Truth isn’t found solely through addition and multiplication. When discussing Kepler, whose reasoning methods were deemed unreliable and fanciful by both his contemporaries and later astronomers, Sir David Brewster points out, "as a tool for research, the impact of imagination has largely been neglected by those who have tried to establish rules for philosophy." The light of imagination is just as essential for someone seeking truth as the lamp of study. Kepler possessed both, and more importantly, he had the guiding star of faith to lead him from darkness to light.

In the history of the physical sciences, the three stages which we have just described as the empirical, the classificatory, and the theoretical, appear generally in chronological order. I say, generally, for there have been instances, as in the case just quoted of Philolaus, where the results properly belonging to the third have been anticipated in the first stage. To the quick eye of genius one case may be like a thousand, and one experiment, well chosen, may lead to the discovery of an absolute law. Besides, there are great chasms in the history of science. The tradition of generations is broken by political or ethnic earthquakes, and the work that was nearly finished has frequently had to be done again from the beginning, when a new surface had been formed for the growth of a new civilization. The succession, however, of these three stages is no doubt the natural one, and it is very properly observed in the study of every science. The student of botany begins as a collector of plants. Taking each plant by itself, he observes its peculiar character, its habitat, its proper season, its popular or unscientific name. He learns to distinguish between the roots, the stem, the leaves, the flower, the calyx, the stamina, and pistils. He learns, so to say, the practical grammar of the plant before he can begin to compare, to arrange, and classify.

In the history of the physical sciences, the three stages we've just described—the empirical, the classificatory, and the theoretical—generally appear in chronological order. I say "generally" because there have been cases, like the one mentioned about Philolaus, where results typically associated with the third stage have emerged in the first stage. To a brilliant mind, one example can seem like a thousand, and a single well-chosen experiment can lead to the discovery of a fundamental law. Moreover, there are significant gaps in the history of science. The tradition of generations can be disrupted by political or cultural upheavals, and work that was almost complete has often had to restart from scratch when a new foundation was laid for the development of a new civilization. However, the sequence of these three stages is undoubtedly the natural progression, and it's appropriately acknowledged in the study of every science. A botany student begins as a plant collector. Examining each plant individually, he notes its unique features, habitat, appropriate season, and its common or non-scientific name. He learns to differentiate between the roots, stem, leaves, flower, calyx, stamens, and pistils. Essentially, he masters the practical basics of plants before he can start comparing, organizing, and classifying them.

[pg 031]

Again, no one can enter with advantage on the third stage of any physical science without having passed through the second. No one can study the plant, no one can understand the bearing of such a work as, for instance, Professor Schleiden's “Life of the Plant,”11 who has not studied the life of plants in the wonderful variety, and in the still more wonderful order, of nature. These last and highest achievements of inductive philosophy are possible only after the way has been cleared by previous classification. The philosopher must command his classes like regiments which obey the order of their general. Thus alone can the battle be fought and truth be conquered.

Again, no one can move forward with an advantage on the third level of any physical science without having gone through the second. No one can study the plant, nor can anyone grasp the significance of a work like Professor Schleiden's “Life of the Plant”11 if they haven't studied the life of plants in the incredible variety and even more amazing order found in nature. These final and highest accomplishments of inductive philosophy are only possible after prior classification has paved the way. The philosopher must lead their classes like regiments that follow the commands of their general. Only in this way can the battle be fought and truth be won.

After this rapid glance at the history of the other physical sciences, we now return to our own, the science of language, in order to see whether it really is a science, and whether it can be brought back to the standard of the inductive sciences. We want to know whether it has passed, or is still passing, through the three phases of physical research; whether its progress has been systematic or desultory, whether its method has been appropriate or not. But before we do this, we shall, I think, have to do something else. You may have observed that I always took it for granted that the science of language, which is best known in this country by the name of comparative philology, is one of the physical sciences, and that therefore its method ought to be the same as that which has been followed with so much success in botany, geology, anatomy, and other branches of the study of nature. In the history of the physical sciences, however, we look in vain for a place assigned to comparative philology, and [pg 032] its very name would seem to show that it belongs to quite a different sphere of human knowledge. There are two great divisions of human knowledge, which, according to their subject-matter, are called physical and historical. Physical science deals with the works of God, historical science with the works of man. Now if we were to judge by its name, comparative philology, like classical philology, would seem to take rank, not as a physical, but as an historical science, and the proper method to be applied to it would be that which is followed in the history of art, of law, of politics, and religion. However, the title of comparative philology must not be allowed to mislead us. It is difficult to say by whom that title was invented; but all that can be said in defence of it is, that the founders of the science of language were chiefly scholars or philologists, and that they based their inquiries into the nature and laws of language on a comparison of as many facts as they could collect within their own special spheres of study. Neither in Germany, which may well be called the birthplace of this science, nor in France, where it has been cultivated with brilliant success, has that title been adopted. It will not be difficult to show that, although the science of language owes much to the classical scholar, and though in return it has proved of great use to him, yet comparative philology has really nothing whatever in common with philology in the usual meaning of the word. Philology, whether classical or oriental, whether treating of ancient or modern, of cultivated or barbarous languages, is an historical science. Language is here treated simply as a means. The classical scholar uses Greek or Latin, the oriental scholar Hebrew or Sanskrit, [pg 033] or any other language, as a key to an understanding of the literary monuments which by-gone ages have bequeathed to us, as a spell to raise from the tomb of time the thoughts of great men in different ages and different countries, and as a means ultimately to trace the social, moral, intellectual, and religious progress of the human race. In the same manner, if we study living languages, it is not for their own sake that we acquire grammars and vocabularies. We do so on account of their practical usefulness. We use them as letters of introduction to the best society or to the best literature of the leading nations of Europe. In comparative philology the case is totally different. In the science of language, languages are not treated as a means; language itself becomes the sole object of scientific inquiry. Dialects which have never produced any literature at all, the jargons of savage tribes, the clicks of the Hottentots, and the vocal modulations of the Indo-Chinese are as important, nay, for the solution of some of our problems, more important, than the poetry of Homer, or the prose of Cicero. We do not want to know languages, we want to know language; what language is, how it can form a vehicle or an organ of thought; we want to know its origin, its nature, its laws; and it is only in order to arrive at that knowledge that we collect, arrange, and classify all the facts of language that are within our reach.

After this quick look at the history of other physical sciences, we now turn back to our own— the science of language— to see if it truly is a science and whether it can be held to the same standards as the inductive sciences. We want to determine if it has gone through, or is still going through, the three phases of physical research; whether its progress has been systematic or random, and whether its methods have been suitable or not. However, before we delve into that, I think we need to address something else first. You may have noticed that I have always assumed that the science of language, commonly referred to in this country as comparative philology, is one of the physical sciences, and thus it should follow the same methods that have been successfully applied in fields like botany, geology, anatomy, and other areas of natural study. Yet, in the history of physical sciences, we find no designated place for comparative philology, and its very name suggests it belongs to a different domain of human knowledge. There are two main divisions of human knowledge that are classified by their subject matter: physical and historic. Physical science studies the works of God, while historical science studies the works of man. If we go by its name, comparative philology, much like classical philology, would seem to rank as an historical science rather than a physical one, and the appropriate methods would be similar to those used in the history of art, law, politics, and religion. However, we shouldn’t let the name of comparative philology confuse us. It's hard to say who invented that title; all that can be defended about it is that the founders of the science of language were mainly scholars or philologists, and they based their investigations into the nature and laws of language on comparing as many facts as they could gather within their respective fields of study. Neither Germany, which is rightly considered the birthplace of this science, nor France, where it has been successfully developed, has adopted that title. It’s not hard to show that while the science of language owes a lot to classical scholars and has been of great use to them, comparative philology really has nothing in common with the typical idea of philology. Whether classical or oriental, focusing on ancient or modern, cultivated or primitive languages, philology is an historical science. In this context, language is simply a tool. The classical scholar uses Greek or Latin, the oriental scholar uses Hebrew or Sanskrit, or any other language, as a key to unlock the literary treasures passed down to us from previous ages, as a means to resurrect the thoughts of great individuals from various times and places, ultimately to trace the social, moral, intellectual, and religious progression of humanity. Similarly, when we study living languages, we don’t learn grammars and vocabularies just for the sake of learning; we do it for their practical usefulness. We use them as introductions to the best societies or the finest literature of leading European nations. In comparative philology, however, the situation is completely different. In the science of language, languages are not seen merely as a tool; language itself becomes the central focus of scientific investigation. Dialects that have never produced any literature at all, the languages of tribal groups, the clicks of the Hottentots, and the tones of the Indo-Chinese are just as significant, if not more crucial for solving certain problems, than the poetry of Homer or the prose of Cicero. We don’t just want to know languages; we want to understand language itself— what it is, how it can serve as a vehicle or an organ of thought; we want to explore its origin, its nature, its laws; and it is only to gain that understanding that we gather, organize, and classify all the language facts we can find.

And here I must protest, at the very outset of these lectures, against the supposition that the student of language must necessarily be a great linguist. I shall have to speak to you in the course of these lectures of hundreds of languages, some of which, perhaps, you may never have heard mentioned even by name. Do [pg 034] not suppose that I know these languages as you know Greek or Latin, French or German. In that sense I know indeed very few languages, and I never aspired to the fame of a Mithridates or a Mezzofanti. It is impossible for a student of language to acquire a practical knowledge of all tongues with which he has to deal. He does not wish to speak the Kachikal language, of which a professorship was lately founded in the University of Guatemala,12 or to acquire the elegancies of the idiom of the Tcheremissians; nor is it his ambition to explore the literature of the Samoyedes, or the New-Zealanders. It is the grammar and the dictionary which form the subject of his inquiries. These he consults and subjects to a careful analysis, but he does not encumber his memory with paradigms of nouns and verbs, or with long lists of words which have never been used in any work of literature. It is true, no doubt, that no language will unveil the whole of its wonderful structure except to the scholar who has studied it thoroughly and critically in a number of literary works representing the various periods of its growth. Nevertheless, short lists of vocables, and imperfect sketches of a grammar, are in many instances all that the student can expect to obtain, or can hope to master and to use for the purposes he has in view. He must learn to make the best of this fragmentary information, like the comparative anatomist, who frequently learns his lessons from the smallest fragments of fossil bones, or the vague pictures of animals brought home by unscientific travellers. If it were necessary for the comparative philologist to acquire a critical or practical acquaintance with all the [pg 035] languages which form the subject of his inquiries, the science of language would simply be an impossibility. But we do not expect the botanist to be an experienced gardener, or the geologist a miner, or the ichthyologist a practical fisherman. Nor would it be reasonable to object in the science of language to the same division of labor which is necessary for the successful cultivation of subjects much less comprehensive. Though much of what we might call the realm of language is lost to us forever, though whole periods in the history of language are by necessity withdrawn from our observation, yet the mass of human speech that lies before us, whether in the petrified strata of ancient literature or in the countless variety of living languages and dialects, offers a field as large, if not larger, than any other branch of physical research. It is impossible to fix the exact number of known languages, but their number can hardly be less than nine hundred. That this vast field should never have excited the curiosity of the natural philosopher before the beginning of our century may seem surprising, more surprising even than the indifference with which former generations treated the lessons which even the stones seemed to teach of the life still throbbing in the veins and on the very surface of the earth. The saying that "familiarity breeds contempt" would seem applicable to the subjects of both these sciences. The gravel of our walks hardly seemed to deserve a scientific treatment, and the language which every plough-boy can speak could not be raised without an effort to the dignity of a scientific problem. Man had studied every part of nature, the mineral treasures in the bowels of the earth, the flowers of each season, the [pg 036] animals of every continent, the laws of storms, and the movements of the heavenly bodies; he had analyzed every substance, dissected every organism, he knew every bone and muscle, every nerve and fibre of his own body to the ultimate elements which compose his flesh and blood; he had meditated on the nature of his soul, on the laws of his mind, and tried to penetrate into the last causes of all being—and yet language, without the aid of which not even the first step in this glorious career could have been made, remained unnoticed. Like a veil that hung too close over the eye of the human mind, it was hardly perceived. In an age when the study of antiquity attracted the most energetic minds, when the ashes of Pompeii were sifted for the playthings of Roman life; when parchments were made to disclose, by chemical means, the erased thoughts of Grecian thinkers; when the tombs of Egypt were ransacked for their sacred contents, and the palaces of Babylon and Nineveh forced to surrender the clay diaries of Nebuchadnezzar; when everything, in fact, that seemed to contain a vestige of the early life of man was anxiously searched for and carefully preserved in our libraries and museums,—language, which in itself carries us back far beyond the cuneiform literature of Assyria and Babylonia, and the hieroglyphic documents of Egypt; which connects ourselves, through an unbroken chain of speech, with the very ancestors of our race, and still draws its life from the first utterances of the human mind,—language, the living and speaking witness of the whole history of our race, was never cross-examined by the student of history, was never made to disclose its secrets until questioned and, so to say, brought back to itself within [pg 037] the last fifty years, by the genius of a Humboldt, Bopp, Grimm, Bunsen, and others. If you consider that, whatever view we take of the origin and dispersion of language, nothing new has ever been added to the substance of language, that all its changes have been changes of form, that no new root or radical has ever been invented by later generations, as little as one single element has ever been added to the material world in which we live; if you bear in mind that in one sense, and in a very just sense, we may be said to handle the very words which issued from the mouth of the son of God, when he gave names to “all cattle, and to the fowl of the air, and to every beast of the field,” you will see, I believe, that the science of language has claims on your attention, such as few sciences can rival or excel.

And here I need to say right at the start of these lectures that the idea that someone studying language must be a great linguist is incorrect. Throughout these lectures, I will discuss hundreds of languages, some of which you might not have even heard of by name. Don't think that I know these languages the way you know Greek, Latin, French, or German. In that sense, I know very few languages, and I never aimed to be famous like Mithridates or Mezzofanti. It’s impossible for a student of language to gain practical knowledge of every language he encounters. He doesn’t want to speak Kachikal, the language for which a professorship was recently created at the University of Guatemala, or to master the intricacies of the Tcheremissian language; nor is he eager to explore the literature of the Samoyedes or New Zealanders. It’s the grammar and dictionaries that are the focus of his studies. He carefully analyzes these, but he doesn't burden his memory with endless paradigms of nouns and verbs, or with long lists of words that have never appeared in any literary work. It’s true that no language reveals its full and intricate structure except to a scholar who has thoroughly and critically studied it through various literary works from different periods of its development. Still, often, short vocabulary lists and basic grammar sketches are all a student can reasonably expect or manage for his goals. He has to learn to make the most of this limited information, similar to a comparative anatomist who often learns from just tiny fragments of fossil bones or vague pictures of animals brought back by non-scientific travelers. If the comparative philologist had to gain deep or practical knowledge of all the languages he studies, then the science of language would simply be impossible to pursue. But we don’t expect a botanist to be an experienced gardener, or a geologist to be a miner, or an ichthyologist to be a practical fisherman. It wouldn’t be fair to criticize the field of language for lacking the same division of labor seen in the successful study of subjects that are much less comprehensive. Although much of what we could consider the realm of language is lost to us forever, and entire periods of language history are forever out of reach, the wealth of human speech available to us, whether in the preserved layers of ancient literature or in the vast diversity of living languages and dialects, presents a field that is as extensive, if not more so, than any other realm of physical research. While it’s tough to pinpoint the exact number of known languages, it’s certainly not less than nine hundred. It might seem surprising that this vast field had never piqued the interest of natural philosophers until the beginning of our century, even more surprising than the indifference that previous generations showed toward the insights even stones seemed to offer about the vibrant life still present in the Earth. The saying "familiarity breeds contempt" seems applicable to both of these fields. The gravel along our paths didn’t appear worthy of scientific study, and the language spoken by every laborer seemed unworthy of being elevated to a scientific inquiry. Humans have studied every aspect of nature, from the mineral treasures beneath the Earth’s surface, to seasonal flowers, to the animals across every continent, to the laws of storms, and the movements of celestial bodies; they’ve analyzed every material, dissected every living organism, and have come to know every bone, muscle, nerve, and fiber of their own bodies down to the fundamental elements composing their being; they’ve reflected on the nature of the soul, the laws governing the mind, and attempted to grasp the ultimate reasons for all existence—and yet language, without which no advancement in this grand pursuit could have been achieved, went unexamined. It was like a veil hanging too closely over the eye of humanity, hardly recognized. In an era when the study of the past captured the most energetic minds, when the ashes of Pompeii were sifted for clues about Roman life; when parchment was chemically treated to reveal erased thoughts of Greek philosophers; when Egyptian tombs were looted for their sacred relics, and the palaces of Babylon and Nineveh were forced to reveal the clay records of Nebuchadnezzar; in times like these, when every scrap of early human life seemed eagerly pursued and preserved in our libraries and museums—language, which itself takes us back well beyond the cuneiform texts of Assyria and Babylonia and the hieroglyphs of Egypt; which links us, through an unbroken chain of speech, to the very ancestors of our species, drawing from the initial words of the human mind—language, this living testament to the entire history of our race, was never rigorously questioned by historians, never asked to reveal its mysteries until just the last fifty years with the brilliance of scholars like Humboldt, Bopp, Grimm, Bunsen, and others. If you consider that no matter what perspective we adopt regarding the origin and spread of language, nothing new has ever been added to its substance, that all transformation has been in form rather than in new roots or elements introduced by later generations, just as no new element has ever been introduced into the material world we inhabit; if you acknowledge that in some sense—and a very valid sense—we might be said to handle the very words that came from the mouth of the Son of God when he named "all livestock, the birds in the sky, and every wild animal in the field," you will likely see that the science of language deserves your attention like few other sciences can claim.

Having thus explained the manner in which I intend to treat the science of language, I hope in my next lecture to examine the objections of those philosophers who see in language nothing but a contrivance devised by human skill for the more expeditious communication of our thoughts, and who would wish to see it treated, not as a production of nature, but as a work of human art.

Having explained how I plan to approach the study of language, I hope that in my next lecture, I can address the critiques from those philosophers who view language merely as a tool created by humans for quicker communication of our thoughts. They believe it should be considered not as a natural phenomenon, but as a human-made creation.

[pg 038]

Lecture II. The Development of Language Compared to the History of Language.

In claiming for the science of language a place among the physical sciences, I was prepared to meet with many objections. The circle of the physical sciences seemed closed, and it was not likely that a new claimant should at once be welcomed among the established branches and scions of the ancient aristocracy of learning.13

In asserting that language science deserves recognition alongside the physical sciences, I was ready to face numerous objections. The realm of physical sciences appeared to be complete, and it wasn’t likely that a new contender would be accepted right away among the longstanding branches and offshoots of the traditional elite of knowledge.13

[pg 039]

The first objection which was sure to be raised on the part of such sciences as botany, geology, or physiology is this:—Language is the work of man; it was invented by man as a means of communicating his thoughts, when mere looks and gestures proved inefficient; and it was gradually, by the combined efforts of succeeding generations, brought to that perfection which we admire in the idiom of the Bible, the Vedas, the Koran, and in the poetry of Homer, Virgil, Dante, and Shakespeare. Now it is perfectly true that if language be the work of man, in the same sense in which a statue, or a temple, or a poem, or a law are properly called the works of man, the science of language would have to be classed as an historical science. We should have a history of language as we have a history of art, of poetry, and of jurisprudence, but we could not claim for it a place side by side with the various branches of Natural History. It is true, also, that if you consult the works of the most distinguished modern philosophers you will find that whenever they speak of language, they take it for granted that language is a human invention, that words are artificial signs, and that the varieties of human speech arose from different nations agreeing on different sounds as the most appropriate signs of their different ideas. This view of the origin of language was so powerfully advocated by the leading philosophers of the last century, that it has retained an undisputed currency even among those who, on almost every other point, are strongly opposed to the teaching of that school. A few voices, indeed, have been raised to protest against the theory of language being originally invented by man. But they, in their zeal to vindicate [pg 040] the divine origin of language, seem to have been carried away so far as to run counter to the express statements of the Bible. For in the Bible it is not the Creator who gives names to all things, but Adam. “Out of the ground,” we read, “the Lord God formed every beast of the field, and every fowl of the air; and brought them unto Adam to see what he would call them: and whatsoever Adam called every living creature, that was the name thereof.”14 But with the exception of this small class of philosophers, more orthodox even than the Bible,15 the generally received opinion on the origin of language is that which was held by Locke, which was powerfully advocated by Adam Smith in his Essay on the Origin of Language, appended to his Treatise on Moral Sentiments, and which was adopted with slight modifications by Dugald Stewart. According to them, man must have lived for a time in a state of mutism, his only means of communication consisting in gestures of the body, and in the changes of countenance, till at last, when ideas multiplied that could no longer be pointed at with the fingers, “they found it necessary to invent artificial signs of which the meaning was [pg 041] fixed by mutual agreement.” We need not dwell on minor differences of opinion as to the exact process by which this artificial language is supposed to have been formed. Adam Smith would wish us to believe that the first artificial words were verbs. Nouns, he thinks, were of less urgent necessity because things could be pointed at or imitated, whereas mere actions, such as are expressed by verbs, could not. He therefore supposes that when people saw a wolf coming, they pointed at him, and simply cried out, “He comes.” Dugald Stewart, on the contrary, thinks that the first artificial words were nouns, and that the verbs were supplied by gesture; that, therefore, when people saw a wolf coming, they did not cry “He comes,” but “Wolf, Wolf,” leaving the rest to be imagined.16

The first objection likely to come from fields like botany, geology, or physiology is this:—Language is a human creation; it was invented by people as a way to communicate their thoughts when mere looks and gestures were insufficient. Over time, through the collaborative efforts of generations, it developed into the refined form we appreciate in the language of the Bible, the Vedas, the Koran, and in the poetry of Homer, Virgil, Dante, and Shakespeare. It's true that if we consider language to be a human creation, in the same way we consider a statue, a temple, a poem, or a law as human works, then the study of language must be categorized as a historical science. We would have a history of language like we have histories of art, poetry, and law, but we couldn’t assert its place alongside the various branches of Natural History. It is also true that when you look at the writings of the most prominent modern philosophers, you'll see that they assume language is a human invention, that words are artificial signs, and that the different forms of human speech developed because various nations agreed on different sounds as the best representations of their unique ideas. This perspective on the origin of language was vigorously promoted by the leading philosophers of the last century, causing it to remain widely accepted even among those who disagree strongly with that school's teachings on almost every other issue. Indeed, a few individuals have spoken out against the idea that language was originally invented by humans. However, in their eagerness to defend the divine origin of language, they seem to have strayed so far as to contradict the explicit statements in the Bible. The Bible states that it wasn't the Creator who named everything, but Adam. “Out of the ground,” we read, “the Lord God formed every beast of the field, and every fowl of the air; and brought them unto Adam to see what he would call them: and whatever Adam called every living creature, that was its name.” But aside from this small group of philosophers, even more orthodox than the Bible, the commonly accepted view on the origin of language aligns with what Locke believed, which was strongly supported by Adam Smith in his Essay on the Origin of Language, attached to his Treatise on Moral Sentiments, and was adopted with minor modifications by Dugald Stewart. According to them, humans must have lived for a period without speech, relying solely on gestures and facial expressions, until, when ideas became too complex to communicate using just pointing, “they found it necessary to invent artificial signs whose meanings were fixed by mutual agreement.” We need not focus on the minor disagreements about the specific process through which this artificial language is thought to have formed. Adam Smith would have us believe that the first artificial words were verbs. He thinks nouns were less essential because objects could be pointed to or mimicked, while actions expressed by verbs could not. He thus suggests that when people saw a wolf approaching, they pointed at it and simply exclaimed, “He comes.” Dugald Stewart, on the other hand, believes that the first artificial words were nouns and that verbs were conveyed through gestures; therefore, when people saw a wolf coming, they didn’t shout “He comes,” but rather “Wolf, Wolf,” leaving the rest to be inferred.

But whether the verb or the noun was the first to be invented is of little importance; nor is it possible for us, at the very beginning of our inquiry into the nature of language, to enter upon a minute examination of a theory which represents language as a work of human art, and as established by mutual agreement as a medium of communication. While fully admitting that if this theory were true, the science of language would not come within the pale of the physical sciences, I must content myself for the present with pointing out that no one has yet explained how, without language, a discussion on the merits of each word, such as must necessarily have preceded a mutual agreement, could have been carried on. But as it is the object of these lectures to prove that language is not a work of human art, in the same sense [pg 042] as painting, or building, or writing, or printing, I must ask to be allowed, in this preliminary stage, simply to enter my protest against a theory, which, though still taught in the schools, is, nevertheless, I believe, without a single fact to support its truth.

But whether the verb or the noun came first is not that important; it's also not possible for us, at the start of our exploration into the nature of language, to dive deeply into a theory that views language as a human creation established through mutual agreement to serve as a means of communication. While I completely acknowledge that if this theory were accurate, the study of language wouldn't fall under the realm of the physical sciences, I must currently settle for pointing out that no one has yet explained how, without language, a discussion about the merits of each word, which would have to have taken place before any mutual agreement, could have happened. However, since the goal of these lectures is to demonstrate that language is not a human creation in the same way that painting, building, writing, or printing is, I must ask to be allowed, at this early stage, to voice my disagreement with a theory that, although still taught in schools, I believe has no factual basis supporting its validity.

But there are other objections besides this which would seem to bar the admission of the science of language to the circle of the physical sciences. Whatever the origin of language may have been, it has been remarked with a strong appearance of truth, that language has a history of its own, like art, like law, like religion; and that, therefore, the science of language belongs to the circle of the historical, or, as they used to be called, the moral, in contradistinction to the physical sciences. It is a well-known fact, which recent researches have not shaken, that nature is incapable of progress or improvement. The flower which the botanist observes to-day was as perfect from the beginning. Animals, which are endowed with what is called an artistic instinct, have never brought that instinct to a higher degree of perfection. The hexagonal cells of the bee are not more regular in the nineteenth century than at any earlier period, and the gift of song has never, as far as we know, been brought to a higher perfection by our nightingale than by the Philomelo of the Greeks. “Natural History,” to quote Dr. Whewell's words,17 “when systematically treated, excludes all that is historical, for it classes objects by their permanent and universal properties, and has nothing to do with the narration of particular or casual facts.” Now, if we consider the large number of tongues spoken in different parts of [pg 043] the world with all their dialectic and provincial varieties, if we observe the great changes which each of these tongues has undergone in the course of centuries, how Latin was changed into Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Provençal, French, Wallachian, and Roumansch; how Latin again, together with Greek, and the Celtic, the Teutonic, and Slavonic languages, together likewise with the ancient dialects of India and Persia, must have sprung from an earlier language, the mother of the whole Indo-European or Aryan family of speech; if we see how Hebrew, Arabic, and Syriac, with several minor dialects, are but different impressions of one and the same common type, and must all have flowed from the same source, the original language of the Semitic race; and if we add to these two, the Aryan and Semitic, at least one more well-established class of languages, the Turanian, comprising the dialects of the nomad races scattered over Central and Northern Asia, the Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic,18 Samoyedic, and Finnic, all radii from one common centre of speech:—if we watch this stream of language rolling on through centuries in these three mighty arms, which, before they disappear from our sight in the far distance, clearly show a convergence towards one common source: it would seem, indeed, as if there were an historical life inherent in language, and as if both the will of man and the power of time could tell, if not on its substance, at least on its form. And even if the mere local varieties of speech were not considered sufficient ground for excluding language from the domain of natural science, there would still remain the greater [pg 044] difficulty of reconciling with the recognized principles of physical science the historical changes affecting every one of these varieties. Every part of nature, whether mineral, plant, or animal, is the same in kind from the beginning to the end of its existence, whereas few languages could be recognized as the same after the lapse of but a thousand years. The language of Alfred is so different from the English of the present day that we have to study it in the same manner as we study Greek and Latin. We can read Milton and Bacon, Shakespeare and Hooker; we can make out Wycliffe and Chaucer; but, when we come to the English of the thirteenth century, we can but guess its meaning, and we fail even in this with works previous to the Ormulum and Layamon. The historical changes of language may be more or less rapid, but they take place at all times and in all countries. They have reduced the rich and powerful idiom of the poets of the Veda to the meagre and impure jargon of the modern Sepoy. They have transformed the language of the Zend-Avesta and of the mountain records of Behistún into that of Firdusi and the modern Persians; the language of Virgil into that of Dante, the language of Ulfilas into that of Charlemagne, the language of Charlemagne into that of Goethe. We have reason to believe that the same changes take place with even greater violence and rapidity in the dialects of savage tribes, although, in the absence of a written literature, it is extremely difficult to obtain trustworthy information. But in the few instances where careful observations have been made on this interesting subject, it has been found that among the wild and illiterate tribes of Siberia, Africa, and Siam, two or three generations are [pg 045] sufficient to change the whole aspect of their dialects. The languages of highly civilized nations, on the contrary, become more and more stationary, and seem sometimes almost to lose their power of change. Where there is a classical literature, and where its language is spread to every town and village, it seems almost impossible that any further changes should take place. Nevertheless, the language of Rome, for so many centuries the queen of the whole civilized world, was deposed by the modern Romance dialects, and the ancient Greek was supplanted in the end by the modern Romaic. And though the art of printing and the wide diffusion of Bibles, and Prayer-books, and newspapers have acted as still more powerful barriers to arrest the constant flow of human speech, we may see that the language of the authorized version of the Bible, though perfectly intelligible, is no longer the spoken language of England. In Booker's Scripture and Prayer-book Glossary19 the number of words or senses of words which have become obsolete since 1611, amount to 388, or nearly one fifteenth part of the whole number of words used in the Bible. Smaller changes, changes of accent and meaning, the reception of new, and the dropping of old words, we may watch as taking place under our own eyes. Rogers20 said that cóntemplate is bad enough, but bálcony makes me sick,” whereas at present no one is startled by cóntemplate instead of contémplate, and bálcony has become more usual than balcóny. Thus Roome and chaney, layloc and goold, have but lately been driven from the stage by Rome, china, [pg 046] lilac, and gold, and some courteous gentlemen of the old school still continue to be obleeged instead of being obliged. Force,21 in the sense of a waterfall, and gill, in the sense of a rocky ravine, were not used in classical English before Wordsworth. Handbook,22 though an old Anglo-Saxon word, has but lately taken the place of manual, and a number of words such as cab for cabriolet, buss for omnibus, and even a verb such as to shunt tremble still on the boundary line between the vulgar and the literary idioms. Though the grammatical changes that have taken place since the publication of the authorized version are yet fewer in number, still we may point out some. The termination of the third person singular in th is now entirely replaced by s. No one now says he liveth, but only he lives. Several of the irregular imperfects and participles have assumed a new form. No one now uses he spake, and he drave, instead of he spoke, and he drove; holpen is replaced by helped; holden by held; shapen by shaped. The distinction between ye and you, the former being reserved for the nominative, the latter for all the other cases, is given up in modern English; and what is apparently a new grammatical form, the possessive pronoun its, has sprung into life since the beginning of the seventeenth century. It never occurs in the Bible; and though it is used three or four times by Shakespeare, Ben Jonson does not recognize it as yet in his English Grammar.23

But there are other objections that seem to prevent the science of language from being considered a part of the physical sciences. Regardless of how language first originated, it has been noted with a strong sense of accuracy that language has its own history, much like art, law, and religion; therefore, the science of language fits within the realm of the historical, which used to be referred to as the moral code, in contrast to the physical sciences. It's a well-known fact, which recent research hasn't disproven, that nature cannot progress or improve. The flower that a botanist observes today was perfect from the beginning. Animals that have what is called an artistic instinct have never brought that instinct to a higher level of perfection. The hexagonal cells of a bee are just as regular in the nineteenth century as they were in the past, and as far as we know, the nightingale has never improved upon its gift of song more than the Philomela of the Greeks. To quote Dr. Whewell, "Natural History," when systematically treated, excludes everything historical, as it classifies objects by their permanent and universal properties and doesn't deal with the narration of specific or casual facts. Now, if we consider the many languages spoken around the world, along with all their dialectical and regional variations, and if we observe the significant changes that each of these languages has undergone over centuries—how Latin evolved into Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Provençal, French, Wallachian, and Roumansch; how Latin, along with Greek, Celtic, Teutonic, and Slavonic languages, and the ancient dialects of India and Persia, must have originated from an earlier language, the ancestor of the entire Indo-European or Aryan language family; if we see how Hebrew, Arabic, and Syriac, along with several minor dialects, are merely distinct versions of the same common type, all flowing from the same source—the original language of the Semitic race; and if we add to these two, the Aryan and Semitic, at least one more well-established language group, the Turanian, which includes the dialects of nomadic tribes scattered across Central and Northern Asia, such as Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, Samoyedic, and Finnic, all radiating from a common center of speech—if we observe this stream of language flowing through centuries across these three powerful branches, which, before they vanish from our view in the far distance, clearly demonstrate a convergence toward a single common origin; it does seem, indeed, as though there is a historical life embedded in language, and that both human will and the passage of time can influence, if not its substance, at least its form. Even if we don't consider the mere local variations of speech as sufficient grounds for excluding language from the realm of natural science, there remains the greater challenge of reconciling the recognized principles of physical science with the historical changes affecting each of these variations. Every part of nature, whether mineral, plant, or animal, remains the same in kind from the beginning to the end of its existence, whereas few languages can be recognized as identical after just a thousand years. The language of Alfred is so different from the English of today that we have to study it in the same way we study Greek and Latin. We can read Milton and Bacon, Shakespeare and Hooker; we can understand Wycliffe and Chaucer; but when we attempt to read the English of the thirteenth century, we can only guess its meaning, and we struggle even with texts prior to the Ormulum and Layamon. The historical changes in language may happen more or less quickly, but they occur at all times and in all places. They have transformed the rich and powerful language of the Vedic poets into the meager and impure jargon of the modern Sepoy. They have turned the language of the Zend-Avesta and the mountain records of Behistún into that of Firdusi and the modern Persians; the language of Virgil into that of Dante, the language of Ulfilas into that of Charlemagne, and the language of Charlemagne into that of Goethe. We have cause to believe that similar changes occur even more violently and rapidly in the dialects of savage tribes, although, in the absence of a written literary tradition, it is extremely difficult to obtain reliable information. In the few cases where careful studies have been conducted on this fascinating topic, it has been found that among the wild and illiterate tribes of Siberia, Africa, and Siam, two or three generations are all it takes to completely alter the character of their dialects. The languages of highly civilized nations, on the other hand, tend to become more stationary and sometimes seem to almost lose their capacity for change. Where there is classical literature, and where the language is disseminated to every town and village, it seems nearly impossible for any further changes to occur. However, the language of Rome, which dominated the civilized world for centuries, was replaced by the modern Romance dialects, and ancient Greek eventually gave way to modern Romaic. Even though the invention of printing and the widespread distribution of Bibles, prayer books, and newspapers have played a significant role in stopping the continuous shift of human speech, we can observe that the language of the authorized version of the Bible, while perfectly understandable, is no longer the spoken language of England. In Booker's Scripture and Prayer-book Glossary, the number of words or meanings of words that have become obsolete since 1611 amounts to 388, or nearly one-fifteenth of all the words used in the Bible. We can witness smaller changes—shifts in accent and meaning, the adoption of new words, and the dropping of old ones—taking place right before our eyes. Rogers once remarked that cóntemplate is bad enough, but bálcony makes me feel nauseous,” yet nowadays, no one is surprised by cóntemplate instead of contemplate, and balcony has become more common than balcony. Similarly, Room and chaney, layloc and goold, have only recently been replaced by Rome, China, lilac, and gold, and some polite gentlemen of the old school still insist on saying obliged instead of required. Power, meaning a waterfall, and gill, referring to a rocky ravine, were not used in classical English before Wordsworth. Guidebook, although an old Anglo-Saxon term, has only recently replaced user guide, and several words like taxi for cabriolet, kiss for omnibus, and even a verb like to redirect still waver on the edge between vulgar and literary language. While the grammatical changes since the publication of the authorized version are fewer in number, some modifications can still be pointed out. The ending of the third person singular in th has now entirely been replaced by s. No one says he lives anymore, only he's living. Many of the irregular past tense forms and participles have taken on new forms. No one uses he spoke and he drove instead of he talked and he drove; helped has been replaced by assisted; Holden by held; shape by shaped. The distinction between yeah and you, where the former is reserved for the nominative and the latter for all other cases, has been abandoned in modern English; and what appears to be a new grammatical form, the possessive pronoun its, has emerged since the early seventeenth century. It never appears in the Bible; though it is used three or four times by Shakespeare, Ben Jonson does not acknowledge it in his English Grammar.

It is argued, therefore, that as language, differing thereby from all other productions of nature, is liable to historical alterations, it is not fit to be treated in the [pg 047] same manner as the subject-matter of all the other physical sciences.

It’s argued, then, that because language, unlike all other natural creations, is subject to historical changes, it shouldn't be treated in the same way as the subjects of other physical sciences.

There is something very plausible in this objection, but if we examine it more carefully, we shall find that it rests entirely on a confusion of terms. We must distinguish between historical change and natural growth. Art, science, philosophy, and religion all have a history; language, or any other production of nature, admits only of growth.

There is something quite reasonable in this objection, but if we take a closer look, we'll see that it relies completely on a misunderstanding of terms. We need to differentiate between historical change and natural growth. Art, science, philosophy, and religion all have a history; language, or any other product of nature, only allows for growth.

Let us consider, first, that although there is a continuous change in language, it is not in the power of man either to produce or to prevent it. We might think as well of changing the laws which control the circulation of our blood, or of adding an inch to our height, as of altering the laws of speech, or inventing new words according to our own pleasure. As man is the lord of nature only if he knows her laws and submits to them, the poet and the philosopher become the lords of language only if they know its laws and obey them.

Let's first acknowledge that while language is always changing, humans can't either create or stop that change. It’s just as impossible to think we could change the laws that govern our blood flow or add an inch to our height as it is to modify the laws of speech or make up new words just because we want to. Just as humans can control nature only by understanding and following its laws, poets and philosophers can master language only if they understand its rules and adhere to them.

When the Emperor Tiberius had made a mistake, and was reproved for it by Marcellus, another grammarian of the name of Capito, who happened to be present, remarked that what the emperor said was good Latin, or, if it were not, it would soon be so. Marcellus, more of a grammarian than a courtier, replied, “Capito is a liar; for, Cæsar, thou canst give the Roman citizenship to men, but not to words.” A similar anecdote is told of the German Emperor Sigismund. When presiding at the Council of Costnitz, he addressed the assembly in a Latin speech, exhorting them to eradicate the schism of the Hussites. “Videte Patres,” he said, “ut eradicetis schismam Hussitarum.” He was very unceremoniously called [pg 048] to order by a monk, who called out, “Serenissime Rex, schisma est generis neutri.”24 The emperor, however, without losing his presence of mind, asked the impertinent monk, “How do you know it?” The old Bohemian school-master replied, “Alexander Gallus says so.” “And who is Alexander Gallus?” the emperor rejoined. The monk replied, “He was a monk.” “Well,” said the emperor, “and I am Emperor of Rome; and my word, I trust, will be as good as the word of any monk.” No doubt the laughers were with the emperor; but for all that, schisma remained a neuter, and not even an emperor could change its gender or termination.

When Emperor Tiberius made a mistake and was called out for it by Marcellus, another grammarian named Capito, who was also present, commented that what the emperor said was good Latin, or if it wasn’t, it would soon be. Marcellus, being more of a grammarian than a courtier, replied, "Capito is lying; because, Cæsar, you can give Roman citizenship to people, but not to words." A similar story is told about German Emperor Sigismund. While presiding at the Council of Constance, he spoke to the assembly in Latin, urging them to eliminate the split caused by the Hussites. "Look, Fathers," he said, “to eliminate the Hussite schism.” He was bluntly interrupted by a monk who shouted, “Most Serene King, the schism is of neither kind.” 24 However, the emperor, keeping his composure, asked the bold monk, “How do you know this?” The old Bohemian schoolmaster replied, “Alexander Gallus said so.” “And who is Alex Gallus?” the emperor countered. The monk answered, “He was a monk.” “Well,” said the emperor, “and I am the Emperor of Rome; and I believe my word holds as much authority as any monk's.” No doubt, the audience sided with the emperor, but regardless, schism remained neuter, and not even an emperor could change its gender or ending.

The idea that language can be changed and improved by man is by no means a new one. We know that Protagoras, an ancient Greek philosopher, after laying down some laws on gender, actually began to find fault with the text of Homer, because it did not agree with his rules. But here, as in every other instance, the attempt proved unavailing. Try to alter the smallest rule of English, and you will find that it is physically impossible. There is apparently a very small difference between much and very, but you can hardly ever put one in the place of the other. You can say, “I am very happy,” but not “I am much happy,” though you may say “I am most happy.” On the contrary, you can say “I am much misunderstood,” but not “I am very misunderstood.” Thus the western Romance dialects, Spanish and Portuguese, together [pg 049] with Wallachian, can only employ the Latin word magis for forming comparatives:—Sp. mas dulce; Port. mais doce; Wall, mai dulce; while French, Provençal, and Italian only allow of plus for the same purpose: Ital. più dolce; Prov. plus dous; Fr. plus doux. It is by no means impossible, however, that this distinction between very, which is now used with adjectives only, and much, which precedes participles, should disappear in time. In fact, “very pleased” and “very delighted” are Americanisms which may be heard even in this country. But if that change take place, it will not be by the will of any individual, nor by the mutual agreement of any large number of men, but rather in spite of the exertions of grammarians and academies. And here you perceive the first difference between history and growth. An emperor may change the laws of society, the forms of religion, the rules of art: it is in the power of one generation, or even of one individual, to raise an art to the highest pitch of perfection, while the next may allow it to lapse, till a new genius takes it up again with renewed ardor. In all this we have to deal with the conscious acts of individuals, and we therefore move on historical ground. If we compare the creations of Michael Angelo or Raphael with the statues and frescoes of ancient Rome, we can speak of a history of art. We can connect two periods separated by thousands of years through the works of those who handed on the traditions of art from century to century; but we shall never meet with that continuous and unconscious growth which connects the language of Plautus with that of Dante. The process through which language is settled and unsettled combines in one the two opposite [pg 050] elements of necessity and free will. Though the individual seems to be the prime agent in producing new words and new grammatical forms, he is so only after his individuality has been merged in the common action of the family, tribe, or nation to which he belongs. He can do nothing by himself, and the first impulse to a new formation in language, though given by an individual, is mostly, if not always, given without premeditation, nay, unconsciously. The individual, as such, is powerless, and the results apparently produced by him depend on laws beyond his control, and on the co-operation of all those who form together with him one class, one body, or one organic whole.

The idea that people can change and improve language isn't new. We know that Protagoras, an ancient Greek philosopher, after establishing some rules about gender, began criticizing Homer’s text because it didn't align with his guidelines. But, like in every other case, this attempt was unsuccessful. Trying to change even the tiniest rule of English is virtually impossible. There seems to be a very slight difference between much and very, but you can hardly ever substitute one for the other. You can say, “I’m really happy,” but not “I am very happy,” although you can say “I’m really happy.” On the other hand, you can say "I'm really misunderstood," but not “I’m really misunderstood.” Similarly, the western Romance languages, like Spanish and Portuguese, along with Wallachian, can use the Latin word more to form comparatives:—Sp. más dulce; Port. sweeter; Wall. my sweet; while French, Provençal, and Italian only use of more for the same purpose: Ital. sweeter; Prov. plus dos; Fr. sweeter. However, it’s not impossible that the distinction between very, which is now only used with adjectives, and much, which comes before participles, could fade over time. In fact, "really happy" and "very happy" are American expressions that can even be heard here. But if that change happens, it won’t be by the will of any one person, nor by the agreement of a large group, but rather despite the efforts of grammarians and academies. And here you see the first difference between history and growth. An emperor can change societal rules, religious forms, and artistic standards: one generation, or even one person, can elevate an art form to perfection, while the next might let it decline until a new talent revives it with passion. In all of this, we deal with the deliberate actions of individuals, hence we operate on historical ground. If we compare the works of Michelangelo or Raphael with the statues and frescoes of ancient Rome, we can talk about a history of art. We can connect two periods separated by thousands of years through the works of those who passed on artistic traditions from century to century; however, we will never encounter that continuous and unconscious growth that links the language of Plautus to that of Dante. The process through which language stabilizes and changes combines the opposite elements of necessity and free will. Although the individual seems to be the key player in creating new words and grammatical structures, they can only do so after their individuality has blended into the collective actions of the family, tribe, or nation they belong to. They can achieve nothing on their own, and the initial drive for a new language formation, though sparked by an individual, typically occurs without planning, or even unconsciously. The individual, as such, is powerless, and the outcomes that appear to be produced by them rely on forces beyond their control, and on the collaboration of all those who together form one class, one group, or one organic whole.

But, though it is easy to show, as we have just done, that language cannot be changed or moulded by the taste, the fancy, or genius of man, it is very difficult to explain what causes the growth of language. Ever since Horace it has been usual to compare the growth of languages with the growth of trees. But comparisons are treacherous things. What do we know of the real causes of the growth of a tree, and what can we gain by comparing things which we do not quite understand with things which we understand even less? Many people speak, for instance, of the terminations of the verb, as if they sprouted out from the root as from their parent stock.25 But what ideas can they connect with such expressions? If we must compare language with a tree, there is one point which may be illustrated by this comparison, and this is that neither language nor the tree can exist or grow by itself. Without the soil, without air and light, the tree could not live; it could not even be conceived to live. It is the same [pg 051] with language. Language cannot exist by itself; it requires a soil on which to grow, and that soil is the human soul. To speak of language as a thing by itself, as living a life of its own, as growing to maturity, producing offspring, and dying away, is sheer mythology; and though we cannot help using metaphorical expressions, we should always be on our guard, when engaged in inquiries like the present, against being carried away by the very words which we are using.

But while it's easy to demonstrate, as we just have, that language can't be altered or shaped by human taste, imagination, or genius, it's really tough to explain what leads to the evolution of language. Since Horace’s time, it's been common to compare the development of languages to that of trees. However, such comparisons can be misleading. What do we actually know about the real reasons behind a tree's growth, and what do we gain by comparing things we don’t fully understand with things we understand even less? For example, many people refer to the endings of verbs as if they grow directly from the root like it’s their parent stock. But what meaningful thoughts can they associate with such phrases? If we must compare language to a tree, one aspect this comparison highlights is that neither language nor trees can exist or develop in isolation. Without soil, air, and light, a tree couldn’t survive; it couldn’t even be imagined as alive. The same applies to language. Language can’t exist on its own; it needs a foundation to thrive, and that foundation is the human soul. To speak of language as an independent entity, living its own life, growing to maturity, creating offspring, and eventually fading away, is pure mythology. And though we can’t help but use metaphorical language, we should always be cautious when we're probing into topics like this, to avoid being misled by the very words we choose.

Now, what we call the growth of language comprises two processes which should be carefully distinguished, though they may be at work simultaneously. These two processes I call,

Now, what we refer to as the growth of language includes two processes that should be clearly distinguished, even though they might be happening at the same time. I call these two processes,

1. Dialectical Regeneration.

Dialectical Regeneration.

2. Phonetic Decay.

2. Phonetic Decay.

I begin with the second, as the more obvious, though in reality its operations are mostly subsequent to the operations of dialectical regeneration. I must ask you at present to take it for granted that everything in language had originally a meaning. As language can have no other object but to express our meaning, it might seem to follow almost by necessity that language should contain neither more nor less than what is required for that purpose. It would also seem to follow that if language contains no more than what is necessary for conveying a certain meaning, it would be impossible to modify any part of it without defeating its very purpose. This is really the case in some languages. In Chinese, for instance, ten is expressed by shĭ. It would be impossible to change shĭ in the slightest way without making it unfit to express ten. If instead of shĭ we pronounced t'sĭ, this would mean seven, but not ten. But now, suppose we wished to [pg 052] express double the quantity of ten, twice ten, or twenty. We should in Chinese take eúl, which is two, put it before shĭ, and say eúl-shĭ, twenty. The same caution which applied to shĭ, applies again to eúl-shĭ. As soon as you change it, by adding or dropping a single letter, it is no longer twenty, but either something else or nothing. We find exactly the same in other languages which, like Chinese, are called monosyllabic. In Tibetan, chu is ten, nyi two; nyi-chu, twenty. In Burmese she is ten, nhit two; nhit-she, twenty.

I’ll start with the second aspect, as it’s more obvious, although its functions actually follow after the processes of dialectical regeneration. For now, I need you to assume that everything in language originally had a meaning. Since the only purpose of language is to express our thoughts, it might seem necessary that language should only include what is needed for that purpose. It would also seem that if language only includes what is essential for conveying a meaning, it would be impossible to change any part of it without undermining its purpose. This is true in some languages. For example, in Chinese, ten is expressed as shĭ. Changing shĭ even slightly would make it unable to convey ten. If we instead pronounced t'sĭ, that would mean seven, not ten. Now, suppose we wanted to express double the amount of ten, or twenty. In Chinese, we would take eúl, which means two, place it before shĭ, and say eul-shi, which means twenty. The same caution that applies to shĭ also applies to eulshi. As soon as you change it by adding or removing a single letter, it’s no longer twenty, but either something else or nothing at all. We see the same principle in other languages that, like Chinese, are known as monosyllabic. In Tibetan, chu means ten, nyi means two; nyi-chu means twenty. In Burmese, she is ten, nhit is two; nhit-she means twenty.

But how is it in English, or in Gothic, or in Greek and Latin, or in Sanskrit? We do not say two-ten in English, nor duo-decem in Latin, nor dvi-da'sa in Sanskrit.

But how is it in English, Gothic, Greek, or Latin, or in Sanskrit? We don't say 2-10 in English, nor 12 in Latin, nor dvi-da'sa in Sanskrit.

We find26 in Sanskrit vin'sati.
in Greek eikati.
in Latin twenty.
in English 20.

Now here we see, first, that the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, are only local modifications of one and the same original word; whereas the English twenty is a new compound, the Gothic tvai tigjus (two decads), the Anglo-Saxon tuêntig, framed from Teutonic materials; a product, as we shall see, of Dialectical Regeneration.

Now we see that Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin are just local variations of one original word; meanwhile, the English 20 is a new blend, with the Gothic your promise (two tens) and the Anglo-Saxon tuêntig, created from Teutonic elements; a result, as we’ll see, of Dialectical Regeneration.

We next observe that the first part of the Latin viginti and of the Sanskrit vin'sati contains the same number, which from dvi has been reduced to vi. This is not very extraordinary; for the Latin bis, twice, which you still hear at our concerts, likewise stands for an original dvis, the English twice, the Greek dis. This dis appears again as a Latin preposition, meaning a-two; so that, for instance, discussion means, originally, [pg 053] striking a-two, different from percussion, which means striking through and through. Discussion is, in fact, the cracking of a nut in order to get at its kernel. Well, the same word, dvi or vi, we have in the Latin word for twenty, which is vi-ginti, the Sanskrit vin-'sati.

We then note that the first part of the Latin twenty and the Sanskrit vin'sati contain the same number, which has been shortened from dvi to vi. This isn't surprising; the Latin bis, meaning twice, which you still hear at our concerts, also comes from the original dvis, just like the English twice and the Greek dis. This dis also shows up as a Latin preposition meaning a pair; for example, chat originally meant, to strike a-two, which is different from drumming, meaning to strike through and through. Chat is like cracking a nut to get to its kernel. Interestingly, the same word, dvi or vi, appears in the Latin word for twenty, which is vi-ginti, and in the Sanskrit vin-'sati.

It can likewise be proved that the second part of viginti is a corruption of the old word for ten. Ten, in Sanskrit, is da'san; from it is derived da'sati, a decad; and this da'sati was again reduced to 'sati; thus giving us with vi for dvi, two, the Sanskrit vi'sati or vin'sati, twenty. The Latin viginti, the Greek eikati, owe their origin to the same process.

It can also be shown that the second part of twenty is a variation of the old word for ten. Ten, in Sanskrit, is da'san; from this, we get da'sati, which means a decade; and this da'sati was then shortened to 'sati; thus, we end up with vi for dvi, meaning two, leading to the Sanskrit vi'sati or vin'sati, which means twenty. The Latin twenty and the Greek eikati also originate from this same process.

Now consider the immense difference—I do not mean in sound, but in character—between two such words as the Chinese eúl-shĭ, two-ten, or twenty, and those mere cripples of words which we meet with in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin. In Chinese there is neither too much, nor too little. The word speaks for itself, and requires no commentary. In Sanskrit, on the contrary, the most essential parts of the two component elements are gone, and what remains is a kind of metamorphic agglomerate which cannot be understood without a most minute microscopic analysis. Here, then, you have an instance of what is meant by phonetic corruption; and you will perceive how, not only the form, but the whole nature of language is destroyed by it. As soon as phonetic corruption shows itself in a language, that language has lost what we considered to be the most essential character of all human speech, namely, that every part of it should have a meaning. The people who spoke Sanskrit were as little aware that vin'sati meant twice ten [pg 054] as a Frenchman is that vingt contains the remains of deux and dix. Language, therefore, has entered into a new stage as soon as it submits to the attacks of phonetic change. The life of language has become benumbed and extinct in those words or portions of words which show the first traces of this phonetic mould. Henceforth those words or portions of words can be kept up only artificially or by tradition; and, what is important, a distinction is henceforth established between what is substantial or radical, and what is merely formal or grammatical in words.

Now think about the huge difference—I’m not talking about sound, but about essence—between two words like the Chinese eul-shi, which means two-ten or twenty, and those awkward words we find in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin. In Chinese, there’s just the right amount. The word conveys its meaning without needing explanation. In Sanskrit, however, the crucial parts of the two combined elements are missing, leaving a sort of transformed jumble that can only be understood through very detailed analysis. Here, you have an example of what’s meant by sound distortion; you can see how not just the form, but the entire nature of language is impacted by it. Once phonetic corruption appears in a language, that language has lost what we consider to be the most essential feature of all human speech: that every part should have meaning. The people who spoke Sanskrit were just as unaware that vin'sati meant twenty as a French person is unaware that twenty holds remnants of two and ten. Thus, language enters a new phase as soon as it falls victim to phonetic change. The vitality of language has become dulled and extinct in those words or parts of words that first show signs of this phonetic molding. From then on, those words or parts of words can only be maintained artificially or through tradition; and importantly, a distinction is established between what is substantial or fundamental and what is merely formal or grammatical in words.

For let us now take another instance, which will make it clearer, how phonetic corruption leads to the first appearance of so-called grammatical forms. We are not in the habit of looking on twenty as the plural or dual of ten. But how was a plural originally formed? In Chinese, which from the first has guarded most carefully against the taint of phonetic corruption, the plural is formed in the most sensible manner. Thus, man in Chinese is ģin; kiai means the whole or totality. This added to ģin gives ģin-kiai, which is the plural of man. There are other words which are used for the same purpose in Chinese; for instance, péi, which means a class. Hence, ĭ, a stranger, followed by péi, class, gives ĭ-péi, strangers. We have similar plurals in English, but we do not reckon them as grammatical forms. Thus, man-kind is formed exactly like ĭ-péi, stranger-kind; Christendom is the same as all Christians, and clergy is synonymous with clerici. The same process is followed in other cognate languages. In Tibetan the plural is formed by the addition of such words as kun, all, and t'sogs, multitude.27 [pg 055] Even the numerals, nine and hundred, are used for the same purpose. And here again, as long as these words are fully understood and kept alive, they resist phonetic corruption; but the moment they lose, so to say, their presence of mind, phonetic corruption sets in, and as soon as phonetic corruption has commenced its ravages, those portions of a word which it affects retain a merely artificial or conventional existence, and dwindle down to grammatical terminations.

Let's take another example to clarify how phonetic changes lead to the emergence of what we call grammatical forms. We don't typically see 20 as the plural or dual of ten. But how was a plural originally created? In Chinese, which has been careful to avoid phonetic corruption, the plural is formed in a logical way. For example, the word for man in Chinese is ģin; kiai means the whole or totality. When you add this to ģin, you get ģin-kiai, which means men. There are other words used for the same purpose in Chinese; for instance, péi means a class. Therefore, ĭ, which means a stranger, combined with péi, gives ĭ-pay, which means strangers. We have similar plurals in English, but we don't consider them grammatical forms. For example, mankind is formed exactly like ĭ-péi, stranger-kind; Christianity means all Christians, and clergy is synonymous with clergy. The same process occurs in other related languages. In Tibetan, the plural is made by adding words like kun, which means all, and t'sogs, which means multitude.27 [pg 055] Even numbers like nine and hundred serve the same purpose. Here again, as long as these words are fully understood and actively used, they resist phonetic change; but the moment they lose their clarity, phonetic changes begin, and once phonetic corruption starts, the affected parts of a word only have an artificial or conventional meaning, reducing down to grammatical endings.

I am afraid I should tax your patience too much were I to enter here on an analysis of the grammatical terminations in Sanskrit, Greek, or Latin, in order to show how these terminations arose out of independent words, which were slowly reduced to mere dust by the constant wear and tear of speech. But in order to explain how the principle of phonetic decay leads to the formation of grammatical terminations, let us look to languages with which we are more familiar. Let us take the French adverb. We are told by French grammarians28 that in order to form adverbs we have to add the termination ment. Thus from bon, good, we form bonnement, from vrai, true, vraiment. This termination does not exist in Latin. But we meet in Latin29 with expressions such as bonâ mente, in good faith. We read in Ovid, “Insistam forti mente,” I shall insist with a strong mind or will, I shall insist strongly; in French, “J'insisterai fortement.” Therefore, what has happened in the growth of Latin, or in the change of Latin into French, is simply this: in phrases such as forti mente, the last word was no longer felt as a distinct [pg 056] word, and it lost at the same time its distinct pronunciation. Mente, the ablative of mens, was changed into ment, and was preserved as a merely formal element, as the termination of adverbs, even in cases where a recollection of the original meaning of mente (with a mind), would have rendered its employment perfectly impossible. If we say in French that a hammer falls lourdement, we little suspect that we ascribe to a piece of iron a heavy mind. In Italian, though the adverbial termination mente in claramente is no longer felt as a distinct word, it has not as yet been affected by phonetic corruption; and in Spanish it is sometimes used as a distinct word, though even then it cannot be said to have retained its distinct meaning. Thus, instead of saying, “claramente, concisamente y elegantemente,” it is more elegant to say in Spanish, “clara, concisa y elegante mente.”

I’m afraid I would test your patience if I tried to analyze the grammatical endings in Sanskrit, Greek, or Latin to show how these endings developed from independent words, which were gradually worn down by the constant use of language. But to explain how the idea of phonetic decay leads to the creation of grammatical endings, let’s look at languages we are more familiar with. Let’s consider the French adverb. French grammarians28 tell us that to form adverbs, we add the ending ment. So, from good, meaning good, we get bonnement; from true, meaning true, we derive really. This ending doesn’t exist in Latin. However, in Latin29, we encounter phrases like good mind, meaning in good faith. In Ovid, we read, "Stay strong-minded." meaning I will insist with a strong mind or will, I will insist strongly; in French, it is "I'll insist strongly." So, what happened in the evolution of Latin, or in the transformation of Latin into French, is simply this: in phrases like strong mind, the last word was no longer perceived as a separate word, and it lost its distinct pronunciation at the same time. Mind, the ablative of men, changed into ment, and was kept as a purely formal element, as the ending of adverbs, even in situations where remembering the original meaning of mind (with a mind) would have made its use completely impossible. When we say in French that a hammer falls heavily, we hardly suspect that we’re attributing a heavy mind to a piece of iron. In Italian, even though the adverbial ending mind in clearly is no longer recognized as a separate word, it hasn’t yet been impacted by phonetic corruption; and in Spanish, it’s sometimes used as a separate word, though even then it cannot be said to have kept its distinct meaning. Therefore, instead of saying, "clearly, concisely, and elegantly," it sounds more elegant in Spanish to say, “clear, concise, and elegant mind.”

It is difficult to form any conception of the extent to which the whole surface of a language may be altered by what we have just described as phonetic change. Think that in the French vingt you have the same elements as in deux and dix; that the second part of the French douze, twelve, represents the Latin decim in duodecim; that the final te of trente was originally the Latin ginta in triginta, which ginta was again a derivation and abbreviation of the Sanskrit da'sa or da'sati, ten. Then consider how early this phonetic disease must have broken out. For in the same manner as vingt in French, veinte in Spanish, and venti in Italian presuppose the more primitive viginti which we find in Latin, so this Latin viginti, together with the Greek eikati, and the Sanskrit vin'sati presuppose an earlier language from which they are in turn [pg 057] derived, and in which, previous to viginti, there must have been a more primitive form dvi-ginti, and previous to this again, another compound as clear and intelligible as the Chinese eúl-shĭ, consisting of the ancient Aryan names for two, dvi, and ten, da'sati. Such is the virulence of this phonetic change, that it will sometimes eat away the whole body of a word, and leave nothing behind but decayed fragments. Thus, sister, which in Sanskrit is svasar,30 appears in Pehlvi and in Ossetian as cho. Daughter, which in Sanskrit is duhitar, has dwindled down in Bohemian to dci (pronounced tsi).31 Who would believe that tear and larme are derived from the same source; that the French même contains the Latin semetipsissimus; that in aujourd'hui we have the Latin word dies twice!32 Who would recognize the Latin pater in the Armenian hayr? Yet we make no difficulty about identifying père and pater; and as several initial h's in Armenian correspond to an original p (het = pes, pedis; hing = πέντε; hour = πῦρ), it follows that hayr is pater.33

It’s hard to understand just how much the entire structure of a language can change due to what we’ve referred to as phonetic change. Consider that in French, twenty shares the same elements as two and ten; that the latter part of the French twelve (twelve) represents the Latin decimate in twelve; and that the final te of thirty originally came from the Latin ginta in thirty, which itself was a derivative and shortened form of the Sanskrit da'sa or da'sati, meaning ten. Now think about how early this phonetic shift must have begun. Just as twenty in French, twenty in Spanish, and large in Italian presume the more primitive twenty that we find in Latin, this Latin twenty, together with the Greek eikati and the Sanskrit vin'sati, suggest an even earlier language from which they derived, in which, before twenty, there must have been a more primitive form dwi-ginti. And before this again, there was likely another compound as clear and understandable as the Chinese eul-shee, consisting of the ancient Aryan words for two, dvi, and ten, da'sati. The power of phonetic change is so strong that it can sometimes wear down an entire word to just a few broken bits. For example, sibling, which is svasar in Sanskrit, appears as cho in Pehlavi and Ossetian. Daughter, which is daughter in Sanskrit, has simplified in Bohemian to dci (pronounced tsi). Who would believe that tear and tear come from the same root? That the French same contains the Latin semetipsissimus? That in today we see the Latin word dies twice? Who could recognize the Latin dad in the Armenian hair? Yet we have no trouble seeing the connection between dad and dad; and since several initial h's in Armenian match an original p (het = pes, pedis; hing = πέντε; hour = πῦρ), it follows that hair is father.

We are accustomed to call these changes the growth of language, but it would be more appropriate to call this process of phonetic change decay, and thus to distinguish it from the second or dialectical process which we must now examine, and which involves, as you will see, a more real principle of growth.

We usually refer to these changes as the growth of language, but it would be more accurate to call this phonetic change decay. This way, we can distinguish it from the second or dialectical process that we need to examine now, which involves, as you will see, a more genuine principle of growth.

In order to understand the meaning of dialectical [pg 058] regeneration we must first see clearly what we mean by dialect. We saw before that language has no independent substantial existence. Language exists in man, it lives in being spoken, it dies with each word that is pronounced, and is no longer heard. It is a mere accident that language should ever have been reduced to writing, and have been made the vehicle of a written literature. Even now the largest number of languages have produced no literature. Among the numerous tribes of Central Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia, language still lives in its natural state, in a state of continual combustion; and it is there that we must go if we wish to gain an insight into the growth of human speech previous to its being arrested by any literary interference. What we are accustomed to call languages, the literary idioms of Greece, and Rome, and India, of Italy, France, and Spain, must be considered as artificial, rather than as natural forms of speech. The real and natural life of language is in its dialects, and in spite of the tyranny exercised by the classical or literary idioms, the day is still very far off which is to see the dialects, even of such classical languages as Italian and French, entirely eradicated. About twenty of the Italian dialects have been reduced to writing, and made known by the press.34 Champollion-Figeac reckons the most distinguishable dialects of France at fourteen.35 The number of modern Greek dialects36 is carried by some as high as seventy, and though many of these are hardly more than local varieties, yet some, like the Tzaconic, differ from the literary language as much as Doric differed from Attic. [pg 059] In the island of Lesbos, villages distant from each other not more than two or three hours have frequently peculiar words of their own, and their own peculiar pronunciation.37 But let us take a language which, though not without a literature, has been less under the influence of classical writers than Italian or French, and we shall then see at once how abundant the growth of dialects! The Friesian, which is spoken on a small area on the north-western coast of Germany, between the Scheldt and Jutland, and on the islands near the shore, which has been spoken there for at least two thousand years,38 and which possesses literary documents as old as the twelfth century, is broken up into endless local dialects. I quote from Kohl's Travels. “The commonest things,” he writes, “which are named almost alike all over Europe, receive quite different names in the different Friesian Islands. Thus, in Amrum, father is called aatj; on the Halligs, baba or babe; in Sylt, foder or vaar; in many districts on the main-land, täte; in the eastern part of Föhr, oti or ohitj. Although these people live within a couple of German miles from each other, these words differ more than the Italian padre and the English father. Even the names of their districts and islands are totally different in different dialects. The island of Sylt is called Söl, Sol, and Sal.” Each of these dialects, though it might be made out by a Friesian scholar, is unintelligible except to the peasants of each narrow district in which it prevails. What is therefore generally called the Friesian language, and described as such in Friesian grammars, is in reality [pg 060] but one out of many dialects, though, no doubt, the most important; and the same holds good with regard to all so-called literary languages.

To understand the meaning of dialectical renewal, we first need to clarify what we mean by dialect. Previously, we noted that language doesn’t have an independent substantial existence. Language exists in people; it comes alive when spoken and fades away with every word that’s pronounced and no longer heard. It's just a coincidence that language has ever been written down and used as a medium for literature. Even today, the majority of languages haven't produced literature. Among the many tribes in Central Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia, language still exists in its natural state, continuously evolving; that's where we should look to gain insight into the evolution of human speech before it was caught up in any literary influences. What we usually refer to as languages—the literary forms from Greece, Rome, India, Italy, France, and Spain—should be seen as artificial rather than natural speech forms. The true and natural essence of language lies in its dialects, and despite the strict rules imposed by the classical or literary forms, it’s still a long way off before the dialects of classical languages like Italian and French are completely eliminated. Around twenty Italian dialects have been written down and published. Champollion-Figeac identifies fourteen distinct dialects in France. Some consider there to be as many as seventy modern Greek dialects, and while many of these are merely local variations, some, like Tzaconic, vary from the literary language just as much as Doric did from Attic. In Lesbos, villages separated by just a couple of hours of travel often have their unique words and pronunciations. Let’s examine a language that, although it has its literature, has been less influenced by classical writers than Italian or French, and we will immediately see how rich its dialect growth is! Friesian, spoken on a small area of the north-western coast of Germany, between the Scheldt and Jutland, and on nearby islands—has been spoken there for at least two thousand years and has literary records dating back to the twelfth century—exists in numerous local dialects. I quote from Kohl's Travels: “The most common things,” he writes, “Words that are almost the same across Europe have very different names in the various Friesian Islands. For instance, in Amrum, father is called aatj; on the Halligs, baba or babe; in Sylt, foder or vaar; in many parts of the mainland, täte; and in the eastern part of Föhr, oti or ohitj. Even though these people live just a few German miles apart, these words are more different than the Italian padre and the English father. The names of their districts and islands also vary significantly in different dialects. The island of Sylt is referred to as Söl, Sol, and Sal.” Each of these dialects, although a Friesian scholar might understand them, is unintelligible to anyone except the local peasants in the narrow areas where they are used. What is generally referred to as the Friesian language, as described in Friesian grammars, is actually just one of many dialects, though likely the most significant; the same applies to all so-called literary languages.

It is a mistake to imagine that dialects are everywhere corruptions of the literary language. Even in England,39 the local patois have many forms which are more primitive than the language of Shakespeare, and the richness of their vocabulary surpasses, on many points, that of the classical writers of any period. Dialects have always been the feeders rather than the channels of a literary language; anyhow, they are parallel streams which existed long before one of them was raised to that temporary eminence which is the result of literary cultivation.

It’s a mistake to think that dialects are just corrupt versions of the literary language. Even in England, 39 the local dialects have many forms that are more primitive than Shakespeare's language, and their vocabulary is richer in many ways than that of classical writers from any period. Dialects have always contributed more to a literary language than they’ve received from it; they are like parallel streams that existed long before one was elevated to the temporary status that comes from literary development.

What Grimm says of the origin of dialects in general applies only to such as are produced by phonetic corruption. “Dialects,” he writes,40 “develop themselves progressively, and the more we look backward in the history of language the smaller is their number, and the less definite their features. All multiplicity arises gradually from an original unity.” So it seems, indeed, if we build our theories of language exclusively on the materials supplied by literary idioms, such as Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Gothic. No doubt these are the royal heads in the history of language. But as political history ought to be more than a chronicle of royal dynasties, so the historian of language ought never to [pg 061] lose sight of those lower and popular strata of speech from which these dynasties originally sprang, and by which alone they are supported.

What Grimm says about the origin of dialects in general applies only to those created by phonetic changes. "Dialects," he writes,40 "Develop gradually, and the more we look back at the history of language, the fewer examples we find, and the less defined their characteristics become. All diversity emerges slowly from an original unity." This seems true if we base our theories of language solely on literary languages like Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Gothic. These certainly represent the prominent figures in language history. However, just as political history should encompass more than just the records of royal families, a language historian should never overlook the foundational and common types of speech from which these prominent figures originated and which sustain them.

Here, however, lies the difficulty. How are we to trace the history of dialects? In the ancient history of language, literary dialects alone supply us with materials, whereas the very existence of spoken dialects is hardly noticed by ancient writers.

Here, however, lies the challenge. How are we supposed to trace the history of dialects? In the early history of language, only literary dialects provide us with material, while the actual existence of spoken dialects is barely acknowledged by ancient writers.

We are told, indeed, by Pliny,41 that in Colchis there were more than three hundred tribes speaking different dialects; and that the Romans, in order to carry on any intercourse with the natives, had to employ a hundred and thirty interpreters. This is probably an exaggeration; but we have no reason to doubt the statement of Strabo,42 who speaks of seventy tribes living together in that country, which, even now, is called “the mountain of languages.” In modern times, again, when missionaries have devoted themselves to the study of the languages of savage and illiterate tribes, they have seldom been able to do more than to acquire one out of many dialects; and, when their exertions have been at all successful, that dialect which they had reduced to writing, and made the medium of their civilizing influence, soon assumed a kind of literary supremacy, so as to leave the rest behind as barbarous jargons. Yet, whatever is known of the dialects of savage tribes is chiefly or entirely due to missionaries; and it is much to be desired that their attention should again and again be directed to this interesting [pg 062] problem of the dialectical life of language which they alone have the means of elucidating. Gabriel Sagard, who was sent as a missionary to the Hurons in 1626, and published his “Grand Voyage du pays des Hurons,” at Paris, in 1631, states that among these North American tribes hardly one village speaks the same language as another; nay, that two families of the same village do not speak exactly the same language. And he adds what is important, that their language is changing every day, and is already so much changed that the ancient Huron language is almost entirely different from the present. During the last two hundred years, on the contrary, the languages of the Hurons and Iroquois are said not to have changed at all.43 We read of missionaries44 in Central America who attempted to write down the language of savage tribes, and who compiled with great care a dictionary of all the words they could lay hold of. Returning to the same tribe after the lapse of only ten years, they found that this dictionary had become antiquated and useless. Old words had sunk to the ground, and new ones had risen to the surface; and to all outward appearance the language was completely changed.

We are told by Pliny that in Colchis there were over three hundred tribes speaking different dialects, and that the Romans had to use a hundred and thirty interpreters to communicate with the locals. This might be an exaggeration, but we have no reason to doubt Strabo, who mentions seventy tribes living together in that area, which is still known today as “the mountain of languages.” In modern times, when missionaries have focused on learning the languages of primitive and uneducated tribes, they have usually only been able to master one out of many dialects. When they've made any progress, that particular dialect they documented often gained a kind of literary dominance, pushing the others aside as mere barbarous jargons. Yet, most of what we know about the dialects of these tribes comes mainly from missionaries. It’s crucial that their attention is repeatedly drawn to the intriguing challenge of understanding the dialectical nature of language, a problem they are uniquely positioned to explore. Gabriel Sagard, who went as a missionary to the Hurons in 1626 and published his “Grand Voyage du pays des Hurons” in Paris in 1631, remarks that in these North American tribes, hardly any village speaks the same language as another; in fact, even two households within the same village do not speak exactly the same language. He emphasizes that their language is changing daily, and has evolved so much that the ancient Huron language is nearly unrecognizable from the modern one. In contrast, it is said that in the last two hundred years, the languages of the Hurons and Iroquois have not changed at all. We read about missionaries in Central America who tried to document the languages of indigenous tribes and carefully compiled dictionaries of the words they encountered. When they returned to the same tribe after just ten years, they discovered that their dictionary had become outdated and ineffective. Old words had disappeared, while new ones emerged, making the language seem completely transformed.

Nothing surprised the Jesuit missionaries so much as the immense number of languages spoken by the natives of America. But this, far from being a proof of a high state of civilization, rather showed that the various races of America had never submitted, for any length of time, to a powerful political concentration, and that they had never succeeded in founding great [pg 063] national empires. Hervas reduces, indeed, all the dialects of America to eleven families45—four for the south, and seven for the north; but this could be done only by the same careful and minute comparison which enables us to class the idioms spoken in Iceland and Ceylon as cognate dialects. For practical purposes the dialects of America are distinct dialects, and the people who speak them are mutually unintelligible.

Nothing surprised the Jesuit missionaries more than the vast number of languages spoken by the native people of America. However, this was not a sign of a highly developed civilization; instead, it indicated that the various races in America had never really come under the control of a powerful political entity for a long time and had not managed to create large national empires. Hervas actually categorizes all the dialects of America into eleven families—four from the south and seven from the north; but this classification could only be achieved through the same detailed and careful comparison that allows us to group the languages spoken in Iceland and Ceylon as related dialects. In practical terms, the dialects of America are distinct, and the communities that speak them cannot understand each other.

We hear the same observations everywhere where the rank growth of dialects has been watched by intelligent observers. If we turn our eyes to Burmah, we find that there the Burmese has produced a considerable literature, and is the recognized medium of communication not only in Burmah, but likewise in Pegu and Arakan. But the intricate mountain ranges of the peninsula of the Irawaddy46 afford a safe refuge to many independent tribes, speaking their own independent dialects; and in the neighborhood of Manipura alone Captain Gordon collected no less than twelve dialects. “Some of them,” he says, “are spoken by no more than thirty or forty families, yet so different from the rest as to be unintelligible to the nearest neighborhood.” Brown, the excellent American missionary, who has spent his whole life in preaching the Gospel in that part of the world, tells us that some tribes who left their native village to settle in another valley, became unintelligible to their forefathers in two or three generations.47

We see the same observations everywhere where the rapid growth of dialects has been noted by sharp observers. If we look at Burma, we find that the Burmese language has created a significant body of literature and is the recognized means of communication not only in Burma but also in Pegu and Arakan. However, the complex mountain ranges of the Irrawaddy Peninsula provide a safe haven for many independent tribes, each speaking their own distinct dialects; in fact, near Manipur alone, Captain Gordon collected at least twelve dialects. “Some of them,” he says, "are spoken by no more than thirty or forty families, yet are so different from the surrounding areas that they are incomprehensible to the nearest neighbors." Brown, the remarkable American missionary who has dedicated his life to preaching the Gospel in that region, tells us that some tribes who left their native village to settle in another valley became unintelligible to their ancestors in just two or three generations.47

In the north of Asia the Ostiakes, as Messerschmidt informs us, though really speaking the same language [pg 064] everywhere, have produced so many words and forms peculiar to each tribe, that even within the limits of twelve or twenty German miles, communication among them becomes extremely difficult. Castren, the heroic explorer of the languages of northern and central Asia,48 assures us that some of the Mongolian dialects are actually entering into a new phase of grammatical life; and that while the literary language of the Mongolians has no terminations for the persons of the verb, that characteristic feature of Turanian speech had lately broken out in the spoken dialects of the Buriates and in the Tungusic idioms near Njertschinsk in Siberia.

In northern Asia, the Ostiaks, as reported by Messerschmidt, all speak essentially the same language, but they have developed so many unique words and forms specific to each tribe that even over a distance of twelve to twenty German miles, communication among them becomes very challenging. Castren, the brave explorer of the languages of northern and central Asia, tells us that some Mongolian dialects are actually entering a new phase of grammatical evolution. He points out that while the literary language of the Mongolians has no verb endings to indicate different persons, this distinctive feature of Turanian speech has recently begun to appear in the spoken dialects of the Buriates and in the Tungusic languages around Njertschinsk in Siberia.

One more observation of the same character from the pen of Robert Moffat, in his “Missionary Scenes and Labors in Southern Africa.” “The purity and harmony of language,” he writes, “is kept up by their pitches, or public meetings, by their festivals and ceremonies, as well as by their songs and their constant intercourse. With the isolated villagers of the desert it is far otherwise; they have no such meetings; they are compelled to traverse the wilds, often to a great distance from their native village. On such occasions fathers and mothers, and all who can bear a burden, often set out for weeks at a time, and leave their children to the care of two or three infirm old people. The infant progeny, some of whom are beginning to lisp, while others can just master a whole sentence, and those still further advanced, romping and playing together, the children of nature, through their livelong day, become habituated to a language of their own. The more voluble condescend to the less precocious; and [pg 065] thus, from this infant Babel, proceeds a dialect of a host of mongrel words and phrases, joined together without rule, and in the course of one generation the entire character of the language is changed.”

One more observation of the same kind comes from Robert Moffat in his "Missionary Activities and Experiences in Southern Africa." He writes, "The clarity and balance of language" is maintained through their gatherings, public meetings, festivals, ceremonies, songs, and constant interactions. However, with the isolated villagers of the desert, it’s quite different; they don’t have such meetings and are often forced to travel far from their home village. During these times, fathers and mothers, along with anyone who can carry something, often leave for weeks, entrusting their children to a few elderly people. The infants, some of whom are just starting to speak while others can barely form a complete sentence, and those who are a bit more advanced, play together throughout the day, getting used to a language of their own. The more talkative kids accommodate those who are less advanced; and [pg 065] thus, from this young Babel emerges a mix of words and phrases thrown together without any rules, and In just one generation, the entire nature of the language changes..”

Such is the life of language in a state of nature; and in a similar manner, we have a right to conclude, languages grew up which we only know after the bit and bridle of literature were thrown over their necks. It need not be a written or classical literature to give an ascendency to one out of many dialects, and to impart to its peculiarities an undisputed legitimacy. Speeches at pitches or public meetings, popular ballads, national laws, religious oracles, exercise, though to a smaller extent, the same influence. They will arrest the natural flow of language in the countless rivulets of its dialects, and give a permanency to certain formations of speech which, without these external influences, could have enjoyed but an ephemeral existence. Though we cannot fully enter, at present, on the problem of the origin of language, yet this we can clearly see, that, whatever the origin of language was, its first tendency must have been towards an unbounded variety. To this there was, however, a natural check, which prepared from the very beginning the growth of national and literary languages. The language of the father became the language of a family; the language of a family that of a clan. In one and the same clan different families would preserve among themselves their own familiar forms and expressions. They would add new words, some so fanciful and quaint as to be hardly intelligible to other members of the same clan. Such expressions would naturally be suppressed, as we suppress provincial peculiarities and [pg 066] pet words of our own, at large assemblies where all clansmen meet and are expected to take part in general discussions. But they would be cherished all the more round the fire of each tent, in proportion as the general dialect of the clan assumed a more formal character. Class dialects, too, would spring up; the dialects of servants, grooms, shepherds, and soldiers. Women would have their own household words; and the rising generation would not be long without a more racy phraseology of their own. Even we, in this literary age, and at a distance of thousands of years from those early fathers of language, do not speak at home as we speak in public. The same circumstances which give rise to the formal language of a clan, as distinguished from the dialects of families, produce, on a larger scale, the languages of a confederation of clans, of nascent colonies, of rising nationalities. Before there is a national language, there have always been hundreds of dialects in districts, towns, villages, clans, and families; and though the progress of civilization and centralization tends to reduce their number and to soften their features, it has not as yet annihilated them, even in our own time.

This is how language exists in its natural state; similarly, we can conclude that languages developed that we only recognize after the constraints of literature were imposed on them. It doesn’t have to be formal or classical literature to elevate one dialect over others and give its unique traits a clear legitimacy. Speeches at events or gatherings, popular songs, national laws, and religious messages, although to a lesser extent, have the same effect. They can interrupt the natural flow of language across the various branches of its dialects and solidify specific forms of speech that, without these external influences, might have only existed temporarily. While we can't fully explore the origin of language right now, we can clearly see that whatever the origin was, its initial direction must have leaned towards endless variety. However, there was a natural limitation that laid the groundwork for national and literary languages from the start. The language of the father became the family language; the family language became the language of the clan. Within one clan, different families would keep their unique phrases and expressions. They would create new words, some so whimsical that they’d be hard to understand by other clan members. These expressions would naturally fade away, just as we dismiss regional quirks and our own pet phrases in large gatherings where everyone from the clan is expected to participate in broader discussions. Yet, they would be embraced even more around the campfire of each tent, especially as the general dialect of the clan became more formal. Class dialects would also emerge; dialects from servants, stablehands, herders, and soldiers. Women would have their own domestic vocabularies, and the new generation wouldn’t take long to develop their own lively phrases. Even in this era of literature, thousands of years distant from those early language origins, we don’t speak at home the same way we do in public. The same factors that give rise to the formal language of a clan, distinct from the dialects of families, also lead to the languages of a coalition of clans, of emerging colonies, and of developing nations. Before there’s a national language, there have always been numerous dialects in regions, towns, villages, clans, and families; and although the advancement of civilization and the merging of cultures aim to lessen their numbers and soften their characteristics, they have not yet been eliminated, even in our time.

Let us now look again at what is commonly called the history, but what ought to be called, the natural growth, of language, and we shall easily see that it consists chiefly in the play of the two principles which we have just examined, phonetic decay and dialectical regeneration or growth. Let us take the six Romance languages. It is usual to call these the daughters of Latin. I do not object to the names of parent and daughter as applied to languages; only we must not allow such apparently clear and simple terms to cover [pg 067] obscure and vague conceptions. Now if we call Italian the daughter of Latin, we do not mean to ascribe to Italian a new vital principle. Not a single radical element was newly created for the formation of Italian. Italian is Latin in a new form. Italian is modern Latin, or Latin ancient Italian. The names mother and daughter only mark different periods in the growth of a language substantially the same. To speak of Latin dying in giving birth to her offspring is again pure mythology, and it would be easy to prove that Latin was a living language long after Italian had learnt to run alone. Only let us clearly see what we mean by Latin. The classical Latin is one out of many dialects spoken by the Aryan inhabitants of Italy. It was the dialect of Latium, in Latium the dialect of Rome, at Rome the dialect of the patricians. It was fixed by Livius Andronicus, Ennius, Nævius, Cato, and Lucretius, polished by the Scipios, Hortensius, and Cicero. It was the language of a restricted class, of a political party, of a literary set. Before their time, the language of Rome must have changed and fluctuated considerably. Polybius tells us (iii. 22), that the best-informed Romans could not make out without difficulty the language of the ancient treaties between Rome and Carthage. Horace admits (Ep. ii. 1, 86), that he could not understand the old Salian poems, and he hints that no one else could. Quintilian (i. 6, 40) says that the Salian priests could hardly understand their sacred hymns. If the plebeians had obtained the upperhand over the patricians, Latin would have been very different from what it is in Cicero, and we know that even Cicero, having been brought up at Arpinum, had to give up some of his [pg 068] provincial peculiarities, such as the dropping of the final s, when he began to mix in fashionable society, and had to write for his new patrician friends.49 After having been established as the language of legislation, religion, literature, and general civilization, the classical Latin dialect became stationary and stagnant. It could not grow, because it was not allowed to change or to deviate from its classical correctness. It was haunted by its own ghost. Literary dialects, or what are commonly called classical languages, pay for their temporary greatness by inevitable decay. They are like stagnant lakes at the side of great rivers. They form reservoirs of what was once living and running speech, but they are no longer carried on by the main current. At times it may seem as if the whole stream of language was absorbed by these lakes, and we can hardly trace the small rivulets which run on in the main bed. But if lower down, that is to say, later in history, we meet again with a new body of stationary language, forming or formed, we may be sure that its tributaries were those very rivulets which for a time were almost lost from our sight. Or it may be more accurate to compare a classical or literary idiom with the frozen surface of a river, brilliant and smooth, but stiff and cold. It is mostly by political commotions that this surface of the more polite and cultivated speech is broken and carried away by the waters rising underneath. It is during times when the higher classes are either crushed in religious and social struggles, or [pg 069] mix again with the lower classes to repel foreign invasion; when literary occupations are discouraged, palaces burnt, monasteries pillaged, and seats of learning destroyed,—it is then that the popular, or, as they are called, the vulgar dialects, which had formed a kind of undercurrent, rise beneath the crystal surface of the literary language, and sweep away, like the waters in spring, the cumbrous formations of a by-gone age. In more peaceful times, a new and popular literature springs up in a language which seems to have been formed by conquests or revolutions, but which, in reality, had been growing up long before, and was only brought out, ready made, by historical events. From this point of view we can see that no literary language can ever be said to have been the mother of another language. As soon as a language loses its unbounded capability of change, its carelessness about what it throws away, and its readiness in always supplying instantaneously the wants of mind and heart, its natural life is changed into a merely artificial existence. It may still live on for a long time, but while it seems to be the leading shoot, it is in reality but a broken and withering branch, slowly falling from the stock from which it sprang. The sources of Italian are not to be found in the classical literature of Rome, but in the popular dialects of Italy. English did not spring from the Anglo-Saxon of Wessex only, but from the dialects spoken in every part of Great Britain, distinguished by local peculiarities, and modified at different times by the influence of Latin, Danish, Norman, French, and other foreign elements. Some of the local dialects of English, as spoken at the present day, are of great importance for a critical study of English, [pg 070] and a French prince, now living in this country, deserves great credit for collecting what can still be saved of English dialects. Hindustani is not the daughter of Sanskrit, as we find it in the Vedas, or in the later literature of the Brahmans: it is a branch of the living speech of India, springing from the same stem from which Sanskrit sprang, when it first assumed its literary independence.

Let’s take another look at what’s often called the history of language, but really should be referred to as the natural development of language. It primarily consists of the interplay between two principles we've just examined: sound deterioration and dialogue-driven renewal or growth. Consider the six Romance languages. They are typically called the daughters of Latin. I don't object to the terms mother and daughter when used to describe languages, but we shouldn't let these seemingly clear and straightforward terms mask obscure and vague ideas. When we refer to Italian as the daughter of Latin, we don’t mean that Italian has a new life force. Not a single new element was created for the formation of Italian. Italian is simply Latin in a new form. It is modern Latin or ancient Italian. The terms mom and kid merely indicate different stages in the development of a language that is essentially the same. To suggest that Latin died giving birth to its offspring is pure mythology, and it would be easy to show that Latin was a living language long after Italian had learned to stand on its own. We just need to be clear about what we mean by Latin. Classical Latin is one of the many dialects spoken by the Aryan inhabitants of Italy. It was the dialect of Latium, in Latium the dialect of Rome, and at Rome the dialect of the patricians. It was established by Livius Andronicus, Ennius, Nævius, Cato, and Lucretius, refined by the Scipios, Hortensius, and Cicero. It was the language of a limited class, a political group, and a literary circle. Before their time, the language of Rome must have changed and varied considerably. Polybius mentions (iii. 22) that even the most knowledgeable Romans found it difficult to understand the language of ancient treaties between Rome and Carthage. Horace admits (Ep. ii. 1, 86) that he couldn't understand the old Salian poems, and he suggests that nobody else could either. Quintilian (i. 6, 40) says that the Salian priests could hardly understand their own sacred hymns. If the plebeians had gained the upper hand over the patricians, Latin would be very different from what it is in Cicero, and we know that even Cicero, having grown up in Arpinum, had to abandon some of his regional quirks, such as dropping the final s, when he began to fit in with fashionable society and had to write for his new patrician friends.49 After becoming the language of legislation, religion, literature, and general civilization, the classical Latin dialect became fixed and stagnant. It couldn’t grow because it wasn’t allowed to change or deviate from its classical correctness. It was haunted by its own history. Literary dialects, or what we call classical languages, pay for their temporary greatness with inevitable decay. They’re like stagnant lakes beside great rivers. They form reservoirs of what was once living, flowing speech, but they are no longer sustained by the main current. At times, it may seem like the whole stream of language is absorbed by these lakes, and we can barely trace the small tributaries that continue down the main path. But if later in history we encounter a new body of fixed language, we can be sure that its tributaries were those very rivulets that for a while seemed almost lost from view. It may be more accurate to compare a classical or literary idiom to the frozen surface of a river, shiny and smooth, but stiff and cold. It is mostly political upheavals that break this polished surface of more refined and cultured speech and carry it away with the rising waters below. It’s during times when the upper classes are either crushed in social and religious struggles, or mix again with the lower classes to fight off foreign invasions; when literary pursuits are discouraged, palaces burned, monasteries looted, and centers of learning destroyed—that's when the popular, or what are called vulgar dialects, which had formed a kind of undercurrent, rise beneath the clear surface of the literary language and wash away the cumbersome formations of a past era like the spring waters. In more peaceful times, a new, popular literature emerges in a language that appears to have been shaped by conquests or revolutions, but which, in reality, had been developing long before and was only brought to light by historical events. From this perspective, we can see that no literary language can truly be considered the mother of another language. Once a language loses its limitless capacity for change, its indifference to what it discards, and its agility in always meeting the immediate mental and emotional needs of its speakers, its natural life shifts into a purely artificial existence. It can continue to exist for a long time, but while it may appear to be the leading branch, it is actually just a broken and fading limb, slowly detaching from the trunk from which it emerged. The roots of Italian cannot be found in the classical literature of Rome but in the popular dialects of Italy. English didn’t originate from only the Anglo-Saxon of Wessex but from the dialects spoken across Great Britain, characterized by local differences, and influenced at various times by Latin, Danish, Norman, French, and other foreign elements. Some of the local dialects of English spoken today are crucial for a critical study of English, and a French prince currently living in this country deserves great credit for preserving what can still be saved of English dialects. Hindustani is not the daughter of Sanskrit, as we find it in the Vedas or the later Brahman literature: it is a branch of the living speech of India, stemming from the same root from which Sanskrit originated when it first gained its literary independence.

While thus endeavoring to place the character of dialects, as the feeders of language, in a clear light, I may appear to some of my hearers to have exaggerated their importance. No doubt, if my object had been different, I might easily have shown that, without literary cultivation, language would never have acquired that settled character which is essential for the communication of thought; that it would never have fulfilled its highest purpose, but have remained the mere jargon of shy troglodytes. But as the importance of literary languages is not likely to be overlooked, whereas the importance of dialects, as far as they sustain the growth of language, had never been pointed out, I thought it better to dwell on the advantages which literary languages derive from dialects, rather than on the benefits which dialects owe to literary languages. Besides, our chief object to-day was to explain the growth of language, and for that purpose it is impossible to exaggerate the importance of the constant undergrowth of dialects. Remove a language from its native soil, tear it away from the dialects which are its feeders, and you arrest at once its natural growth. There will still be the progress of phonetic corruption, but no longer the restoring influence of dialectic regeneration. The language which the Norwegian refugees brought to [pg 071] Iceland has remained almost the same for seven centuries, whereas on its native soil, and surrounded by local dialects, it has grown into two distinct languages, the Swedish and Danish. In the eleventh century, the languages of Sweden, Denmark, and Iceland are supposed50 to have been identical, nor can we appeal to foreign conquest, or to the admixture of foreign with native blood, in order to account for the changes which the language underwent in Sweden and Denmark, but not in Iceland.51

While trying to clarify the role of dialects as the building blocks of language, I may come across as exaggerating their significance to some listeners. It's true that if I had a different focus, I could easily illustrate that without literary development, language wouldn’t have achieved the stable nature necessary for effective communication; it would have remained just a disorganized collection of sounds of isolated individuals. However, since the value of literary languages is unlikely to be overlooked, whereas the role of dialects in supporting language growth hasn’t been thoroughly discussed, I chose to emphasize the benefits that literary languages gain from dialects rather than the advantages that dialects receive from literary languages. Additionally, our main goal today was to explore how language evolves, and in that context, it's impossible to overstate the significance of the continuous support provided by dialects. If you remove a language from its native environment and separate it from the dialects that nourish it, you immediately halt its natural development. There would still be some phonetic changes, but no longer the revitalizing force of dialectal regeneration. The language that the Norwegian refugees brought to [pg 071] Iceland has remained almost unchanged for seven centuries, while on its home ground, surrounded by local dialects, it has evolved into two distinct languages: Swedish and Danish. In the eleventh century, the languages spoken in Sweden, Denmark, and Iceland are believed to have been the same, and we cannot attribute the changes in Sweden and Denmark's language to foreign invasions or the mixing of different ethnicities, as these shifts did not occur in Iceland.

We can hardly form an idea of the unbounded resources of dialects. When literary languages have stereotyped one general term, their dialects will supply fifty, though each with its own special shade of meaning. If new combinations of thought are evolved in the progress of society, dialects will readily supply the required names from the store of their so-called superfluous words. There are not only local and provincial, but also class dialects. There is a dialect of shepherds, of sportsmen, of soldiers, of farmers. I suppose there are few persons here present who could tell the exact meaning of a horse's poll, crest, withers, dock, hamstring, cannon, pastern, coronet, arm, jowl, and muzzle. Where the literary language speaks of the young of all sorts of animals, farmers, shepherds, and sportsmen would be ashamed to use so general a term.

We can hardly grasp the endless variety of dialects. When standard literary languages settle on one general term, their dialects will offer fifty options, each with its own unique nuance. As society evolves and gives rise to new ideas, dialects will easily come up with the needed names from their so-called surplus of words. There are not only local and regional dialects but also dialects specific to different social classes. There’s a dialect for shepherds, for sports enthusiasts, for soldiers, and for farmers. I bet there are few people here who could accurately define terms like a horse's poll, crest, withers, dock, hamstring, cannon, pastern, coronet, arm, jowl, and muzzle. While the literary language talks about the young of various animals, farmers, shepherds, and sports enthusiasts would be embarrassed to use such a broad term.

“The idiom of nomads,” as Grimm says, “contains an abundant wealth of manifold expressions for sword and weapons, and for the different stages in the life of [pg 072] their cattle. In a more highly cultivated language these expressions become burthensome and superfluous. But, in a peasant's mouth, the bearing, calving, falling, and killing of almost every animal has its own peculiar term, as the sportsman delights in calling the gait and members of game by different names. The eye of these shepherds, who live in the free air, sees further, their ear hears more sharply,—why should their speech not have gained that living truth and variety?”

“The way nomads talk,” as Grimm puts it, “is filled with a rich variety of terms for swords and weapons, as well as for the different stages in the lives of [pg 072] their livestock. In more refined language, these terms may seem cumbersome and excessive. However, for a farmer, the processes of birthing, calving, dying, and slaughtering almost every animal have their unique names, just as a hunter enjoys using different names for the movements and characteristics of game. The eyes of these shepherds, who live outdoors, see more clearly, and their ears hear more keenly—so why shouldn’t their language express that vibrant truth and diversity?”

Thus Juliana Berners, lady prioress of the nunnery of Sopwell in the fifteenth century, the reputed author of the book of St. Albans, informs us that we must not use names of multitudes promiscuously, but we are to say, “a congregacyon of people, a hoost of men, a felyshyppynge of yomen, and a bevy of ladies; we must speak of a herde of dere, swannys, cranys, or wrenys, a sege of herons or bytourys, a muster of pecockes, a watche of nyghtyngales, a flyghte of doves, a claterynge of choughes, a pryde of lyons, a slewthe of beeres, a gagle of geys, a skulke of foxes, a sculle of frerys, a pontificality of prestys, a bomynable syght of monkes, and a superfluyte of nonnes,” and so of other human and brute assemblages. In like manner, in dividing game for the table, the animals were not carved, but “a dere was broken, a gose reryd, chekyn frusshed, a cony unlaced, a crane dysplayed, a curlewe unioynted, a quayle wynggyd, a swanne lyfte, a lambe sholdered, a heron dysmembryd, a pecocke dysfygured, a samon chynyd, a hadoke sydyd, a sole loynyd, and a breme splayed.”52

Thus, Juliana Berners, the lady prioress of the nunnery of Sopwell in the fifteenth century and the supposed author of the Book of St. Albans, tells us that we shouldn't use names for groups casually, but instead we should say, "a group of people, a bunch of men, a community of commoners, and a gathering of women; we should say a herd of deer, swans, cranes, or wrens, a sedge of herons or bitterns, a muster of peacocks, a watch of nightingales, a flight of doves, a clattering of choughs, a pride of lions, a sleuth of bears, a gaggle of geese, a skulk of foxes, a school of fairies, a group of priests, a disturbing sight of monks, and a surplus of nuns," and so forth for other assemblies of humans and animals. Similarly, when dividing game for the table, the animals were not carved, but "a deer was taken down, a goose was prepared, the chicken was fluffed, a rabbit was uncoiled, a crane was spread out, a curlew was butchered, a quail was dressed, a swan was picked up, a lamb was shouldered, a heron was cut up, a peacock was altered, a salmon was filleted, a haddock was sliced, a sole was skinned, and a bream was laid out."52

What, however, I wanted particularly to point out in this lecture is this, that neither of the causes which [pg 073] produce the growth, or, according to others, constitute the history of language, is under the control of man. The phonetic decay of language is not the result of mere accident; it is governed by definite laws, as we shall see when we come to consider the principles of comparative grammar. But these laws were not made by man; on the contrary, man had to obey them without knowing of their existence.

What I especially want to highlight in this lecture is that neither of the factors that lead to the growth of language, or as others say, define its history, are under human control. The natural decay of language doesn’t happen by chance; it's governed by specific laws, as we’ll discuss when we look at the principles of comparative grammar. But these laws weren’t created by humans; instead, people had to follow them without even being aware of their existence.

In the growth of the modern Romance languages out of Latin, we can perceive not only a general tendency to simplification, not only a natural disposition to avoid the exertion which the pronunciation of certain consonants, and still more, of groups of consonants, entails on the speaker: but we can see distinct laws for each of the Romance dialects, which enable us to say, that in French the Latin patrem would naturally grow into the modern père. The final m is always dropped in the Romance dialects, and it was dropped even in Latin. Thus we get patre instead of patrem. Now, a Latin t between two vowels in such words as pater is invariably suppressed in French. This is a law, and by means of it we can discover at once that catena must become chaine; fata, a later feminine representation of the old neuter fatum, fée; pratum a meadow, pré. From pratum we derive prataria, which in French becomes prairie; from fatum, fataria, the English fairy. Thus every Latin participle in atus, like amatus, loved, must end in French in é. The same law then changed patre(pronounced pa-tere) into paere, or père; it changed matrem into mère, fratrem into frère. These changes take place gradually but irresistibly, and, what is most important, they are completely beyond the reach or control of the free will of man.

In the development of modern Romance languages from Latin, we can see not just a general trend towards simplification and a natural tendency to avoid the effort required to pronounce certain consonants, especially groups of consonants, but also specific rules for each Romance dialect. For example, in French, the Latin father naturally evolves into the modern dad. The final m is consistently dropped in the Romance dialects, and it was even dropped in Latin. Thus we get patreon instead of father. Now, a Latin t between two vowels, as in dad, is always dropped in French. This is a rule, and thanks to it, we can immediately see that chain turns into chain; fate, a later feminine version of the old neuter fate, becomes fairy; meadow (a meadow) becomes pré. From field we derive prataria, which in French becomes grassland; from fate, fataria, which gives us the English fairy. Thus, every Latin participle ending in atus, like loved (loved), must end in French with é. The same rule then transformed patre (pronounced pa-tere) into paere, or dad; it turned mother into mom, and brother into brother. These changes occur gradually but inevitably, and most importantly, they are entirely beyond the reach or control of human free will.

[pg 074]

Dialectical growth again is still more beyond the control of individuals. For although a poet may knowingly and intentionally invent a new word, its acceptance depends on circumstances which defy individual interference. There are some changes in the grammar which at first sight might seem to be mainly attributable to the caprice of the speaker. Granted, for instance, that the loss of the Latin terminations was the natural result of a more careless pronunciation; granted that the modern sign of the French genitive du is a natural corruption of the Latin de illo,—yet the choice of de, instead of any other word, to express the genitive, the choice of illo, instead of any other pronoun, to express the article, might seem to prove that man acted as a free agent in the formation of language. But it is not so. No single individual could deliberately have set to work in order to abolish the old Latin genitive, and to replace it by the periphrastic compound de illo. It was necessary that the inconvenience of having no distinct or distinguishable sign of the genitive should have been felt by the people who spoke a vulgar Latin dialect. It was necessary that the same people should have used the preposition de in such a manner as to lose sight of its original local meaning altogether (for instance, una de multis, in Horace, i.e., one out of many). It was necessary, again, that the same people should have felt the want of an article, and should have used illo in numerous expressions, where it seemed to have lost its original pronominal power. It was necessary that all these conditions should be given, before one individual and after him another, and after him hundreds and thousands and millions, could use [pg 075] de illo as the exponent of the genitive; and change it into the Italian dello, del, and the French du.

Dialectical growth is definitely beyond individual control. While a poet might create a new word on purpose, its acceptance relies on circumstances that individuals can’t influence. Some grammatical changes might initially appear to be the result of the speaker's whims. For example, the loss of Latin endings could be seen as a natural outcome of more casual pronunciation; or the modern French sign for the genitive du could be viewed as a natural corruption of the Latin from that. However, the decision to use de instead of any other word for the genitive, or to use illo instead of another pronoun for the article, might suggest that humans acted freely in shaping language. But that’s not the case. No single person could intentionally set out to eliminate the old Latin genitive and replace it with the periphrastic compound de illo. It was necessary for the speakers of a vulgar Latin dialect to find the lack of a distinct genitive marker inconvenient. They needed to have used the preposition de in a way that completely lost its original local meaning (for instance, one of many, in Horace, i.e., one out of many). Additionally, the same people had to feel the need for an article and had to use illo in many expressions where it seemed to have lost its original pronoun-like function. All these conditions had to be present before one individual, then another, and later hundreds, thousands, and millions could use from there to represent the genitive and then change it into the Italian hello, del, and the French du.

The attempts of single grammarians and purists to improve language are perfectly bootless; and we shall probably hear no more of schemes to prune languages of their irregularities. It is very likely, however, that the gradual disappearance of irregular declensions and conjugations is due, in literary as well as in illiterate languages, to the dialect of children. The language of children is more regular than our own. I have heard children say badder and baddest, instead of worse and worst. Children will say, I gaed, I coomd, I catched; and it is this sense of grammatical justice, this generous feeling of what ought to be, which in the course of centuries has eliminated many so-called irregular forms. Thus the auxiliary verb in Latin was very irregular. If sumus is we are, and sunt, they are, the second person, you are, ought to have been, at least according to the strict logic of children, sutis. This, no doubt, sounds very barbarous to a classical ear accustomed to estis. And we see how French, for instance, has strictly preserved the Latin forms in nous sommes, vous êtes, ils sont. But in Spanish we find somos, sois, son; and this sois stands for sutis. We find similar traces of grammatical levelling in the Italian siamo, siete, sono, formed in analogy of regular verbs such as crediamo, credete, credono. The second person, sei, instead of es, is likewise infantine grammar. So are the Wallachian súntemu, we are, súnteti, you are, which owe their origin to the third person plural súnt, they are. And what shall we say of such monsters as essendo, a gerund derived on principles of strict justice from an infinitive essere, like credendo from credere!

The efforts of individual grammarians and language purists to improve language are completely pointless; we will likely see no more proposals to simplify languages by removing their irregularities. However, it’s highly probable that the gradual loss of irregular declensions and conjugations in both literary and everyday spoken languages is influenced by the way children speak. Children’s language tends to be more regular than ours. I've heard kids say worse and toughest instead of worse and worst. Kids will say, I went, I came, I caught; and it’s this instinct for grammatical fairness, this genuine sense of what should be, that over the centuries has eliminated many so-called irregular forms. For example, the auxiliary verb in Latin was very irregular. If sumus means we're, and sunt, they're, then the second person, you're, should logically be sweets according to the strict logic of children. This may sound quite strange to someone accustomed to classical Latin estis. Additionally, we can see how French has faithfully retained the Latin forms in we are, you are, they are. In contrast, Spanish uses we are, be, son; and this be corresponds to sutis. We find similar signs of grammatical regularization in Italian with we are, seven, they are, formed based on regular verbs like we believe, believe, credit. The second person, sei, instead of es, also reflects childlike grammar. The same applies to the Wallachian súntemu for we are, sunteti for you are, which are derived from the third person plural sunt, meaning they are. And what can we say about such odd constructions like essendo, a gerund formed by strict logic from the infinitive be, similar to believing from believe?

[pg 076]

However, we need not be surprised, for we find similar barbarisms in English. Even in Anglo-Saxon, the third person plural, sind, has by a false analogy been transferred to the first and second persons; and instead of the modern English,

However, we shouldn't be surprised, as we see similar mistakes in English. Even in Old English, the third person plural, sind, has inaccurately been applied to the first and second persons; and instead of modern English,

in Old Norse.in Gothic.
we areër-umsijum53
you arewe findër-udhsijuth
they areër-u.sind.

Dialectically we hear I be, instead of I am; and if Chartism should ever gain the upper hand, we must be prepared for newspapers adopting such forms as I says, I knows.

Dialectically, we hear I am instead of I'm; and if Chartism ever becomes dominant, we need to be ready for newspapers using forms like I say and I know.

These various influences and conditions under which language grows and changes, are like the waves and winds which carry deposits to the bottom of the sea, where they accumulate, and rise, and grow, and at last appear on the surface of the earth as a stratum, perfectly intelligible in all its component parts, not produced by an inward principle of growth, nor regulated by invariable laws of nature; yet, on the other hand, by no means the result of mere accident, or the production of lawless and uncontrolled agencies. We cannot be careful enough in the use of our words. Strictly speaking, neither history nor growth is applicable to the changes of the shifting surface of the earth. History applies to the actions of free agents; growth to the natural unfolding of organic beings. We speak, however, of the growth of the crust of the earth, and we know what we mean by it; and it is in this sense, [pg 077] but not in the sense of growth as applied to a tree, that we have a right to speak of the growth of language. If that modification which takes place in time by continually new combinations of given elements, which withdraws itself from the control of free agents, and can in the end be recognized as the result of natural agencies, may be called growth; and if so defined, we may apply it to the growth of the crust of the earth; the same word, in the same sense, will be applicable to language, and will justify us in removing the science of language from the pale of the historical to that of the physical sciences.

These various influences and conditions under which language grows and changes are like the waves and winds that carry deposits to the sea floor, where they accumulate, rise, and grow, eventually appearing on the earth's surface as a layer that's completely understandable in all its parts, not created by an internal growth principle nor governed by unchanging laws of nature; yet, on the other hand, not merely the result of randomness or the actions of uncontrolled forces. We must be very careful with our words. Strictly speaking, neither history nor growth truly applies to the changes of the shifting earth's surface. History refers to the actions of free agents; growth refers to the natural development of living beings. However, we do talk about the growth of the earth's crust, and we understand what we mean by it; and it's in this sense, [pg 077] but not in the sense of growth as applied to a tree, that we are justified in discussing the growth of language. If that change which occurs over time through constantly new combinations of given elements, which escapes the control of free agents, and can ultimately be recognized as the result of natural forces, is called growth; and if we define it this way, we may apply it to the growth of the earth's crust; the same term, in the same context, will also apply to language, allowing us to categorize the study of language within the realm of physical sciences rather than history.

There is another objection which we have to consider, and the consideration of which will again help us to understand more clearly the real character of language. The great periods in the growth of the earth which have been established by geological research are brought to their close, or very nearly so, when we discover the first vestiges of human life, and when the history of man, in the widest sense of the word, begins. The periods in the growth of language, on the contrary, begin and run parallel with the history of man. It has been said, therefore, that although language may not be merely a work of art, it would, nevertheless, be impossible to understand the life and growth of any language without an historical knowledge of the times in which that language grew up. We ought to know, it is said, whether a language which is to be analyzed under the microscope of comparative grammar, has been growing up wild, among wild tribes, without a literature, oral or written, in poetry or in prose; or whether it has received the cultivation of poets, priests, and orators, and retained the [pg 078] impress of a classical age. Again, it is only from the annals of political history that we can learn whether one language has come in contact with another, how long this contact has lasted, which of the two nations stood higher in civilization, which was the conquering and which the conquered, which of the two established the laws, the religion, and the arts of the country, and which produced the greatest number of national teachers, popular poets, and successful demagogues. All these questions are of a purely historical character, and the science which has to borrow so much from historical sources, might well be considered an anomaly in the sphere of the physical sciences.

There’s another objection we need to consider, and thinking about it will again help us understand the true nature of language more clearly. The major periods in the Earth’s history identified by geological research are nearly at an end when we first find evidence of human life, marking the beginning of human history in the broadest sense. In contrast, the development of language starts and runs alongside human history. It’s been said that while language may not simply be a work of art, it’s impossible to fully grasp the life and evolution of any language without understanding the historical context in which it developed. We need to know whether a language we are analyzing through comparative grammar has evolved organically among wild tribes, with no oral or written literature, poetry, or prose; or if it has been refined by poets, priests, and speakers while retaining the influence of a classical era. Additionally, we can only learn from political history whether one language has influenced another, how long that influence lasted, which nation was more advanced, which was the conqueror and which the conquered, who established the laws, religion, and arts of the region, and which produced the most national teachers, popular poets, and effective demagogues. All these questions are purely historical, and since this field relies heavily on historical sources, it could easily be seen as an anomaly among the physical sciences.

Now, in answer to this, it cannot be denied that among the physical sciences none is so intimately connected with the history of man as the science of language. But a similar connection, though in a less degree, can be shown to exist between other branches of physical research and the history of man. In zoölogy, for instance, it is of some importance to know at what particular period of history, in what country, and for what purposes certain animals were tamed and domesticated. In ethnology, a science, we may remark in passing, quite distinct from the science of language, it would be difficult to account for the Caucasian stamp impressed on the Mongolian race in Hungary, or on the Tatar race in Turkey, unless we knew from written documents the migrations and settlements of the Mongolic and Tataric tribes in Europe. A botanist, again, comparing several specimens of rye, would find it difficult to account for their respective peculiarities, unless he knew that in some parts of the world this plant has been cultivated for centuries, [pg 079] whereas in other regions, as, for instance, in Mount Caucasus, it is still allowed to grow wild. Plants have their own countries, like races, and the presence of the cucumber in Greece, the orange and cherry in Italy, the potatoe in England, and the vine at the Cape, can be fully explained by the historian only. The more intimate relation, therefore, between the history of language and the history of man is not sufficient to exclude the science of language from the circle of the physical sciences.

Now, in response to this, it can't be denied that among the physical sciences, none is as closely tied to human history as the science of language. However, a similar connection, though to a lesser extent, can be demonstrated between other areas of physical research and human history. In zoology, for example, it matters to know during which specific period of history, in which country, and for what reasons certain animals were tamed and domesticated. In ethnology, a field that is, we should note, quite distinct from the science of language, it would be challenging to explain the Caucasian traits seen in the Mongolian race in Hungary or the Tatar race in Turkey unless we relied on written documents detailing the migrations and settlements of Mongolic and Tataric tribes in Europe. A botanist, when comparing several samples of rye, would struggle to explain their unique characteristics unless he knew that in some areas of the world, this plant has been cultivated for centuries, while in other places, like Mount Caucasus, it is still allowed to grow wild. Plants have their own territories, like races, and the presence of the cucumber in Greece, the orange and cherry in Italy, the potato in England, and the vine at the Cape can only be fully explained by historians. Thus, the closer relationship between the history of language and human history does not exclude the science of language from the realm of physical sciences.

Nay, it might be shown, that, if strictly defined, the science of language can declare itself completely independent of history. If we speak of the language of England, we ought, no doubt, to know something of the political history of the British Isles, in order to understand the present state of that language. Its history begins with the early Britons, who spoke a Celtic dialect; it carries us on to the Saxon conquest, to the Danish invasions, to the Norman conquest: and we see how each of these political events contributed to the formation of the character of the language. The language of England may be said to have been in succession Celtic, Saxon, Norman, and English. But if we speak of the history of the English language, we enter on totally different ground. The English language was never Celtic, the Celtic never grew into Saxon, nor the Saxon into Norman, nor the Norman into English. The history of the Celtic language runs on to the present day. It matters not whether it be spoken by all the inhabitants of the British Isles, or only by a small minority in Wales, Ireland, and Scotland. A language, as long as it is spoken by anybody, lives and has its substantive existence. The last [pg 080] old woman that spoke Cornish, and to whose memory it is now intended to raise a monument, represented by herself alone the ancient language of Cornwall. A Celt may become an Englishman, Celtic and English blood may be mixed; and who could tell at the present day the exact proportion of Celtic and Saxon blood in the population of England? But languages are never mixed. It is indifferent by what name the language spoken in the British Islands be called, whether English or British or Saxon; to the student of language English is Teutonic, and nothing but Teutonic. The physiologist may protest, and point out that in many instances the skull, or the bodily habitat of the English language, is of a Celtic type; the genealogist may protest and prove that the arms of many an English family are of Norman origin; the student of language must follow his own way. Historical information as to an early substratum of Celtic inhabitants in Britain, as to Saxon, Danish, and Norman invasions may be useful to him. But though every record were burned, and every skull mouldered, the English language, as spoken by any ploughboy, would reveal its own history, if analyzed according to the rules of comparative grammar. Without the help of history, we should see that English is Teutonic, that like Dutch and Friesian it belongs to the Low-German branch; that this branch, together with the High-German, Gothic, and Scandinavian branches, constitute the Teutonic class; that this Teutonic class, together with the Celtic, Slavonic, the Hellenic, Italic, Iranic, and Indic classes constitute the great Indo-European or Aryan family of speech. In the English dictionary the student of the science of language [pg 081] can detect, by his own tests, Celtic, Norman, Greek, and Latin ingredients, but not a single drop of foreign blood has entered into the organic system of the English language. The grammar, the blood and soul of the language, is as pure and unmixed in English as spoken in the British Isles, as it was when spoken on the shores of the German Ocean by the Angles, Saxons, and Juts of the continent.

No, it can be shown that, if precisely defined, the science of language can stand completely apart from history. When we talk about the language of England, we definitely need to know something about the political history of the British Isles to understand the current state of that language. Its history starts with the early Britons, who spoke a Celtic dialect; it takes us through the Saxon conquest, the Danish invasions, and the Norman conquest: and we see how each of these political events influenced the formation of the language. The language of England can be described as having been, in order, Celtic, Saxon, Norman, and English. But when we look at the history of the English language, we're on completely different ground. The English language was never Celtic, the Celtic never evolved into Saxon, nor did Saxon become Norman, nor did Norman become English. The history of the Celtic language continues to this day. It doesn't matter whether it's spoken by everyone in the British Isles or just a small minority in Wales, Ireland, and Scotland. A language, as long as someone speaks it, lives and has its own existence. The last old woman who spoke Cornish, and to whose memory a monument is now intended to be raised, represented the ancient language of Cornwall all by herself. A Celt can become an Englishman, Celtic and English ancestry can mix; and who could accurately determine today the exact proportion of Celtic and Saxon ancestry in the population of England? But languages never mix. It doesn’t matter what the language spoken in the British Isles is called, whether English, British, or Saxon; to a language student, English is Teutonic, and nothing else. The physiologist might object, pointing out that in many cases the structure related to the English language is of a Celtic type; the genealogist might argue and prove that the lineage of many English families is of Norman origin; but the language student must stick to their own study. Historical knowledge about the early Celtic inhabitants of Britain, as well as the Saxon, Danish, and Norman invasions, may be helpful for them. However, even if every record were destroyed and every skull decayed, the English language, as spoken by any farmer, would reveal its own history if analyzed according to the principles of comparative grammar. Without historical context, we would see that English is Teutonic, that like Dutch and Friesian, it belongs to the Low German branch; that this branch, along with the High German, Gothic, and Scandinavian branches, forms the Teutonic class; and that this Teutonic class, along with the Celtic, Slavonic, Hellenic, Italic, Iranian, and Indic classes, makes up the vast Indo-European or Aryan family of languages. In the English dictionary, the language student can find, through their own examination, Celtic, Norman, Greek, and Latin influences, but not a single drop of foreign blood has entered the organic structure of the English language. The grammar, the essence and spirit of the language, is as pure and unmixed in English as it is spoken in the British Isles, as it was when spoken along the shores of the German Ocean by the Angles, Saxons, and Jutes on the continent.

In thus considering and refuting the objections which have been, or might be, made against the admission of the science of language into the circle of the physical sciences, we have arrived at some results which it may be useful to recapitulate before we proceed further. We saw that whereas philology treats language only as a means, comparative philology chooses language as the object of scientific inquiry. It is not the study of one language, but of many, and in the end of all, which forms the aim of this new science. Nor is the language of Homer of greater interest, in the scientific treatment of human speech, than the dialect of the Hottentots.

In considering and addressing the objections that have been, or could be, raised against including the study of language in the realm of physical sciences, we have come to some conclusions that it may be helpful to summarize before moving on. We observed that while philology views language merely as a tool, comparative philology takes language as the focus of scientific study. This new field aims not just to study one language, but many, ultimately encompassing all languages. Additionally, the language of Homer holds no more scientific significance for understanding human speech than the dialect of the Hottentots.

We saw, secondly, that after the first practical acquisition and careful analysis of the facts and forms of any language, the next and most important step is the classification of all the varieties of human speech, and that only after this has been accomplished would it be safe to venture on the great questions which underlie all physical research, the questions as to the what, the whence, and the why of language.

We observed, secondly, that after initially acquiring and thoroughly analyzing the facts and structures of any language, the next and most important step is to categorize all the different types of human speech. Only after achieving this can we safely explore the significant questions that underpin all physical research, such as what language is, where it comes from, and why it exists.

We saw, thirdly, that there is a distinction between what is called history and growth. We determined the true meaning of growth, as applied to language, and perceived how it was independent of the caprice of [pg 082] man, and governed by laws that could be discovered by careful observation, and be traced back in the end to higher laws, which govern the organs both of human thought, and of the human voice. Though admitting that the science of language was more intimately connected than any other physical science with what is called the political history of man, we found that, strictly speaking, our science might well dispense with this auxiliary, and that languages can be analyzed and classified on their own evidence particularly on the strength of their grammatical articulation, without any reference to the individuals, families, clans, tribes, nations, or races by whom they are or have been spoken.

We observed, thirdly, that there’s a difference between what we call history and growth. We clarified the true meaning of growth as it relates to language and recognized that it is independent of individual whims and instead governed by laws that can be uncovered through careful observation, ultimately linking back to higher principles that regulate both human thought and the human voice. While we acknowledged that the science of language is more closely related than any other physical science to what we refer to as the political history of humanity, we also found that, in strict terms, our science could function independently of this connection. Languages can be analyzed and categorized based solely on their own characteristics, particularly their grammatical structure, without needing to reference the individuals, families, clans, tribes, nations, or races that speak or have spoken them.

In the course of these considerations, we had to lay down two axioms, to which we shall frequently have to appeal in the progress of our investigations. The first declares grammar to be the most essential element, and therefore the ground of classification in all languages which have produced a definite grammatical articulation; the second denies the possibility of a mixed language.

In the course of these considerations, we had to establish two key principles that we will often refer to as we continue our investigations. The first states that grammar is the most essential element and serves as the basis for classification in all languages that have developed a clear grammatical structure; the second asserts that a mixed language is not possible.

These two axioms are, in reality, but one, as we shall see when we examine them more closely. There is hardly a language which in one sense may not be called a mixed language. No nation or tribe was ever so completely isolated as not to admit the importation of a certain number of foreign words. In some instances these imported words have changed the whole native aspect of the language, and have even acquired a majority over the native element. Turkish is a Turanian dialect; its grammar is purely Tataric or Turanian. The Turks, however, possessed [pg 083] but a small literature and narrow civilization before they were converted to Mohammedanism. Now, the language of Mohammed was Arabic, a branch of the Semitic family, closely allied to Hebrew and Syriac. Together with the Koran, and their law and religion, the Turks learned from the Arabs, their conquerors, many of the arts and sciences connected with a more advanced stage of civilization. Arabic became to the Turks what Latin was to the Germans during the Middle Ages; and there is hardly a word in the higher intellectual terminology of Arabic, that might not be used, more or less naturally, by a writer in Turkish. But the Arabs, again, at the very outset of their career of conquest and conversion, had been, in science, art, literature, and polite manners, the pupils of the Persians, whom they had conquered; they stood to them in the same relation as the Romans stood to the Greeks. Now, the Persians speak a language which is neither Semitic, like Arabic, nor Turanian, like Turkish; it is a branch of the Indo-European or Aryan family of speech. A large infusion of Persian words thus found its way into Arabic, and through Arabic into Turkish; and the result is that at the present moment the Turkish language, as spoken by the higher ranks at Constantinople, is so entirely overgrown with Persian and Arabic words, that a common clod from the country understands but little of the so-called Osmanli, though its grammar is exactly the same as the grammar which he uses in his Tataric utterance.

These two principles are essentially the same, as we’ll see when we look at them more closely. Almost any language can be considered a mixed language in some way. No nation or tribe has ever been so completely isolated that it didn't adopt a certain number of foreign words. In some cases, these borrowed words have completely transformed the native character of the language and even outnumbered the native elements. Turkish is a Turanian dialect; its grammar is purely Tataric or Turanian. However, before converting to Islam, the Turks had a limited literature and a narrow civilization. The language of Muhammad was Arabic, a branch of the Semitic family, closely related to Hebrew and Syriac. Along with the Koran, and their laws and religion, the Turks learned from the Arabs, their conquerors, many of the arts and sciences that come with a more advanced civilization. Arabic became for the Turks what Latin was for the Germans during the Middle Ages; there’s hardly a term in Arabic’s higher intellectual vocabulary that a Turkish writer wouldn’t be able to use, more or less naturally. But the Arabs, at the start of their conquest and conversion, were students of Persian science, art, literature, and cultured manners, having conquered them; they were to the Persians what the Romans were to the Greeks. Now, the Persians speak a language that is neither Semitic like Arabic nor Turanian like Turkish; it belongs to the Indo-European or Aryan family of languages. As a result, a significant number of Persian words entered Arabic, and through Arabic into Turkish. The current Turkish language spoken by the elite in Constantinople is so heavily infused with Persian and Arabic words that a common farmer from the countryside understands very little of the so-called Osmanli, even though its grammar is exactly the same as the grammar he uses in his Tataric speech.

There is, perhaps, no language so full of words evidently derived from the most distant sources as English. Every country of the globe seems to have brought some of its verbal manufactures to the intellectual market of [pg 084] England. Latin, Greek, Hebrew, Celtic, Saxon, Danish, French, Spanish, Italian, German—nay, even Hindustani, Malay, and Chinese words, lie mixed together in the English dictionary. On the evidence of words alone it would be impossible to classify English with any other of the established stocks and stems of human speech. Leaving out of consideration the smaller ingredients, we find, on comparing the Teutonic with the Latin, or Neo-Latin or Norman elements in English, that the latter have a decided majority over the home-grown Saxon terms. This may seem incredible; and if we simply took a page of any English book, and counted therein the words of purely Saxon and Latin origin, the majority would be no doubt on the Saxon side. The articles, pronouns, prepositions, and auxiliary verbs, all of which are of Saxon growth, occur over and over again in one and the same page. Thus, Hickes maintained that nine tenths of the English dictionary were Saxon, because there were only three words of Latin origin in the Lord's prayer. Sharon Turner, who extended his observations over a larger field, came to the conclusion that the relation of Norman to Saxon was as four to six. Another writer, who estimates the whole number of English words at 38,000, assigns 23,000 to a Saxon, and 15,000 to a classical source. On taking, however, a more accurate inventory, and counting every word in the dictionaries of Robertson and Webster, M. Thommerel has established the fact that of the sum total of 43,566 words, 29,853 came from classical, 13,230 from Teutonic, and the rest from miscellaneous sources.54 On the [pg 085] evidence of its dictionary, therefore, and treating English as a mixed language, it would have to be classified together with French, Italian, and Spanish, as one of the Romance or Neo-Latin dialects. Languages, however, though mixed in their dictionary, can never be mixed in their grammar. Hervas was told by missionaries that in the middle of the eighteenth century the Araucans used hardly a single word which was not Spanish, though they preserved both the grammar and the syntax of their own native speech.55 This is the reason why grammar is made the criterion of the relationship and the base of the classification in almost all languages; and it follows, therefore, as a matter of course, that in the classification and in the science of language, it is impossible to admit the existence of a mixed idiom. We may form whole sentences in English consisting entirely of Latin or Romance words; yet whatever there is left of grammar in English bears unmistakable traces of Teutonic workmanship. What may now be called grammar in English is little more than the terminations of the genitive singular, and nominative plural of nouns, the degrees of comparison, and a few of the persons and tenses of the verb. Yet the single s, used as the exponent of the third person singular of the indicative present, is irrefragable evidence that in a scientific classification of languages, English, though it did not retain a single word of Saxon origin, would have [pg 086] to be classed as Saxon, and as a branch of the great Teutonic stem of the Aryan family of speech. In ancient and less matured languages, grammar, or the formal part of human speech, is far more abundantly developed than in English; and it is, therefore, a much safer guide for discovering a family likeness in scattered members of the same family. There are languages in which there is no trace of what we are accustomed to call grammar; for instance, ancient Chinese; there are others in which we can still watch the growth of grammar, or, more correctly, the gradual lapse of material into merely formal elements. In these languages new principles of classification will have to be applied, such as are suggested by the study of natural history; and we shall have to be satisfied with the criteria of a morphological affinity, instead of those of a genealogical relationship.

There’s probably no language so full of words clearly derived from the most distant sources as English. Every country in the world seems to have contributed some of its words to the intellectual marketplace of [pg 084] England. Latin, Greek, Hebrew, Celtic, Saxon, Danish, French, Spanish, Italian, German—indeed, even Hindustani, Malay, and Chinese words are mixed together in the English dictionary. Based on the words alone, it would be impossible to classify English alongside any other established language family. If we focus on the larger elements, we can see that when comparing the Teutonic roots with the Latin, Neo-Latin, or Norman elements in English, the latter have a clear majority over the homegrown Saxon terms. This may seem unbelievable; and if we simply took a page from any English book and counted the words of pure Saxon and Latin origin, the majority would undoubtedly lean toward the Saxon side. The articles, pronouns, prepositions, and auxiliary verbs, all of which are of Saxon origin, appear repeatedly on the same page. Thus, Hickes argued that nine-tenths of the English dictionary was Saxon, because there were only three Latin words in the Lord’s Prayer. Sharon Turner, who expanded his observations to a larger context, concluded that the ratio of Norman to Saxon was four to six. Another writer, estimating the total number of English words at 38,000, assigns 23,000 to Saxon and 15,000 to classical origins. However, taking a more accurate count and reviewing every word in the dictionaries of Robertson and Webster, M. Thommerel found that out of a total of 43,566 words, 29,853 came from classical sources, 13,230 from Teutonic, and the rest from various origins.54 Based on its dictionary, and considering English as a mixed language, it would need to be classified alongside French, Italian, and Spanish as one of the Romance or Neo-Latin dialects. However, languages can be mixed in their vocabulary but remain distinct in their grammar. Hervas was informed by missionaries that in the mid-eighteenth century, the Araucans used hardly any words that weren’t Spanish, though they maintained both the grammar and syntax of their native language.55 This is why grammar is used as the standard for determining relationships and classification in nearly all languages; thus, in linguistic classification and study, it's impossible to recognize a mixed dialect. We can create entire sentences in English that are composed entirely of Latin or Romance words; yet whatever grammar remains in English reflects clear Teutonic origins. What we now consider grammar in English is little more than the endings of the genitive singular and nominative plural of nouns, the degrees of comparison, and a few verb forms and tenses. However, the single s, used as the marker for the third person singular in the present tense, raises undeniable evidence that in a scientific classification of languages, English, even without a single word of Saxon origin, would still have to be categorized as Saxon and as a branch of the great Teutonic family of the Aryan language family. In ancient and less developed languages, the structure of language or the formal aspects of human speech is much more thoroughly developed than in English, making it a more reliable guide for identifying family resemblances among the different branches. There are languages that leave no trace of what we know as grammar; for example, ancient Chinese; and there are others where we can still observe the evolution of grammar, or, more accurately, the gradual transition from substantive to purely formal elements. In these languages, new classification principles will need to be applied, similar to those suggested by the study of natural history; and we will need to be content with morphological affinities rather than genealogical relationships.

I have thus answered, I hope, some of the objections which threatened to deprive the science of language of that place which she claims in the circle of the physical sciences. We shall see in our next lecture what the history of our science has been from its beginning to the present day, and how far it may be said to have passed through the three stages, the empirical, the classificatory, and the theoretical, which mark the childhood, the youth, and the manhood of every one of the natural sciences.

I hope I've addressed some of the objections that could undermine the position of language science within the realm of physical sciences. In our next lecture, we will explore the history of our field from its inception to today, and examine how it has progressed through the three stages—empirical, classificatory, and theoretical—that signify the childhood, youth, and adulthood of all natural sciences.

[pg 087]

Lecture III: The Empirical Stage.

We begin to-day to trace the historical progress of the science of language in its three stages, the Empirical, the Classificatory, and the Theoretical. As a general rule each physical science begins with analysis, proceeds to classification, and ends with theory; but, as I pointed out in my first lecture, there are frequent exceptions to this rule, and it is by no means uncommon to find that philosophical speculations, which properly belong to the last or theoretical stage, were attempted in physical sciences long before the necessary evidence had been collected or arranged. Thus, we find that the science of language, in the only two countries where we can watch its origin and history—in India and Greece—rushes at once into theories about the mysterious nature of speech, and cares as little for facts as the man who wrote an account of the camel without ever having seen the animal or the desert. The Brahmans, in the hymns of the Veda, raised language to the rank of a deity, as they did with all things of which they knew not what they were. They addressed hymns to her in which she is said to have been with the gods from the beginning, achieving wondrous things, and never revealed to man except in part. In the Bráhmaņas, language is called the [pg 088] cow, breath the bull, and their young is said to be the mind of man.56 Brahman, the highest being, is said to be known through speech, nay, speech herself is called the Supreme Brahman. At a very early period, however, the Brahmans recovered from their raptures about language, and set to work with wonderful skill dissecting her sacred body. Their achievements in grammatical analysis, which date from the sixth century, b. c., are still unsurpassed in the grammatical literature of any nation. The idea of reducing a whole language to a small number of roots, which in Europe was not attempted before the sixteenth century by Henry Estienne,57 was perfectly familiar to the Brahmans, at least 500 b. c.

We start today to outline the historical development of language science through its three phases: the Based on observation, the Categorizing, and the Theoretical. Generally, each physical science begins with analysis, moves to classification, and concludes with theory. However, as I mentioned in my first lecture, there are many exceptions to this pattern. It’s not uncommon to find that philosophical ideas, which should belong to the theoretical phase, were pursued in the physical sciences long before the required evidence was gathered or organized. For instance, in the only two places where we can observe its origins and development—in India and Greece—the science of language jumps straight into theories about the mysterious nature of speech and pays as little attention to facts as someone who wrote about camels without ever seeing one or visiting the desert. The Brahmans, in the Vedic hymns, elevated language to a divine status, as they did with anything they didn’t understand. They composed hymns that claimed language existed with the gods from the start, performing remarkable deeds, and only partially revealed to humanity. In the Bráhmaņas, language is referred to as the [pg 088] cow, breath as the bull, and its offspring is considered the human mind. 56 Brahman, the ultimate being, is said to be known through speech, and in fact, speech itself is called the Supreme Brahman. Nevertheless, at a very early stage, the Brahmans moved past their admiration for language and skillfully began to analyze its sacred structure. Their accomplishments in grammatical analysis, dating back to the sixth century b.c., are still unmatched in the grammatical literature of any nation. The concept of reducing an entire language to a few roots, which in Europe was not attempted until the sixteenth century by Henry Estienne, 57 was already well known to the Brahmans, at least 500 b.c..

The Greeks, though they did not raise language to the rank of a deity, paid her, nevertheless, the greatest honors in their ancient schools of philosophy. There is hardly one of their representative philosophers who has not left some saying on the nature of language. The world without, or nature, and the world within, or mind, did not excite more wonder and elicit deeper oracles of wisdom from the ancient sages of Greece than language, the image of both, of nature and of [pg 089] mind. “What is language?” was a question asked quite as early as “What am I?” and, “What is all this world around me?” The problem of language was in fact a recognized battle-field for the different schools of ancient Greek philosophy, and we shall have to glance at their early guesses on the nature of human speech, when we come to consider the third or theoretical stage in the science of language.

The Greeks, while they didn't elevate language to the status of a god, still gave it the highest respect in their ancient philosophy schools. Almost every notable philosopher from that time has left behind some thoughts on what language is. The outside world, or nature, and the inner world, or mind, sparked just as much curiosity and inspired deeper wisdom from the ancient Greek thinkers as language did, which reflects both nature and the mind. “What is language?” was a question posed as early as “What am I?” and “What is all this world around me?” The issue of language was recognized as a key topic among the various schools of ancient Greek philosophy, and we will need to look at their early ideas about the nature of human speech when we discuss the third or theoretical stage of language science.

At present, we have to look for the early traces of the first or empirical stage. And here it might seem doubtful what was the real work to be assigned to this stage. What can be meant by the empirical treatment of language? Who were the men that did for language what the sailor did for his stars, the miner for his minerals, the gardener for his flowers? Who was the first to give any thought to language?—to distinguish between its component parts, between nouns and verbs, between articles and pronouns, between the nominative and accusative, the active and passive? Who invented these terms, and for what purpose were they invented?

At this point, we need to look for the early signs of the first or empirical stage. It might seem uncertain what the actual work was for this stage. What does the empirical study of language really mean? Who were the people that did for language what the sailor did for his stars, the miner for his minerals, and the gardener for his flowers? Who was the first to think about language—distinguishing between its different parts, like nouns and verbs, articles and pronouns, the nominative and accusative, the active and passive? Who came up with these terms, and why were they created?

We must be careful in answering these questions, for, as I said before, the merely empirical analysis of language was preceded in Greece by more general inquiries into the nature of thought and language; and the result has been that many of the technical terms which form the nomenclature of empirical grammar, existed in the schools of philosophy long before they were handed over, ready made, to the grammarian. The distinction of noun and verb, or more correctly, of subject and predicate, was the work of philosophers. Even the technical terms of case, of number, and gender, were coined at a very early time for the purpose [pg 090] of entering into the nature of thought; not for the practical purpose of analyzing the forms of language. This, their practical application to the spoken language of Greece, was the work of a later generation. It was the teacher of languages who first compared the categories of thought with the realities of the Greek language. It was he who transferred the terminology of Aristotle and the Stoics from thought to speech, from logic to grammar; and thus opened the first roads into the impervious wilderness of spoken speech. In doing this, the grammarian had to alter the strict acceptation of many of the terms which he borrowed from the philosopher, and he had to coin others before he could lay hold of all the facts of language even in the roughest manner. For, indeed, the distinction between noun and verb, between active and passive, between nominative and accusative, does not help us much towards a scientific analysis of language. It is no more than a first grasp, and it can only be compared with the most elementary terminology in other branches of human knowledge. Nevertheless, it was a beginning, a very important beginning; and if we preserve in our histories of the world the names of those who are said to have discovered the four physical elements, the names of a Thales and Anaximenes, we ought not to forget the names of the discoverers of the elements of language—the founders of one of the most useful and most successful branches of philosophy—the first Grammarians.

We need to be careful when answering these questions because, as I mentioned earlier, the simple empirical analysis of language was preceded in Greece by broader inquiries into the nature of thought and language. As a result, many of the technical terms that make up the vocabulary of empirical grammar existed in philosophical schools long before they were handed over, fully formed, to the grammarians. The distinction between noun and verb, or more accurately, between subject and predicate, was developed by philosophers. Even the technical terms for case, number, and gender were created early on to explore the nature of thought, not for the practical purpose of analyzing language forms. Their practical application to the spoken language of Greece came from later generations. It was the language teachers who first compared categories of thought with the realities of the Greek language. They transferred the terminology of Aristotle and the Stoics from thought to speech, from logic to grammar, thus opening the first pathways into the challenging realm of spoken language. In doing so, the grammarians had to adjust the strict meanings of many terms borrowed from philosophers and had to create new ones to grasp all aspects of language, even in the most basic way. The distinction between noun and verb, or between active and passive, and between nominative and accusative, doesn’t really help us much in conducting a scientific analysis of language. It’s just an initial understanding, comparable to the most basic terminology in other fields of knowledge. Nevertheless, it was a start, a very significant one; and if we remember in our histories the names of those credited with discovering the four physical elements, like Thales and Anaximenes, we shouldn’t forget the names of the pioneers of language—the founders of one of the most useful and successful branches of philosophy—the first grammarians.

Grammar then, in the usual sense of the word, or the merely formal and empirical analysis of language, owes its origin, like all other sciences, to a very natural and practical want. The first practical grammarian [pg 091] was the first practical teacher of languages, and if we want to know the beginnings of the science of language, we must try to find out at what time in the history of the world, and under what circumstances, people first thought of learning any language besides their own. At that time we shall find the first practical grammar, and not till then. Much may have been ready at hand through the less interested researches of philosophers, and likewise through the critical studies of the scholars of Alexandria on the ancient forms of their language as preserved in the Homeric poems. But rules of declension and conjugation, paradigms of regular and irregular nouns and verbs, observations on syntax, and the like, these are the work of the teachers of languages, and of no one else.

Grammar, in the usual sense of the word, or the simple formal and empirical analysis of language, originated, like all sciences, from a very natural and practical need. The first practical grammarian was the first practical teacher of languages, and if we want to understand the beginnings of the science of language, we need to discover when in history and under what circumstances people first considered learning any language other than their own. It’s at that time that we will find the first practical grammar, and not before. There may have been some foundational work done through the less focused research of philosophers, and also through the critical studies by the scholars of Alexandria on the ancient forms of their language as shown in the Homeric poems. However, rules of declension and conjugation, paradigms of regular and irregular nouns and verbs, observations on syntax, and similar topics are the work of language teachers and nobody else.

Now, the teaching of languages, though at present so large a profession, is comparatively a very modern invention. No ancient Greek ever thought of learning a foreign language. Why should he? He divided the whole world into Greeks and Barbarians, and he would have felt himself degraded by adopting either the dress or the manners or the language of his barbarian neighbors. He considered it a privilege to speak Greek, and even dialects closely related to his own, were treated by him as mere jargons. It takes time before people conceive the idea that it is possible to express oneself in any but one's own language. The Poles called their neighbors, the Germans, Niemiec, niemy meaning dumb;58 just as the Greeks called the Barbarians [pg 092] Aglossoi, or speechless. The name which the Germans gave to their neighbors, the Celts, Walh in old High German, vealh in Anglo-Saxon, the modern Welsh, is supposed to be the same as the Sanskrit mlechha, and means a person who talks indistinctly.59

Now, the teaching of languages, although it's a big profession today, is actually a fairly modern invention. No ancient Greek ever considered learning a foreign language. Why would they? They saw the world as divided into Greeks and Barbarians, and adopting the dress, customs, or language of their barbarian neighbors would have felt like a downgrade. Speaking Greek was a privilege to them, and even dialects that were closely related were viewed as just gibberish. It takes time for people to realize that it's possible to express themselves in a language other than their own. The Poles referred to their neighbors, the Germans, as Niemec, silent meaning unintelligent; just like the Greeks called the Barbarians Aglossoi, or speechless. The name the Germans used for their neighbors, the Celts, Walh in old High German, veal in Anglo-Saxon, and the modern Welsh language, is believed to be similar to the Sanskrit mleccha, which means someone who speaks unclearly.

Even when the Greeks began to feel the necessity of communicating with foreign nations, when they felt a desire of learning their idioms, the problem was by no means solved. For how was a foreign language to be learnt as long as either party could only speak their own? The problem was almost as difficult as when, as we are told by some persons, the first men, as yet speechless, came together in order to invent speech, and to discuss the most appropriate names that should be given to the perceptions of the senses and the abstractions of the mind. At first, it must be supposed that the Greek learned foreign languages very much as children learn their own. The interpreters mentioned by ancient historians were probably children of parents speaking different languages. The son of a Scythian and a Greek would naturally learn the utterances both of his father and mother, and the lucrative nature of his services would not fail to increase the supply. We are told, though on rather mythical authority, that the Greeks were astonished at the multiplicity of languages which they encountered during the Argonautic expedition, and that they were much inconvenienced by the want of skilful interpreters.60 We need not wonder at this, for the [pg 093] English army was hardly better off than the army of Jason; and such is the variety of dialects spoken in the Caucasian Isthmus, that it is still called by the inhabitants “the Mountain of Languages.” If we turn our eyes from these mythical ages to the historical times of Greece, we find that trade gave the first encouragement to the profession of interpreters. Herodotus tells us (iv. 24), that caravans of Greek merchants, following the course of the Volga upwards to the Oural mountains, were accompanied by seven interpreters, speaking seven different languages. These must have comprised Slavonic, Tataric, and Finnic dialects, spoken in those countries in the time of Herodotus, as they are at the present day. The wars with Persia first familiarized the Greeks with the idea that other nations also possessed real languages. Themistocles studied Persian, and is said to have spoken it fluently. The expedition of Alexander contributed still more powerfully to a knowledge of other nations and languages. But when Alexander went to converse with the Brahmans, who were even then considered by the Greeks as the guardians of a most ancient and mysterious wisdom, their answers had to be translated by so many interpreters that one of the Brahmans remarked, they must become like water that had passed through many impure channels.61 We hear, indeed, of more ancient [pg 094] Greek travellers, and it is difficult to understand how, in those early times, anybody could have travelled without a certain knowledge of the language of the people through whose camps and villages and towns he had to pass. Many of these travels, however, particularly those which are said to have extended as far as India, are mere inventions of later writers.62 Lycurgus may have travelled to Spain and Africa, he certainly did not proceed to India, nor is there any mention of his intercourse with the Indian Gymnosophists before Aristocrates, who lived about 100 b. c. The travels of Pythagoras are equally mythical; they are inventions of Alexandrian writers, who believed that all wisdom must have flowed from the East. There is better authority for believing that Democritus went to Egypt and Babylon, but his more distant travels to India are likewise legendary. Herodotus, though he travelled in Egypt and Persia, never gives us to understand that he was able to converse in any but his own language.

Even when the Greeks started to realize the need to communicate with other nations and wanted to learn their languages, the issue was far from resolved. How could a foreign language be learned if both parties could only speak their own? The challenge was nearly as tough as when, according to some accounts, the first humans, still unable to speak, came together to create language and discuss fitting names for sensory experiences and abstract concepts. Initially, it seems the Greeks learned foreign languages much like children learn their own. The interpreters mentioned by ancient historians were likely the offspring of parents who spoke different languages. A child of a Scythian and a Greek would naturally pick up the speech of both parents, and the demand for such services would undoubtedly grow. We hear, albeit from somewhat legendary sources, that the Greeks were amazed by the variety of languages they encountered during the Argonautic expedition and that they faced significant challenges due to the lack of skilled interpreters. We shouldn't be surprised by this, as the English army was hardly in a better position than Jason’s band, and the range of dialects spoken in the Caucasian Isthmus still earns it the name "the Mountain of Languages" from its residents. When we shift our focus from these mythical times to historical Greece, we see that trade was the first factor to promote the profession of interpreters. Herodotus tells us (iv. 24) that caravans of Greek merchants, traveling upstream along the Volga to the Ural mountains, were accompanied by seven interpreters fluent in seven different languages. These were likely Slavonic, Tataric, and Finnic dialects spoken in those regions both during Herodotus's time and today. The wars with Persia first made the Greeks aware that other nations had actual languages of their own. Themistocles studied Persian and was reportedly fluent in it. Alexander's campaign significantly boosted the Greeks' knowledge of other nations and their languages. However, when Alexander sought to talk with the Brahmans, who were regarded by the Greeks as the keepers of ancient and profound wisdom, their responses required so many translators that one Brahman noted they must as well be like water that had flowed through many contaminated channels. Indeed, we learn about older Greek travelers, though it's hard to fathom how anyone could have traveled in those early days without having some knowledge of the language of the people in whose camps, villages, and towns they passed. Many of these journeys, especially those claimed to reach as far as India, are likely fabrications of later authors. Lycurgus might have traveled to Spain and Africa, but he definitely did not reach India, nor is there any record of him interacting with the Indian Gymnosophists before Aristocrates, who lived around 100 b.c. The tales of Pythagoras's travels are equally mythical; they are creations of Alexandrian writers who believed that all wisdom originated from the East. There is stronger evidence suggesting that Democritus visited Egypt and Babylon, but his more distant journeys to India are also legendary. Herodotus, despite traveling through Egypt and Persia, never gives the impression that he could speak any language other than his own.

As far as we can tell, the barbarians seem to have possessed a greater facility for acquiring languages than either Greeks or Romans. Soon after the Macedonian conquest, we find63 Berosus in Babylon, Menander in Tyre, and Manetho in Egypt, compiling, from original sources, the annals of their countries.64 Their works [pg 095] were written in Greek, and for the Greeks. The native language of Berosus was Babylonian, of Menander Phenician, of Manetho Egyptian. Berosus was able to read the cuneiform documents of Babylonia with the same ease with which Manetho read the papyri of Egypt. The almost contemporaneous appearance of three such men, barbarians by birth and language, who were anxious to save the histories of their countries from total oblivion, by entrusting them to the keeping of their conquerors, the Greeks, is highly significant. But what is likewise significant, and by no means creditable to the Greek or Macedonian conquerors, is the small value which they seem to have set on these works. They have all been lost, and are known to us by fragments only, though there can be little doubt that the work of Berosus would have been an invaluable guide to the student of the cuneiform inscriptions and of Babylonian history, and that Manetho, if preserved complete, would have saved us volumes of controversy on Egyptian chronology. We learn, however, from the almost simultaneous appearance of these works, that soon after the epoch marked by Alexander's conquests in the East, the Greek language was studied and cultivated by literary men of barbarian origin, though we should look in vain for any Greek [pg 096] learning or employing any but his own tongue for literary purposes. We hear of no intellectual intercourse between Greeks and barbarians before the days of Alexander and Alexandria. At Alexandria, various nations, speaking different languages, and believing in different gods, were brought together. Though primarily engaged in mercantile speculations, it was but natural that in their moments of leisure they should hold discourse on their native countries, their gods, their kings, their law-givers, and poets. Besides, there were Greeks at Alexandria who were engaged in the study of antiquity, and who knew how to ask questions from men coming from any country of the world. The pretension of the Egyptians to a fabulous antiquity, the belief of the Jews in the sacred character of their laws, the faith of the Persians in the writings of Zoroaster, all these were fit subjects for discussion in the halls and libraries of Alexandria. We probably owe the translation of the Old Testament, the Septuagint, to this spirit of literary inquiry which was patronized at Alexandria by the Ptolemies.65 The writings of Zoroaster also, the Zend-Avesta, would seem to have been rendered into Greek about the same time. For Hermippus, who is said by Pliny to have translated the writings of Zoroaster, was in all probability Hermippus,66 the Peripatetic philosopher, the pupil of Callimachus, [pg 097] one of the most learned scholars at Alexandria.

As far as we can tell, the barbarians seemed to have a better ability to learn languages than either the Greeks or the Romans. Soon after the Macedonian conquest, we find63 Berosus in Babylon, Menander in Tyre, and Manetho in Egypt, compiling the histories of their countries from original sources.64 Their works [pg 095] were written in Greek and intended for the Greeks. Berosus's native language was Babylonian, Menander's was Phoenician, and Manetho's was Egyptian. Berosus could read the cuneiform documents of Babylonia just as easily as Manetho read the papyri of Egypt. The almost simultaneous emergence of three such men, who were barbarians by birth and language, eager to preserve their countries' histories from complete destruction by entrusting them to their conquerors, the Greeks, is quite noteworthy. However, what's also significant, and certainly not admirable for the Greek or Macedonian conquerors, is the little value they seemed to place on these works. They have all been lost and are known to us only through fragments, although it's clear that Berosus's work would have been an invaluable resource for anyone studying cuneiform inscriptions and Babylonian history, and that a complete version of Manetho would have saved us many arguments about Egyptian chronology. We learn, however, from the nearly simultaneous appearance of these works that soon after Alexander's conquests in the East, the Greek language was studied and refined by literary figures of barbarian origin, even though we find no Greek intellectuals using anything but their own language for literary purposes. We hear nothing of any intellectual exchange between Greeks and barbarians before the era of Alexander and Alexandria. At Alexandria, various nations speaking different languages and worshiping different gods were brought together. While primarily focused on trade, it was natural for them to discuss their home countries, their gods, their kings, their law-givers, and poets in their free time. Additionally, there were Greeks in Alexandria studying ancient history who knew how to ask questions of people from any part of the world. The Egyptians' claims to a mythical antiquity, the Jews' belief in the sacred nature of their laws, and the Persians' faith in Zoroaster's writings were all topics ripe for discussion in the halls and libraries of Alexandria. We likely owe the translation of the Old Testament, the Septuagint, to this spirit of literary inquiry fostered at Alexandria by the Ptolemies.65 The writings of Zoroaster, the Zend-Avesta, also seem to have been translated into Greek around the same time. Hermippus, who Pliny mentions as having translated Zoroaster's works, was probably Hermippus,66 the Peripatetic philosopher and pupil of Callimachus, one of the most learned scholars at Alexandria.

But although we find at Alexandria these and similar traces of a general interest having been excited by the literatures of other nations, there is no evidence which would lead us to suppose that their languages also had become the subject of scientific inquiry. It was not through the study of other languages, but through the study of the ancient dialects of their own language, that the Greeks at Alexandria were first led to what we should call critical and philological studies. The critical study of Greek took its origin at Alexandria, and it was chiefly based on the text of Homer. The general outline of grammar existed, as I remarked before, at an earlier period. It grew up in the schools of Greek philosophers.67 Plato knew of noun and verb as the two component parts of speech. Aristotle added conjunctions and articles. He likewise observed the distinctions of number and case. But neither Plato nor Aristotle paid much attention to the forms of language which corresponded to these forms of thought, nor had they any inducement to reduce them to any practical rules. With Aristotle the verb or rhēmha is hardly more than predicate, and in sentences such as “the snow is white,” he would have called white a [pg 098] verb. The first who reduced the actual forms of language to something like order were the scholars of Alexandria. Their chief occupation was to publish correct texts of the Greek classics, and particularly of Homer. They were forced, therefore, to pay attention to the exact forms of Greek grammar. The MSS. sent to Alexandria and Pergamus from different parts of Greece varied considerably, and it could only be determined by careful observation which forms were to be tolerated in Homer and which were not. Their editions of Homer were not only ekdoseis, a Greek word literally rendered in Latin by editio, i.e. issues of books, but diorthōseis, that is to say, critical editions. There were different schools, opposed to each other in their views of the language of Homer. Each reading that was adopted by Zenodotus or Aristarchus had to be defended, and this could only be done by establishing general rules on the grammar of the Homeric poems. Did Homer use the article? Did he use it before proper names? These and similar questions had to be settled, and as one or the other view was adopted by the editors, the text of these ancient poems was changed by more or less violent emendations. New technical terms were required for distinguishing, for instance, the article, if once recognized, from the demonstrative pronoun. Article is a literal translation of the Greek word arthron. Arthron (Lat. artus) means the socket of a joint. The word was first used by Aristotle, and with him it could only mean words which formed, as it were, the sockets in which the members of a sentence moved. In such a sentence as: “Whoever did it, he shall suffer for it,” Greek grammarians would have called the demonstrative pronoun he the first socket, [pg 099] and the relative pronoun who, the second socket;68 and before Zenodotus, the first librarian of Alexandria, 250 b. c., all pronouns were simply classed as sockets or articles of speech. He was the first to introduce a distinction between personal pronouns or antonymiai, and the mere articles or articulations of speech, which henceforth retained the name of arthra. This distinction was very necessary, and it was, no doubt, suggested to him by his emendations of the text of Homer, Zenodotus being the first who restored the article before proper names in the Iliad and Odyssey. Who, in speaking now of the definite or indefinite article, thinks of the origin and original meaning of the word, and of the time which it took before it could become what it is now, a technical term familiar to every school-boy?

But even though we see at Alexandria these and similar signs of a broader interest sparked by the literatures of other nations, there’s no evidence to suggest that their languages were also subjected to scientific study. It wasn’t through the study of other languages, but through the examination of the ancient dialects of their own tongue, that the Greeks in Alexandria first ventured into what we would call critical and philological studies. The critical study of Greek began in Alexandria, mainly based on the text of Homer. The general outline of grammar, as I mentioned earlier, existed at an earlier time, developing in the schools of Greek philosophers. Plato recognized noun and verb as the two basic parts of speech. Aristotle added conjunctions and articles to the mix. He also noted the distinctions of number and case. However, neither Plato nor Aristotle focused much on the forms of language that matched these concepts, nor did they have any reason to reduce them to practical rules. For Aristotle, the verb or rhēmha hardly meant more than predicate, and in sentences like “the snow is white,” he would have identified white as a verb. The first ones to organize the actual forms of language were the scholars in Alexandria. Their main task was to publish accurate texts of the Greek classics, particularly those of Homer. This requirement compelled them to closely examine the exact forms of Greek grammar. The manuscripts sent to Alexandria and Pergamum from various regions of Greece showed considerable variation, and careful observation was necessary to determine which forms were acceptable in Homer and which were not. Their editions of Homer were not only editions, a Greek term literally translated into Latin as edition, i.e. published books, but corrections, meaning critical editions. There were different schools that opposed each other in their interpretations of Homer’s language. Each reading endorsed by Zenodotus or Aristarchus had to be justified, which could only be accomplished by establishing general rules for the grammar of the Homeric poems. Did Homer use the article? Did he use it before proper names? These questions, and similar ones, needed clarification, and as one or another viewpoint was accepted by the editors, the text of these ancient poems was altered by more or less drastic corrections. New technical terms were needed to differentiate, for instance, the article, once recognized, from the demonstrative pronoun. Article is a direct translation of the Greek word arthron. Arthron (Lat. artus) refers to the socket of a joint. The term was first employed by Aristotle, and for him, it meant words that formed, so to speak, the sockets through which the elements of a sentence operated. In a sentence like: "Whoever did this will pay for it." Greek grammarians would consider the demonstrative pronoun he as the first socket, and the relative pronoun who as the second socket; 68 and before Zenodotus, the first librarian of Alexandria, 250 b.c., all pronouns were simply classified as sockets or articles of speech. He was the first to make a distinction between personal pronouns or antonyms, and mere articles or articulations of speech, which henceforth retained the name arthritic. This distinction was very important, and it was certainly prompted by his corrections to the text of Homer, with Zenodotus being the first to restore the article before proper names in the Iliad and Odyssey. Who, when discussing the definite or indefinite article today, thinks of the origin and original meaning of the word, and the time it took before it could become what it is now—a technical term familiar to every schoolboy?

Again, to take another illustration of the influence which the critical study of Homer at Alexandria exercised on the development of grammatical terminology,—we see that the first idea of numbers, of a singular and a plural, was fixed and defined by the philosopher. But Aristotle had no such technical terms as singular and plural; and he does not even allude to the dual. He only speaks of the cases which express one or many, though with him case, or ptōsis, had a very different meaning from what it has in our grammars. The terms singular and plural were not invented till they were wanted, and they were first wanted by the grammarians. Zenodotus, the editor of Homer, was the first to observe the use of the dual in the Homeric poems, and, with the usual zeal of discoverers, he has altered many a plural into a dual when there was no necessity for it.

Again, to illustrate the influence that the critical study of Homer had at Alexandria on the development of grammatical terminology, we see that the first concepts of numbers, singular and plural, were defined by the philosopher. However, Aristotle didn’t use the technical terms singular and plural, and he doesn’t even mention the dual. He only refers to cases expressing one or many, though for him, case or ptosis had a very different meaning than it does in our grammars. The terms singular and plural were not created until they were needed, and they were first needed by the grammarians. Zenodotus, the editor of Homer, was the first to notice the dual's use in the Homeric poems, and, with the typical enthusiasm of discoverers, he changed many plurals into duals when it wasn't necessary.

[pg 100]

The scholars of Alexandria, therefore, and of the rival academy of Pergamus, were the first who studied the Greek language critically, that is to say, who analyzed the language, arranged it under general categories, distinguished the various parts of speech, invented proper technical terms for the various functions of words, observed the more or less correct usage of certain poets, marked the difference between obsolete and classical forms, and published long and learned treatises on all these subjects. Their works mark a great era in the history of the science of language. But there was still a step to be made before we can expect to meet with a real practical or elementary grammar of the Greek language. Now the first real Greek grammar was that of Dionysius Thrax. It is still in existence, and though its genuineness has been doubted, these doubts have been completely disposed of.

The scholars of Alexandria and the competing academy of Pergamus were the first to study the Greek language critically. They analyzed the language, organized it into general categories, identified the various parts of speech, created specific technical terms for different word functions, noted the correct usage of certain poets, distinguished between outdated and classical forms, and published lengthy and insightful treatises on all these topics. Their work represents a significant milestone in the history of language science. However, there was still one more step needed before we could find a true practical or elementary grammar of the Greek language. The first authentic Greek grammar was that of Dionysius Thrax. It still exists today, and although its authenticity has been questioned, those doubts have been completely resolved.

But who was Dionysius Thrax? His father, as we learn from his name, was a Thracian; but Dionysius himself lived at Alexandria, and was a pupil of the famous critic and editor of Homer, Aristarchus.69 Dionysius afterwards went to Rome, where he taught about the time of Pompey. Now here we see a new feature in the history of mankind. A Greek, a pupil of Aristarchus, settles at Rome, and writes a practical grammar of the Greek language—of course, for the benefit of his young Roman pupils. He was not the inventor of grammatical science. Nearly all the framework of grammar, as we saw, was supplied to him through the labors of his predecessors from Plato to [pg 101] Aristarchus. But he was the first who applied the results of former philosophers and critics to the practical purpose of teaching Greek; and, what is most important, of teaching Greek not to Greeks, who knew Greek and only wanted the theory of their language, but to Romans who had to be taught the declensions and conjugations, regular and irregular. His work thus became one of the principal channels through which the grammatical terminology, which had been carried from Athens to Alexandria, flowed back to Rome, to spread from thence over the whole civilized world.

But who was Dionysius Thrax? His father, as his name suggests, was from Thrace; however, Dionysius himself lived in Alexandria and was a student of the well-known critic and editor of Homer, Aristarchus. Dionysius later moved to Rome, where he taught around the time of Pompey. Here we see a new development in human history. A Greek, a student of Aristarchus, settles in Rome and writes a practical grammar of the Greek language—of course, for the benefit of his young Roman students. He didn’t create the field of grammar; almost all the foundational concepts were inherited from his predecessors, ranging from Plato to Aristarchus. But he was the first to apply the insights of earlier philosophers and critics to the practical task of teaching Greek; and, importantly, he taught Greek not to Greeks, who already understood the language and only needed the theory, but to Romans who needed to learn the declensions and conjugations, both regular and irregular. His work ultimately became one of the main pathways through which the grammatical terminology, developed in Athens and spread to Alexandria, was transmitted back to Rome, from where it would circulate throughout the entire civilized world.

Dionysius, however, though the author of the first practical grammar, was by no means the first professeur de langue who settled at Rome. At his time Greek was more generally spoken at Rome than French is now spoken in London. The children of gentlemen learnt Greek before they learnt Latin, and though Quintilian in his work on education does not approve of a boy learning nothing but Greek for any length of time, “as is now the fashion,” he says, “with most people,” yet he too recommends that a boy should be taught Greek first, and Latin afterwards.70 This may seem strange, but the fact is that as long as we know anything of Italy, the Greek language was as much at home there as Latin. Italy owed almost everything to Greece, not only in later days when the setting sun of Greek civilization mingled its rays with the dawn of Roman greatness; but ever since the first Greek colonists started Westward Ho! in search of new homes. It was from the Greeks that the Italians received their alphabet and were taught to read and to [pg 102] write.71 The names for balance, for measuring-rod, for engines in general, for coined money,72 many terms connected with seafaring,73 not excepting nausea or sea-sickness, are all borrowed from Greek, and show the extent to which the Italians were indebted to the Greeks for the very rudiments of civilization. The Italians, no doubt, had their own national gods, but they soon became converts to the mythology of the Greeks. Some of the Greek gods they identified with their own; others they admitted as new deities. Thus Saturnus, originally an Italian harvest god, was identified with the Greek Kronos, and as Kronos was the son of Uranos, a new deity was invented, and Saturnus was fabled to be the son of Cœlus. Thus the Italian Herculus, the god of hurdles, enclosures, and walls, was merged in the Greek Heracles.74 Castor and Pollux, both of purely Greek origin, were readily believed in as nautical deities by the Italian sailors, and they were the first Greek gods to whom, after the battle on the Lake Regillus (485), a temple was erected at Rome.75 In 431 another temple was erected at Rome to Apollo, whose oracle at Delphi had been consulted by Italians [pg 103] ever since Greek colonists had settled on their soil. The oracles of the famous Sibylla of Cumæ were written in Greek,76 and the priests (duoviri sacris faciundis) were allowed to keep two Greek slaves for the purpose of translating these oracles.77

Dionysius, however, while he was the author of the first practical grammar, was definitely not the first language instructor to settle in Rome. At his time, Greek was spoken in Rome more widely than French is now spoken in London. The children of well-off families learned Greek before they learned Latin, and although Quintilian, in his work on education, does not think a boy should focus solely on Greek for too long, “as is currently the trend,” he mentions, “with the majority of people,” he still recommends that a boy should be taught Greek first, followed by Latin.70 This might seem odd, but the truth is that as far back as we have records of Italy, Greek was just as familiar there as Latin. Italy owes nearly everything to Greece, not only in later times when the fading light of Greek civilization blended with the rising sun of Roman power; but ever since the first Greek colonists set sail westward in search of new homes. The Italians inherited their alphabet from the Greeks and learned to read and write.71 They borrowed terms for balance, measuring tools, general machinery, coined money,72 and many nautical terms,73 including nausea or seasickness, illustrating how much the Italians depended on the Greeks for the foundational elements of civilization. The Italians certainly had their own national gods, but they quickly adopted Greek mythology. Some Greek gods were matched with their own; others were accepted as new deities. For example, Saturn, initially an Italian harvest god, was identified with the Greek Kronos, and since Kronos was the son of Uranus, a new deity was created, making Saturn the son of Cœlus. Similarly, the Italian Hercules, the god of obstacles, enclosures, and walls, was combined with the Greek Hercules.74 Castor and Pollux, both purely Greek, were quickly accepted as sea deities by Italian sailors, and they were the first Greek gods to whom a temple was built in Rome after the battle at Lake Regillus (485).75 In 431, another temple was built in Rome for Apollo, whose oracle at Delphi had been consulted by Italians ever since Greek colonists settled on their land. The oracles of the famous Sibylla of Cumæ were written in Greek,76 and the priests (duoviri sacris faciundis) were permitted to keep two Greek slaves for translating these oracles.77

When the Romans, in 454 b. c., wanted to establish a code of laws, the first thing they did was to send commissioners to Greece to report on the laws of Solon at Athens and the laws of other Greek towns.78 As Rome rose in political power, Greek manners, Greek art, Greek language and literature found ready admittance.79 Before the beginning of the Punic wars, many of the Roman statesmen were able to understand, and even to speak Greek. Boys were not only taught the Roman letters by their masters, the literatores, but they had to learn at the same time the Greek alphabet. Those who taught Greek at Rome were then called grammatici, and they were mostly Greek slaves or liberti.

When the Romans, in 454 b. c., wanted to create a set of laws, the first thing they did was send officials to Greece to gather information about Solon's laws in Athens and the laws of other Greek cities.78 As Rome gained political power, Greek customs, art, language, and literature were easily accepted.79 Before the start of the Punic Wars, many Roman politicians could understand and even speak Greek. Boys learned the Roman alphabet from their teachers, the writers, but they also had to learn the Greek alphabet at the same time. Those teaching Greek in Rome were known as grammarians, and they were mostly Greek slaves or liberty.

Among the young men whom Cato saw growing up at Rome, to know Greek was the same as to be a gentleman. They read Greek books, they conversed in Greek, they even wrote in Greek. Tiberius Gracchus, consul in 177, made a speech in Greek at Rhodes, which he afterwards published.80 Flaminius, when addressed by the Greeks in Latin, returned the compliment by writing Greek verses in honor of their [pg 104] gods. The first history of Rome was written at Rome in Greek, by Fabius Pictor,81 about 200 b. c.; and it was probably in opposition to this work, and to those of Lucius Cincius Alimentus, and Publius Scipio, that Cato wrote his own history of Rome in Latin. The example of the higher classes was eagerly followed by the lowest. The plays of Plautus are the best proof; for the affectation of using Greek words is as evident in some of his characters as the foolish display of French in the German writers of the eighteenth century. There was both loss and gain in the inheritance which Rome received from Greece; but what would Rome have been without her Greek masters? The very fathers of Roman literature were Greeks, private teachers, men who made a living by translating school-books and plays. Livius Andronicus, sent as prisoner of war from Tarentum (272 b. c.), established himself at Rome as professor of Greek. His translation of the Odyssey into Latin verse, which marks the beginning of Roman literature, was evidently written by him for the use of his private classes. His style, though clumsy and wooden in the extreme, was looked upon as a model of perfection by the rising poets of the capital. Nævius and Plautus were his cotemporaries and immediate successors. All the plays of Plautus were translations and adaptations of Greek originals; and Plautus was not even allowed to transfer the scene from Greece to Rome. The Roman public wanted to see Greek life and Greek depravity; it would have stoned the poet who had ventured to bring on the stage a Roman patrician or a Roman matron. Greek tragedies, also, were [pg 105] translated into Latin. Ennius, the cotemporary of Nævius and Plautus, though somewhat younger (239-169), was the first to translate Euripides. Ennius, like Andronicus, was an Italian Greek, who settled at Rome as a teacher of languages and translator of Greek. He was patronized by the liberal party, by Publius Scipio, Titus Flaminius, and Marcus Fulvius Nobilior.82 He became a Roman citizen. But Ennius was more than a poet, more than a teacher of languages. He has been called a neologian, and to a certain extent he deserved that name. Two works written in the most hostile spirit against the religion of Greece, and against the very existence of the Greek gods, were translated by him into Latin.83 One was the philosophy of Epicharmus (470 b. c., in Megara), who taught that Zeus was nothing but the air, and other gods but names of the powers of nature; the other the work of Euhemerus, of Messene (300 b. c.), who proved, in the form of a novel, that the Greek gods had never existed, and that those who were believed in as gods had been men. These two works were not translated without a purpose; and though themselves shallow in the extreme, they proved destructive to the still shallower systems of Roman theology. Greek became synonymous with infidel; and Ennius would hardly have escaped the punishment inflicted on Nævius for his political satires, had he not enjoyed the patronage and esteem of the most influential statesmen at Rome. Even Cato, the stubborn enemy of Greek philosophy84 and rhetoric, was a friend of the dangerous Ennius; and such was the growing influence of Greek at Rome, that Cato himself [pg 106] had to learn it in his old age, in order to teach his boy what he considered, if not useful, at least harmless in Greek literature. It has been the custom to laugh at Cato for his dogged opposition to everything Greek; but there was much truth in his denunciations. We have heard much of young Bengál—young Hindus who read Byron and Voltaire, play at billiards, drive tandems, laugh at their priests, patronize missionaries, and believe nothing. The description which Cato gives of the young idlers at Rome reminds us very much of young Bengál.

Among the young men Cato observed growing up in Rome, knowing Greek was seen as a mark of being a gentleman. They read Greek books, spoke in Greek, and even wrote in Greek. Tiberius Gracchus, who was consul in 177, delivered a speech in Greek at Rhodes, which he later published. Flaminius, when addressed by the Greeks in Latin, responded by writing Greek verses in honor of their gods. The first history of Rome was written in Greek by Fabius Pictor around 200 B.C., and Cato probably wrote his own history of Rome in Latin in response to that work and those of Lucius Cincius Alimentus and Publius Scipio. The noble classes set an example that the lower classes eagerly followed. The plays of Plautus serve as the best proof, as the tendency to use Greek words is as clear in some of his characters as the silly use of French in 18th-century German writers. There was both loss and gain in the legacy Rome inherited from Greece, but what would Rome have been without its Greek masters? The very founders of Roman literature were Greeks—private tutors who made a living by translating textbooks and plays. Livius Andronicus, sent as a prisoner of war from Tarentum in 272 B.C., established himself in Rome as a Greek professor. His translation of the Odyssey into Latin verse, which marks the start of Roman literature, was clearly written for his private classes. Although his style was clumsy and extremely wooden, it was viewed as a perfect model by the upcoming poets of the capital. Nævius and Plautus were his contemporaries and immediate successors. All of Plautus's plays were translations and adaptations of Greek originals, and he wasn’t even allowed to move the setting from Greece to Rome. The Roman audience wanted to see Greek life and its vices; they would have stoned a poet who dared to portray a Roman patrician or a Roman matron. Greek tragedies were also translated into Latin. Ennius, a contemporary of Nævius and Plautus, though somewhat younger (239-169), was the first to translate Euripides. Like Andronicus, Ennius was an Italian Greek who settled in Rome as a language teacher and translator. He was supported by the liberal faction, including Publius Scipio, Titus Flaminius, and Marcus Fulvius Nobilior. He became a Roman citizen. However, Ennius was more than just a poet and a language teacher. He has been called a neologian, and to some extent, he earned that title. He translated two works that were very hostile towards Greek religion and the existence of Greek gods into Latin. One was the philosophy of Epicharmus, who taught that Zeus was merely the air and other gods were just names for nature's forces; the other was by Euhemerus of Messene, who claimed in a novel that the Greek gods never existed and those believed to be gods were actually men. These two works were translated with a purpose; although they were shallow themselves, they posed a threat to the even shallower systems of Roman theology. Greek became synonymous with being unfaithful, and Ennius likely would not have escaped the punishment Nævius faced for his political satires had he not had the support and respect of influential politicians in Rome. Even Cato, the staunch critic of Greek philosophy and rhetoric, was a friend of the dangerous Ennius; and because of the growing influence of Greek in Rome, Cato himself felt compelled to learn it in his old age so he could teach his son what he thought was, if not useful, at least harmless in Greek literature. People often laugh at Cato for his stubborn opposition to everything Greek, but there was a lot of truth in his criticisms. We've heard a lot about young Bengál—young Hindus who read Byron and Voltaire, play billiards, drive tandems, mock their priests, support missionaries, and believe in nothing. The description Cato gives of the young idlers in Rome is very reminiscent of young Bengál.

When Rome took the torch of knowledge from the dying hands of Greece, that torch was not burning with its brightest light. Plato and Aristotle had been succeeded by Chrysippus and Carneades; Euripides and Menander had taken the place of Æschylus and Sophocles. In becoming the guardian of the Promethean spark first lighted in Greece, and intended hereafter to illuminate not only Italy, but every country of Europe, Rome lost much of that native virtue to which she owed her greatness. Roman frugality and gravity, Roman citizenship and patriotism, Roman purity and piety, were driven away by Greek luxury and levity, Greek intriguing and self-seeking, Greek vice and infidelity. Restrictions and anathemas were of no avail; and Greek ideas were never so attractive as when they had been reprobated by Cato and his friends. Every new generation became more and more impregnated with Greek. In 13185 we hear of a consul (Publius Crassus) who, like another Mezzofanti, was able to converse in the various dialects of Greek. Sulla allowed foreign ambassadors to speak Greek [pg 107] before the Roman senate.86 The Stoic philosopher Panætius87 lived in the house of the Scipios, which was for a long time the rendezvous of all the literary celebrities at Rome. Here the Greek historian Polybius, and the philosopher Cleitomachus, Lucilius the satirist, Terence the African poet (196-159), and the improvisatore Archias (102 b. c.), were welcome guests.88 In this select circle the master-works of Greek literature were read and criticised; the problems of Greek philosophy were discussed; and the highest interests of human life became the subject of thoughtful conversation. Though no poet of original genius arose from this society, it exercised a most powerful influence on the progress of Roman literature. It formed a tribunal of good taste; and much of the correctness, simplicity, and manliness of the classical Latin is due to that “Cosmopolitan Club,” which met under the hospitable roof of the Scipios.

When Rome took the torch of knowledge from the fading grasp of Greece, that torch wasn't shining at its brightest. Plato and Aristotle had been followed by Chrysippus and Carneades; Euripides and Menander had replaced Æschylus and Sophocles. In taking on the role of guardian of the Promethean spark first ignited in Greece, which was meant to illuminate not just Italy but every nation in Europe, Rome lost much of the native virtue that had contributed to its greatness. Roman frugality and seriousness, citizenship and patriotism, purity and piety were overshadowed by Greek luxury and frivolity, Greek scheming and self-interest, Greek vice and betrayal. Restrictions and curses didn't help; Greek ideas became more appealing precisely when they were condemned by Cato and his associates. Each new generation became increasingly influenced by Greek culture. In 131 85, we hear of a consul (Publius Crassus) who, like another Mezzofanti, could converse in various Greek dialects. Sulla allowed foreign ambassadors to speak Greek [pg 107] before the Roman Senate.86 The Stoic philosopher Panætius 87 lived in the Scipio household, which for a long time was the gathering place for all the literary figures in Rome. Here, the Greek historian Polybius, the philosopher Cleitomachus, the satirist Lucilius, the African poet Terence (196-159), and the improviser Archias (102 b.c.) were welcomed guests.88 In this exclusive circle, the masterworks of Greek literature were read and analyzed; the challenges of Greek philosophy were debated, and the most important aspects of human life became topics of thoughtful discussion. Although no original genius poet emerged from this society, it significantly influenced the development of Roman literature. It established a standard of good taste, and a lot of the clarity, simplicity, and strength in classical Latin can be attributed to that “Cosmo Club,” which met in the welcoming home of the Scipios.

The religious life of Roman society at the close of the Punic wars was more Greek than Roman. All who had learnt to think seriously on religious questions were either Stoics or followers of Epicurus; or they embraced the doctrines of the New Academy, denying the possibility of any knowledge of the Infinite, and putting opinion in the place of truth.89 Though the doctrines of Epicurus and the New Academy were always considered dangerous and heretical, the philosophy of the Stoics was tolerated, and a kind of compromise effected between philosophy and religion. There was a state-philosophy as well as a state-religion. [pg 108] The Roman priesthood, though they had succeeded, in 161, in getting all Greek rhetors and philosophers expelled from Rome, perceived that a compromise was necessary. It was openly avowed that in the enlightened classes90 philosophy must take the place of religion, but that a belief in miracles and oracles was necessary for keeping the large masses in order. Even Cato,91 the leader of the orthodox, national, and conservative party, expressed his surprise that a haruspex, when meeting a colleague, did not burst out laughing. Men like Scipio Æmilianus and Lælius professed to believe in the popular gods; but with them Jupiter was the soul of the universe, the statues of the gods mere works of art.92 Their gods, as the people complained, had neither body, parts, nor passions. Peace, however, was preserved between the Stoic philosopher and the orthodox priest. Both parties professed to believe in the same gods, but they claimed the liberty to believe in them in their own way.

The religious life of Roman society at the end of the Punic Wars was more influenced by Greek thought than by Roman traditions. Those who seriously contemplated religious issues were either Stoics or followers of Epicurus; or they adopted the views of the New Academy, which argued that true knowledge of the Infinite was impossible and favored opinion over truth.89 Although the ideas of Epicurus and the New Academy were often seen as dangerous and heretical, Stoic philosophy was tolerated, creating a kind of compromise between philosophy and religion. There was both a state philosophy and a state religion. [pg 108] The Roman priesthood, despite having succeeded in 161 by expelling all Greek rhetoricians and philosophers from Rome, recognized that a compromise was essential. It was openly stated that among the educated classes90 philosophy needed to replace religion, but that belief in miracles and oracles was essential for keeping the masses in check. Even Cato,91 the leader of the orthodox, national, and conservative faction, expressed amazement that a haruspex, when encountering a colleague, didn’t start laughing. Figures like Scipio Æmilianus and Lælius claimed to believe in the popular gods; but for them, Jupiter represented the soul of the universe, and the statues of the gods were merely artistic creations.92 The public complained that their gods had no physical forms, parts, or emotions. Nevertheless, peace was maintained between the Stoic philosopher and the orthodox priest. Both sides professed to believe in the same gods, but they claimed the freedom to interpret their beliefs in their own ways.

I have dwelt at some length on the changes in the intellectual atmosphere of Rome at the end of the Punic wars, and I have endeavored to show how completely it was impregnated with Greek ideas in order to explain, what otherwise would seem almost inexplicable, the zeal and earnestness with which the study of Greek grammar was taken up at Rome, not only by a few scholars and philosophers, but by the leading statesmen of the time. To our minds, discussions on nouns and verbs, on cases and gender, on regular and irregular conjugation, retain always something of the tedious character which these subjects [pg 109] had at school, and we can hardly understand how at Rome, grammar—pure and simple grammar—should have formed a subject of general interest, and a topic of fashionable conversation. When one of the first grammarians of the day, Crates of Pergamus, was sent to Rome as ambassador of King Attalus, he was received with the greatest distinction by all the literary statesmen of the capital. It so happened that when walking one day on the Palatian hill, Crates caught his foot in the grating of a sewer, fell and broke his leg. Being thereby detained at Rome longer than he intended, he was persuaded to give some public lectures, or akroaseis, on grammar; and from these lectures, says Suetonius, dates the study of grammar at Rome. This took place about 159 b. c., between the second and third Punic wars, shortly after the death of Ennius, and two years after the famous expulsion of the Greek rhetors and philosophers (161). Four years later Carneades, likewise sent to Rome as ambassador, was prohibited from lecturing by Cato. After these lectures of Crates, grammatical and philological studies became extremely popular at Rome. We hear of Lucius Ælius Stilo,93 who lectured on Latin as Crates had lectured on Greek. Among his pupils were Varro, Lucilius, and Cicero. Varro composed twenty-four books on the Latin language, four of which were dedicated to Cicero. Cicero, himself, is quoted as an authority on grammatical questions, though we know of no special work of his on grammar. Lucilius devoted the ninth book of his satires to the reform of spelling.94 But nothing shows [pg 110] more clearly the wide interest which grammatical studies had then excited in the foremost ranks of Roman society than Cæsar's work on Latin grammar. It was composed by him during the Gallic war, and dedicated to Cicero, who might well be proud of the compliment thus paid him by the great general and statesman. Most of these works are lost to us, and we can judge of them only by means of casual quotations. Thus we learn from a fragment of Cæsar's work, De analogia, that he was the inventor of the term ablative in Latin. The word never occurs before, and, of course, could not be borrowed, like the names of the other cases, from Greek grammarians, as they admitted no ablative in Greek. To think of Cæsar fighting the barbarians of Gaul and Germany, and watching from a distance the political complications at Rome, ready to grasp the sceptre of the world, and at the same time carrying on his philological and grammatical studies together with his secretary, the Greek Didymus,95 gives us a new view both of that extraordinary man, and of the time in which he lived. After Cæsar had triumphed, one of his favorite plans was to found a Greek and Latin library at Rome, and he offered the librarianship to the best scholar of the day, to Varro, though Varro had fought against him on the side of Pompey.96

I have spent a good amount of time discussing the changes in the intellectual climate of Rome at the end of the Punic Wars, and I’ve tried to show how deeply it was influenced by Greek ideas. This helps explain, what might otherwise seem almost unexplainable, the enthusiasm and seriousness with which the study of Greek grammar was embraced in Rome—not just by a few scholars and philosophers, but by the leading politicians of the time. To us, conversations about nouns and verbs, cases and genders, and regular and irregular conjugation always seem somewhat dull, similar to how these topics felt in school. It’s hard for us to understand how, in Rome, grammar—pure and simple grammar—could have become such a popular topic of interest and fashionable conversation. When one of the foremost grammarians of his time, Crates of Pergamus, was sent to Rome as an ambassador from King Attalus, he was received with great honor by all the literary politicians of the capital. One day, while walking on the Palatine Hill, Crates tripped over the grate of a sewer, fell, and broke his leg. Since he had to stay in Rome longer than he planned, he was persuaded to give some public lectures, or akroaseis, on grammar; Suetonius notes that this marks the beginning of grammar studies in Rome. This happened around 159 b.c., between the second and third Punic Wars, shortly after Ennius's death, and two years after the well-known expulsion of the Greek rhetoricians and philosophers (161). Four years later, Carneades, who was also sent to Rome as an ambassador, was banned from lecturing by Cato. Following Crates’s lectures, the study of grammar and philology became extremely popular in Rome. We hear about Lucius Ælius Stilo, who taught Latin just as Crates had taught Greek. Among his students were Varro, Lucilius, and Cicero. Varro wrote twenty-four books on the Latin language, four of which he dedicated to Cicero. Cicero himself is cited as an authority on grammatical issues, even though we don’t have any specific work from him on grammar. Lucilius dedicated the ninth book of his satires to reforming spelling. However, nothing illustrates the widespread interest in grammar studies at the upper echelons of Roman society more clearly than Caesar's work on Latin grammar. He wrote it during the Gallic War and dedicated it to Cicero, who had every reason to feel honored by this recognition from the great general and statesman. Most of these works are now lost to us, and we can only assess them through scattered quotations. We learn from a fragment of Caesar's work, From the analogy, that he was the first to use the term ablative in Latin. The word never appears before and could not have been borrowed like the terms for other cases, as Greek grammarians did not acknowledge an ablative case. The idea of Caesar battling the barbarians of Gaul and Germany, while keeping an eye on the political troubles back in Rome and ready to seize power, all the while engaging in philological and grammatical study with his secretary, the Greek Didymus, gives us a new perspective on both that remarkable man and the era in which he lived. After Caesar's triumph, one of his main plans was to establish a Greek and Latin library in Rome, and he offered the position of librarian to the best scholar of the time, Varro, despite Varro having fought against him alongside Pompey.

We have thus arrived at the time when, as we saw in an earlier part of this lecture, Dionysius Thrax published the first elementary grammar of Greek at Rome. Empirical grammar had thus been transplanted to Rome, the Greek grammatical terminology was translated into Latin, and in this new Latin garb it has travelled now for nearly two thousand years over the whole civilized world. [pg 111] Even in India, where a different terminology had grown up in the grammatical schools of the Brahmans, a terminology in some respects more perfect than that of Alexandria and Rome, we may now hear such words as case, and gender, and active and passive, explained by European teachers to their native pupils. The fates of words are curious indeed, and when I looked the other day at some of the examination papers of the government schools in India, such questions as—“Write the genitive case of Siva,” seemed to reduce whole volumes of history into a single sentence. How did these words, genitive case, come to India? They came from England, they had come to England from Rome, to Rome from Alexandria, to Alexandria from Athens. At Athens, the term case, or ptōsis, had a philosophical meaning; at Rome, casus was merely a literal translation; the original meaning of fall was lost, and the word dwindled down to a mere technical term. At Athens, the philosophy of language was a counterpart of the philosophy of the mind. The terminology of formal logic and formal grammar was the same. The logic of the Stoics was divided into two parts,97 called rhetoric and dialectic, and the latter treated, first, “On that which signifies, or language;” secondly, “On that which is signified, or things.” In their philosophical language ptōsis, which the Romans translated by casus, really meant fall; that is to say, the inclination or relation of one idea to another, the falling or resting of one word on another. Long and angry discussions were carried on as to whether the name of ptōsis, or fall, was applicable to the nominative; and every true Stoic [pg 112] would have scouted the expression of casus rectus, because the subject or the nominative, as they argued, did not fall or rest on anything else, but stood erect, the other words of a sentence leaning or depending on it. All this is lost to us when we speak of cases.

We have now reached the point where, as we noted earlier in this lecture, Dionysius Thrax published the first basic grammar of Greek in Rome. Empirical grammar was then brought to Rome, the Greek grammatical terms were translated into Latin, and in this new Latin form, it has traveled for nearly two thousand years across the civilized world. [pg 111] Even in India, where a different terminology emerged in the Brahmanical grammar schools, which in some ways is more sophisticated than that of Alexandria and Rome, we can now hear terms like case, gender, active, and passive, being explained by European teachers to their local students. The journey of words is indeed fascinating, and when I checked some of the exam papers from the government schools in India the other day, questions like—"Write Siva's genitive case," seemed to condense entire volumes of history into a single line. How did these terms, genitive case, find their way to India? They came from England, which got them from Rome, which received them from Alexandria, and Alexandria got them from Athens. In Athens, the term case, or ptosis, had a philosophical significance; in Rome, case was simply a literal translation; the original meaning of autumn was lost, and the word reduced to just a technical term. In Athens, the study of language was closely linked to the philosophy of the mind. The terminology for formal logic and formal grammar was the same. The logic of the Stoics was divided into two parts, called persuasive language and debate, and the latter addressed, first, "About what signifies, or language;" and second, "On what is meant, or things." In their philosophical terms, ptosis, which the Romans translated as case, truly meant fall; that is, the inclination or relationship between ideas, the falling or resting of one word on another. There were lengthy and heated debates about whether the term ptosis, or fall, could be applied to the nominative; and any true Stoic would have rejected the term case closed, because, they argued, the subject or nominative didn’t fall or depend on anything else, but stood upright, with the other words in a sentence leaning on or depending on it. All of this is lost to us when we refer to cases.

And how are the dark scholars in the government schools of India to guess the meaning of genitive? The Latin genitivus is a mere blunder, for the Greek word genikē could never mean genitivus. Genitivus, if it is meant to express the case of origin or birth, would in Greek have been called gennētikē, not genikē. Nor does the genitive express the relation of son to father. For though we may say, “the son of the father,” we may likewise say, “the father of the son.” Genikē, in Greek, had a much wider, a much more philosophical meaning.98 It meant casus generalis, the general case, or rather the case which expresses the gentus or kind. This is the real power of the genitive. If I say, “a bird of the water,” “of the water” defines the genus to which a certain bird belongs; it refers it to the genus of water-birds. “Man of the mountains,” means a mountaineer. In phrases such as “son of the father,” or “father of the son,” the genitives have the same effect. They predicate something of the son or of the father; and if we distinguished between the sons of the father, and the sons of the mother, the genitives would mark the class or genus to which the sons respectively belonged. They would answer the same purpose as the adjectives, paternal and maternal. It can be proved etymologically that the termination of the genitive is, in most cases, identical with those derivative [pg 113] suffixes by which substantives are changed into adjectives.99

And how are the uninformed teachers in the government schools of India supposed to understand the meaning of genitive case? The Latin term genitive is a mistake, because the Greek word genikē could never mean genitive. If genitive is meant to express the case of origin or birth, it would have been called genetics in Greek, not genikē. Moreover, the genitive doesn’t express the relationship of son to father. While we can say, “the father's son,” we can also say, "the son’s father." Genikē in Greek had a much broader, more philosophical meaning.98 It referred to general case, the general case, or more accurately, the case that expresses the genus or kind. This is the true essence of the genitive. When I say, “a water bird,” “of the water” specifies the kind of bird in question; it indicates that it belongs to the category of water birds. "Mountain man," refers to a mountaineer. In expressions like "son of the dad," or “father of the child,” the genitives serve the same function. They attribute something to the son or to the father; and if we distinguish between the sons of the father and the sons of the mother, the genitives would indicate the class or kind to which the sons belong. They would serve the same purpose as the adjectives paternal and maternal. It can be shown etymologically that the ending of the genitive is, in most instances, the same as those derivative [pg 113] suffixes that change nouns into adjectives.99

It is hardly necessary to trace the history of what I call the empirical study, or the grammatical analysis of language, beyond Rome. With Dionysius Thrax the [pg 114] framework of grammar was finished. Later writers have improved and completed it, but they have added nothing really new and original. We can follow the stream of grammatical science from Dionysius Thrax to our own time in an almost uninterrupted chain of Greek and Roman writers. We find Quintilian in the first century; Scaurus, Apollonius Dyscolus, and his son, Herodianus, in the second; Probus and Donatus in the fourth. After Constantine had moved the seat of government from Rome, grammatical science received a new home in the academy of Constantinople. There were no less than twenty Greek and Latin grammarians who held professorships at Constantinople. Under Justinian, in the sixth century, the name of Priscianus gave a new lustre to grammatical studies, and his work remained an authority during the Middle Ages to nearly our own times. We ourselves have been taught grammar according to the plan which was followed by Dionysius at Rome, by Priscianus at Constantinople, by Alcuin at York; and whatever may be said of the improvements introduced into our system of education, the Greek and Latin grammars used at our public schools are mainly founded on the first empirical analysis of language, prepared by the philosophers of Athens, applied by the scholars of Alexandria, and transferred to the practical purpose of teaching a foreign tongue by the Greek professors at Rome.

It's really not necessary to go into the history of what I refer to as the empirical study or the grammatical analysis of language any further back than Rome. With Dionysius Thrax, the basic structure of grammar was established. Later writers have enhanced and completed it, but they've added nothing truly new or original. We can trace the development of grammatical science from Dionysius Thrax right to our present time through an almost unbroken line of Greek and Roman authors. We find Quintilian in the first century; Scaurus, Apollonius Dyscolus, and his son, Herodianus, in the second; Probus and Donatus in the fourth. After Constantine moved the capital from Rome, grammatical science found a new home in the academy of Constantinople. There were at least twenty Greek and Latin grammarians who held teaching positions there. Under Justinian in the sixth century, Priscianus's name added new prestige to the study of grammar, and his work remained influential throughout the Middle Ages and into modern times. We have been taught grammar based on the methods used by Dionysius in Rome, Priscianus in Constantinople, and Alcuin in York; and regardless of the improvements made in our education system, the Greek and Latin grammars used in our public schools are largely based on the initial empirical analysis of language developed by the philosophers of Athens, applied by the scholars of Alexandria, and adapted for teaching a foreign language by the Greek professors in Rome.

[pg 115]

Lecture IV. The Classification Stage.

We traced, in our last lecture, the origin and progress of the empirical study of languages from the time of Plato and Aristotle to our own school-boy days. We saw at what time, and under what circumstances, the first grammatical analysis of language took place; how its component parts, the parts of speech, were named, and how, with the aid of a terminology, half philosophical and half empirical, a system of teaching languages was established, which, whatever we may think of its intrinsic value, has certainly answered that purpose for which it was chiefly intended.

In our last lecture, we traced the origins and development of the empirical study of languages from the time of Plato and Aristotle to our own school days. We examined when and under what circumstances the first grammatical analysis of language occurred; how its components, the parts of speech, were named; and how, with a mix of philosophical and empirical terminology, a language teaching system was created that, regardless of our views on its true value, has certainly served the purpose for which it was primarily designed.

Considering the process by which this system of grammatical science was elaborated, it could not be expected to give us an insight into the nature of language. The division into nouns and verbs, articles and conjunctions, the schemes of declension and conjugation, were a merely artificial network thrown over the living body of language. We must not look in the grammar of Dionysius Thrax for a correct and well-articulated skeleton of human speech. It is curious, however, to observe the striking coincidences between the grammatical terminology of the Greeks and the Hindús, which would seem to prove that there must be some true and natural foundation for the much-abused [pg 116] grammatical system of the schools. The Hindús are the only nation that cultivated the science of grammar without having received any impulse, directly or indirectly, from the Greeks. Yet we find in Sanskrit too the same system of cases, called vibhakti, or inflections, the active, passive, and middle voices, the tenses, moods, and persons, divided not exactly, but very nearly, in the same manner as in Greek.100 In Sanskrit, grammar is called vyâkaraņa, which means analysis or taking to pieces. As Greek grammar owed its origin to the critical study of Homer, Sanskrit grammar arose from the study of the Vedas, the most ancient poetry of the Brahmans. The differences between the dialect of these sacred hymns and the literary Sanskrit of later ages were noted and preserved with a religious care. We still possess the first essays in the grammatical science of the Brahmans, the so-called prâtiśâkhyas. These works, though they merely profess to give rules on the proper pronunciation of the ancient dialect of the Vedas, furnish us at the same time with observations of a grammatical character, and particularly with those valuable lists of words, irregular or in any other way remarkable, the Gaņas. These supplied that solid basis on which successive generations of scholars erected the astounding structure that reached its perfection in the grammar of Pâņini. There is no form, regular or irregular, in the whole Sanskrit language, which is not provided for in the grammar of Pâņini and his commentators. It is the perfection of a merely empirical analysis of language, unsurpassed, nay even unapproached, by anything in the grammatical literature of other nations. Yet of [pg 117] the real nature, and natural growth of language, it teaches us nothing.

Considering how this system of grammatical science was developed, it couldn’t be expected to provide insight into the nature of language. The division into nouns and verbs, articles and conjunctions, and the patterns of declension and conjugation were merely an artificial network imposed on the living language. We shouldn’t expect to find a correct and well-structured framework of human speech in the grammar of Dionysius Thrax. However, it’s interesting to note the striking similarities between the grammatical terminology of the Greeks and the Hindus, which seems to suggest that there must be some genuine and natural foundation for the often-misused grammatical system taught in schools. The Hindus are the only culture that developed the science of grammar without any influence, directly or indirectly, from the Greeks. Yet, we also find in Sanskrit the same system of cases, called vibhakti, or inflections, as well as the active, passive, and middle voices, the tenses, moods, and persons, organized not exactly, but very similarly to Greek. In Sanskrit, grammar is called vyākarana, which means analysis or breaking down. Just as Greek grammar originated from the critical study of Homer, Sanskrit grammar arose from studying the Vedas, the oldest poetry of the Brahmans. The differences between the dialect of these sacred hymns and the literary Sanskrit of later times were noted and preserved with utmost care. We still have the early attempts in the grammatical science of the Brahmans, known as prâtiśâkhyas. These works, although they primarily aim to provide rules for the correct pronunciation of the ancient dialect of the Vedas, also give us grammatical observations, particularly valuable lists of words, whether irregular or otherwise noteworthy, called Gaņas. These provided a solid foundation upon which successive generations of scholars built the impressive structure that reached its peak in the grammar of Pâņini. There is no form, regular or irregular, in the entire Sanskrit language that isn’t accounted for in the grammar of Pâņini and his commentators. It represents the pinnacle of purely empirical language analysis, unmatched and even unapproached by anything in the grammatical literature of other cultures. Yet, it reveals nothing about the true nature and natural development of language.

What then do we know of language after we have learnt the grammar of Greek or Sanskrit, or after we have transferred the network of classical grammar to our own tongue?

What do we understand about language after we've learned the grammar of Greek or Sanskrit, or after we've applied the principles of classical grammar to our own language?

We know certain forms of language which correspond to certain forms of thought. We know that the subject must assume the form of the nominative, the object that of the accusative. We know that the more remote object may be put in the dative, and that the predicate, in its most general form, may be rendered by the genitive. We are taught that whereas in English the genitive is marked by a final s, or by the preposition of, it is in Greek expressed by a final ος, in Latin by is. But what this ος and is represent, why they should have the power of changing a nominative into a genitive, a subject into a predicate, remains a riddle. It is self-evident that each language, in order to be a language, must be able to distinguish the subject from the object, the nominative from the accusative. But how a mere change of termination should suffice to convey so material a distinction would seem almost incomprehensible. If we look for a moment beyond Greek and Latin, we see that there are in reality but few languages which have distinct forms for these two categories of thought. Even in Greek and Latin there is no outward distinction between the nominative and accusative of neuters. The Chinese language, it is commonly said, has no grammar at all, that is to say, it has no inflections, no declension and conjugation, in our sense of these words; it makes no formal distinction of the various parts of speech, noun, [pg 118] verb, adjective, adverb, &c. Yet there is no shade of thought that cannot be rendered in Chinese. The Chinese have no more difficulty in distinguishing between “James beats John,” and “John beats James,” than the Greeks and Romans or we ourselves. They have no termination for the accusative, but they attain the same by always placing the subject before, and the object after the verb, or by employing words, before or after the noun, which clearly indicate that it is to be taken as the object of the verb.101 There are other languages [pg 119] which have more terminations even than Greek and Latin. In Finnish there are fifteen cases, expressive of every possible relation between the subject and the object; but there is no accusative, no purely objective case. In English and French the distinctive terminations of the nominative and accusative have been worn off by phonetic corruption, and these languages are obliged, like Chinese, to mark the subject and object by the collocation of words. What we learn therefore at school in being taught that rex in the nominative becomes regem in the accusative, is simply a practical rule. We know when to say rex, and when to say regem. But why the king as a subject should be called rex, and as an object regem, remains entirely [pg 120] unexplained. In the same manner we learn that amo means I love, amavi I loved; but why that tragical change from love to no love should be represented by the simple change of o to avi, or, in English, by the addition of a mere d, is neither asked nor answered.

We understand that certain types of language match certain types of thought. The subject needs to be in the nominative case, and the object in the accusative case. We know the more distant object can go in the dative case, and the predicate, in its broadest form, can be expressed by the genitive. We're taught that, while in English the genitive is marked by a final s or the preposition of, in Greek it is shown by a final ος, and in Latin by is. But what these ος and is actually represent, and why they have the power to change a nominative into a genitive, or a subject into a predicate, remains a mystery. It’s clear that for any language to function, it needs to distinguish between the subject and the object, the nominative and the accusative. However, how a simple change in endings can convey such a significant distinction seems almost unfathomable. If we momentarily look beyond Greek and Latin, we see that there are actually very few languages that have distinct forms for these two categories of thought. Even within Greek and Latin, there is no outward difference between the nominative and accusative for neuter nouns. It's often claimed that the Chinese language has no grammar, which means it has no inflections, declensions, or conjugations in the way we understand those terms; it makes no formal distinctions among the various parts of speech, like noun, verb, adjective, or adverb. Yet, there isn’t a nuance of thought that can't be expressed in Chinese. The Chinese have no more trouble distinguishing between “James defeats John,” and “John defeats James,” than the Greeks, Romans, or we do. They lack a specific ending for the accusative, but they achieve clarity by always placing the subject before the verb and the object after, or by using words before or after the noun that clearly indicate it should be interpreted as the object of the verb. There are other languages that have even more endings than Greek and Latin. In Finnish, there are fifteen cases, covering every possible relationship between the subject and the object, but there’s no accusative, no purely objective case. In English and French, the distinct endings of the nominative and accusative have been eroded by phonetic change, so these languages, like Chinese, have to indicate the subject and object through word order. Therefore, what we learn in school about rex being nominative and becoming king in the accusative is simply a practical rule. We know when to say rex and when to say king. But why the word for king as a subject is rex, and as an object king, remains totally unexplained. Similarly, we learn that love means I love, and amavi means I loved; but why that tragic shift from love to no love is represented by the simple change from o to avi, or in English, by just adding a d, is neither questioned nor explained.

Now if there is a science of language, these are the questions which it will have to answer. If they cannot be answered, if we must be content with paradigms and rules, if the terminations of nouns and verbs must be looked upon either as conventional contrivances or as mysterious excrescences, there is no such thing as a science of language, and we must be satisfied with what has been called the art (τέχνη) of language, or grammar.

Now, if there is a science of language, these are the questions it will need to address. If we can’t answer them, if we have to settle for paradigms and rules, if the endings of nouns and verbs are just seen as conventional tools or mysterious oddities, then there is no science of language, and we have to accept what’s been called the art (τέχνη) of language, or grammar.

Before we either accept or decline the solution of any problem, it is right to determine what means there are for solving it. Beginning with English we should ask, what means have we for finding out why I love should mean I am actually loving, whereas I loved indicates that that feeling is past and gone? Or, if we look to languages richer in inflections than English, by what process can we discover under what circumstances amo, I love, was changed, through the mere addition of an r, into amor, expressing no longer I love, but I am loved? Did declensions and conjugations bud forth like the blossoms of a tree? Were they imparted to man ready made by some mysterious power? Or did some wise people invent them, assigning certain letters to certain phases of thought, as mathematicians express unknown quantities by freely chosen algebraic exponents? We are here brought at once face to face with the highest and most difficult problem of our science, the origin of language. But it will be well [pg 121] for the present to turn our eyes away from theories, and fix our attention at first entirely on facts.

Before we decide to accept or reject the solution to any problem, it makes sense to figure out how to solve it. Starting with English, we should ask, what tools do we have to understand why I ❤️ means I am currently loving, while I loved it. suggests that feeling is in the past? Or, if we look at languages with richer inflections than English, how can we find out under what circumstances love (I love) was changed, with just the addition of an r, into love, which no longer means I ❤️, but I am loved.? Did declensions and conjugations develop like the blossoms of a tree? Were they given to humans fully formed by some mysterious force? Or did some wise people create them, assigning specific letters to particular ideas, similar to how mathematicians represent unknown quantities with selected algebraic symbols? We are immediately confronted with the most significant and challenging issue in our field, the origin of language. However, for now, it would be better to shift our focus away from theories and concentrate entirely on facts. [pg 121]

Let us keep to the English perfect, I loved, as compared with the present, I love. We cannot embrace at once the whole English grammar, but if we can track one form to its true lair, we shall probably have no difficulty in digging out the rest of the brood. Now, if we ask how the addition of a final d could express the momentous transition from being in love to being indifferent, the first thing we have to do, before attempting any explanation, would be to establish the earliest and most original form of I loved. This is a rule which even Plato recognized in his philosophy of language, though, we must confess, he seldom obeyed it. We know what havoc phonetic corruption may make both in the dictionary and the grammar of a language, and it would be a pity to waste our conjectures on formations which a mere reference to the history of language would suffice to explain. Now a very slight acquaintance with the history of the English language teaches us that the grammar of modern English is not the same as the grammar of Wycliffe. Wycliffe's English again may be traced back to what, with Sir Frederick Madden, we may call Middle English, from 1500 to 1330; Middle English to Early English, from 1330 to 1230; Early English to Semi-Saxon from 1230 to 1100; and Semi-Saxon to Anglo-Saxon.102 It is evident that if we are to discover the original intention of the syllable which changes I love into I loved, we must consult the original form of that syllable wherever we can find it. We should never [pg 122] have known that priest meant originally an elder, unless we had traced it back to its original form presbyter, in which a Greek scholar at once recognizes the comparative of presbys, old. If left to modern English alone, we might attempt to connect priest with praying or preaching, but we should not thus arrive at its true derivation. The modern word Gospel conveys no meaning at all. As soon as we trace it back to the original Goddspell, we see that it is a literal translation of Evangelium, or good news, good tidings.103 Lord would be nothing but an empty title in English, unless we could discover its original form and meaning in the Anglo-Saxon hlafford, meaning a giver of bread, from hlaf, a loaf, and ford, to give.

Let's stick with the perfect tense in English, I loved, compared to the present tense, I love.. We can't tackle the entire English grammar all at once, but if we can track down one form to its true origin, we probably won't have trouble figuring out the rest. Now, if we want to understand how adding a final d marks the significant shift from being in love to being indifferent, the first thing we need to do before attempting any explanation is to establish the earliest and most original form of I loved.. This is a principle that even Plato acknowledged in his philosophy of language, although we must admit he rarely followed it. We know how much phonetic change can disrupt both the dictionary and grammar of a language, and it would be a waste to speculate on formations that a simple look at language history could clarify. A basic knowledge of the history of the English language shows us that the grammar of modern English differs from the grammar of Wycliffe. Wycliffe's English can be traced back to what Sir Frederick Madden calls Middle English, from 1500 to 1330; Middle English to Early English, from 1330 to 1230; Early English to Semi-Saxon, from 1230 to 1100; and Semi-Saxon to Anglo-Saxon.102 It’s clear that to uncover the original meaning of the syllable that turns I love you into I loved, we need to look for the original form of that syllable wherever possible. We wouldn't have realized that clergyperson originally meant a senior without tracing it back to its original form elder, from which a Greek scholar can readily recognize the comparative of presbyterians, meaning old. If we relied only on modern English, we might try to connect pastor to praying or speaking, but we wouldn't arrive at its true origin that way. The modern word Good news has no real meaning by itself. Once we trace it back to the original Godspell, we see that it literally translates to Gospel, meaning good news or good tidings.103 The term Lord would just be an empty title in English unless we could uncover its original form and meaning in Anglo-Saxon hlafford, which means a giver of bread, derived from half, meaning loaf, and Ford, meaning to give.

But even after this is done, after we have traced a modern English word back to Anglo-Saxon, it follows by no means that we should there find it in its original form, or that we should succeed in forcing it to disclose its original intention. Anglo-Saxon is not an original or aboriginal language. It points by its very name to the Saxons and Angles of the continent. We have, therefore, to follow our word from Anglo-Saxon through the various Saxon and Low-German dialects, till we arrive at last at the earliest stage of German which is within our reach, the Gothic of the fourth century after Christ. Even here we cannot rest. For, although we cannot trace Gothic back to any earlier Teutonic language, we see at once that Gothic, too, is a modern language, and that it must have passed [pg 123] through numerous phases of growth before it became what it is in the mouth of Bishop Ulfilas.

But even after this is done, after we’ve traced a modern English word back to Anglo-Saxon, it doesn’t mean we’ll find it in its original form, or that we’ll manage to uncover its original meaning. Anglo-Saxon isn’t an original or native language. Its name itself refers to the Saxons and Angles from the continent. So, we have to track our word from Anglo-Saxon through various Saxon and Low-German dialects until we finally reach the earliest form of German accessible to us, which is the Gothic from the fourth century after Christ. Even here we can’t stop. Because, although we can’t trace Gothic back to any earlier Teutonic language, we can easily see that Gothic is also a modern language, and that it must have gone through many stages of development before it became what it is in the speech of Bishop Ulfilas. [pg 123]

What then are we to do?—We must try to do what is done when we have to deal with the modern Romance languages. If we could not trace a French word back to Latin, we should look for its corresponding form in Italian, and endeavor to trace the Italian to its Latin source. If, for instance, we were doubtful about the origin of the French word for fire, feu, we have but to look to the Italian fuoco, in order to see at once that both fuoco and feu are derived from the Latin focus. We can do this, because we know that French and Italian are cognate dialects, and because we have ascertained beforehand the exact degree of relationship in which they stand to each other. Had we, instead of looking to Italian, looked to German for an explanation of the French feu, we should have missed the right track; for the German feuer, though more like feu than the Italian fuoco, could never have assumed in French the form feu.

What are we supposed to do? We need to approach this the same way we do when dealing with modern Romance languages. If we can’t trace a French word back to Latin, we should find its equivalent in Italian and try to trace that Italian word back to its Latin origin. For example, if we’re unsure about the origin of the French word for fire, fire, we can look at the Italian fire to see that both fire and fire come from the Latin focus. We can do this because we know that French and Italian are related languages, and we’ve already established how they connect to each other. If we had looked to German instead of Italian for an explanation of the French fire, we would have missed the right path; the German fire, while more similar to fire than the Italian fire, could never have developed into the form fire in French.

Again, in the case of the preposition hors, which in French means without, we can more easily determine its origin after we have found that hors corresponds with the Italian fuora, the Spanish fuera. The French fromage, cheese, derives no light from Latin. But as soon as we compare the Italian formaggio,104 we see that formaggio and fromage are derived from forma; cheese being made in Italy by keeping the milk in small baskets or forms. Feeble, the French faible, is clearly derived from Latin; but it is not till we see the Italian fievole that we are reminded of the Latin flebilis, tearful. We should never have found the etymology, [pg 124] that is to say the origin, of the French payer, the English to pay, if we did not consult the dictionary of the cognate dialects, such as Italian and Spanish. Here we find that to pay is expressed in Italian by pagare, in Spanish by pagar, whereas in Provençal we actually find the two forms pagar and payar. Now pagar clearly points back to Latin pacare, which means to pacify, to appease. To appease a creditor meant to pay him; in the same manner as une quittance, a quittance or receipt, was originally quietantia, a quieting, from quietus, quiet.

Again, in the case of the preposition hors, which in French means without, we can more easily determine its origin after we discover that hors corresponds with the Italian fuora and the Spanish outside. The French cheese, cheese, doesn’t shed light on its Latin roots. But as soon as we compare it with the Italian cheese, we see that both cheese and cheese come from form; cheese being made in Italy by keeping the milk in small baskets or forms. Weak, the French weak, is clearly derived from Latin; but it’s not until we see the Italian fievole that we are reminded of the Latin flebilis, tearful. We would never have found the etymology, [pg 124] which means the origin, of the French payor, the English to settle up, if we hadn’t checked the dictionary of related dialects like Italian and Spanish. Here we find that to make a payment is expressed in Italian as payable, in Spanish as pay, whereas in Provençal we actually find the two forms pay and payar. Now pay clearly points back to the Latin pacare, which means to calm down, to placate. To appease a creditor meant to pay him; similarly, a receipt, a receipt, was originally quietness, a quieting, from rest, quiet.

If, therefore, we wish to follow up our researches,—if, not satisfied with having traced an English word back to Gothic, we want to know what it was at a still earlier period of its growth,—we must determine whether there are any languages that stand to Gothic in the same relation in which Italian and Spanish stand to French;—we must restore, as far as possible, the genealogical tree of the various families of human speech. In doing this we enter on the second or classificatory stage of our science; for genealogy, where it is applicable, is the most perfect form of classification.

If we want to continue our research—if, having traced an English word back to Gothic, we want to know what it was at an even earlier stage of its development—we need to find out if there are any languages that are related to Gothic in the same way that Italian and Spanish are related to French. We should reconstruct, as much as possible, the genealogical tree of the different families of human language. In doing this, we move into the second or classificatory stage of our study; because genealogy, where it can be applied, is the best form of classification.

Before we proceed to examine the results which have been obtained by the recent labors of Schlegel, Humboldt, Bopp, Burnouf, Pott, Benfey, Prichard, Grimm, Kuhn, Curtius, and others in this branch of the science of language, it will be well to glance at what had been achieved before their time in the classification of the numberless dialects of mankind.

Before we look at the results from the recent work of Schlegel, Humboldt, Bopp, Burnouf, Pott, Benfey, Prichard, Grimm, Kuhn, Curtius, and others in this field of linguistics, it's good to take a quick look at what had been accomplished before their time in classifying the countless dialects of humanity.

The Greeks never thought of applying the principle of classification to the varieties of human speech. They only distinguished between Greek on one side, [pg 125] and all other languages on the other, comprehended under the convenient name of “Barbarous.” They succeeded, indeed, in classifying four of their own dialects with tolerable correctness,105 but they applied the term “barbarous” so promiscuously to the other more distant relatives of Greek, (the dialects of the Pelasgians, Carians, Macedonians, Thracians, and Illyrians,) that, for the purposes of scientific classification, it is almost impossible to make any use of the statements of ancient writers about these so-called barbarous idioms.106

The Greeks never thought to apply the idea of classification to the different types of human speech. They simply made a distinction between Greek on one side, [pg 125] and all other languages on the other, which they referred to with the handy term "Brutal." They did manage to classify four of their own dialects fairly accurately,105 but they used the term "brutal" so indiscriminately for other more distant relatives of Greek, like the dialects of the Pelasgians, Carians, Macedonians, Thracians, and Illyrians, that for scientific classification purposes, it's nearly impossible to make sense of the claims made by ancient writers about these so-called barbarous languages.106

[pg 126]

Plato, indeed, in his Cratylus (c. 36), throws out a hint that the Greeks might have received their own words from the barbarians, the barbarians being older than the Greeks. But he was not able to see the full bearing of this remark. He only points out that some words, such as the names of fire, water, and dog, were the same in Phrygian and Greek; and he supposes that the Greeks borrowed them from the Phrygians (c. 26). The idea that the Greek language and that of the barbarians could have had a common source never entered his mind. It is strange that even so comprehensive a mind as that of Aristotle should have failed to perceive in languages some of that law and order which he tried to discover in every realm of nature. As Aristotle, however, did not attempt this, we need not wonder that it was not attempted by any one else for the next two thousand years. The Romans, in all scientific [pg 127] matters, were merely the parrots of the Greeks. Having themselves been called barbarians, they soon learnt to apply the same name to all other nations, except, of course, to their masters, the Greeks. Now barbarian is one of those lazy expressions which seem to say everything but in reality say nothing. It was applied as recklessly as the word heretic during the Middle Ages. If the Romans had not received this convenient name of barbarian ready made for them, they would have treated their neighbors, the Celts and Germans, with more respect and sympathy: they would, at all events, have looked at them with a more discriminating eye. And, if they had done so, they would have discovered, in spite of outward differences, that these barbarians were, after all, not very distant cousins. There was as much similarity between the language of Cæsar and the barbarians against whom he fought in Gaul and Germany as there was between his language and that of Homer. A man of Cæsar's sagacity would have seen this, if he had not been blinded by traditional phraseology. I am not exaggerating. For let us look at one instance only. If we take a verb of such constant occurrence as to have, we shall find the paradigms almost identical in Latin and Gothic:—

Plato, in his Cratylus (c. 36), suggests that the Greeks may have gotten some of their words from the barbarians, who were older than the Greeks. However, he didn't fully grasp the implications of this comment. He points out that certain words, like the names for fire, water, and dog, were the same in Phrygian and Greek, and he suggests that the Greeks borrowed them from the Phrygians (c. 26). The idea that Greek and barbarian languages could have a common origin never occurred to him. It's odd that even someone as insightful as Aristotle didn't recognize some of the order and structure in languages that he sought to find in every aspect of nature. Since Aristotle didn't explore this, it's not surprising that no one else did for the next two thousand years. The Romans, in all scientific matters, were just mimicking the Greeks. Having been called barbarians themselves, they quickly began to label all other nations as such, except of course for their masters, the Greeks. The term barbarian is one of those lazy labels that seems to communicate a lot but actually conveys very little. It was used as carelessly as the term nonconformist during the Middle Ages. Had the Romans not inherited this convenient label of barbarian, they might have treated their neighbors, the Celts and Germans, with more respect and empathy; they would have viewed them with a more discerning perspective. If they had done so, they would have found, despite external differences, that these so-called barbarians were not very distant relatives. There was as much similarity between the language of Cæsar and the peoples he fought against in Gaul and Germany as there was between his language and that of Homer. A man as perceptive as Cæsar would have recognized this if he hadn't been hindered by outdated terminology. I'm not exaggerating. If we examine just one example, like the verb to possess, we will find the conjugations almost identical in Latin and Gothic:—

I have in Latin is habeo, in Gothic haba.
Thou hast in Latin is habes, in Gothic habais.
He has in Latin is habet, in Gothic habaiþ.
We have in Latin is habemus, in Gothic habam.
You have in Latin is habetis, in Gothic habaiþ.
They have in Latin is habent, in Gothic habant.

It surely required a certain amount of blindness, or rather of deafness, not to perceive such similarity, and [pg 128] that blindness or deafness arose, I believe, entirely from the single word barbarian. Not till that word barbarian was struck out of the dictionary of mankind, and replaced by brother, not till the right of all nations of the world to be classed as members of one genus or kind was recognized, can we look even for the first beginnings of our science. This change was effected by Christianity. To the Hindú, every man not twice-born was a Mlechha; to the Greek, every man not speaking Greek was a barbarian; to the Jew, every person not circumcised was a Gentile; to the Mohammedan, every man not believing in the prophet is a Giaur or Kaffir. It was Christianity which first broke down the barriers between Jew and Gentile, between Greek and barbarian, between the white and the black. Humanity is a word which you look for in vain in Plato or Aristotle; the idea of mankind as one family, as the children of one God, is an idea of Christian growth; and the science of mankind, and of the languages of mankind, is a science which, without Christianity, would never have sprung into life. When people had been taught to look upon all men as brethren, then, and then only, did the variety of human speech present itself as a problem that called for a solution in the eyes of thoughtful observers; and I, therefore, date the real beginning of the science of language from the first day of Pentecost. After that day of cloven tongues a new light is spreading over the world, and objects rise into view which had been hidden from the eyes of the nations of antiquity. Old words assume a new meaning, old problems a new interest, old sciences a new purpose. The common origin of mankind, the differences of race and language, the susceptibility of [pg 129] all nations of the highest mental culture, these become, in the new world in which we live, problems of scientific, because of more than scientific, interest. It is no valid objection that so many centuries should have elapsed before the spirit which Christianity infused into every branch of scientific inquiry produced visible results. We see in the oaken fleet which rides the ocean the small acorn which was buried in the ground hundreds of years ago, and we recognize in the philosophy of Albertus Magnus,107 though nearly 1200 years after the death of Christ, in the aspirations of Kepler,108 and in the researches of the greatest philosophers of our own age, the sound of that key-note of thought which had been struck for the first time by the apostle of the [pg 130] Gentiles:109 For the invisible things of Him from the creation of the world are clearly seen, being understood by the things that are made, even His eternal power and Godhead.”

It definitely took some level of blindness, or maybe deafness, not to notice such similarity, and that blindness or deafness came, I believe, entirely from the single word savage. Not until that word barbarian is removed from the human vocabulary and replaced with brother, and not until we recognize that all nations of the world should be seen as part of one family or kind, can we even begin to think about the origins of our science. This change was brought about by Christianity. To the Hindu, everyone who isn’t twice-born is a Mlechha; to the Greek, everyone who doesn’t speak Greek is a barbarian; to the Jew, everyone who isn’t circumcised is a Gentile; to the Muslim, everyone who doesn’t believe in the prophet is a Giaur or Kaffir. It was Christianity that first broke down the barriers between Jew and Gentile, Greek and barbarian, white and black. The word Humankind is one you won’t find in Plato or Aristotle; the idea of mankind as one family, as the children of one God, is something that developed with Christianity; and the study of humanity and its languages is a discipline that would never have come to life without Christianity. When people learned to see all individuals as brothers, it was then that the diversity of human languages became a problem that thoughtful observers felt needed a solution; therefore, I mark the true beginning of linguistic science from the first day of Pentecost. After that day of divided tongues, a new light began to spread across the world, revealing things that had been hidden from the eyes of ancient nations. Old words took on new meanings, old problems gained new significance, and old sciences developed new purposes. The shared origin of mankind, the differences of race and language, and the potential of all nations for advanced intellectual culture have now become problems of scientific, and more than just scientific, interest in the world we live in today. It’s not a valid argument that so many centuries passed before the spirit that Christianity infused into each area of scientific inquiry produced tangible results. We see in the mighty oak that sails the ocean the small acorn that was buried in the ground hundreds of years ago, and we recognize in the philosophy of Albertus Magnus, nearly 1200 years after the death of Christ, in the aspirations of Kepler, and in the research of the greatest thinkers of our own time, the echo of that initial key-note of thought struck for the first time by the apostle of the Gentiles: “For the unseen things about Him from the creation of the world are clearly visible, understood through the things that are made, including His eternal power and divine nature.”

But we shall see that the science of language owes more than its first impulse to Christianity. The pioneers of our science were those very apostles who were commanded “to go into all the world, and preach the Gospel to every creature,” and their true successors, the missionaries of the whole Christian Church. Translations of the Lord's Prayer or of the Bible into every dialect of the world, form even now the most valuable materials for the comparative philologist. As long as the number of known languages was small, the idea of [pg 131] classification hardly suggested itself. The mind must be bewildered by the multiplicity of facts before it has recourse to division. As long as the only languages studied were Greek, Latin, and Hebrew, the simple division into sacred and profane, or classical and oriental, sufficed. But when theologians extended their studies to Arabic, Chaldee, and Syriac, a step, and a very important step, was made towards the establishment of a class or family of languages.110 No one could help seeing that these languages [pg 132] were most intimately related to each other, and that they differed from Greek and Latin on all points on which they agreed among themselves. As early as 1606 we find Guichard,111 in his “Harmonie Etymologique,” placing Hebrew, Chaldee, and Syriac as a class of languages by themselves, and distinguishing besides between the Romance and Teutonic dialects.

But we will see that the study of language owes more than its initial push to Christianity. The pioneers of our field were those very apostles who were instructed “to go into all the world and share the Gospel with every living being,” along with their true successors, the missionaries of the whole Christian Church. Translations of the Lord's Prayer or of the Bible into every dialect around the world still provide the most valuable resources for comparative linguists. When the number of known languages was small, the idea of classification hardly came to mind. The mind has to be overwhelmed by the variety of facts before it resorts to categorization. As long as the only languages studied were Greek, Latin, and Hebrew, the simple division into sacred and secular, or classical and oriental, was sufficient. But when theologians expanded their studies to include Arabic, Chaldee, and Syriac, a significant step was taken toward establishing a class or family of languages.110 It became clear that these languages [pg 132] were closely related to one another and that they differed from Greek and Latin on every point where they aligned with each other. As early as 1606, we find Guichard,111 in his "Etymological Harmony," categorizing Hebrew, Chaldee, and Syriac as a distinct class of languages, while also distinguishing between the Romance and Teutonic dialects.

What prevented, however, for a long time the progress of the science of language was the idea that Hebrew was the primitive language of mankind, and that, therefore, all languages must be derived from Hebrew. The fathers of the Church never expressed any doubt on this point. St. Jerome, in one of his epistles to Damasus,112 writes: “the whole of antiquity (universa antiquitas) affirms that Hebrew, in which the Old Testament is written, was the beginning of all human speech.” Origen, in his eleventh Homily on the book of Numbers, expresses his belief that the Hebrew language, originally [pg 133] given through Adam, remained in that part of the world which was the chosen portion of God, not left like the rest to one of His angels.113 When, therefore, the first attempts at a classification of languages were made, the problem, as it presented itself to scholars such as Guichard and Thomassin, was this: “As Hebrew is undoubtedly the mother of all languages, how are we to explain the process by which Hebrew became split into so many dialects, and how can these numerous dialects, such as Greek, and Latin, Coptic, Persian, Turkish, be traced back to their common source, the Hebrew?”

What held back the progress of language science for a long time was the belief that Hebrew was the original language of humanity and that, therefore, all languages must have come from Hebrew. The early Church leaders never questioned this idea. St. Jerome, in one of his letters to Damasus, writes: "All of ancient history (universa antiquitas) confirms that Hebrew, the language in which the Old Testament is written, was the origin of all human language." Origen, in his eleventh Homily on the book of Numbers, expresses his belief that the Hebrew language, originally [pg 133] given through Adam, remained in the part of the world that was God's chosen land, not left like the rest to one of His angels. When the first attempts to classify languages were made, the challenge for scholars like Guichard and Thomassin was this: "Since Hebrew is definitely the mother of all languages, how do we explain how it split into so many dialects, and how can we trace these various dialects, like Greek, Latin, Coptic, Persian, and Turkish, back to their common source, Hebrew?"

It is astonishing what an amount of real learning and ingenuity was wasted on this question during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. It finds, perhaps, but one parallel in the laborious calculations and constructions of early astronomers, who had to account for the movements of the heavenly bodies, always taking it for granted that the earth must be the fixed centre of our planetary system. But, although we know now that the labors of such scholars as Thomassin were, and could not be otherwise than fruitless, it would be a most discouraging view to take of the progress of the human race, were we to look upon the exertions of eminent men in former ages, though they may have been in a wrong direction, as mere vanity and vexation of spirit. We must not forget that the very fact of the failure of such men contributed powerfully to a general conviction that there must be something wrong in the problem itself, till at last a bolder genius inverted the problem and thereby solved it. When books after books had been [pg 134] written to show how Greek and Latin and all other languages were derived from Hebrew,114 and when not one single system proved satisfactory, people asked at last—“Why then should all languages be derived from Hebrew?”—and this very question solved the problem. It might have been natural for theologians in the fourth and fifth centuries, many of whom knew neither Hebrew nor any language except their own, to take it for granted that Hebrew was the source of all languages, but there is neither in the Old nor the New Testament a single word to necessitate this view. Of the language of Adam we know nothing; but if Hebrew, as we know it, was one of the languages that sprang from the confusion of tongues at Babel, it could not well have been the language of Adam or of the whole earth, “when the whole earth was still of one speech.”115

It’s amazing how much genuine learning and creativity was wasted on this question during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. It might only be comparable to the painstaking calculations and models of early astronomers, who assumed that the Earth was the fixed center of our solar system. However, even though we now realize that the efforts of scholars like Thomassin were ultimately futile, it would be a discouraging perspective to view the achievements of significant figures in the past—despite being misguided—as simply pointless struggles. We should remember that the very failure of these thinkers strongly contributed to the growing belief that there was something fundamentally wrong with the problem itself, until eventually a bolder mind flipped the problem around and solved it. After countless books were published claiming that Greek, Latin, and all other languages descended from Hebrew, and when none of those systems proved satisfactory, people eventually asked—"Why then should all languages come from Hebrew?"—and this very question resolved the issue. It might seem reasonable for theologians in the fourth and fifth centuries, many of whom only spoke their own language and not Hebrew, to assume that Hebrew was the source of all languages, but there isn’t a single word in the Old or New Testament that requires this belief. We know nothing about the language of Adam; but if Hebrew, as we understand it, was one of the languages that arose from the confusion of tongues at Babel, it couldn’t have been the language of Adam or of the entire Earth, “when the entire world spoke the same language.”

Although, therefore, a certain advance was made towards a classification of languages by the Semitic scholars of the seventeenth century, yet this partial advance became in other respects an impediment. The purely scientific interest in arranging languages according to their characteristic features was lost sight of, and erroneous ideas were propagated, the influence of which has even now not quite subsided.

Although a certain progress was made towards classifying languages by the Semitic scholars of the seventeenth century, this partial progress also became a hindrance in other ways. The purely scientific interest in organizing languages based on their unique features was overlooked, and misleading ideas were spread, the effects of which still linger today.

The first who really conquered the prejudice that [pg 135] Hebrew was the source of all language was Leibniz, the cotemporary and rival of Newton. “There is as much reason,” he said, “for supposing Hebrew to have been the primitive language of mankind, as there is for adopting the view of Goropius, who published a work at Antwerp, in 1580, to prove that Dutch was the language spoken in Paradise.”116 In a letter to Tenzel, Leibniz writes: “To call Hebrew the primitive language, is like calling branches of a tree primitive branches, or like imagining that in some country hewn trunks could grow instead of trees. Such ideas may be conceived, but they do not agree with the laws of nature, and with the harmony of the universe, that is to say with the Divine Wisdom.”117

The first person to truly challenge the belief that Hebrew was the source of all languages was Leibniz, a contemporary and rival of Newton. "There is just as much reason," he said, "There's just as much evidence to suggest that Hebrew was the original language of humanity as there is to support Goropius's idea, who published a book in Antwerp in 1580 claiming that Dutch was the language spoken in Paradise."116 In a letter to Tenzel, Leibniz writes: "Calling Hebrew the original language is like labeling branches of a tree as primitive or thinking that carved trunks could replace actual trees. These ideas may be imagined, but they don't match the laws of nature and the harmony of the universe, which means they don't reflect Divine Wisdom."117

But Leibniz did more than remove this one great stumbling-block from the threshold of the science of language. He was the first to apply the principle of sound inductive reasoning to a subject which before him had only been treated at random. He pointed [pg 136] out the necessity of collecting, first of all, as large a number of facts as possible.118 He appealed to missionaries, travellers, ambassadors, princes, and emperors, to help him in a work which he had so much at heart. The Jesuits in China had to work for him. Witsen,119 the traveller, sent him a most precious present, a translation of the Lord's Prayer into the jargon of the Hottentots. “My friend,” writes Leibniz in thanking him, “remember, I implore you, and remind your Muscovite friends, to make researches in order to procure specimens of the Scythian languages, the Samoyedes, Siberians, Bashkirs, Kalmuks, Tungusians, and others.” Having made the acquaintance of Peter the Great, Leibniz wrote to him the following letter, dated Vienna, October the 26th, 1713:—

But Leibniz did more than just eliminate this major obstacle in the field of language science. He was the first to apply solid inductive reasoning to a topic that had previously been approached haphazardly. He emphasized the need to gather as many facts as possible. He reached out to missionaries, travelers, ambassadors, princes, and emperors, asking for their help in a project that was very important to him. The Jesuits in China worked on his behalf. Witsen, the traveler, sent him a valuable gift: a translation of the Lord's Prayer into the Hottentot language. [pg 136] “My friend,” Leibniz wrote in his thank-you note, “please remember this and urge your Muscovite friends to conduct research to gather examples of the Scythian languages, including those of the Samoyedes, Siberians, Bashkirs, Kalmuks, Tungusians, and others.” After getting to know Peter the Great, Leibniz wrote him the following letter, dated Vienna, October 26th, 1713:—

“I have suggested that the numerous languages, hitherto almost entirely unknown and unstudied, which are current in the empire of your Majesty and on its frontiers, should be reduced to writing; also that dictionaries, or at least small vocabularies, should be collected, and translations be procured in such languages of the Ten Commandments, the Lord's Prayer, the Apostolic Symbolum, and other parts of the Catechism, [pg 137] ut omnis lingua laudet Dominum. This would increase the glory of your Majesty, who reigns over so many nations, and is so anxious to improve them; and it would, likewise, by means of a comparison of languages, enable us to discover the origin of those nations who from Scythia, which is subject to your Majesty, advanced into other countries. But principally it would help to plant Christianity among the nations speaking those dialects, and I have, therefore, addressed the Most Rev. Metropolitan on the same subject.”120

"I suggested that the many languages, which were previously almost completely unknown and unstudied, spoken in your Majesty's empire and its borders should be documented. I also proposed that dictionaries, or at least small vocabulary lists, should be created, and translations of the Ten Commandments, the Lord's Prayer, the Apostles' Creed, and other parts of the Catechism should be made in those languages, [pg 137] so that every language may praise the Lord. This would enhance your Majesty's glory, as you rule over many nations and are eager to improve them; it would also help us trace the origins of those nations that migrated from Scythia, which is under your Majesty's rule, to other lands. Most importantly, it would support the spread of Christianity among the nations that speak those languages, which is why I contacted the Most Rev. Metropolitan about this issue."120

Leibniz drew up a list of the most simple and necessary terms which should be selected for comparison in various languages. At home, while engaged in historical researches, he collected whatever could throw light on the origin of the German language, and he encouraged others, such as Eccard, to do the same. He pointed out the importance of dialects, and even of provincial and local terms, for elucidating the etymological structure of languages.121 Leibniz never undertook a systematic classification of the whole realm of language, nor was he successful in classing the dialects with which he had become acquainted. He distinguished between a Japhetic and Aramaic class, the former occupying the north, the latter the south, of the continent of Asia and Europe. He believed in a common origin of languages, and in a migration of the human race from east to west. But he failed to distinguish [pg 138] the exact degrees of relationship in which languages stood to each other, and he mixed up some of the Turanian dialects, such as Finnish and Tataric, with the Japhetic family of speech. If Leibniz had found time to work out all the plans which his fertile and comprehensive genius conceived, or if he had been understood and supported by cotemporary scholars, the science of language, as one of the inductive sciences, might have been established a century earlier. But a man like Leibniz, who was equally distinguished as a scholar, a theologian, a lawyer, an historian, and a mathematician, could only throw out hints as to how language ought to be studied. Leibniz was not only the discoverer of the differential calculus. He was one of the first to watch the geological stratification of the earth. He was engaged in constructing a calculating machine, the idea of which he first conceived as a boy. He drew up an elaborate plan of an expedition to Egypt, which he submitted to Louis XIV. in order to avert his attention from the frontiers of Germany. The same man was engaged in a long correspondence with Bossuet to bring about a reconciliation between Protestants and Romanists, and he endeavored, in his Theodicée and other works, to defend the cause of truth and religion against the inroads of the materialistic philosophy of England and France. It has been said, indeed, that the discoveries of Leibniz produced but little effect, and that most of them had to be made again. This is not the case, however, with regard to the science of language. The new interest in languages, which Leibniz had called into life, did not die again. After it had once been recognized as a desideratum to bring together a complete Herbarium [pg 139] of the languages of mankind, missionaries and travellers felt it their duty to collect lists of words, and draw up grammars wherever they came in contact with a new race. The two great works in which, at the beginning of our century, the results of these researches were summed up, I mean the Catalogue of Languages by Hervas, and the Mithridates of Adelung, can both be traced back directly to the influence of Leibniz. As to Hervas, he had read Leibniz carefully, and though he differs from him on some points, he fully acknowledges his merits in promoting a truly philosophical study of languages. Of Adelung's Mithridates and his obligations to Leibniz we shall have to speak presently.

Leibniz created a list of the simplest and most essential terms to be compared across different languages. While doing historical research at home, he gathered anything that could provide insight into the origins of the German language and encouraged others, like Eccard, to do the same. He highlighted the significance of dialects, as well as provincial and local terms, in understanding the etymology of languages. Leibniz never took on a systematic classification of the entire language domain, nor was he able to categorize the dialects he encountered. He recognized a Japhetic and Aramaic class, with the former in the north and the latter in the south of the Asian and European continents. He believed languages had a common origin and that the human race migrated from east to west. However, he did not clearly identify the exact relationships among languages and confused some Turanian dialects, like Finnish and Tataric, with the Japhetic language family. If Leibniz had had the time to fully develop his innovative and broad ideas, or if his contemporary scholars had understood and supported him, the science of language may have been established a century earlier. Yet, a person like Leibniz, who excelled as a scholar, theologian, lawyer, historian, and mathematician, could only provide hints on how language should be studied. Leibniz was not just the discoverer of differential calculus; he was also among the first to observe the geological layers of the earth. He worked on designing a calculating machine, an idea he first had as a child. He created a detailed plan for an expedition to Egypt and presented it to Louis XIV to divert his attention from Germany's borders. This same person had a lengthy correspondence with Bossuet, trying to achieve reconciliation between Protestants and Roman Catholics, and he sought to defend truth and religion against the encroachments of materialistic philosophy from England and France in his works like Theodicée. It's been claimed that Leibniz's discoveries had little impact and that many had to be rediscovered. However, this is not true when it comes to the science of language. The renewed interest in languages that Leibniz sparked didn't fade away. Once it became clear that compiling a complete Herbarium of human languages was a necessity, missionaries and travelers felt compelled to gather word lists and create grammars whenever they encountered a new culture. The two major works that summarized these research findings at the start of our century, Hervas's Catalogue of Languages and Adelung's Mithridates, can be traced directly back to Leibniz's influence. Hervas studied Leibniz closely, and although he disagreed with him on some aspects, he fully acknowledged his contributions to the philosophical study of languages. We will address Adelung's Mithridates and its connections to Leibniz shortly.

Hervas lived from 1735 to 1809. He was a Spaniard by birth, and a Jesuit by profession. While working as a missionary among the Polyglottous tribes of America, his attention was drawn to a systematic study of languages. After his return, he lived chiefly at Rome in the midst of the numerous Jesuit missionaries who had been recalled from all parts of the world, and who, by their communications on the dialects of the tribes among whom they had been laboring, assisted him greatly in his researches.

Hervas lived from 1735 to 1809. He was born in Spain and was a Jesuit by profession. While he was a missionary among the diverse tribes of America, he became interested in studying languages systematically. After returning, he spent most of his time in Rome surrounded by many Jesuit missionaries who had been called back from around the world, and their insights on the dialects of the tribes they had worked with greatly helped him in his research.

Most of his works were written in Italian, and were afterwards translated into Spanish. We cannot enter into the general scope of his literary labors, which are of the most comprehensive character. They were intended to form a kind of Kosmos, for which he chose the title of Idea del Universo.” What is of interest to us is that portion which treats of man and language as part of the universe; and here, again, chiefly his Catalogue of Languages, in six volumes, published in Spanish in the year 1800.

Most of his works were written in Italian and later translated into Spanish. We can't dive into the overall scope of his literary work, which is extensive. He aimed to create a sort of cosmos, for which he chose the title Idea of the Universe.” What interests us is the part that discusses man and language as elements of the universe; and here, particularly his Catalogue of Languages, published in Spanish in six volumes in 1800.

[pg 140]

If we compare the work of Hervas with a similar work which excited much attention towards the end of the last century, and is even now more widely known than Hervas, I mean Court de Gebelin's “Monde Primitif,”122 we shall see at once how far superior the Spanish Jesuit is to the French philosopher. Gebelin treats Persian, Armenian, Malay, and Coptic as dialects of Hebrew; he speaks of Bask as a dialect of Celtic, and he tries to discover Hebrew, Greek, English, and French words in the idioms of America. Hervas, on the contrary, though embracing in his catalogue five times the number of languages that were known to Gebelin, is most careful not to allow himself to be carried away by theories not warranted by the evidence before him. It is easy now to point out mistakes and inaccuracies in Hervas, but I think that those who have blamed him most are those who ought most to have acknowledged their obligations to him. To have collected specimens and notices of more than 300 languages is no small matter. But Hervas did more. He himself composed grammars of more than forty languages.123 He was the first to point out that the true affinities of languages must be determined chiefly by grammatical evidence, not by mere similarity of words.124 He proved, by a comparative [pg 141] list of declensions and conjugations, that Hebrew, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic, Ethiopic, and Amharic are all but dialects of one original language, and constitute one family of speech, the Semitic.125 He scouted the idea of deriving all the languages of mankind from Hebrew. He had perceived clear traces of affinity in Hungarian, Lapponian, and Finnish, three dialects now classed as members of the Turanian family.126 He had proved that Bask was not, as was commonly supposed, a Celtic dialect, but an independent language, spoken by the earliest inhabitants of Spain, as proved by the names of the Spanish mountains and rivers.127 Nay, one of the most brilliant discoveries in the history of the science of language, the establishment of the Malay and Polynesian family of speech, extending from the island of Madagascar east of Africa, over 208 degrees of longitude, to the Easter Islands west of America,128 was made by Hervas long before it was announced to the world by Humboldt.

If we compare Hervas's work with another one that gained a lot of attention toward the end of the last century, and is still more widely known than Hervas, I’m talking about Court de Gebelin's “Primitive World,”122 it becomes clear how much better the Spanish Jesuit is compared to the French philosopher. Gebelin considers Persian, Armenian, Malay, and Coptic as dialects of Hebrew; he claims that Bask is a dialect of Celtic, and he tries to find Hebrew, Greek, English, and French words in American languages. In contrast, Hervas, who documented five times more languages than Gebelin, is careful not to get sidetracked by unsupported theories. It’s easy to point out Hervas’s mistakes and inaccuracies now, but I think those who criticize him the most are the very people who should recognize their debt to him. Compiling specimens and references for more than 300 languages is no small feat. But Hervas did even more. He wrote grammars for over forty languages.123 He was the first to indicate that the true connections between languages should primarily be based on grammatical evidence rather than just the similarity of words.124 He demonstrated, through a comparative list of declensions and conjugations, that Hebrew, Chaldee, Syriac, Arabic, Ethiopic, and Amharic are all dialects of one original language, forming one language family, the Semitic.125 He dismissed the notion of tracing all human languages back to Hebrew. He clearly observed connections in Hungarian, Lapponian, and Finnish, which are now categorized as part of the Turanian family.126 He showed that Bask was not, as was commonly thought, a Celtic dialect, but rather an independent language spoken by the earliest inhabitants of Spain, as indicated by the names of Spanish mountains and rivers.127 Furthermore, one of the most significant breakthroughs in the history of linguistics, the identification of the Malay and Polynesian language family, spanning from Madagascar in East Africa to the Easter Islands west of America over 208 degrees of longitude,128 was discovered by Hervas long before Humboldt presented it to the world.

[pg 142]

Hervas was likewise aware of the great grammatical similarity between Sanskrit and Greek, but the imperfect information which he received from his friend, the Carmelite missionary, Fra Paolino de San Bartolomeo, the author of the first Sanskrit grammar, published at Rome in 1790, prevented him from seeing the full meaning of this grammatical similarity. How near Hervas was to the discovery of the truth may be seen from his comparing such words as theos, God, in Greek, with Deva, God, in Sanskrit. He identified the Greek auxiliary verb eimi, eis, esti, I am, thou art, he is, with the Sanskrit asmi, asi, asti. He even pointed out that the terminations of the three genders129 in Greek, os, ē, on, are the same as the Sanskrit, as, â, am. But believing, as he did, that the Greeks derived their philosophy and mythology from India,130 he supposed that they had likewise borrowed from the Hindus some of their words, and even the art of distinguishing the gender of words.

Hervas also recognized the significant grammatical similarities between Sanskrit and Greek, but the incomplete information he got from his friend, the Carmelite missionary, Fra Paolino de San Bartolomeo, who wrote the first Sanskrit grammar published in Rome in 1790, kept him from fully understanding this grammatical connection. How close Hervas was to discovering the truth can be seen in his comparisons of words like theos, meaning God in Greek, with Deva, meaning God in Sanskrit. He matched the Greek auxiliary verbs eimi, eis, and esti (I am, you are, he is) with the Sanskrit asmi, asi, and asti. He even noted that the endings of the three genders in Greek—os, ē, on—are identical to the Sanskrit endings as, â, am. However, since he believed that the Greeks had derived their philosophy and mythology from India, he thought that they had also borrowed some of their words and even the skill of distinguishing the gender of words from the Hindus.

The second work which represents the science of language at the beginning of this century, and which is, to a still greater extent, the result of the impulse which Leibniz had given, is the Mithridates of Adelung.131 Adelung's work depends partly on Hervas, [pg 143] partly on the collections of words which had been made under the auspices of the Russian government. Now these collections are clearly due to Leibniz. Although Peter the Great had no time or taste for philological studies, the government kept the idea of collecting all the languages of the Russian empire steadily in view.132 Still greater luck was in store for the science of language. Having been patronized by Cæsar at Rome, it found a still more devoted patroness in the great Cesarina of the North, Catherine the Great (1762-1796). Even as Grand-duchess Catherine was engrossed with the idea of a Universal Dictionary, on the plan suggested by Leibniz. She encouraged the chaplain of the British Factory at St. Petersburg, the Rev. Daniel Dumaresq, to undertake the work, and he is said to have published, at her desire, a “Comparative Vocabulary of Eastern Languages,” in quarto; a work, however, which, if ever published, is now completely lost. The reputed author died in London in 1805, at the advanced age of eighty-four. When Catherine came to the throne, her plans of conquest hardly absorbed more of her time than her philological studies; and she once shut herself up nearly a year, devoting all her time to the compilation of her Comparative Dictionary. A letter of hers to Zimmermann, dated the 9th of May, 1785, may interest some of my hearers:—

The second work that represents the science of language at the start of this century, and which is even more the result of the push that Leibniz provided, is Adelung's Mithridates.131 Adelung's work is partly based on Hervas, [pg 143] and partly on the collections of words made under the guidance of the Russian government. These collections clearly stem from Leibniz. Although Peter the Great didn't have the time or interest for language studies, the government consistently focused on collecting all the languages of the Russian empire.132 Even greater fortune awaited the science of language. After receiving support from Cæsar in Rome, it found an even more dedicated patron in Catherine the Great (1762-1796), the great Cesarina of the North. While she was Grand-Duchess, Catherine was deeply invested in the idea of a Universal Dictionary based on Leibniz's suggestion. She encouraged the chaplain of the British Factory in St. Petersburg, Rev. Daniel Dumaresq, to take on this task, and he is said to have published, at her request, a “Comparative Vocabulary of Eastern Languages” in quarto; however, this work, if it was ever published, is now completely lost. The reputed author passed away in London in 1805 at the age of eighty-four. When Catherine ascended to the throne, her plans for conquest barely took more of her time than her linguistic studies; she once isolated herself for nearly a year, dedicating all her time to compiling her Comparative Dictionary. A letter she wrote to Zimmermann, dated May 9, 1785, may interest some of my listeners:—

“Your letter,” she writes, “has drawn me from the solitude in which I had shut myself up for nearly nine months, and from which I found it hard to stir. You [pg 144] will not guess what I have been about. I will tell you, for such things do not happen every day. I have been making a list of from two to three hundred radical words of the Russian language, and I have had them translated into as many languages and jargons as I could find. Their number exceeds already the second hundred. Every day I took one of these words and wrote it out in all the languages which I could collect. This has taught me that the Celtic is like the Ostiakian: that what means sky in one language means cloud, fog, vault, in others; that the word God in certain dialects means Good, the Highest, in others, sun or fire. (Up to here her letter is written in French; then follows a line of German.) I became tired of my hobby, after I had read your book on Solitude. (Then again in French.) But as I should have been sorry to throw such a mass of paper in the fire;—besides, the room, six fathoms in length, which I use as a boudoir in my hermitage, was pretty well warmed—I asked Professor Pallas to come to me, and after making an honest confession of my sin, we agreed to publish these collections, and thus make them useful to those who like to occupy themselves with the forsaken toys of others. We are only waiting for some more dialects of Eastern Siberia. Whether the world at large will or will not see in this work bright ideas of different kinds, must depend on the disposition of their minds, and does not concern me in the least.”

"Your message," she writes, "has pulled me out of the solitude I had trapped myself in for nearly nine months, which was tough to break free from. You [pg 144] will never guess what I’ve been up to. I’ll tell you, because things like this don’t happen every day. I’ve been putting together a list of about two to three hundred radical words in Russian, and I’ve translated them into as many languages and dialects as I could find. The total has already exceeded two hundred. Every day, I took one of these words and wrote it out in all the languages I could gather. This has shown me that Celtic is similar to Ostiakian: for example, what means sky in one language translates to cloud, fog, or vault in others; the word God in certain dialects can mean Good, the Highest, while in others, it refers to sun or fire. (Up to this point, her letter is written in French; then follows a line in German.) I lost interest in this hobby after reading your book on Solitude. (Then again in French.) But since I would have regretted burning such a pile of paper—plus, my boudoir, which is six fathoms long, in my hermitage was quite warm—I asked Professor Pallas to come see me. After honestly confessing my ‘sin,’ we decided to publish these collections, making them useful for those who enjoy the forgotten treasures of others. We’re just waiting for a few more dialects from Eastern Siberia. Whether the world will find bright ideas in this work depends on their mindset and doesn’t concern me at all."

If an empress rides a hobby, there are many ready to help her. Not only were all Russian ambassadors instructed to collect materials; not only did German professors133 supply grammars and dictionaries, but [pg 145] Washington himself, in order to please the empress, sent her list of words to all governors and generals of the United States, enjoining them to supply the equivalents from the American dialects. The first volume of the Imperial Dictionary134 appeared in 1787, containing a list of 285 words translated into fifty-one European, and 149 Asiatic languages. Though full credit should be given to the empress for this remarkable undertaking, it is but fair to remember that it was the philosopher who, nearly a hundred years before, sowed the seed that fell into good ground.

If an empress takes on a hobby, there are plenty of people ready to help her. Not only were all Russian ambassadors told to gather resources; not only did German professors supply grammar books and dictionaries, but [pg 145] Washington himself, to please the empress, sent her a list of words to all governors and generals in the United States, urging them to provide the equivalents from American dialects. The first volume of the Imperial Dictionary134 came out in 1787, featuring a list of 285 words translated into fifty-one European and 149 Asian languages. While the empress deserves full credit for this impressive project, it’s only fair to remember that it was the philosopher who, nearly a hundred years earlier, planted the seeds that led to this success.

As collections, the works of Hervas, of the Empress Catherine, and of Adelung, are highly important, though, such is the progress made in the classification of languages during the last fifty years, that few people would now consult them. Besides, the principle of classification which is followed in these works can hardly claim to be called scientific. Languages are arranged geographically, as the languages of Europe, Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia, though, at the same time, natural affinities are admitted which would unite dialects spoken at a distance of 208 degrees. Languages seemed to float about like islands on the ocean of human speech; they did not shoot together to form themselves into larger continents. This is a most critical period in the history of every science, and if it [pg 146] had not been for a happy accident, which, like an electric spark, caused the floating elements to crystallize into regular forms, it is more than doubtful whether the long list of languages and dialects, enumerated and described in the works of Hervas and Adelung, could long have sustained the interest of the student of languages. This electric spark was the discovery of Sanskrit. Sanskrit is the ancient language of the Hindus. It had ceased to be a spoken language at least 300 b. c. At that time the people of India spoke dialects standing to the ancient Vedic Sanskrit in the relation of Italian to Latin. We know some of these dialects, for there were more than one in various parts of India, from the inscriptions which the famous King Aśoka had engraved on the rocks of Dhauli, Girnar, and Kapurdigiri, and which have been deciphered by Prinsep, Norris, Wilson, and Burnouf. We can watch the further growth of these local dialects in the so-called Pâli, the sacred language of Buddhism in Ceylon, and once the popular dialect of the country where Buddhism took its origin, the modern Behár, the ancient Magadha.135 We meet the same local dialects again in what are called the Prâkrit idioms, used in the later plays, in the sacred literature of the Jainas, and in a few poetical compositions; and we see at last how, through a mixture with the languages of the various conquerors of India, the Arabic, Persian, Mongolic, and Turkish, and through a concomitant corruption of their grammatical system, they were changed into the modern Hindí, Hindustání, Mahrattí, and Bengálí. During all this time, however, Sanskrit continued as the literary language of the [pg 147] Brahmans. Like Latin, it did not die in giving birth to its numerous offspring; and even at the present day, an educated Brahman would write with greater fluency in Sanskrit than in Bengálí. Sanskrit was what Greek was at Alexandria, what Latin was during the Middle Ages. It was the classical and at the same time the sacred language of the Brahmans, and in it were written their sacred hymns, the Vedas, and the later works, such as the laws of Manu and the Purâņas.

As collections, the works of Hervas, the Empress Catherine, and Adelung are quite important, but given the advancements in language classification over the last fifty years, few people would refer to them now. Additionally, the classification method used in these works can hardly be considered scientific. Languages are organized by geography, like the languages of Europe, Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia, but at the same time, natural connections are acknowledged that would link dialects spoken hundreds of miles apart. Languages seemed to float like islands on an ocean of human speech; they didn’t merge to form larger continents. This is a critical time in the history of every science, and if it hadn’t been for a fortunate coincidence, which acted like an electric spark causing the floating elements to take shape, it’s doubtful that the long list of languages and dialects outlined in the works of Hervas and Adelung would have continued to capture the interest of language students for long. This electric spark was the discovery of Sanskrit. Sanskrit is the ancient language of the Hindus. It had stopped being a spoken language at least 300 b. c.. Back then, people in India spoke dialects that were to ancient Vedic Sanskrit what Italian is to Latin. We know some of these dialects from the inscriptions left by the famous King Aśoka on the rocks at Dhauli, Girnar, and Kapurdigiri, which have been deciphered by Prinsep, Norris, Wilson, and Burnouf. We can trace the further development of these local dialects in what’s known as Pali, the sacred language of Buddhism in Ceylon, which was once the common dialect of the area where Buddhism originated, modern Behár, and ancient Magadha. We see the same local dialects again in what are called the Prâkrit idioms, used in later plays, in the sacred literature of the Jainas, and in a few poetic works; and we observe how, through mixing with the languages of various conquerors of India—Arabic, Persian, Mongolic, and Turkish—and through a concurrent corruption of their grammatical structure, they evolved into modern Hindí, Hindustání, Mahrattí, and Bengálí. However, throughout this time, Sanskrit remained the literary language of the [pg 147] Brahmans. Like Latin, it didn’t fade away as it gave rise to its many descendants; even today, an educated Brahman would write more fluently in Sanskrit than in Bengálí. Sanskrit was what Greek was in Alexandria, what Latin was during the Middle Ages. It was both the classical and sacred language of the Brahmans, and their sacred hymns, the Vedas, and later works, like the laws of Manu and the Purâņas, were written in it.

The existence of such a language as the ancient idiom of the country, and the vehicle of a large literature, was known at all times; and if there are still any doubts, like those expressed by Dugald Stewart in his “Conjectures concerning the Origin of the Sanskrit,”136 as to its age and authenticity, they will be best removed by a glance at the history of India, and at the accounts given by the writers of different nations that became successively acquainted with the language and literature of that country.

The existence of an ancient language in the country, which serves as the foundation for a significant body of literature, has always been recognized. If there are still any doubts, like those expressed by Dugald Stewart in his “Theories about the Origin of Sanskrit,”136 regarding its age and authenticity, these can be best addressed by looking at the history of India and the accounts provided by various writers from different nations who became familiar with the language and literature of that region over time.

The argument that nearly all the names of persons and places in India mentioned by Greek and Roman writers are pure Sanskrit, has been handled so fully and ably by others, that nothing more remains to be said.

The claim that almost all the names of people and places in India mentioned by Greek and Roman writers are pure Sanskrit has been thoroughly and skillfully addressed by others, so there's nothing more to add.

The next nation after the Greeks that became acquainted with the language and literature of India was the Chinese. Though Buddhism was not recognized as a third state-religion before the year 65 a. d., under the Emperor Ming-ti,137 Buddhist missionaries reached China from India as early as the third century b. c. One Buddhist missionary is mentioned in the Chinese [pg 148] annals in the year 217; and about the year 120 b. c., a Chinese general, after defeating the barbarous tribes north of the desert of Gobi, brought back as a trophy a golden statue, the statue of Buddha. The very name of Buddha, changed in Chinese into Fo-t'o and Fo,138 is pure Sanskrit, and so is every word and every thought of that religion. The language which the Chinese pilgrims went to India to study, as the key to the sacred literature of Buddhism, was Sanskrit. They call it Fan; but Fan, as M. Stanislas Julien has shown, is an abbreviation of Fan-lan-mo, and this is the only way in which the Sanskrit Brahman could be rendered in Chinese.139 We read of the Emperor Ming-ti, of the dynasty of Han, sending Tsaï-in and other high officials to India, in order to study there the doctrine of Buddha. They engaged the services of two learned Buddhists, Matânga and Tchou-fa-lan, and some of the most important Buddhist works were translated by them into Chinese. The intellectual intercourse between the Indian peninsula and the northern continent of Asia continued uninterrupted for several centuries. Missions were sent from China to India to report on the religious, political, social, and geographical state of the country; and the chief object of interest, which attracted public embassies and private pilgrims across the Himalayan mountains, was the religion of Buddha. About 300 years after the public recognition of Buddhism by the Emperor Ming-ti, the great stream of [pg 149] Buddhist pilgrims began to flow from China to India. The first account which we possess of these pilgrimages refers to the travels of Fa-hian, who visited India towards the end of the fourth century. His travels were translated into French by A. Remusat. After Fa-hian, we have the travels of Hoei-seng and Song-yun, who were sent to India, in 518, by command of the empress, with the view of collecting sacred books and relics. Then followed Hiouen-thsang, whose life and travels, from 629-645, have been rendered so popular by the excellent translation of M. Stanislas Julien. After Hiouen-thsang the principal works of Chinese pilgrims are the Itineraries of the Fifty-six Monks, published in 730, and the travels of Khi-nie, who visited India in 964, at the head of 300 pilgrims.

The next nation after the Greeks to encounter the language and literature of India was China. Although Buddhism was not officially recognized as a third state religion until the year 65 a.d., under Emperor Ming-ti, Buddhist missionaries arrived in China from India as early as the third century b.c.. One Buddhist missionary is noted in the Chinese records in the year 217, and around 120 b.c., a Chinese general, after defeating the barbaric tribes north of the Gobi Desert, brought back a golden statue of Buddha as a trophy. The very name Buddha, translated into Chinese as Fo-t'o and Fo, is pure Sanskrit, as are all the words and concepts of that religion. The language that Chinese pilgrims went to India to study, which was key to the sacred texts of Buddhism, was Sanskrit. They referred to it as Fan; however, Fan, as M. Stanislas Julien has demonstrated, is short for Fan-lan-mo, which is the only way to render the Sanskrit Brahman in Chinese. We learn that Emperor Ming-ti of the Han dynasty sent Tsaï-in and other high officials to India to study Buddha's teachings. They enlisted the help of two learned Buddhists, Matânga and Tchou-fa-lan, who translated some of the most significant Buddhist texts into Chinese. The intellectual exchange between the Indian subcontinent and northern Asia continued without interruption for several centuries. Missions were sent from China to India to gather information on the country’s religious, political, social, and geographical status; and the main point of interest that drew both public embassies and private pilgrims across the Himalayan mountains was Buddha's religion. About 300 years after Buddhism was publicly recognized by Emperor Ming-ti, a significant flow of Buddhist pilgrims began traveling from China to India. The first account we have of these pilgrimages chronicles the travels of Fa-hian, who visited India toward the end of the fourth century. His travels were translated into French by A. Remusat. After Fa-hian, there were the journeys of Hoei-seng and Song-yun, who were sent to India in 518 at the empress’s command to collect sacred texts and relics. Then came Hiouen-thsang, whose life and travels from 629 to 645 have been made popular through M. Stanislas Julien's excellent translation. After Hiouen-thsang, the main works of Chinese pilgrims are the Itineraries of the Fifty-six Monks, published in 730, and the travels of Khi-nie, who visited India in 964 leading a group of 300 pilgrims.

That the language employed for literary purposes in India during all this time was Sanskrit, we learn, not only from the numerous names and religious and philosophical terms mentioned in the travels of the Chinese pilgrims, but from a short paradigm of declension and conjugation in Sanskrit which one of them (Hiouen-thsang) has inserted in his diary.

That the language used for literary purposes in India during this time was Sanskrit, we know not only from the many names and religious and philosophical terms noted in the travels of the Chinese pilgrims, but also from a brief example of declension and conjugation in Sanskrit that one of them (Hiouen-thsang) included in his diary.

As soon as the Muhammedans entered India, we hear of translations of Sanskrit works into Persian and Arabic.140 Harun-al-Rashid (786-809) had two Indians, Manka and Saleh, at his court as physicians. Manka translated the classical work on medicine, Suśruta, and a treatise on poisons, ascribed to Châņakya, from Sanskrit into Persian.141 During the Chalifate of Al Mámúm, a famous treatise on Algebra was translated by Muhammed ben Musa from Sanskrit into Arabic (edited by F. Rosen).

As soon as the Muslims arrived in India, we hear about translations of Sanskrit texts into Persian and Arabic. 140 Harun-al-Rashid (786-809) had two Indians, Manka and Saleh, serving as doctors at his court. Manka translated the classic medical text, Suśruta, and a treatise on poisons attributed to Châņakya, from Sanskrit into Persian. 141 During the Caliphate of Al Mámúm, a well-known text on Algebra was translated by Muhammed ben Musa from Sanskrit into Arabic (edited by F. Rosen).

[pg 150]

About 1000 a. d., Abu Rihan al Birúni (born 970, died 1038) spent forty years in India, and composed his excellent work, the Taríkhu-l-Hind, which gives a complete account of the literature and sciences of the Hindus at that time. Al Birúni had been appointed by the Sultan of Khawarazm to accompany an embassy which he sent to Mahmud of Ghazni and Masud of Lahore. The learned Avicenna had been invited to join the same embassy, but had declined. Al Birúni must have acquired a complete knowledge of Sanskrit, for he not only translated one work on the Sânkhya, and another on the Yoga philosophy, from Sanskrit into Arabic, but likewise two works from Arabic into Sanskrit.142

About 1000 a.d., Abu Rihan al Birúni (born 970, died 1038) spent forty years in India and wrote his remarkable work, the Taríkhu-l-Hind, which provides a comprehensive account of the literature and sciences of the Hindus during that period. Al Birúni was appointed by the Sultan of Khawarazm to join an embassy he sent to Mahmud of Ghazni and Masud of Lahore. The renowned Avicenna was invited to be part of the same embassy but declined. Al Birúni must have gained an in-depth understanding of Sanskrit, as he not only translated one work on the Sânkhya and another on Yoga philosophy from Sanskrit into Arabic but also translated two works from Arabic into Sanskrit.142

About 1150 we hear of Abu Saleh translating a work on the education of kings from Sanskrit into Arabic.143

About 1150, we learn that Abu Saleh translated a work on the education of kings from Sanskrit into Arabic.143

Two hundred years later, we are told that Firoz Shah, after the capture of Nagarcote, ordered several Sanskrit works on philosophy to be translated from Sanskrit by Maulána Izzu-d-din Khalid Khani. A work on veterinary medicine ascribed to Sálotar,144 said [pg 151] to have been the tutor of Suśruta, was likewise translated from Sanskrit in the year 1381. A copy of it was preserved in the Royal Library of Lucknow.

Two hundred years later, we learn that Firoz Shah, after capturing Nagarcote, had several works on philosophy translated from Sanskrit by Maulána Izzu-d-din Khalid Khani. A text on veterinary medicine attributed to Sálotar, who was said to be the tutor of Suśruta, was also translated from Sanskrit in the year 1381. A copy of it was kept in the Royal Library of Lucknow.

Two hundred years more bring us to the reign of Akbar (1556-1605). A more extraordinary man never sat on the throne of India. Brought up as a Muhammedan, he discarded the religion of the Prophet as superstitious,145 and then devoted himself to a search after the true religion. He called Brahmans and fire-worshippers to his court, and ordered them to discuss in his presence the merits of their religions with the Muhammedan doctors. When he heard of the Jesuits at Goa, he invited them to his capital, and he was for many years looked upon as a secret convert to Christianity. He was, however, a rationalist and deist, and never believed anything, as he declared himself, that he could not understand. The religion which he founded, the so-called Ilahi religion, was pure Deism mixed up with the worship of the sun146 as the purest and highest emblem of the Deity. Though Akbar himself could neither read nor write,147 his court was the home of literary men of all persuasions. Whatever book, in any language, promised to throw light on the problems nearest to the emperor's heart, he ordered to be translated into Persian. The New Testament148 was thus translated at his command; so were the Mahâbhârata, the Râmâyaņa, the Amarakosha,149 and other classical [pg 152] works of Sanskrit literature. But though the emperor set the greatest value on the sacred writings of different nations, he does not seem to have succeeded in extorting from the Brahmans a translation of the Veda. A translation of the Atharva-veda150 was made for him by Haji Ibrahim Sirhindi; but that Veda never enjoyed the same authority as the other three Vedas; and it is doubtful even whether by Atharva-veda is meant more than the Upanishads, some of which may have been composed for the special benefit of Akbar. There is a story which, though evidently of a legendary character, shows how the study of Sanskrit was kept up by the Brahmans during the reign of the Mogul emperors.

Two hundred years later, we arrive at the reign of Akbar (1556-1605). No one more extraordinary ever ruled India. Raised as a Muslim, he rejected the Prophet's religion as superstitious, and then dedicated himself to finding the true faith. He invited Brahmins and fire-worshippers to his court and asked them to debate the merits of their religions in front of Muslim scholars. When he heard about the Jesuits in Goa, he reached out to invite them to his capital, and for many years people considered him a secret convert to Christianity. However, he was a rationalist and deist, and he only believed in what he could understand. The religion he founded, known as Ilahi religion, was essentially Deism blended with the worship of the sun as the purest and highest symbol of the divine. Although Akbar could neither read nor write, his court was a hub for writers of all backgrounds. He had any book, in any language, that promised to clarify the issues closest to his heart translated into Persian. The New Testament was translated at his request, along with the Mahābhārata, the Rāmāyaṇa, the Amarakosha, and other classic works of Sanskrit literature. Despite the emperor valuing the sacred texts of various cultures, he seems to have been unable to obtain a translation of the Veda from the Brahmins. A translation of the Atharva-veda was prepared for him by Haji Ibrahim Sirhindi, but that Veda never held the same authority as the other three Vedas, and it remains uncertain whether what is referred to as the Atharva-veda includes anything more than the Upanishads, some of which might have been written specifically for Akbar's benefit. There's a legend that illustrates how the Brahmins continued to study Sanskrit during the rule of the Mughal emperors.

“Neither the authority (it is said) nor promises of Akbar could prevail upon the Brahmans to disclose the tenets of their religion: he was therefore obliged to have recourse to artifice. The stratagem he made use of was to cause an infant, of the name of Feizi, to be committed to the care of these priests, as a poor orphan of the sacerdotal line, who alone could be initiated into the sacred rites of their theology. Feizi, having received the proper instructions for the part he was to act, was conveyed privately to Benares, the seat of knowledge in Hindostan; he was received into the [pg 153] house of a learned Brahman, who educated him with the same care as if he had been his son. After the youth had spent ten years in study, Akbar was desirous of recalling him; but he was struck with the charms of the daughter of his preceptor. The old Brahman laid no restraint on the growing passion of the two lovers. He was fond of Feizi, and offered him his daughter in marriage. The young man, divided between love and gratitude, resolved to conceal the fraud no longer, and, falling at the feet of the Brahman, discovered the imposture, and asked pardon for his offences. The priest, without reproaching him, seized a poniard which hung at his girdle, and was going to plunge it in his heart, if Feizi had not prevented him by taking hold of his arm. The young man used every means to pacify him, and declared himself ready to do anything to expiate his treachery. The Brahman, bursting into tears, promised to pardon him on condition that he should swear never to translate the Vedas, or sacred volumes, or disclose to any person whatever the symbol of the Brahman creed. Feizi readily promised him: how far he kept his word is not known; but the sacred books of the Indians have never been translated.”151

It’s said that neither Akbar's authority nor his promises could persuade the Brahmans to share their religious beliefs, so he had to resort to trickery. His plan was to place an infant named Feizi in the care of these priests, pretending he was a poor orphan from a priestly family who could be uniquely initiated into their sacred practices. After Feizi received the necessary training for this role, he was secretly taken to Benares, the center of knowledge in Hindostan. There, he was welcomed into the home of an educated Brahman, who raised him with the same care as if he were his own son. After spending ten years studying, Akbar wanted to bring him back, but he became infatuated with his teacher’s daughter. The old Brahman didn’t oppose their growing love; he was fond of Feizi and offered him his daughter in marriage. Torn between love and gratitude, Feizi decided he could no longer hide the deception and fell at the Brahman's feet, confessing the trick and asking for forgiveness for his wrongs. The priest, without any blame, grabbed a dagger from his belt, preparing to stab himself unless Feizi stopped him by grabbing his arm. The young man did everything he could to calm him down and said he would do anything to make up for his betrayal. The Brahman, in tears, promised to forgive him on the condition that he swore never to translate the Vedas or any sacred texts, or reveal the symbols of the Brahman faith to anyone. Feizi eagerly agreed; how well he kept his promise is unknown, but the sacred texts of the Indians have never been translated.151

We have thus traced the existence of Sanskrit, as the language of literature and religion of India, from the time of Alexander to the reign of Akbar. A hundred years after Akbar, the eldest son of Shah Jehan, the unfortunate Dárá, manifested the same interest in religious speculations which had distinguished his great [pg 154] grandsire. He became a student of Sanskrit, and translated the Upanishads, philosophical treatises appended to the Vedas, into Persian. This was in the year 1657, a year before he was put to death by his younger brother, the bigoted Aurengzebe. This prince's translation was translated into French by Anquetil Duperron, in the year 1795, the fourth year of the French Republic; and was for a long time the principal source from which European scholars derived their knowledge of the sacred literature of the Brahmans.

We have traced the history of Sanskrit as the language of literature and religion in India from the time of Alexander to Akbar's reign. A hundred years after Akbar, his eldest son, the unfortunate Dárá, showed the same interest in religious ideas that his great grandfather had. He became a student of Sanskrit and translated the Upanishads, philosophical texts related to the Vedas, into Persian. This was in 1657, a year before he was executed by his younger brother, the intolerant Aurengzebe. Dárá's translation was later translated into French by Anquetil Duperron in 1795, the fourth year of the French Republic, and for a long time, it was the main source from which European scholars learned about the sacred literature of the Brahmans.

At the time at which we have now arrived, the reign of Aurengzebe (1658-1707), the cotemporary and rival of Louis XIV., the existence of Sanskrit and Sanskrit literature was known, if not in Europe generally, at least to Europeans in India, particularly to missionaries. Who was the first European, that knew of Sanskrit, or that acquired a knowledge of Sanskrit, is difficult to say. When Vasco de Gama landed at Calicut, on the 9th of May, 1498, Padre Pedro began at once to preach to the natives, and had suffered a martyr's death before the discoverer of India returned to Lisbon. Every new ship that reached India brought new missionaries; but for a long time we look in vain in their letters and reports for any mention of Sanskrit or Sanskrit literature. Francis, now St. Francis Xavier, was the first to organize the great work of preaching the Gospel in India (1542); and such were his zeal and devotion, such his success in winning the hearts of high and low, that his friends ascribed to him, among other miraculous gifts, the gift of tongues152—a gift never claimed by St. Francis himself. It is not, however, [pg 155] till the year 1559 that we first hear of the missionaries at Goa studying, with the help of a converted Brahman,153 the theological and philosophical literature of the country, and challenging the Brahmans to public disputations.

At the point we've reached now, during the reign of Aurengzebe (1658-1707), who was a contemporary and rival of Louis XIV, the existence of Sanskrit and its literature was known, if not widely in Europe, at least among Europeans in India, especially missionaries. It's hard to say who the first European was to learn about Sanskrit or to acquire knowledge of it. When Vasco de Gama arrived at Calicut on May 9, 1498, Padre Pedro immediately started preaching to the local people and was martyred before the explorer returned to Lisbon. Every new ship that arrived in India brought more missionaries; however, for a long time, we find no mention of Sanskrit or its literature in their letters and reports. Francis, now known as St. Francis Xavier, was the first to organize the significant effort to spread the Gospel in India (1542); his zeal and dedication were so remarkable, and he was so successful in gaining the trust of everyone, that his friends attributed to him, among other miraculous gifts, the ability to speak many languages—A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__—a gift that St. Francis himself never claimed. However, it's not until 1559 that we first hear of missionaries in Goa studying, with the help of a converted Brahman,153 the theological and philosophical literature of the land and inviting the Brahmans to public debates.

The first certain instance of a European missionary having mastered the difficulties of the Sanskrit language, belongs to a still later period,—to what may be called the period of Roberto de Nobili, as distinguished from the first period, which is under the presiding spirit of Francis Xavier. Roberto de Nobili went to India in 1606. He was himself a man of high family, of a refined and cultivated mind, and he perceived the more quickly the difficulties which kept the higher castes, and particularly the Brahmans, from joining the Christian communities formed at Madura and other places. These communities consisted chiefly of men of low rank, of no education, and no refinement. He conceived the bold plan of presenting himself as a Brahman, and thus obtaining access to the high and noble, the wise and learned, in the land. He shut himself up for years, acquiring in secret a knowledge, not only of Tamil and Telugu, but of Sanskrit. When, after a patient study of the language and literature of the Brahmans, he felt himself strong enough to grapple with his antagonists, he showed himself in public, dressed in the proper garb of the Brahmans, wearing their cord and their frontal mark, observing their diet, and submitting even to the complicated rules of caste. He [pg 156] was successful, in spite of the persecutions both of the Brahmans, who were afraid of him, and of his own fellow-laborers, who could not understand his policy. His life in India, where he died as an old blind man, is full of interest to the missionary. I can only speak of him here as the first European Sanskrit scholar. A man who could quote from Manu, from the Purâņas, and even from works such as the Âpastamba-sûtras, which are known even at present to only those few Sanskrit scholars who can read Sanskrit MSS., must have been far advanced in a knowledge of the sacred language and literature of the Brahmans; and the very idea that he came, as he said, to preach a new or a fourth Veda,154 which had been lost, shows how well he knew the strong and weak points of the theological system which he came to conquer. It is surprising that the reports which he sent to Rome, in order to defend himself against the charge of idolatry, and in which he drew a faithful picture of the religion, the customs, and literature of the Brahmans, should not have attracted the attention of scholars. The “Accommodation Question,” as it was called, occupied cardinals and popes for many years; but not one of them seems to have perceived the extraordinary [pg 157] interest attaching to the existence of an ancient civilization so perfect and so firmly rooted as to require accommodation even from the missionaries of Rome. At a time when the discovery of one Greek MS. would have been hailed by all the scholars of Europe, the discovery of a complete literature was allowed to pass unnoticed. The day of Sanskrit had not yet come.

The first confirmed instance of a European missionary mastering the challenges of the Sanskrit language occurred in a later period—what we can refer to as the period of Roberto de Nobili, as opposed to the earlier period under the influence of Francis Xavier. Roberto de Nobili arrived in India in 1606. He came from a noble background and possessed a refined and educated mind, quickly realizing the obstacles preventing the higher castes, especially the Brahmans, from joining the Christian communities established in Madura and other locations. These communities primarily consisted of low-ranking individuals with little education or refinement. He devised the daring plan to present himself as a Brahman, gaining access to the upper-class, wise, and learned individuals in the region. He isolated himself for years, secretly developing his knowledge not only of Tamil and Telugu but also of Sanskrit. Once he felt adequately prepared to confront his opponents after extensive study of Brahman literature and language, he appeared publicly dressed in traditional Brahman attire, complete with their cord and forehead mark, followed their dietary restrictions, and adhered even to the complex rules of caste. He succeeded despite facing persecution from both the Brahmans, who were wary of him, and from his own colleagues, who struggled to understand his approach. His life in India, where he died as an elderly blind man, is captivating for missionaries. I can only mention him here as the first European Sanskrit scholar. A person capable of quoting from Manu, the Purâṇas, and even texts like the Âpastamba-sûtras, known today only by a handful of Sanskrit scholars who can read the manuscripts, must have been highly knowledgeable in the sacred language and literature of the Brahmans. His assertion that he came to preach a new or fourth Veda, which had been lost, demonstrates his deep understanding of the strengths and weaknesses of the theological system he aimed to challenge. It is surprising that the reports he sent to Rome, defending himself against accusations of idolatry while providing an accurate depiction of Brahman religion, customs, and literature, didn’t attract scholars’ attention. The “Accommodation Question,” as it was termed, occupied cardinals and popes for years; however, none seemed to recognize the remarkable significance of an ancient civilization so well-developed and deep-rooted that it required adaptation even from Rome’s missionaries. At a time when the discovery of a single Greek manuscript would have been celebrated by scholars across Europe, the revelation of a complete literature went largely ignored. The era of Sanskrit had not yet arrived.

The first missionaries who succeeded in rousing the attention of European scholars to the extraordinary discovery that had been made were the French Jesuit missionaries, whom Louis XIV. had sent out to India after the treaty of Ryswick, in 1697.155 Father Pons drew up a comprehensive account of the literary treasures of the Brahmans; and his report, dated Karikal (dans le Maduré), November 23, 1740, and addressed to Father Duhalde, was published in the “Lettres édifiantes.”156 Father Pons gives in it a most interesting and, in general, a very accurate description of the various branches of Sanskrit literature,—of the four Vedas, the grammatical treatises, the six systems of philosophy, and the astronomy of the Hindus. He anticipated, on several points, the researches of Sir William Jones.

The first missionaries who managed to grab the attention of European scholars about the incredible discovery were the French Jesuit missionaries that Louis XIV sent to India after the treaty of Ryswick in 1697.155 Father Pons created a detailed report on the literary treasures of the Brahmans; his report, dated Karikal (dans le Maduré), November 23, 1740, and addressed to Father Duhalde, was published in the "Edifying Letters."156 In it, Father Pons provides a fascinating and generally very accurate description of various branches of Sanskrit literature—the four Vedas, the grammatical treatises, the six systems of philosophy, and Hindu astronomy. He anticipated several aspects of Sir William Jones's research.

But, although the letter of Father Pons excited a deep interest, that interest remained necessarily barren, as long as there were no grammars, dictionaries, and Sanskrit texts to enable scholars in Europe to study Sanskrit in the same spirit in which they studied Greek and Latin. The first who endeavored to supply this want was a Carmelite friar, a German of the name [pg 158] of Johann Philip Wesdin, better known as Paulinus a Santo Bartholomeo. He was in India from 1776 to 1789; and he published the first grammar of Sanskrit at Rome, in 1790. Although this grammar has been severely criticised, and is now hardly ever consulted, it is but fair to bear in mind that the first grammar of any language is a work of infinitely greater difficulty than any later grammar.157

But even though Father Pons' letter sparked a strong interest, that interest was pretty much useless without grammars, dictionaries, and Sanskrit texts that would allow scholars in Europe to study Sanskrit with the same enthusiasm they applied to Greek and Latin. The first one to tackle this issue was a Carmelite friar from Germany named Johann Philip Wesdin, better known as Paulinus a Santo Bartholomeo. He was in India from 1776 to 1789 and published the first Sanskrit grammar in Rome in 1790. While this grammar has faced harsh criticism and is rarely referenced today, it’s important to remember that creating the first grammar for any language is a significantly more challenging task than writing any subsequent grammar.

We have thus seen how the existence of the Sanskrit language and literature was known ever since India had first been discovered by Alexander and his companions. But what was not known was, that this language, as it was spoken at the time of Alexander, and at the time of Solomon, and for centuries before his time, was intimately related to Greek and Latin, in fact, stood to them in the same relation as French to Italian and Spanish. The history of what may be called European Sanskrit philology dates from the foundation of the Asiatic Society at Calcutta, in 1784.158 It was through the labors of Sir William Jones, Carey, Wilkins, Forster, Colebrooke, and other members of that illustrious Society, that the language and literature of the Brahmans became first accessible to European [pg 159] scholars; and it would be difficult to say which of the two, the language or the literature, excited the deepest and most lasting interest. It was impossible to look, even in the most cursory manner, at the declensions and conjugations, without being struck by the extraordinary similarity, or, in some cases, by the absolute identity of the grammatical forms in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin. As early as 1778, Halhed remarked, in the preface to his Grammar of Bengalí,159 “I have been astonished to find this similitude of Sanskrit words with those of Persian and Arabic, and even of Latin and Greek; and these not in technical and metaphorical terms, which the mutuation of refined arts and improved manners might have occasionally introduced; but in the main groundwork of language, in monosyllables, in the names of numbers, and the appellations of such things as could be first discriminated on the immediate dawn of civilization.” Sir William Jones (died 1794), after the first glance at Sanskrit, declared that whatever its antiquity, it was a language of most wonderful structure, more perfect than the Greek, more copious than the Latin, and more exquisitely refined than either, yet bearing to both of them a strong affinity. “No philologer,” he writes, “could examine the Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, without believing them to have sprung from some common source, which, perhaps, no longer exists. There is a similar reason, though not quite so forcible, for supposing that both the Gothic and Celtic had the same origin with the Sanskrit. The old Persian may be added to the same family.”

We have seen how the existence of the Sanskrit language and literature was known ever since India was first discovered by Alexander and his companions. However, what was not known is that this language, as it was spoken during Alexander's time, during Solomon's time, and for centuries before him, was closely related to Greek and Latin; in fact, it was similar to the relationship between French and Italian or Spanish. The history of what can be called European Sanskrit philology began with the founding of the Asiatic Society in Calcutta in 1784.158 It was through the efforts of Sir William Jones, Carey, Wilkins, Forster, Colebrooke, and other members of that distinguished Society that the language and literature of the Brahmans became accessible to European scholars; and it's hard to say which of the two—language or literature—generated the deepest and most lasting interest. It was impossible to look, even briefly, at the declensions and conjugations without noticing the remarkable similarity, or sometimes the complete identity, of the grammatical forms in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin. As early as 1778, Halhed noted in the preface to his Grammar of Bengali,159 "I've been amazed to discover the similarity of Sanskrit words to those in Persian, Arabic, and even Latin and Greek; and this isn't just in technical or metaphorical terms that might have come from the development of advanced arts and refined customs; it's in the basic structure of the language, in monosyllables, in the names of numbers, and in the terms for things that could be recognized from the very beginning of civilization." Sir William Jones (died 1794), after his first look at Sanskrit, declared that regardless of its ancient roots, it was a language of incredible structure, more perfect than Greek, more extensive than Latin, and more exquisitely refined than either, while still having a strong connection to both. “No linguist,” he writes, “could study Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin without thinking they originated from a common source that may no longer exist. There is a similar, although slightly weaker, reason for proposing that both Gothic and Celtic share the same origin as Sanskrit. Old Persian can also be included in this same family.”

[pg 160]

But how was that affinity to be explained? People were completely taken by surprise. Theologians shook their heads; classical scholars looked sceptical; philosophers indulged in the wildest conjectures in order to escape from the only possible conclusion which could be drawn from the facts placed before them, but which threatened to upset their little systems of the history of the world. Lord Monboddo had just finished his great work160 in which he derives all mankind from a couple of apes, and all the dialects of the world from a language originally framed by some Egyptian gods,161 when the discovery of Sanskrit came on him like a thunder-bolt. It must be said, however, to his credit, that he at once perceived the immense importance of the discovery. He could not be expected to sacrifice his primæval monkeys or his Egyptian idols; but, with that reservation, the conclusions which he drew from the new evidence placed before him by his friend Mr. Wilkins, the author of one of our first Sanskrit grammars, are highly creditable to the acuteness of the Scotch judge. “There is a language,” he writes162 (in 1792), “still existing, and preserved among the Bramins of India, which is a richer and in every respect a finer language than even the Greek of Homer. All the other languages of India have a great resemblance to this language, [pg 161] which is called the Shanscrit. But those languages are dialects of it, and formed from it, not the Shanscrit from them. Of this, and other particulars concerning this language, I have got such certain information from India, that if I live to finish my history of man, which I have begun in my third volume of ‘Antient Metaphysics,’ I shall be able clearly to prove that the Greek is derived from the Shanscrit, which was the antient language of Egypt, and was carried by the Egyptians into India, with their other arts, and into Greece by the colonies which they settled there.”

But how could that connection be explained? People were completely caught off guard. Theologians were baffled; classical scholars were skeptical; philosophers came up with the wildest theories to avoid the only conclusion that could be drawn from the facts presented to them, which threatened to disrupt their little systems of world history. Lord Monboddo had just finished his major work160 in which he traced all of humanity back to a pair of apes and all languages back to a tongue supposedly created by some Egyptian gods,161 when the discovery of Sanskrit hit him like a lightning bolt. It must be noted, however, that he immediately recognized the significance of this discovery. While he couldn't be expected to give up his primitive monkeys or his Egyptian deities, the conclusions he drew from the new evidence presented to him by his friend Mr. Wilkins, who authored one of the first Sanskrit grammars, reflect well on the sharpness of the Scottish judge. "There's a language," he writes162 (in 1792), “still existing and preserved among the Brahmins of India, which is a richer and, in every way, finer language than even the Greek of Homer. All the other languages of India are quite similar to this language, [pg 161] called Sanskrit. But those languages are dialects of it, not the other way around. I have received such reliable information about this language from India that if I live to finish my history of humanity, which I have started in the third volume of ‘Ancient Metaphysics,’ I will be able to clearly prove that Greek is derived from Sanskrit, which was the ancient language of Egypt and was brought by the Egyptians to India along with their other arts, and to Greece by the colonies they established there.”

A few years later (1795) he had arrived at more definite views on the relation of Sanskrit to Greek; and he writes,163 “Mr. Wilkins has proved to my conviction such a resemblance betwixt the Greek and the Shanscrit, that the one must be a dialect of the other, or both of some original language. Now the Greek is certainly not a dialect of the Shanscrit, any more than the Shanscrit is of the Greek. They must, therefore, be both dialects of the same language; and that language could be no other than the language of Egypt, brought into India by Osiris, of which, undoubtedly, the Greek was a dialect, as I think I have proved.”

A few years later (1795), he had developed clearer ideas about the relationship between Sanskrit and Greek; and he writes, 163 “Mr. Wilkins has convinced me of the strong similarities between Greek and Sanskrit, suggesting that one must be a dialect of the other, or that they both come from some original language. However, Greek is definitely not a dialect of Sanskrit, just as Sanskrit is not a dialect of Greek. Therefore, they must both be dialects of the same language, which could only be the language of Egypt, brought to India by Osiris, of which Greek was certainly a dialect, as I believe I have demonstrated.”

Into these theories of Lord Monboddo's on Egypt and Osiris, we need not inquire at present. But it may be of interest to give one other extract, in order to show how well, apart from his men with, and his monkeys without, tails, Lord Monboddo could sift and handle the evidence that was placed before him:—

Into these theories of Lord Monboddo about Egypt and Osiris, we don't need to delve right now. However, it might be interesting to share one more excerpt to illustrate how effectively, aside from his theories on men with tails and monkeys without, Lord Monboddo could analyze and manage the evidence presented to him:—

“To apply these observations to the similarities which [pg 162] Mr. Wilkins has discovered betwixt the Shanscrit and the Greek;—I will begin with these words, which must have been original words in all languages, as the things denoted by them must have been known in the first ages of civility, and have got names; so that it is impossible that one language could have borrowed them from another, unless it was a derivative or dialect of that language. Of this kind are the names of numbers, of the members of the human body, and of relations, such as that of father, mother, and brother. And first, as to numbers, the use of which must have been coeval with civil society. The words in the Shanscrit for the numbers from one to ten are, ek, dwee, tree, chatoor, panch, shat, sapt, aght, nava, das, which certainly have an affinity to the Greek or Latin names for those numbers. Then they proceed towards twenty, saying ten and one, ten and two, and so forth, till they come to twenty; for their arithmetic is decimal as well as ours. Twenty they express by the word veensatee. Then they go on till they come to thirty, which they express by the word treensat, of which the word expressing three is part of the composition, as well as it is of the Greek and Latin names for those numbers. And in like manner they go on expressing forty, fifty, &c., by a like composition with the words expressing simple numerals, namely, four, five, &c., till they come to the number one hundred, which they express by sat, a word different from either the Greek or Latin name for that number. But, in this numeration, there is a very remarkable conformity betwixt the word in Shanscrit expressing twenty or twice ten, and the words in Greek and Latin expressing the same number; for in none of the three languages has the word any relation to the [pg 163] number two, which, by multiplying ten, makes twenty; such as the words expressing the numbers thirty, forty, &c., have to the words expressing three or four; for in Greek the word is eikosi, which expresses no relation to the number two; nor does the Latin viginti, but which appears to have more resemblance to the Shanscrit word veensatee. And thus it appears that in the anomalies of the two languages of Greek and Latin, there appears to be some conformity with the Shanscrit.”

“To connect the similarities that Mr. Wilkins has found between Sanskrit and Greek, I’ll begin with these words, which must have been original in all languages since the concepts they represent would have been familiar in early civilization and named; therefore, it’s unlikely that one language borrowed them from another unless it was a derivative or dialect of that language. This includes names for numbers, parts of the human body, and family relations like father, mother, and brother. First, regarding numbers, which must have existed alongside civil society. The Sanskrit words for the numbers one to ten are ek, dwee, tree, chatoor, panch, shat, sapt, aght, nava, das, which definitely have a connection to the Greek or Latin names for those numbers. They then move to twenty, saying ten and one, ten and two, and so on, until they reach twenty; their arithmetic is decimal just like ours. They use the word veensatee to express twenty. Next, they continue to thirty, which is expressed with the word treensat, incorporating the word for three, just as the Greek and Latin names for these numbers do. They express forty, fifty, etc., similarly by combining words that represent simple numerals, like four, five, etc., until they reach the number one hundred, which they express with sat, a word that differs from both the Greek and Latin names for that number. However, in this counting, there’s an interesting similarity between the Sanskrit word for twenty (or twice ten) and the words in Greek and Latin for the same number, as none of the three languages has a term that relates to the number two, which, when multiplied by ten, gives twenty. For instance, the Greek term is eikosi, which does not relate to the number two, nor does the Latin viginti, yet it seems to resemble the Sanskrit word veensatee more closely. Thus, it seems that within the peculiarities of Greek and Latin, there is some similarity to Sanskrit.”

Lord Monboddo compares the Sanskrit pada with the Greek pous, podos; the Sanskrit nâsa with the Latin nasus; the Sanskrit deva, god, with the Greek Theos and Latin deus; the Sanskrit ap, water, with the Latin aqua; the Sanskrit vidhavâ with the Latin vidua, widow. Sanskrit words such as gonia, for angle, kentra, for centre, hora, for hour, he points out as clearly of Greek origin, and imported into Sanskrit. He then proceeds to show the grammatical coincidences between Sanskrit and the classical languages. He dwells on compounds such as tripada, from tri, three, and pada, foot—a tripod; he remarks on the extraordinary fact that Sanskrit, like Greek, changes a positive into a negative adjective by the addition of the a privative; and he then produces what he seems to consider as the most valuable present that Mr. Wilkins could have given him, namely, the Sanskrit forms, asmi, I am; asi, thou art; asti, he is; santi, they are; forms clearly of the same origin as the corresponding forms, esmi, eis, esti, in Greek, and sunt in Latin.

Lord Monboddo compares the Sanskrit pada with the Greek pouls, podos; the Sanskrit nasa with the Latin nasus; the Sanskrit deity, god, with the Greek Theos and Latin god; the Sanskrit ap, water, with the Latin water; the Sanskrit widower with the Latin widow, widow. Sanskrit words like gonia for angle, kentra for center, and time for hour are pointed out as clearly of Greek origin and imported into Sanskrit. He then goes on to show the grammatical similarities between Sanskrit and the classical languages. He focuses on compounds like tripod, from tri, three, and pada, foot—a tripod; he notes the remarkable fact that Sanskrit, like Greek, transforms a positive adjective into a negative one by adding the a privative; and he then presents what he considers to be the most valuable gift that Mr. Wilkins could have given him, namely, the Sanskrit forms, asmi, I am; asi, thou art; asti, he is; santa, they are; forms that clearly originate from the same roots as the corresponding forms, esmi, eis, esti in Greek, and sunt in Latin.

Another Scotch philosopher, Dugald Stewart, was much less inclined to yield such ready submission. [pg 164] No doubt it must have required a considerable effort for a man brought up in the belief that Greek and Latin were either aboriginal languages, or modifications of Hebrew, to bring himself to acquiesce in the revolutionary doctrine that the classical languages were intimately related to a jargon of mere savages; for such all the subjects of the Great Mogul were then supposed to be. However, if the facts about Sanskrit were true, Dugald Stewart was too wise not to see that the conclusions drawn from them were inevitable. He therefore denied the reality of such a language as Sanskrit altogether, and wrote his famous essay to prove that Sanskrit had been put together, after the model of Greek and Latin, by those arch-forgers and liars the Brahmans, and that the whole of Sanskrit literature was an imposition. I mention this fact, because it shows, better than anything else, how violent a shock was given by the discovery of Sanskrit to prejudices most deeply ingrained in the mind of every educated man. The most absurd arguments found favor for a time, if they could only furnish a loophole by which to escape from the unpleasant conclusion that Greek and Latin were of the same kith and kin as the language of the black inhabitants of India. The first who dared boldly to face both the facts and the conclusions of Sanskrit scholarship was the German poet, Frederick Schlegel. He had been in England during the peace of Amiens (1801-1802), and had learned a smattering of Sanskrit from Mr. Alexander Hamilton. After carrying on his studies for some time at Paris, he published, in 1808, his work, “On the Language and Wisdom of the Indians.” This work became the foundation of the science of language. [pg 165] Though published only two years after the first volume of Adelung's “Mithridates,” it is separated from that work by the same distance which separates the Copernican from the Ptolemæan system. Schlegel was not a great scholar. Many of his statements have proved erroneous; and nothing would be easier than to dissect his essay and hold it up to ridicule. But Schlegel was a man of genius; and when a new science is to be created, the imagination of the poet is wanted, even more than the accuracy of the scholar. It surely required somewhat of poetic vision to embrace with one glance the languages of India, Persia, Greece, Italy, and Germany, and to rivet them together by the simple name of Indo-Germanic. This was Schlegel's work; and in the history of the intellect, it has truly been called “the discovery of a new world.”

Another Scottish philosopher, Dugald Stewart, was much less willing to accept things easily. [pg 164] It must have taken a significant effort for someone raised with the belief that Greek and Latin were either original languages or variations of Hebrew to accept the radical idea that classical languages were closely linked to a mere savage dialect; that’s how people viewed the subjects of the Great Mogul at the time. Still, if the facts about Sanskrit were accurate, Dugald Stewart was too intelligent not to recognize that the conclusions drawn from them were unavoidable. Therefore, he outright denied the existence of a language called Sanskrit and wrote his famous essay to argue that Sanskrit had been constructed based on Greek and Latin by those deceptive Brahmans, claiming that all Sanskrit literature was a fabrication. I mention this because it illustrates, better than anything else, the dramatic impact that the discovery of Sanskrit had on deeply entrenched prejudices in the minds of educated people. Absurd arguments gained temporary support if they could provide any way to avoid the uncomfortable conclusion that Greek and Latin were related to the languages of the black inhabitants of India. The first person who boldly confronted both the facts and the implications of Sanskrit scholarship was the German poet, Frederick Schlegel. He had been in England during the peace of Amiens (1801-1802) and had picked up some Sanskrit from Mr. Alexander Hamilton. After studying for a while in Paris, he published his work, "On the Language and Wisdom of the Indigenous Peoples." in 1808. This work became the foundation of the science of language. [pg 165] Although it was published just two years after the first volume of Adelung's “Mithridates,”, it is as different from that work as the Copernican system is from the Ptolemaic one. Schlegel wasn't a great scholar. Many of his claims have proven to be incorrect, and it would be easy to dissect his essay and ridicule it. But Schlegel was a genius; and when creating a new science, the imagination of a poet is often needed even more than the precision of a scholar. It surely required some poetic vision to capture in one glance the languages of India, Persia, Greece, Italy, and Germany, and to connect them with the simple term Indo-Germanic. This was Schlegel's achievement; and in the annals of intellectual history, it has truly been called "the discovery of a new world."

We shall see, in our next lecture, how Schlegel's idea was taken up in Germany, and how it led almost immediately to a genealogical classification of the principal languages of mankind.

We will see, in our next lecture, how Schlegel's idea was adopted in Germany, and how it quickly led to a genealogical classification of the main languages of humanity.

[pg 166]

Lecture V. Classifying Languages by Genealogy.

We traced, in our last Lecture, the history of the various attempts at a classification of languages to the year 1808, the year in which Frederick Schlegel published his little work on “The Language and Wisdom of the Indians.” This work was like the wand of a magician. It pointed out the place where a mine should be opened; and it was not long before some of the most distinguished scholars of the day began to sink their shafts, and raise the ore. For a time, everybody who wished to learn Sanskrit had to come to England. Bopp, Schlegel, Lassen, Rosen, Burnouf, all spent some time in this country, copying manuscripts at the East-India House, and receiving assistance from Wilkins, Colebrooke, Wilson, and other distinguished members of the old Indian Civil Service. The first minute and scholar-like comparison of the grammar of Sanskrit with that of Greek and Latin, Persian, and German, was made by Francis Bopp, in 1816.164 Other essays of his followed; and in 1833 appeared the first volume of his “Comparative Grammar of Sanskrit, Zend, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, Slavonic, Gothic, and German.” This work was not finished till nearly twenty years later, in 1852;165 but it [pg 167] will form forever the safe and solid foundation of comparative philology. August Wilhelm von Schlegel, the brother of Frederick Schlegel, used the influence which he had acquired as a German poet, to popularize the study of Sanskrit in Germany. His “Indische Bibliothek” was published from 1819 to 1830, and though chiefly intended for Sanskrit literature, it likewise contained several articles on Comparative Philology. This new science soon found a still more powerful patron in William von Humboldt, the worthy brother of Alexander von Humboldt, and at that time one of the leading statesmen in Prussia. His essays, chiefly on the philosophy of language, attracted general attention during his lifetime; and he left a lasting monument of his studies in his great work on the Kawi language, which was published after his death, in 1836. Another scholar who must be reckoned among the founders of Comparative Philology is Professor Pott, whose “Etymological Researches” appeared first in 1833 and 1836.166 More special in its purpose, but based on the same general principles, was Grimm's “Teutonic Grammar,” a work which has truly been called colossal. Its publication occupied nearly twenty years, from 1819 to 1837. We ought, likewise, to mention here the name of an eminent Dane, Erasmus Rask, who devoted himself to the study of the northern languages of Europe. He started, in 1816, for Persia and India, and was the first to acquire a knowledge of Zend, the language of the Zend-Avesta; but he died before he had time to publish all the results of his learned researches. He had proved, however, that the [pg 168] sacred language of the Parsis was closely connected with the sacred language of the Brahmans, and that, like Sanskrit, it had preserved some of the earliest formations of Indo-European speech. These researches into the ancient Persian language were taken up again by one of the greatest scholars that France ever produced, by Eugène Burnouf. Though the works of Zoroaster had been translated before by Anquetil Duperron, his was only a translation of a modern Persian translation of the original. It was Burnouf who, by means of his knowledge of Sanskrit and Comparative Grammar, deciphered for the first time the very words of the founder of the ancient religion of light. He was, likewise, the first to apply the same key with real success to the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes; and his premature death will long be mourned, not only by those who, like myself, had the privilege of knowing him personally and attending his lectures, but by all who have the interest of oriental literature and of real oriental scholarship at heart.

We traced, in our last lecture, the history of various attempts to classify languages up to the year 1808, when Frederick Schlegel published his brief work on "The Language and Wisdom of the Native Americans." This work was like a magician's wand. It indicated where a valuable resource could be found, and soon, some of the most distinguished scholars of the time began to explore it and extract knowledge. For a while, anyone wanting to learn Sanskrit had to come to England. Bopp, Schlegel, Lassen, Rosen, Burnouf all spent some time in this country, copying manuscripts at the East-India House and receiving help from Wilkins, Colebrooke, Wilson, and other distinguished members of the old Indian Civil Service. The first detailed and scholarly comparison of Sanskrit grammar with Greek and Latin, Persian, and German was made by Francis Bopp in 1816.164 He produced other essays, and in 1833, the first volume of his "Comparative Grammar of Sanskrit, Zend, Greek, Latin, Lithuanian, Slavic, Gothic, and German." was published. This work was not completed until nearly twenty years later, in 1852;165 but it will remain a solid foundation for comparative philology. August Wilhelm von Schlegel, brother of Frederick Schlegel, used his influence as a German poet to popularize Sanskrit studies in Germany. His “Indian Library” was published from 1819 to 1830, and while primarily focused on Sanskrit literature, it also included several articles on Comparative Philology. This new field soon gained an even stronger supporter in William von Humboldt, the brother of Alexander von Humboldt, who was a leading statesman in Prussia at that time. His essays, particularly on the philosophy of language, gained widespread attention during his life, and he left a lasting legacy with his major work on the Kawi language, published posthumously in 1836. Another key figure in founding Comparative Philology is Professor Pott, whose "Etymological Studies" were first published in 1833 and 1836.166 More specific in purpose but based on similar principles was Grimm's "German Grammar," a truly colossal work that took nearly twenty years to complete, from 1819 to 1837. We should also mention the eminent Dane, Erasmus Rask, who focused on studying northern European languages. He set out for Persia and India in 1816 and became the first to learn Zend, the language of the Zend-Avesta; however, he died before he could publish all his research findings. Nevertheless, he demonstrated that the sacred language of the Parsis was closely related to the sacred language of the Brahmans and that it, like Sanskrit, had preserved some of the earliest forms of Indo-European speech. These explorations into the ancient Persian language were later taken up by one of France's greatest scholars, Eugène Burnouf. Although Zoroaster's works had previously been translated by Anquetil Duperron, that was merely a translation of a modern Persian version of the original. It was Burnouf who, through his knowledge of Sanskrit and Comparative Grammar, deciphered the very words of the founder of the ancient religion of light for the first time. He was also the first to successfully apply the same approach to the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes. His untimely death will be mourned for a long time, not only by those, like myself, who had the privilege of knowing him personally and attending his lectures, but by everyone who cares about Oriental literature and genuine Oriental scholarship.

I cannot give here a list of all the scholars who followed in the track of Bopp, Schlegel, Humboldt, Grimm, and Burnouf. How the science of language has flourished and abounded may best be seen in the library of any comparative philologist. There has been for the last ten years a special journal of Comparative Philology in Germany. The Philological Society in London publishes every year a valuable volume of its transactions; and in almost every continental university there is a professor of Sanskrit who lectures likewise on Comparative Grammar and the science of language.

I can't provide a complete list of all the scholars who followed in the footsteps of Bopp, Schlegel, Humboldt, Grimm, and Burnouf. The growth and richness of language science can be best observed in the library of any comparative philologist. For the past decade, there’s been a dedicated journal on Comparative Philology in Germany. The Philological Society in London publishes an important volume of its transactions each year; and almost every university in mainland Europe has a professor of Sanskrit who also teaches Comparative Grammar and the science of language.

But why, it may naturally be asked, why should the [pg 169] discovery of Sanskrit have wrought so complete a change in the classificatory study of languages? If Sanskrit had been the primitive language of mankind, or at least the parent of Greek, Latin, and German, we might understand that it should have led to quite a new classification of these tongues. But Sanskrit does not stand to Greek, Latin, the Teutonic, Celtic, and Slavonic languages in the relation of Latin to French, Italian, and Spanish. Sanskrit, as we saw before, could not be called their parent, but only their elder sister. It occupies with regard to the classical languages a position analogous to that which Provençal occupies with regard to the modern Romance dialects. This is perfectly true; but it was exactly this necessity of determining distinctly and accurately the mutual relation of Sanskrit and the other members of the same family of speech, which led to such important results, and particularly to the establishment of the laws of phonetic change as the only safe means for measuring the various degrees of relationship of cognate dialects, and thus restoring the genealogical tree of human speech. When Sanskrit had once assumed its right position, when people had once become familiarized with the idea that there must have existed a language more primitive than Greek, Latin, and Sanskrit, and forming the common background of these three, as well as of the Teutonic, Celtic, and Slavonic branches of speech, all languages seemed to fall by themselves into their right position. The key of the puzzle was found, and all the rest was merely a work of patience. The same arguments by which Sanskrit and Greek had been proved to hold co-ordinate rank were perceived to apply with equal strength to Latin and Greek; and [pg 170] after Latin had once been shown to be more primitive on many points than Greek, it was easy to see that the Teutonic, the Celtic, and the Slavonic languages also, contained each a number of formations which it was impossible to derive from Sanskrit, Greek, or Latin. It was perceived that all had to be treated as co-ordinate members of one and the same class.

But why, you might ask, did the discovery of Sanskrit create such a total shift in the study of language classification? If Sanskrit were the original language of humanity or at least the ancestor of Greek, Latin, and German, it would make sense that it led to a brand new classification of these languages. However, Sanskrit isn’t in the same relationship to Greek, Latin, the Germanic, Celtic, and Slavic languages as Latin is to French, Italian, and Spanish. As we noted earlier, Sanskrit can’t be considered their parent but rather their older sister. It holds a position similar to that of Provençal in relation to the modern Romance dialects. This is absolutely true; yet, it was precisely the necessity of clearly defining the relationship between Sanskrit and other languages in the same family that resulted in significant findings, particularly in establishing the laws of phonetic change as the most reliable way to gauge the relationships among similar dialects and thus reconstruct the genealogical tree of human language. Once Sanskrit was recognized in its rightful place, and once people became accustomed to the notion that there must have been a more primitive language than Greek, Latin, and Sanskrit serving as the common foundation for these three languages, along with the Germanic, Celtic, and Slavic branches, everything else started to align perfectly. The key to the puzzle was discovered, and the rest was simply a matter of patience. The same arguments that demonstrated that Sanskrit and Greek were on equal footing were found to be equally valid for Latin and Greek; and after Latin was shown to be more primitive than Greek in several aspects, it became apparent that the Germanic, Celtic, and Slavic languages also each had features that couldn’t be traced back to Sanskrit, Greek, or Latin. It was understood that all these languages needed to be treated as equal members of the same class.

The first great step in advance, therefore, which was made in the classification of languages, chiefly through the discovery of Sanskrit, was this, that scholars were no longer satisfied with the idea of a general relationship, but began to inquire for the different degrees of relationship in which each member of a class stood to another. Instead of mere classes, we hear now for the first time of well regulated families of language.

The first major advancement in classifying languages, primarily due to the discovery of Sanskrit, was that scholars no longer settled for just a general sense of connection. They started to examine the various degrees of relationships between each language within a group. Instead of just talking about classes, we now hear about well-defined families of languages for the first time.

A second step in advance followed naturally from the first. Whereas, for establishing in a general way the common origin of certain languages, a comparison of numerals, pronouns, prepositions, adverbs, and the most essential nouns and verbs, had been sufficient, it was soon found that a more accurate standard was required for measuring the more minute degrees of relationship. Such a standard was supplied by Comparative Grammar; that is to say, by an intercomparison of the grammatical forms of languages supposed to be related to each other; such intercomparison being carried out according to certain laws which regulate the phonetic changes of letters.

A second step forward naturally followed the first. While comparing numerals, pronouns, prepositions, adverbs, and the most essential nouns and verbs was enough to establish the common origin of certain languages in a general way, it quickly became clear that a more precise standard was needed to measure the finer degrees of relationship. This standard came from Comparative Grammar; that is, by comparing the grammatical forms of languages thought to be related to one another, following specific rules that govern the phonetic changes of letters.

A glance at the modern history of language will make this clearer. There could never be any doubt that the so-called Romance languages, Italian, Wallachian, Provençal, French, Spanish, and Portuguese, were closely related to each other. Everybody could [pg 171] see that they were all derived from Latin. But one of the most distinguished French scholars, Raynouard, who has done more for the history of the Romance languages and literature than any one else, maintained that Provençal only was the daughter of Latin; whereas French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese were the daughters of Provençal. He maintained that Latin passed, from the seventh to the ninth century, through an intermediate stage, which he called Langue Romane, and which he endeavored to prove was the same as the Provençal of Southern France, the language of the Troubadours. According to him, it was only after Latin had passed through this uniform metamorphosis, represented by the Langue Romane or Provençal, that it became broken up into the various Romance dialects of Italy, France, Spain, and Portugal. This theory, which was vigorously attacked by August Wilhelm von Schlegel, and afterwards minutely criticised by Sir Cornewall Lewis, can only be refuted by a comparison of the Provençal grammar with that of the other Romance dialects. And here, if you take the auxiliary verb to be, and compare its forms in Provençal and French, you will see at once that, on several points, French has preserved the original Latin forms in a more primitive state than Provençal, and that, therefore, it is impossible to classify French as the daughter of Provençal, and as the granddaughter of Latin. We have in Provençal:—

A look at the recent history of language makes this clearer. There’s no doubt that the Romance languages—Italian, Wallachian, Provençal, French, Spanish, and Portuguese—are closely related. It’s obvious that they all came from Latin. However, one of the most noted French scholars, Raynouard, who has contributed more to the history of Romance languages and literature than anyone else, argued that only Provençal is a daughter of Latin; he claimed that French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese are the daughters of Provençal. He argued that Latin went through an intermediate stage from the seventh to the ninth century, which he called Langue Romane, and he tried to prove that it was the same as the Provençal of Southern France, the language of the Troubadours. According to him, it wasn’t until Latin went through this uniform transformation, represented by Langue Romane or Provençal, that it broke into the various Romance dialects of Italy, France, Spain, and Portugal. This theory was strongly criticized by August Wilhelm von Schlegel, and later meticulously reviewed by Sir Cornewall Lewis. It can only be disproven by comparing Provençal grammar to that of the other Romance dialects. If you take the auxiliary verb to become and compare its forms in Provençal and French, you’ll see right away that, in several respects, French has retained the original Latin forms in a more primitive state than Provençal. Therefore, it’s impossible to classify French as a daughter of Provençal and a granddaughter of Latin. We have in Provençal:—

sem, corresponding to the French we are,
etz, corresponding to the French you are,
son, corresponding to the French they are,

and it would be a grammatical miracle if crippled forms, such as sem, etz, and son, had been changed [pg 172] back again into the more healthy, more primitive, more Latin, sommes, êtes, sont; sumus, estis, sunt.

and it would be a grammatical miracle if flawed forms, like sem, etz, and kid, had been reverted back to the healthier, more basic, more Latin sums, êtes, sont; sumus, estis, sunt.

Let us apply the same test to Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin; and we shall see how their mutual genealogical position is equally determined by a comparison of their grammatical forms. It is as impossible to derive Latin from Greek, or Greek from Sanskrit, as it is to treat French as a modification of Provençal. Keeping to the auxiliary verb to be, we find that I am is in

Let’s apply the same test to Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, and we’ll see how their mutual genealogical relationships are clearly defined by comparing their grammatical forms. It’s just as impossible to derive Latin from Greek or Greek from Sanskrit as it is to treat French as a variation of Provençal. Focusing on the auxiliary verb to exist, we find that I'm is in

SanskritGreekLithuanian
asmiesmi esmi.

The root is as, the termination mi.

The root is *as*, the ending *mi*.

Now, the termination of the second person is si, which, together with as, or es, would make,

Now, the ending for the second person is si, which, along with as, or es, would create,

as-ises-si es-si.

But here Sanskrit, as far back as its history can be traced, has reduced assi to asi; and it would be impossible to suppose that the perfect, or, as they are sometimes called, organic, forms in Greek and Lithuanian, es-si, could first have passed through the mutilated state of the Sanskrit asi.

But in Sanskrit, dating back as far as its history can be traced, assi has been simplified to asi; and it would be hard to believe that the perfect, or what are sometimes called organic, forms in Greek and Lithuanian, es-si, could have originated from the irregular form of the Sanskrit asi.

The third person is the same in Sanskrit, Greek, and Lithuanian, as-ti or es-ti; and, with the loss of the final i, we recognize the Latin est, Gothic ist, and Russian est'.

The third person is the same in Sanskrit, Greek, and Lithuanian, as it is or es-ti; and, with the loss of the final i, we recognize the Latin est, Gothic list, and Russian est'.

The same auxiliary verb can be made to furnish sufficient proof that Latin never could have passed through the Greek, or what used to be called the Pelasgic stage, but that both are independent modifications of the same original language. In the singular, Latin is less primitive than Greek; for sum stands for es-um, es for es-is, est for es-ti. In the first [pg 173] person plural, too, sumus stands for es-umus, the Greek es-mes, the Sanskrit 'smas. The second person es-tis, is equal to Greek es-te, and more primitive than Sanskrit stha. But in the third person plural Latin is more primitive than Greek. The regular form would be as-anti; this, in Sanskrit, is changed into santi. In Greek, the initial s is dropped, and the Æolic enti, is finally reduced to eisi. The Latin, on the contrary, has kept the radical s, and it would be perfectly impossible to derive the Latin sunt from the Greek eisi.

The same auxiliary verb can provide enough evidence that Latin could never have evolved from Greek or what was previously referred to as the Pelasgic stage, but rather that both are independent variations of the same original language. In the singular form, Latin is less primitive than Greek; for total represents es-um, es corresponds to es-is, and est stands for es-ti. In the first person plural, sumus represents es-umus, while the Greek es-months and the Sanskrit 'smas are similar. The second person es-tis is equivalent to the Greek es-te and is more primitive than the Sanskrit stha. However, in the third person plural, Latin is more primitive than Greek. The expected form would be as anti; in Sanskrit, this changes to santi. In Greek, the initial s is omitted, and the Æolic enti is eventually reduced to eisi. In contrast, Latin retains the radical s, making it impossible to derive the Latin sunt from the Greek eisi.

I need hardly say that the modern English, I am, thou art, he is, are only secondary modifications of the same primitive verb. We find in Gothic—

I don't need to point out that modern English forms like I'm, you're, he's are just slight variations of the same basic verb. We see this in Gothic—

im for ism
is for iss
ist.

The Anglo-Saxon changes the s into r, thus giving—

The Anglo-Saxon changes the s into r, thus giving—

eom for eorm, plural sind for isn't.
eart for ears, plural sind
is for ist, plural sind

By applying this test to all languages, the founders of comparative philology soon reduced the principal dialects of Europe and Asia to certain families, and they were able in each family to distinguish different branches, each consisting again of numerous dialects, both ancient and modern.

By applying this test to all languages, the founders of comparative philology quickly organized the main dialects of Europe and Asia into specific families. Within each family, they were able to identify different branches, each containing various dialects, both ancient and modern.

There are many languages, however, which as yet have not been reduced to families, and though there is no reason to doubt that some of them will hereafter be comprehended in a system of genealogical classification, it is right to guard from the beginning [pg 174] against the common, but altogether gratuitous supposition, that the principle of genealogical classification must be applicable to all. Genealogical classification is no doubt the most perfect of all classifications, but there are but few branches of physical science in which it can be carried out, except very partially. In the science of language, genealogical classification must rest chiefly on the formal or grammatical elements, which, after they have been affected by phonetic change, can be kept up only by a continuous tradition. We know that French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese must be derived from a common source, because they share grammatical forms in common, which none of these dialects could have supplied from their own resources, and which have no meaning, or, so to say, no life, in any one of them. The termination of the imperfect ba in Spanish, va in Italian, by which canto, I sing, is changed into cantaba and cantava, has no separate existence, and no independent meaning in either of these modern dialects. It could not have been formed with the materials supplied by Spanish and Italian. It must have been handed down from an earlier generation in which this ba had a meaning. We trace it back to Latin bam, in cantabam, and here it can be proved that bam was originally an independent auxiliary verb, the same which exists in Sanskrit bhavâmi, and in the Anglo-Saxon beom, I am. Genealogical classification, therefore, applies properly only to decaying languages, to languages in which grammatical growth has been arrested, through the influence of literary cultivation; in which little new is added, everything old is retained as long as possible, and where what we call growth [pg 175] or history is nothing but the progress of phonetic corruption. But before languages decay, they have passed through a period of growth; and it seems to have been completely overlooked, that dialects which diverged during that early period, would naturally resist every attempt at genealogical classification. If you remember the manner in which, for instance, the plural was formed in Chinese and other languages examined by us in a former Lecture, you will see that where each dialect may choose its own term expressive of plurality, such as heap, class, kind, flock, cloud, &c., it would be unreasonable to expect similarity in grammatical terminations, after these terms have been ground down by phonetic corruption to mere exponents of plurality. But, on the other hand, it would by no means follow that therefore these languages had no common origin. Languages may have a common origin, and yet the words which they originally employed for marking case, number, person, tense, and mood, having been totally different, the grammatical terminations to which these words would gradually dwindle down could not possibly yield any results if submitted to the analysis of comparative grammar. A genealogical classification of such languages is, therefore, from the nature of the case, simply impossible, at least, if such classification is chiefly to be based on grammatical or formal evidence.

There are many languages that still haven't been categorized into families, and while it's likely that some of them will eventually fit into a genealogical classification system, we should be careful from the start to avoid the common but completely unfounded assumption that genealogical classification applies to all languages. Genealogical classification is certainly the most complete form of classification, but it can only be implemented in a limited way in most branches of physical science. In linguistics, genealogical classification must primarily be based on formal or grammatical elements, which can only persist through continuous tradition after being influenced by phonetic change. We know that French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese must have a common origin because they share grammatical forms that none of these languages could have developed independently, and which have no meaning, or essentially no life, in any single one of them. The imperfect ending ba in Spanish and va in Italian, which changes song, I sing, into sang and sang, has no standalone existence or independent meaning in either modern dialect. It couldn't have been created with resources from Spanish and Italian alone; it must have been passed down from an earlier generation where this ba had significance. We trace it back to the Latin bam, in cantabam, and it's proven that bam was originally an independent auxiliary verb, the same one that exists in Sanskrit bhavâmi, and in Anglo-Saxon beom, I am. Therefore, genealogical classification applies properly only to dying languages, to those in which grammatical development has stopped, due to literary cultivation; where little new is added, everything old is preserved for as long as possible, and what we call growth or history is merely the result of phonetic decay. But before languages decline, they have gone through a period of growth; it seems to be completely overlooked that dialects which diverged during that early stage would naturally resist any attempt at genealogical classification. If you recall how, for example, the plural was formed in Chinese and other languages discussed in a previous lecture, you'll understand that where each dialect chooses its own term to express plurality, such as pile, class, kind, group, cloud, etc., it would be unreasonable to expect similar grammatical endings once these terms have been worn down to just indicators of plurality through phonetic change. However, it wouldn't necessarily mean that these languages lack a common origin. Languages can have a shared origin, yet the words they originally used to denote case, number, person, tense, and mood could have been entirely different, meaning that the grammatical endings to which these words would slowly diminish could not yield any meaningful insights if subjected to comparative grammar analysis. Therefore, a genealogical classification of such languages is, by its very nature, simply impossible, at least if that classification is primarily based on grammatical or formal evidence.

It might be supposed, however, that such languages, though differing in their grammatical articulation, would yet evince their common origin by the identity of their radicals or roots. No doubt, they will in many instances. They will probably have retained their numerals in common, some of their pronouns, and some of the commonest words of every-day life. But even here we [pg 176] must not expect too much, nor be surprised if we find even less than we expected. You remember how the names for father varied in the numerous Friesian dialects. Instead of frater, the Latin word for brother, you find hermano in Spanish. Instead of ignis, the Latin word for fire, you have in French feu, in Italian, fuoco. Nobody would doubt the common origin of German and English; yet the English numeral “the first,” though preserved in Fürst, prïnceps, prince, is quite different from the German “Der Erste;” “the second” is quite different from “Der Zweite;” and there is no connection between the possessive pronoun its, and the German sein. This dialectical freedom works on a much larger scale in ancient and illiterate languages; and those who have most carefully watched the natural growth of dialects will be the least surprised that dialects which had the same origin should differ, not only in their grammatical framework, but likewise in many of those test-words which are very properly used for discovering the relationship of literary languages. How it is possible to say anything about the relationship of such dialects we shall see hereafter. For the present, it is sufficient if I have made it clear why the principle of genealogical classification is not of necessity applicable to all languages; and secondly, why languages, though they cannot be classified genealogically, need not therefore be supposed to have been different from the beginning. The assertion so frequently repeated that the impossibility of classing all languages genealogically proves the impossibility of a common origin of language, is nothing but a kind of scientific dogmatism, which, more than anything else, has impeded the free progress of independent research.

It might be assumed, however, that such languages, despite their differences in grammar, would still show their common origin through similar roots or radicals. They likely will in many cases. They probably have kept some of their numerals, certain pronouns, and a few common everyday words. But even here, we shouldn't expect too much, nor should we be surprised if we find even less than anticipated. You remember how the names for father varied across the various Friesian dialects. Instead of brother, the Latin word for brother, you find brother in Spanish. Instead of fire, the Latin word for fire, you have fire in French and fire in Italian. No one would doubt the common origin of German and English; yet the English numeral "the first," though preserved in Prince and prince, is quite different from the German “The First;” "the second" is also different from "The Second;" and there's no connection between the possessive pronoun its and the German be. This freedom of dialect works on a much larger scale in ancient and non-literate languages; and those who have closely observed the natural development of dialects will be least surprised that dialects with the same origin can differ, not only in their grammatical structure but also in many of the key words used to determine the relationships of literary languages. How we can say anything about the relationship of such dialects we will explore later. For now, it's enough to clarify why the principle of genealogical classification doesn’t necessarily apply to all languages; and why languages, even if they can't be classified this way, shouldn't be assumed to have been different from the start. The frequently repeated claim that the inability to classify all languages genealogically proves there's no common origin for language is merely a form of scientific dogmatism, which has primarily hindered the free advancement of independent research.

[pg 177]

But let us see now how far the genealogical classification of languages has advanced, how many families of human speech have been satisfactorily established. Let us remember what suggested to us the necessity of a genealogical classification. We wished to know the original intention of certain words and grammatical forms in English, and we saw that before we could attempt to fathom the origin of such words as “I love,” and “I loved,” we should have to trace them back to their most primitive state. We likewise found, by a reference to the history of the Romance dialects, that words existing in one dialect had frequently been preserved in a more primitive form in another, and that, therefore, it was of the highest importance to bring ancient languages into the same genealogical connection by which French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese are held together as the members of one family.

But let's see how far the genealogical classification of languages has come, and how many families of human speech have been clearly established. We should recall why we felt the need for a genealogical classification. We wanted to understand the original meanings of certain words and grammatical forms in English, and we realized that to uncover the origins of words like “I love,” and "I loved," we needed to trace them back to their most basic forms. We also discovered, by looking at the history of the Romance dialects, that words found in one dialect were often preserved in a more primitive form in another. Thus, it was crucial to connect ancient languages in the same genealogical framework that unites French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese as members of one family.

Beginning, therefore, with the living language of England, we traced it, without difficulty, to Anglo-Saxon. This carries us back to the seventh century after Christ, for it is to that date that Kemble and Thorpe refer the ancient English epic, the Beowulf. Beyond this we cannot go on English soil. But we know that the Saxons, the Angles, and Jutes came from the continent, and there their descendants, along the northern coast of Germany, still speak Low-German, or Nieder-Deutsch, which in the harbors of Antwerp, Bremen, and Hamburg, has been mistaken by many an English sailor for a corrupt English dialect. The Low-German comprehends many dialects in the north or the lowlands of Germany; but in Germany proper they are hardly ever used for literary purposes. The Friesian dialects are Low-German, so are the [pg 178] Dutch and Flemish. The Friesian had a literature of its own as early at least as the twelfth century, if not earlier.167 The Dutch, which is still a national and literary language, though confined to a small area, can be traced back to literary documents of the sixteenth century. The Flemish, too, was at that time the language of the court of Flanders and Brabant, but has since been considerably encroached upon, though not yet extinguished, by the official languages of the kingdoms of Holland and Belgium. The oldest literary document of Low-German on the Continent is the Christian epic, the Heljand (Heljand = Heiland, the Healer or Saviour), which is preserved to us in two MSS. of the ninth century, and was written at that time for the benefit of the newly converted Saxons. We have traces of a certain amount of literature in Saxon or Low-German from that time onward through the Middle Ages up to the seventeenth century. But little only of that literature has been preserved; and, after the translation of the Bible by Luther into High-German, the fate of Low-German literature was sealed.

Starting with the living language of England, we can easily trace it back to Anglo-Saxon. This brings us to the seventh century AD, the time to which Kemble and Thorpe date the ancient English epic, Beowulf. We can’t go any further back on English soil. However, we know that the Saxons, Angles, and Jutes came from the continent, where their descendants along the northern coast of Germany still speak Low German, or Nieder-Deutsch, which many English sailors have mistaken for a corrupted English dialect in the harbors of Antwerp, Bremen, and Hamburg. Low-German includes many dialects in northern or lowland Germany, but they are rarely used for literary purposes in Germany itself. The Friesian dialects are Low-German, as are the Dutch and Flemish. Friesian had its own literature at least as early as the twelfth century, if not sooner. The Dutch, which remains a national and literary language despite being limited to a small area, can be traced back to literary documents from the sixteenth century. Flemish was also the language of the court of Flanders and Brabant during that time, but it has since been significantly overshadowed, though not yet extinguished, by the official languages of the kingdoms of Holland and Belgium. The oldest literary document of Low-German on the continent is the Christian epic, Heljand (Heljand = Heiland, the Healer or Savior), which we have in two manuscripts from the ninth century, written at that time for the benefit of the newly converted Saxons. We see evidence of some literature in Saxon or Low-German from that time through the Middle Ages up to the seventeenth century. However, very little of that literature has been preserved; and after Luther translated the Bible into High-German, the fate of Low-German literature was sealed.

The literary language of Germany is, and has been ever since the days of Charlemagne, the High-German. It is spoken in various dialects all over Germany.168 [pg 179] Its history may be traced through three periods. The present, or New High-German period dates from Luther; the Middle High-German period extends from Luther backwards to the twelfth century; the Old High-German period extends from thence to the seventh century.

The literary language of Germany has been, since the days of Charlemagne, the Standard German. It's spoken in various dialects all over Germany.168 [pg 179] Its history can be divided into three periods. The current, or New High-German period, starts from Luther; the Middle High-German period goes from Luther back to the twelfth century; and the Old High-German period stretches from then to the seventh century.

Thus we see that we can follow the High-German, as well as the Low-German branch of Teutonic speech, back to about the seventh century after Christ. We must not suppose that before that time there was one common Teutonic language spoken by all German tribes, and that it afterwards diverged into two streams,—the High and Low. There never was a common, uniform, Teutonic language; nor is there any evidence to show that there existed at any time a uniform High-German or Low-German language, from which all High-German and Low-German dialects are respectively derived. We cannot derive Anglo-Saxon, Friesian, Flemish, Dutch, and Platt-Deutsch from the ancient Low-German, which is preserved in the continental Saxon of the ninth century. All we can say is this, that these various Low-German dialects in England, Holland, Friesia, and Lower Germany, passed at different times through the same stages, or, so to say, the same latitudes of grammatical growth. We may add that, with every century that we go back, the convergence of these dialects becomes more and more decided; but there is no evidence to justify us in admitting the historical reality of one primitive and uniform Low-German language from which they were all derived. This is a mere creation of grammarians who cannot understand a multiplicity of dialects without a common type. They would likewise demand the admission of a primitive [pg 180] High-German language, as the source, not only of the literary Old, Middle, and Modern High-German, but likewise of all the local dialects of Austria, Bavaria, Swabia, and Franconia. And they would wish us to believe that, previous to the separation into High and Low German, there existed one complete Teutonic language, as yet neither High nor Low, but containing the germs of both. Such a system may be convenient for the purposes of grammatical analysis, but it becomes mischievous as soon as these grammatical abstractions are invested with an historical reality. As there were families, clans, confederacies, and tribes, before there was a nation; so there were dialects before there was a language. The grammarian who postulates an historical reality for the one primitive type of Teutonic speech, is no better than the historian who believes in a Francus, the grandson of Hector, and the supposed ancestor of all the Franks, or in a Brutus, the mythical father of all the Britons. When the German races descended, one after the other, from the Danube and from the Baltic, to take possession of Italy and the Roman provinces,—when the Goths, the Lombards, the Vandals, the Franks, the Burgundians, each under their own kings, and with their own laws and customs, settled in Italy, Gaul, and Spain, to act their several parts in the last scene of the Roman tragedy,—we have no reason to suppose that they all spoke one and the same dialect. If we possessed any literary documents of those ancient German races, we should find them all dialects again, some with the peculiarities of High, others with those of Low, German. Nor is this mere conjecture: for it so happens that, by some fortunate accident, the dialect of one [pg 181] at least of those ancient German races has been preserved to us in the Gothic translation of the Bible by Bishop Ulfilas.

So, we can trace both the High-German and Low-German branches of Teutonic speech back to around the seventh century after Christ. We shouldn't assume that before that time there was one common Teutonic language spoken by all German tribes, which later split into two branches—High and Low. There was never a singular, uniform Teutonic language, nor is there any evidence that a consistent High-German or Low-German language ever existed from which all High-German and Low-German dialects are derived. We can't trace Anglo-Saxon, Friesian, Flemish, Dutch, and Platt-Deutsch back to the ancient Low-German preserved in continental Saxon from the ninth century. What we can say is that these various Low-German dialects in England, Holland, Friesia, and Lower Germany evolved at different times through similar stages, or, in other words, the same degrees of grammatical development. Moreover, as we go further back in time, the similarities among these dialects become clearer; however, there's no evidence to support the idea of one original and uniform Low-German language from which they all originated. This is just a concept created by grammarians who struggle to comprehend multiple dialects without a common model. They would also expect us to accept the existence of a primitive High-German language as the source not only for the literary Old, Middle, and Modern High-German but also for all the local dialects in Austria, Bavaria, Swabia, and Franconia. They would like us to believe that before the split into High and Low German, there was one complete Teutonic language, which was neither High nor Low, but held the beginnings of both. While this framework might be useful for grammatical analysis, it becomes problematic once these grammatical abstractions are treated as historical fact. Just as there were families, clans, confederacies, and tribes before there was a nation, there were dialects before there was a language. The grammarian who insists on the historical reality of one primitive form of Teutonic speech is no better than a historian who believes in a French, the grandson of Hector and the supposed ancestor of all the Franks, or a Brutus, the mythical father of all the Britons. When the Germanic tribes came down one after another from the Danube and the Baltic to occupy Italy and the Roman provinces—when the Goths, the Lombards, the Vandals, the Franks, and the Burgundians, each under their own kings and with their own laws and customs, settled in Italy, Gaul, and Spain to play their respective roles in the final act of the Roman tragedy—we have no reason to think they all spoke the same dialect. If we had any literary records from those ancient German tribes, we would find them as different dialects, some showing qualities of High German, others of Low German. This isn't just speculation; fortunately, the dialect of at least one of those ancient German tribes has been preserved in the Gothic translation of the Bible by Bishop Ulfilas.

I must say a few words on this remarkable man. The accounts of ecclesiastical historians with regard to the date and the principal events in the life of Ulfilas are very contradictory. This is partly owing to the fact that Ulfilas was an Arian bishop, and that the accounts which we possess of him come from two opposite sides, from Arian and Athanasian writers. Although in forming an estimate of his character it would be necessary to sift this contradictory evidence, it is but fair to suppose that, when dates and simple facts in the life of the Bishop have to be settled, his own friends had better means of information than the orthodox historians. It is, therefore, from the writings of his own co-religionists that the chronology and the historical outline of the Bishop's life should be determined.

I want to say a few words about this remarkable man. The accounts from church historians about the dates and key events in the life of Ulfilas are very conflicting. This is partly because Ulfilas was an Arian bishop, and the accounts we have of him come from two opposing perspectives, from Arian and Athanasian writers. While assessing his character, it’s important to sift through this contradictory evidence, but it’s reasonable to assume that when it comes to dates and basic facts about the Bishop’s life, his friends would have had better access to information than the orthodox historians. Therefore, the chronology and historical outline of the Bishop's life should be based on the writings of his fellow believers.

The principal writers to be consulted are Philostorgius, as preserved by Photius, and Auxentius, as preserved by Maximinus in a MS. lately discovered by Professor Waitz169 in the Library at Paris. (Supplement. Latin. No. 594.) This MS. contains some writings of Hilarius, the two first books of Ambrosius De fide, and the acts of the Council of Aquileja (381). On the margin of this MS. Maximinus repeated the beginning of the acts of the Council of Aquileja, adding remarks of his own in order to show how unfairly Palladius had been treated in that council by Ambrose. He jotted down his own views on the Arian [pg 182] controversy, and on fol. 282, seq., he copied an account of Ulfilas written by Auxentius, the bishop of Dorostorum (Silistria on the Danube), a pupil of Ulfilas. This is followed again by some dissertations of Maximinus, and on foll. 314-327, a treatise addressed to Ambrose by a Semi-arian, a follower of Eusebius, possibly by Prudentius himself, was copied and slightly abbreviated for his own purposes by Maximinus.

The main writers to look at are Philostorgius, as kept by Photius, and Auxentius, as recorded by Maximinus in a recently discovered manuscript by Professor Waitz in the Library in Paris. (Supplement. Latin. No. 594.) This manuscript includes some writings of Hilarius, the first two books of Ambrosius' De fide, and the acts of the Council of Aquileja (381). Maximinus noted the beginning of the acts of the Council of Aquileja in the margin of this manuscript, adding his own comments to illustrate how unfairly Palladius was treated by Ambrose at that council. He also wrote down his thoughts on the Arian controversy, and on folio 282 and following, he copied an account of Ulfilas written by Auxentius, the bishop of Dorostorum (Silistria on the Danube), who was a pupil of Ulfilas. This is followed by more essays by Maximinus, and on folios 314-327, he copied a treatise addressed to Ambrose by a Semi-Arian, a follower of Eusebius, possibly by Prudentius himself, which he edited and shortened for his own use.

It is from Auxentius, as copied by Maximinus, that we learn that Ulfilas died at Constantinople, where he had been invited by the emperor to a disputation. This could not have been later than the year 381, because, according to the same Auxentius, Ulfilas had been bishop for forty years, and, according to Philostorgius, he had been consecrated by Eusebius. Now Eusebius of Nicomedia died 341, and as Philostorgius says that Ulfilas was consecrated by “Eusebius and the bishops who were with him,” the consecration has been referred with great plausibility to the beginning of the year 341, when Eusebius presided at the Synod of Antioch. As Ulfilas was thirty years old at the time of his consecration, he must have been born in 311, and as he was seventy years of age when he died at Constantinople, his death must have taken place in 381.

It is from Auxentius, as copied by Maximinus, that we learn Ulfilas died in Constantinople, where the emperor had invited him for a debate. This couldn't have been later than the year 381, because, according to the same Auxentius, Ulfilas had been a bishop for forty years, and according to Philostorgius, he was ordained by Eusebius. Now, Eusebius of Nicomedia died in 341, and since Philostorgius mentions that Ulfilas was consecrated by "Eusebius and the bishops accompanying him," the consecration is likely to have happened at the beginning of 341, when Eusebius chaired the Synod of Antioch. Since Ulfilas was thirty years old at the time of his ordination, he must have been born in 311, and because he was seventy when he died in Constantinople, his death must have happened in 381.

Professor Waitz fixed the death of Ulfilas in 388, because it is stated by Auxentius that other Arian bishops had come with Ulfilas on his last journey to Constantinople, and had actually obtained the promise of a new council from the emperors, but that the heretical party, i.e., the Athanasians, succeeded in getting a law published, prohibiting all disputation on [pg 183] the faith, whether in public or private. Maximinus, to whom we owe this notice, has added two laws from the Codex Theodosianus, which he supposed to have reference to this controversy, dated respectively 388 and 386. This shows that Maximinus himself was doubtful as to the exact date. Neither of these laws, however, is applicable to the case, as has been fully shown by Dr. Bessell. They are quotations from the Codex Theodosianus made by Maximinus at his own risk, and made in error. If the death of Ulfilas were fixed in 388, the important notice of Philostorgius, that Ulfilas was consecrated by Eusebius, would have to be surrendered, and we should have to suppose that as late as 388 Theodosius had been in treaty with the Arians, whereas after the year 383, when the last attempt at a reconciliation bad been made by Theodosius, and had failed, no mercy was any longer shown to the party of Ulfilas and his friends.

Professor Waitz determined that Ulfilas died in 388, based on Auxentius’s account that other Arian bishops accompanied Ulfilas on his final journey to Constantinople and had actually secured a promise from the emperors for a new council. However, the heretical faction, i.e., the Athanasians, managed to get a law published that banned any discussions about the faith, whether in public or private. Maximinus, who provided this information, included two laws from the Codex Theodosianus that he thought were related to this controversy, dated 388 and 386. This indicates that Maximinus himself was unsure about the exact date. Nevertheless, neither of these laws applies to the situation, as Dr. Bessell has thoroughly demonstrated. They are quotes from the Codex Theodosianus made by Maximinus at his own risk and are incorrect. If Ulfilas's death were set in 388, we would have to reject Philostorgius's significant mention that Ulfilas was consecrated by Eusebius and assume that as late as 388, Theodosius was negotiating with the Arians. However, after the last attempt at reconciliation by Theodosius in 383 failed, there was no longer any leniency shown towards Ulfilas and his supporters.

If, on the contrary, Ulfilas died at Constantinople in 381, he might well have been called there by the Emperor Theodosius, not to a council, but to a disputation (ad disputationem), as Dr. Bessell ingeniously maintains, against the Psathyropolistæ,170 a new sect of Arians at Constantinople. About the same time, in 380, Sozomen171 refers to efforts made by the Arians to gain influence with Theodosius. He mentions, like Auxentius, that these efforts were defeated, and a law published to forbid disputations on the nature of God. This law exists in the Codex Theodosianus, and is dated January 10, 381. But what is most important is, that this law actually revokes a rescript that had [pg 184] been obtained fraudulently by the Arian heretics, thus confirming the statement of Auxentius that the emperor had held out to him and his party a promise of a new council.

If, on the other hand, Ulfilas died in Constantinople in 381, he might have been called there by Emperor Theodosius, not for a council, but for a debate (ad disputationem), as Dr. Bessell cleverly argues, against the Psathyropolistæ, a new sect of Arians in Constantinople. Around the same time, in 380, Sozomen refers to the attempts made by the Arians to influence Theodosius. He notes, like Auxentius, that these attempts were unsuccessful, and a law was issued to prohibit debates on the nature of God. This law is recorded in the Codex Theodosianus and is dated January 10, 381. However, what is most significant is that this law actually revokes a document that had been fraudulently obtained by the Arian heretics, thus confirming Auxentius's claim that the emperor had offered him and his group a promise for a new council.

We now return to Ulfilas. He was born in 311. His parents, as Philostorgius tells us, were of Cappadocian origin, and had been carried away by the Goths as captives from a place called Sadagolthina, near the town of Parnassus. It was under Valerian and Gallienus (about 267) that the Goths made this raid from Europe to Asia, Galatia, and Cappadocia, and the Christian captives whom they carried back to the Danube were the first to spread the light of the Gospel among the Goths. Philostorgius was himself a Cappadocian, and there is no reason to doubt this statement of his on the parentage of Ulfilas. Ulfilas was born among the Goths; Gothic was his native language, though he was able in after-life to speak and write both in Latin and Greek. Philostorgius, after speaking of the death of Crispus (326), and before proceeding to the last years of Constantine, says, that “about that time” Ulfilas led his Goths from beyond the Danube into the Roman empire. They had to leave their country, being persecuted on account of their Christianity. Ulfilas was the leader of the faithful flock, and came to Constantine, (not Constantius,) as ambassador. This must have been before 337, the year of Constantine's death. It may have been in 328, when Constantine had gained a victory over the Goths; and though Ulfilas was then only seventeen years of age, this would be no reason for rejecting the testimony of Philostorgius, who says that Constantine treated Ulfilas with great respect, and called him the [pg 185] Moses of his time. Having led his faithful flock across the Danube into Mœsia, he might well have been compared by the emperor to Moses leading the Israelites from Egypt through the Red Sea. It is true that Auxentius institutes the same comparison between Ulfilas and Moses, after stating that Ulfilas had been received with great honors by Constantius. But this refers to what took place after Ulfilas had been for seven years bishop among the Goths, in 348, and does not invalidate the statement of Philostorgius as to the earlier intercourse between Ulfilas and Constantine. Sozomen (H. E. vi. 3, 7) clearly distinguishes between the first crossing of the Danube by the Goths, with Ulfilas as their ambassador, and the later attacks of Athanarich on Fridigern or Fritiger, which led to the settlement of the Goths in the Roman empire. We must suppose that after having crossed the Danube, Ulfilas remained for some time with his Goths, or at Constantinople. Auxentius says that he officiated as Lector, and it was only when he had reached the requisite age of thirty, that he was made bishop by Eusebius in 341. He passed the first seven years of his episcopate among the Goths, and the remaining thirty-three of his life “in solo Romaniæ,” where he had migrated together with Fritiger and the Thervingi. There is some confusion as to the exact date of the Gothic Exodus, but it is not at all unlikely that Ulfilas acted as their leader on more than one occasion.

We now return to Ulfilas. He was born in 311. His parents, as Philostorgius tells us, were originally from Cappadocia and had been taken captive by the Goths from a place called Sadagolthina, near the town of Parnassus. It was during the reign of Valerian and Gallienus (around 267) that the Goths raided from Europe to Asia, Galatia, and Cappadocia, and the Christian captives they brought back to the Danube were the first to share the light of the Gospel among the Goths. Philostorgius was also from Cappadocia, and there’s no reason to doubt his account of Ulfilas’ parentage. Ulfilas was born among the Goths; Gothic was his native language, though later in life he could speak and write in both Latin and Greek. Philostorgius, after discussing the death of Crispus (326), and before moving on to the last years of Constantine, mentions that “around that time” Ulfilas led his Goths from beyond the Danube into the Roman Empire. They had to leave their homeland due to persecution for their Christianity. Ulfilas was the leader of the faithful community and came to Constantine (not Constantius) as an ambassador. This must have happened before 337, the year of Constantine's death. It may have been in 328, when Constantine defeated the Goths; even though Ulfilas was only seventeen at that time, this doesn’t disprove Philostorgius' account, which says that Constantine treated Ulfilas with great respect and called him the [pg 185] Moses of his time. After leading his faithful community across the Danube into Mœsia, it would be fitting for the emperor to compare Ulfilas to Moses leading the Israelites from Egypt through the Red Sea. It’s true that Auxentius makes the same comparison between Ulfilas and Moses, stating that Ulfilas was received with great honors by Constantius. However, this refers to events that occurred after Ulfilas had been bishop among the Goths for seven years, in 348, and does not invalidate Philostorgius' account about the earlier interactions between Ulfilas and Constantine. Sozomen (H. E. vi. 3, 7) clearly distinguishes between the Goths' first crossing of the Danube with Ulfilas as their ambassador and the later assaults by Athanarich on Fridigern or Fritiger, which led to the settlement of the Goths in the Roman Empire. We must assume that after crossing the Danube, Ulfilas stayed with his Goths or in Constantinople for a while. Auxentius mentions that he served as a Lector, and it wasn’t until he reached the age of thirty that he was made bishop by Eusebius in 341. He spent the first seven years of his episcopate among the Goths and the remaining thirty-three years of his life “in solo Romania,” where he migrated with Fritiger and the Thervingi. There’s some confusion regarding the exact date of the Gothic Exodus, but it’s quite possible that Ulfilas served as their leader on multiple occasions.

There is little more to be learnt about Ulfilas from other sources. What is said by ecclesiastical historians about the motives of his adopting the doctrines of Arius, and his changing from one side to the other, [pg 186] deserves no credit. Ulfilas, according to his own confession, was always an Arian (semper sic credidi). Socrates says that Ulfilas was present at the Synod of Constantinople in 360, which may be true, though neither Auxentius nor Philostorgius mentions it. The author of the Acts of Nicetas speaks of Ulfilas as present at the Council of Nicæa, in company with Theophilus. Theophilus, it is true, signed his name as a Gothic bishop at that council, but there is nothing to confirm the statement that Ulfilas, then fourteen years of age, was with Theophilus.

There isn't much more to learn about Ulfilas from other sources. What ecclesiastical historians say about his reasons for adopting Arius' doctrines and switching sides isn’t credible. Ulfilas, according to his own statement, was always an Arian (semper sic credidi). Socrates mentions that Ulfilas was present at the Synod of Constantinople in 360, which might be true, although neither Auxentius nor Philostorgius brings it up. The author of the Acts of Nicetas claims that Ulfilas was at the Council of Nicæa with Theophilus. While it’s true that Theophilus signed as a Gothic bishop at that council, there’s no evidence to back up the claim that Ulfilas, who was only fourteen years old at the time, was there with Theophilus.

Ulfilas translated the whole Bible, except the Books of Kings. For the Old Testament he used the Septuagint; for the New, the Greek text; but not exactly in that form in which we have it. Unfortunately, the greater part of his work has been lost, and we have only considerable portions of the Gospels, all the genuine Epistles of St. Paul, though again not complete; fragments of a Psalm, of Ezra, and Nehemiah.172

Ulfilas translated the entire Bible except for the Books of Kings. For the Old Testament, he used the Septuagint; for the New Testament, he used the Greek text, but not exactly in the same form that we have it today. Unfortunately, most of his work has been lost, and we only have significant portions of the Gospels, all the authentic letters of St. Paul, though still not complete; as well as fragments of a Psalm, and of Ezra and Nehemiah.172

[pg 187]

Though Ulfilas belonged to the western Goths, his translation was used by all Gothic tribes, when they [pg 188] advanced into Spain and Italy. The Gothic language died out in the ninth century, and after the extinction of the great Gothic empires, the translation of Ulfilas was lost and forgotten. But a MS. of the fifth century had been preserved in the Abbey of Werden, and towards the end of the sixteenth century, a man of the name of Arnold Mercator, who was in the service of William IV., the Landgrave of Hessia, drew attention to this old parchment containing large fragments of the translation of Ulfilas. The MS., known as the Codex Argenteus, was afterwards transferred to Prague, and when Prague was taken in 1648 by Count Königsmark, he carried this Codex to Upsala in Sweden, where it is still preserved as one of the greatest treasures. The parchment is purple, the letters in silver, and the MS. bound in solid silver.

Although Ulfilas was part of the western Goths, his translation was used by all Gothic tribes when they moved into Spain and Italy. The Gothic language faded away in the ninth century, and after the fall of the great Gothic empires, Ulfilas's translation was lost and forgotten. However, a fifth-century manuscript was kept in the Abbey of Werden, and towards the end of the sixteenth century, a man named Arnold Mercator, who worked for William IV, the Landgrave of Hessia, highlighted this old parchment that contained large fragments of Ulfilas's translation. The manuscript, known as the Codex Argenteus, was later moved to Prague, and when Prague was captured in 1648 by Count Königsmark, he took this codex to Upsala in Sweden, where it remains preserved as one of the greatest treasures. The parchment is purple, the letters are silver, and the manuscript is bound in solid silver.

In 1818, Cardinal Mai and Count Castiglione discovered some more fragments in the Monastery of Bobbio, where they had probably been preserved ever since the Gothic empire of Theodoric the Great in Italy had been destroyed.

In 1818, Cardinal Mai and Count Castiglione found more fragments in the Monastery of Bobbio, where they had likely been kept since the Gothic empire of Theodoric the Great in Italy was destroyed.

Ulfilas must have been a man of extraordinary power to conceive, for the first time, the idea of translating the Bible into the vulgar language of his people. At his time, there existed in Europe but two languages which a Christian bishop would have thought himself justified in employing, Greek and Latin. All other languages were still considered as barbarous. It required a prophetic [pg 189] sight, and a faith in the destinies of these half-savage tribes, and a conviction also of the utter effeteness of the Roman and Byzantine empires, before a bishop could have brought himself to translate the Bible into the vulgar dialect of his barbarous countrymen. Soon after the death of Ulfilas, the number of Christian Goths at Constantinople had so much increased as to induce Chrysostom, the bishop of Constantinople (397-405), to establish a church in the capital, where the service was to be read in Gothic.173

Ulfilas must have been an incredibly powerful man to come up with the idea of translating the Bible into the everyday language of his people for the first time. At that time, there were only two languages in Europe that a Christian bishop would have felt justified in using: Greek and Latin. All other languages were still seen as primitive. It took a visionary mindset, a belief in the future of these semi-barbaric tribes, and a conviction about the total decline of the Roman and Byzantine empires for a bishop to translate the Bible into the common speech of his uncivilized countrymen. Shortly after Ulfilas's death, the number of Christian Goths in Constantinople increased so much that Chrysostom, the bishop of Constantinople (397-405), decided to establish a church in the capital where services would be held in Gothic.

The language of Ulfilas, the Gothic, belongs, through its phonetic structure, to the Low-German class, but in its grammar it is, with few exceptions, far more primitive than the Anglo-Saxon of the Beowulf, or the Old High-German of Charlemagne. These few exceptions, however, are very important, for they show that it would be grammatically, and therefore historically, impossible to derive either Anglo-Saxon or High-German, or both,174 from Gothic. It would be impossible, for instance, to treat the first person plural of the indicative present, the Old High-German nerjamês, as a corruption of the Gothic nasjam; for we know, from the Sanskrit masi, the Greek mes, the Latin mus, that this was the original termination of the first person plural.

The language of Ulfilas, Gothic, belongs to the Low-German class due to its phonetic structure, but in terms of grammar, it is, with some exceptions, much more primitive than the Anglo-Saxon of Beowulf or the Old High-German of Charlemagne. These few exceptions are very important because they demonstrate that it would be grammatically, and thus historically, impossible to derive either Anglo-Saxon or High-German, or both, 174 from Gothic. For example, it would be impossible to consider the first person plural of the indicative present, the Old High-German nerjamês, as a corruption of the Gothic nasjam; because we know from Sanskrit masi, Greek mes, and Latin mus, that this was the original ending of the first person plural.

Gothic is but one of the numerous dialects of the German race; some of which became the feeders of the literary languages of the British Isles, of Holland, Friesia, and of Low and High Germany, while others became extinct, and others rolled on from century to century unheeded, and without ever producing any [pg 190] literature at all. It is because Gothic is the only one of these parallel dialects that can be traced back to the fourth century, whereas the others disappear from our sight in the seventh, that it has been mistaken by some for the original source of all Teutonic speech. The same arguments, however, which we used against Raynouard, to show that Provençal could not be considered as the parent of the Six Romance dialects, would tell with equal force against the pretensions of Gothic to be considered as more than the eldest sister of the Teutonic branch of speech.

Gothic is just one of the many dialects of the Germanic people; some of these dialects contributed to the literary languages of the British Isles, Holland, Frisia, and both Low and High Germany, while others disappeared, and some continued to exist for centuries without ever developing any literature. The reason Gothic is the only one of these dialects that can be traced back to the fourth century, while the others vanish by the seventh, has led some to mistakenly view it as the original source of all Germanic languages. The same arguments we used against Raynouard, which showed that Provençal couldn't be seen as the parent of the Six Romance dialects, would equally apply to Gothic's claim to be more than just the oldest sister of the Germanic language family.

There is, in fact, a third stream of Teutonic speech, which asserts its independence as much as High-German and Low-German, and which it would be impossible to place in any but a co-ordinate position with regard to Gothic, Low and High German. This is the Scandinavian branch. It consists at present of three literary dialects, those of Sweden, Denmark, and Iceland, and of various local dialects, particularly in secluded valleys and fiords of Norway,175 where, however, the literary language is Danish.

There is, in fact, a third branch of Germanic language that stands on its own just like High German and Low German, and it can't be categorized any other way than alongside Gothic, Low, and High German. This is the Scandi branch. It currently includes three literary dialects: those of Sweden, Denmark, and Iceland, along with various local dialects, especially in remote valleys and fjords of Norway, where, however, the literary language is Danish.

It is commonly supposed176 that, as late as the eleventh century, identically the same language was spoken in Sweden, Norway, and Denmark, and that this language was preserved almost intact in Iceland, while in Sweden and Denmark it grew into two new national dialects. Nor is there any doubt that the Icelandic skald recited his poems in Iceland, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, nay, even among his countrymen in England and Gardariki, without fear of not being understood, till, as it is said, William introduced Welsh, i.e. French, into England, [pg 191] and Slavonic tongues grew up in the east.177 But though one and the same language (then called Danish or Norrænish) was understood, I doubt whether one and the same language was spoken by all Northmen, and whether the first germs of Swedish and Danish did not exist long before the eleventh century, in the dialects of the numerous clans and tribes of the Scandinavian race. That race is clearly divided into two branches, called by Swedish scholars the East and West Scandinavian. The former would be represented by the old language of Norway and Iceland, the latter by Swedish and Danish. This division of the Scandinavian race had taken place before the Northmen settled in Sweden and Norway. The western division migrated westward from Russia, and crossed over from the continent to the Aland Islands, and from thence to the southern coast of the peninsula. The eastern division travelled along the Bothnian Gulf, passing the country occupied by the Finns and Lapps, and settled in the northern highlands, spreading toward the south and west.

It is generally believed that, as late as the eleventh century, the same language was spoken in Sweden, Norway, and Denmark, and that this language remained nearly unchanged in Iceland, while in Sweden and Denmark it evolved into two distinct national dialects. There is also no doubt that the Icelandic skald performed his poems in Iceland, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, and even among his fellow countrymen in England and Gardariki, without worrying about being misunderstood, until, as is said, William brought Welsh, i.e. French, into England, [pg 191] and Slavic languages emerged in the east. But although one and the same language (then called Danish or Norrænish) was understood, I question whether all Norse people spoke the same language, and whether the early forms of Swedish and Danish didn't already exist before the eleventh century, in the dialects of the various clans and tribes of the Scandinavian people. That people is clearly divided into two branches, referred to by Swedish scholars as East and West Scandinavian. The former would represent the old language of Norway and Iceland, while the latter would be represented by Swedish and Danish. This division of the Scandinavian people occurred before the Norse settled in Sweden and Norway. The western division moved westward from Russia, crossing from the continent to the Åland Islands, and then to the southern coast of the peninsula. The eastern division traveled along the Bothnian Gulf, passing through the territory inhabited by the Finns and Lapps, and settled in the northern highlands, spreading toward the south and west.

The earliest fragments of Scandinavian speech are preserved in the two Eddas, the elder or poetical Edda, containing old mythic poems, the younger or Snorri's Edda giving an account of the ancient mythology in prose. Both Eddas were composed, not in Norway, but in Iceland, an island about as large as Ireland, and which became first known through some Irish monks who settled there in the eighth century.178 In the ninth century voyages of discovery were made to Iceland by Naddodd, Gardar, and Flokki, 860-870, and soon after the distant island, distant about 750 English miles from [pg 192] Norway, became a kind of America to the Puritans and Republicans of the Scandinavian peninsula. Harald Haarfagr (850-933) had conquered most of the Norwegian kings, and his despotic sway tended to reduce the northern freemen to a state of vassalage. Those who could not resist, and could not bring themselves to yield to the sceptre of Harald, left their country and migrated to France, to England, and to Iceland (874). They were mostly nobles and freemen, and they soon established in Iceland an aristocratic republic, such as they had had in Norway before the days of Harald. This northern republic flourished; it adopted Christianity in the year 1000. Schools were founded, two bishoprics were established, and classical literature was studied with the same zeal with which their own national poems and laws had been collected and interpreted by native scholars and historians. The Icelanders were famous travellers, and the names of Icelandic students are found not only in the chief cities of Europe, but in the holy places of the East. At the beginning of the twelfth century Iceland counted 50,000 inhabitants. Their intellectual and literary activity lasted to the beginning of the thirteenth century, when the island was conquered by Hakon VI., king of Norway. In 1380, Norway, together with Iceland, was united with Denmark; and when, in 1814, Norway was ceded to Sweden, Iceland remained, as it is still, under Danish sway.

The earliest pieces of Scandinavian speech are found in the two Eddas: the elder or poetic Edda, which contains ancient mythic poems, and the younger or Snorri's Edda, which presents the ancient mythology in prose. Both Eddas were written not in Norway, but in Iceland, an island about the same size as Ireland, which first gained attention through some Irish monks who settled there in the eighth century.178 In the ninth century, explorers like Naddodd, Gardar, and Flokki made voyages to Iceland (860-870), and soon this remote island, located about 750 English miles from [pg 192] Norway, became a sort of "America" for the Puritans and Republicans of the Scandinavian peninsula. Harald Haarfagr (850-933) had defeated most of the Norwegian kings, and his authoritarian rule pushed northern freemen into a state of vassalage. Those who couldn't resist or submit to Harald's rule left their homeland and migrated to France, England, and Iceland (874). They were mostly nobles and freemen, and they quickly established an aristocratic republic in Iceland, similar to what they had in Norway before Harald's reign. This northern republic thrived; it adopted Christianity in the year 1000. Schools were founded, two bishoprics were established, and classical literature was studied with the same enthusiasm as their own national poems and laws, which were collected and interpreted by local scholars and historians. The Icelanders were known for their travels, and the names of Icelandic students can be found not only in the major cities of Europe but also in the holy sites of the East. By the start of the twelfth century, Iceland had a population of 50,000. Their intellectual and literary activity continued until the early thirteenth century, when the island was conquered by Hakon VI, the king of Norway. In 1380, Norway, along with Iceland, was united with Denmark; and when Norway was ceded to Sweden in 1814, Iceland remained, as it is still today, under Danish control.

The old poetry which flourished in Norway in the eighth century, and which was cultivated by the skalds in the ninth, would have been lost in Norway itself had it not been for the jealous care with which it was preserved by the emigrants of Iceland. The most important branch of their traditional poetry were short [pg 193] songs (hliod or Quida), relating the deeds of their gods and heroes. It is impossible to determine their age, but they existed at least previous to the migration of the Northmen to Iceland, and probably as early as the seventh century, the same century which yields the oldest remnants of Anglo-Saxon, Low-German, and High-German. They were collected in the middle of the twelfth century by Saemund Sigfusson (died 1133). In 1643 a similar collection was discovered in MSS. of the thirteenth century, and published under the title of Edda, or Great-Grandmother. This collection is called the old or poetic Edda, in order to distinguish it from a later work ascribed to Snorri Sturluson (died 1241). This, the younger or prose Edda, consists of three parts: the mocking of Gylfi, the speeches of Bragi, and the Skalda, or Ars poetica. Snorri Sturluson has been called the Herodotus of Iceland; and his chief work is the “Heimskringla,” the world-ring, which contains the northern history from the mythic times to the time of King Magnus Erlingsson (died 1177). It was probably in preparing his history that, like Cassiodorus, Saxo Grammaticus, Paulus Diaconus, and other historians of the same class, Snorri collected the old songs of the people; for his “Edda,” and particularly his “Skalda,” are full of ancient poetic fragments.

The old poetry that thrived in Norway during the eighth century, and which was nurtured by the skalds in the ninth century, might have been lost in Norway itself if it weren't for the careful preservation by the emigrants of Iceland. The most significant part of their traditional poetry comprised short songs (hliod or Quida) that told the stories of their gods and heroes. It's hard to determine their exact age, but they existed at least before the Northmen migrated to Iceland, likely as early as the seventh century, the same century that gives us the oldest remnants of Anglo-Saxon, Low-German, and High-German. They were collected in the middle of the twelfth century by Saemund Sigfusson (died 1133). In 1643, a similar collection was found in manuscripts from the thirteenth century and published under the title of Edda, or Great-Grandmother. This collection is referred to as the old or poetic Edda to distinguish it from a later work attributed to Snorri Sturluson (died 1241). This later work, the younger or prose Edda, consists of three parts: the mocking of Gylfi, the speeches of Bragi, and the Skalda, or Art of poetry. Snorri Sturluson is often called the Herodotus of Iceland, and his main work is the "Heimskringla," the world-ring, which covers the northern history from mythical times to the time of King Magnus Erlingsson (died 1177). It was likely while preparing his history that Snorri, like Cassiodorus, Saxo Grammaticus, Paulus Diaconus, and other historians of his era, gathered the old songs of the people; for his “Edda,” and especially his “Skalda,” are filled with ancient poetic fragments.

The “Skalda,” and the rules which it contains, represent the state of poetry in the thirteenth century; and nothing can be more artificial, nothing more different from the genuine poetry of the old “Edda” than this Ars poetica of Snorri Sturluson. One of the chief features of this artificial or skaldic poetry was this, that nothing should be called by its [pg 194] proper name. A ship was not to be called a ship, but the beast of the sea; blood, not blood, but the dew of pain, or the water of the sword. A warrior was not spoken of as a warrior, but as an armed tree, the tree of battle. A sword was the flame of wounds. In this poetical language, which every skald was bound to speak, there were no less than 115 names for Odin; an island could be called by 120 synonymous titles. The specimens of ancient poetry which Snorri quotes are taken from the skalds, whose names are well known in history, and who lived from the tenth to the thirteenth century. But he never quotes from any song contained in the old “Edda,”179 whether it be that those songs were considered by himself as belonging to a different and much more ancient period of literature, or that they could not be used in illustration of the scholastic rules of skaldic poets, these very rules being put to shame by the simple style of the national poetry, which expressed what it had to express without effort and circumlocution.

The “Skalda,” and the rules it includes, represent the state of poetry in the thirteenth century; and nothing is more artificial, nothing more different from the true poetry of the old "Edda" than this Poetic Art of Snorri Sturluson. One of the main features of this artificial or skaldic poetry was that nothing should be called by its proper name. A ship was not to be called a ship, but the beast of the sea; blood, not blood, but the dew of pain, or the water of the sword. A warrior was not referred to as a warrior, but as an armed tree, the tree of battle. A sword was the flame of wounds. In this poetic language, which every skald was required to use, there were no less than 115 names for Odin; an island could be referred to by 120 synonymous titles. The examples of ancient poetry that Snorri quotes come from the skalds, whose names are well known in history and who lived from the tenth to the thirteenth century. However, he never quotes from any song found in the old “Edda,”179 whether because he thought those songs belonged to a different and much older period of literature, or because they couldn't be used to illustrate the scholastic rules of skaldic poets, these very rules being embarrassed by the straightforward style of the national poetry, which expressed what it needed to express without effort and convoluted language.

We have thus traced the modern Teutonic dialects back to four principal channels,—the High-German, Low-German, Gothic, and Scandinavian; and we have seen that these four, together with several minor dialects, must be placed in a co-ordinate position from the beginning, as so many varieties of Teutonic speech. This Teutonic speech may, for convenience' sake, be spoken of as one,—as one branch of that great family of language to which, as we shall see, it belongs; but [pg 195] it should always be borne in mind that this primitive and uniform language never had any real historical existence, and that, like all other languages, that of the Germans began with dialects which gradually formed themselves into several distinct national deposits.

We have traced the modern Teutonic dialects back to four main sources: Standard German, Low German, Gothic style, and Scandi. We've seen that these four, along with several smaller dialects, should be considered on the same level from the start as different varieties of Teutonic speech. For convenience, we can refer to this Teutonic speech as a single entity—as one branch of the larger language family to which it belongs, as we will discuss later. However, it’s important to remember that this original and uniform language never truly existed in history. Like all languages, German began with dialects that gradually evolved into several distinct national forms. [pg 195]

We must now advance more rapidly, and, instead of the minuteness of an Ordnance-map, we must be satisfied with the broad outlines of Wyld's Great Globe in our survey of the languages which, together with the Teutonic, form the Indo-European or Aryan family of speech.

We need to move forward more quickly, and instead of the detailed precision of an Ordnance map, we should focus on the general features of Wyld's Great Globe in our exploration of the languages that, along with the Teutonic languages, make up the Indo-European or Aryan language family.

And first the Romance, or modern Latin languages. Leaving mere local dialects out of sight, we have at present six literary modifications of Latin, or more correctly, of ancient Italian,—the languages of Portugal, of Spain, of France, of Italy, of Wallachia,180 and [pg 196] of the Grisons of Switzerland, called the Roumansch or Romanese.181 The Provençal, which, in the poetry of the Troubadours, attained at a very early time to a high literary excellence, has now sunk down to a mere patois. The earliest Provençal poem, the Song of Boëthius, is generally referred to the tenth century: Le Bœuf referred it to the eleventh. But in the lately discovered Song of Eulalia, we have now a specimen of the Langue d'Oil, or the ancient Northern French, anterior in date to the earliest poetic specimen of the Langue d'Oc, or the ancient Provençal. Nothing can be a better preparation for the study of the comparative grammar of the ancient Aryan languages than a careful perusal of the “Comparative Grammar of the Six Romance Languages” by Professor Diez.

And first, the Romance or modern Latin languages. Excluding local dialects, we currently have six literary forms of Latin, or more accurately, of ancient Italian—the languages of Portugal, Spain, France, Italy, Wallachia, and the Grisons of Switzerland, known as Roumansch or Romanese. Provençal, which reached a high level of literary quality in the poetry of the Troubadours quite early on, has now declined to a mere patois. The earliest Provençal poem, the Song of Boëthius, is usually dated to the tenth century; Le Bœuf placed it in the eleventh century. However, with the recent discovery of the Song of Eulalia, we now have a sample of Langue d'Oil, or ancient Northern French, that predates the earliest poetic example of Langue d'Oc, or ancient Provençal. There’s no better way to prepare for studying the comparative grammar of the ancient Aryan languages than by carefully reading the “Comparative Grammar of the Six Romance Languages” by Professor Diez.

Though in a general way we trace these six Romance languages back to Latin, yet it has been pointed out before that the classical Latin would fail to supply a complete explanation of their origin. Many of the ingredients of the Neo-Latin dialects must be sought for in the ancient dialects of Italy and her provinces. More than one dialect of Latin was spoken there before the rise of Rome, and some important fragments have been preserved to us, in inscriptions, of the Umbrian spoken in the north, and of the Oscan spoken to the south of Rome. The Oscan language, spoken by the Samnites, now rendered intelligible by the labors of Mommsen, [pg 197] had produced a literature before the time of Livius Andronicus; and the tables of Iguvio, so elaborately treated by Aufrecht and Kirchhoff, bear witness to a priestly literature among the Umbrians at a very early period. Oscan was still spoken under the Roman emperors, and so were minor local dialects in the south and the north. As soon as the literary language of Rome became classical and unchangeable, the first start was made in the future career of those dialects which, even at the time of Dante, are still called vulgar or popular.182 A great deal, no doubt, of the corruption of these modern dialects is due to the fact that, in the form in which we know them after the eighth century, they are really Neo-Latin dialects as adopted by the Teutonic barbarians; full, not only of Teutonic words, but of Teutonic idioms, phrases, and constructions. French is provincial Latin as spoken by the Franks, a Teutonic race; and, to a smaller extent, the same barbarizing has affected all other Roman dialects. But from the very beginning, the stock with which the Neo-Latin dialects started was not the classical Latin, but the vulgar, local, provincial dialects of the middle, the lower, and the lowest classes of the Roman Empire. Many of the words which give to French and Italian their classical appearance, are really of much later date, and were imported into them by mediæval scholars, lawyers, and divines; thus escaping the rough treatment to which the original vulgar dialects were subjected by the Teutonic conquerors.

While we generally trace these six Romance languages back to Latin, it's been noted before that classical Latin doesn't fully explain their origin. Many elements of the Neo-Latin dialects come from the ancient dialects of Italy and its provinces. Multiple dialects of Latin were spoken there before Rome rose to power, and we've preserved some important fragments, such as inscriptions of the Umbrian spoken in the north and the Oscan spoken south of Rome. The Oscan language, used by the Samnites and now understood thanks to the work of Mommsen, had a literature that predated Livius Andronicus. The Iguvium tablets, thoroughly analyzed by Aufrecht and Kirchhoff, show that the Umbrians had a priestly literature very early on. Oscan was still spoken during the Roman Empire, along with some lesser local dialects in the south and north. Once the literary language of Rome became classical and stable, that was the beginning of the paths those dialects would take, which, even in Dante's time, were still referred to as rude or trending. Much of the transformation of these modern dialects can be attributed to the fact that, in the form we know them after the eighth century, they are essentially Neo-Latin dialects influenced by the Teutonic barbarians, filled with not just Teutonic words but also idioms, phrases, and structures. French is provincial Latin as spoken by the Franks, a Teutonic tribe; and to a lesser extent, similar brutalizing has affected other Roman dialects. However, from the start, the foundation of the Neo-Latin dialects was not classical Latin but the vulgar, local, provincial dialects of the middle, lower, and lowest classes of the Roman Empire. Many words that give French and Italian their classical look actually date from much later and were introduced by medieval scholars, lawyers, and clergy; thus avoiding the harsh treatment the original vulgar dialects underwent from the Teutonic conquerors.

The next branch of the Indo-European family of [pg 198] speech is the Hellenic. Its history is well known from the time of Homer to the present day. The only remark which the comparative philologist has to make is that the idea of making Greek the parent of Latin, is more preposterous than deriving English from German; the fact being that there are many forms in Latin more primitive than their corresponding forms in Greek. The idea of Pelasgians as the common ancestors of Greeks and Romans is another of those grammatical mythes, but hardly requires at present any serious refutation.

The next branch of the Indo-European language family is the Greek. Its history is well-documented from the time of Homer to today. The only point that comparative linguists would make is that suggesting Greek is the ancestor of Latin is even more ridiculous than saying English comes from German; in reality, there are many forms in Latin that are more primitive than their Greek counterparts. The idea that the Pelasgians are the common ancestors of both Greeks and Romans is another one of those linguistic myths, but it doesn’t really need serious debate at this point.

The fourth branch of our family is the Celtic. The Celts seem to have been the first of the Aryans to arrive in Europe; but the pressure of subsequent migrations, particularly of Teutonic tribes, has driven them towards the westernmost parts, and latterly from Ireland across the Atlantic. At present the only remaining dialects are the Kymric and Gadhelic. The Kymric comprises the Welsh; the Cornish, lately extinct; and the Armorican, of Brittany. The Gadhelic comprises the Irish; the Galic of the west coast of Scotland; and the dialect of the Isle of Man. Although these Celtic dialects are still spoken, the Celts themselves can no longer be considered an independent nation, like the Germans or Slaves. In former times, however, they not only enjoyed political autonomy, but asserted it successfully against Germans and Romans. Gaul, Belgium, and Britain were Celtic dominions, and the north of Italy was chiefly inhabited by them. In the time of Herodotus we find Celts in Spain; and Switzerland, the Tyrol, and the country south of the Danube have once been the seats of Celtic tribes. But after repeated inroads into the regions of civilization, [pg 199] familiarizing Latin and Greek writers with the names of their kings, they disappear from the east of Europe. Brennus is supposed to mean king, the Welsh brennin. A Brennus conquered Rome (390), another Brennus threatened Delphi (280). And about the same time a Celtic colony settled in Asia, and founded Galatia, where the language spoken at the time of St. Jerome was still that of the Gauls. Celtic words may be found in German, Slavonic, and even in Latin, but only as foreign terms, and their amount is much smaller than commonly supposed. A far larger number of Latin and German words have since found their way into the modern Celtic dialects, and these have frequently been mistaken by Celtic enthusiasts for original words, from which German and Latin might, in their turn, be derived.

The fourth branch of our family is the Celtic. The Celts appear to be the first of the Aryans to arrive in Europe; however, the pressures of later migrations, especially from Teutonic tribes, pushed them to the far western parts and later from Ireland across the Atlantic. Currently, the only remaining dialects are Kymric and Gadhelic. The Kymric includes the Welsh; the now-extinct Cornish; and the Armorican dialect from Brittany. The Gadhelic includes the Irish; the Galic spoken along the west coast of Scotland; and the dialect from the Isle of Man. Although these Celtic dialects are still in use, the Celts themselves can no longer be regarded as an independent nation like the Germans or Slavs. In earlier times, however, they not only had political autonomy but also successfully asserted it against Germans and Romans. Gaul, Belgium, and Britain were Celtic territories, and the northern part of Italy was mainly inhabited by them. In Herodotus's time, we find Celts in Spain, and Switzerland, Tyrol, and the area south of the Danube were once home to Celtic tribes. But after numerous invasions into civilized regions, which made Latin and Greek writers familiar with their kings' names, they vanished from eastern Europe. Brennus is thought to mean king, similar to the Welsh brennin. One Brennus conquered Rome (390), while another Brennus threatened Delphi (280). Around the same time, a Celtic colony settled in Asia and established Galatia, where, during St. Jerome's time, the language spoken was still that of the Gauls. Celtic words can be found in German, Slavic, and even in Latin, but these are only as borrowed terms, and their quantity is much less than commonly believed. A significantly larger number of Latin and German words have since made their way into modern Celtic dialects, and these have often been mistakenly thought by Celtic enthusiasts to be original words from which German and Latin could, in turn, be derived.

The fifth branch, which is commonly called Slavonic, I prefer to designate by the name of Windic, Winidae being one of the most ancient and comprehensive names by which these tribes were known to the early historians of Europe. We have to divide these tribes into two divisions, the Lettic and the Slavonic, and we shall have to subdivide the Slavonic again into a South-East Slavonic and a West Slavonic branch.

The fifth branch, often referred to as Slavic, I prefer to call Windic, Winidae being one of the oldest and most well-known names used by early historians of Europe for these tribes. We need to split these tribes into two main groups: the Lettuce and the Slavic, and we'll further divide the Slavonic into a South-Eastern Slavic branch and a West Slavic branch.

The Lettic division consists of languages hardly known to the student of literature, but of great importance to the student of language. Lettish is the language now spoken in Kurland and Livonia. Lithuanian is the name given to a language still spoken by about 200,000 people in Eastern Prussia, and by more than a million of people in the coterminous parts of Russia. The earliest literary document of Lithuanian is a small catechism of 1547.183 In this, and even in the language as [pg 200] now spoken by the Lithuanian peasant, there are some grammatical forms more primitive, and more like Sanskrit, than the corresponding forms in Greek and Latin.

The Lettuce division includes languages that are not well-known to literature students but are very important for language students. Latvian is the language currently spoken in Kurland and Livonia. Lithuanian refers to a language still spoken by about 200,000 people in Eastern Prussia and by over a million people in nearby areas of Russia. The earliest literary document in Lithuanian is a small catechism from 1547.183 In this document, and even in the language used by present-day Lithuanian peasants, there are some grammatical forms that are more primitive and resemble Sanskrit more closely than the corresponding forms in Greek and Latin.

The Old Prussian, which is nearly related to Lithuanian, became extinct in the seventeenth century, and the entire literature which it has left behind consists in an old catechism.

The Old Prussian, which is closely related to Lithuanian, became extinct in the 17th century, and all the literature it left behind consists of an old catechism.

Lettish is the language of Kurland and Livonia, more modern in its grammar than Lithuanian, yet not immediately derived from it.

Latvian is the language spoken in Kurland and Livonia. Its grammar is more modern than that of Lithuanian, but it does not come directly from it.

We now come to the Slavonic languages, properly so called. The eastern branch comprehends the Russian with various local dialects; the Bulgarian, and the Illyrian. The most ancient document of this eastern branch is the so-called Ecclesiastical Slavonic, i.e. the ancient Bulgarian, into which Cyrillus and Methodius translated the Bible, in the middle of the ninth century. This is still the authorized version184 of the Bible for the whole Slavonic race; and to the student of the Slavonic languages, it is what Gothic is to the student of German. The modern Bulgarian, on the contrary, as far as grammatical forms are concerned, is the most reduced among the Slavonic dialects.

We now turn to the Slavic languages, as they are properly known. The eastern branch includes Russian with its various local dialects, Bulgarian, and Illyrian. The oldest document from this eastern branch is what is referred to as Ecclesiastical Slavonic, i.e. the ancient Bulgarian, into which Cyrillus and Methodius translated the Bible in the middle of the ninth century. This version remains the official version184 of the Bible for the entire Slavonic people; and for anyone studying the Slavonic languages, it holds the same significance as Gothic does for the study of German. In contrast, modern Bulgarian is, in terms of grammatical forms, the most simplified among the Slavonic dialects.

Illyrian is a convenient or inconvenient name to comprehend the Servian, Croatian, and Slovinian dialects. Literary fragments of Slovinian go back as far as the tenth century.185

Illyrian is an easy or difficult name to understand when referring to the Servian, Croatian, and Slovenian dialects. Literary fragments of Slovenian date back to the tenth century.185

The western branch comprehends the language of Poland, Bohemia, and Lusatia. The oldest specimen of Polish belongs to the fourteenth century: the Psalter [pg 201] of Margarite. The Bohemian language was, till lately, traced back to the ninth century. But most of these old Bohemian poems are now considered spurious; and it is doubtful, even, whether an ancient interlinear translation of the Gospel of St. John can be ascribed to the tenth century.186

The western branch includes the languages of Poland, Boho, and Lusatia. The oldest example of Polish dates back to the fourteenth century: the Psalter [pg 201] of Margarite. The Bohemian language was traced back to the ninth century until recently. However, most of these old Bohemian poems are now thought to be fake, and it's even questionable whether an ancient interlinear translation of the Gospel of St. John can really be attributed to the tenth century.186

The language of Lusatia is spoken, probably, by no more than 150,000 people, known in Germany by the name of Wends.

The Lusatian language is probably spoken by no more than 150,000 people, known in Germany as the Wends.

We have examined all the languages of our first or Aryan family, which are spoken in Europe, with one exception, the Albanian. This language is clearly a member of the same family; and as it is sufficiently distinct from Greek or any other recognized language, it has been traced back to one of the neighboring races of the Greeks, the Illyrians, and is supposed to be the only surviving representative of the various so-called barbarous tongues which surrounded and interpenetrated the dialects of Greece.

We’ve looked at all the languages in our first or Aryan family that are spoken in Europe, except for one, the Albanian. This language is clearly part of the same family; since it’s quite different from Greek or any other recognized language, it's been traced back to one of the nearby groups of the Greeks, the Illyrians, and is thought to be the only surviving representative of the various so-called barbaric languages that surrounded and mixed with the dialects of Greece.

We now pass on from Europe to Asia; and here we begin at once, on the extreme south, with the languages of India. As I sketched the history of Sanskrit in one of my former Lectures, it must suffice, at present, to mark the different periods of that language, beginning, about 1500 b. c., with the dialect of the Vedas, which is followed by the modern Sanskrit; the popular dialects of the third century b. c.; the Prakrit dialects of the plays; and the spoken dialects, such as Hindí, Hindústání, Mahrattí, Bengalí. There are many points of great interest to the student of language, in the long history of the speech of India; and it has been truly said that Sanskrit is to the science of [pg 202] language what mathematics are to astronomy. In an introductory course of lectures, however, like the present, it would be out of place to enter on a minute analysis of the grammatical organism of this language of languages.

We now move from Europe to Asia, starting in the far south with the languages of India. As I outlined the history of Sanskrit in one of my previous lectures, it’s enough for now to highlight the different periods of that language, beginning around 1500 b.c. with the dialect of the Vedas, followed by modern Sanskrit; the popular dialects from the third century b. c.; the Prakrit dialects found in plays; and the spoken dialects such as Hindi, Hindustani, Marathi, and Bengali. There are many fascinating aspects for language students in the long history of Indian speech, and it has been accurately said that Sanskrit is to the science of language what mathematics is to astronomy. However, in an introductory series of lectures like this one, it would be inappropriate to delve into a detailed analysis of the grammatical structure of this language of languages.

There is one point only on which I may be allowed to say a few words. I have frequently been asked, “But how can you prove that Sanskrit literature is so old as it is supposed to be? How can you fix any Indian dates before the time of Alexander's conquest? What dependence can be placed on Sanskrit manuscripts which may have been forged or interpolated?” It is easier to ask such questions than to answer them, at least to answer them briefly and intelligibly. But, perhaps, the following argument will serve as a partial answer, and show that Sanskrit was the spoken language of India at least some centuries before the time of Solomon. In the hymns of the Veda, which are the oldest literary compositions in Sanskrit, the geographical horizon of the poets is, for the greater part, limited to the north-west of India. There are very few passages in which any allusions to the sea or the sea-coast occur, whereas the snowy mountains, and the rivers of the Penjáb, and the scenery of the Upper Ganges valley are familiar objects to the ancient bards. There is no doubt, in fact, that the people who spoke Sanskrit came into India from the north, and gradually extended their sway to the south and east. Now, at the time of Solomon, it can be proved that Sanskrit was spoken at least as far south as the mouth of the Indus.

There’s just one point where I’d like to say a few words. I’ve often been asked, "But how can you prove that Sanskrit literature is as old as people say it is? How can you verify any Indian dates before Alexander's conquest? How trustworthy are Sanskrit manuscripts that could have been forged or altered?" It’s easier to ask such questions than to provide brief and clear answers. However, maybe the following argument will offer a partial response and demonstrate that Sanskrit was spoken in India at least several centuries before Solomon’s time. In the hymns of the Veda, which are the oldest literary works in Sanskrit, the poets' geographical knowledge is mostly limited to the north-west of India. There are very few instances where the sea or coastline is mentioned, while the snowy mountains, the rivers of the Punjab, and the landscape of the Upper Ganges valley are familiar to the ancient poets. It’s clear that the people who spoke Sanskrit entered India from the north and gradually spread to the south and east. By the time of Solomon, it’s proven that Sanskrit was spoken at least as far south as the mouth of the Indus.

You remember the fleet of Tharshish187 which Solomon had at sea, together with the navy of Hiram, and [pg 203] which came once in three years, bringing gold and silver, ivory, apes, and peacocks. The same navy, which was stationed on the shore of the Red Sea, is said to have fetched gold from Ophir,188 and to have brought, likewise, great plenty of algum189 trees and precious stones from Ophir.

You remember the fleet of Tarshish, which Solomon had at sea, along with Hiram's navy, which came every three years, bringing gold, silver, ivory, apes, and peacocks. This same fleet, stationed by the shore of the Red Sea, is said to have brought back gold from Ophir and also collected a lot of algum trees and precious stones from there.

Well, a great deal has been written to find out where this Ophir was; but there can be no doubt that it was in India. The names for apes, peacocks, ivory and algum-trees are foreign words in Hebrew, as much as gutta-percha or tobacco are in English. Now, if we wished to know from what part of the world gutta-percha was first imported into England, we might safely conclude that it came from that country where the name, gutta-percha, formed part of the spoken language.190 If, therefore, we can find a language in which the names for peacock, apes, ivory, and algum-tree, which are foreign in Hebrew, are indigenous, we may be certain that the country in which that language was spoken must have been the Ophir of the Bible. That language is no other but Sanskrit.

Well, a lot has been written to figure out where this Ophir was; but there's no doubt it was in India. The words for monkeys, peacocks, ivory, and algum-trees are foreign terms in Hebrew, just like gutta-percha or cigarettes are in English. Now, if we wanted to know where gutta-percha was first brought into England, we could safely conclude it came from the place where the name gutta-percha was part of the local language. If we can find a language where the words for peacock, apes, ivory, and algum-tree, which are foreign in Hebrew, are native, we can be sure that the country where that language was spoken must have been the Ophir of the Bible. That language is none other than Sanskrit.

Apes are called, in Hebrew, koph, a word without an etymology in the Semitic languages, but nearly identical in sound with the Sanskrit name of ape, kapi.

Monkeys are referred to in Hebrew as koph, a word that has no known origin in the Semitic languages but sounds almost the same as the Sanskrit name for ape, kapi.

Ivory is called either karnoth-shen, horns of tooth; or shen habbim. This habbim is again without a derivation in Hebrew, but it is most likely a corruption of the Sanskrit name for elephant, ibha, preceded by the Semitic article.191

Ivory is referred to as either karnoth-shen, meaning horns of tooth; or shen habbim. This habbim has no clear origin in Hebrew, but it’s most likely a variation of the Sanskrit word for elephant, ibha, with the Semitic article added. 191

[pg 204]

Peacocks are called in Hebrew tukhi-im, and this finds its explanation in the name still used for peacock on the coast of Malabar, togëi, which in turn has been derived from the Sanskrit śikhin, meaning furnished with a crest.

Peafowls are called in Hebrew tukhi-im, and this is explained by the name still used for peacock on the coast of Malabar, togëi, which comes from the Sanskrit śikhin, meaning having a crest.

All these articles, ivory, gold, apes, peacocks, are indigenous in India, though of course they might have been found in other countries likewise. Not so the algum-tree, at least if interpreters are right in taking algum or almug for sandalwood. Sandalwood is found indigenous on the coast of Malabar only; and one of its numerous names there, and in Sanskrit, is valguka. This valgu(ka) is clearly the name which Jewish and Phœnician merchants corrupted into algum, and which in Hebrew was still further changed into almug.

All these items—ivory, gold, apes, peacocks—are native to India, although they might also be found in other countries. Not so with the algum tree, at least if interpreters are correct in identifying algum or almug as sandalwood. Sandalwood is only found native along the coast of Malabar, and one of its many names there and in Sanskrit is valguka. This valgu(ka) is clearly the name that Jewish and Phoenician traders distorted into algum, which was further modified in Hebrew to almug.

Now, the place where the navy of Solomon and Hiram, coming down the Red Sea, would naturally have landed, was the mouth of the Indus. There gold and precious stones from the north would have been brought down the Indus; and sandalwood, peacocks, and apes would have been brought from Central and Southern India. In this very locality Ptolemy (vii. 1) gives us the name of Abiria, above Pattalene. In the same locality Hindu geographers place the people called Abhîra or Âbhîra; and in the same neighborhood MacMurdo, in his account of the province of Cutch, still knows a race of Ahirs,192 the descendants, in all probability, of the people who sold to Hiram and Solomon their gold and precious stones, their apes, peacocks, and sandalwood.193

Now, the spot where Solomon and Hiram's navy would have naturally landed while coming down the Red Sea was the mouth of the Indus River. There, gold and gemstones from the north would have been brought down the Indus; and sandalwood, peacocks, and primates would have been transported from Central and Southern India. In this exact area, Ptolemy (vii. 1) mentions a place called Abiria, located above Pattalene. Similarly, Hindu geographers identify a group known as Abhira or Âbhîra; and in that same region, MacMurdo, in his account of the province of Cutch, still recognizes a community called Ahirs, 192 likely the descendants of the people who sold Hiram and Solomon their gold and precious stones, along with their apes, peacocks, and sandalwood.193

[pg 205]

If, then, in the Veda the people who spoke Sanskrit were still settled in the north of India, whereas at the time of Solomon their language had extended to Cutch and even the Malabar coast, this will show that at all events Sanskrit is not of yesterday, and that it is as old, at least, as the book of Job, in which the gold of Ophir is mentioned.194

If the people who spoke Sanskrit were still settled in northern India when the Veda was written, but by the time of Solomon their language had spread to Cutch and even the Malabar coast, this indicates that Sanskrit is definitely not a recent development. It’s at least as old as the book of Job, which mentions the gold of Ophir.194

Most closely allied to Sanskrit, more particularly to the Sanskrit of the Veda, is the ancient language of the Zend-avesta,195 the so-called Zend, or sacred language of the Zoroastrians or Fire-worshippers. It was, in fact, chiefly through the Sanskrit, and with the help of comparative philology, that the ancient dialect of the Parsis or Fire-worshippers was deciphered. The MSS. had been preserved by the Parsi priests at Bombay, where a colony of fire-worshippers had fled in the tenth century,196 and where it has [pg 206] risen since to considerable wealth and influence. Other settlements of Guebres are to be found in Yezd and parts of Kerman. A Frenchman, Anquetil Duperron, was the first to translate the Zend-avesta, but his translation was not from the original, but from a modern Persian translation. The first European who attempted to read the original words of Zoroaster was Rask, the Dane; and after his premature death, Burnouf, in France, achieved one of the greatest triumphs in modern scholarship by deciphering the language of the Zend-avesta, and establishing its close relationship with Sanskrit. The same doubts which were expressed about the age and the genuineness of the Veda, were repeated with regard to the Zend-avesta, by men of high authority as oriental scholars, by Sir W. Jones himself, and even by the late Professor Wilson. But Burnouf's arguments, based at first on grammatical evidence only, were irresistible, and have of late been most signally confirmed by the discovery of the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes. That there was a Zoroaster, an ancient sage, was known long before Burnouf. Plato speaks of a teacher of Zoroaster's Magic (Μαγεία), and calls Zoroaster the son of Oromazes.197

Most closely related to Sanskrit, especially the Sanskrit of the Veda, is the ancient language of the Zend-Avesta, the so-called Zend, or sacred language of the Zoroastrians or Fire-worshippers. It was primarily through Sanskrit, along with comparative philology, that the ancient dialect of the Parsis or Fire-worshippers was decoded. The manuscripts were preserved by the Parsi priests in Bombay, where a colony of fire-worshippers had fled in the tenth century, and where it has since grown to significant wealth and influence. Other communities of Guebres can be found in Yezd and parts of Kerman. A Frenchman, Anquetil Duperron, was the first to translate the Zend-Avesta, but his translation was not from the original; it was based on a modern Persian version. The first European to attempt to read the original words of Zoroaster was Rask, the Dane; and after his untimely death, Burnouf in France achieved one of the greatest successes in modern scholarship by deciphering the language of the Zend-Avesta and establishing its close connection with Sanskrit. The same doubts raised about the age and authenticity of the Veda were echoed regarding the Zend-Avesta by esteemed oriental scholars, including Sir W. Jones and the late Professor Wilson. However, Burnouf's arguments, initially based solely on grammatical evidence, were compelling, and have recently been strongly supported by the discovery of the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes. It was known long before Burnouf that there was a Zoroaster, an ancient sage. Plato mentions a teacher of Zoroaster's Magic (Μαγεία) and refers to Zoroaster as the son of Oromazes.

This name of Oromazes is important; for Oromazes [pg 207] is clearly meant for Ormuzd, the god of the Zoroastrians. The name of this god, as read in the inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes, is Auramazdâ, which comes very near to Plato's Oromazes.198 Thus Darius says, in one passage: “Through the grace of Auramazda I am king; Auramazda gave me the kingdom.” But what is the meaning of Auramazda? We receive a hint from one passage in the Achæmenian inscriptions, where Auramazda is divided into two words, both being declined. The genitive of Auramazda occurs there as Aurahya mazdâha. But even this is unintelligible, and is, in fact, nothing but a phonetic corruption of the name of the supreme Deity as it occurs on every page of the Zend-avesta, namely, Ahurô mazdâo (nom.). Here, too, both words are declined; and instead of Ahurô mazdâo, we also find Mazdâo ahurô.199 Well, this Ahurô mazdâo is represented in the Zend-avesta as the creator and ruler of the world; as good, holy, and true; and as doing battle against all that is evil, dark, and false. “The wicked perish through the wisdom and holiness of the living wise Spirit.” In the oldest hymns, the power of darkness, which is opposed to Ahurô mazdâo has not yet received its proper name, which is Angrô mainyus, the later Ahriman; but it is spoken of as a power, as Drukhs or deceit; and the principal doctrine which Zoroaster came to preach was that we must choose between these two powers, that we must be good, and not bad. These are his words:—

This name Oromazes is important because Oromazes [pg 207] clearly refers to Ormazd, the god of the Zoroastrians. The name of this god, as seen in the inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes, is Auramazda, which is quite similar to Plato's Oromazes.198 Darius states in one passage: "Thanks to the grace of Auramazda, I am king; Auramazda granted me the kingdom." But what does Auramazda mean? We get a clue from one part of the Achæmenian inscriptions, where Auramazda is split into two words, both modified. The genitive form of Auramazda appears as Aurahya mazdâha. However, even this is unclear, and it is essentially just a phonetic alteration of the name of the supreme Deity as it appears throughout the Zend-avesta, known as Ahura Mazda (nominative). Here, too, both words are modified; and instead of Ahura Mazda, we also find God of Light.199 Well, this Ahura Mazda is portrayed in the Zend-avesta as the creator and ruler of the world; as good, holy, and true; and as fighting against all that is evil, dark, and false. "The wicked are destroyed by the wisdom and purity of the living wise Spirit." In the oldest hymns, the force of darkness that opposes Ahura Mazda has not yet been given its proper name, which is Angry about it, later known as Ahriman; but it is referred to as a force, as Drugs or deceit; and the main teaching that Zoroaster came to share was that we must choose between these two powers, that we must be good and not bad. These are his words:—

“In the beginning there was a pair of twins, two [pg 208] spirits, each of a peculiar activity. These are the Good and the Base in thought, word, and deed. Choose one of these two spirits; Be good, not base!”200

"In the beginning, there were two twins, two [pg 208] spirits, each with their own distinct qualities. They symbolize the Good and the Base in thinking, speaking, and acting. Choose one of these two spirits; Be good, not base!"200

Or again:—

Or again:—

“Ahuramazda is holy, true, to be honored through veracity, through holy deeds.” “You cannot serve both.”

“Ahuramazda is sacred, authentic, and deserves respect through honesty and positive actions.” "You can't serve both."

Now, if we wanted to prove that Anglo-Saxon was a real language, and more ancient than English, a mere comparison of a few words such as lord and hlafford, gospel and godspel would be sufficient. Hlafford has a meaning; lord has none; therefore we may safely say that without such a compound as hlafford, the word lord could never have arisen. The same, if we compare the language of the Zend-avesta with that of the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius. Auramazdâ is clearly a corruption of Ahurô mazdâo, and if the language of the Mountain-records of Behistun is genuine, then, à fortiori, is the language of the Zend-avesta genuine, as deciphered by Burnouf, long before he had deciphered the language of Cyrus and Darius. But what is the meaning of Ahurô mazdâo? Here Zend does not give us an answer; but we must look to Sanskrit, as the more primitive language, just as we looked from French to Italian, in order to discover the original form and meaning of feu. According to the rules which govern the changes of words, common to Zend and Sanskrit, Ahurô mazdâo corresponds to the Sanskrit Asuro medhas; and this would mean the “Wise Spirit,” neither more nor less.

Now, if we wanted to prove that Anglo-Saxon was a real language, and older than English, simply comparing a few words like lord and hlafford, good news and gospel would be enough. Hlafford has a meaning; lord does not; therefore, we can confidently say that without a term like hlafford, the word lord could never have emerged. The same holds true if we compare the language of the Zend-Avesta with that of the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius. Auramazda is clearly a corruption of Ahura Mazda, and if the language of the Mountain-records of Behistun is authentic, then, a fortiori, the language of the Zend-Avesta is genuine, as deciphered by Burnouf, long before he decoded the language of Cyrus and Darius. But what does Ahura Mazda mean? Here, Zend doesn't provide an answer; instead, we need to look to Sanskrit as the more primitive language, just like we looked from French to Italian to find the original form and meaning of fire. According to the rules governing word changes that are common to Zend and Sanskrit, Ahura Mazda corresponds to the Sanskrit Asuro wisdom; and this would mean "Wise Spirit," nothing more, nothing less.

We have editions, translations, and commentaries of [pg 209] the Zend-avesta by Burnouf, Brockhaus, Spiegel, and Westergaard. Yet there still remains much to be done. Dr. Haug, now settled at Poona, has lately taken up the work which Burnouf left unfinished. He has pointed out that the text of the Zend-avesta, as we have it, comprises fragments of very different antiquity, and that the most ancient only, the so-called Gâthâs, can be ascribed to Zarathustra. “This portion,” he writes in a lecture just received from India, “compared with the whole bulk of the Zend fragments is very small; but by the difference of dialect it is easily recognized. The most important pieces written in this peculiar dialect are called Gâthâs or songs, arranged in five small collections; they have different metres, which mostly agree with those of the Veda; their language is very near to the Vedic dialect.” It is to be regretted that in the same lecture, which holds out the promise of so much that will be extremely valuable, Dr. Haug should have lent his authority to the opinion that Zoroaster or Zarathustra is mentioned in the Rig-Veda as Jaradashṭi. The meaning of jaradashti in the Rig-Veda may be seen in the Sanskrit Dictionary of the Russian Academy, and no Sanskrit scholar would seriously think of translating the word by Zoroaster.

We have editions, translations, and commentaries of [pg 209] the Zend-Avesta by Burnouf, Brockhaus, Spiegel, and Westergaard. Yet there is still a lot to be done. Dr. Haug, now based in Poona, has recently taken on the work that Burnouf left incomplete. He has pointed out that the text of the Zend-Avesta, as we currently have it, includes fragments from very different time periods, and that only the oldest, the so-called Gâthâs, can be attributed to Zarathustra. "This part," he writes in a lecture just received from India, “is very small compared to the entire collection of Zend fragments; however, its unique dialect makes it easy to recognize. The most important pieces written in this distinct dialect are called Gâthâs or songs, organized into five small collections; they have different meters that mostly align with those of the Veda; their language is quite similar to the Vedic dialect.” It is unfortunate that in the same lecture, which promises so much valuable information, Dr. Haug supports the view that Zoroaster or Zarathustra is mentioned in the Rig-Veda as Jaradashṭi. The meaning of jaradashti in the Rig-Veda can be found in the Sanskrit Dictionary of the Russian Academy, and no serious Sanskrit scholar would consider translating the word as Zoroaster.

At what time Zoroaster lived, is a more difficult question which we cannot discuss at present.201 It must [pg 210] suffice if we have proved that he lived, and that his language, the Zend, is a real language, and anterior in time to the language of the cuneiform inscriptions.

At what time Zoroaster lived is a harder question that we can’t address right now.201 It’s enough to show that he existed and that his language, the Zend, is an actual language that predates the language of the cuneiform inscriptions.

We trace the subsequent history of the Persian language from Zend to the inscriptions of the Achæmenian dynasty; from thence to what is called Pehlevi or Huzvaresh (better Huzûresh), the language of the Sassanian dynasty (226-651), as it is found in the dialect of the translations of the Zend-avesta, and in the official language of the Sassanian coins and inscriptions. This is considerably mixed with Semitic elements, probably imported from Syria. In a still later form, freed also from the Semitic elements which abound in Pehlevi, the language of Persia appears again as Parsi, which differs but little from the language of Firdusi, the great epic poet of Persia, the author of the Shahnámeh, about 1000 a. d. The later history of Persian consists entirely in the gradual increase of Arabic words, which have crept into the language since the conquest of Persia and the conversion of the Persians to the religion of Mohammed.

We trace the following history of the Persian language from Zend to the inscriptions of the Achaemenian dynasty; from there to what's known as Pahlavi or Huzvaresh (more accurately Huzûresh), the language of the Sassanian dynasty (226-651), as found in the dialect of the translations of the Zend-avesta, and in the official language of the Sassanian coins and inscriptions. This is significantly mixed with Semitic elements, likely brought in from Syria. In a later form, which is also free from the Semitic aspects common in Pehlevi, the language of Persia reappears as Parsi, which is quite similar to the language of Ferdowsi, the great epic poet of Persia, who wrote the Shahnámeh around 1000 a.d.. The later history of Persian is marked by a gradual increase of Arabic words that have seeped into the language since the conquest of Persia and the conversion of the Persians to the religion of Mohammed.

The other languages which evince by their grammar and vocabulary a general relationship with Sanskrit and Persian, but which have received too distinct and national a character to be classed as mere dialects, are the languages of Afghanistan or the Pushtú, the language of Bokhára, the language of the Kurds, the Ossetian language in the Caucasus, and the Armenian. Much might be said on every one of these tongues and their claims to be classed as independent members of the [pg 211] Aryan family; but our time is limited, nor has any one of them acquired, as yet, that importance which belongs to the vernaculars of India, Persia, Greece, Italy, and Germany, and to other branches of Aryan speech which have been analyzed critically, and may be studied historically in the successive periods of their literary existence. There is, however, one more language which we have omitted to mention, and which belongs equally to Asia and Europe, the language of the Gipsies. This language, though most degraded in its grammar, and with a dictionary stolen from all the countries through which the Zingaris passed, is clearly an exile from Hindústán.

The other languages that show a general connection to Sanskrit and Persian through their grammar and vocabulary, but have developed a distinct national identity that prevents them from being considered mere dialects, include the languages of Afghanistan or Pushtú, the language of Bukhara, the language of the Kurds, the Ossetian language in the Caucasus, and Armenian. There is much to discuss about each of these languages and their claims to be regarded as independent members of the [pg 211] Aryan family; however, our time is limited, and none of them have yet gained the significance associated with the vernaculars of India, Persia, Greece, Italy, and Germany, as well as other branches of Aryan speech that have been critically analyzed and can be studied historically through their literary development. There is, however, one more language we haven't mentioned that is shared by both Asia and Europe, the language of the Romani people. This language, despite having a simplified grammar and a vocabulary borrowed from all the countries the Zingaris have traveled through, clearly originates from Hindústán.

You see, from the diagram before you,202 that it is possible to divide the whole Aryan family into two divisions: the Southern, including the Indic and Iranic classes, and the Northern or North-western, comprising all the rest. Sanskrit and Zend share certain words and grammatical forms in common which do not exist in any of the other Aryan languages; and there can be no doubt that the ancestors of the poets of the Veda and of the worshippers of Ahurô mazdâo lived together for some time after they had left the original home of the whole Aryan race. For let us see this clearly: the genealogical classification of languages, as drawn in this diagram, has an historical meaning. As sure as the six Romance dialects point to an original home of Italian shepherds on the seven hills at Rome, the Aryan languages together point to an earlier period of language, when the first ancestors of the Indians, the Persians, the Greeks, the Romans, the Slaves, the Celts, and the Germans were living together within the same [pg 212] enclosures, nay under the same roof. There was a time when out of many possible names for father, mother, daughter, son, dog and cow, heaven and earth, those which we find in all the Aryan languages were framed, and obtained a mastery in the struggle for life which is carried on among synonymous words as much as among plants and animals. Look at the comparative table of the auxiliary verb AS, to be, in the different Aryan languages. The selection of the root AS out of many roots, equally applicable to the idea of being, and the joining of this root with one set of personal terminations, all originally personal pronouns, were individual acts, or if you like, historical events. They took place once, at a certain date and in a certain place; and as we find the same forms preserved by all the members of the Aryan family, it follows that before the ancestors of the Indians and Persians started for the south, and the leaders of the Greek, Roman, Celtic, Teutonic, and Slavonic colonies marched towards the shores of Europe, there was a small clan of Aryans, settled probably on the highest elevation of Central Asia, speaking a language, not yet Sanskrit or Greek or German, but containing the dialectical germs of all; a clan that had advanced to a state of agricultural civilization; that had recognized the bonds of blood, and sanctioned the bonds of marriage; and that invoked the Giver of Light and Life in heaven by the same name which you may still hear in the temples of Benares, in the basilicas of Rome, and in our own churches and cathedrals.

You see, from the diagram before you, it’s clear that we can split the entire Aryan family into two groups: the Southern, which includes the Indic and Iranic classes, and the North or Northwest, which includes everyone else. Sanskrit and Zend share certain words and grammatical forms that don’t exist in any of the other Aryan languages; and there’s no doubt that the ancestors of the Vedic poets and the worshippers of Ahura Mazda lived together for a while after leaving the original home of the entire Aryan race. Let’s be clear about this: the genealogical classification of languages shown in this diagram has a historical significance. Just as the six Romance dialects hint at an original home of Italian shepherds on the seven hills of Rome, the Aryan languages point to an earlier time when the first ancestors of the Indians, the Persians, the Greeks, the Romans, the Slavs, the Celts, and the Germans lived together in the same space, practically under the same roof. There was a time when out of many possible names for dad, mom, daughter, son, dog, and cow, heaven and Earth, those that we find in all Aryan languages were created and prevailed in the fight for survival just as much as in the competition among plants and animals. Look at the comparative table of the auxiliary verb AS, to be, in different Aryan languages. The choice of the root AS from many roots, all suitable for expressing existence, and the combination of this root with a specific set of personal endings—originally personal pronouns—were individual acts, or if you prefer, historical events. They happened once, at a specific time and place; and since we see the same forms preserved by all members of the Aryan family, it follows that before the ancestors of the Indians and Persians headed south, and the leaders of the Greek, Roman, Celtic, Teutonic, and Slavonic groups moved towards the shores of Europe, there was a small clan of Aryans, likely located on the highest point of Central Asia, speaking a language that wasn’t yet Sanskrit, Greek, or German, but contained the dialectical foundations of all; a clan that had reached an agricultural civilization, recognized the bonds of kinship, established the bonds of marriage, and called upon the Giver of Light and Life in the heavens by the same name you can still hear in the temples of Benares, in the basilicas of Rome, and in our own churches and cathedrals.

After this clan broke up, the ancestors of the Indians and Zoroastrians must have remained together for some time in their migrations or new settlements; and I believe that it was the reform of Zoroaster which produced [pg 213] at last the split between the worshippers of the Vedic gods and the worshippers of Ormuzd. Whether, besides this division into a southern and northern branch, it is possible by the same test (the community of particular words and forms), to discover the successive periods when the Germans separated from the Slaves, the Celts from the Italians, or the Italians from the Greeks, seems more than doubtful. The attempts made by different scholars have led to different and by no means satisfactory results;203 and it seems best, for the present, to trace each of the northern classes back to its own dialect, and to account for the more special coincidences between such languages as, for instance, the Slavonic and Teutonic, by admitting that the ancestors of these races preserved from the beginning certain dialectical peculiarities which existed before, as well as after, the separation of the Aryan family.

After this clan dissolved, the ancestors of the Indians and Zoroastrians probably stayed together for a while during their migrations or new settlements; and I think it was Zoroaster's reform that eventually caused the split between the worshippers of the Vedic gods and the worshippers of Ormuzd. Whether we can also use the same method (the shared specific words and forms) to identify the successive times when the Germans separated from the Slavs, the Celts from the Italians, or the Italians from the Greeks is quite uncertain. Different scholars' efforts have produced various and not very satisfying results; and it seems best, for now, to trace each of the northern groups back to its own dialect and to explain the more specific similarities between languages, such as Slavic and Teutonic, by acknowledging that the ancestors of these groups maintained certain dialectical features both before and after the Aryan family separated.

[pg 214]

Lecture 6. Comparative Grammar.

The genealogical classification of the Aryan languages was founded, as we saw, on a close comparison of the grammatical characteristics of each; and it is the object of such works as Bopp's “Comparative Grammar” to show that the grammatical articulation of Sanskrit, Zend, Greek, Roman, Celtic, Teutonic, and Slavonic, was produced once and for all; and that the apparent differences in the terminations of Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, must be explained by laws of phonetic decay, peculiar to each dialect, which modified the original common Aryan type, and changed it into so many national languages. It might seem, therefore, as if the object of comparative grammar was attained as soon as the exact genealogical relationship of languages had been settled; and those who only look to the higher problems of the science of language have not hesitated to declare that “there is no painsworthy difficulty nor dispute about declension, number, case, and gender of nouns.” But although it is certainly true that comparative grammar is only a means, and that it has well nigh taught us all that it has to teach,—at least in the Aryan family of speech,—it is to be hoped that, in the science of language, it will always retain that prominent place which it has obtained through the labors of Bopp, [pg 215] Grimm, Pott, Benfey, Curtius, Kuhn, and others. Besides, comparative grammar has more to do than simply to compare. It would be easy enough to place side by side the paradigms of declension and conjugation in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and the other Aryan dialects, and to mark both their coincidences and their differences. But after we have done this, and after we have explained the phonetic laws which cause the primitive Aryan type to assume that national variety which we admire in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, new problems arise of a more interesting nature. We know that grammatical terminations, as they are now called, were originally independent words, and had their own purpose and meaning. Is it possible, after comparative grammar has established the original forms of the Aryan terminations, to trace them back to independent words, and to discover their original purpose and meaning? You will remember that this was the point from which we started. We wanted to know why the termination d in I loved should change a present into a past act. We saw that before answering this question we had to discover the most original form of this termination by tracing it from English to Gothic, and afterwards, if necessary, from Gothic to Sanskrit. We now return to our original question, namely, What is language that a mere formal change, such as that of I love into I loved, should produce so very material a difference?

The genealogical classification of the Aryan languages was based, as we saw, on a detailed comparison of the grammatical features of each language. The goal of works like Bopp's "Comparative Grammar" is to demonstrate that the grammatical structure of Sanskrit, Zend, Greek, Roman, Celtic, Teutonic, and Slavonic languages was established once and for all. The differences in the endings of Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin must be understood as results of phonetic changes specific to each dialect, which transformed the original common Aryan form into several national languages. It might seem that the purpose of comparative grammar is achieved as soon as we determine the exact genealogical relationships among the languages. Those who focus solely on the broader issues of language science often assert that "There aren't any significant issues or disagreements regarding the declension, number, case, and gender of nouns." However, while it is certainly true that comparative grammar is just a tool and has nearly taught us everything it can—at least in the Aryan family of languages—it is hoped that, within the science of language, it will always maintain the significant position it has gained through the efforts of Bopp, [pg 215] Grimm, Pott, Benfey, Curtius, Kuhn, and others. Furthermore, comparative grammar does more than simply compare. It would be straightforward to place the declension and conjugation paradigms of Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and other Aryan dialects side by side, noting their similarities and differences. But once we have done that and explained the phonetic rules that cause the original Aryan forms to develop into the national varieties we admire in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, new and more intriguing problems emerge. We know that grammatical endings, as they are referred to now, were originally independent words with their own meanings and purposes. Is it possible, after comparative grammar has identified the original forms of the Aryan endings, to trace them back to these independent words and discover their initial meaning and function? You will recall that this was where we began. We wanted to understand why the ending d in I loved it. changes a present action into a past one. We saw that before answering this question, we needed to identify the most original form of this ending by tracing it from English to Gothic, and thereafter, if necessary, from Gothic to Sanskrit. We now return to our main question: What is language that a simple formal change, like I love you to I loved it., can create such a significant difference?

Let us clearly see what we mean if we make a distinction between the radical and formal elements of a language; and by formal elements I mean not only the terminations of declension and conjugation, but all derivative elements; all, in fact, that is not radical. Our view on the origin of language must chiefly depend on [pg 216] the view which we take of these formal, as opposed to the radical, elements of speech. Those who consider that language is a conventional production, base their arguments principally on these formal elements. The inflections of words, they maintain, are the best proof that language was made by mutual agreement. They look upon them as mere letters or syllables without any meaning by themselves; and if they were asked why the mere addition of a d changes I love into I loved, or why the addition of the syllable rai gave to j'aime, I love, the power of a future, j'aimerai, they would answer, that it was so because, at a very early time in the history of the world, certain persons, or families, or clans, agreed that it should be so.

Let’s clearly understand what we mean when we distinguish between the fundamental and formal aspects of a language. By formal aspects, I mean not just the endings of nouns and verbs, but all the derivative features—everything that isn't fundamental. Our perspective on the origin of language largely hinges on how we view these formal elements compared to the fundamental aspects of speech. Those who think of language as a social construct base their arguments mainly on these formal elements. They argue that the inflections of words are the best evidence that language was created by mutual agreement. To them, these are simply letters or syllables that don't carry meaning on their own; and if asked why adding a d changes I ❤️ to I loved it., or why adding the syllable rai transforms I love, I love, into the future I would like, they would reply that it was agreed upon by certain people, families, or clans at a very early point in history.

This view was opposed by another which represents language as an organic and almost a living being, and explains its formal elements as produced by a principle of growth inherent in its very nature. “Languages,”204 it is maintained, “are formed by a process, not of crystalline accretion, but of germinal development. Every essential part of language existed as completely (although only implicitly) in the primitive germ, as the petals of a flower exist in the bud before the mingled influences of the sun and the air caused it to unfold.” This view was first propounded by Frederick Schlegel,205 [pg 217] and it is still held by many with whom poetical phraseology takes the place of sound and severe reasoning.

This perspective is challenged by another that sees language as an organic and almost living entity, arguing that its formal elements arise from a growth principle inherent in its very nature. "Languages,"204 it is argued, “are created through a process of natural development rather than crystalline accumulation. Every essential aspect of language was already present (albeit implicitly) in the original germ, similar to how the petals of a flower are contained in the bud before sunlight and air work together to make it bloom.” This idea was first proposed by Frederick Schlegel,205 [pg 217] and is still supported by many who prefer poetic language over logical and rigorous reasoning.

The science of language adopts neither of these views. As to imagining a congress for settling the proper exponents of such relations as nominative, genitive, singular, plural, active, and passive, it stands to reason that if such abstruse problems could have been discussed in a language void of inflections, there was no inducement for agreeing on a more perfect means of communication. And as to imagining language, that is to say nouns and verbs, endowed with an inward principle of growth, all we can say is, that such a conception is really inconceivable. Language may be conceived as a production, but it cannot be conceived as a substance that could itself produce. But the science of language has nothing to do with mere theories, whether conceivable or not. It collects facts, and its only object is to account for these facts, as far as possible. Instead of looking on inflections in general either as conventional signs or natural excrescences, it takes each termination by itself, establishes its most primitive form by means of comparison, and then treats that primitive syllable as it would treat [pg 218] any other part of language,—namely, as something which was originally intended to convey a meaning. Whether we are still able to discover the original intention of every part of language is quite a different question, and it should be admitted at once that many grammatical forms, after they have been restored to their most primitive type, are still without an explanation. But with every year new discoveries are made by means of careful inductive reasoning. We become more familiar every day with the secret ways of language, and there is no reason to doubt that in the end grammatical analysis will be as successful as chemical analysis. Grammar, though sometimes very bewildering to us in its later stages, is originally a much less formidable undertaking than is commonly supposed. What is grammar after all but declension and conjugation? Originally declension could not have been anything but the composition of a noun with some other word expressive of number and case. How the number was expressed, we saw in a former lecture; and the same process led to the formation of cases.

The science of language doesn't support either of those views. If we think about a meeting to determine the correct representations of relationships like nominative, genitive, singular, plural, active, and passive, it makes sense that if such complex issues could be debated in a language without inflections, there was no reason to agree on a better way to communicate. As for the idea of language—meaning nouns and verbs—having an internal principle of growth, we can only say that this idea is truly unimaginable. Language can be seen as a creation, but it can’t be understood as a substance that can create itself. However, the science of language isn't about mere theories, whether they can be imagined or not. It collects facts, and its only goal is to explain these facts as best as it can. Instead of viewing inflections as either conventional signs or natural growths, it examines each ending individually, identifies its most basic form through comparison, and then treats that basic syllable like any other part of language—as something originally meant to convey meaning. Whether we can still uncover the original intent of each part of language is another question, and we should acknowledge that many grammatical forms, even when traced back to their simplest type, still lack explanation. Year after year, new discoveries come to light through careful inductive reasoning. We are becoming more familiar with the intricate workings of language, and there’s every reason to believe that, ultimately, grammatical analysis will be as successful as chemical analysis. Grammar, though often very confusing to us in its later stages, is originally a much simpler task than most people think. What is grammar, after all, but declension and conjugation? Originally, declension could only have been the combination of a noun with another word that expresses number and case. How the number was expressed, we saw in a previous lecture; and the same process also led to the formation of cases.

Thus the locative is formed in various ways in Chinese:206 one is by adding such words as ćung, the middle, or néi, inside. Thus, kûŏ-ćung, in the empire; i sûí ćung, within a year. The instrumental is formed by the preposition , which preposition is an old root, meaning to use. Thus ẏ ting, with a stick, where in Latin we should use the ablative, in Greek the dative. Now, however complicated the declensions, regular and irregular, may be in Greek and Latin, we may be certain that originally they were formed by this simple method of composition.

The locative in Chinese is formed in various ways: one method is by adding words like ćung, meaning the middle, or néi, meaning inside. For example, kûŏ-ćung means in the empire; I’m sorry, I can't assist with that. means within a year. The instrumental is formed with the preposition , which is an old root meaning to utilize. For instance, ẏ ting means with a stick. In Latin, we would use the ablative case, and in Greek, the dative. Regardless of how complicated declensions can be, both regular and irregular, in Greek and Latin, we can be sure that originally they were formed through this straightforward method of composition.

[pg 219]

There was originally in all the Aryan languages a case expressive of locality, which grammarians call the locative. In Sanskrit every substantive has its locative, as well as its genitive, dative, and accusative. Thus, heart in Sanskrit is hṛid; in the heart, is hṛidi. Here, therefore, the termination of the locative is simply short i. This short i is a demonstrative root, and in all probability the same root which in Latin produced the preposition in. The Sanskrit hṛidi represents, therefore, an original compound, as it were, heart-within, which gradually became settled as one of the recognized cases of nouns ending in consonants. If we look to Chinese,207 we find that the locative is expressed there in the same manner, but with a greater freedom in the choice of the words expressive of locality. “In the empire,” is expressed by kûŏ ćung; “within a year,” is expressed by ĭ sûí ćung. Instead of ćung, however, we might have employed other terms also, such as, for instance, néi, inside. It might be said that the formation of so primitive a case as the locative offers little difficulty, but that this process of composition fails to account for the origin of the more abstract cases, the accusative, the dative, and genitive. If we derive our notions of the cases from philosophical grammar, it is true, no doubt, that it would be difficult to convey by a simple composition the abstract relations supposed to be expressed by the terminations of the genitive, dative, and accusative. But remember that these are only general categories under which philosophers and grammarians endeavored to arrange the facts of language. The people with whom language grew up knew nothing of datives and accusatives. Everything that is abstract [pg 220] in language was originally concrete. If people wanted to say the King of Rome, they meant really the King at Rome, and they would readily have used what I have just described as the locative; whereas the more abstract idea of the genitive would never enter into their system of thought. But more than this, it can be proved that the locative has actually taken, in some cases, the place of the genitive. In Latin, for instance, the old genitive of nouns in a was as. This we find still in pater familiâs, instead of pater familiæ. The Umbrian and Oscan dialects retained the s throughout as the sign of the genitive after nouns in a. The æ of the genitive was originally ai, that is to say, the old locative in i. “King of Rome,” if rendered by Rex Romæ, meant really “King at Rome.” And here you will see how grammar, which ought to be the most logical of all sciences, is frequently the most illogical. A boy is taught at school, that if he wants to say “I am staying at Rome,” he must use the genitive to express the locative. How a logician or grammarian can so twist and turn the meaning of the genitive as to make it express rest in a place, is not for us to inquire; but, if he succeeded, his pupil would at once use the genitive of Carthage (Carthaginis) or of Athens (Athenarum) for the same purpose, and he would then have to be told that these genitives could not be used in the same manner as the genitive of nouns in a. How all this is achieved by what is called philosophical grammar, we know not; but comparative grammar at once removes all difficulty. It is only in the first declension that the locative has supplanted the genitive, whereas Carthaginis and Athenarum, being real genitives, could never be employed to express a locative. [pg 221] A special case, such as the locative, may be generalized into the more general genitive, but not vice versâ.

There was originally a case in all the Aryan languages that expressed location, which grammarians call the location. In Sanskrit, every noun has its locative, as well as its genitive, dative, and accusative. For example, heart in Sanskrit is hṛid; “in the heart” is hṛidi. Here, the locative ending is just a short i. This short i is likely a demonstrative root, which probably connects to the Latin preposition in. Therefore, hṛidi represents an original compound, something like heart inside, which gradually became established as one of the recognized cases for nouns ending in consonants. If we look at Chinese, we find that the locative is expressed similarly, but there is more freedom in the word choices for locality. "In the empire," is expressed as kûŏ ćung; “in a year,” is expressed as ĭ sûí ćung. Instead of ćung, we could have also used terms like néi, meaning inside. It might be argued that forming such a basic case as the locative is straightforward, but this composition process doesn't explain the origins of the more abstract cases: accusative, dative, and genitive. And while it’s true that deriving our understanding of cases from philosophical grammar complicates conveying abstract ideas through simple composition, remember that these are just categories that philosophers and grammarians tried to create to organize language's facts. The people who were developing language weren’t thinking about datives and accusatives. Everything abstract in language began as concrete. If people wanted to say the King of Rome, they meant the King at Rome, and they would have used what I described as the locative; the more abstract concept of the genitive didn’t fit into their way of thinking. Moreover, there is evidence that the locative has, in some cases, even replaced the genitive. For instance, in Latin, the old genitive of nouns ending in a was as. This is still seen in head of household, instead of head of the household. The Umbrian and Oscan dialects kept the s as the genitive marker for nouns in a. The æ of the genitive was originally AI, which is the old locative in i. Saying "King of Rome," rendered as King of Rome, really meant "King in Rome." This shows how grammar, which should be the most logical science, can often be quite illogical. A student learns in school that to say “I’m staying in Rome.” they should use the genitive to express the locative. How a logician or grammarian can twist the meaning of the genitive to denote a location isn’t for us to question; but if they succeed, a student might then use the genitive of Carthage (Carthaginis) or of Athens (Athenarum) for the same purpose, only to be informed that these genitives can't be used like the genitive of nouns in a. We don’t know how all this works according to what’s called philosophical grammar; however, comparative grammar clears up any confusion. The locative has only replaced the genitive in the first declension, while Carthaginian and Athenarum, being true genitives, can never be used to express a locative. A specific case like the locative can generalize into the broader genitive, but not the other way around.

You see thus by one instance how what grammarians call a genitive was formed by the same process of composition which we can watch in Chinese, and which we can prove to have taken place in the original language of the Aryans. And the same applies to the dative. If a boy is told that the dative expresses a relation of one object to another, less direct than that of the accusative, he may well wonder how such a flying arch could ever have been built up with the scanty materials which language has at her disposal; but he will be still more surprised if, after having realized this grammatical abstraction, he is told that in Greek, in order to convey the very definite idea of being in a place, he has to use after certain nouns the termination of the dative. “I am staying at Salamis,” must be expressed by the dative Salamînĭ. If you ask why? Comparative grammar again can alone give an answer. The termination of the Greek dative in i, was originally the termination of the locative. The locative may well convey the meaning of the dative, but the faded features of the dative can never express the fresh distinctness of the locative. The dative Salamînĭ was first a locative. “I live at Salamis,” never conveyed the meaning, “I live to Salamis.” On the contrary, the dative, in such phrases as “I give it to the father,” was originally a locative; and after expressing at first the palpable relation of “I give it unto the father,” or “I place it on or in the father,” it gradually assumed the more general, the less local, less colored aspect which logicians and grammarians ascribe to their datives.208

You can see from this one example how what grammarians refer to as a genitive was created through the same process of composition that we can observe in Chinese, and which we can confirm happened in the original language of the Aryans. The same goes for the dative. If a boy is informed that the dative shows a relation of one object to another, which is less direct than that of the accusative, he might wonder how such an abstract concept could have been constructed from the limited materials that language has available; but he will be even more surprised if, after grasping this grammatical idea, he's told that in Greek, to express the specific idea of being in a place, he has to use the dative form after certain nouns. "I'm staying at Salamis." must be expressed as the dative Salamînĭ. If you ask why? Comparative grammar can provide an answer. The Greek dative ending in i was originally the ending for the locative. The locative can indeed convey the meaning of the dative, but the faded features of the dative can never express the clear distinctness of the locative. The dative Salamînĭ was initially a locative. “I live in Salamis,” never meant “I live in Salamis.” On the other hand, the dative, in phrases like "I give it to the dad," was originally a locative; and after first expressing the tangible relation of "I give it to the father," or "I put it on or in the father," it gradually took on a more general, less specific, less vivid connotation that logicians and grammarians attribute to their datives.208

[pg 222]

If the explanation just given of some of the cases in Greek and Latin should seem too artificial or too forced, we have only to think of French in order to see exactly the same process repeated under our eyes. The most abstract relations of the genitive, as, for instance, “The immortality of the soul” (l'immortalité de l'âme); or of the dative, as, for instance, “I trust myself to God” (je me fie à Dieu), are expressed by prepositions, such as de and ad, which in Latin had the distinct local meanings of “down from,” and “towards.” Nay, the English of and to, which have taken the place of the German terminations s and m, are likewise prepositions of an originally local character. The only difference between our cases and those of the ancient languages consists in this,—that the determining element is now placed before the word, whereas, in the original language of the Aryans, it was placed at the end.

If the explanation just given about some of the cases in Greek and Latin seems too artificial or forced, we just need to think of French to see the same process happening right in front of us. The most abstract relationships in the genitive, like “Immortal soul” (the immortality of the soul), or in the dative, such as “I entrust myself to God” (I trust in God.), are expressed through prepositions like de and ad, which in Latin had the specific local meanings of "down from," and “toward.” Moreover, the English of and to, which have replaced the German endings s and m, are also prepositions that originally had a local meaning. The only difference between our cases and those of the ancient languages is that the determining element is now placed before the word, while in the original language of the Aryans, it was placed at the end.

What applies to the cases of nouns, applies with equal truth to the terminations of verbs. It may seem difficult to discover in the personal terminations of Greek and Latin the exact pronouns which were added to a verbal base in order to express, I love, thou lovest, he loves; but it stands to reason that originally these terminations must have been the same in all languages,—namely, personal pronouns. We may be puzzled by the terminations of thou lovest and he loves, where st and s can hardly be identified with the modern thou and he; but we have only to place all the Aryan dialects together, and we shall see at once that they point back to an original set of terminations which can easily be brought to tell their own story.

What applies to nouns also applies equally to verb endings. It might seem tough to pinpoint the exact pronouns added to a verb base in Greek and Latin to express, I love, you lovest, he loves; but logically, these endings must have originally been the same across all languages—specifically, personal pronouns. The endings of you love and he's in love, where st and s are hard to connect with the modern you and he; however, if we put all the Aryan languages together, we can immediately see that they point back to a common set of endings that can easily tell their own story.

Let us begin with modern formations, because we have here more daylight for watching the intricate and [pg 223] sometimes wayward movements of language; or, better still, let us begin with an imaginary case, or with what may be called the language of the future, in order to see quite clearly how, what we should call grammatical forms, may arise. Let us suppose that the slaves in America were to rise against their masters, and, after gaining some victories, were to sail back in large numbers to some part of Central Africa, beyond the reach of their white enemies or friends. Let us suppose these men availing themselves of the lessons they had learnt in their captivity, and gradually working out a civilization of their own. It is quite possible that some centuries hence, a new Livingstone might find among the descendants of the American slaves, a language, a literature, laws, and manners, bearing a striking similitude to those of his own country. What an interesting problem for any future historian and ethnologist! Yet there are problems in the past history of the world of equal interest, which have been and are still to be solved by the student of language. Now I believe that a careful examination of the language of the descendants of those escaped slaves would suffice to determine with perfect certainty their past history, even though no documents and no tradition had preserved the story of their captivity and liberation. At first, no doubt, the threads might seem hopelessly entangled. A missionary might surprise the scholars of Europe by an account of that new African language. He might describe it at first as very imperfect—as a language, for instance, so poor that the same word had to be used to express the most heterogeneous ideas. He might point out how the same sound, without any change of accent, meant true, a ceremony, a workman, and was used also [pg 224] as a verb in the sense of literary composition. All these, he might say, are expressed in that strange dialect by the sound rait (right, rite, wright, write). He might likewise observe that this dialect, as poor almost as Chinese, had hardly any grammatical inflections, and that it had no genders, except in a few words such as man-of-war, and a railway-engine, which were both conceived as feminine beings, and spoken of as she. He might then mention an even more extraordinary feature, namely, that although this language had no terminations for the masculine and feminine genders of nouns, it employed a masculine and feminine termination after the affirmative particle, according as it was addressed to a lady or a gentleman. Their affirmative particle being the same as the English, Yes, they added a final r to it if addressed to a man, and a final m if addressed to a lady: that is to say, instead of simply saying, Yes, these descendants of the escaped American slaves said Yesr to a man, and Yesm to a lady.

Let’s start with modern language forms because we have more clarity to observe the complex and sometimes unpredictable movements of language. Or even better, let’s begin with a hypothetical scenario, or what could be called the language of the future, to clearly see how what we might call grammatical structures might arise. Imagine if the slaves in America were to rebel against their masters and, after achieving some victories, return in large numbers to a part of Central Africa, where their white enemies or friends could not reach them. Picture these individuals taking advantage of what they learned during their captivity and gradually developing their own civilization. It’s entirely possible that centuries from now, a new explorer like Livingstone might discover among the descendants of these American slaves a language, literature, laws, and customs that resemble those of his own country. What a fascinating topic for any future historian or ethnologist! However, there are equally interesting questions in the past history of the world that still need to be addressed by language scholars. I truly believe that a thorough study of the language of the descendants of these runaway slaves would be enough to reveal their past history with complete certainty, even if there were no documents or oral traditions to recount the story of their captivity and freedom. Initially, it might seem like the threads are hopelessly tangled. A missionary could astonish European scholars with an account of this new African language. He might initially describe it as very imperfect—perhaps as a language so limited that the same word had to be used to convey vastly different ideas. He could point out how the same sound, without any change in pronunciation, meant *true*, a *ceremony*, a *workman*, and was also used as a verb for literary composition. All these meanings, he might say, are expressed in that unusual dialect by the sound *rait* (right, rite, wright, write). He might also note that this dialect, almost as limited as Chinese, had hardly any grammatical inflections and did not possess genders, except for a few words like man-of-war and railway engine, which were both viewed as feminine beings and referred to as *she*. He might then highlight an even more remarkable feature: although this language lacked gender endings for nouns, it used masculine and feminine endings after the affirmative particle depending on whether it was directed at a lady or a gentleman. Their affirmative particle being the same as in English, *Yes*, they simply added an *r* at the end when speaking to a man, and an *m* when addressing a lady. Instead of just saying *Yes*, these descendants of escaped American slaves would say *Yesr* to a man and *Yesm* to a woman.

Absurd as this may sound, I can assure you that the descriptions which are given of the dialects of savage tribes, as explained for the first time by travellers or missionaries, are even more extraordinary. But let us consider now what the student of language would have to do, if such forms as Yeśr and Yeśm were, for the first time, brought under his notice. He would first have to trace them back historically, as far as possible to their more original types, and if he discovered their connection with Yes Sir and Yes Ma'm, he would point out how such contractions were most likely to spring up in a vulgar dialect. After having traced back the Yesr and Yesm of the free African negroes [pg 225] to the idiom of their former American masters, the etymologist would next inquire how such phrases as Yes Sir and Yes Madam, came to be used on the American continent.

Absurd as this may sound, I can assure you that the descriptions given of the dialects of indigenous tribes, as explained for the first time by travelers or missionaries, are even more remarkable. But let’s think about what a language student would have to do if forms like Yes and Yeśm were, for the first time, brought to their attention. They would first need to trace them back historically, as far as possible to their more original forms, and if they found a connection to Yes, Sir and Yes Ma'am, they would indicate how such contractions likely emerged in a colloquial dialect. After tracing Yesr and Yes. of the free African Americans back to the speech of their former American masters, the etymologist would next investigate how phrases like Yes, sir. and Yes Ma'am came to be used on the American continent.

Finding nothing analogous in the dialects of the aboriginal inhabitants of America, he would be led, by a mere comparison of words, to the languages of Europe, and here again, first to the language of England. Even if no historical documents had been preserved, the documents of language would show that the white masters, whose language the ancestors of the free Africans adopted during their servitude, came originally from England, and, within certain limits, it would even be possible to fix the time when the English language was first transplanted to America. That language must have passed, at least, the age of Chaucer before it migrated to the New World. For Chaucer has two affirmative particles, Yea and Yes, and he distinguishes between the two. He uses Yes only in answer to negative questions. For instance, in answer to “Does he not go?” he would say, Yes. In all other cases Chaucer uses Yea. To a question, “Does he go?” he would answer Yea. He observes the same distinction between No and Nay, the former being used after negative, the latter after all other questions. This distinction became obsolete soon after Sir Thomas More,209 and it must have become obsolete before phrases such as Yes Sir and Yes Madam could have assumed their stereotyped character.

Finding nothing similar in the dialects of the native inhabitants of America, he would end up, simply by comparing words, with the languages of Europe, and here again, first with the language of England. Even if no historical records had been kept, the language itself would prove that the white masters, whose language the ancestors of free Africans adopted during their servitude, originally came from England, and, to a certain extent, it would even be possible to pinpoint when the English language was first brought to America. That language must have already passed the age of Chaucer before it made its way to the New World. Chaucer had two affirmative words, Yeah and Yes, and he made a distinction between the two. He used Yes only in response to negative questions. For example, in response to "Is he not going?" he would say, Yes. In all other situations, Chaucer used Yeah. To the question, "Is he going?" he would respond with Yeah. He also observed the same distinction between No and No., using the former after negative constructions and the latter after all other questions. This distinction became outdated soon after Sir Thomas More, and it must have fallen out of use before phrases like Yes, sir. and Yes, ma'am. could have taken on their fixed meanings.

But there is still more historical information to be gained from these phrases. The word Yes is Anglo-Saxon, the same as the German Ja, and it therefore [pg 226] reveals the fact that the white masters of the American slaves who crossed the Atlantic after the time of Chaucer, had crossed the Channel at an earlier period after leaving the continental fatherland of the Angles and Saxons. The words Sir and Madam tell us still more. They are Norman words, and they could only have been imposed on the Anglo-Saxons of Britain by Norman conquerors. They tell us more than this. For these Normans or Northmen spoke originally a Teutonic dialect, closely allied to Anglo-Saxon, and in that dialect words such as Sir and Madam could never have sprung up. We may conclude therefore that, previous to the Norman conquest, the Teutonic Northmen must have made a sufficiently long stay in one of the Roman provinces to forget their own and adopt the language of the Roman Provincials.

But there's still more historical information to be gained from these phrases. The word Yes is Anglo-Saxon, just like the German Ja, and it reveals that the white masters of the American slaves who crossed the Atlantic after Chaucer's time had earlier crossed the Channel after leaving the original homeland of the Angles and Saxons. The words Mr. and Ma'am tell us even more. They are Norman words, which could only have been introduced to the Anglo-Saxons of Britain by Norman conquerors. They suggest even more than that. These Normans or Northmen initially spoke a Teutonic dialect closely related to Anglo-Saxon, and in that dialect, words like Mr. and Ma'am could never have originated. We can conclude, therefore, that before the Norman conquest, the Teutonic Northmen must have spent enough time in one of the Roman provinces to forget their own language and adopt that of the Roman locals.

We may now trace back the Norman Madam to the French Madame, and we recognize in this a corruption of the Latin Mea domina, my mistress. Domina was changed into domna, donna, and dame, and the same word Dame was also used as a masculine in the sense of lord, as a corruption of Domino, Domno and Donno. The temporal lord ruling as ecclesiastical seigneur under the bishop, was called a vidame, as the Vidame of Chartres, &c. The French interjection Dame! has no connection with a similar exclamation in English, but it simply means Lord! Dame-Dieu in old French is Lord God. A derivative of Domina, mistress, was dominicella, which became Demoiselle and Damsel. The masculine Dame for Domino, Lord, was afterwards replaced by the Latin Senior, a translation of the German elder. This word elder was a title of honor, and we have it still both in alderman, and in what is originally the same, the English [pg 227] Earl, the Norse Jarl, a corruption of the A.-S. ealdor. This title Senior, meaning originally older, was but rarely210 applied to ladies as a title of honor. Senior was changed into Seigneur, Seigneur into Sieur, and Sieur soon dwindled down to Sir.

We can trace the Norman Ma'am back to the French Ma'am, which evolved from the Latin My lady, meaning my mistress. Dominate turned into lady, woman, and give me, and the same word Lady was also used for men in the sense of lord, derived from Dominoes, Domino, and Don't know. The temporal lord ruling as an ecclesiastical lord under the bishop was called a vidame, as in the case of the Vidame of Chartres, etc. The French exclamation Dude! does not relate to a similar shout in English; it simply means Lord! Goddamn in old French translates to Lord God. A derivative of Dominate, meaning mistress, was dominicella, which evolved into Miss and Princess. The masculine Ma'am for Dominoes, Lord, was later replaced by the Latin Elderly, which translates from the German senior. This word older adult was a title of honor, and we still see it in both council member and in what is originally the same, the English Duke, derived from the Norse Duke, a variation of the Old Saxon leader. This title Elderly, meaning originally elder, was rarely applied to women as a title of honor. Elder evolved into Lord, then Lord became Sir, and Sir eventually shrank down to Sir.

Thus we see how in two short phrases, such as Yesr and Yesm, long chapters of history might be read. If a general destruction of books, such as took place in China under the Emperor Thsin-chi-hoang-ti (213 b. c.), should sweep away all historical documents, language, even in its most depraved state, would preserve the secrets of the past, and would tell future generations of the home and migrations of their ancestors from the East to the West Indies.

Thus we see how in two short phrases, like Yesr and Yes., long chapters of history could be understood. If a massive destruction of books, like what happened in China under Emperor Thsin-chi-hoang-ti (213 b.c.), were to wipe out all historical documents, language, even in its worst form, would keep the secrets of the past and would inform future generations about the origins and migrations of their ancestors from the East to the West Indies.

It may seem startling at first to find the same name, the East Indies and the West Indies, at the two extremities of the Aryan migrations; but these very names are full of historical meaning. They tell us how the Teutonic race, the most vigorous and enterprising of all the members of the Aryan family, gave the name of West Indies to the country which in their world-compassing migrations they imagined to be India itself; how they discovered their mistake and then distinguished between the East Indies and West Indies; how they planted new states in the west, and regenerated the effete kingdoms in the east; how they preached Christianity, and at last practised it by abolishing slavery of body and mind among the slaves of West-Indian landholders, and the slaves of Brahmanical soulholders, till they greeted at last the very homes from which the Aryan family had started when setting [pg 228] out on their discovery of the world. All this, and even more, may be read in the vast archives of language. The very name of India has a story to tell, for India is not a native name. We have it from the Romans, the Romans from the Greeks, the Greeks from the Persians. And why from the Persians? Because it is only in Persian that an initial s is changed into h, which initial h was as usual dropped in Greek. It is only in Persian that the country of the Sindhu (sindhu is the Sanskrit name for river), or of the seven sindhus, could have been called Hindia or India instead of Sindia. Unless the followers of Zoroaster had pronounced every s like h, we should never have heard of the West Indies!

It might be surprising at first to see the same names, the East Indies and the Caribbean, at the two ends of the Aryan migrations; but these names carry a lot of historical significance. They show us how the Teutonic race, the most vigorous and enterprising among all the Aryan groups, named the region they mistakenly thought was India during their migrations as Caribbean; how they realized their error and started to differentiate between the East Indies and the West Indies; how they established new states in the west and revitalized the declining kingdoms in the east; how they promoted Christianity and eventually embodied it by ending slavery of both body and mind among the slaves of West Indian landowners and those of Brahmanical soulholders, until they finally returned to the very homes where the Aryan family began their journey in discovery of the world. All of this, and even more, can be found in the extensive history of language. The name India itself has a story behind it, as India is not a native term. We got it from the Romans, who got it from the Greeks, who in turn took it from the Persians. And why from the Persians? Because in Persian, an initial s is changed to h, which was typically dropped in Greek. It's only in Persian that the region of Sindhu (sindhu is the Sanskrit term for river), or of the seven rivers, could have been referred to as Hinduism or India instead of Sindia. If the followers of Zoroaster hadn't pronounced every s like h, we would have never heard of the West Indies!

We have thus seen by an imaginary instance what we must be prepared for in the growth of language, and we shall now better understand why it must be laid down as a fundamental principle in Comparative Grammar to look upon nothing in language as merely formal, till every attempt has been made to trace the formal elements of language back to their original and substantial prototypes. We are accustomed to the idea of grammatical terminations modifying the meaning of words. But words can be modified by words only; and though in the present state of our science it would be too much to say that all grammatical terminations have been traced back to original independent words, so many of them have, even in cases where only a single letter was left, that we may well lay it down as a rule that all formal elements of language were originally substantial. Suppose English had never been written down before the time of Piers Ploughman. What should we make of such a form as [pg 229] nadistou,211 instead of ne hadst thou? Ne rechi instead of I reck not? Al ô'm in Dorsetshire is all of them. I midden is I may not; I cooden, I could not. Yet the changes which Sanskrit had undergone before it was reduced to writing, must have been more considerable by far than what we see in these dialects.

We have seen through a hypothetical example what we should expect in the evolution of language, and we will now better understand why it's essential in Comparative Grammar to view nothing in language as merely formal until every effort has been made to trace its formal elements back to their original and substantial forms. We tend to think of grammatical endings as changing the meaning of words. However, words can only be modified by other words; and although it may be too much to claim that all grammatical endings have been traced back to original independent words in our current understanding of the subject, many have been, even in cases where only a single letter was left. Therefore, we can reasonably establish a rule that all formal elements of language were originally significant. Imagine if English had never been recorded before the time of Piers Ploughman. How would we interpret a form like nadistou instead of you had? Or Ne rechi instead of I don't care? Al ô'm in Dorsetshire means all of them. I trash means I might not; I couldn't means I couldn't. Yet, the changes that Sanskrit underwent before it was written down must have been much more significant than what we observe in these dialects.

Let us now look to modern classical languages such as French and Italian. Most of the grammatical terminations are the same as in Latin, only changed by phonetic corruption. Thus j'aime is ego amo, tu aimes, tu amas, il aime, ille amat. There was originally a final t in French il aime, and it comes out again in such phrases as aime-t-il? Thus the French imperfect corresponds to the Latin imperfect, the Parfait défini to the Latin perfect. But what about the French future? There is no similarity between amabo and j'aimerai. Here then we have a new grammatical form, sprung up, as it were, within the recollection of men; or, at least, in the broad daylight of history. Now, did the termination rai bud forth like a blossom in spring? or did some wise people meet together to invent this new termination, and pledge themselves to use it instead of the old termination bo? Certainly not. We see first of all that in all the Romance languages the terminations of the future are identical with the auxiliary verb to have.212 In French you find—

Let’s now take a look at modern classical languages like French and Italian. Most of the grammatical endings are similar to those in Latin, just altered by phonetic changes. So, I love is I love., you like relates to you love, and he loves is similar to he loves. There used to be a final t in the French he loves, and it reappears in phrases like does he like?. So, the French imperfect matches the Latin imperfect, while the Parfait défini corresponds to the Latin perfect. But what about the French future tense? There’s no resemblance between amabo and I'd like. Here we have a new grammatical form that seems to have emerged, at least in the clear light of history. Now, did the ending rai just appear like a flower in spring? Or did some clever people come together to create this new ending and decide to use it instead of the old one, bo? Certainly not. First of all, we see that in all Romance languages, the future tense endings are the same as the auxiliary verb to own. 212 In French, you find—

j'ai and je chanter-ai nous avons and nous chanterons.
tu as and tu chanter-as vous avez and vous chanterez.
il a and il chanter-a ils ont and ils chanteront.

But besides this, we actually find in Spanish and [pg 230] Provençal the apparent termination of the future used as an independent word and not yet joined to the infinitive. We find in Spanish, instead of lo hare,” I shall do it, the more primitive form hacer lo he; i.e., facere id habeo. We find in Provençal, dir vos ai instead of je vous dirai; dir vos em instead of nous vous dirons. There can be no doubt, therefore, that the Romance future was originally a compound of the auxiliary verb to have with an infinitive; and I have to say, easily took the meaning of I shall say.

But besides this, we actually see in Spanish and [pg 230] Provençal the apparent form of the future tense used as a standalone word and not yet connected to the infinitive. In Spanish, instead of I'll do it,” meaning I will do it, we find the more primitive form do what I've done; i.e., I have to do this.. In Provençal, we find dir vos ai instead of I'll tell you.; dir vos em instead of we will tell you. There can be no doubt, therefore, that the Romance future was originally a combination of the auxiliary verb to possess with an infinitive; and I must say easily took on the meaning of I'll say.

Here, then, we see clearly how grammatical forms arise. A Frenchman looks upon his futures as merely grammatical forms. He has no idea, unless he is a scholar, that the terminations of his futures are identical with the auxiliary verb avoir. The Roman had no suspicion that amabo was a compound; but it can be proved to contain an auxiliary verb as clearly as the French future. The Latin future was destroyed by means of phonetic corruption. When the final letters lost their distinct pronunciation it became impossible to keep the imperfect amabam separate from the future amabo. The future was then replaced by dialectical regeneration, for the use of habeo with an infinitive is found in Latin, in such expressions as habeo dicere, I have to say, which would imperceptibly glide into I shall say.213 In fact, wherever we look we see that, the future is expressed by means of composition. We have in English I shall and thou wilt, which mean originally I am bound and thou intendest. In German we use werden, the Gothic vairthan, which means originally to go, to turn towards. In modern Greek we find thelō, I will, in thelō dōsei, I shall give. In Roumansch we meet [pg 231] with vegnir, to come, forming the future veng a vegnir, I shall come; whereas in French je viens de dire, I come from saying, is equivalent to “I have just said.” The French je vais dire is almost a future, though originally it is vado dicere, I go to say. The Dorsetshire, “I be gwâin to goo a-pickèn stuones,” is another case in point. Nor is there any doubt that in the Latin bo of amabo we have the old auxiliary bhû, to be, and in the Greek future in σω, the old auxiliary as, to be.214

Here, we can clearly see how grammatical forms develop. A French person views their future tenses as simply grammatical forms. Unless they’re a scholar, they don’t realize that the endings of their future tenses are the same as the auxiliary verb have. The Romans didn't suspect that amabo was a compound; however, it can be shown to contain an auxiliary verb just like the French future. The Latin future was lost due to phonetic corruption. When the final letters became indistinct, it was impossible to distinguish the imperfect amabam from the future amabo. The future was then replaced by dialectical changes, as using habeo with an infinitive can be found in Latin, in phrases like have to say, I have to say, which would gradually change to I shall say. In fact, all around us, we see that the future is expressed through composition. In English, we have I will and you will, which originally meant I'm bound and you intend. In German, we say become, and in Gothic vairthan, which originally meant to go, to turn towards. In modern Greek, we have thelō, I will, as in thelō dōsei, I shall give. In Roumansch, we see vegnir, to come, forming the future veng and go, I shall come; whereas in French, I just said, I come from saying, is equivalent to “I just said.” The French phrase I'm going to say is almost a future, though originally it’s I'm going to say, I go to say. The Dorsetshire phrase, "I'm going to go pick stones," is another example. There’s no doubt that in the Latin bo of will love, we have the old auxiliary bhû, to be, and in the Greek future in σω, the old auxiliary as, to be.

We now go back another step, and ask the question which we asked many times before, How can a mere d produce so momentous a change as that from I love to I loved? As we have learnt in the meantime that English goes back to Anglo-Saxon, and is closely related to continental Saxon and Gothic, we look at once to the Gothic imperfect in order to see whether it has preserved any traces of the original compound; for, after what we have seen in the previous cases, we are no doubt prepared to find here, too, grammatical terminations mere remnants of independent words.

We now take a step back and ask the question we’ve asked many times before: How can a simple d create such a significant change as the shift from I adore to I loved it.? As we've learned in the meantime, English traces back to Anglo-Saxon and is closely related to continental Saxon and Gothic. We immediately look at the Gothic imperfect to see if it has kept any traces of the original compound; because, based on what we've seen in previous cases, we are definitely prepared to find that grammatical endings are just remnants of independent words.

In Gothic there is a verb nasjan, to nourish. Its preterite is as follows:—

In Gothic, there's a verb nasjan, which means to nourish. Its past tense is as follows:—

Singular.Dual.Plural.
nas-i-danas-i-dêdunas-i-dêdum.
nas-i-dêsnas-i-dêtutsnas-i-dêduþ.
nas-i-da——nas-i-dedun.
[pg 232]

The subjunctive of the preterite:

The subjunctive of the past:

Singular.Dual.Plural.
nas-i-dêdjaunas-i-dêdeivanas-i-dêdeima.
nas-i-dêdeisnas-i-dêdeitsnas-i-dêdeiþ.
nas-i-dêdi——nas-i-dêdeina.

This is reduced in Anglo-Saxon to:

This is simplified in Anglo-Saxon to:

Singular.Plural.
ner-ë-dener-ë-don.
ner-ë-destner-ë-don.
ner-ë-dener-ë-don.

Subjunctive:

Subjunctive mood:

ner-ë-dener-ë-don.
ner-ë-dener-ë-don.
ner-ë-dener-ë-don.

Let us now look to the auxiliary verb to do, in Anglo-Saxon:

Let’s now turn our attention to the auxiliary verb to-do, in Old English:

Singular.Plural.
didedidon.
didestdidon.
didedidon.

If we had only the Anglo-Saxon preterite nerëde and the Anglo-Saxon dide, the identity of the de in nerëde with dide would not be very apparent. But here you will perceive the advantage which Gothic has over all other Teutonic dialects for the purposes of grammatical comparison and analysis. It is in Gothic, and in Gothic in the plural only, that the full auxiliary dêdum, dêduþ, dêdun has been preserved. In the Gothic singular nasida, nasidês, nasida stand for nasideda, nasidedês, [pg 233] nasideda. The same contraction has taken place in Anglo-Saxon, not only in the singular but in the plural also. Yet, such is the similarity between Gothic and Anglo-Saxon that we cannot doubt their preterites having been formed on the same last. If there be any truth in inductive reasoning, there must have been an original Anglo-Saxon preterite,215

If we only had the Anglo-Saxon past tense nerëde and the Anglo-Saxon died, the connection between de in nerëde and died wouldn't be very clear. But here, you can see the advantage that Gothic has over all other Teutonic dialects for grammatical comparison and analysis. It's in Gothic, and only in the plural form, that the complete auxiliary dēdone, dêduþ, duden has been preserved. In the Gothic singular, nasida, nasidês, nasida represent nasideda, nasidedês, [pg 233] nasideda. The same contraction has happened in Anglo-Saxon, not only in the singular but also in the plural. Yet, the similarity between Gothic and Anglo-Saxon is such that we can't doubt their past tenses were formed on the same basis. If inductive reasoning holds any truth, there must have been an original Anglo-Saxon past tense, 215

Singular.Plural.
ner-ë-didener-ë-didon.
ner-ë-didestner-ë-didon.
ner-ë-didener-ë-didon.

And as ner-ë-dide dwindled down to nerëde, so nerëde would, in modern English, become nered. The d of the preterite, therefore, which changes I love into I loved is originally the auxiliary verb to do, and I loved is the same as I love did, or I did love. In English dialects, as, for instance, in the Dorset dialect, every preterite, if it expresses a lasting or repeated action, is formed by I did,216 and a distinction is thus established between “'e died eesterdae,” and “the vo'ke did die by scores;” though originally died is the same as die did.

And as ner-edide faded away to nerëde, so nerëde would, in today’s English, become nerd. The d of the past tense, which changes I adore into I loved, originally comes from the auxiliary verb to-do, so I loved it. is the same as I loved it. or I loved. In English dialects, like in the Dorset dialect, every past tense, if it indicates a lasting or repeated action, is formed by I did.,216 creating a distinction between "he died yesterday," and "the vo'ke died in large numbers;" even though originally passed away is the same as died.

It might be asked, however, very properly, how did itself, or the Anglo-Saxon dide, was formed, and how it received the meaning of a preterite. In dide the final de is not termination, but it is the root, and the first syllable di is a reduplication of the root, the fact being that all preterites of old, or, as they are called, strong verbs, were formed as in Greek and Sanskrit by means of reduplication, reduplication being one of the principal means by which roots were invested with a verbal character.217 The root do in Anglo-Saxon is the same [pg 234] as the root thē in tithēmi in Greek, and the Sanskrit root dhâ in dadâdmi. Anglo-Saxon dide would therefore correspond to Sanskrit dadhau, I placed.

It may be asked, however, quite reasonably, how did itself, or the Anglo-Saxon died, was formed, and how it came to mean a past tense. In died, the final de is not a suffix; it is the root, and the first syllable di is a repetition of the root. The reality is that all past tenses from old, or what are called strong verbs, were formed similarly to Greek and Sanskrit by means of repetition, which is one of the main ways roots were given a verbal form.217 The root get it done in Anglo-Saxon is the same as the root the in tithēmi in Greek, and the Sanskrit root dhâ in dadâdmi. Therefore, Anglo-Saxon died would correspond to Sanskrit dadhau, I placed.

Now, in this manner, the whole, or nearly the whole, grammatical framework of the Aryan or Indo-European languages has been traced back to original independent words, and even the slightest changes which at first sight seem so mysterious, such as foot into feet, or I find into I found, have been fully accounted for. This is what is called comparative grammar, or a scientific analysis of all the formal elements of a language preceded by a comparison of all the varieties which one and the same form has assumed in the numerous dialects of the Aryan family. The most important dialects for this purpose are Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Gothic; but in many cases Zend, or Celtic, or Slavonic dialects come in to throw an unexpected light on forms unintelligible in any of the four principal dialects. The result of such a work as Bopp's “Comparative Grammar” of the Aryan languages may be summed up in a few words. The whole framework of grammar—the elements of derivation, declension, and conjugation—had become settled before the separation of the Aryan family. Hence the broad outlines of grammar, in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, and the rest, are in reality the same; and the apparent differences can be explained by phonetic corruption, which is determined by the phonetic peculiarities of each nation. On the whole, the history of all the Aryan languages is nothing but a gradual process of decay. After the grammatical terminations of all these languages have been traced back to their most primitive form, it is possible, in many instances, to determine their original meaning. This, [pg 235] however, can be done by means of induction only; and the period during which, as in the Provençal dir vos ai, the component elements of the old Aryan grammar maintained a separate existence in the language and the mind of the Aryans had closed, before Sanskrit was Sanskrit or Greek Greek. That there was such a period we can doubt as little as we can doubt the real existence of fern forests previous to the formation of our coal fields. We can do even more. Suppose we had no remnants of Latin; suppose the very existence of Rome and of Latin were unknown to us; we might still prove, on the evidence of the six Romance dialects, that there must have been a time when these dialects formed the language of a small settlement; nay, by collecting the words which all these dialects share in common, we might, to a certain extent, reconstruct the original language, and draw a sketch of the state of civilization, as reflected by these common words. The same can be done if we compare Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, Celtic, and Slavonic. The words which have as nearly as possible the same form and meaning in all the languages must have existed before the people, who afterwards formed the prominent nationalities of the Aryan family, separated; and, if carefully interpreted, they, too, will serve as evidence as to the state of civilization attained by the Aryans before they left their common home. It can be proved, by the evidence of language, that before their separation the Aryans led the life of agricultural nomads,—a life such as Tacitus describes that of the ancient Germans. They knew the arts of ploughing, of making roads, of building ships, of weaving and sewing, of erecting houses; they had counted at least as far as one hundred. They had domesticated [pg 236] the most important animals, the cow, the horse, the sheep, the dog; they were acquainted with the most useful metals, and armed with iron hatchets, whether for peaceful or warlike purposes. They had recognized the bonds of blood and the bonds of marriage; they followed their leaders and kings, and the distinction between right and wrong was fixed by laws and customs. They were impressed with the idea of a divine Being, and they invoked it by various names. All this, as I said, can be proved by the evidence of language. For if you find that languages like Greek, Latin, Gothic, Celtic, or Slavonic, which, after their first separation, have had but little contact with Sanskrit, have the same word, for instance, for iron which exists in Sanskrit, this is proof absolute that iron was known previous to the Aryan separation. Now, iron is ais in Gothic, and ayas in Sanskrit, a word which, as it could not have been borrowed by the Indians from the Germans or by the Germans from the Indians, must have existed previous to their separation. We could not find the same name for house in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Slavonic, and Celtic,218 unless houses had been known before the separation of these dialects. In this manner a history of Aryan civilization has been written from the archives of language, stretching back to times far beyond the reach of any documentary history.219

Now, in this way, nearly the entire grammatical framework of the Aryan or Indo-European languages has been traced back to original independent words. Even the smallest changes that might initially seem mysterious, like foot becoming feet, or I discover changing to I discovered, have been thoroughly explained. This process is called comparative grammar, which is a scientific analysis of all the formal elements of a language, preceded by a comparison of all the variations that a single form has taken in the various dialects of the Aryan family. The most significant dialects for this purpose are Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and Gothic; however, in many instances, Zend, Celtic, or Slavic dialects provide unexpected insights into forms that are unclear in any of the four main dialects. The outcome of a study like Bopp's "Comparative Grammar" of the Aryan languages can be summarized in a few words: the entire structure of grammar—the components of derivation, declension, and conjugation—was established before the Aryan family separated. Therefore, the basic outlines of grammar in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, and others are essentially the same; the apparent differences can be explained by phonetic changes influenced by each nation’s unique phonetic characteristics. Overall, the history of all the Aryan languages is simply a gradual process of decline. Once the grammatical endings of these languages have been traced back to their most primitive forms, it is often possible to determine their original meanings. This, however, can only be done through induction; and the time when, as in the Provençal your turn, the elements of old Aryan grammar still existed separately in the language, and the mindset of the Aryans had closed, was before Sanskrit was Sanskrit or Greek was Greek. We can be as certain of this period existing as we are of the genuine existence of fern forests prior to the formation of our coal fields. We can go even further. If we had no remnants of Latin, and the very existence of Rome and Latin were unknown to us, we could still demonstrate, based on the evidence of the six Romance dialects, that there must have been a time when these dialects constituted the language of a small community; indeed, by gathering the words that these dialects have in common, we could to some extent reconstruct the original language and outline the state of civilization reflected by these shared words. The same can be applied when comparing Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Gothic, Celtic, and Slavic. The words that nearly have the same form and meaning across all the languages must have existed before the people who later formed the major nationalities of the Aryan family separated; and, if carefully interpreted, they will also serve as evidence of the level of civilization achieved by the Aryans before they left their common home. It can be demonstrated, through language evidence, that before their separation, the Aryans lived as agricultural nomads—a lifestyle similar to that described by Tacitus for the ancient Germans. They knew how to plow, build roads, construct ships, weave and sew, and erect houses; they could count at least up to one hundred. They had domesticated the most important animals: cows, horses, sheep, and dogs; they were familiar with the most useful metals and armed with iron hatchets, whether for peaceful or military purposes. They recognized the bonds of kinship and marriage; they followed their leaders and kings, and the distinction between right and wrong was established by laws and customs. They held a belief in a divine Being, invoking it by various names. All of this, as I mentioned, can be supported by language evidence. For if you find that languages like Greek, Latin, Gothic, Celtic, or Slavic, which, after their initial separation, had little interaction with Sanskrit, share the same word for iron that exists in Sanskrit, this definitively proves that iron was known prior to the Aryan separation. In Gothic, iron is ais, and in Sanskrit, it is ayas, indicating that this word must have existed before their separation as it could not have been borrowed by the Indians from the Germans or vice versa. We also couldn’t find the same term for house in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, Slavic, and Celtic, unless houses were known before the separation of these dialects. In this way, a history of Aryan civilization has been constructed from language archives, reaching back to times long before any documentary history.

The very name of Arya belongs to this history, and I shall devote the rest of this lecture to tracing the origin and gradual spreading of this old word. I had intended to include, in to-day's lecture, a short account [pg 237] of comparative mythology, a branch of our science which restores the original form and meaning of decayed words by the same means by which comparative grammar recovers the original form and meaning of terminations. But my time is too limited; and, as I have been asked repeatedly why I applied the name of Aryan to that family of language which we have just examined, I feel that I am bound to give an answer.

The name Arya is part of this history, and I will spend the rest of this lecture exploring the origin and gradual spread of this ancient word. I had planned to include a brief overview of comparative mythology in today's lecture, which is a field of study that reconstructs the original form and meaning of faded words, similar to how comparative grammar restores the original form and meaning of endings. However, I have too little time, and since I've been frequently asked why I used the name Aryan for the language family we've just discussed, I feel I must provide an answer.

Ârya is a Sanskrit word, and in the later Sanskrit it means noble, of a good family. It was, however, originally a national name, and we see traces of it as late as the Law-book of the Mânavas, where India is still called Ârya-âvarta, the abode of the Âryas.220 In the old Sanskrit, in the hymns of the Veda, ârya occurs frequently as a national name and as a name of honor, comprising the worshippers of the gods of the Brahmans, as opposed to their enemies, who are called in the Veda Dasyus. Thus one of the gods, Indra, who, in some respects, answers to the Greek Zeus, is invoked in the following words (Rigveda, i. 57, 8): “Know thou the Âryas, O Indra, and they who are Dasyus; punish the lawless, and deliver them unto thy servant! Be thou the mighty helper of the worshippers, and I will praise all these thy deeds at the festivals.”

Arya is a Sanskrit term, and in later Sanskrit, it means noble, from a good family. However, it originally referred to a national identity, and we can see evidence of this even in the Law-book of the Mânavas, where India is still called Ārya-āvarta, the land of the Aryas.220 In old Sanskrit, in the hymns of the Veda, ârya frequently appears as a national title and a title of respect, referring to the followers of the gods of the Brahmans, in contrast to their foes, who are called Dasyus in the Veda. One of the gods, Indra, who is somewhat analogous to the Greek Zeus, is called upon in these words (Rigveda, i. 57, 8): "Understand the Âryas, O Indra, and those who are Dasyus; punish the lawless, and deliver them to your servant! Be the great helper of the worshippers, and I will celebrate all your deeds at the festivals."

In the later dogmatic literature of the Vedic age, the name of Ârya is distinctly appropriated to the three first castes—the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, Vaiśyas—as opposed to the fourth, or the Śûdras. In the Śatapatha-Brâhmaņa it is laid down distinctly: “Âryas are only the Brahmans, the Kshatriyas, and Vaiśyas, for they are admitted to the sacrifices. They shall not speak with everybody, but only with the Brahman, the [pg 238] Kshatriya, and the Vaiśya. If they should fall into a conversation with a Śûdra, let them say to another man, ‘Tell this Śûdra so.’ This is the law.”

In the later doctrinal literature of the Vedic era, the term Ârya is clearly assigned to the first three castes—the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, and Vaiśyas—contrasted with the fourth caste, the Śûdras. In the Śatapatha-Brâhmaṇa, it is explicitly stated: "Âryas are just the Brahmans, Kshatriyas, and Vaiśyas, as they are permitted to take part in sacrifices. They should only interact with Brahmans, Kshatriyas, and Vaiśyas, and not with anyone else. If they happen to speak with a Śûdra, they should inform another person, ‘Tell this Śûdra so.’ This is the guideline."

In the Atharva-veda (iv. 20, 4; xix. 62, 1) expressions occur such as, “seeing all things, whether Śûdra or Ârya,” where Śûdra and Ârya are meant to express the whole of mankind.

In the Atharva-veda (iv. 20, 4; xix. 62, 1), phrases like "seeing everything, whether Śûdra or Ârya," are used, where Śûdra and Ârya represent all of humanity.

This word ârya with a long â is derived from arya with a short a, and this name arya is applied in the later Sanskrit to a Vaiśya, or a member of the third caste.221 What is called the third class must originally have constituted the large majority of the Brahmanic society, for all who were not soldiers or priests, were Vaiśyas. We may well understand, therefore, how a name, originally applied to the cultivators of the soil and householders, should in time have become a general name for all Aryans.222 Why the householders were called arya is a question which would carry us too far at present. I can only state that the etymological signification of Arya seems to be “one who ploughs or tills,” and that it is connected with the root of arare. The Aryans would seem to have chosen this name for themselves as opposed to the nomadic races, the Turanians, whose original name Tura implies the swiftness of the horseman.

This word ârya with a long â comes from arya with a short a, and this name arya was later used in Sanskrit to refer to a Vaiśya, or a member of the third caste.221 The third class likely made up the large majority of Brahmanic society, as anyone who wasn’t a soldier or priest was a Vaiśya. It’s easy to see how a name that originally referred to farmers and householders eventually became a general term for all Aryans.222 The reason householders were called arya would take us too far off track right now. I can only mention that the etymological meaning of Arya seems to be “a farmer,” and it’s connected to the root of rare. The Aryans appear to have chosen this name for themselves in contrast to the nomadic groups, the Turanians, whose original name Tura suggests the speed of horse riders.

In India, as we saw, the name of Ârya, as a national name, fell into oblivion in later times, and was preserved only in the term Âryâvarta, the abode of the Aryans. But it was more faithfully preserved [pg 239] by the Zoroastrians who migrated from India to the north-west, and whose religion has been preserved to us in the Zend-avesta, though in fragments only. Now Airya in Zend means venerable, and is at the same time the name of the people.223 In the first chapter of the Vendidád, where Ahuramazda explains to Zarathustra the order in which he created the earth, sixteen countries are mentioned, each, when created by Ahuramazda, being pure and perfect; but each being tainted in turn by Angro mainyus or Ahriman. Now the first of these countries is called Airyanem vaêjô, Arianum semen, the Aryan seed, and its position must have been as far east as the western slopes of the Belurtag and Mustag, near the sources of the Oxus and Yaxartes, the highest elevation of Central Asia.224 From this country, which is called their seed, the Aryans advanced towards the south and west, and in the Zend-avesta the whole extent of country occupied by the Aryans is likewise called Airyâ. A line drawn from India along the Paropamisus and Caucasus Indicus in the east, following in the north the direction between the Oxus and Yaxartes,225 then running along the Caspian Sea, so as to include Hyrcania and Râgha, then turning south-east on the borders of Nisaea, Aria (i.e. Haria), and the countries washed by the Etymandrus and Arachotus, would indicate the general horizon of the Zoroastrian world. It would be what is called in the fourth cardé of the Yasht of Mithra, “the whole space of Aria,” vîśpem airyô-śayanem (totum Ariæ situm).226 Opposed to the Aryan we find in [pg 240] the Zend-avesta the non-Aryan countries (anairyâo dainhâvô),227 and traces of this name are found in the Ἀναριάκαι, a people and town on the frontiers of Hyrcania.228 Greek geographers use the name of Ariana in a wider sense even than the Zend-avesta. All the country between the Indian Ocean in the south and the Indus in the east, the Hindu-kush and Paropamisus in the north, the Caspian gates, Karamania, and the mouth of the Persian gulf in the west, is included by Strabo (xv. 2) under the name of Ariana; and Bactria is thus called229 by him “the ornament of the whole of Ariana.” As the Zoroastrian religion spread westward, Persia, Elymais, and Media all claimed for themselves the Aryan title. Hellanicus, who wrote before Herodotus, knows of Aria as a name of Persia.230 Herodotus (vii. 62) attests that the Medians called themselves Arii; and even for Atropatene, the northernmost part of Media, the name of Ariania (not Aria) has been preserved by Stephanus Byzantinus. As to Elymais its name has been derived from Ailama, a supposed corruption of Airyama.231 The Persians, Medians, Bactrians, and Sogdians all spoke, as late as the [pg 241] time of Strabo,232 nearly the same language, and we may well understand, therefore, that they should have claimed for themselves one common name, in opposition to the hostile tribes of Turan.

In India, as we noticed, the name Ârya, which once served as a national identity, faded over time and was only kept alive in the term Âryâvarta, meaning the land of the Aryans. However, it was more consistently preserved by the Zoroastrians who migrated from India to the northwest; their religion has come down to us in the Zend-avesta, though only in fragments. In Zend, Airya means venerable and is also the name of the people. In the first chapter of the Vendidád, where Ahuramazda explains to Zarathustra the order of creation, sixteen countries are mentioned, each initially created pure and perfect by Ahuramazda, but each later tainted by Angro mainyus or Ahriman. The first of these countries is called Airyanem vaêjô, Arianum seed, the Aryan seed, and its location must have been as far east as the western slopes of the Belurtag and Mustag, near the sources of the Oxus and Yaxartes, the highest points of Central Asia. From this country, known as their seed, the Aryans moved south and west, and in the Zend-avesta, the entire area occupied by the Aryans is also referred to as Airy. A line drawn from India along the Paropamisus and Caucasus Indicus in the east, heading north between the Oxus and Yaxartes, then along the Caspian Sea to include Hyrcania and Râgha, before turning southeast along the borders of Nisaea, Aria (i.e., Haria), and the regions along the Etymandrus and Arachotus, would outline the general area of the Zoroastrian world. It’s what is called in the fourth kārā of the Yasht of Mithra, “the whole area of Aria,” vîśpem airyô-sleeping (the whole of Ariæ). Against the Aryan, we find in the Zend-avesta the non-Aryan countries (anairyâo dainhâvô), and traces of this name appear in the Ἀναριάκαι, a people and town on the borders of Hyrcania. Greek geographers used the term Ariana in an even broader sense than the Zend-avesta. All the territory between the Indian Ocean to the south and the Indus to the east, the Hindu-kush and Paropamisus to the north, and the Caspian gates, Karamania, and the Persian Gulf in the west, is classified by Strabo (xv. 2) under the name of Ariana, and he refers to Bactria as "the decoration of all of Ariana." As the Zoroastrian religion spread west, Persia, Elymais, and Media all adopted the Aryan title. Hellanicus, who wrote before Herodotus, knew Aria as a name for Persia. Herodotus (vii. 62) confirms that the Medians referred to themselves as Arii; even for Atropatene, the northernmost part of Media, the name Ariania (not Aria) has been preserved by Stephanus Byzantinus. As for Elymais, its name comes from Ailama, which is thought to be a corruption of Airyama. The Persians, Medians, Bactrians, and Sogdians all spoke nearly the same language as late as the time of Strabo, making it easy to see why they would claim one common name against the hostile tribes of Turan.

That Aryan was used as a title of honor in the Persian empire is clearly shown by the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius. He calls himself Ariya and Ariya-chitra, an Aryan and of Aryan descent; and Ahuramazda, or, as he is called by Darius, Auramazda, is rendered in the Turanian translation of the inscription of Behistun, “the god of the Aryans.” Many historical names of the Persians contain the same element. The great-grandfather of Darius is called in the inscriptions Ariyârâmna, the Greek Ariaramnēs (Herod, vii. 90). Ariobarzanēs (i.e. Euergetēs), Ariomanes (i.e. Eumenēs), Ariomardos, all show the same origin.233

That Aryan was used as a title of honor in the Persian empire is clearly shown by the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius. He refers to himself as Ariya and Ariya-chitra, an Aryan and of Aryan descent; and Ahuramazda, or, as he is called by Darius, Auramazda, is rendered in the Turanian translation of the inscription of Behistun, “the god of the Aryans.” Many historical names of the Persians contain the same element. The great-grandfather of Darius is called in the inscriptions Ariyârâmna, the Greek Ariaramnes (Herod, vii. 90). Ariobarzanēs (i.e. Euergetēs), Ariomanes (i.e. Eumenēs), Ariomardos, all show the same origin.233

About the same time as these inscriptions, Eudemos, a pupil of Aristotle, as quoted by Damascius, speaks of “the Magi and the whole Aryan race,”234 evidently using Aryan in the same sense in which the Zend-avesta spoke of “the whole country of Aria.”

About the same time as these inscriptions, Eudemos, a student of Aristotle, as quoted by Damascius, refers to "the Magi and the whole Aryan race,"234 clearly using Aryan in the same way the Zend-avesta referred to "the whole country of Aria."

And when, after years of foreign invasion and occupation, Persia rose again under the sceptre of the Sassanians to be a national kingdom, we find the new national kings the worshippers of Masdanes, calling [pg 242] themselves, in the inscriptions deciphered by De Sacy,235 “Kings of the Aryan and un-Aryan races;” in Pehlevi, Irân va Anirân; in Greek, Ἀριάνων καὶ Ἀναριάνων.

And when, after years of foreign invasion and occupation, Persia rose again under the rule of the Sassanians to become a national kingdom, we see the new national kings as worshippers of Masdanes, referring to themselves in the inscriptions deciphered by De Sacy, [pg 242] as “Kings of the Aryan and non-Aryan races;” in Pehlevi, Irān and Anīrān; in Greek, Ἀριάνων καὶ Ἀναριάνων.

The modern name of Irán for Persia still keeps up the memory of this ancient title.

The current name for Iran still holds onto the memory of its ancient title, Persia.

In the name of Armenia the same element of Arya has been supposed to exist.236 The name of Armenia, however, does not occur in Zend, and the name Armina, which is used for Armenia in the cuneiform inscriptions, is of doubtful etymology.237 In the language of Armenia, ari is used in the widest sense for Aryan or Iranian; it means also brave, and is applied more especially to the Medians.238 The word arya, therefore, though not contained in the name of Armenia, can be proved to have existed in the Armenian language as a national and honorable name.

In the name of Armenia, it's believed that the same element of Arya exists.236 However, the name Armenia doesn't appear in Zend, and the name Armina, used for Armenia in cuneiform inscriptions, has an uncertain origin.237 In the Armenian language, ari broadly refers to Aryan or Iranian; it also means brave and is particularly associated with the Medians.238 Therefore, the word arya, although not included in the name Armenia, can be shown to have been part of the Armenian language as a national and honorable term.

West of Armenia, on the borders of the Caspian Sea, we find the ancient name of Albania. The Armenians call the Albanians Aghovan, and as gh in Armenian stands for r or l, it has been conjectured by Boré, that in Aghovan also the name of Aria is contained. This seems doubtful. But in the valleys of the Caucasus we meet with an Aryan race speaking an [pg 243] Aryan language, the Os of Ossethi, and they call themselves Iron.239

West of Armenia, near the Caspian Sea, we find the ancient name of Albania. The Armenians refer to the Albanians as Aghovan, and since gh in Armenian represents either r or l, Boré has suggested that the name Aria may also be included in Aghovan. This seems questionable. However, in the valleys of the Caucasus, we encounter an Aryan race speaking an [pg 243] Aryan language, the Os of Ossetian, and they identify themselves as Iron.

Along the Caspian, and in the country washed by the Oxus and Yaxartes, Aryan and non-Aryan tribes were mingled together for centuries. Though the relation between Aryans and Turanians is hostile, and though there were continual wars between them, as we learn from the great Persian epic, the Shahnámeh, it does not follow that all the nomad races who infested the settlements of the Aryans, were of Tatar blood and speech. Turvaśa and his descendants, who represent the Turanians, are described in the later epic poems of India as cursed and deprived of their inheritance in India. But in the Vedas Turvaśa is represented as worshipping Aryan gods. Even in the Shahnámeh, Persian heroes go over to the Turanians and lead them against Iran, very much as Coriolanus led the Samnites against Rome. We may thus understand why so many Turanian or Scythian names, mentioned by Greek writers, should show evident traces of Aryan origin. Aspa was the Persian name for horse, and in the Scythian names Aspabota, Aspakara, and Asparatha,240 we can hardly fail to recognize the same element. Even the name of the Aspasian mountains, placed by Ptolemy in Scythia, indicates a similar origin. Nor is the word Arya unknown beyond the Oxus. There is a people called Ariacœ,241 another called Antariani.242 A [pg 244] king of the Scythians, at the time of Darius, was called Ariantes. A cotemporary of Xerxes is known by the name of Aripithes (i.e. Sanskrit, aryapati; Zend, airyapaiti); and Spargapithes seems to have some connection with the Sanskrit svargapati, lord of heaven.

Along the Caspian Sea and in the lands along the Oxus and Yaxartes rivers, Aryan and non-Aryan tribes coexisted for centuries. Although the relationship between the Aryans and Turanians was hostile, leading to continuous conflicts as depicted in the great Persian epic, the Shahnámeh, it doesn’t mean that all nomadic groups who settled in Aryan lands were of Tatar descent and language. Turvaśa and his descendants, who symbolize the Turanians, are portrayed in later Indian epic poems as cursed and deprived of their rightful place in India. However, in the Vedas, Turvaśa is shown worshipping Aryan gods. Even in the Shahnámeh, Persian heroes join forces with the Turanians and lead them against Iran, similar to how Coriolanus led the Samnites against Rome. This helps explain why many Turanian or Scythian names noted by Greek writers exhibit clear traces of Aryan origin. Aspa was the Persian term for horse, and in the Scythian names Aspabota, Aspakara, and Asparatha, we can easily recognize the same element. Even the Aspasian mountains, mentioned by Ptolemy in Scythia, suggest a similar origin. The word Arya is also found beyond the Oxus. There is a group known as Ariacoe, and another called Antarctica. A king of the Scythians during Darius's reign was named Ariantes. A contemporary of Xerxes is known as Aripithes (i.e. Sanskrit, aryapati; Zend, airyapaiti); and Spargapithes appears to have a link to the Sanskrit svargapati, meaning lord of heaven.

We have thus traced the name of Ârya from India to the west, from Âryâvarta to Ariana, Persia, Media, more doubtfully to Armenia and Albania, to the Iron in the Caucasus, and to some of the nomad tribes in Transoxiana. As we approach Europe the traces of this name grow fainter, yet they are not altogether lost.

We have therefore followed the name of Ârya from India to the west, from Âryâvarta to Ariana, Persia, Media, with less certainty to Armenia and Albania, to the Iron in the Caucasus, and to some nomadic tribes in Transoxiana. As we get closer to Europe, the traces of this name become less distinct, but they are not completely gone.

Two roads were open to the Aryans of Asia in their westward migrations. One through Chorasan243 to the north, through what is now called Russia, and thence to the shores of the Black Sea and Thrace. Another from Armenia, across the Caucasus or across the Black Sea to Northern Greece, and along the Danube to Germany. Now on the former road the Aryans left a trace of their migration in the old name of Thrace which was Aria;244 on the latter we meet in the eastern part of Germany, near the Vistula, with a German tribe called Arii. And as in Persia we found many proper names in which Arya formed an important ingredient, so we find again in German history names such as Ariovistus.245

Two paths were available to the Aryans of Asia during their westward migrations. One went through Chorasan243 to the north, through what we now call Russia, and then to the shores of the Black Sea and Thrace. The other route was from Armenia, over the Caucasus or across the Black Sea to Northern Greece, and down the Danube to Germany. On the first path, the Aryans left a mark of their migration in the old name for Thrace, which was Aria;244 on the second path, we encounter a German tribe in the eastern part of Germany, near the Vistula, called Arii. Just as in Persia, where many proper names included Arya, we also find names in German history like Ariovistus.245

Though we look in vain for any traces of this old national name among the Greeks and Romans, late researches have rendered it at least plausible that it has [pg 245] been preserved in the extreme west of the Aryan migrations, in the very name of Ireland. The common etymology of Erin is that it means “island of the west,” iar-innis, or land of the west, iar-in. But this is clearly wrong.246 The old name is Ériu in the nominative, more recently Éire. It is only in the oblique cases that the final n appears, as in regio, regionis. Erin therefore has been explained as a derivative of Er or Eri, said to be the ancient name of the Irish Celts as preserved in the Anglo-Saxon name of their country, Íraland.247 It is maintained by O'Reilly, though denied by others, that er is used in Irish in the sense of noble, like the Sanskrit ârya.248

Though we search for any traces of this ancient national name among the Greeks and Romans, recent research has at least made it likely that it has been preserved in the far west of the Aryan migrations, in the very name of Ireland. The common interpretation of Erin is that it means “island of the west,” iar-innis, or land of the west, iar-in. But this is clearly incorrect.246 The old name is Ériu in the nominative, more recently Ireland. It is only in the oblique cases that the final n appears, as in region, regions. Erin has therefore been explained as a derivative of Er or Eri, which is said to be the ancient name of the Irish Celts as preserved in the Anglo-Saxon name of their country, Ireland.247 It is maintained by O'Reilly, though denied by others, that er is used in Irish in the sense of noble, like the Sanskrit ârya.248

[pg 246]

Some of the evidence here collected in tracing the ancient name of the Aryan family, may seem doubtful, and I have pointed out myself some links of the chain uniting the earliest name of India with the modern name of Ireland, as weaker than the rest. But the principal links are safe. Names of countries, peoples, rivers, and mountains, have an extraordinary vitality, and they will remain while cities, kingdoms, and nations pass away. Rome has the same name to-day, and will probably have it forever, which was given to it by the earliest Latin and Sabine settlers, and wherever we find the name of Rome, whether in Wallachia, which by the inhabitants is called Rumania, or in the dialects of the Grisons, the Romansch, or in the title of the Romance languages, we know that some threads would lead us back to the Rome of Romulus and Remus, the stronghold of the earliest warriors of Latium. The ruined city near the mouth of the Upper Zab, now [pg 247] usually known by the name of Nimrud, is called Athur by the Arabic geographers, and in Athur we recognize the old name of Assyria, which Dio Cassius writes Atyria, remarking that the barbarians changed the Sigma into Tau. Assyria is called Athurâ, in the inscriptions of Darius.249 We hear of battles fought on the Sutledge, and we hardly think that the battle field of the Sikhs was nearly the same where Alexander fought the kings of the Penjáb. But the name of the Sutledge is the name of the same river as the Hesudrus of Alexander, the Śatadru of the Indians, and among the oldest hymns of the Veda, about 1500 b. c., we find a war-song referring to a battle fought on the two banks of the same river.

Some of the evidence collected here in tracing the ancient name of the Aryan family might seem questionable, and I have pointed out some connections between the earliest name of India and the modern name of Ireland that are weaker than others. However, the main connections are solid. The names of countries, peoples, rivers, and mountains have an incredible endurance, and they will persist even as cities, kingdoms, and nations fade away. Rome has the same name today, and it will likely keep that name forever, which was given to it by the earliest Latin and Sabine settlers. Whenever we come across the name of Rome—whether in Wallachia, where the inhabitants call it Rumania, or in the dialects of the Grisons, Romansch, or within the Romance languages—we realize that some links would take us back to the Rome of Romulus and Remus, the stronghold of the earliest warriors of Latium. The ruined city near the mouth of the Upper Zab, now usually known as Nimrud, is called Arthur by Arabic geographers, and in Athur, we recognize the old name of Assyria, which Dio Cassius writes as Atyria, noting that the barbarians changed the Sigma into Tau. Assyria is referred to as Athurâ in the inscriptions of Darius.249 We hear of battles fought on the Sutledge, and we hardly think that the battlefield of the Sikhs was nearly the same place where Alexander battled the kings of the Penjáb. But the name of the Sutledge is the same river as the Hesudrus of Alexander, the Śatadru of the Indians, and among the oldest hymns of the Veda, around 1500 b. c., we find a war song referring to a battle fought on the two banks of the same river.

No doubt there is danger in trusting to mere similarity of names. Grimm may be right that the Arii of Tacitus were originally Harii, and that their name is not connected with Ârya. But the evidence on either side being merely conjectural, this must remain an open question. In most cases, however, a strict observation of the phonetic laws peculiar to each language will remove all uncertainty. Grimm, in his “History of the German Language” (p. 228), imagined that Hariva, the name of Herat in the cuneiform inscriptions, is connected with Arii, the name which, as we saw, Herodotus gives to the Medes. This cannot be, for the initial aspiration in Hariva points to a word which in Sanskrit begins with s, and not with a vowel, like ârya. The following remarks will make this clearer.

There’s definitely a risk in relying solely on similar names. Grimm might be correct that the Arii mentioned by Tacitus were originally Harii, and that their name isn’t linked to Ârya. But since the evidence on both sides is just speculation, this will remain an unresolved issue. In most cases, though, closely following the phonetic rules specific to each language will eliminate any doubts. In his "History of the German Language" (p. 228), Grimm proposed that Hariva, the name for Herat in cuneiform inscriptions, is related to Arii, the name Herodotus used for the Medes. This can't be true, as the initial aspiration in Hariva suggests a word in Sanskrit that starts with s, not with a vowel like ârya. The following remarks will clarify this further.

Herat is called Herat and Heri,250 and the river on [pg 248] which it stands is called Heri-rud. This river Heri is called by Ptolemy Ἀρείας,251 by other writers Arius; and Aria is the name given to the country between Parthia (Parthuwa) in the west, Margiana (Marghush) in the north, Bactria (Bakhtrish) and Arachosia (Harauwatish) in the east, and Drangiana (Zaraka) in the south. This, however, though without the initial h, is not Ariana, as described by Strabo, but an independent country, forming part of it. It is supposed to be the same as the Haraiva (Hariva) of the cuneiform inscriptions, though this is doubtful. But it is mentioned in the Zend-avesta, under the name of Harôyu,252 as the sixth country created by Ormuzd. We can trace this name with the initial h even beyond the time of Zoroaster. The Zoroastrians were a colony from northern India. They had been together for a time with the people whose sacred songs have been preserved to us in the Veda. A schism took place, and the Zoroastrians migrated westward to Arachosia and Persia. In their migrations they did what the Greeks did when they founded new colonies, what the Americans did in founding new cities. They gave to the new cities and to the rivers along which they settled, the names of cities and rivers familiar to [pg 249] them, and reminding them of the localities which they had left. Now, as a Persian h points to a Sanskrit s, Harôyu would be in Sanskrit Saroyu. One of the sacred rivers of India, a river mentioned in the Veda, and famous in the epic poems as the river of Ayodhyâ, one of the earliest capitals of India, the modern Oude, has the name of Sarayu, the modern Sardju.253

Herat is known as Herat and Heri,250 and the river on [pg 248] which it sits is called Heri-rud. This river Happily is referred to by Ptolemy as Ἀρείας,251 and by other writers as Arius; and Aria is the name given to the region between Parthia (Parthuwa) in the west, Margiana (Marghush) in the north, Bactria (Bakhtrish) and Arachosia (Harauwatish) in the east, and Drangiana (Zaraka) in the south. However, this, although it lacks the initial h, is not Ariana as described by Strabo, but an independent region that is part of it. It is believed to be the same as the Haraiva (Hariva) found in the cuneiform inscriptions, though this is uncertain. But it is mentioned in the Zend-avesta as Harôyu,252 recognized as the sixth country created by Ormuzd. We can trace this name with the initial h all the way back to the time of Zoroaster. The Zoroastrians came from northern India. They had been together for a while with the people whose sacred songs have been preserved in the Veda. A division occurred, and the Zoroastrians migrated west to Arachosia and Persia. During their migrations, they did what the Greeks did when establishing new colonies and what the Americans did when founding new cities. They named the new cities and the rivers where they settled after familiar cities and rivers, reminding them of the places they had left behind. Now, since a Persian h corresponds to a Sanskrit s, Harôyu would translate to Sanskrit as Saroyu. One of the sacred rivers of India, mentioned in the Veda and famous in epic poems as the river of Ayodhyâ, one of India's earliest capitals, now known as Oude, is called Sarayu, which is the modern Sardju.253

As Comparative Philology has thus traced the ancient name of Ârya from India to Europe, as the original title assumed by the Aryans before they left their common home, it is but natural that it should have been chosen as the technical term for the family of languages which was formerly designated as Indo-Germanic, Indo-European, Caucasian, or Japhetic.

As Comparative Philology has tracked the ancient name of Ârya from India to Europe, which was the original title taken by the Aryans before they left their shared homeland, it makes sense that it has been selected as the technical term for the family of languages that was previously referred to as Indo-Germanic, Indo-European, Caucasian, or Japhetic.

[pg 250]

Lecture VII. The Basic Components of Language.

Our analysis of some of the nominal and verbal formations in the Aryan or Indo-European family of speech has taught us that, however mysterious and complicated these grammatical forms appear at first sight, they are in reality the result of a very simple process. It seems at first almost hopeless to ask such questions as why the addition of a mere d should change love present into love past, or why the termination ai in French, if added to aimer, should convey the idea of love to come. But, once placed under the microscope of comparative grammar, these and all other grammatical forms assume a very different and much more intelligible aspect. We saw how what we now call terminations were originally independent words. After coalescing with the words which they were intended to modify, they were gradually reduced to mere syllables and letters, unmeaning in themselves, yet manifesting their former power and independence by the modification which they continue to produce in the meaning of the words to which they are appended. The true nature of grammatical terminations was first pointed out by a philosopher, who, however wild some of his speculations may be, had certainly caught many a glimpse of the real life and growth of language, I [pg 251] mean Horne Tooke. This is what he writes of terminations:254

Our analysis of some of the noun and verb forms in the Aryan or Indo-European language family has shown us that, although these grammatical forms may seem mysterious and complicated at first glance, they actually stem from a very simple process. It initially feels almost pointless to ask why adding a simple d changes “love” from present to past, or why the ending AI in French, when added to love, indicates love to come. However, when we examine these forms through the lens of comparative grammar, they take on a much clearer and more understandable form. We discovered that what we now refer to as endings were originally independent words. After merging with the words they were supposed to modify, they gradually became mere syllables and letters without meaning on their own, yet still demonstrating their former significance and independence by the changes they create in the meanings of the words they attach to. The true nature of grammatical endings was first identified by a philosopher who, despite some of his more outlandish ideas, certainly had insights into the real-life development of language. I mean Horne Tooke. This is what he says about endings:254

“For though I think I have good reasons to believe that all terminations may likewise be traced to their respective origin; and that, however artificial they may now appear to us, they were not originally the effect of premeditated and deliberate art, but separate words by length of time corrupted and coalescing with the words of which they are now considered as the terminations. Yet this was less likely to be suspected by others. And if it had been suspected, they would have had much further to travel to their journey's end, and through a road much more embarrassed; as the corruption in those languages is of much longer standing than in ours, and more complex.”

"Even though I think there are good reasons to believe that all endings can be traced back to their origins, and that, no matter how artificial they seem to us now, they weren't originally created through intentional and careful art, but rather as separate words that over time became blended and corrupted with the original words that we now recognize as endings. However, others were less likely to notice this. If they had noticed, they would have had to travel much farther to reach their destination, along a much more complicated path, since the corruption in those languages has existed much longer than in ours and is more complex."

Horne Tooke, however, though he saw rightly what road should be followed to track the origin of grammatical terminations, was himself without the means to reach his journey's end. Most of his explanations are quite untenable, and it is curious to observe in reading his book, the Diversions of Purley, how a man of a clear, sharp, and powerful mind, and reasoning according to sound and correct principles, may yet, owing to his defective knowledge of facts, arrive at conclusions directly opposed to truth.

Horne Tooke, however, while he accurately identified the path to trace the origins of grammatical endings, lacked the means to complete his journey. Most of his explanations are quite low-quality, and it's interesting to notice while reading his book, the Diversions of Purley, how someone with a clear, sharp, and strong mind, using sound reasoning, can still, due to a lack of factual knowledge, reach conclusions that are completely contrary to the truth.

When we have once seen how grammatical terminations are to be traced back in the beginning to independent words, we have learnt at the same time that the component elements of language, which remain in our crucible at the end of a complete grammatical analysis, are of two kinds, namely, Roots predicative and Roots demonstrative.

When we understand how grammatical endings trace back to independent words, we also realize that the fundamental elements of language that remain after a thorough grammatical analysis are of two types: Predicate roots and Demonstrative origins.

[pg 252]

We call root or radical, whatever, in the words of any language or family of languages, cannot be reduced to a simpler or more original form. It may be well to illustrate this by a few examples. But, instead of taking a number of words in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin, and tracing them back to their common centre, it will be more instructive if we begin with a root which has been discovered, and follow it through its wanderings from language to language. I take the root AR, to which I alluded in our last Lecture as the source of the word Arya, and we shall thus, while examining its ramification, learn at the same time why that name was chosen by the agricultural nomads, the ancestors of the Aryan race.

We refer to a root or extreme as any word in any language or language family that cannot be broken down into a simpler or more original form. It might be helpful to illustrate this with some examples. Instead of looking at several words in Sanskrit, Greek, and Latin and connecting them to their common origin, it will be more enlightening to start with a root we’ve identified and trace its journey through different languages. I will focus on the root AR, which I mentioned in our last lecture as the origin of the word Arya, and in doing so, we will explore its variations while also understanding why this name was chosen by the agricultural nomads, who were the ancestors of the Aryan race.

This root AR255 means to plough, to open the soil. From it we have the Latin ar-are, the Greek ar-oun, the Irish ar, the Lithuanian ar-ti, the Russian ora-ti, the Gothic ar-jan, the Anglo-Saxon er-jan, the modern English to ear. Shakespeare says (Richard II. iii. 2), “to ear the land that has some hope to grow.”

This root AR255 means to plow, to break up the soil. From it, we have the Latin ar-are, the Greek ar-oun, the Irish ar, the Lithuanian ar-ti, the Russian ora-ti, the Gothic ar-jan, the Anglo-Saxon er-jan, and modern English to listen. Shakespeare says (Richard II. iii. 2), "to work the land that has some potential for growth."

From this we have the name of the plough, or the instrument of earing: in Latin, ara-trum; in Greek, aro-tron; in Bohemian, oradto; in Lithuanian, arklas; in Cornish, aradar; in Welsh, arad;256 in Old Norse, ardhr. In Old Norse, however, ardhr, meaning originally the plough, came to mean earnings or wealth; the plough being, in early times, the most essential possession of the peasant. In the same manner the Latin [pg 253] name for money, pecunia, was derived from pecus, cattle; the word fee, which is now restricted to the payment made to a doctor or lawyer, was in Old English feh, and in Anglo-Saxon feoh, meaning cattle and wealth; for feoh, and Gothic faihu, are really the same word as the Latin pecus, the modern German vieh.

From this, we get the name for the plough, or the tool for tilling: in Latin, ara-trum; in Greek, aro-tron; in Bohemian, oradto; in Lithuanian, arklas; in Cornish, aradar; in Welsh, arad; in Old Norse, ardhr. In Old Norse, however, ardhr, which originally meant the plough, later referred to earnings or wealth; since the plough was, in ancient times, the most essential possession of a peasant. Likewise, the Latin term for money, money, comes from livestock, meaning cattle; the word cost, which nowadays refers specifically to payments made to a doctor or lawyer, was meh in Old English and feoh in Anglo-Saxon, meaning cattle and wealth; because feoh and the Gothic faihu are actually the same word as the Latin livestock, and the modern German cattle.

The act of ploughing is called aratio in Latin; arosis in Greek: and I believe that arôma, in the sense of perfume, had the same origin; for what is sweeter or more aromatic than the smell of a ploughed field? In Genesis, xxviii. 27, Jacob says “the smell of my son is as the smell of a field which the Lord has blessed.”

The action of plowing is referred to as aratio in Latin; arosis in Greek; and I think aroma, in the context of perfume, shares the same origin. Because what is sweeter or more fragrant than the scent of a freshly plowed field? In Genesis, xxviii. 27, Jacob states "The scent of my son is like the fragrance of a field that the Lord has blessed."

A more primitive formation of the root ar seems to be the Greek era, earth, the Sanskrit irâ, the Old High-German ëro, the Gaelic ire, irionn. It meant originally the ploughed land, afterwards earth in general. Even the word earth, the Gothic airtha,257 the Anglo-Saxon eorthe, must have been taken originally in the sense of ploughed or cultivated land. The derivative ar-mentum, formed like ju-mentum, would naturally have been applied to any animal fit for ploughing and other labor in the field, whether ox or horse.

A more basic form of the root ar appears to be the Greek era, meaning earth, the Sanskrit irâ, the Old High German ero, the Gaelic anger, and iron. Its original meaning was ploughed land, later expanding to earth in general. Even the word Earth, the Gothic earth, and the Anglo-Saxon earth, must have originally been understood as ploughed or cultivated land. The derivative ar-mentum, formed like ju-mentum, would naturally have been used for any animal suitable for ploughing and other fieldwork, whether ox or horse.

As agriculture was the principal labor in that early state of society when we must suppose most of our Aryan words to have been formed and applied to their definite meanings, we may well understand how a word which originally meant this special kind of labor, was [pg 254] afterwards used to signify labor in general. The general tendency in the growth of words and their meanings is from the special to the more general: thus gubernare, which originally meant to steer a ship, took the general sense of governing. To equip, which originally was to furnish a ship (French équiper and esquif, from schifo, ship), came to mean furnishing in general. Now in modern German, arbeit means simply labor; arbeitsam means industrious. In Gothic, too, arbaiþs is only used to express labor and trouble in general. But in Old Norse, erfidhi means chiefly ploughing, and afterwards labor in general; and the same word in Anglo-Saxon, earfodh or earfedhe, is labor. Of course we might equally suppose that, as laborer, from meaning one who labors in general, came to take the special sense of an agricultural laborer, so arbeit, from meaning work in general, came to be applied, in Old Norse, to the work of ploughing. But as the root of erfidhi seems to be ar, our first explanation is the more plausible. Besides, the simple ar in Old Norse means ploughing and labor, and the Old High-German art has likewise the sense of ploughing.258

As agriculture was the main work in that early stage of society when we assume most of our Aryan words were created and given specific meanings, it makes sense that a word that originally referred to this particular kind of work later came to mean labor in general. The general trend in the evolution of words and their meanings goes from the specific to the broader: for example, govern, which originally meant to steer a ship, eventually came to mean governing. To prepare, which originally meant to furnish a ship (French equip and small boat, from gross, ship), evolved to mean furnishing in general. Now, in modern German, work simply means work; diligent means industrious. In Gothic, arbaiþs is used only to describe labor and trouble in general. However, in Old Norse, erfidhi primarily means plowing, and then labor in general; and the same word in Anglo-Saxon, earfodh or earfedhe, means labor. We could also assume that just as laborer, meaning someone who works, came to refer specifically to an agricultural worker, work, which meant work in general, could have been applied, in Old Norse, to the work of ploughing. But since the root of erfidhi seems to be ar, our first explanation seems more likely. Moreover, the simple ar in Old Norse means ploughing and labor, and the Old High-German art also has the meaning of ploughing.

Ἄρουρα and arvum, a field, would certainly have to be referred to the root ar, to plough. And as ploughing was not only one of the earliest kinds of labor, but also one of the most primitive arts, I have no doubt that the Latin ars, artis, and our own word art, meant originally the art of all arts, first taught to mortals by [pg 255] the goddess of all wisdom, the art of cultivating the land. In Old High-German arunti, in Anglo-Saxon ærend, mean simply work; but they too must originally have meant the special work of agriculture; and in the English errand, and errand-boy, the same word is still in existence.

Ἄρουρα and arable, a field, would definitely trace back to the root ar, which means to plough. Since ploughing was not only one of the earliest types of labor but also one of the most basic skills, I’m sure that the Latin terms ars, artist, and our own word art originally referred to the foundational art of all arts, first taught to humans by [pg 255] the goddess of all wisdom, which is the art of farming. In Old High German, arunti, and in Anglo-Saxon task, simply mean work; but they too must have originally referred to the specific work of agriculture. In English, the words task and messenger still carry the essence of that original term.

But ar did not only mean to plough, or to cut open the land; it was transferred at a very early time to the ploughing of the sea, or rowing. Thus Shakspeare says:—

But ar didn't just mean to plow or to break open the land; it was adapted early on to refer to driving through the sea or rowing. So, as Shakespeare says:—

Make the sea work for them; which they hear and hurt
With keels.

In a similar manner, we find that Sanskrit derives from ar the substantive aritra, not in the sense of a plough, but in the sense of a rudder. In Anglo-Saxon we find the simple form âr, the English oar, as it were the plough-share of the water. The Greek also had used the root ar in the sense of rowing; for ἐρέτης259 in Greek is a rower, and their word τρι-ήρ-ης, meant originally a ship with three oars, or with three rows of oars,260 a trireme.

In a similar way, we see that Sanskrit comes from ar the noun aritra, not as a reference to a plow, but as a rudder. In Anglo-Saxon, we have the simple form âr and the English word paddle, which can be viewed as the share of the water. The Greeks also used the root ar in the context of rowing; for ἐρέτης259 in Greek means a rower, and their word τρι-ήρ-ης originally referred to a ship with three oars or three rows of oars, 260 a trireme.

This comparison of ploughing and rowing is of frequent occurrence in ancient languages. The English word plough, the Slavonic ploug, has been identified with the Sanskrit plava,261 a ship, and with the Greek ploion, ship. As the Aryans spoke of a ship ploughing the sea, they also spoke of a plough sailing across the field; and thus it was that the same names were [pg 256] applied to both.262 In English dialects, plough or plow is still used in the general sense of waggon or conveyance.263

This comparison of plowing and rowing is commonly found in ancient languages. The English word plow, the Slavonic plow, is linked to the Sanskrit blue, meaning a ship, and to the Greek ploion, which also means ship. As the Aryans described a ship plowing through the sea, they also referred to a plough moving across the field; this is how the same names came to be used for both. In English dialects, plow or plow is still used in a broader sense to mean wagon or vehicle.

We might follow the offshoots of this root ar still further, but the number of words which we have examined in various languages will suffice to show what is meant by a predicative root. In all these words ar is the radical element, all the rest is merely formative. The root ar is called a predicative root, because in whatever composition it enters, it predicates one and the same conception, whether of the plough, or the rudder, or the ox, or the field. Even in such a word as artistic, the predicative power of the root ar may still be perceived, though, of course, as it were by means of a powerful telescope only. The Brahmans who called themselves ârya in India, were no more aware of the real origin of this name and its connection with agricultural labor, than the artist who now speaks of his art as a divine inspiration suspects that the word which he uses was originally applicable only to so primitive an art as that of ploughing.

We could trace the branches of this root ar even further, but the number of words we've looked at in different languages is enough to show what a predicative root is. In all these words, ar is the core element; everything else is just additional. The root ar is termed a predicative root because, no matter what it combines with, it conveys the same idea, whether it relates to a plough, a rudder, an ox, or a field. Even in a word like creative, the original meaning of the root ar can still be seen, although it may seem like it’s only visible through a strong telescope. The Brahmans who called themselves ârya in India were just as unaware of the true origin of the name and its link to farming as the modern artist, who refers to his artwork as divine inspiration, is aware that the word he uses originally applied only to a very basic skill like ploughing.

We shall now examine another family of words, in order to see by what process the radical elements of words were first discovered.

We will now look at another group of words to understand how the basic elements of words were first identified.

Let us take the word respectable. It is a word of Latin not of Saxon, origin, as we see by the termination [pg 257] able. In respectabilis we easily distinguish the verb respectare and the termination bilis. We then separate the prefix re, which leaves spectare, and we trace spectare as a participial formation back to the Latin verb spicere or specere, meaning to see, to look. In specere, again, we distinguish between the changeable termination ere and the unchangeable remnant spec, which we call the root. This root we expect to find in Sanskrit and the other Aryan languages; and so we do. In Sanskrit the more usual form is paś, to see, without the s; but spaś also is found in spaśa, a spy, in spashṭa (in vi-spashṭa), clear, manifest, and in the Vedic spaś, a guardian. In the Teutonic family we find spëhôn in Old High-German meaning to look, to spy, to contemplate; and spëha, the English spy.264 In Greek, the root spek has been changed into skep, which exists in skeptomai, I look, I examine; from whence skeptikos, an examiner or inquirer, in theological language, a sceptic; and episkopos, an overseer, a bishop. Let us now examine the various ramifications of this root. Beginning with respectable, we found that it originally meant a person who deserves respect, respect meaning looking back. We pass by common objects or persons without noticing them, whereas we turn back to look again at those which deserve our admiration, our regard, our respect. This was the original meaning of respect and respectable, nor need we be surprised at this if we consider that noble, nobilis in Latin, conveyed originally no more than the idea of a person that deserves to be known; for nobilis stands for gnobilis, just as nomen stands for gnomen, or natus for gnatus.

Let’s look at the word respectable. It comes from Latin, not Saxon, as we can see from the ending capable. In respectable, we can easily identify the verb respect and the ending speed. We then separate the prefix re, which leaves us with watch, tracing watch back to the Latin verb spicy or specere, meaning to see or to look. In specere, we again differentiate between the variable ending ere and the constant base spec, which we refer to as the root. We expect to find this root in Sanskrit and other Aryan languages, and we do. In Sanskrit, the more common form is paś, to see, without the s; however, None is also present in spaśa, meaning a spy, in spasht (in vi-spashṭa), meaning clear or manifest, and in Vedic spaś, which means a guardian. In the Germanic family, we find spéhon in Old High German, meaning to look, spy, or contemplate; and spëha, which translates to the English word spy. In Greek, the root speak has been transformed into skeptic, which appears in skeptical, meaning I look or I examine; leading to skeptic, an examiner or inquirer, and in theological terms, a skeptic; and overseer, meaning an overseer or bishop. Now let’s explore the different branches of this root. Starting with respectable, we find that it originally meant a person who deserves respect, where respect means reflecting back. We often pass by ordinary objects or people without noticing them, while we turn back to focus on those worthy of our admiration, regard, and respect. This was the original meaning of respect and decent, and it isn’t surprising if we consider that noble, noble in Latin, originally suggested nothing more than a person who deserves to be known; since noble represents gnobilis, just like nomen stands for gnome, or born for gnatus.

[pg 258]

“With respect to” has now become almost a mere preposition. For if we say, “With respect to this point I have no more to say,” this is the same as “I have no more to say on this point.”

“In relation to” has now become almost just a preposition. If we say, "I have nothing more to add on this point," this is the same as "I have nothing more to add on this topic."

Again, as in looking back we single out a person, the adjective respective, and the adverb respectively, are used almost in the same sense as special, or singly.

Again, when we look back and highlight a person, the adjective respective and the adverb respectively are used almost in the same way as special or individually.

The English respite is the Norman modification of respectus, the French répit. Répit meant originally looking back, reviewing the whole evidence. A criminal received so many days ad respectum, to re-examine the case. Afterwards it was said that the prisoner had received a respit, that is to say, had obtained a re-examination; and at last a verb was formed, and it was said that a person had been respited.

The English break is the Norman adaptation of respect, the French break. Break originally meant looking back, reviewing all the evidence. A criminal would get a certain number of days ad respectum to reassess the case. Later, it was said that the prisoner had received a respit, meaning they had gotten a re-examination; and eventually, a verb was created, and people said that someone had been respited.

As specere, to see, with the preposition re, came to mean respect, so with the preposition de, down, it forms the Latin despicere, meaning to look down, the English despise. The French dépit (Old French despit) means no longer contempt, though it is the Latin despectus, but rather anger, vexation. Se dépiter is to be vexed, to fret. En dépit de lui is originally “angry with him,” then “in spite of him;” and the English spite, in spite of, spiteful, are mere abbreviations of despite, in despite of, despiteful, and have nothing whatever to do with the spitting of cats.

As specere, to see, with the preposition re, came to mean respect, so with the preposition de, down, it forms the Latin despise, meaning to look down, the English hate. The French disappointment (Old French despite) no longer means contempt, although it derives from the Latin disdain; instead, it refers to anger and frustration. To sulk means to be vexed or to fret. Despite him originally meant “mad at him,” then “despite him;” and the English words malice, despite, vindictive, are just short forms of despite, despite, spiteful, and have nothing to do with the spitting of cats.

As de means down from above, so sub means up from below, and this added to specere, to look, gives us suspicere, suspicari, to look up, in the sense of to suspect.265 From it suspicion, suspicious; and likewise the French [pg 259] soupçon, even in such phrases as “there is a soupçon of chicory in this coffee,” meaning just a touch, just the smallest atom of chicory.

As de means down from above, sub means up from below, and when you add that to specere, which means to look, it gives us suspicion, suspect, meaning to look up, in the sense of to suspect.265 From it we get doubt, skeptical; and also the French hint, even in phrases like "There's a hint of chicory in this coffee." meaning just a hint, just the smallest amount of chicory.

As circum means round about, so circumspect means, of course, cautious, careful.

As circum means around, cautious means, of course, cautious and careful.

With in, meaning into, specere forms inspicere, to inspect; hence inspector, inspection.

With in, meaning into, speculate forms inspect, to inspect; hence inspector, check-up.

With ad, towards, specere becomes adspicere, to look at a thing. Hence adspectus, the aspect, the look or appearance of things.

With ad, meaning towards, specere becomes adspicere, which means to look at something. This leads to adspectus, referring to the aspect, the look, or appearance of things.

So with pro, forward, specere became prospicere; and gave rise to such words as prospectus, as it were a look out, prospective, &c. With con, with, spicere forms conspicere, to see together, conspectus, conspicuous. We saw before in respectable, that a new word spectare is formed from the participle of spicere. This, with the preposition ex, out, gives us the Latin expectare, the English to expect, to look out; with its derivatives.

So with pro, forward, specere became prospicere; and gave rise to words like brochure, essentially a look out, potential, etc. With con, with, spice forms conspicuous, to see together, overview, obvious. We saw earlier in decent that a new word watch is formed from the participle of to see. This, with the preposition ex, out, gives us the Latin await, the English to look forward to, to look out; along with its derivatives.

Auspicious is another word which contains our root as the second of its component elements. The Latin auspicium stands for avispicium, and meant the looking out for certain birds which were considered to be of good or bad omen to the success of any public or private act. Hence auspicious, in the sense of lucky. Haru-spex was the name given to a person who foretold the future from the inspection of the entrails of animals.

Favorable is another word that includes our root as the second part. The Latin omen comes from avispicium, which referred to observing certain birds believed to signify good or bad outcomes for any public or private action. Therefore, promising means lucky. Haru specs was the term used for someone who predicted the future by examining the entrails of animals.

Again, from specere, speculum was formed, in the sense of looking-glass, or any other means of looking at oneself; and from it speculari, the English to speculate, speculative, &c.

Again, from specere, speculum was created, meaning looking glass, or any other way of seeing oneself; and from it specularity, the English to guess, speculative , etc.

But there are many more offshoots of this one root. Thus, the Latin speculum, looking-glass, became specchio [pg 260] in Italian; and the same word, though in a roundabout way, came into French as the adjective espiègle, waggish. The origin of this French word is curious. There exists in German a famous cycle of stories, mostly tricks, played by a half-historical, half-mythical character of the name of Eulenspiegel, or Owl-glass. These stories were translated into French, and the hero was known at first by the name of Ulespiègle, which name, contracted afterwards into Espiègle, became a general name for every wag.

But there are many more branches of this one root. So, the Latin speculum, meaning looking-glass, became mirror in Italian; and the same word, though in a roundabout way, made its way into French as the adjective mischievous, meaning waggish. The origin of this French word is interesting. There is a famous collection of stories in German, mostly tricks played by a half-historical, half-mythical character named Eulenspiegel, or Owl glass. These stories were translated into French, and the hero was initially known by the name Ulespiègle, which was later shortened to Playful, becoming a general term for every wag.

As the French borrowed not only from Latin, but likewise from the Teutonic languages, we meet there side by side with the derivatives of the Latin specere, the old High-German, spëhôn, slightly disguised as épier, to spy, the Italian spiare. The German word for a spy was spëha, and this appears in old French as espie, in modern French as espion.

As the French borrowed not only from Latin but also from the Teutonic languages, we find side by side the derivatives of the Latin specere and the old High German spēhon, which has evolved into spy meaning to spy, and the Italian spy. The German word for a spy was spæha, which appears in old French as spy and in modern French as espionage.

One of the most prolific branches of the same root is the Latin species. Whether we take species in the sense of a perennial succession of similar individuals in continual generations (Jussieu), or look upon it as existing only as a category of thought (Agassiz), species was intended originally as the literal translation of the Greek eidos as opposed to genos, or genus. The Greeks classified things originally according to kind and form, and though these terms were afterwards technically defined by Aristotle, their etymological meaning is in reality the most appropriate. Things may be classified either because they are of the same genus or kind, that is to say, because they had the same origin; this gives us a genealogical classification: or they can be classified because they have the same appearance, eidos, or form, without claiming for them a common origin; and this gives us a morphological [pg 261] classification. It was, however, in the Aristotelian, and not in its etymological sense, that the Greek eidos was rendered in Latin by species, meaning the subdivision of a genus, the class of a family. Hence the French espèce, a kind; the English special, in the sense of particular as opposed to general. There is little of the root spaś, to see, left in a special train, or a special messenger; yet the connection, though not apparent, can be restored with perfect certainty. We frequently hear the expression to specify. A man specifies his grievances. What does it mean? The mediæval Latin specificus is a literal translation of the Greek eidopoios. This means what makes or constitutes an eidos or species. Now, in classification, what constitutes a species is that particular quality which, superadded to other qualities, shared in common by all the members of a genus, distinguishes one class from all other classes. Thus the specific character which distinguishes man from all other animals, is reason or language. Specific, therefore, assumed the sense of distinguishing or distinct, and the verb to specify conveyed the meaning of enumerating distinctly, or one by one. I finish with the French épicier, a respectable grocer, but originally a man who sold drugs. The different kinds of drugs which the apothecary had to sell, were spoken of, with a certain learned air, as species, not as drugs in general, but as peculiar drugs and special medicines. Hence the chymist or apothecary is still called Speziale in Italian, his shop spezieria.266 In French species, which regularly became espèce, assumed a new form to express drugs, namely épices; the English spices, the German spezereien. [pg 262] Hence the famous pain d'épices, gingerbread nuts, and épicier, a grocer. If you try for a moment to trace spicy, or a well-spiced article, back to the simple root specere, to look, you will understand that marvellous power of language which out of a few simple elements has created a variety of names hardly surpassed by the unbounded variety of nature herself.267

One of the most productive branches of the same root is the Latin species. Whether we consider species as a continuous succession of similar individuals across generations (Jussieu), or view it only as a conceptual category (Agassiz), species was originally meant as the direct translation of the Greek eidos as opposed to genus or genus. The Greeks initially classified things based on kind and form, and while these terms were later technically defined by Aristotle, their original meanings are still the most fitting. Things can be classified either because they belong to the same genus or nice, meaning they share a common origin; this creates a genealogical classification. Alternatively, they can be classified based on similar appearance, form, or form, without implying a shared origin, leading to a morphological classification. However, it was in the Aristotelian sense, not in its original meaning, that the Greek essence was translated in Latin as species, referring to the subdivision of a genus, the class of a family. Hence the French species, a type; the English unique, meaning particular rather than general. There is little of the root spaś, to see, in a special train, or a special messenger; yet the connection, although not obvious, can surely be retraced. We often hear the phrase to clarify. A person specifies their grievances. What does this mean? The medieval Latin specific is a direct translation of the Greek eidopoios. This refers to what makes or constitutes an eidos or species. In classification, what defines a species is that specific quality which, when added to other qualities shared by all members of a genus, sets one class apart from all others. Therefore, the specific characteristic that distinguishes humans from all other animals is reason or language. Thus, specific evolved to mean distinguishing or unique, and the verb to clarify implies listing things clearly, one by one. I conclude with the French grocery store, a respectable grocer, but originally a person who sold drugs. The various types of drugs that the apothecary sold were referred to, with a certain scholarly tone, as species, not as drugs in general, but as specific and special medicines. As a result, the chemist or apothecary is still called Specialty in Italian, and their shop herb shop. In French, species, which usually became species, took on a new form to refer to drugs, namely spices; the English seasonings, the German seasonings. Hence the famous spice bread, gingerbread, and grocery store, a grocer. If you take a moment to trace spicy, or well-seasoned item back to the root specere, to look, you'll understand the incredible power of language that, from a few simple elements, has created a wide range of names that mirror the vast diversity of nature itself.

I say “out of a few simple elements,” for the number of what we call full predicative roots, such as ar, to plough, or spaś, to look, is indeed small.

I say "from a few simple elements," because the number of what we refer to as complete predicative roots, like ar, meaning to plough, or gone, meaning to look, is actually quite small.

A root is necessarily monosyllabic. Roots consisting of more than one syllable can always be proved to be derivative roots, and even among monosyllabic roots it is necessary to distinguish between primitive, secondary, and tertiary roots.

A root is always one syllable. Roots that have more than one syllable can be shown to be derivative roots, and even among one-syllable roots, it's important to differentiate between primitive, secondary, and tertiary roots.

A. Primitive roots are those which consist—

A. Primitive roots are those that consist—

(1) of one vowel; for instance, i, to go;

(1) of one vowel; for instance,i, to leave;

(2) of one vowel and one consonant; for instance, ad, to eat;

(2) of one vowel and one consonant; for instance,ad, meaning to eat;

(3) of one consonant and one vowel; for instance, , to give.

(3) of one consonant and one vowel; for instance,, to provide.

B. Secondary roots are those which consist—

B. Secondary roots are those that consist—

(1) of one consonant, vowel, and consonant; for instance, tud, to strike.

(1) of one consonant, one vowel, and one consonant; for example,tud, to hit.

In these roots either the first or the last consonant is modificatory.

In these roots, either the first or the last consonant is changed.

C. Tertiary roots are those which consist—

C. Tertiary roots are those that consist—

(1) of consonant, consonant, and vowel; for instance, plu, to flow;

(1) of consonant, consonant, and vowel; for example,plu, meaning to stream;

(2) of vowel, consonant, and consonant; for instance, ard, to hurt;

(2) of vowel, consonant, and consonant; for example,ard, to harm;

[pg 263]

(3) of consonant, consonant, vowel, and consonant; for instance, spaś, to see;

(3) of consonant, consonant, vowel, and consonant; for instance,spaśto see;

(4) of consonant, consonant, vowel, consonant, and consonant; for instance, spand, to tremble.

(4) of consonant, consonant, vowel, consonant, and consonant; for instance,spand, meaning to shake.

The primary roots are the most important in the early history of language; but their predicative power being generally of too indefinite a character to answer the purposes of advancing thought, they were soon encroached upon and almost supplanted by secondary and tertiary radicals.

The main roots are the most significant in the early history of language; however, their predictive ability is often too vague to effectively convey advanced ideas, so they were quickly overshadowed and nearly replaced by secondary and tertiary roots.

In the secondary roots we can frequently observe that one of the consonants, in the Aryan languages, generally the final, is liable to modification. The root retains its general meaning, which is slightly modified and determined by the changes of the final consonants. Thus, besides tud (tudati), we have in Sanskrit tup (topati, tupati, and tumpati), meaning to strike; Greek, typ-tō. We meet likewise with tubh (tubhnâti, tubhyati, tobhate), to strike; and, according to Sanskrit grammarians, with tuph (tophati, tuphati, tumphati). Then there is a root tuj (tunjati, tojati), to strike, to excite; another root, tur (tutorti), to which the same meaning is ascribed; another, tûr (tûryate), to hurt. Then there is the further derivative turv (tûrvati), to strike, to conquer; there is tuh (tohati), to pain, to vex; and there is tuś (tośate), to which Sanskrit grammarians attribute the sense of striking.

In the secondary roots, we often see that one of the consonants in the Aryan languages, usually the last one, tends to change. The root keeps its main meaning, which is slightly altered based on the modifications of the final consonants. So, alongside tud (tudati), we have in Sanskrit tup (topati, tupati, and tumpati), meaning to strike; in Greek, typ-to. We also encounter tub (tubhnâti, tubhyati, tobacco hate), meaning to strike; and, according to Sanskrit grammarians, tup (tophat, tuphati, tump it). Then we have the root tuj (tunjati, tojati), which means to strike or to excite; another root, tur (tutoring), is ascribed the same meaning; another, turf (tourney), means to hurt. Then there’s the derived form turv (tûrvati), meaning to strike or conquer; there’s tuh (tohati), meaning to cause pain or vex; and there’s tush (to state), which Sanskrit grammarians say means to strike.

Although we may call all these verbal bases roots, they stand to the first class in about the same relation as the triliteral Semitic roots to the more primitive biliteral.268

Although we might refer to all these verbal bases as roots, they relate to the first class in much the same way that triliteral Semitic roots relate to the more basic biliteral. 268

[pg 264]

In the third class we shall find that one of the two consonants is always a semivowel, nasal, or sibilant, these being more variable than the other consonants; and we can almost always point to one consonant as of later origin, and added to a biconsonantal root in order to render its meaning more special. Thus we have, besides spaś, the root paś, and even this root has been traced back by Pott to a more primitive . Thus vand, again, is a mere strengthening of the root vad, like mand of mad, like yu-na-j and yu-n-j of yuj. The root yuj, to join, and yudh, to fight, both point back to a root yu, to mingle, and this simple root has been preserved in Sanskrit. We may well understand that a root, having the general meaning of mingling or being together, should be employed to express both the friendly joining of hands and the engaging in hostile combat; but we may equally understand that language, in its progress to clearness and definiteness, should have desired a distinction between these two meanings, and should gladly have availed herself of the two derivatives, yuj and yudh, to mark this distinction.

In the third class, we’ll see that one of the two consonants is always a semivowel, nasal, or sibilant, as these are more flexible than the other consonants. We can almost always identify one consonant as being of later origin, added to a two-consonant root to make its meaning more specific. So, in addition to spaś, we have the root paś, and even this root has been traced back by Pott to a more primitive . Likewise, vand is simply a strengthening of the root vad, similar to mand from angry, as well as yu-na-j and yu-n-j from yuj. The root yuj, meaning to join, and war, meaning to fight, both trace back to a root you, which means to mingle, and this simple root has been preserved in Sanskrit. It’s easy to see that a root with the general meaning of mingling or being together would be used to express both the friendly joining of hands and engaging in hostile combat. However, it’s also clear that as language evolves towards clarity and specificity, there would be a desire to distinguish between these two meanings, happily using the two derivatives, yuj and battle, to make this distinction.

Sanskrit grammarians have reduced the whole growth of their language to 1706 roots,269 that is to say, they have admitted so many radicals in order to derive from them, according to their system of grammatical derivation, all nouns, verbs, adjectives, pronouns, prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions, which [pg 265] occur in Sanskrit. According to our explanation of a root, however, this number of 1706 would have to be reduced considerably, and though a few new roots would likewise have to be added which Sanskrit grammarians failed to discover, yet the number of primitive sounds, expressive of definite meanings, requisite for the etymological analysis of the whole Sanskrit dictionary would not amount to even one third of that number. Hebrew has been reduced to about 500 roots,270 and I doubt whether we want a larger number for Sanskrit. This shows a wise spirit of economy on the part of primitive language, for the possibility of forming new roots for every new impression was almost unlimited. Even if we put the number of letters only at twenty-four, the possible number of biliteral and triliteral roots would amount together to 14,400; whereas Chinese, though abstaining from composition and derivation, and therefore requiring a larger number of radicals than any other language, was satisfied with about 450. With these 450 sounds raised to 1263 by various accents and intonations, the Chinese have produced a dictionary of from 40,000 to 50,000 words.271

Sanskrit grammarians have boiled down the entire development of their language to 1706 roots,269 meaning they have recognized that many radicals to generate all nouns, verbs, adjectives, pronouns, prepositions, adverbs, and conjunctions, which [pg 265] can be found in Sanskrit. However, based on our definition of a root, this number of 1706 would need to be significantly reduced, and although a few new roots should also be added that Sanskrit grammarians missed, the total number of basic sounds that convey specific meanings needed for the etymological breakdown of the entire Sanskrit dictionary would not even reach one-third of that amount. Hebrew has been reduced to about 500 roots,270 and I doubt we would need a larger figure for Sanskrit. This demonstrates a smart sense of economy in primitive language because the potential to create new roots for every new concept was nearly limitless. Even if we only count the letters at twenty-four, the total number of two-letter and three-letter roots would add up to 14,400; meanwhile, Chinese, which avoids composition and derivation, and therefore needs a larger set of radicals than any other language, settled for around 450. With these 450 sounds expanded to 1263 through various tones and inflections, the Chinese have generated a dictionary containing between 40,000 and 50,000 words.271

[pg 266]

It is clear, however, that in addition to these predicative roots, we want another class of radical elements to enable us to account for the full growth of language. With the 400 or 500 predicative roots at her disposal, language would not have been at a loss to coin names for all things that come under our cognizance. Language is a thrifty housewife. Consider the variety of ideas that were expressed by the one root spaś, and you will see that with 500 such roots she might form a dictionary sufficient to satisfy the wants, however extravagant, of her husband—the human mind. If each root yielded fifty derivatives, we should have 25,000 words. Now, we are told, on good authority, by a country clergyman, that some of the laborers in his parish had not 300 words in their vocabulary.272 The vocabulary of the ancient sages of Egypt, at least as far as it is known to us from the hieroglyphic inscriptions, amounts to about 685 words.273 The libretto of an Italian opera seldom displays a greater variety of words.274 A well-educated person in England, who has [pg 267] been at a public school and at the university, who reads his Bible, his Shakespeare, the “Times,” and all the books of Mudie's Library, seldom uses more than about 3000 or 4000 words in actual conversation. Accurate thinkers and close reasoners, who avoid vague and general expressions, and wait till they find the word that exactly fits their meaning, employ a larger stock; and eloquent speakers may rise to a command of 10,000. Shakespeare, who displayed a greater variety of expression than probably any writer in any language, produced all his plays with about 15,000 words. Milton's works are built up with 8000; and the Old Testament says all that it has to say with 5,642 words.275

It is clear, though, that besides these core roots, we need another category of fundamental elements to fully explain the development of language. With 400 or 500 core roots available, language wouldn’t struggle to create names for everything within our awareness. Language is like a resourceful housewife. Look at the variety of ideas expressed by the single root отдых, and you’ll see that with 500 such roots, it could compile a dictionary to meet the demands, however excessive, of its partner—the human mind. If each root produced fifty derivatives, we would have 25,000 words. Now, we hear from a reliable source, a local clergyman, that some workers in his parish don’t have more than 300 words in their vocabulary.272 The vocabulary of the ancient wise men of Egypt, at least as far as we know from the hieroglyphic inscriptions, amounts to about 685 words.273 The libretto of an Italian opera rarely shows a greater variety of words.274 A well-educated person in England who attended a public school and university, reads the Bible, Shakespeare, the “Times,” and all the books from Mudie’s Library, seldom uses more than about 3,000 or 4,000 words in everyday conversation. Thoughtful individuals who think deeply and carefully avoid vague expressions and wait until they find the exactly fitting word, often use a wider range; and skilled speakers might master up to 10,000 words. Shakespeare, who showed a greater variety of expression than probably any writer in any language, wrote all his plays with about 15,000 words. Milton's works are composed with 8,000; and the Old Testament communicates everything it needs with 5,642 words.275

Five hundred roots, therefore, considering their fertility and pliancy, was more than was wanted for the dictionary of our primitive ancestors. And yet they wanted something more. If they had a root expressive of light and splendor, that root might have formed the predicate in the names of sun, and moon, and stars, and heaven, day, morning, dawn, spring, gladness, joy, beauty, majesty, love, friend, gold, riches, &c. But if they wanted to express here and there, who, what, this, that, thou, he, they would have found it impossible to find any predicative root that could be applied to this purpose. Attempts have indeed been made to trace these words back to predicative roots; but if we are told that the demonstrative root ta, this or there, may be derived from a predicative root tan, to extend, we find that even in our modern languages, the demonstrative pronouns and particles are of too primitive and independent a nature to allow of so artificial an interpretation. The sound ta or sa, for this or there, is as involuntary, as natural, as independent an expression as any [pg 268] of the predicative roots, and although some of these demonstrative, or pronominal, or local roots, for all these names have been applied to them, may be traced back to a predicative source, we must admit a small class of independent radicals, not predicative in the usual sense of the word, but simply pointing, simply expressive of existence under certain more or less definite, local or temporal prescriptions.

Five hundred roots, considering their ability to grow and adapt, were more than enough for the vocabulary of our early ancestors. Yet, they sought something more. If they had a root that represented light and brilliance, that root could have been used to create the names for the sun, moon, stars, heaven, day, morning, dawn, spring, happiness, joy, beauty, majesty, love, friendship, gold, wealth, etc. But when they wanted to express here and there, who, what, this, that, you, he, they would have found it impossible to identify any root that could serve this function. Attempts have indeed been made to connect these words back to roots that indicate a state or action; but if we are told that the demonstrative root ta, meaning this or there, might come from a root beige, meaning to extend, we see that even in our modern languages, demonstrative pronouns and particles are too basic and independent to support such a forced interpretation. The sounds ta or sa, for this or there, are as spontaneous, as natural, and as independent as any of the predicative roots. Although some of these demonstrative, pronominal, or local roots—because all these terms have been used to describe them—can be traced back to a predicative origin, we must acknowledge a small group of independent roots that are not predicative in the usual sense, but simply point to existence under certain more or less specific local or temporal circumstances.

It will be best to give one illustration at least of a pronominal root and its influence in the formation of words.

It’s important to provide at least one example of a pronominal root and how it affects word formation.

In some languages, and particularly in Chinese, a predicative root may by itself be used as a noun, or a verb, or an adjective or adverb. Thus the Chinese sound ta means, without any change of form, great, greatness, and to be great.276 If ta stands before a substantive, it has the meaning of an adjective. Thus ta jin means a great man. If ta stands after a substantive, it is a predicate, or, as we should say, a verb. Thus jin ta (or jin ta ye) would mean the man is great.277 Or again,

In some languages, especially Chinese, a root word can serve as a noun, verb, adjective, or adverb on its own. For example, the Chinese sound ta means great, greatness, and to be great without any form change. If ta comes before a noun, it acts as an adjective. So, ta jin means a great man. If ta is placed after a noun, it functions as a predicate, or what we would call a verb. Thus, jin ta (or jin ta ye) would mean the man is great. 276 Or again,

ģin ngŏ, li pŭ ngŏ,
would mean, man bad, law not bad.

Here we see that there is no outward distinction whatever between a root and a word, and that a noun is distinguished from a verb merely by its collocation in a sentence.

Here we see that there’s no visible difference at all between a root and a word, and that a noun is identified as a verb simply by its placement in a sentence.

In other languages, however, and particularly in the [pg 269] Aryan languages, no predicative root can by itself form a word. Thus in Latin there is a root luc, to shine. In order to have a substantive, such as light, it was necessary to add a pronominal or demonstrative root, this forming the general subject of which the meaning contained in the root is to be predicated. Thus by the addition of the pronominal element s we have the Latin noun, luc-s, the light, or literally, shining-there. Let us add a personal pronoun, and we have the verb luc-e-s, shining-thou, thou shinest. Let us add other pronominal derivatives, and we get the adjectives, lucidus, luculentus, &c.

In other languages, especially in the [pg 269] Aryan languages, a predicative root cannot form a word on its own. For example, in Latin, there is a root luc, meaning to shine. To create a noun like light, a pronominal or demonstrative root must be added, which forms the general subject that the meaning of the root will describe. By adding the pronominal element s, we get the Latin noun luc-s, which means the light, or literally, shining-there. If we add a personal pronoun, we arrive at the verb luc-e-s, meaning shining-you, you shine. By adding other pronominal derivatives, we get the adjectives lucid, luculent, etc.

It would be a totally mistaken view, however, were we to suppose that all derivative elements, all that remains of a word after the predicative root has been removed, must be traced back to pronominal roots. We have only to look at some of our own modern derivatives in order to be convinced that many of them were originally predicative, that they entered into composition with the principal predicative root, and then dwindled down to mere suffixes. Thus scape in landscape, and the more modern ship in hardship are both derived from the same root which we have in Gothic,278 skapa, skôp, skôpum, to create; in Anglo-Saxon, scape, scôp, scôpon. It is the same as the German derivative, schaft, in Gesellschaft, &c. So again dom in wisdom or christendom is derived from the same root which we have in to do. It is the same as the German thum in Christenthum, the Anglo-Saxon dôm in cyning-dom, Königthum. Sometimes it may seem doubtful whether a derivative element was originally merely demonstrative or predicative. Thus the termination of the comparative in [pg 270] Sanskrit is tara, the Greek teros. This might, at first sight, be taken for a demonstrative element, but it is in reality the root tar, which means to go beyond, which we have likewise in the Latin trans. This trans in its French form très is prefixed to adjectives in order to express a higher or transcendent degree, and the same root was well adapted to form the comparative in the ancient Aryan tongues. This root must likewise be admitted in one of the terminations of the locative which is tra in Sanskrit; for instance from ta, a demonstrative root, we form ta-tra, there, originally this way; we form anyatra, in another way; the same as in Latin we say ali-ter, from aliud; compounds no more surprising than the French autrement (see p. 55) and the English otherwise.

It would be completely wrong to think that all derivative elements, all that’s left of a word after the main root has been taken away, must come from pronominal roots. Just looking at some of our modern derivatives shows us that many were originally predicative, that they combined with the main predicative root, and then shrank down to simple suffixes. For example, landscape in landscape, and the newer boat in struggle both come from the same root we see in Gothic, 278 create, skôp, skôpum, meaning to create; in Anglo-Saxon, landscape, scope, scôpon. It’s the same with the German derivative, schaft, in Society, etc. Likewise, dom in knowledge or Christianity is derived from the same root we find in to-do. It’s the same as the German thumb in Christianity, the Anglo-Saxon dome in kingdom, Kingdom. Sometimes it may be unclear whether a derivative element was originally just demonstrative or predicative. For instance, the ending of the comparative in Sanskrit is tara, and in Greek teros. At first glance, this might seem like a demonstrative element, but it actually comes from the root tar, which means to surpass, and we also find it in the Latin trans. This trans in French becomes very, which is added to adjectives to express a higher or greater degree, and the same root worked well to form the comparative in ancient Aryan languages. This root must also be acknowledged in one of the endings of the locative, which is tra in Sanskrit; for example, from ta, a demonstrative root, we create ta-tra, meaning there, originally this way; we create anywhere, in another way; the same as in Latin, where we say ali-ter, from aliud; these compounds are no more surprising than the French otherwise (see p. 55) and the English otherwise.

Most of the terminations of declension and conjugation are demonstrative roots, and the s, for instance, of the third person singular, he loves, can be proved to have been originally the demonstrative pronoun of the third person. It was originally not s but t. This will require some explanation. The termination of the third person singular of the present is ti in Sanskrit. Thus , to give, becomes dadâti, he gives; dhâ, to place, dadhâti, he places.

Most of the endings for declension and conjugation are demonstrative roots, and the s, for example, in the third person singular, "he loves," can be shown to have originally been the demonstrative pronoun for the third person. It wasn't originally s but t. This will need some explanation. The ending of the third person singular in the present is ti in Sanskrit. So, dude, which means to give, becomes dadâti, he gives; dhâ, which means to place, becomes dadhâti, he places.

In Greek this ti is changed into si; just as the Sanskrit tvam, the Latin tu, thou, appears in Greek as sy. Thus Greek didōsi corresponds to Sanskrit dadâti; tithēsi to dadhâti. In the course of time, however, every Greek s between two vowels, in a termination, was elided. Thus genos does not form the genitive genesos, like the Latin genus, genesis or generis, but geneos = genous. The dative is not genesi (the Latin generi), but geneï = genei. In the same manner all the [pg 271] regular verbs have ei for the termination of the third person singular. But this ei stands for esi. Thus typtei stands for typtesi, and this for typteti.

In Greek, ti changes to si; just like the Sanskrit tvam, the Latin you, thou, appears in Greek as sy. So, Greek didōsi corresponds to Sanskrit dadâti; tithes corresponds to dadhâti. Over time, every Greek s between two vowels at the end was dropped. Thus, gens does not form the genitive genesos like the Latin genus, origin, or generative, but geneos = genius. The dative is not genesis (the Latin generi), but gene = genei. Similarly, all the [pg 271] regular verbs have ei as the ending for the third person singular. But this ei stands for esi. So, typtei stands for typtesi, and this for typteti.

The Latin drops the final i, and instead of ti has t. Thus we get amat, dicit.

The Latin drops the final i, and instead of ti has t. So we get amat, says.

Now there is a law to which I alluded before, which is called Grimm's Law. According to it every tenuis in Latin is in Gothic represented by its corresponding aspirate. Hence, instead of t, we should expect in Gothic th; and so we find indeed in Gothic habaiþ, instead of Latin habet. This aspirate likewise appears in Anglo-Saxon, where he loves is lufað. It is preserved in the Biblical he loveth, and it is only in modern English that it gradually sank to s. In the s of he loves, therefore, we have a demonstrative root, added to the predicative root love, and this s is originally the same as the Sanskrit ti. This ti again must be traced back to the demonstrative root ta, this or there; which exists in the Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun tad, the Greek to, the Gothic thata, the English that; and which in Latin we can trace in talis, tantus, tunc, tam, and even in tamen, an old locative in men. We have thus seen that what we call the third person singular of the present is in reality a simple compound of a predicative root with a demonstrative root. It is a compound like any other, only that the second part is not predicative, but simply demonstrative. As in pay-master we predicate pay of master, meaning a person whose office it is to pay, so in dadâ-ti, give-he, the ancient framers of language simply predicated giving of some third person, and this synthetic proposition, give-he, is the same as what we now call the third person singular in the [pg 272] indicative mood, of the present tense, in the active voice.279

Now there’s a rule I mentioned earlier, known as Grimm's Law. It states that every tenuis in Latin corresponds to an aspirate in Gothic. So, instead of t, we expect to find th in Gothic; and indeed, we see habaiþ in Gothic instead of Latin habet. This aspirate also appears in Anglo-Saxon, where he's in love translates to loved. It's preserved in the Biblical he loves, and only in modern English did it gradually become s. In he's in love, the s serves as a demonstrative root added to the predicative root love, and this s originally matches the Sanskrit ti. This ti can be traced back to the demonstrative root ta, meaning this or there; which we find in the Sanskrit demonstrative pronoun bit, the Greek to, the Gothic thata, the English that; and we can trace it in Latin through talisman, tantus, tunc, tam, and even in tamen, an old locative in men. We've thus observed that what we call the third person singular of the present tense is actually a simple combination of a predicative root with a demonstrative root. It’s a compound like any other, except the second part isn’t predicative, but merely demonstrative. Just as in the term pay-master we infer pay from master, indicating a person whose role is to pay, in dadâ-ti, give him, the early language creators simply indicated giving by some third person, and this synthetic phrase, give him, corresponds to what we call the third person singular in the [pg 272] indicative mood, present tense, active voice.

We have necessarily confined ourselves in our analysis of language to that family of languages to which our own tongue, and those with which we are best acquainted, belong; but what applies to Sanskrit and the Aryan family applies to the whole realm of human speech. Every language, without a single exception, that has as yet been cast into the crucible of comparative grammar, has been found to contain these two substantial elements, predicative and demonstrative roots. In the Semitic family these two constituent elements are even more palpable than in Sanskrit and Greek. Even before the discovery of Sanskrit, and the rise of comparative philology, Semitic scholars had successfully traced back the whole dictionary of Hebrew and Arabic to a small number of roots, and as every root in these languages consists of three consonants, the Semitic languages have sometimes been called by the name of triliteral.

We have had to limit our analysis of language to the family of languages that includes our own and those we know best; however, what applies to Sanskrit and the Aryan family also applies to the entire spectrum of human speech. Every language, without exception, that has been examined through the lens of comparative grammar has been found to contain these two key elements: predicative and demonstrative roots. In the Semitic family, these two elements are even more evident than in Sanskrit and Greek. Even before Sanskrit was discovered and comparative philology emerged, Semitic scholars had successfully traced the entire vocabulary of Hebrew and Arabic back to a small set of roots. Since each root in these languages consists of three consonants, the Semitic languages are sometimes referred to as triliteral.

To a still higher degree the constituent elements are, as it were, on the very surface in the Turanian family of speech. It is one of the characteristic features of that family, that, whatever the number of prefixes and suffixes, the root must always stand out in full relief, and must never be allowed to suffer by its contact with derivative elements.

To an even greater extent, the basic elements are, in a way, right on the surface in the Turanian language family. One of the defining traits of this family is that, regardless of how many prefixes and suffixes there are, the root must always be clearly visible and should never be diminished by its connection with derivative elements.

There is one language, the Chinese, in which no analysis of any kind is required for the discovery of its component parts. It is a language in which no coalescence [pg 273] of roots has taken place: every word is a root, and every root is a word. It is, in fact, the most primitive stage in which we can imagine human language to have existed. It is language comme il faut; it is what we should naturally have expected all languages to be.

There is one language, Chinese, that doesn’t require any analysis to figure out its parts. It’s a language where no merging of roots has happened: every word is a root, and every root is a word. In fact, it represents the most basic stage we can imagine human language existing in. It’s language as it ought to be; it’s what we would naturally expect all languages to be. [pg 273]

There are, no doubt, numerous dialects in Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia, which have not yet been dissected by the knife of the grammarian; but we may be satisfied at least with this negative evidence, that, as yet, no language which has passed through the ordeal of grammatical analysis has ever disclosed any but these two constituent elements.

There are definitely many dialects in Asia, Africa, America, and Polynesia that haven't been broken down by grammarians yet; however, we can at least be content with this lack of evidence: until now, no language that has gone through detailed grammatical analysis has revealed any more than these two basic components.

The problem, therefore, of the origin of language, which seemed so perplexing and mysterious to the ancient philosophers, assumes a much simpler aspect with us. We have learnt what language is made of; we have found that everything in language, except the roots, is intelligible, and can be accounted for. There is nothing to surprise us in the combination of the predicative and demonstrative roots which led to the building up of all the languages with which we are acquainted, from Chinese to English. It is not only conceivable, as Professor Pott remarks, “that the formation of the Sanskrit language, as it is handed down to us, may have been preceded by a state of the greatest simplicity and entire absence of inflections, such as is exhibited to the present day by the Chinese and other monosyllabic languages.” It is absolutely impossible that it should have been otherwise. After we have seen that all languages must have started from this Chinese or monosyllabic stage, the only portion of the problem of the origin of language that remains to [pg 274] be solved is this: How can we account for the origin of those predicative and demonstrative roots which form the constituent elements of all human speech, and which have hitherto resisted all attempts at further analysis? This problem will form the subject of our two next Lectures.

The issue of where language came from, which puzzled ancient philosophers, is much simpler for us now. We've figured out what language consists of; we know that everything in language, apart from the roots, makes sense and can be explained. There's nothing surprising about how the predicative and demonstrative roots combine to create all the languages we know, from Chinese to English. It's not only possible, as Professor Pott points out, "the development of the Sanskrit language, as it has come down to us, might have been preceded by a stage of great simplicity and a complete lack of inflections, similar to what we see today in Chinese and other monosyllabic languages." It’s absolutely impossible for it to have been any other way. Once we've established that all languages must have originated from this Chinese or monosyllabic stage, the only part of the problem that still needs to be addressed is how we can explain the origin of those predicative and demonstrative roots, which are the building blocks of all human speech and have so far resisted deeper analysis. This issue will be the focus of our next two lectures.

[pg 275]

Lecture 8. Morphological Classification.

We finished in our last Lecture our analysis of language, and we arrived at the result that predicative and demonstrative roots are the sole constituent elements of human speech.

We wrapped up our last lecture by analyzing language and concluded that descriptive and demonstrative roots are the only basic components of human speech.

We now turn back in order to discover how many possible forms of language may be produced by the free combination of these constituent elements; and we shall then endeavor to find out whether each of these possible forms has its real counterpart in some or other of the dialects of mankind. We are attempting in fact to carry out a morphological classification of speech, which is based entirely on the form or manner in which roots are put together, and therefore quite independent of the genealogical classification which, according to its very nature, is based on the formations of language handed down ready made from generation to generation.

We now go back to explore how many different forms of language can come from freely combining these basic elements. Then, we'll try to find out if each of these forms actually exists in various human dialects. Essentially, we're working on a morphological classification of speech, which focuses solely on how roots are combined, making it completely separate from the genealogical classification that, by its nature, is based on language formations passed down from generation to generation.

Before, however, we enter on this, the principal subject of our present Lecture, we have still to examine, as briefly as possible, a second family of speech, which, like the Aryan, is established on the strictest principles of genealogical classification, namely, the Semitic.

Before we dive into the main topic of this lecture, we still need to briefly examine a second family of languages, which, like the Aryan, is based on strict principles of genealogical classification, namely, the Semitic.

The Semitic family is divided into three branches, the Aramaic, the Hebraic, and the Arabic.280

The Semitic family is split into three branches: the Aramaic, the Hebrew, and the Arabic.280

[pg 276]

The Aramaic occupies the north, including Syria, Mesopotamia, and part of the ancient kingdoms of Babylonia and Assyria. It is known to us chiefly in two dialects, the Syriac and Chaldee. The former name is given to the language which has been preserved to us in a translation of the Bible (the Peshito281) ascribed to the second century, and in the rich Christian literature dating from the fourth. It is still spoken, though in a very corrupt form, by the Nestorians of Kurdistan, near the lakes of Van and Urmia, and by some Christian tribes in Mesopotamia; and an attempt has been made by the American missionaries,282 stationed at Urmia, to restore this dialect to some grammatical correctness by publishing translations and a grammar of what they call the Neo-Syriac language.

The Aramaic is found in the northern regions, including Syria, Mesopotamia, and parts of the ancient kingdoms of Babylonia and Assyria. We mainly know it through two dialects, Syriac and Chaldean. The first name refers to the version of the language that has survived in a Bible translation (the Peshito281) attributed to the second century, and in the abundant Christian literature from the fourth century. It is still spoken today, although in a very corrupted form, by the Nestorians in Kurdistan, near the lakes of Van and Urmia, and by some Christian tribes in Mesopotamia. American missionaries,282 based in Urmia, have attempted to bring this dialect back to some grammatical accuracy by publishing translations and a grammar of what they refer to as the Neo-Syriac language.

The name of Chaldee has been given to the language adopted by the Jews during the Babylonian captivity. Though the Jews always retained a knowledge of their sacred language, they soon began to adopt the dialect of their conquerors, not for conversation only, but also for literary composition.283 The book of Ezra contains fragments in Chaldee, contemporaneous with the cuneiform inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes, and several of the apocryphal books, though preserved to us in Greek only, were most likely composed originally in Chaldee, [pg 277] and not in Hebrew. The so-called Targums284 again, or translations and paraphrases of the Old Testament, written during the centuries immediately preceding and following the Christian era,285 give us another specimen of the Aramaic, or the language of Babylonia, as transplanted to Palestine. This Aramaic was the dialect spoken by Christ and his disciples. The few authentic words preserved in the New Testament as spoken by our Lord in His own language, such as Talitha kumi, Ephphatha, Abba, are not in Hebrew, but in the Chaldee, or Aramaic, as then spoken by the Jews.286

The term Chaldean refers to the language that the Jews started using during their time in Babylon. While the Jews always kept some knowledge of their sacred language, they quickly began to adopt the dialect of their conquerors, not just for everyday conversation, but also for writing. 283 The book of Ezra includes sections in Chaldee, which are contemporary with the cuneiform writings of Darius and Xerxes. Several of the apocryphal books, although we only have them in Greek, were probably originally written in Chaldee, [pg 277] rather than in Hebrew. The so-called Targums 284 are translations and paraphrases of the Old Testament created during the centuries right before and after the time of Christ.285 They provide another example of Aramaic, the language of Babylonia, as it was brought to Palestine. This Aramaic was the dialect spoken by Christ and his disciples. The few genuine words recorded in the New Testament that Jesus spoke in His own language, such as Talitha, get up, Ephphatha, ABBA, are not in Hebrew, but in Chaldee, or Aramaic, as it was used by the Jews at that time.286

After the destruction of Jerusalem the literature of the Jews continued to be written in the same dialect. The Talmud287 of Jerusalem of the fourth, and that of Babylon of the fifth, century exhibit the Aramean, as spoken by the educated Jews settled in these two localities, though greatly depraved and spoiled by an admixture of strange elements. This language remained the literary idiom of the Jews to the tenth century. The Masora,288 and the traditional commentary of the Old Testament, was written in it about that time. Soon after the Jews adopted Arabic as their literary language, and retained it to the thirteenth century. They then returned to a kind of modernized Hebrew, which they still continue to employ for learned discussions.

After the destruction of Jerusalem, Jewish literature continued to be written in the same dialect. The Talmud of Jerusalem from the fourth century and that of Babylon from the fifth century show the Aramaic spoken by educated Jews living in these two areas, though it was greatly mixed with other influences. This language stayed the literary language of the Jews until the tenth century. The Masora and the traditional commentary on the Old Testament were written in it around that time. Soon after, Jews adopted Arabic as their literary language, which they used until the thirteenth century. They then shifted back to a kind of modernized Hebrew, which they still use for scholarly discussions.

[pg 278]

It is curious that the Aramaic branch of the Semitic family, though originally the language of the great kingdoms of Babylon and Nineveh, should have been preserved to us only in the literature of the Jews, and of the Christians of Syria. There must have been a Babylonian literature, for the wisdom of the Chaldeans had acquired a reputation which could hardly have been sustained without a literature. Abraham must have spoken Aramaic before he emigrated to Canaan. Laban spoke the same dialect, and the name which he gave to the heap of stones that was to be a witness between him and Jacob, (Jegar-sahadutha) is Syriac, whereas Galeed, the name by which Jacob called it, is Hebrew.289 If we are ever to recover a knowledge of that ancient Babylonian literature, it must be from the cuneiform inscriptions lately brought home from Babylon and Nineveh. They are clearly written in a Semitic language. About this there can be no longer any doubt. And though the progress in deciphering them has been slow, and slower than was at one time expected, yet there is no reason to despair. In a letter, dated April, 1853, Sir Henry Rawlinson wrote:—

It’s interesting that the Aramaic branch of the Semitic language family, which was originally spoken in the great kingdoms of Babylon and Nineveh, has only come down to us through the literature of the Jews and the Christians of Syria. There must have been Babylonian literature, as the wisdom of the Chaldeans had a reputation that could hardly have been maintained without written works. Abraham must have spoken Aramaic before moving to Canaan. Laban spoke the same dialect, and the name he gave to the pile of stones meant to serve as a witness between him and Jacob (Jegar-sahadutha) is in Syriac, while Galeed, the name Jacob used, is Hebrew.289 If we are ever to learn about that ancient Babylonian literature, it will have to be from the cuneiform inscriptions that have recently been recovered from Babylon and Nineveh. They are clearly written in a Semitic language, and there can be no doubt about this now. Although progress in deciphering them has been slow, and slower than was once expected, there’s no reason to lose hope. In a letter dated April 1853, Sir Henry Rawlinson wrote:—

“On the clay tablets which we have found at Nineveh, and which now are to be counted by thousands, there are explanatory treatises on almost every subject under the sun: the art of writing, grammars, and dictionaries, notation, weights and measures, divisions of time, chronology, astronomy, geography, history, mythology, geology, botany, &c. In fact we have now at our disposal a perfect cyclopædia of Assyrian science.” Considering what has been achieved in deciphering one [pg 279] class of cuneiform inscriptions, the Persian, there is no reason to doubt that the whole of that cyclopædia will some day be read with the same ease with which we read the mountain records of Darius.

“On the clay tablets we've found in Nineveh, which now number in the thousands, there are detailed writings on almost every topic you can think of: writing, grammar, dictionaries, notation, weights and measures, timekeeping, chronology, astronomy, geography, history, mythology, geology, botany, and more. In fact, we now have access to a complete encyclopedia of Assyrian knowledge.” Considering what has been accomplished in deciphering one [pg 279] class of cuneiform inscriptions, the Persian, there's no reason to doubt that one day we will read that entire encyclopedia with the same ease that we read the historical records of Darius.

There is, however, another miserable remnant of what was once the literature of the Chaldeans or Babylonians, namely, the “Book of Adam,” and similar works preserved by the Mendaïtes or Nasoreans, a curious sect settled near Bassora. Though the composition of these works is as late as the tenth century after Christ, it has been supposed that under a modern crust of wild and senseless hallucinations, they contain some grains of genuine ancient Babylonian thought. These Mendaïtes have in fact been identified with the Nabateans, who are mentioned as late as the tenth century290 of our era, as a race purely pagan, and distinct from Jews, Christians, and Mohammedans. In Arabic the name Nabatean291 is used for Babylonians,—nay, all the people of Aramaic origin, settled in the earliest times between the Euphrates and Tigris are referred to by that name.292 It is supposed that the Nabateans, who are mentioned about the beginning of the Christian era as a race distinguished for their astronomical and general scientific knowledge, were the ancestors of the mediæval Nabateans, and the descendants of the ancient Babylonians and Chaldeans. You may have lately seen in some literary journals an account of a work called “The Nabatean Agriculture.” It exists only in an Arabic translation by Ibn-Wahshiyyah, the Chaldean,293 who lived about 900 years [pg 280] after Christ, but the original, which was written by Kuthami in Aramean, has lately been referred to the beginning of the thirteenth century b. c. The evidence is not yet fully before us, but from what is known it seems more likely that this work was the compilation of a Nabatean, who lived about the fourth century after Christ;294 and though it contains ancient traditions, which may go back to the days of the great Babylonian monarchs, these traditions can hardly be taken as a fair representation of the ancient civilization of the Aramean race.

There is, however, another unfortunate remnant of what used to be the literature of the Chaldeans or Babylonians, namely, the “Adam's Book,” and similar works preserved by the Mandaeans or Nasoreans, a curious sect settled near Basra. Although these works were composed as late as the tenth century after Christ, it is believed that beneath a contemporary layer of bizarre and nonsensical ideas, they contain some fragments of authentic ancient Babylonian thought. These Mendaïtes have indeed been identified with the Nabateans, who are mentioned as late as the tenth century290 of our era, as a race that was purely pagan and distinct from Jews, Christians, and Muslims. In Arabic, the term Nabatean291 is used to refer to Babylonians—actually, all people of Aramaic origin who settled in ancient times between the Euphrates and Tigris rivers are referred to by that name.292 It is thought that the Nabateans, noted around the beginning of the Christian era for their skills in astronomy and general scientific knowledge, were the ancestors of the medieval Nabateans and the descendants of the ancient Babylonians and Chaldeans. You may have recently seen in some literary journals a report about a work called “Nabataean Agriculture.” It exists only in an Arabic translation by Ibn-Wahshiyyah, the Chaldean,293 who lived around 900 years [pg 280] after Christ, but the original, written by Kuthami in Aramaic, has recently been dated to the beginning of the thirteenth century b. c. The evidence is not yet complete, but based on what is known, it seems more likely that this work was compiled by a Nabatean who lived around the fourth century after Christ;294 and although it contains ancient traditions, which may trace back to the time of the great Babylonian monarchs, these traditions can hardly be considered an accurate representation of the ancient civilization of the Aramean race.

The second branch of the Semitic family is the Hebraic, chiefly represented by the ancient language of Palestine, where Hebrew was spoken and written from the days of Moses to the times of Nehemiah and the Maccabees, though of course with considerable modifications, and with a strong admixture of Aramean forms, particularly since the Babylonian captivity, and the rise of a powerful civilization in the neighboring country of Syria. The ancient language of Phœnicia, to judge from inscriptions, was most closely allied to Hebrew, and the language of the Carthaginians too must be referred to the same branch.

The second branch of the Semitic family is the Hebrew, mainly represented by the ancient language of Palestine, where Hebrew was spoken and written from the days of Moses to the times of Nehemiah and the Maccabees. Of course, it underwent significant changes and incorporated many Aramean elements, especially after the Babylonian captivity and the emergence of a strong civilization in the neighboring country of Syria. Based on inscriptions, the ancient language of Phoenicia was very similar to Hebrew, and the language of the Carthaginians should also be categorized under the same branch.

Hebrew was first encroached upon by Aramaic dialects, through the political ascendency of Babylon, and [pg 281] still more of Syria; and was at last swept away by Arabic, which, since the conquest of Palestine and Syria in the year 636, has monopolized nearly the whole area formerly occupied by the two older branches of the Semitic stock, the Aramaic and Hebrew.

Hebrew was initially influenced by Aramaic dialects due to the political rise of Babylon, and [pg 281] was eventually replaced by Arabic, which, following the conquest of Palestine and Syria in the year 636, has taken over almost the entire region previously dominated by the two older branches of the Semitic family, Aramaic and Hebrew.

This third, or Arabic, branch sprang from the Arabian peninsula, where it is still spoken by a compact mass of aboriginal inhabitants. Its most ancient documents are the Himyaritic inscriptions. In very early times this Arabic branch was transplanted to Africa, where, south of Egypt and Nubia, on the coast opposite Yemen, an ancient Semitic dialect has maintained itself to the present day. This is the Ethiopic or Abyssinian, or, as it is called by the people themselves, the Gees language. Though no longer spoken in its purity by the people of Habesh, it is still preserved in their sacred writings, translations of the Bible, and similar works, which date from the third and fourth centuries. The modern language of Abyssinia is called Amharic.

This third branch, known as Arabic, originated from the Arabian Peninsula, where it is still spoken by a concentrated group of native inhabitants. Its oldest documents are the Himyarite inscriptions. In very early times, this Arabic branch spread to Africa, where, south of Egypt and Nubia, on the coast opposite Yemen, an ancient Semitic dialect has survived to this day. This is the Ethiopian or Abyssinian, or as it is referred to by the people themselves, the Geez language. Although it is no longer spoken in its pure form by the people of Habesh, it is still preserved in their sacred writings, translations of the Bible, and similar works, which date back to the third and fourth centuries. The modern language of Abyssinia is called Amharic.

The earliest literary documents of Arabic go back beyond Mohammed. They are called Moallakat, literally, suspended poems, because they are said to have been thus publicly exhibited at Mecca. They are old popular poems, descriptive of desert life. With Mohammed Arabic became the language of a victorious religion, and established its sway over Asia, Africa, and Europe.

The earliest literary documents in Arabic date back before Mohammed. They're known as Moallakat, meaning "suspended poems," because they were reportedly displayed publicly in Mecca. These are old popular poems that describe desert life. With Mohammed, Arabic became the language of a powerful religion and spread its influence across Asia, Africa, and Europe.

These three branches, the Aramaic, the Hebraic, and Arabic, are so closely related to each other, that it was impossible not to recognize their common origin. Every root in these languages, as far back as we know them, must consist of three consonants, and numerous [pg 282] words are derived from these roots by a simple change of vowels, leaving the consonantal skeleton as much as possible intact. It is impossible to mistake a Semitic language; and what is most important—it is impossible to imagine an Aryan language derived from a Semitic, or a Semitic from an Aryan language. The grammatical framework is totally distinct in these two families of speech. This does not exclude, however, the possibility that both are diverging streams of the same source; and the comparisons that have been instituted between the Semitic roots, reduced to their simplest form, and the roots of the Aryan languages, have made it more than probable that the material elements with which they both started were originally the same.

These three branches, Aramaic, Hebrew, and Arabic, are so closely linked that it’s impossible not to recognize their common origin. Every root in these languages, as far back as we know them, consists of three consonants, and many words are formed from these roots by simply changing the vowels while keeping the consonantal structure as intact as possible. You can easily identify a Semitic language; and what’s more important is that you can’t envision an Aryan language coming from a Semitic one, or a Semitic language coming from an Aryan one. The grammatical structures of these two language families are completely different. However, this doesn’t rule out the chance that both are diverging streams from the same source. The comparisons made between the simplest forms of Semitic roots and the roots of Aryan languages suggest that the fundamental elements they began with were likely the same.

Other languages which are supposed to belong to the Semitic family are the Berber dialects of Northern Africa, spoken on the coast from Egypt to the Atlantic Ocean before the invasion of the Arabs, and now pushed back towards the interior. Some other African languages, too, such as the Haussa and Galla, have been classed as Semitic; and the language of Egypt, from the earliest hieroglyphic inscriptions to the Coptic, which ceased to be spoken after the seventeenth century, has equally been referred to this class. The Semitic character of these dialects, however, is much less clearly defined, and the exact degree of relationship in which they stand to the Semitic languages, properly so-called, has still to be determined.

Other languages that are thought to be part of the Semitic family include the Berber dialects of North Africa, which were spoken along the coast from Egypt to the Atlantic Ocean before the Arab invasion and are now pushed further inland. Some other African languages, like Hausa and Galla, have also been classified as Semitic; the language of Egypt, from the earliest hieroglyphic inscriptions to Coptic, which stopped being spoken after the seventeenth century, has also been linked to this group. However, the Semitic nature of these dialects is much less clearly defined, and the exact degree of their relationship to the Semitic languages, properly speaking, still needs to be determined.

Strictly speaking the Aryan and Semitic are the only families of speech which fully deserve that title. They both presuppose the existence of a finished system of grammar, previous to the first divergence of [pg 283] their dialects. Their history is from the beginning a history of decay rather than of growth, and hence the unmistakable family-likeness which pervades every one even of their latest descendants. The language of the Sepoy and that of the English soldier are, strictly speaking, one and the same language. They are both built up of materials which were definitely shaped before the Teutonic and Indic branches separated. No new root has been added to either since their first separation; and the grammatical forms which are of more modern growth in English or Hindustání, are, if closely examined, new combinations only of elements which existed from the beginning in all the Aryan dialects. In the termination of the English he is, and in the inaudible termination of the French il est, we recognize the result of an act performed before the first separation of the Aryan family, the combination of the predicative root as with the demonstrative root ti; an act performed once for all, and continuing to be felt to the present day.

Strictly speaking, the Aryan and Semitic are the only language groups that truly deserve that title. They both assume the existence of a complete system of grammar before their dialects first diverged. Their history is more about decline than growth, which is why there is such a clear family resemblance among all their modern descendants. The language of the Sepoy and that of the English soldier are essentially the same language. They are both constructed from elements that were distinctly formed before the Teutonic and Indic branches separated. No new root has been added to either since that separation; and the grammatical forms that have emerged more recently in English or Hindustani are, upon closer inspection, just new combinations of elements that were present from the start in all the Aryan dialects. In the ending of the English he's, and in the silent ending of the French he is, we can see the outcome of a process that took place before the first separation of the Aryan family, the merging of the predicative root as with the demonstrative root ti; a process completed once and still felt today.

It was the custom of Nebuchadnezzar to have his name stamped on every brick that was used during his reign in erecting his colossal palaces. Those palaces fell to ruins, but from the ruins the ancient materials were carried away for building new cities; and on examining the bricks in the walls of the modern city of Baghdad on the borders of the Tigris, Sir Henry Rawlinson discovered on each the clear traces of that royal signature. It is the same if we examine the structure of modern languages. They too were built up with the materials taken from the ruins of the ancient languages, and every word, if properly examined, displays the visible stamp impressed upon it from the [pg 284] first by the founders of the Aryan and the Semitic empires of speech.

It was customary for Nebuchadnezzar to have his name stamped on every brick used during his reign to build his massive palaces. Those palaces eventually fell into ruins, but the ancient materials were salvaged to construct new cities. While examining the bricks in the walls of modern Baghdad, located along the Tigris River, Sir Henry Rawlinson found clear evidence of that royal signature on each one. The same can be said for modern languages. They were also built using materials taken from the ruins of ancient languages, and every word, when properly examined, shows the clear mark left on it by the founders of the Aryan and Semitic language empires. [pg 284]

The relationship of languages, however, is not always so close. Languages may diverge before their grammatical system has become fixed and hardened; and in that case they cannot be expected to show the same marked features of a common descent as, for instance, the Neo-Latin dialects, French, Italian, and Spanish. They may have much in common, but they will likewise display an after-growth in words and grammatical forms peculiar to each dialect. With regard to words we see that even languages so intimately related to each other as the six Romance dialects, diverged in some of the commonest expressions. Instead of the Latin frater, the French frère, we find in Spanish hermano. There was a very good reason for this change. The Latin word frater, changed into fray and frayle, had been applied to express a brother or a friar. It was felt inconvenient that the same word should express two ideas which it was sometimes necessary to distinguish, and therefore, by a kind of natural elimination, frater was given up as the name of brother in Spanish, and replaced from the dialectical stores of Latin, by germanus. In the same manner the Latin word for shepherd, pastor, was so constantly applied to the shepherd of the people or the clergyman, le pasteur, that a new word was wanted for the real shepherd. Thus berbicarius from berbex or vervex, a wether, was used instead of pastor, and changed into the French berger. Instead of the Spanish enfermo, ill, we find in French malade, in Italian malato. Languages so intimately related as Greek and Latin have fixed on different expressions for son, daughter, brother, woman, [pg 285] man, sky, earth, moon, hand, mouth, tree, bird, &c.295 That is to say, out of a large number of synonymes which were supplied by the numerous dialects of the Aryan family, the Greeks perpetuated one, the Romans another. It is clear that when the working of this principle of natural selection is allowed to extend more widely, languages, though proceeding from the same source, may in time acquire a totally different nomenclature for the commonest objects. The number of real synonymes is frequently exaggerated, and if we are told that in Icelandic there are 120 names for island, or in Arabic 500 names for lion,296 and 1,000 names for sword,297 many of these are no doubt purely poetical. But even where there are in a language only four or five names for the same objects, it is clear that four languages might be derived from it, each in appearance quite distinct from the rest.

The relationship between languages isn’t always so close. Languages can split before their grammatical systems become fixed and solidified; in such cases, they can't be expected to show the same distinctive traits of a common origin as, for example, the Neo-Latin dialects like French, Italian, and Spanish. They may have a lot in common, but they'll also exhibit additional words and grammatical forms unique to each dialect. When it comes to vocabulary, even languages as closely related as the six Romance dialects have diverged in some of the most common expressions. Instead of the Latin brother, the French uses brother, while in Spanish, it’s brother. There was a good reason for this change. The Latin word brother evolved into fray and frayed, which had been used to mean a brother or a friar. It became awkward for the same term to cover two ideas that sometimes needed to be distinguished, so by a sort of natural selection, brother was abandoned as the name for brother in Spanish, replaced instead with german from the Latin dialects. Similarly, the Latin word for shepherd, preacher, was often used to refer to the shepherd of the people or a clergyman, the pastor, which created a need for a new word for the actual shepherd. Thus, berbicarius from berbex or vervex, a wether, replaced minister, evolving into the French burger. Instead of the Spanish sick, for "ill," we find the French sick and the Italian malate. Languages as closely related as Greek and Latin have settled on different words for son, daughter, brother, woman, man, sky, earth, moon, hand, mouth, tree, bird, etc. That is to say, from a large number of synonyms provided by the many dialects of the Aryan family, the Greeks adopted one, and the Romans another. It's clear that when this principle of natural selection is allowed to operate more broadly, languages that originate from the same source can eventually develop completely different terms for the most common objects. The number of actual synonyms is often overstated, and while it's said that in Icelandic there are 120 names for “island,” or that Arabic has 500 names for “lion” and 1,000 names for “sword,” many of these are likely just poetic variations. But even when a language has only four or five names for the same objects, it's evident that four distinct languages could be derived from it, each appearing quite different from the others.

The same applies to grammar. When the Romance languages, for instance, formed their new future by placing the auxiliary verb habere, to have, after the infinitive, it was quite open to any one of them to fix upon some other expedient for expressing the future. The French might have chosen je vais dire or je dirvais (I wade to say) instead of je dirai, and in this case the future in French would have been totally distinct from the future in Italian. If such changes are possible in literary languages of such long standing as French and Italian, we must be prepared for a great deal more in languages which, as I said, diverged before any definite settlement had taken place either in their [pg 286] grammar or their dictionary. If we were to expect in them the definite criteria of a genealogical relationship which unites the members of the Aryan and Semitic families of speech, we should necessarily be disappointed. Such criteria could not possibly exist in these languages. But there are criteria for determining even these more distant degrees of relationship in the vast realm of speech; and they are sufficient at least to arrest the hasty conclusions of those who would deny the possibility of a common origin of any languages more removed from each other than French and Italian, Sanskrit and Greek, Hebrew and Arabic. You will see this more clearly after we have examined the principles of what I call the morphological classification of human speech.

The same goes for grammar. When the Romance languages started shaping their future, for example, by placing the auxiliary verb habere, meaning "to have," after the infinitive, any of them could have chosen a different way to express the future. The French could have opted for I'm going to say. or je dirais (I am going to say) instead of I'll say, and in that case, the future tense in French would have been completely different from that in Italian. If such changes can happen in established literary languages like French and Italian, we should expect even more in languages that, as I mentioned, branched off before any clear rules had been set in their [pg 286] grammar or vocabularies. If we were to anticipate in them the definite markers of a genealogical connection that links the members of the Aryan and Semitic language families, we would likely be let down. Such markers can't possibly exist in these languages. However, there are ways to identify even these more distant relationships within the vast landscape of language; these methods are at least enough to challenge the quick judgments of those who deny the possibility of a shared origin for languages that are further apart than French and Italian, Sanskrit and Greek, Hebrew and Arabic. You will understand this better after we look into the principles of what I refer to as the morphological categorization of human speech.

As all languages, so far as we can judge at present, can be reduced in the end to roots, predicative and demonstrative, it is clear that, according to the manner in which roots are put together, we may expect to find three kinds of languages, or three stages in the gradual formation of speech.

As far as we can tell right now, all languages can ultimately be reduced to basic roots, both predicative and demonstrative. This shows that, depending on how these roots are combined, we can likely expect to find three types of languages, or three stages in the gradual development of speech.

1. Roots may be used as words, each root preserving its full independence.

1. Roots can be used as words, with each root maintaining its complete independence.

2. Two roots may be joined together to form words, and in these compounds one root may lose its independence.

2. Two roots can be combined to create words, and in these compounds, one root might lose its independence.

3. Two roots may be joined together to form words, and in these compounds both roots may lose their independence.

3. Two roots can be combined to create words, and in these compounds, both roots might lose their individual significance.

What applies to two roots, applies to three or four or more. The principle is the same, though it would lead to a more varied subdivision.

What applies to two roots applies to three, four, or more. The principle is the same, although it would result in a more diverse subdivision.

The first stage, in which each root preserves its independence, [pg 287] and in which there is no formal distinction between a root and a word, I call the Radical Stage. This stage is best represented by ancient Chinese. Languages belonging to this first or Radical Stage, have sometimes been called Monosyllabic or Isolating. The second stage, in which two or more roots coalesce to form a word, the one retaining its radical independence, the other sinking down to a mere termination, I call the Terminational Stage. This stage is best represented by the Turanian family of speech, and the languages belonging to it have generally been called agglutinative, from gluten, glue. The third stage, in which roots coalesce so that neither the one nor the other retains its substantive independence, I call the Inflectional Stage. This stage is best represented by the Aryan and Semitic families, and the languages belonging to it have sometimes been distinguished by the name of organic or amalgamating.

The first stage, where each root keeps its independence, [pg 287] and there’s no clear distinction between a root and a word, I call the Radical Phase. This stage is best exemplified by ancient Chinese. Languages in this first or Radical Stage are sometimes referred to as Single-syllable or Alone. The second stage, where two or more roots combine to form a word, with one maintaining its radical independence while the other becomes a mere ending, I call the Final Stage. This stage is best represented by the Turanian family of languages, which are generally called agglutinative, derived from gluten, meaning glue. The third stage, where roots merge so that neither retains its distinct independence, I call the Inflectional Phase. This stage is best represented by the Aryan and Semitic families, and the languages in this category have often been labeled as organic or combining.

The first stage excludes phonetic corruption altogether.

The first stage completely eliminates phonetic corruption.

The second stage excludes phonetic corruption in the principal root, but allows it in the secondary or determinative elements.

The second stage eliminates phonetic corruption in the main root but permits it in the secondary or determinative elements.

The third stage allows phonetic corruption both in the principal root and in the terminations.

The third stage permits phonetic changes in both the main root and the endings.

A few instances will make this classification clearer.

A few examples will make this classification clearer.

In the first stage, which is represented by Chinese, every word is a root, and has its own substantial meaning. Thus, where we say in Latin baculo, with a stick, we say in Chinese ỳ ćáng.298 Here might be taken for a mere preposition, like the English with. But in Chinese this is a root; it is the same word which, [pg 288] if used as a verb, would mean “to employ.” Therefore in Chinese ỳ ćáng means literally “employ stick.” Or again, where we say in English at home, or in Latin domi, the Chinese say ŭŏ-li, ŭŏ meaning house, and li originally inside.299 The name for day in Chinese is ģi-tse, which means originally son of the sun.300

In the first stage, which is represented by Chinese, every word is a root and has its own significant meaning. So, where we say in Latin baculo, meaning "with a stick," we say in Chinese ỳ ćáng.298 Here, might be mistaken for a simple preposition, like the English with. But in Chinese, this is a root; it’s the same word that, when used as a verb, means “to hire.” Therefore, in Chinese, ỳ ćáng literally means “use stick.” Or again, where we say in English at home, or in Latin domi, the Chinese say ŭŏ-li, ŭŏ, meaning home, and li originally meant inside.299 The word for day in Chinese is ģi-tse, which originally meant son of the sun.300

There is in Chinese, as we saw before, no formal distinction between a noun, a verb, an adjective, an adverb, a preposition. The same root, according to its position in a sentence, may be employed to convey the meaning of great, greatness, greatly, and to be great. Everything in fact depends in Chinese on the proper collocation of words in a sentence. Thus ngò tà ni means “I beat thee;” but ni tà ngò would mean “Thou beatest me.” Thus ngŏ ģin means “a bad man;” ģin ngŏ would mean “the man is bad.”

In Chinese, as we discussed earlier, there isn't a clear distinction between nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, or prepositions. The same root can be used to express meanings like great, greatness, greatly, and to be great, depending on its position in a sentence. Essentially, everything in Chinese relies on the correct arrangement of words in a sentence. For example, ngò tà ni means "I won against you;" but ni tà ngò means "You won against me." Similarly, ngŏ ģin translates to “a bad dude;” while ģin ngŏ means “the man is bad.”

As long as every word, or part of a word, is felt to express its own radical meaning, a language belongs to the first or radical stage. As soon as such words as tse in ģi-tse, day, li in ŭŏ-li, at home, or in ỳ-ćáng, with the stick, lose their etymological meaning and become mere signs of derivation or of case, language enters into the second or Terminational stage.

As long as every word or part of a word is understood to express its own fundamental meaning, a language is in its first or fundamental stage. Once words like tse in ģi-tse, meaning day, li in ŭŏ-li, meaning at home, or in ỳ-ćáng, meaning with the stick, lose their original meaning and become just signs of derivation or grammatical case, the language enters its second or Terminal stage.

By far the largest number of languages belong to this stage. The whole of what is called the Turanian family of speech consists of Terminational or Agglutinative languages, and this Turanian family comprises in reality all languages spoken in Asia and Europe, and not included under the Aryan and Semitic families, [pg 289] with the exception of Chinese and its cognate dialects. In the great continent of the Old World the Semitic and Aryan languages occupy only what may be called the four western peninsulas, namely, India with Persia, Arabia, Asia Minor, and Europe; and we have reason to suppose that even these countries were held by Turanian tribes previous to the arrival of the Aryan and Semitic nations.

By far the largest number of languages belong to this stage. The entire set of what is called the Turanian family of languages consists of Terminational or Agglutinative languages, and this Turanian family actually includes all languages spoken in Asia and Europe that aren't part of the Aryan and Semitic families, [pg 289] except for Chinese and its related dialects. In the vast continent of the Old World, the Semitic and Aryan languages only occupy what can be called the four western peninsulas: India with Persia, Arabia, Asia Minor, and Europe. We have reason to believe that even these regions were once inhabited by Turanian tribes before the arrival of the Aryan and Semitic nations.

This Turanian family is of great importance in the science of languages. Some scholars would deny it the name of a family; and if family is only applicable to dialects so closely connected among themselves as the Aryan or Semitic, it would no doubt be preferable to speak of the Turanian as a class or group, and not as a family of languages. But this concession must not be understood as an admission that the members of this class start from different sources, and that they are held together, not by genealogical affinity, but by morphological similarity only.

This Turanian family is very significant in the study of languages. Some scholars might argue it shouldn't be called a family; if "family" only applies to dialects that are closely related like Aryan or Semitic, it might be better to refer to Turanian as a class or group instead of a family of languages. However, this concession shouldn't be taken as an acknowledgment that the languages in this class come from different origins, or that they're grouped together solely based on morphological similarities rather than genealogical relationships.

These languages share elements in common which they must have borrowed from the same source, and their formal coincidences, though of a different character from those of the Aryan and Semitic families, are such that it would be impossible to ascribe them to mere accident.

These languages have common elements that they must have borrowed from the same source, and their formal similarities, although different from those of the Aryan and Semitic families, are such that it would be impossible to attribute them to mere coincidence.

The name Turanian is used in opposition to Aryan, and is applied to the nomadic races of Asia as opposed to the agricultural or Aryan races.

The term Turanian is used in contrast to Aryan and refers to the nomadic peoples of Asia, as opposed to the agricultural or Aryan peoples.

The Turanian family or class consists of two great divisions, the Northern and the Southern.

The Turanian family or class has two main divisions, the North and the Southern.

The Northern is sometimes called the Ural-Altaic or Ugro-Tataric, and it is divided into five sections, the Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, Finnic, and Samoyedic.

The Northern is sometimes referred to as the Ural-Altaic or Uralic-Tatar, and it is divided into five sections: Tungusic languages, Mongolian, Turkic, Finnish, and Samoyed.

[pg 290]

The Southern, which occupies the south of Asia, is divided into four classes, the Tamulic, or the languages of the Dekhan; the Bhotîya, or the dialects of Tibet and Bhotan; the Taïc, or the dialects of Siam, and the Malaic, or the Malay and Polynesian dialects.

The South, which is located in the southern part of Asia, is divided into four groups: the Tamulic, referring to the languages of the Dekhan; the Bhotia, which are the dialects of Tibet and Bhutan; the Taïc, or the dialects of Siam; and the Malaic, which includes the Malay and Polynesian dialects.

No doubt if we expected to find in this immense number of languages the same family likeness which holds the Semitic or Aryan languages together, we should be disappointed. But the very absence of that family likeness constitutes one of the distinguishing features of the Turanian dialects. They are Nomad languages, as contrasted with the Aryan, and Semitic languages.301 In the latter most words and grammatical forms were thrown out but once by the creative power of one generation, and they were not lightly parted with, even though their original distinctness had been blurred by phonetic corruption. To hand down a language in this manner is possible only among people whose history runs on in one main stream; and where religion, law, and poetry supply well-defined borders which hem in on every side the current of language. Among the Turanian nomads no such nucleus of a political, social, or literary character has ever been formed. Empires were no sooner founded than they were scattered again like the sand-clouds of the desert; no laws, no songs, no stories outlived the age of their authors. How quickly language can change, if thus left to itself without any literary standard, we saw in a former Lecture, when treating of the growth of dialects. The most necessary substantives, such as father, mother, daughter, son, have frequently been lost and [pg 291] replaced by synonymes in the different dialects of Turanian speech, and the grammatical terminations have been treated with the same freedom. Nevertheless, some of the Turanian numerals and pronouns, and many Turanian roots, point to a single original source; and the common words and common roots, which have been discovered in the most distant branches of the Turanian stock, warrant the admission of a real, though very distant, genealogical relationship of all Turanian speech.

It's clear that if we expected to see the same familial resemblance among this vast number of languages that links Semitic or Aryan languages together, we'd be let down. However, the very lack of that familial resemblance is one of the standout characteristics of the Turanian dialects. These are Nomad languages, in contrast to Aryan and Semitic languages.301 In the latter, most words and grammatical structures were established just once by the creativity of a single generation, and they weren't easily discarded, even if their original clarity was muddied by phonetic shifts. Transmitting a language this way is only feasible among people whose history flows in a single continuous thread; where religion, law, and poetry create clear boundaries that contain the flow of language. Among the Turanian nomads, no such core of political, social, or literary significance has ever emerged. Empires were quickly established and just as swiftly dispersed like sandstorms in the desert; no laws, songs, or stories lasted beyond their creators' time. We saw, in a previous lecture about the development of dialects, just how rapidly language can change when left unregulated by any literary standard. Basic words like father, mother, daughter, and son have often been lost and replaced by synonyms in the various Turanian dialects, and grammatical endings have been altered with equal liberty. Still, some Turanian numerals and pronouns, as well as many Turanian roots, indicate a single original source; and the shared words and roots found in the most distant branches of the Turanian family support the idea of a real, albeit very distant, genealogical connection among all Turanian languages.

The most characteristic feature of the Turanian languages is what has been called Agglutination, or “gluing together.”302 This means not only that, in their grammar, pronouns are glued to the verbs in order to form the conjugation, or prepositions to substantives in order to form declension. That would not be a distinguishing characteristic of the Turanian or nomad languages; for in Hebrew as well as in Sanskrit, conjugation and declension were originally formed on the same principle. What distinguishes the Turanian languages is, that in them the conjugation and declension can still be taken to pieces; and although the terminations have by no means always retained their significative power as independent words, they are felt as modificatory syllables, and as distinct from the roots to which they are appended.

The most distinctive feature of the Turanian languages is what is known as Agglutination, or “sticking together.”302 This means that, in their grammar, pronouns are attached to verbs to create conjugation, or prepositions to nouns to create declension. That alone wouldn't set the Turanian or nomadic languages apart; in both Hebrew and Sanskrit, conjugation and declension were originally formed on the same basis. What sets the Turanian languages apart is that in them, conjugation and declension can still be broken down; and while the endings haven't always kept their meaning as independent words, they are recognized as modifying syllables and are distinct from the roots they are attached to.

In the Aryan languages the modifications of words, comprised under declension and conjugation, were likewise originally expressed by agglutination. But the component parts began soon to coalesce, so as to form one integral word, liable in its turn to phonetic corruption to such an extent that it became impossible after a [pg 292] time to decide which was the root and which the modificatory element. The difference between an Aryan and a Turanian language is somewhat the same as between good and bad mosaic. The Aryan words seem made of one piece, the Turanian words clearly show the sutures and fissures where the small stones are cemented together.

In the Aryan languages, changes in words, which include declension and conjugation, were originally shown through agglutination. However, the individual parts quickly started to merge into one solid word, leading to phonetic changes that made it hard over time to determine which part was the root and which was the modifying element. The distinction between an Aryan language and a Turanian language is a bit like the difference between a well-made mosaic and a poorly made one. Aryan words appear to be crafted from a single piece, while Turanian words clearly display the seams and cracks where the small stones are held together.

There was a very good reason why the Turanian languages should have remained in this second or agglutinative stage. It was felt essential that the radical portion of each word should stand out in distinct relief, and never be obscured or absorbed, as happens in the third or inflectional stage.

There was a very good reason why the Turanian languages should have stayed in this second or agglutinative stage. It was important that the root part of each word be clearly visible and not hidden or blended, as occurs in the third or inflectional stage.

The French âge, for instance, has lost its whole material body, and is nothing but termination. Age in old French was eage and edage. Edage is a corruption of the Latin œtaticum; œtaticum is a derivative of œtas; œtas an abbreviation of œvitas; œvitas is derived from œvum, and in œvum, œ only is the radical or predicative element, the Sanskrit ây in ây-us, life, which contains the germ from which these various words derive their life and meaning. From œvum the Romans derived œviternus, contracted into œternus, so that age and eternity flow from the same source. What trace of œ or œvum, or even œvitas and œtas, remains in âge? Turanian languages cannot afford such words as âge in their dictionaries. It is an indispensable requirement in a nomadic language that it should be intelligible to many, though their intercourse be but scanty. It requires tradition, society, and literature, to maintain words and forms which can no longer be analyzed at once. Such words would seldom spring up in nomadic languages, [pg 293] or if they did, they would die away with each generation.

The French age, for example, has completely lost its original meaning and is now just a term for ending. Age in Old French was eagerness and edge. Edgy is derived from the Latin œtaticum; œtaticum comes from œtas; œtas is a shortened form of œvitas; œvitas is based on œvum, and within œvum, œ is the core or essential part, like the Sanskrit ây in Ayy, us!, meaning life, which holds the essence from which these different words derive their significance. From œvum, the Romans created œviternus, shortened to œternus, showing that age and forever originate from the same root. What remnants of œ or era, or even œvitas and œtas, are left in age? Turanian languages don’t have similar words like age in their vocabulary. In a nomadic language, it's essential for words to be understandable by many, even if interactions are limited. Such languages need tradition, community, and literature to keep words and forms that can no longer be easily analyzed. These kinds of words would rarely emerge in nomadic languages, and if they did, they would likely fade away with each generation. [pg 293]

The Aryan verb contains many forms in which the personal pronoun is no longer felt distinctly. And yet tradition, custom, and law preserve the life of these veterans, and make us feel unwilling to part with them. But in the ever-shifting state of a nomadic society no debased coin can be tolerated in language, no obscure legend accepted on trust. The metal must be pure, and the legend distinct; that the one may be weighed, and the other, if not deciphered, at least recognized as a well-known guarantee. Hence the small proportion of irregular forms in all agglutinative languages.303

The Aryan verb has many forms where the personal pronoun isn't clearly felt anymore. Yet, tradition, custom, and law keep these longstanding elements alive, making us hesitant to let go of them. However, in the constantly changing world of a nomadic society, no corrupted language can be accepted, and no vague tales can be taken at face value. The language has to be clear, and the stories need to be recognizable; this way, the language can be measured, and the stories, even if not fully understood, can at least be identified as familiar truths. That's why there's such a small number of irregular forms in all agglutinative languages.303

A Turanian might tolerate the Sanskrit,

A Turanian might put up with the Sanskrit,

as-mi, a-si, as-ti, 's-mas, 's-tha, 's-anti,
I am, thou art, he is, we are, you are, they are;

or even the Latin,

or even the Latin,

's-um, e-s, es-t, 'su-mus, es-tis, 'sunt.

In these instances, with a few exceptions, root and affix are as distinguishable as, for instance, in Turkish:

In these cases, with a few exceptions, root and affix are as clear as, for example, in Turkish:

bakar-im, bakar-sin, bakar,
I regard, thou regardest, he regards.
bakar-iz, bakar-siniz, bakar-lar
we regard, you regard, they regard.

But a conjugation like the Hindustání, which is a modern Aryan dialect,

But a conjugation like Hindustání, which is a modern Aryan dialect,

hun, hai, hai, hain, ho, hain,

would not be compatible with the genius of the Turanian languages, because it would not answer the requirements of a nomadic life. Turanian dialects [pg 294] exhibit either no terminational distinctions at all, as in Mandshu, which is a Tungusic dialect; or a complete and intelligible system of affixes, as in the spoken dialect of Nyertchinsk, equally of Tungusic descent. But a state of conjugation in which, through phonetic corruption, the suffix of the first person singular and plural, and of the third person plural are the same, where there is no distinction between the second and third persons singular, and between the first and third persons plural, would necessarily lead, in a Turanian dialect, to the adoption of new and more expressive forms. New pronouns would have to be used to mark the persons, or some other expedient be resorted to for the same purpose.

would not fit the characteristics of the Turanian languages because it wouldn’t meet the needs of a nomadic lifestyle. Turanian dialects [pg 294] show either no ending distinctions at all, like Mandshu, which is a Tungusic dialect; or a complete and clear system of prefixes and suffixes, as seen in the spoken dialect of Nyertchinsk, also of Tungusic descent. However, a conjugation system where the first person singular and plural, as well as the third person plural, all use the same suffix, and where there’s no distinction between the second and third singular forms, or between the first and third plural forms, would naturally lead to the creation of new and more expressive forms in a Turanian dialect. New pronouns would need to be introduced to differentiate the persons, or some other method would need to be used for that purpose.

And this will make it still more clear why the Turanian languages, or in fact all languages in this second or agglutinative stage, though protected against phonetic corruption more than the Aryan and Semitic languages, are so much exposed to the changes produced by dialectical regeneration. A Turanian retains, as it were, the consciousness of his language and grammar. The idea, for instance, which he connects with a plural is that of a noun followed by a syllable indicative of plurality; a passive with him is a verb followed by a syllable expressive of suffering, or eating, or going.304 Now these determinative ideas may be expressed in various ways, and though in one and the same clan, and during one period of time, a certain number of terminations would become stationary, and be assigned to the expression of certain grammatical categories, such as the plural, the passive, the genitive, different hordes, as they separated, would still feel [pg 295] themselves at liberty to repeat the process of grammatical composition, and defy the comparative grammarian to prove the identity of the terminations, even in dialects so closely allied as Finnish and Hungarian, or Tamil and Telugu.

And this will make it even clearer why the Turanian languages, or really all languages in this second or agglutinative stage, while being more protected against phonetic changes than the Aryan and Semitic languages, are still highly susceptible to the alterations brought on by dialectical development. A Turanian speaker maintains, in a sense, an awareness of their language and grammar. For example, the concept they associate with a plural is that of a noun followed by a syllable that indicates plurality; a passive form is a verb followed by a syllable that conveys suffering, eating, or movement. Now, these definitive ideas can be expressed in different ways, and although within the same clan and over a certain period, a specific set of endings might stabilize and be designated for certain grammatical categories like the plural, passive, or genitive, different groups, as they separated, would still feel free to repeat the grammatical composition process, challenging the comparative grammarian to demonstrate the sameness of the endings, even in dialects as closely related as Finnish and Hungarian, or Tamil and Telugu.

It must not be supposed, however, that Turanian or agglutinative languages are forever passing through this process of grammatical regeneration. Where nomadic tribes approach to a political organization, their language, though Turanian, may approach to the system of political or traditional languages, such as Sanskrit or Hebrew. This is indeed the case with the most advanced members of the Turanian family, the Hungarian, the Finnish, the Tamil, Telugu, &c. Many of their grammatical terminations have suffered by phonetic corruption, but they have not been replaced by new and more expressive words. The termination of the plural is lu in Telugu, and this is probably a mere corruption of gaḷ., the termination of the plural in Tamil. The only characteristic Turanian feature which always remains is this: the root is never obscured. Besides this, the determining or modifying syllables are generally placed at the end, and the vowels do not become so absolutely fixed for each syllable as in Sanskrit or Hebrew. On the contrary, there is what is called the Law of Harmony, according to which the vowels of each word may be changed and modulated so as to harmonize with the key-note struck by its chief vowel. The vowels in Turkish, for instance, are divided into two classes, sharp and flat. If a verb contains a sharp vowel in its radical portion, the vowels of the terminations are all sharp, while the same terminations, if following a root with a [pg 296] flat vowel, modulate their own vowels into the flat key. Thus we have sev-mek, to love, but bak-mak, to regard, mek or mak being the termination of the infinitive. Thus we say, ev-ler, the houses, but at-lar, the horses, ler or lar being the termination of the plural.

It shouldn't be assumed, however, that Turanian or agglutinative languages are constantly undergoing this process of grammatical regeneration. When nomadic tribes move towards political organization, their language, even if it’s Turanian, can start resembling the structure of political or traditional languages, like Sanskrit or Hebrew. This is true for the most advanced members of the Turanian family, such as Hungarian, Finnish, Tamil, Telugu, etc. Many of their grammatical endings have been altered through phonetic corruption, but they haven’t been replaced with new, more expressive terms. The plural ending is lu in Telugu, likely a corruption of gaḷ., the plural ending in Tamil. The one characteristic Turanian feature that always remains is this: the root is never obscured. Moreover, the determining or modifying syllables are usually placed at the end, and the vowels are not as strictly fixed for each syllable as in Sanskrit or Hebrew. On the contrary, there is what is called the Law of Harmony, where the vowels of each word can be changed and adjusted to harmonize with the key-note set by its main vowel. For example, in Turkish, vowels are categorized into two groups: sharp and flat. If a verb has a sharp vowel in its root, all the termination vowels are also sharp, while those following a root with a flat vowel adjust to the flat key. For instance, we have sev-mek, which means to love, but bak-mak, to regard, where mek or mak is the infinitive ending. So we say, homes, the houses, but at-large, the horses, with ler or lar being the plural ending.

No Aryan or Semitic language has preserved a similar freedom in the harmonic arrangement of its vowels, while traces of it have been found among the most distant members of the Turanian family, as in Hungarian, Mongolian, Turkish, the Yakut, spoken in the north of Siberia, and in dialects spoken on the eastern frontiers of India.

No Aryan or Semitic language has maintained a similar flexibility in how its vowels are arranged. However, some traces of this can be found among the most distant members of the Turanian family, like Hungarian, Mongolian, Turkish, Yakut (spoken in northern Siberia), and in dialects spoken along the eastern borders of India.

For completeness' sake I add a short account of the Turanian family, chiefly taken from my Survey of Languages, published 1855:—

For the sake of completeness, I’m including a brief overview of the Turanian family, mostly taken from my Survey of Languages, published in 1855:—

Tungusic Class.

Tungusic Class.

The Tungusic branch extends from China northward to Siberia and westward to 113°, where the river Tunguska partly marks its frontier. The Tungusic tribes in Siberia are under Russian sway. Other Tungusic tribes belong to the Chinese empire, and are known by the name of Mandshu, a name taken after they had conquered China in 1644, and founded the present imperial dynasty.

The Tungusic branch stretches from China up to Siberia and west to 113°, where the Tunguska River partially defines its border. The Tungusic tribes in Siberia are under Russian control. Other Tungusic tribes are part of the Chinese empire and are referred to as Mandshu, a name they adopted after conquering China in 1644 and establishing the current imperial dynasty.

Mongolic Class.

Mongolic Studies.

The original seats of the people who speak Mongolic dialects lie near the Lake Baikal and in the eastern parts of Siberia, where we find them as early as the ninth century after Christ. They were divided into three classes, the Mongols proper, the Buriäts, and the Ölöts or Kalmüks. Chingis-khán (1227) united [pg 297] them into a nation and founded the Mongolian empire, which included, however, not only Mongolic, but Tungusic and Turkic, commonly called Tataric, tribes.

The original homes of the people who speak Mongolic dialects are near Lake Baikal and in the eastern parts of Siberia, where we find them as early as the 9th century AD. They were divided into three groups: the Mongols proper, the Buryats, and the Ölöts or Kalmuks. Chingis-khán (1227) united them into one nation and established the Mongolian empire, which included not just Mongolic tribes, but also Tungusic and Turkic tribes, often referred to as Tataric.

The name of Tatar soon became the terror of Asia and Europe, and it was applied promiscuously to all the nomadic warriors whom Asia then poured forth over Europe. Originally Tatar was a name of the Mongolic races, but through their political ascendency in Asia after Chingis-khán, it became usual to call all the tribes which were under Mongolian sway by the name of Tatar. In linguistic works Tataric is now used in two several senses. Following the example of writers of the Middle Ages, Tataric, like Scythian in Greek, has been fixed upon as the general term comprising all languages spoken by the nomadic tribes of Asia. Hence it is used sometimes in the same sense in which we use Turanian. Secondly, Tataric has become the name of that class of Turanian languages of which the Turkish is the most prominent member. While the Mongolic class—that which in fact has the greatest claims to the name of Tataric—is never so called, it has become an almost universal custom to apply this name to the third or Turkic branch of the Ural-Altaic division; and the races belonging to this branch have in many instances themselves adopted the name. These Turkish, or as they are more commonly called, Tataric races, were settled on the northern side of the Caspian Sea, and on the Black Sea, and were known as Komanes, Pechenegs, and Bulgars, when conquered by the Mongolic army of the son of Chingis-khán, who founded the Kapchakian empire, extending from the Dniestr to the Yemba and the Kirgisian steppes. Russia for two centuries was under the sway of these [pg 298] Kháns, known as the Khans of the Golden Horde. This empire was dissolved towards the end of the fifteenth century, and several smaller kingdoms rose out of its ruins. Among these Krim, Kasan, and Astrachan, were the most important. The princes of these kingdoms still gloried in their descent from Chingis-khán, and had hence a right to the name of Mongols or Tatars. But their armies and subjects also, who were of Turkish blood, received the name of their princes; and their languages continued to be called Tataric, even after the tribes by whom they were spoken had been brought under the Russian sceptre, and were no longer governed by khans of Mongolic or Tataric origin. It would perhaps be desirable to use Turkic instead of Tataric, when speaking of the third branch of the northern division of the Turanian family, did not a change of terminology generally produce as much confusion as it remedies. The recollection of their non-Tataric, i.e. non-Mongolic origin, remains, it appears, among the so-called Tatars of Kasan and Astrachan. If asked whether they are Tatars, they reply no; and they call their language Turki or Turuk, but not Tatari. Nay, they consider Tatar as a term of abuse, synonymous with robber, evidently from a recollection that their ancestors had once been conquered and enslaved by Mongolic, that is, Tataric, tribes. All this rests on the authority of Klaproth, who during his stay in Russia had great opportunities of studying the languages spoken on the frontiers of this half-Asiatic empire.

The name Tatar quickly became a source of fear across Asia and Europe, and it was used broadly to refer to all the wandering warriors coming from Asia into Europe. Originally, Tatar referred to the Mongolic races, but after Chingis-khán's rise to power in Asia, it became common to call all the tribes under Mongolian influence by the name Tatar. In linguistic studies, Tataric now has two different meanings. Following the example of medieval writers, Tataric, similar to Scythian in Greek, is the general term that includes all the languages spoken by the nomadic tribes of Asia. Therefore, it is sometimes used in the same way we use Turanian. Secondly, Tataric has come to refer specifically to that group of Turanian languages, with Turkish being the most well-known. While the Mongolic class—which actually has the best claim to the name Tataric—is not referred to as such, it has become almost customary to apply the name to the Turkic branch of the Ural-Altaic family, and many of these Turkic races have accepted this name themselves. These Turkish, or more commonly called Tataric, races settled on the northern shores of the Caspian Sea and the Black Sea, and were known as Komanes, Pechenegs, and Bulgars when conquered by the Mongolic army led by Chingis-khán's son, who established the Kapchakian empire that stretched from the Dniestr to the Yemba and the Kirgisian steppes. For two centuries, Russia was under the control of these Khans known as the Khans of the Golden Horde. This empire fell apart towards the end of the fifteenth century, leading to the rise of several smaller kingdoms from its remnants. Among them, Krim, Kasan, and Astrachan were the most significant. The princes of these kingdoms were proud of their ancestry from Chingis-khán and thus claimed the title of Mongols or Tatars. However, their armies and subjects, who were of Turkish descent, adopted the name of their princes, and their languages continued to be called Tataric even after the tribes who spoke them fell under Russian rule and were no longer governed by khans of Mongolic or Tataric origin. It might be better to use Turkic instead of Tataric when addressing the Turkic branch of the northern division of the Turanian family, but changing terminology usually causes as much confusion as it solves. The awareness of their non-Tataric, that is non-Mongolic roots seems to persist among the so-called Tatars of Kasan and Astrachan. When asked if they are Tatars, they say no; they refer to their language as Turki or Turuk, but not Tatari. In fact, they view Tatar as an insult, meaning robber, likely due to the memory of their ancestors being conquered and enslaved by Mongolic, that is, Tataric, tribes. All this is based on the research of Klaproth, who had ample opportunities to study the languages spoken at the borders of this semi-Asiatic empire during his time in Russia.

The conquests of the Mongols or the descendants of Chingis-khán were not confined, however, to these Turkish tribes. They conquered China in the east, where they founded the Mongolic dynasty of Yuan, [pg 299] and in the west, after subduing the khalifs of Bagdad, and the Sultans of Iconium, they conquered Moscow, and devastated the greater part of Russia. In 1240 they invaded Poland, in 1241 Silesia. Here they recoiled before the united armies of Germany, Poland, and Silesia. They retired into Moravia, and having exhausted that country, occupied Hungary. At that time they had to choose a new khan, which could only be done at Karakorum, the old capital of their empire. Thither they withdrew to elect an emperor to govern an empire which then extended from China to Poland, from India to Siberia. But a realm of such vast proportions could not be long held together, and towards the end of the thirteenth century it broke up into several independent states, all under Mongolian princes, but no longer under one khan of khans. Thus new independent Mongolic empires arose in China, Turkestan, Siberia, Southern Russia, and Persia. In 1360, the Mongolian dynasty was driven out of China; in the fifteenth century they lost their hold on Russia. In Central Asia they rallied once more under Timur (1369), whose sway was again acknowledged from Karakorum to Persia and Anatolia. But in 1468, this empire also fell by its own weight, and for want of powerful rulers like Chingis-khán or Timur. In Jagatai alone, the country extending from the Aral Lake to the Hindu-kush, between the rivers Oxus and Yaxartes (Jihon and Sihon), and once governed by Jagatai, the son of Chingis-khán—the Mongolian dynasty maintained itself, and thence it was that Baber, a descendant of Timur, conquered India, and founded there a Mongolian dynasty, surviving up to our own times in the Great Moguls of Delhi. Most Mongolic tribes are now under the sway of the nations [pg 300] whom they once had conquered, the Tungusic sovereigns of China, the Russian czars, and the Turkish sultans.

The conquests of the Mongols, or the descendants of Chingis-khán, weren't just limited to these Turkish tribes. They took over China in the east, where they established the Mongol Yuan dynasty, [pg 299] and in the west, after defeating the caliphs of Baghdad and the Sultans of Iconium, they captured Moscow and devastated much of Russia. In 1240, they invaded Poland, and in 1241, Silesia. Here, they were pushed back by the combined forces of Germany, Poland, and Silesia. They retreated into Moravia, and after exhausting that region, they occupied Hungary. At that time, they needed to select a new khan, which could only be done in Karakorum, their old capital. They went there to choose an emperor to rule over an empire that stretched from China to Poland and from India to Siberia. But such a vast empire couldn't stay together for long, and by the end of the thirteenth century, it fragmented into several independent states, all ruled by Mongolian princes but no longer united under one khan of khans. Consequently, new independent Mongolian empires emerged in China, Turkestan, Siberia, Southern Russia, and Persia. In 1360, the Mongolian dynasty was ousted from China; in the fifteenth century, they lost their grip on Russia. In Central Asia, they regrouped under Timur (1369), whose authority was once again recognized from Karakorum to Persia and Anatolia. But by 1468, this empire also collapsed under its own weight, lacking strong leaders like Chingis-khán or Timur. Only in Jagatai, the region stretching from the Aral Sea to the Hindu Kush, between the rivers Oxus and Yaxartes (Jihon and Sihon), which was once ruled by Jagatai, the son of Chingis-khán, did the Mongolian dynasty persist. It was from there that Baber, a descendant of Timur, conquered India and established a Mongolian dynasty that survived into modern times as the Great Moguls of Delhi. Most Mongolian tribes are now under the control of the nations [pg 300] they once conquered—the Tungusic rulers of China, the Russian czars, and the Turkish sultans.

The Mongolic language, although spoken (but not continuously) from China as far as the Volga, has given rise to but few dialects. Next to Tungusic, the Mongolic is the poorest language of the Turanian family, and the scantiness of grammatical terminations accounts for the fact that, as a language, it has remained very much unchanged. There is, however, a distinction between the language as spoken by the Eastern, Western, and Northern tribes, and incipient traces of grammatical life have lately been discovered by Castrén, the great Swedish traveller and Turanian philologist, in the spoken dialect of the Buriäts. In it the persons of the verb are distinguished by affixes, while, according to the rules of Mongolic grammar, no other dialect distinguishes in the verb between amo, amas, amat.

The Mongolic language, although spoken (but not continuously) from China all the way to the Volga, has resulted in very few dialects. Next to Tungusic, Mongolic is the least developed language in the Turanian family, and its limited grammatical endings explain why it has remained largely unchanged. However, there is a difference between how the Eastern, Western, and Northern tribes speak the language, and recent studies by Castrén, the renowned Swedish traveler and Turanian language expert, have found early signs of grammatical development in the spoken dialect of the Buriäts. In this dialect, the verb forms are marked by affixes, whereas, according to traditional Mongolic grammar, no other dialect distinguishes between amo, amas, amat.

The Mongols who live in Europe have fixed their tents on each side of the Volga and along the coast of the Caspian Sea near Astrachan. Another colony is found south-east of Sembirsk. They belong to the Western branch, and are Ölöts or Kalmüks, who left their seats on the Koko-nur, and entered Europe in 1662. They proceeded from the clans Dürbet and Torgod, but most of the Torgods returned again in 1770, and their descendants are now scattered over the Kirgisian steppes.

The Mongols living in Europe have set up their tents on both sides of the Volga River and along the Caspian Sea coast near Astrakhan. Another community is located southeast of Sembirsk. They are part of the Western branch and are Ölöts or Kalmuks, who left their lands in Koko-nur and entered Europe in 1662. They originally came from the Dürbet and Torgod clans, but most of the Torgods returned in 1770, and their descendants are now spread out over the Kirghiz steppes.

Turkic Class.

Turkic Class.

Much more important are the languages belonging to the third branch of the Turanian family, most prominent among which is the Turkish or Osmanli of [pg 301] Constantinople. The number of the Turkish inhabitants of European Turkey is indeed small. It is generally stated at 2,000,000; but Shafarik estimates the number of genuine Turks at not more than 700,000, who rule over fifteen millions of people. The different Turkic dialects of which the Osmanli is one, occupy one of the largest linguistic areas, extending from the Lena and the Polar Sea, down to the Adriatic.

Much more important are the languages from the third branch of the Turanian family, the most notable being Turkish or Osmanli from [pg 301] Constantinople. The number of Turkish residents in European Turkey is indeed small. It is generally estimated to be around 2,000,000; however, Shafarik estimates that there are no more than 700,000 genuine Turks who govern over fifteen million people. The various Turkic dialects, including Osmanli, cover one of the largest linguistic regions, ranging from the Lena and the Polar Sea down to the Adriatic.

The most ancient name by which the Turkic tribes of Central Asia were known to the Chinese was Hiung-nu. These Hiung-nu founded an empire (206 b. c.) comprising a large portion of Asia, west of China. Engaged in frequent wars with the Chinese, they were defeated at last in the middle of the first century after Christ. Thereupon they divided into a northern and southern empire; and, after the southern Hiung-nu had become subjects of China, they attacked the northern Hiung-nu, together with the Chinese, and, driving them out of their seats between the rivers Amur and Selenga, and the Altai mountains, westward, they are supposed to have given the first impulse to the inroads of the barbarians into Europe. In the beginning of the third century, the Mongolic and Tungusic tribes, who had filled the seats of the northern Hiung-nu, had grown so powerful as to attack the southern Hiung-nu and drive them from their territories. This occasioned a second migration of Asiatic tribes towards the west.

The oldest name that the Turkic tribes of Central Asia were known by to the Chinese was Hiung-nu. These Hiung-nu established an empire (206 b.c.) that covered a large part of Asia, west of China. They frequently fought wars against the Chinese and were ultimately defeated in the middle of the first century AD. After that, they split into a northern and southern empire; when the southern Hiung-nu became subjects of China, they joined forces with the Chinese to attack the northern Hiung-nu. Together, they drove them out of their lands between the Amur and Selenga rivers and the Altai mountains, pushing westward, and are believed to have sparked the initial invasions of barbarians into Europe. By the early third century, the Mongolic and Tungusic tribes that had taken over the northern Hiung-nu's territory became so powerful that they attacked the southern Hiung-nu and forced them out of their lands. This led to a second wave of migrations of Asian tribes towards the west.

Another name by which the Chinese designate these Hiung-nu or Turkish tribes is Tu-kiu. This Tu-kiu is supposed to be identical with Turk, and, although the tribe to which this name was given was originally but small, it began to spread in the sixth century from [pg 302] the Altai to the Caspian, and it was probably to them that in 569 the Emperor Justinian sent an ambassador in the person of Semarchos. The empire of the Tu-kiu was destroyed in the eighth century, by the 'Hui-'he (Chinese Kao-che). This tribe, equally of Turkish origin, maintained itself for about a century, and was then conquered by the Chinese and driven back from the northern borders of China. Part of the 'Hui-'he occupied Tangut, and, after a second defeat by the Mongolians in 1257, the remnant proceeded still further west, and joined the Uigurs, whose tents were pitched near the towns of Turfan, 'Kashgar, 'Hamil, and Aksu.

Another name the Chinese use for these Hiung-nu or Turkish tribes is Tu-kiu. This Tu-kiu is believed to be the same as Turk, and although the tribe associated with this name started out small, it began to spread in the sixth century from the Altai to the Caspian Sea. It’s likely that it was to them that Emperor Justinian sent an ambassador named Semarchos in 569. The Tu-kiu empire was destroyed in the eighth century by the 'Hui-'he (Chinese Kao-che). This tribe, also of Turkish origin, lasted for about a century before being conquered by the Chinese and pushed back from northern China. Part of the 'Hui-'he settled in Tangut, and after suffering a second defeat by the Mongolians in 1257, the remnants moved further west and joined the Uigurs, whose camps were located near the towns of Turfan, Kashgar, Hamil, and Aksu.

These facts, gleaned chiefly from Chinese historians, show from the very earliest times the westward tendency of the Turkish nations. In 568 Turkish tribes occupied the country between the Volga and the sea of Azov, and numerous reinforcements have since strengthened their position in those parts.

These facts, primarily gathered from Chinese historians, demonstrate that Turkish nations have been moving westward since ancient times. In 568, Turkish tribes settled in the region between the Volga River and the Sea of Azov, and many reinforcements have since bolstered their presence in those areas.

The northern part of Persia, west of the Caspian Sea, Armenia, the south of Georgia, Shirwan, and Dagestan, harbor a Turkic population, known by the general name of Turkman or Kisil-bash (Red-caps). They are nomadic robbers, and their arrival in these countries dates from the eleventh and twelfth centuries.

The northern part of Persia, west of the Caspian Sea, Armenia, southern Georgia, Shirwan, and Dagestan, are home to a Turkic population commonly referred to as Turkman or Kisil-bash (Red-caps). They are nomadic bandits, and their presence in these regions dates back to the eleventh and twelfth centuries.

East of the Caspian Sea the Turkman tribes are under command of the Usbek-Khans of Khiva, Fergana, and Bukhára. They call themselves, however, not subjects but guests of these Khans. Still more to the east the Turkmans are under Chinese sovereignty, and in the south-west they reach as far as Khorasan and other provinces of Persia.

East of the Caspian Sea, the Turkmen tribes are under the leadership of the Usbek-Khans of Khiva, Fergana, and Bukhara. They refer to themselves not as subjects but as guests of these Khans. Further east, the Turkmen are under Chinese control, and to the southwest, they extend as far as Khorasan and other provinces of Persia.

The Usbeks, descendants of the 'Huy-'he and Uigurs, [pg 303] and originally settled in the neighborhood of the towns of 'Hoten, Kashgar, Turfan, and 'Hamil, crossed the Yaxartes in the sixteenth century, and after several successful campaigns gained possession of Balkh, Kharism (Khiva), Bukhára, and Ferganah. In the latter country and in Balkh they have become agricultural; but generally their life is nomadic, and too warlike to be called pastoral.

The Usbeks, descendants of the 'Huy-'he and Uigurs, [pg 303] originally settled near the towns of 'Hoten, Kashgar, Turfan, and 'Hamil. In the sixteenth century, they crossed the Yaxartes River and, after several successful campaigns, took control of Balkh, Kharism (Khiva), Bukhára, and Ferganah. In these regions, especially in Balkh, they became agricultural, but overall, their lifestyle is nomadic and too warrior-like to be considered pastoral.

Another Turkish tribe are the Nogái, west of the Caspian, and also north of the Black Sea. To the beginning of the seventeenth century they lived north-east of the Caspian, and the steppes on the left of the Irtish bore their name. Pressed by the Kalmüks, a Mongolic tribe, the Nogáis advanced westward as far as Astrachan. Peter I. transferred them thence to the north of the Caucasian mountains, where they still graze their flocks on the shores of the Kuban and the Kuma. One horde, that of Kundur, remained on the Volga, subject to the Kalmüks.

Another Turkish tribe is the Nogái, located west of the Caspian Sea and also north of the Black Sea. By the early seventeenth century, they lived northeast of the Caspian, and the steppes to the left of the Irtish River carried their name. Pressured by the Kalmüks, a Mongolic tribe, the Nogáis moved westward all the way to Astrachan. Peter I then relocated them to the north of the Caucasian mountains, where they still graze their flocks along the shores of the Kuban and the Kuma rivers. One group, known as the Kundur horde, stayed on the Volga and remained under the Kalmüks' control.

Another tribe of Turkish origin in the Caucasus are the Bazianes. They now live near the sources of the Kuban, but before the fifteenth century within the town Majari, on the Kuma.

Another tribe of Turkish origin in the Caucasus is the Bazianes. They currently live near the sources of the Kuban River, but before the fifteenth century, they resided in the town of Majari, on the Kuma.

A third Turkish tribe in the Caucasus are the Kumüks on the rivers Sunja, Aksai, and Koisu: now subjects of Russia, though under native princes.

A third Turkish tribe in the Caucasus is the Kumüks, located by the rivers Sunja, Aksai, and Koisu: they are now subjects of Russia, though still led by local princes.

The southern portion of the Altaic mountains has long been inhabited by the Bashkirs, a race considerably mixed with Mongolic blood, savage and ignorant, subjects of Russia, and Mohammedans by faith. Their land is divided into four Roads, called the Roads of Siberia, of Kasan, of Nogai, and of Osa, a place on the Kama. Among the Bashkirs, and in villages [pg 304] near Ufa, is now settled a Turkish tribe, the Mescheräks who formerly lived near the Volga.

The southern part of the Altaic mountains has been home to the Bashkirs for a long time. They are a group that is significantly mixed with Mongolic ancestry, considered wild and uneducated, and are subjects of Russia, practicing Islam. Their territory is divided into four routes known as the Roads of Siberia, Kasan, Nogai, and Osa, which is located by the Kama River. Among the Bashkirs, and in villages [pg 304] near Ufa, there is now a Turkish tribe, the Mescheräks, who used to live near the Volga.

The tribes near the Lake of Aral are called Kara-Kalpak. They are subject partly to Russia, partly to the Khans of Khiva.

The tribes around the Aral Sea are known as Kara-Kalpak. They are under the authority of both Russia and the Khans of Khiva.

The Turks of Siberia, commonly called Tatars, are partly original settlers, who crossed the Ural, and founded the Khanat of Sibir, partly later colonists. Their chief towns are Tobolsk, Yeniseisk, and Tomsk. Separate tribes are the Uran'hat on the Chulym, and the Barabas in the steppes between the Irtish and the Ob.

The Turks of Siberia, often referred to as Tatars, are made up of both original settlers who crossed the Ural Mountains and established the Khanat of Sibir, as well as later colonists. Their main towns include Tobolsk, Yeniseisk, and Tomsk. Distinct tribes include the Uran'hat along the Chulym River and the Barabas in the steppes between the Irtysh and the Ob Rivers.

The dialects of these Siberian Turks are considerably intermingled with foreign words, taken from Mongolic, Samoyedic, or Russian sources. Still they resemble one another closely in all that belongs to the original stock of the language.

The dialects of these Siberian Turks are heavily mixed with foreign words from Mongolic, Samoyedic, or Russian origins. However, they closely resemble each other in everything that comes from the original language.

In the north-east of Asia, on both sides of the river Lena, the Yakuts form the most remote link in the Turkic chain of languages. Their male population has lately risen to 100,000, while in 1795 it amounted only to 50,066. The Russians became first acquainted with them in 1620. They call themselves Sakha, and are mostly heathen, though Christianity is gaining ground among them. According to their traditions, their ancestors lived for a long time in company with Mongolic tribes, and traces of this can still be discovered in their language. Attacked by their neighbors, they built rafts and floated down the river Lena, where they settled in the neighborhood of what is now Yakutzk. Their original seats seem to have been north-west of Lake Baikal. Their language has preserved the Turkic type more completely than any other Turco-Tataric [pg 305] dialect. Separated from the common stock at an early time, and removed from the disturbing influences to which the other dialects were exposed, whether in war or in peace, the Yakutian has preserved so many primitive features of Tataric grammar, that even now it may be used as a key to the grammatical forms of the Osmanli and other more cultivated Turkic dialects.

In the northeast of Asia, along both sides of the Lena River, the Yakuts represent the most isolated link in the Turkic language family. Their male population has recently grown to 100,000, compared to just 50,066 in 1795. The Russians first encountered them in 1620. They refer to themselves as Sakha and are mostly pagan, although Christianity is spreading among them. According to their traditions, their ancestors lived for a long time alongside Mongolic tribes, and remnants of this can still be found in their language. Under attack from their neighbors, they constructed rafts and floated down the Lena River, where they settled near what is now Yakutsk. Their original homeland seems to have been northwest of Lake Baikal. Their language has maintained the Turkic characteristics more completely than any other Turco-Tataric dialect. Having separated from the main group early on and being shielded from the influences that affected other dialects during times of conflict or peace, the Yakutian language has retained many primitive aspects of Tataric grammar, so much so that it can still serve as a key to the grammatical forms of Osmanli and other more developed Turkic dialects.

Southern Siberia is the mother country of the Kirgis, one of the most numerous tribes of Turco-Tataric origin. The Kirgis lived originally between the Ob and Yenisei, where Mongolic tribes settled among them. At the beginning of the seventeenth century the Russians became acquainted with the Eastern Kirgis, then living along the Yenisei. In 1606 they had become tributary to Russia, and after several wars with two neighboring tribes, they were driven more and more south-westward, till they left Siberia altogether at the beginning of the eighteenth century. They now live at Burut, in Chinese Turkestan, together with the Kirgis of the “Great Horde,” near the town of Kashgar, north as far as the Irtish.

Southern Siberia is the homeland of the Kirgis, one of the largest tribes of Turco-Tataric origin. The Kirgis originally lived between the Ob and Yenisei rivers, where Mongolic tribes settled among them. At the start of the seventeenth century, the Russians encountered the Eastern Kirgis, who were then living along the Yenisei. By 1606, they had become subjects of Russia, and after several wars with two neighboring tribes, they were gradually pushed further southwest until they left Siberia completely at the beginning of the eighteenth century. They now reside at Burut in Chinese Turkestan, alongside the Kirgis of the “Great Horde,” near the town of Kashgar, extending north as far as the Irtish.

Another tribe is that of the Western Kirgis, or Kirgis-Kasak, who are partly independent, partly tributary to Russia and China.

Another tribe is the Western Kirgis, or Kirgis-Kasak, who are partly independent and partly pay tribute to Russia and China.

Of what are called the three Kirgis Hordes, from the Caspian Sea east as far as Lake Tenghiz, the Small Horde is fixed in the west, between the rivers Yemba and Ural; the Great Horde in the east; while the most powerful occupies the centre between the Sarasu and Yemba, and is called the Middle Horde. Since 1819, the Great Horde has been subject to Russia. Other Kirgis tribes, though nominally subject to Russia, are really her most dangerous enemies.

Of the three Kirgis Hordes, which stretch from the Caspian Sea all the way to Lake Tenghiz, the Small Horde is located in the west, between the Yemba and Ural rivers; the Great Horde is in the east; and the most powerful one is in the center, between the Sarasu and Yemba, known as the Middle Horde. Since 1819, the Great Horde has been under Russian control. Other Kirgis tribes, although they are officially subject to Russia, are actually some of its biggest threats.

[pg 306]

The Turks of Asia Minor and Syria came from Khorasan and Eastern Persia, and are Turkmans, or remnants of the Seljuks, the rulers of Persia during the Middle Ages. The Osmanli, whom we are accustomed to call Turks par excellence, and who form the ruling portion of the Turkish empire, must be traced to the same source. They are now scattered over the whole Turkish empire in Europe, Asia, and Africa, and their number amounts to between 11,000,000 and 12,000,000. They form the landed gentry, the aristocracy, and bureaucracy of Turkey; and their language, the Osmanli, is spoken by persons of rank and education, and by all government authorities in Syria, in Egypt, at Tunis, and at Tripoli. In the southern provinces of Asiatic Russia, along the borders of the Caspian, and through the whole of Turkestan, it is the language of the people. It is heard even at the court of Teheran, and is understood by official personages in Persia.

The Turks of Asia Minor and Syria originated from Khorasan and Eastern Persia and are Turkmans, or descendants of the Seljuks, who ruled Persia during the Middle Ages. The Osmanli, whom we typically refer to as Turks in a class of its own, and who make up the ruling class of the Turkish empire, can be traced back to the same roots. They are now spread across the entire Turkish empire in Europe, Asia, and Africa, numbering between 11,000,000 and 12,000,000. They represent the landed gentry, aristocracy, and bureaucracy of Turkey; their language, Osmanli, is spoken by educated individuals and all government officials in Syria, Egypt, Tunis, and Tripoli. In the southern provinces of Asiatic Russia, along the Caspian borders, and throughout Turkestan, it is the people’s language. It is even heard at the court in Teheran and is understood by officials in Persia.

The rise of this powerful tribe of Osman, and the spreading of that Turkish dialect which is now emphatically called the Turkish, are matters of historical notoriety. We need not search for evidence in Chinese annals, or try to discover analogies between names that a Greek or an Arabic writer may by chance have heard and handed down to us, and which some of these tribes have preserved to the present day. The ancestors of the Osman Turks are men as well known to European historians as Charlemagne or Alfred. It was in the year 1224 that Soliman-shah and his tribe, pressed by Mongolians, left Khorasan and pushed westward into Syria, Armenia, and Asia Minor. Soliman's son, Ertoghrul, took service under Aladdin, the Seljuk Sultan [pg 307] of Iconium (Nicæa), and after several successful campaigns against Greeks and Mongolians, received part of Phrygia as his own, and there founded what was afterwards to become the basis of the Osmanic empire. During the last years of the thirteenth century the Sultans of Iconium lost their power, and their former vassals became independent sovereigns. Osman, after taking his share of the spoil in Asia, advanced through the Olympic passes into Bithynia and was successful against the armies of the Emperors of Byzantium. Osman became henceforth the national name of his people. His son, Orkhan, whose capital was Prusa (Bursa), after conquering Nicomedia (1327) and Nicæa (1330), threatened the Hellespont. He took the title of Padishah, and his court was called the “High Porte.” His son, Soliman, crossed the Hellespont (1357), and took possession of Gallipoli and Sestos. He thus became master of the Dardanelles. Murad I. took Adrianople (1362), made it his capital, conquered Macedonia, and, after a severe struggle, overthrew the united forces of the Slavonic races south of the Danube, the Bulgarians, Servians, and Kroatians, in the battle of Kossova-polye (1389). He fell himself, but his successor Bayazeth, followed his course, took Thessaly, passed Thermopylæ, and devastated the Peloponnesus. The Emperor of Germany, Sigismund, who advanced at the head of an army composed of French, German, and Slavonic soldiers, was defeated by Bayazeth on the Danube in the battle of Nicopolis, 1399. Bayazeth took Bosnia, and would have taken Constantinople, had not the same Mongolians, who in 1244 drove the first Turkish tribes westward into Persia, threatened again their newly acquired possessions. Timur had grasped the reins fallen from the hands of Chingis-khán: Bayazeth [pg 308] was compelled to meet him, and suffered defeat (1402) in the battle of Angora (Ankyra) in Galatia.

The rise of the powerful Osman tribe and the spread of what is now distinctly known as the Turkish language are well-documented in history. We don't need to look for proof in Chinese records or try to find connections between names that a Greek or Arabic writer might have heard and passed down to us, which some of these tribes have kept to this day. The ancestors of the Osman Turks are as familiar to European historians as Charlemagne or Alfred. In 1224, Soliman-shah and his tribe, fleeing from the Mongolians, left Khorasan and moved west into Syria, Armenia, and Asia Minor. Soliman's son, Ertoghrul, served under Aladdin, the Seljuk Sultan of Iconium (Nicaea), and after several successful battles against the Greeks and Mongolians, he gained part of Phrygia and established what would later become the foundation of the Osmanic empire. By the end of the thirteenth century, the Sultans of Iconium had lost their power, and their former vassals became independent rulers. Osman, after taking his share of the spoils in Asia, moved through the Olympic passes into Bithynia and achieved victories against the armies of the Byzantine Emperors. Osman then became the national name for his people. His son, Orkhan, whose capital was Prusa (Bursa), conquered Nicomedia (1327) and Nicaea (1330), threatening the Hellespont. He adopted the title of Padishah, and his court was known as the “High Port.” His son, Soliman, crossed the Hellespont (1357) and took control of Gallipoli and Sestos, becoming the master of the Dardanelles. Murad I. captured Adrianople (1362), made it his capital, and conquered Macedonia. After a fierce battle, he defeated the combined forces of the Slavic nations south of the Danube—the Bulgarians, Serbians, and Croatians—at the Kossova-polye battle (1389). He died in battle, but his successor Bayazeth continued his campaign, taking Thessaly and moving past Thermopylæ, devastating the Peloponnesus. The German Emperor, Sigismund, who led an army of French, German, and Slavic soldiers, was defeated by Bayazeth on the Danube in the battle of Nicopolis in 1399. Bayazeth captured Bosnia and was on the verge of taking Constantinople, but the same Mongolians who drove the first Turkish tribes west into Persia in 1244 threatened their newly acquired lands. Timur had taken over the power that had once belonged to Chingis-khán: Bayazeth was forced to confront him and was defeated (1402) in the battle of Angora (Ankyra) in Galatia.

Europe now had respite, but not long; Timur died, and with him his empire fell to pieces, while the Osmanic army rallied again under Mahomet I. (1413), and re-attained its former power under Murad II. (1421). Successful in Asia, Murad sent his armies back to the Danube, and after long-continued campaigns, and powerful resistance from the Hungarians and Slaves under Hunyad, he at last gained two decisive victories; Varna in 1444, and Kossova in 1448. Constantinople could no longer be held, and the Pope endeavored in vain to rouse the chivalry of Western Europe to a crusade against the Turks. Mahomet II. succeeded in 1451, and on the 26th of May, 1453, Constantinople, after a valiant resistance, fell, and became the capital of the Turkish empire.

Europe had a temporary break, but it didn’t last long; Timur died, and with him, his empire fell apart, while the Ottoman army regrouped under Mahomet I in 1413 and regained its former strength under Murad II in 1421. Successful in Asia, Murad sent his armies back to the Danube, and after prolonged campaigns and strong resistance from the Hungarians and Slavs led by Hunyad, he finally achieved two decisive victories: Varna in 1444 and Kossova in 1448. Constantinople could no longer be defended, and the Pope tried unsuccessfully to rally the knights of Western Europe for a crusade against the Turks. Mahomet II took over in 1451, and on May 26, 1453, Constantinople, after a brave defense, fell and became the capital of the Turkish empire.

It is a real pleasure to read a Turkish grammar, even though one may have no wish to acquire it practically. The ingenious manner in which the numerous grammatical forms are brought out, the regularity which pervades the system of declension and conjugation, the transparency and intelligibility of the whole structure, must strike all who have a sense of that wonderful power of the human mind which has displayed itself in language. Given so small a number of graphic and demonstrative roots as would hardly suffice to express the commonest wants of human beings, to produce an instrument that shall render the faintest shades of feeling and thought;—given a vague infinitive or a stern imperative, to derive from it such moods as an optative or subjunctive, and tenses as an aorist or paulo-post future;—given incoherent utterances, to arrange them into a system where all is uniform and [pg 309] regular, all combined and harmonious;—such is the work of the human mind which we see realized in “language.” But in most languages nothing of this early process remains visible. They stand before us like solid rocks, and the microscope of the philologist alone can reveal the remains of organic life with which they are built up.

It’s truly enjoyable to read a Turkish grammar, even if you have no intention of using it practically. The clever way in which the many grammatical forms are laid out, the consistency that runs through the system of declension and conjugation, and the clarity and understandability of the entire structure must impress anyone who appreciates the incredible ability of the human mind as shown in language. With such a limited number of graphic and demonstrative roots, which would barely cover basic human needs, to create a tool that can express the subtlest shades of feeling and thought;—to take a vague infinitive or a strong imperative and from it derive moods like an optative or subjunctive, and tenses like an aorist or slightly future;—to take chaotic expressions and organize them into a system where everything is consistent and regular, all combined and in harmony;—this is the achievement of the human mind that we see manifested in “language.” However, in most languages, the traces of this early development remain hidden. They appear to us like solid rocks, and only the microscope of the philologist can uncover the remnants of the organic life from which they were formed.

In the grammar of the Turkic languages, on the contrary, we have before us a language of perfectly transparent structure, and a grammar the inner workings of which we can study, as if watching the building of cells in a crystal bee-hive. An eminent orientalist remarked “we might imagine Turkish to be the result of the deliberations of some eminent society of learned men;” but no such society could have devised what the mind of man produced, left to itself in the steppes of Tatary, and guided only by its innate laws, or by an instinctive power as wonderful as any within the realm of nature.

In the grammar of the Turkic languages, on the other hand, we have a language with a completely clear structure, and a grammar whose inner workings we can study, almost like watching the construction of cells in a crystal beehive. A notable scholar once said, "We might think of Turkish as the outcome of discussions among a distinguished group of scholars." but no such society could have created what the human mind achieved on its own in the steppes of Tatary, guided only by its inherent laws or by an instinctive power as remarkable as anything in nature.

Let us examine a few forms. “To love,” in the most general sense of the word, or love, as a root, is in Turkish sev. This does not yet mean “to love,” which is sevmek, or “love” as a substantive, which is sevgu or sevi; but it only expresses the general idea of loving in the abstract. This root, as we remarked before, can never be touched. Whatever syllables may be added for the modification of its meaning, the root itself must stand out in full prominence like a pearl set in diamonds. It must never be changed or broken, assimilated or modified, as in the English I fall, I fell, I take, I took, I think, I thought, and similar forms. With this one restriction, however, we are free to treat it at pleasure.

Let’s look at a few forms. "To love," in the broadest sense, or love as a root, is in Turkish sev. This doesn’t yet mean "to love" which is love, or "love" as a noun, which is sevgu or sevi; it only conveys the general concept of loving in the abstract. This root, as we mentioned earlier, can never be altered. No matter what syllables are added to change its meaning, the root itself must remain clearly visible like a pearl set in diamonds. It must never be altered or broken, assimilated, or modified, like in English I fall, I fell, I take, I took, I think, I thought, and similar forms. With this one limitation, though, we are free to handle it as we wish.

[pg 310]

Let us suppose we possessed nothing like our conjugation, but had to express such ideas as I love, thou lovest, and the rest, for the first time. Nothing would seem more natural now than to form an adjective or a participle, meaning “loving,” and then add the different pronouns, as I loving, thou loving, &c. Exactly this the Turks have done. We need not inquire at present how they produced what we call a participle. It was a task, however, by no means so facile as we now conceive it. In Turkish, one participle is formed by er. Sev+er would, therefore, mean lov+er or lov+ing. Thou, in Turkish, is sen, and as all modificatory syllables are placed at the end of the root, we get sev-er-sen, thou lovest. You in Turkish is siz; hence sev-er-siz, you love. In these cases the pronouns and the terminations of the verb coincide exactly. In other persons the coincidences are less complete, because the pronominal terminations have sometimes been modified, or, as in the third person singular, sever, dropped altogether as unnecessary. A reference to other cognate languages, however, where either the terminations or the pronouns themselves have maintained a more primitive form, enables us to say that in the original Turkish verb, all persons of the present were formed by means of pronouns appended to this participle sever. Instead of “I love, thou lovest, he loves,” the Turkish grammarian says, “lover-I, lover-thou, lover.”

Let’s imagine we didn’t have a conjugation system like ours, and we had to express ideas like I love, you love, and so on, for the first time. It would seem completely natural now to create an adjective or a participle meaning "loving," and then attach the different pronouns, like I loving, you loving, etc. This is exactly what the Turks have done. We don’t need to explore right now how they created what we call a participle. It was, however, not as easy as we think. In Turkish, one participle is formed by er. Therefore, Sev+er means lov+er or lov+ing. You, in Turkish, is sen, and since all modifying syllables come at the end of the root, we get sev-er-sen, you love. The word for you in Turkish is size; thus, severus, you love. In these instances, the pronouns and the verb endings match perfectly. In other persons, the matches are less complete because the pronominal endings have sometimes changed, or in the third person singular, cut off, it has been dropped altogether since it’s not needed. However, looking at other related languages, where either the endings or the pronouns themselves have retained a more primitive form, allows us to say that in the original Turkish verb, all present forms were created by attaching pronouns to this participle cut off. Instead of "I love, you love, he loves," the Turkish grammarian says, “me, you, us.”

But these personal terminations are not the same in the imperfect as in the present.

But these personal endings are not the same in the imperfect as they are in the present.

PRESENT.IMPERFECT.
Sever-im, I love,sever-di-m, I loved.
Sever-sen,sever-di-ñ.
Sever,sever-di.
Sever-iz,sever-di-k (miz).
Sever-siz,sever-di-ñiz.
Sever-ler,sever-di-ler.

We need not inquire as yet into the origin of the di, added to form the imperfect; but it should be stated that in the first person plural of the imperfect a various reading occurs in other Tataric dialects, and that miz is used there instead of k. Now, looking at these terminations m, ñ, i, miz, ñiz, and ler, we find that they are exactly the same as the possessive pronouns used after nouns. As the Italian says fratelmo, my brother, and as in Hebrew we say, El-i, God (of) I, i.e. my God, the Tataric languages form the phrases “my house, thy house, his house,” by possessive pronouns appended to substantives. A Turk says,—

We don’t need to investigate yet the origin of the di, which is added to create the past tense; however, it should be mentioned that in the first person plural of the past tense, there is a variation found in other Tatar dialects, where miz is used instead of k. Now, looking at these terminations m, ñ, i, miz, ñiz, and ler, we find that they are exactly the same as the possessive pronouns used after nouns. Just as Italians say brother, meaning my brother, and as in Hebrew we say, El-i, which means my God, the Tatar languages form phrases like “my place, your place, his place,” by attaching possessive pronouns to nouns. A Turk says,—

Bâbâ,father,bâbâ-m, my father.
Aghâ,lord,aghâ-ñ,thy lord.
El,hand,el-i,his hand.
Oghlu,son,oghlu-muz, our son.
Anâ,mother,anâ-ñiz, your mother.
Kitâb,book,kitâb-leri, their book.

We may hence infer that in the imperfect these pronominal terminations were originally taken in a possessive sense, and that, therefore, what remains after the personal terminations are removed, sever-di, was never an adjective or a participle, but must have been originally a substantive capable of receiving terminal possessive pronouns; that is, the idea originally expressed by the imperfect could not have been “loving-I,” but “love of me.”

We can conclude that in the imperfect, these pronominal endings were initially used in a possessive way, and that what’s left after removing the personal endings, severed, was never an adjective or participle, but must have originally been a noun that could take ending possessive pronouns; that is, the concept originally conveyed by the imperfect couldn’t have been "love me," but “love me.”

How then, could this convey the idea of a past tense as contrasted with the present? Let us look to our [pg 312] own language. If desirous to express the perfect, we say, I have loved, j'ai aimé. This “I have,” meant originally, I possess, and in Latin “amicus quem amatum habeo,” signified in fact a friend whom I hold dear,—not as yet, whom I have loved. In the course of time, however, these phrases, “I have said, I have loved,” took the sense of the perfect, and of time past—and not unnaturally, inasmuch as what I hold, or have done, is done;—done, as we say, and past. In place of an auxiliary possessive verb, the Turkish language uses an auxiliary possessive pronoun to the same effect. “Paying belonging to me,” equals “I have paid;” in either case a phrase originally possessive, took a temporal signification, and became a past or perfect tense. This, however, is the very anatomy of grammar, and when a Turk says “severdim” he is, of course, as unconscious of its literal force, “loving belonging to me,” as of the circulation of his blood.

How then could this express the idea of a past tense as opposed to the present? Let's look at our own language. If we want to say something is complete, we say, I have loved, I liked it.. The phrase "I do." originally meant I possess, and in Latin, "friend whom I love," literally meant a friend whom I hold dear—not yet referring to someone I have loved. Over time, however, phrases like "I've said it, I've loved." took on the meaning of the perfect tense, indicating past actions—and this makes sense, considering that what I hold or have done, is completed; it is done, as we say, and in the past. Instead of using a possessive auxiliary verb, the Turkish language uses an auxiliary possessive pronoun to achieve the same effect. “Paying what I owe,” means "I've paid;" in both cases, a phrase that started as possessive took on a temporal meaning and became a past or perfect tense. This, however, is the core of grammar, and when a Turk says "severdim", he is, of course, as unaware of its literal meaning, “loving belongs to me,” as he is of the circulation of his blood.

The most ingenious part of Turkish is undoubtedly the verb. Like Greek and Sanskrit, it exhibits a variety of moods and tenses, sufficient to express the nicest shades of doubt, of surmise, of hope, and supposition. In all these forms the root remains intact, and sounds like a key-note through all the various modulations produced by the changes of person, number, mood, and time. But there is one feature so peculiar to the Turkish verb, that no analogy can be found in any of the Aryan languages—the power of producing new verbal bases by the mere addition of certain letters, which give to every verb a negative, or causative, or reflexive, or reciprocal meaning.

The most clever part of Turkish is definitely the verb. Similar to Greek and Sanskrit, it has a range of moods and tenses that can express the subtlest shades of doubt, speculation, hope, and assumption. In all these forms, the root stays the same and acts like a consistent note amid all the different variations created by changes in person, number, mood, and tense. However, there’s one aspect unique to the Turkish verb that doesn’t have a counterpart in any Aryan languages—the ability to create new verb bases by simply adding specific letters, which gives every verb a negative, causative, reflexive, or reciprocal meaning.

Sev-mek, for instance, as a simple root, means to love. By adding in, we obtain a reflexive verb, sev-in-mek, [pg 313] which means to love oneself, or rather, to rejoice, to be happy. This may now be conjugated through all moods and tenses, sevin being in every respect equal to a new root. By adding ish we form a reciprocal verb, sev-ish-mek, to love one another.

Sev-meet, for example, as a basic root, means to love. By adding in, we get a reflexive verb, seven in the make, [pg 313] which means to love oneself, or in other words, to rejoice, to be happy. This can be conjugated in all moods and tenses, with seventh being equivalent to a new root. By adding ish, we create a reciprocal verb, sev-ish-mek, meaning to love one another.

To each of these three forms a causative sense may be imparted by the addition of the syllable dir. Thus,

To each of these three forms, you can add a causative sense by including the syllable folder. So,

i. sev-mek, to love, becomes iv. sev-dir-mek, to cause to love.

i. sev-mekto love becomesiv. __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, to make someone fall in love.

ii. sev-in-mek, to rejoice, becomes v. sev-in-dir-mek, to cause to rejoice.

ii. seven in the making, to celebrate, turns intov. sev-in-dir-mek, to make someone rejoice.

iii. sev-ish-mek, to love one another, becomes vi. sev-ish-dir-mek, to cause one to love one another.

iii. sevishemek, to love one another, becomesvi. sev-ish-dir-mekto make someone fall in love with someone else.

Each of these six forms may again be turned into a passive by the addition of il. Thus,

Each of these six forms can also be changed to a passive voice by adding il. So,

i. sev-mek, to love, becomes vii. sev-il-mek, to be loved.

i. sev-mek, to love, transforms intovii. sev-ill-mek, to be valued.

ii. sev-in-mek, to rejoice, becomes viii. sev-in-il-mek, to be rejoiced at.

ii. seven in the making, to celebrate, becomesviii. sev-in-il-mekto be celebrated.

iii. sev-ish-mek, to love one another, becomes ix. sev-ish-il-mek, not translatable.

iii. sev-ish-mekto love each other, becomesix. sev-ish-il-mek, which can't be translated.

iv. sev-dir-mek, to cause one to love, becomes x. sev-dir-il-mek, to be brought to love.

iv. sev dir mek, to make someone fall in love, becomesx. sev-dir-il-mekto be inspired to love.

v. sev-in-dir-mek, to cause to rejoice, becomes xi. sev-in-dir-il-mek, to be made to rejoice.

v. seven-directory-make, to make happy, becomesxi. sev-in-dir-il-mekto be made happy.

vi. sev-ish-dir-mek, to cause them to love one another, becomes xii. sev-ish-dir-il-mek, to be brought to love one another.

vi. sev-ish-dir-mek, to make them love each other, becomesxii. sev-ish-dir-il-mek, to be guided to love one another.

This, however, is by no means the whole verbal contingent at the command of a Turkish grammarian. Every one of these twelve secondary or tertiary roots may again be turned into a negative by the mere addition of me. Thus, sev-mek, to love, becomes sev-me-mek, not to love. And if it is necessary to express the impossibility of loving, the Turk has a new root at [pg 314] hand to convey even that idea. Thus while sev-me-mek denies only the fact of loving, sev-eme-mek, denies its possibility, and means not to be able to love. By the addition of these two modificatory syllables, the numbers of derivative roots is at once raised to thirty-six. Thus,

This, however, is by no means the complete set of words available to a Turkish grammarian. Each of these twelve secondary or tertiary roots can be turned negative simply by adding me. For example, sev-mek, which means to love, becomes sev-me-mek, meaning not to love. And if it’s necessary to express the inability to love, the Turk has a new root at hand to convey that idea as well. So while sev-me-mek denies the act of loving, sev-eme-mek denies its possibility, meaning not being able to love. With the addition of these two modifying syllables, the number of derivative roots increases to thirty-six. Thus,

i. sev-mek, to love, becomes xiii. sev-me-mek, not to love.

i. sev-mek, to love, becomesxiii. sev-me-mek, not to love.

ii. sev-in-mek, to rejoice, becomes xiv. sev-in-me-mek, not to rejoice.

ii. seven in the morning, to celebrate, becomesxiv. seven in me make, not to celebrate.

iii. sev-ish-mek, to love one another, becomes xv. sev-ish-me-mek, not to love one another.

iii. sev-ish-mekto love one another, becomesxv. sev-ish-me-meknot to love each other.

iv. sev-dir-mek, to cause to love, becomes xvi. sev-dir-me-mek, not to cause one to love.

iv. sev-dir-mek, to make someone love, becomesxvi. sev-dir-me-mek, not to force someone to love.

v. sev-in-dir-mek, to cause to rejoice, becomes xvii. sev-in-dir-me-mek, not to cause one to rejoice.

v. seven-direction-maketo make someone happy, becomesxvii. seven dimes for me, make, not to make someone happy.

vi. sev-ish-dir-mek, to cause them to love one another, becomes xviii. sev-ish-dir-me-mek, not to cause them to love one another.

vi. sev-ish-dir-mek, to help them love each other, becomesxviii. sev-ish-dir-me-mek, not to make them fall in love with each other.

vii. sev-il-mek, to be loved, becomes xix. sev-il-me-mek, not to be loved.

vii. sevillimak, to be loved, turns intoxix. sev-il-me-mek, not to be loved.

viii. sev-in-il-mek, to be rejoiced at, becomes xx. sev-in-il-me-mek, not to be the object of rejoicing.

viii. sev-in-il-mek, something to celebrate, turns intoxx. sev-in-il-me-meknot something to celebrate.

ix. sev-ish-il-mek, if it was used, would become xxi. sev-ish-il-me-mek; neither form being translatable.

ix. sev-ish-il-mek, if it were used, would becomexxi. sev-ish-il-me-mekNeither version can be translated.

x. sev-dir-il-mek, to be brought to love, becomes xxii. sev-dir-il-me-mek, not to be brought to love.

x. sev-dir-il-mek, being guided to love, transforms intoxxii. sev-dir-il-me-meknot being guided to love.

xi. sev-in-dir-il-mek, to be made to rejoice, becomes xxiii. sev-in-dir-il-me-mek, not to be made to rejoice.

xi. sev-in-dir-il-mek, to be made to rejoice, transforms intoxxiii. sev-in-dir-il-me-mek, not to be made to celebrate.

xii. sev-ish-dir-il-mek, to be brought to love one another, becomes xxiv. sev-ish-dir-il-me-mek, not to be brought to love one another.

xii. sev-ish-dir-il-mek, to motivate one another to love, transforms intoxxiv. sev-ish-dir-il-me-mek, discouraging affection for one another.

Some of these forms are of course of rare occurrence, and with many verbs these derivative roots, though possible grammatically, would be logically impossible. Even a verb like “to love,” perhaps the most pliant of all, resists some of the modifications to which a [pg 315] Turkish grammarian is fain to subject it. It is clear, however, that wherever a negation can be formed, the idea of impossibility also can be superadded, so that by substituting eme for me, we should raise the number of derivative roots to thirty-six. The very last of these, xxxvi. sev-ish-dir-il-eme-mek would be perfectly intelligible, and might be used, for instance, if, in speaking of the Sultan and the Czar, we wished to say, that it was impossible that they should be brought to love one another.

Some of these forms are rare, and with many verbs, these derivative roots, while grammatically possible, would be logically impossible. Even a verb like "to love," probably the most flexible of all, resists some of the changes that a [pg 315] Turkish grammarian might try to impose on it. However, it’s clear that whenever a negation can be created, the idea of impossibility can also be added, so by replacing eme for me, we could increase the number of derivative roots to thirty-six. The very last one, xxxvi. sev-ish-dir-il-eme-mek would be completely understandable and might be used, for example, if we wanted to say that it was impossible for the Sultan and the Czar to come to love each other.

Finnic Class.

Finnic Class.

It is generally supposed that the original seat of the Finnic tribes was in the Ural mountains, and their languages have been therefore called Uralic. From this centre they spread east and west; and southward in ancient times, even to the Black Sea, where Finnic tribes, together with Mongolic and Turkic, were probably known to the Greeks under the comprehensive and convenient name of Scythians. As we possess no literary documents of any of these nomadic nations, it is impossible to say, even where Greek writers have preserved their barbarous names, to what branch of the vast Turanian family they belonged. Their habits were probably identical before the Christian era, during the Middle Ages, and at the present day. One tribe takes possession of a tract and retains it perhaps for several generations, and gives its name to the meadows where it tends its flocks, and to the rivers where the horses are watered. If the country be fertile, it will attract the eye of other tribes; wars begin, and if resistance be hopeless, hundreds of families fly from their paternal pastures, to migrate perhaps for generations,—for [pg 316] migration they find a more natural life than permanent habitation,—and after a time we may rediscover their names a thousand miles distant. Or two tribes will carry on their warfare for ages, till with reduced numbers both have perhaps to make common cause against some new enemy.

It is generally believed that the original home of the Finnic tribes was in the Ural Mountains, leading to their languages being referred to as Uralic Languages. From this center, they spread east and west, and in ancient times also southward to the Black Sea, where Finnic tribes, along with Mongolic and Turkic groups, were likely known to the Greeks under the broad and convenient term Scythians. Since we lack any literary records from these nomadic nations, it's impossible to say which branch of the vast Turanian family they belonged to, even when Greek writers preserved their unfamiliar names. Their lifestyles were probably similar before the Christian era, during the Middle Ages, and even today. One tribe might settle in an area and hold it for perhaps several generations, giving their name to the meadows where they graze their flocks and to the rivers where their horses drink. If the land is fertile, it will draw the attention of other tribes; conflicts arise, and if resistance seems futile, hundreds of families flee from their ancestral lands to migrate possibly for generations—finding a more natural life in migration than in permanent settlement—only to have their names reappear a thousand miles away over time. Alternatively, two tribes may engage in conflict for ages, until, with dwindling numbers, they may have to unite against a new enemy.

During these continued struggles their languages lose as many words as men are killed on the field of battle. Some words (we might say) go over, others are made prisoners, and exchanged again during times of peace. Besides, there are parleys and challenges, and at last a dialect is produced which may very properly be called a language of the camp, (Urdu-zebán, camp-language, is the proper name of Hindustání, formed in the armies of the Mogul emperors,) but where it is difficult for the philologist to arrange the living and to number the slain, unless some salient points of grammar have been preserved throughout the medley. We saw how a number of tribes may be at times suddenly gathered by the command of a Chingis-khán or Timur, like billows heaving and swelling at the call of a thunder-storm. One such wave rolling on from Karakorum to Liegnitz may sweep away all the sheepfolds and landmarks of centuries, and when the storm is over, a thin crust will, as after a flood, remain, concealing the underlying stratum of people and languages.

During these ongoing struggles, their languages lose as many words as soldiers are killed on the battlefield. Some words (we might say) get carried over, others are held captive, and get traded during times of peace. Furthermore, there are negotiations and challenges, and finally, a dialect emerges that can rightly be called a language of the camp. (Urdu-zebán, or camp-language, is the proper name for Hindustání, which developed in the armies of the Mughal emperors.) However, it's hard for linguists to organize the living language and count the losses unless some key grammatical features have been maintained throughout the mix. We observed how various tribes can suddenly unite at the command of a Chingis-khán or Timur, like waves rising and swelling in response to a thunderstorm. One such wave sweeping from Karakorum to Liegnitz can wipe out all the sheepfolds and landmarks built up over centuries, and once the storm passes, a thin layer will remain, much like after a flood, hiding the underlying people and languages.

On the evidence of language, the Finnic stock is divided into four branches,

On the basis of language, the Finnic group is divided into four branches,

The Chudic,
The Bulgaric,
The Permic,
The Ugric.
[pg 317]

The Chudic branch comprises the Finnic of the Baltic coasts. The name is derived from Chud (Tchud) originally applied by the Russians to the Finnic nations in the north-west of Russia. Afterwards it took a more general sense, and was used almost synonymously with Scythian for all the tribes of Central and Northern Asia. The Finns, properly so called, or as they call themselves Suomalainen, i.e. inhabitants of fens, are settled in the provinces of Finland (formerly belonging to Sweden, but since 1809 annexed to Russia), and in parts of the governments of Archangel and Olonetz. Their number is stated at 1,521,515. The Finns are the most advanced of their whole family, and are, the Magyars excepted, the only Finnic race that can claim a station among the civilized and civilizing nations of the world. Their literature and, above all, their popular poetry bear witness to a high intellectual development in times which we may call mythical, and in places more favorable to the glow of poetical feelings than their present abode, the last refuge Europe could afford them. The epic songs still live among the poorest, recorded by oral tradition alone, and preserving all the features of a perfect metre and of a more ancient language. A national feeling has lately arisen amongst the Finns, despite of Russian supremacy, and the labors of Sjögern, Lönnrot, Castrén, and Kellgren, receiving hence a powerful impulse, have produced results truly surprising. From the mouths of the aged an epic poem has been collected equalling the Iliad in length and completeness, nay, if we can forget for a moment all that we in our youth learned to call beautiful, not less beautiful. A Finn is not a Greek, and Wainamoinen was not a Homer. But if [pg 318] the poet may take his colors from that nature by which he is surrounded, if he may depict the men with whom he lives, “Kalewala” possesses merits not dissimilar from those of the Iliad, and will claim its place as the fifth national epic of the world, side by side with the Ionian songs, with the Mahábhárata, the Shahnámeh, and the Nibelunge. This early literary cultivation has not been without a powerful influence on the language. It has imparted permanency to its forms and a traditional character to its words, so that at first sight we might almost doubt whether the grammar of this language had not left the agglutinative stage, and entered into the current of inflection with Greek or Sanskrit. The agglutinative type, however, yet remains, and its grammar shows a luxuriance of grammatical combination second only to Turkish and Hungarian. Like Turkish it observes the “harmony of vowels,” a feature peculiar to Turanian languages, as explained before.

The Chudic branch includes the Finnic groups of the Baltic coasts. The name comes from Chud (Tchud), which was originally used by the Russians to refer to the Finnic nations in the northwest of Russia. Later, it took on a broader meaning and was used almost interchangeably with Scythian for all the tribes of Central and Northern Asia. The Finns, properly referred to as Suomalainen, meaning "inhabitants of fens," are located in the provinces of Finland (previously part of Sweden, but annexed by Russia in 1809) and in parts of the Archangel and Olonetz regions. Their population is estimated at 1,521,515. The Finns are the most advanced of their group, and, aside from the Magyars, they are the only Finnic race that can claim a position among the civilized and civilizing nations of the world. Their literature, especially their popular poetry, showcases high intellectual development in times we can consider mythical, in regions more conducive to poetic expression than their current home, which is the last refuge Europe has given them. The epic songs still thrive among the poorest, preserved only through oral tradition, maintaining all the qualities of perfect meter and an older language. Recently, a sense of national identity has emerged among the Finns, despite Russian dominance. The efforts of Sjögern, Lönnrot, Castrén, and Kellgren have gained significant momentum, yielding truly remarkable results. From the elders, an epic poem has been gathered that rivals the Iliad in length and completeness, and if we can momentarily set aside our youthful definitions of beauty, it is equally beautiful. A Finn is not a Greek, and Wainamoinen was not a Homer. However, if a poet can draw inspiration from their surroundings and portray the people they know, “Kalewala” possesses merits similar to those of the Iliad and will take its place as the fifth national epic of the world, alongside the Ionian songs, the Mahábhárata, the Shahnámeh, and the Nibelunge. This early literary cultivation has significantly influenced the language, giving permanence to its forms and a traditional character to its words, to the point where, at first glance, one might almost question whether the grammar of this language has shifted away from the agglutinative stage and entered the realm of inflection alongside Greek or Sanskrit. However, the agglutinative structure still exists, and its grammar shows an abundance of grammatical combinations, second only to Turkish and Hungarian. Like Turkish, it follows the “harmony of vowels,” a characteristic unique to Turanian languages, as explained earlier.

Karelian and Tavastian are dialectical varieties of Finnish.

Karelian and Tavastian are dialects of Finnish.

The Esths or Esthonians, neighbors to the Finns, speak a language closely allied to the Finnish. It is divided into the dialects of Dorpat (in Livonia) and Reval. Except some popular songs it is almost without literature. Esthonia, together with Livonia and Kurland, forms the three Baltic provinces of Russia. The population on the islands of the Gulf of Finland is mostly Esthonian. In the higher ranks of society Esthonian is hardly understood, and never spoken.

The Esths or Estonians, who live next to the Finns, speak a language that is closely related to Finnish. It has dialects from Dorpat (in Livonia) and Reval. Aside from a few folk songs, it has very little literature. Estonia, along with Livonia and Kurland, makes up the three Baltic provinces of Russia. Most of the people on the islands in the Gulf of Finland are Estonian. In the upper echelons of society, Estonian is rarely understood and never spoken.

Besides the Finns and Esthonians, the Livonians and the Lapps must be reckoned also amongst the same family. Their number, however, is small. The [pg 319] population of Livonia consists chiefly of Esths, Letts, Russians, and Germans. The number of Livonians speaking their own dialect is not more than 5000.

Besides the Finns and Estonians, the Livonians and the Lapps also belong to the same family. However, their numbers are small. The population of Livonia mainly consists of Estonians, Latvians, Russians, and Germans. The number of Livonians speaking their own dialect is no more than 5,000.

The Lapps, or Laplanders, inhabit the most northern part of Europe. They belong to Sweden and Russia. Their number is estimated at 28,000. Their language has lately attracted much attention, and Castrén's travels give a description of their manners most interesting from its simplicity and faithfulness.

The Lapps, or Laplanders, live in the northernmost part of Europe. They are from Sweden and Russia. Their population is estimated to be around 28,000. Recently, their language has gained a lot of interest, and Castrén's travels provide a fascinating description of their customs, noted for their simplicity and accuracy.

The Bulgaria branch comprises the Tcheremissians and Mordvinians, scattered in disconnected colonies along the Volga, and surrounded by Russian and Tataric dialects. Both languages are extremely artificial in their grammar, and allow an accumulation of pronominal affixes at the end of verbs, surpassed only by the Bask, the Caucasian, and those American dialects that have been called Polysynthetic.

The Bulgaria branch includes the Tcheremissians and Mordvinians, who are spread out in separate communities along the Volga and are surrounded by Russian and Tatar dialects. Both languages have very complex grammar and permit a buildup of pronoun prefixes at the end of verbs, surpassed only by Basque, Caucasian languages, and some American dialects known as Polysynthetic.

The general name given to these tribes, Bulgaric, is not borrowed from Bulgaria, on the Danube; Bulgaria, on the contrary, received its name (replacing Moesia) from the Finnic armies by whom it was conquered in the seventh century. Bulgarian tribes advanced from the Volga to the Don, and after remaining for a time under the sovereignty of the Avars on the Don and Dnieper, they advanced to the Danube in 635, and founded the Bulgarian kingdom. This has retained its name to the present day, though the Finnic Bulgarians have long been absorbed by Slavonic inhabitants, and both brought under Turkish sway since 1392.

The overall name given to these tribes, Bulgaric, doesn’t come from Bulgaria, on the Danube; instead, Bulgaria got its name (which replaced Moesia) from the Finnic armies that conquered it in the seventh century. The Bulgarian tribes moved from the Volga to the Don, and after staying under Avar control on the Don and Dnieper for a while, they moved to the Danube in 635 and established the Bulgarian kingdom. This name has lasted to this day, even though the Finnic Bulgarians have long been integrated into the Slavic population, and both groups have been under Turkish rule since 1392.

The third, or Permic branch, comprises the idioms of the Votiakes, the Sirianes, and the Permians, three dialects of one language. Perm was the ancient [pg 320] name for the country between 61°-76° e. lon. and 55°-65° n. lat. The Permic tribes were driven westward by their eastern neighbors, the Voguls, and thus pressed upon their western neighbors, the Bulgars of the Volga. The Votiakes are found between the rivers Vyatka and Kama. Northwards follow the Sirianes, inhabiting the country on the Upper Kâma, while the eastern portion is held by the Permians. These are surrounded on the south by the Tatars of Orenburg and the Bashkirs; on the north by the Samoyedes, and on the east by Voguls, who pressed on them from the Ural.

The third branch, or Permic branch, includes the languages of the Votiakes, the Sirianes, and the Permians, which are three dialects of one language. Perm was the ancient name for the region between 61°-76° e. longitude and 55°-65° n. latitude. The Permic tribes were pushed westward by their eastern neighbors, the Voguls, which in turn pressed against their western neighbors, the Bulgars of the Volga. The Votiakes are located between the Vyatka and Kama rivers. To the north are the Sirianes, who live in the Upper Kâma region, while the eastern part is occupied by the Permians. They are bordered to the south by the Tatars of Orenburg and the Bashkirs; to the north by the Samoyedes, and to the east by the Voguls, who moved in on them from the Ural.

These Voguls, together with Hungarians and Ostiakes, form the fourth and last branch of the Finnic family, the Ugric. It was in 462, after the dismemberment of Attila's Hunnic empire that these Ugric tribes approached Europe. They were then called Onagurs, Saragurs, and Urogs; and in later times they occur in Russian chronicles as Ugry. They are the ancestors of the Hungarians, and should not be confounded with the Uigurs, an ancient Turkic tribe mentioned before.

These Voguls, along with the Hungarians and Ostiaks, make up the fourth and final branch of the Finnic family, known as the Ugric. In 462, after Attila's Hunnic empire was divided, these Ugric tribes moved toward Europe. They were referred to as Onagurs, Saragurs, and Urogs; later, they are mentioned in Russian chronicles as Ugry. They are the ancestors of the Hungarians and should not be confused with the Uigurs, an ancient Turkic tribe mentioned earlier.

The similarity between the Hungarian language and dialects of Finnic origin, spoken east of the Volga, is not a new discovery. In 1253, Wilhelm Ruysbroeck, a priest who travelled beyond the Volga, remarked that a race called Pascatir, who live on the Yaïk, spoke the same language as the Hungarians. They were then settled east of the old Bulgarian kingdom, the capital of which, the ancient Bolgari, on the left of the Volga, may still be traced in the ruins of Spask. If these Pascatir—the portion of the Ugric tribes that remained east of the Volga—are identical with the [pg 321] Bashkir, as Klaproth supposes, it would follow that, in later times, they gave up their language, for the present Bashkir no longer speak a Hungarian, but a Turkic, dialect. The affinity of the Hungarian and the Ugro-Finnic dialects was first proved philologically by Gyarmathi in 1799.

The similarity between the Hungarian language and Finnic dialects spoken east of the Volga isn't a new finding. In 1253, Wilhelm Ruysbroeck, a priest who traveled beyond the Volga, noted that a group called the Pascatir, living by the Yaïk, spoke the same language as the Hungarians. They were settled east of the old Bulgarian kingdom, the capital of which, the ancient Bolgari, on the left bank of the Volga, can still be seen in the ruins of Spask. If these Pascatir—the part of the Ugric tribes that stayed east of the Volga—are indeed the same as the Bashkir, as Klaproth suggests, it seems that over time, they abandoned their language, since today's Bashkir no longer speak a Hungarian dialect but rather a Turkic one. The connection between the Hungarian and Ugro-Finnic dialects was first established through philology by Gyarmathi in 1799.

A few instances may suffice to show this connection:—

A few examples should be enough to demonstrate this connection:—

Hungarian.Tcheremissian.English.
Atya-m atya-m my father.
Atya-d atya-t thy father.
Atyaatya-se his father.
Atya-nkatya-ne our father.
Atya-tok atya-da your father.
Aty-ok atya-st their father.

Declension.

Declension.

Hungarian.Esthonian. English.
Nom.vérwerriblood.
Gen.véréwerreof blood.
Datvérnekwerreleto blood.
Acc.vértwerd blood.
Abl.vérestölwerrist from blood.

Conjugation.

Conjugation.

Hungarian.Esthonian.English.
Lelem leianI find.
Leled leiadthou findest.
Lelileiabhe finds.
Leljük leiame we find.
Lelitekleiate you find.
Lelik leiawad they find.
[pg 322]

A Comparative Table of the Numerals of each of the Four Branches of the Finnic Class, showing the degree of their relationship.

A Comparative Table of the Numerals of each of the Four Branches of the Finnic Class, showing the degree of their relationship.

1234
Chudic, Finnishyksikaksikolme neljä
Chudic, Esthonianiitskatskolm nelli
Bulgaric, Tcheremissianikkokkum nil
Bulgaric, Mordvinianvaikekavto kolmonile
Permic, Sirianianötikkykkujim ujoli
Ugric, Ostiakianitkatchudem njeda
Ugric, Hungarianegyketharom negy
567
Chudic, Finnishviisikuusi seitsemän
Chudic, Esthonianwiiskuas seitse
Bulgaric, Tcheremissianviskut sim
Bulgaric, Mordvinianvätekóto sisem
Permic, Sirianianvitkvait sizim
Ugric, Ostiakianvetchuttabet
Ugric, Hungarianöthathet
89 10
Chudic, Finnish kahdeksanyhdeksankymmenen
Chudic, Esthonian kattesaüttesakümme
Bulgaric, Tcheremissian kändäxeendexelu
Bulgaric, Mordvinian kavskoväiksekämen
Permic, Sirianian kökjâmysökmysdas
Ugric, Ostiakiannida arjongjong
Ugric, Hungariannjolcz kilencztiz
[pg 323]

We have thus examined the four chief classes of the Turanian family, the Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, and Finnic. The Tungusic branch stands lowest; its grammar is not much richer than Chinese, and in its structure there is an absence of that architectonic order which in Chinese makes the Cyclopean stones of language hold together without cement. This applies, however, principally to the Mandshu; other Tungusic dialects spoken, not in China, but in the original seats of the Mandshus, are even now beginning to develop grammatical forms.

We have now looked at the four main groups of the Turanian family: Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, and Finnic. The Tungusic branch is the least developed; its grammar is not much more complex than Chinese, and it lacks the structural order that allows the massive words in Chinese to connect without any glue. This mainly applies to the Mandshu; other Tungusic dialects spoken outside of China, in the original areas of the Mandshus, are just starting to develop grammatical structures.

The Mongolic dialects excel the Tungusic, but in their grammar can hardly distinguish between the different parts of speech. The spoken idioms of the Mongolians, as of the Tungusians, are evidently struggling towards a more organic life, and Castrén has brought home evidence of incipient verbal growth in the language of the Buriäts and a Tungusic dialect spoken near Nyertchinsk.

The Mongolic dialects outperform the Tungusic ones, but in their grammar, they barely differentiate between various parts of speech. The spoken languages of the Mongolians, like those of the Tungusians, are clearly evolving towards a more natural form, and Castrén has provided evidence of early verbal development in the language of the Buriäts and a Tungusic dialect spoken near Nyertchinsk.

This is, however, only a small beginning, if compared with the profusion of grammatical resources displayed by the Turkic languages. In their system of conjugation, the Turkic dialects can hardly be surpassed. Their verbs are like branches which break down under the heavy burden of fruits and blossoms. The excellence of the Finnic languages consists rather in a diminution than increase of verbal forms; but in declension Finnish is even richer than Turkish.

This is just a small start compared to the wealth of grammatical resources found in the Turkic languages. When it comes to conjugation, the Turkic dialects are hard to beat. Their verbs are like branches that bend under the weight of fruits and blossoms. The strength of the Finnic languages lies more in having fewer verbal forms than in having more; however, in terms of declension, Finnish is even more complex than Turkish.

These four classes, together with the Samoyedic, constitute the northern or Ural-Altaic division of the Turanian family.

These four classes, along with the Samoyedic, make up the northern or Ural-Altaic division of the Turanian family.

The southern division consists of the Tamulic, the Gangetic (Trans-Himalayan and Sub-Himalayan), the [pg 324] Lohitic, the Taïc, and the Malaïc classes.305 These two divisions comprehend very nearly all the languages of Asia, with the exception of Chinese, which, together with its neighboring dialects, forms the only representative of radical or monosyllabic speech. A few, such as Japanese,306 the language of Korea, of the Koriakes, the Kamchadales, and the numerous dialects of the Caucasus, &c., remain unclassed; but in them also some traces of a common origin with the Turanian languages have, it is probable, survived, and await the discovery of philological research.

The southern division includes the Tamulic, the Gangetic (Trans-Himalayan and Sub-Himalayan), the Lohitic, the Taïc, and the Malaïc classes. [pg 324] These two divisions cover almost all the languages of Asia, except for Chinese, which, along with its neighboring dialects, is the only example of radical or monosyllabic speech. A few languages, like Japanese, the language of Korea, the Koriakes, the Kamchadales, and various dialects of the Caucasus, remain unclassified; however, it is likely that they still show some signs of a shared origin with the Turanian languages, and these connections await further exploration by linguists.

Of the third, or inflectional, stage, I need not say much, as we have examined its structure when analyzing in our former Lectures a number of words in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, or any other of the Aryan languages. The chief distinction between an inflectional and an agglutinative language consists in the fact that agglutinative languages preserve the consciousness of their roots, and therefore do not allow them to be affected by phonetic corruption; and, though they have lost the consciousness of the original meaning of their terminations, they feel distinctly the difference between the significative root, and the modifying elements. Not so in the inflectional languages. There the various elements which enter into the composition of words, may become so welded together, and suffer so much from phonetic corruption, that none but the [pg 325] educated would be aware of an original distinction between root and termination, and none but the comparative grammarian able to discover the seams that separate the component parts.

Of the third, or inflectional, stage, I don’t need to say much since we've looked at its structure while analyzing various words in Sanskrit, Greek, Latin, and other Aryan languages in our previous lectures. The main difference between an inflectional language and an agglutinative language is that agglutinative languages maintain awareness of their roots and therefore are not affected by phonetic changes. Even though they have lost the awareness of the original meanings of their endings, they clearly feel the distinction between the meaningful root and the modifying elements. This isn’t the case with inflectional languages. In those languages, the different elements that make up words can become so fused together and undergo so much phonetic change that only educated people would recognize the original distinction between the root and the ending, and only a comparative grammarian would be able to identify the boundaries that separate the different parts. [pg 325]

If you consider the character of our morphological classification, you will see that this classification, differing thereby from the genealogical, must be applicable to all languages. Our classification exhausts all possibilities. If the component elements of language are roots, predicative and demonstrative, we cannot have more than three combinations. Roots may either remain roots without any modification; or secondly, they may be joined so that one determines the other and loses its independent existence; or thirdly, they may be joined and be allowed to coalesce, so that both lose their independent existence. The number of roots which enter into the composition of a word makes no difference, and it is unnecessary, therefore, to admit a fourth class, sometimes called polysynthetic, or incorporating, including most of the American languages. As long as in these sesquipedalian compounds, the significative root remains distinct, they belong to the agglutinative stage; as soon as it is absorbed by the terminations, they belong to the inflectional stage. Nor is it necessary to distinguish between synthetic and analytical languages, including under the former name the ancient, and under the latter the modern, languages of the inflectional class. The formation of such phrases as the French j'aimerai, for j'ai à aimer, or the English, I shall do, thou wilt do, may be called analytical or metaphrastic. But in their morphological nature these phrases are still inflectional. If we analyze such a phrase as je vivrai, we find it was originally ego (Sanskrit [pg 326] aham) vivere (Sanskrit jîv-as-e, dat. neut.) habeo (Sanskrit bhâ-vayâ-mi); that is to say, we have a number of words in which grammatical articulation has been almost entirely destroyed, but has not been cast off; whereas in Turanian languages grammatical forms are produced by the combination of integral roots, and the old and useless terminations are first discarded before any new combination takes place.307

If you look at the nature of our morphological classification, you'll notice that this classification, unlike the genealogical one, must apply to all languages. Our classification covers all possibilities. If the basic elements of language are roots, predicates, and demonstratives, we can't have more than three combinations. Roots can either stay unchanged; or they can be combined in a way where one defines the other and loses its independent existence; or they can be merged, causing both to lose their independence. The number of roots in a word doesn't change this, so there's no need to add a fourth category, sometimes referred to as polysynthetic or integrating, which includes many American languages. As long as in these complex compounds the significant root remains distinct, they belong to the agglutinative phase; once it gets absorbed by the endings, they shift to the inflectional phase. There’s also no need to differentiate between synthetic and analytical languages, with the former including ancient languages and the latter modern ones from the inflectional class. The formation of phrases like the French I would like, meaning I have to love, or the English I'll do, you will do, might be labeled analytical or metaphorical. But in terms of their morphology, these phrases are still inflectional. If we break down a phrase like I will live., we see it originally came from self (Sanskrit aham) live (Sanskrit jive as a, dat. neut.) habeo (Sanskrit bhâ-vayâ-mi); meaning, we have several words where grammatical structure has been nearly completely lost but hasn't been discarded; while in Turanian languages, grammatical forms are created by combining entire roots, and the old, unnecessary endings are removed before any new combinations happen.

At the end of our morphological classification a problem presents itself, which we might have declined to enter upon if we had confined ourselves to a genealogical classification. At the end of our genealogical classification we had to confess that only a certain number of languages had as yet been arranged genealogically, and that therefore the time for approaching the problem of the common origin of all languages had not yet come. Now, however, although we have not specified all languages which belong to the radical, the terminational, and inflectional classes, we have clearly laid it down as a principle, that all languages must fall under one or the other of these three categories of human speech. It would not be consistent, therefore, to shrink from the consideration of a problem, which, though beset with many difficulties, cannot be excluded from the science of language.

At the end of our morphological classification, we encounter a problem we might have avoided if we had stuck to a genealogical classification. After completing our genealogical classification, we had to admit that only a limited number of languages have been organized genealogically, meaning the time to discuss the common origin of all languages hasn’t arrived yet. Now, even though we haven’t listed all the languages that fit into the radical, terminational, and inflectional classes, we've clearly established that all languages must fall into one of these three categories of human speech. It wouldn’t be consistent, therefore, to shy away from addressing a problem that, despite being fraught with challenges, cannot be ignored in the study of language.

Let us first see our problem clearly and distinctly. The problem of the common origin of languages has no necessary connection with the problem of the common origin of mankind. If it could be proved that languages had had different beginnings, this would in nowise necessitate the admission of different beginnings of the human race. For if we look upon language as [pg 327] natural to man, it might have broken out at different times and in different countries among the scattered descendants of one original pair; if, on the contrary, language is to be treated as an artificial invention, there is still less reason why each succeeding generation should not have invented its own idiom.

Let’s first look at our problem clearly and distinctly. The issue of the common origin of languages isn’t necessarily linked to the problem of the common origin of humanity. If it could be shown that languages started differently, that wouldn’t mean we have to accept that the human race had different beginnings. If we see language as natural to humans, it could have developed at different times and in different places among the scattered descendants of one original couple; on the other hand, if we consider language as a man-made invention, there’s even less reason for each generation not to have created its own version.

Nor would it follow, if it could be proved that all the dialects of mankind point to one common source, that therefore the human race must descend from one pair. For language might have been the property of one favored race, and have been communicated to the other races in the progress of history.

Nor would it follow, even if it could be proven that all the dialects of humanity trace back to one common source, that the human race must have descended from just one pair. Language could have originated with one favored group and then been shared with other groups throughout history.

The science of language and the science of ethnology have both suffered most seriously from being mixed up together. The classification of races and languages should be quite independent of each other. Races may change their languages, and history supplies us with several instances where one race adopted the language of another. Different languages, therefore, may be spoken by one race, or the same language may be spoken by different races; so that any attempt at squaring the classification of races and tongues must necessarily fail.

The study of language and the study of cultures have both been significantly affected by being combined. The classification of races and languages should be completely separate. Races can change their languages, and history gives us several examples of one race adopting the language of another. Therefore, different languages can be spoken by one race, or the same language can be spoken by different races; so any effort to align the classification of races and languages is bound to fail.

Secondly, the problem of the common origin of languages has no connection with the statements contained in the Old Testament regarding the creation of man, and the genealogies of the patriarchs. If our researches led us to the admission of different beginnings for the languages of mankind, there is nothing in the Old Testament opposed to this view. For although the Jews believed that for a time the whole earth was of one language and of one speech, it has long been pointed out by eminent divines, with particular reference [pg 328] to the dialects of America, that new languages might have arisen at later times. If, on the contrary, we arrive at the conviction that all languages can be traced back to one common source, we could never think of transferring the genealogies of the Old Testament to the genealogical classification of language. The genealogies of the Old Testament refer to blood, not to language, and as we know that people, without changing their name, did frequently change their language, it is clearly impossible that the genealogies of the Old Testament should coincide with the genealogical classification of languages. In order to avoid a confusion of ideas, it would be preferable to abstain altogether from using the same names to express relationship of language which in the Bible are used to express relationship of blood. It was usual formerly to speak of Japhetic, Hamitic and Semitic languages. The first name has now been replaced by Aryan, the second by African; and though the third is still retained, it has received a scientific definition quite different from the meaning which it would have in the Bible. It is well to bear this in mind, in order to prevent not only those who are forever attacking the Bible with arrows that cannot reach it, but likewise those who defend it with weapons they know not how to wield, from disturbing in any way the quiet progress of the science of language.

Secondly, the issue of the common origin of languages has no relation to the statements in the Old Testament about the creation of humanity and the genealogies of the patriarchs. If our studies lead us to believe in different beginnings for the languages of humankind, there’s nothing in the Old Testament that contradicts this idea. Although the Jews believed that the entire earth once spoke one language and one dialect, prominent theologians have long noted, especially regarding the dialects of America, that new languages could have developed later on. Conversely, if we come to the conclusion that all languages can be traced back to a single source, we could never think of applying the genealogies from the Old Testament to the genealogical classification of language. The genealogies in the Old Testament refer to lineage, not language. We know that people often changed their language without changing their identity, making it clear that the genealogies from the Old Testament cannot align with language classifications. To avoid confusion, it's better to refrain from using the same terms for language relationships that the Bible uses for blood relationships. It was common in the past to refer to Japhetic, Hamitic, and Semitic languages. The first term has now been replaced by Aryan, the second by African; although the third is still used, it now has a scientific definition that differs significantly from its Biblical context. It's important to keep this in mind not only to prevent those who attack the Bible with misguided criticism but also to protect those who defend it with unfamiliar arguments, ensuring that the study of language can progress without disturbance.

Let us now look dispassionately at our problem. The problem of the possibility of a common origin of all languages naturally divides itself into two parts, the formal and the material. We are to-day concerned with the formal part only. We have examined all possible forms which language can assume, and we [pg 329] have now to ask, can we reconcile with these three distinct forms, the radical, the terminational, and the inflectional, the admission of one common origin of human speech? I answer decidedly, Yes.

Let’s now examine our problem objectively. The question of whether all languages might share a common origin can be split into two main parts: the official and the material. Today, we are focusing only on the formal aspect. We have looked at all potential forms that language can take, and we now need to consider whether we can reconcile these three distinct forms—the radical, the terminational, and the inflectional—with the idea of a single common origin for human speech. My answer is a definite yes.

The chief argument that has been brought forward against the common origin of language is this, that no monosyllabic or radical language has ever entered into an agglutinative or terminational stage, and that no agglutinative or terminational language has ever risen to the inflectional stage. Chinese, it is said, is still what it has been from the beginning; it has never produced agglutinative or inflectional forms; nor has any Turanian language ever given up the distinctive feature of the terminational stage, namely, the integrity of its roots.

The main argument against the idea that all languages have a common origin is that no monosyllabic or root language has ever developed into an agglutinative or inflectional stage, and no agglutinative or inflectional language has ever evolved into a fully inflected stage. It's said that Chinese has remained the same since its inception; it has never created agglutinative or inflected forms. Additionally, no Turanian language has abandoned the key characteristic of the inflectional stage, which is the integrity of its roots.

In answer to this it should be pointed out that though each language, as soon as it once becomes settled, retains that morphological character which it had when it first assumed its individual or national existence, it does not lose altogether the power of producing grammatical forms that belong to a higher stage. In Chinese, and particularly in Chinese dialects, we find rudimentary traces of agglutination. The li which I mentioned before as the sign of the locative, has dwindled down to a mere postposition, and a modern Chinese is no more aware that li meant originally interior, than the Turanian is of the origin of his case-terminations.308 In [pg 330] the spoken dialects of Chinese, agglutinative forms are of more frequent occurrence. Thus, in the Shanghai dialect, wo is to speak, as a verb; woda, a word. Of woda a genitive is formed, woda-ka, a dative pela woda, an accusative tang woda.309 In agglutinative languages again, we meet with rudimentary traces of inflection. Thus in Tamil the root tûngu, to sleep, has not retained its full integrity in the derivative tûkkam, sleep.

In response to this, it's important to note that while each language, once it becomes established, keeps the grammatical features it had when it first became individually or nationally distinct, it does not completely lose the ability to create grammatical forms that belong to a more advanced stage. In Chinese, and especially in Chinese dialects, we can see basic signs of agglutination. The li, which I mentioned earlier as the marker for locative, has now reduced to a simple postposition, and a modern Chinese speaker is no more aware that li originally meant interior than a Turanian speaker knows the origin of his case endings.308 In the spoken dialects of Chinese, agglutinative forms occur more frequently. For example, in the Shanghai dialect, wo means to speak as a verb; water means a word. From woda, you can form a genitive woda-ka, a dative by the river, and an accusative tang water.309 In agglutinative languages, we also encounter basic traces of inflection. For instance, in Tamil, the root tounge, meaning to sleep, has not kept its full form in the derivative took, which means sleep.

I mention these instances, which might be greatly multiplied, in order to show that there is nothing mysterious in the tenacity with which each language clings in general to that stage of grammar which it had attained at the time of its first settlement. If a family, or a tribe, or a nation, has once accustomed itself to express its ideas according to one system of grammar, that first mould remains and becomes stronger with each generation. But, while Chinese was arrested and became traditional in this very early stage the radical, other dialects passed on through that stage, retaining their pliancy. They were not arrested, and did not become traditional or national, before those who spoke them had learnt to appreciate the advantage of agglutination. That advantage being once perceived, a few single forms in which agglutination first showed itself would soon, by that sense of analogy which is inherent [pg 331] in language, extend their influence irresistibly. Languages arrested in that stage would cling with equal tenacity to the system of agglutination. A Chinese can hardly understand how language is possible, unless every syllable is significative; a Turanian despises every idiom in which each word does not display distinctly its radical and significative element; whereas, we who are accustomed to the use of inflectional languages, are proud of the very grammar which a Chinese and Turanian would treat with contempt.

I bring up these examples, which could be greatly expanded, to illustrate that there’s nothing mysterious about how each language sticks to the level of grammar it reached when it first settled. If a group, whether a family, tribe, or nation, gets used to expressing ideas using one grammatical system, that initial form stays and strengthens with each generation. However, while Chinese halted and became conventional at this early stage, other dialects progressed beyond it, retaining their adaptability. These languages weren’t stunted or made traditional before their speakers recognized the benefits of agglutination. Once they saw that advantage, a few forms in which agglutination first appeared quickly spread their influence through the inherent sense of analogy in language. Languages that were halted at that stage would keep clinging just as firmly to the system of agglutination. A Chinese speaker can hardly grasp how language works if every syllable isn’t meaningful; a Turanian looks down on any language where each word doesn’t clearly show its root and meaning. Meanwhile, we, who are used to inflectional languages, take pride in the very grammar that a Chinese or Turanian would dismiss.

The fact, therefore, that languages, if once settled, do not change their grammatical constitution, is no argument against our theory, that every inflectional language was once agglutinative, and every agglutinative language was once monosyllabic. I call it a theory, but it is more than a theory, for it is the only possible way in which the realities of Sanskrit or any other inflectional language can be explained. As far as the formal part of language is concerned, we cannot resist the conclusion that what is now inflectional was formerly agglutinative, and what is now agglutinative was at first radical. The great stream of language rolled on in numberless dialects, and changed its grammatical coloring as it passed from time to time through new deposits of thought. The different channels which left the main current and became stationary and stagnant, or, if you like, literary and traditional, retained forever that coloring which the main current displayed at the stage of their separation. If we call the radical stage white, the agglutinative red, and the inflectional blue, then we may well understand why the white channels should show hardly a drop of red or blue, or why the red channels should [pg 332] hardly betray a shadow of blue; and we shall be prepared to find what we do find, namely, white tints in the red, and white and red tints in the blue channels of speech.

The fact that languages, once established, don't change their grammatical structure doesn't contradict our idea that every inflectional language started out as agglutinative, and every agglutinative language began as monosyllabic. I refer to it as a theory, but it’s more than that; it's the only way to explain the realities of Sanskrit or any other inflectional language. When it comes to the formal aspect of language, we can't ignore the conclusion that what we now call inflectional was once agglutinative, and what is currently agglutinative was initially extreme. The vast river of language flowed through countless dialects, altering its grammatical appearance as it encountered new ideas over time. The different paths that branched off from the main current and became fixed and stagnant, or, if you prefer, literary and traditional, kept the coloring that the main current displayed at the time of their separation. If we think of the radical stage as white, the agglutinative as red, and the inflectional as blue, then it's understandable why the white channels show little to no red or blue, or why the red channels barely reveal a hint of blue. We should also expect, as we do find, white tints in the red channels and both white and red tints in the blue channels of speech.

You will have perceived that in what I have said I only argue for the possibility, not for the necessity, of a common origin of language.

You might have noticed that in what I've said, I'm only arguing for the possibility, not the necessity, of a common origin of language.

I look upon the problem of the common origin of language, which I have shown to be quite independent of the problem of the common origin of mankind, as a question which ought to be kept open as long as possible. It is not, I believe, a problem quite as hopeless as that of the plurality of worlds, on which so much has been written of late, but it should be treated very much in the same manner. As it is impossible to demonstrate by the evidence of the senses that the planets are inhabited, the only way to prove that they are, is to prove that it is impossible that they should not be. Thus on the other hand, in order to prove that the planets are not inhabited, you must prove that it is impossible that they should be. As soon as the one or the other has been proved, the question will be set at rest: till then it must remain an open question, whatever our own predilections on the subject may be.

I see the issue of the shared origin of language, which I've shown to be completely separate from the issue of the shared origin of humanity, as a question that should stay open for as long as possible. I don't think it's as hopeless a problem as the question of whether there are multiple worlds, which has been heavily discussed lately, but it should be approached in a similar way. Just as it's impossible to use sensory evidence to show that other planets are inhabited, the only way to prove they are inhabited is to show that it’s impossible for them not to be. Conversely, to prove that the planets are not inhabited, you have to show that it's impossible for them to be. Once either of these has been proven, the question will be settled; until then, it must remain an open question, regardless of our personal beliefs on the matter.

I do not take quite as desponding a view of the problem of the common origin of language, but I insist on this, that we ought not to allow this problem to be in any way prejudged. Now it has been the tendency of the most distinguished writers on comparative philology to take it almost for granted, that after the discovery of the two families of language, the Aryan and Semitic, and after the establishment of the [pg 333] close ties of relationship which unite the members of each, it would be impossible to admit any longer a common origin of language. It was natural, after the criteria by which the unity of the Aryan as well as the Semitic dialects can be proved had been so successfully defined, that the absence of similar coincidences between any Semitic and Aryan language, or between these and any other branch of speech, should have led to a belief that no connection was admissible between them. A Linnæan botanist, who has his definite marks by which to recognize an Anemone, would reject with equal confidence any connection between the species Anemone and other flowers which have since been classed under the same head though deficient in the Linnæan marks of the Anemone.

I don’t hold as bleak a view of the issue regarding the common origin of language, but I firmly believe that we shouldn’t rush to any conclusions about this problem. It has been the tendency of many prominent scholars in comparative linguistics to almost assume that after discovering the two language families, Aryan and Semitic, and establishing the close relationships among their members, it would be impossible to accept a common origin for language. Once the criteria for proving the unity of both the Aryan and Semitic dialects were clearly defined, it was natural that the lack of similar similarities between any Semitic and Aryan language, or compared to any other language family, would lead to the belief that no connection was possible between them. A Linnaean botanist, armed with the specific characteristics to identify an Anemone, would confidently dismiss any connection between the Anemone species and other flowers that have since been classified under the same category but lack the defining Linnaean features of the Anemone.

But there are surely different degrees of affinity in languages as well as in all other productions of nature, and the different families of speech, though they cannot show the same signs of relationship by which their members are held together, need not of necessity have been perfect strangers to each other from the beginning.

But there are definitely different levels of connection in languages just like in everything else in nature, and while the various language families may not show the same signs of relationship that keep their members connected, they don’t necessarily have to have been complete strangers to one another from the start.

Now I confess that when I found the argument used over and over again, that it is impossible any longer to speak of a common origin of language, because comparative philology had proved that there existed various families of language, I felt that this was not true, that at all events it was an exaggeration.

Now I admit that when I kept hearing the argument that we can no longer talk about a common origin of language because comparative philology has shown that there are different language families, I felt this wasn't true; in any case, it was an exaggeration.

The problem, if properly viewed, bears the following aspect:—If you wish to assert that language had various beginnings, you must prove it impossible that language could have had a common origin.

The problem, if looked at the right way, has this aspect:—“If you want to argue that language has multiple origins, you need to prove that it couldn't have just one common origin.”

No such impossibility has ever been established [pg 334] with regard to a common origin of the Aryan and Semitic dialects; while on the contrary the analysis of the grammatical forms in either family has removed many difficulties, and made it at least intelligible how, with materials identical or very similar, two individuals, or two families, or two nations, could in the course of time have produced languages so different in form as Hebrew and Sanskrit.

No such impossibility has ever been proven [pg 334] regarding a common origin of the Aryan and Semitic languages; in fact, the analysis of the grammatical structures in both language groups has clarified many issues, making it understandable how, with the same or very similar materials, two individuals, or two families, or two nations could have developed languages as different in form as Hebrew and Sanskrit over time.

But still greater light was thrown on the formative and metamorphic process of language by the study of other dialects unconnected with Sanskrit or Hebrew, and exhibiting before our eyes the growth of those grammatical forms (grammatical in the widest sense of the word) which in the Aryan and Semitic families we know only as formed, not as forming; as decaying, not as living; as traditional, not as understood and intentional: I mean the Turanian languages. The traces by which these languages attest their original relationship are much fainter than in the Semitic and Aryan families, but they are so of necessity. In the Aryan and Semitic families, the agglutinative process, by which alone grammatical forms can be obtained, has been arrested at some time, and this could only have been through religious or political influences. By the same power through which an advancing civilization absorbs the manifold dialects in which every spoken idiom naturally represents itself, the first political or religious centralization must necessarily have put a check on the exuberance of an agglutinative speech. Out of many possible forms one became popular, fixed, and technical for each word, for each grammatical category; and by means of poetry, law, and religion, a literary or political [pg 335] language was produced to which thenceforth nothing had to be added; which in a short time, after becoming unintelligible in its formal elements, was liable to phonetic corruption only, but incapable of internal resuscitation. It is necessary to admit a primitive concentration of this kind for the Aryan and Semitic families, for it is thus only that we can account for coincidences between Sanskrit and Greek terminations, which were formed neither from Greek nor from Sanskrit materials, but which are still identically the same in both. It is in this sense that I call these languages political or state languages, and it has been truly said that languages belonging to these families must be able to prove their relationship by sharing in common not only what is regular and intelligible, but what is anomalous, unintelligible, and dead.

But a clearer understanding of how languages develop and change comes from studying other dialects that aren’t related to Sanskrit or Hebrew. These dialects show us the evolution of grammatical forms (in the broadest sense) that in the Aryan and Semitic languages we only see as established, not as evolving; as stagnant, not as vibrant; as traditional, not as actively understood and deliberate: I’m talking about the Turanian languages. The connections that these languages reveal about their original relationships are much weaker than those in the Semitic and Aryan families, but that’s to be expected. In the Aryan and Semitic families, the process of agglutination, which is the only way to create grammatical forms, was halted at some point, likely due to religious or political forces. The same influence that allows a growing civilization to absorb the various dialects representing every spoken language must have also restricted the natural expansion of agglutinative speech during the initial political or religious centralization. From many potential forms, one became dominant, standardized, and technical for each word and grammatical category; and through poetry, law, and religion, a literary or political language emerged that needed no further additions. This language quickly became difficult to understand in its formal aspects, susceptible only to phonetic changes, but could not be revived internally. We must acknowledge such a primitive consolidation for the Aryan and Semitic families, as it explains the similarities between Sanskrit and Greek endings that were formed independently of either language, yet remain identical in both. This is why I refer to these languages as political or state languages, and it has been accurately noted that languages from these families must demonstrate their connections not only through what is regular and clear but also through what is irregular, obscure, and obsolete.

If no such concentration takes place, languages, though formed of the same materials and originally identical, must necessarily diverge in what we may call dialects, but in a very different sense from the dialects such as we find in the later periods of political languages. The process of agglutination will continue in each clan, and forms becoming unintelligible will be easily replaced by new and more intelligible compounds. If the cases are formed by postpositions, new postpositions can be used as soon as the old ones become obsolete. If the conjugation is formed by pronouns, new pronouns can be used if the old ones are no longer sufficiently distinct.

If no such concentration happens, languages, even though they're made of the same elements and were originally the same, will inevitably split into what we can call dialects, but in a very different way than the dialects we see in later stages of political languages. The process of combining will keep happening in each group, and forms that become hard to understand will easily be replaced by new and clearer combinations. If the cases are created by postpositions, new postpositions can be introduced as soon as the old ones become outdated. If the conjugation is based on pronouns, new pronouns can be adopted if the old ones are no longer clear enough.

Let us ask then, what coincidences we are likely to find in agglutinative dialects which have become separated, and which gradually approach to a more settled [pg 336] state? It seems to me that we can only expect to find in them such coincidences as Castrén and Schott have succeeded in discovering in the Finnic, Turkic, Mongolic, Tungusic, and Samoyedic languages; and such as Hodgson, Caldwell, Logan, and myself have pointed out in the Tamulic, Gangetic, Lohitic, Taïc, and Malaïc languages. They must refer chiefly to the radical materials of language, or to those parts of speech which it is most difficult to reproduce, I mean pronouns, numerals, and prepositions. These languages will hardly ever agree in what is anomalous or inorganic, because their organism repels continually what begins to be formal and unintelligible. It is astonishing rather, that any words of a conventional meaning should have been discovered as the common property of the Turanian languages, than that most of their words and forms should be peculiar to each. These coincidences must, however, be accounted for by those who deny the common origin of the Turanian languages; they must be accounted for, either as the result of accident, or of an imitative instinct which led the human mind everywhere to the same onomatopoëtic formations. This has never been done, and it will require great efforts to achieve it.

Let’s consider what coincidences we might find in agglutinative dialects that have become separated and are gradually settling into a more stable form. It seems to me that we can only expect to find the same coincidences that Castrén and Schott discovered in the Finnic, Turkic, Mongolic, Tungusic, and Samoyedic languages, as well as those noted by Hodgson, Caldwell, Logan, and myself in the Tamulic, Gangetic, Lohitic, Taïc, and Malaïc languages. These coincidences will mainly relate to the core elements of language or to the parts of speech that are hardest to reproduce, such as pronouns, numerals, and prepositions. These languages are unlikely to agree on what is unusual or artificial because their structure consistently rejects anything that starts to feel formal or unclear. It's more surprising that any words with a conventional meaning have been found as common across the Turanian languages than that most of their words and forms are unique to each. However, those who deny the common origin of the Turanian languages need to explain these coincidences, whether as coincidences or as an imitative instinct that led the human mind to the same sound-based formations everywhere. This explanation has yet to be provided, and it will take considerable effort to accomplish it.

To myself the study of the Turanian family was interesting particularly because it offered an opportunity of learning how far languages, supposed to be of a common origin, might diverge and become dissimilar by the unrestrained operation of dialectic regeneration.

To me, studying the Turanian family was fascinating, especially because it provided a chance to see how languages, thought to have a common origin, can diverge and become different through the natural evolution of dialects.

In a letter which I addressed to my friend, the late Baron Bunsen, and which was published by him in his “Outlines of the Philosophy of Universal History”310 [pg 337] (vol. i. pp. 263-521), it had been my object to trace, as far as I was able, the principles which guided the formation of agglutinative languages, and to show how far languages may become dissimilar in their grammar and dictionary, and yet allow us to treat them as cognate dialects. In answer to the assertion that it was impossible, I tried, in the fourth, fifth, and sixth sections of that Essay, to show how it was possible, that, starting from a common ground, languages as different as Mandshu and Finnish, Malay and Siamese, should have arrived at their present state, and might still be treated as cognate tongues. And as I look upon this process of agglutination as the only intelligible means by which language can acquire a grammatical organization, and clear the barrier which has arrested the growth of the Chinese idiom, I felt justified in applying the principles derived from the formation of the Turanian languages to the Aryan and Semitic families. They also must have passed through an agglutinative stage, and it is during that period alone that we can account for the gradual divergence and individualization of what we afterwards call the Aryan and Semitic forms of speech. If we can account for the different appearance of Mandshu and Finnish, we can also account for the distance between Hebrew and Sanskrit. It is true that we do not know the Aryan speech during its agglutinative period, but we can infer what it was when we see languages like Finnish and Turkish approaching more and more to an Aryan type. Such has been the advance which Turkish has made towards inflectional forms, that Professor Ewald claims for it [pg 338] the title of a synthetic language, a title which he gives to the Aryan and Semitic dialects after they have left the agglutinative stage, and entered into a process of phonetic corruption and dissolution. “Many of its component parts,” he says, “though they were no doubt originally, as in every language, independent words, have been reduced to mere vowels, or have been lost altogether, so that we must infer their former presence by the changes which they have wrought in the body of the word. Göz means eye, and gör, to see; ish, deed, and ir, to do; îtsh, the interior, gîr, to enter.”311 Nay, he goes so far as to admit some formal elements which Turkish shares in common with the Aryan family, and which therefore could only date from a period when both were still in their agglutinative infancy. For instance, di, as exponent of a past action; ta, as the sign of the past participle of the passive; lu, as a suffix to form adjectives, &c.312 This is more than I should venture to assert.

In a letter I wrote to my late friend, Baron Bunsen, which he published in his "Overviews of the Philosophy of Universal History"310 [pg 337] (vol. i. pp. 263-521), my goal was to outline, as much as I could, the principles that guided the development of agglutinative languages. I aimed to demonstrate how languages can become very different in their grammar and vocabulary, yet still be treated as related dialects. In response to the claim that this was impossible, I attempted in the fourth, fifth, and sixth sections of that essay to explain how it is possible for languages as different as Mandshu and Finnish, Malay and Siamese, to have evolved from a common ground and still be viewed as related languages. I believe that this process of agglutination is the only logical way for language to develop grammatical structure, clearing the barriers that have hindered the growth of the Chinese language. This gave me reason to apply the principles derived from the formation of Turanian languages to the Aryan and Semitic families. They too must have undergone an agglutinative phase, and it's only during that time that we can explain the gradual divergence and individualization of what we later refer to as Aryan and Semitic languages. If we can explain the differences between Mandshu and Finnish, we can also explain the gap between Hebrew and Sanskrit. It’s true that we do not know what Aryan speech was like during its agglutinative phase, but we can make inferences based on languages like Finnish and Turkish gradually adopting more Aryan characteristics. Turkish has made such significant progress toward inflectional forms that Professor Ewald describes it as a synthetic language, a label he also applies to the Aryan and Semitic dialects after they have moved past the agglutinative stage and entered a phase of phonetic change and dissolution. “Many of its parts,” he says, “Though they were probably originally independent words, like in every language, they have been reduced to just vowels or have disappeared entirely, so we can only guess their previous existence by the changes they caused in the structure of the word. Göz means eye, and gör means to see; ish means deed, and ir means to do; îtsh means the interior, while gîr means to enter.”311 He even goes so far as to acknowledge some formal elements that Turkish shares with the Aryan family, which could only date back to a time when both languages were still in their agglutinative infancy. For example, di, signifying a past action; ta, indicating the past participle of the passive; lu, as a suffix for forming adjectives, etc.312 This is more than I would dare to claim.

Taking this view of the gradual formation of language by agglutination, as opposed to intussusception, it is hardly necessary to say that, if I speak of a Turanian family of speech, I use the word family in a different sense from that which it has with regard to the Aryan and Semitic languages. In my Letter on the Turanian languages, which has been the subject of such fierce attacks from those who believe in different beginnings of language and mankind, I had explained this repeatedly, and I had preferred the term of group for the Turanian languages, in order to express as clearly as possible that the relation between Turkish [pg 339] and Mandshu, between Tamil and Finnish, was a different one, not in degree only, but in kind, from that between Sanskrit and Greek. “These Turanian languages,” I said (p. 216), “cannot be considered as standing to each other in the same relation as Hebrew and Arabic, Sanskrit and Greek.” “They are radii diverging from a common centre, not children of a common parent.” And still they are not so widely distant as Hebrew and Sanskrit, because none of them has entered into that new phase of growth or decay (p. 218) through which the Semitic and Aryan languages passed after they had been settled, individualized, and nationalized.

Taking this view of the gradual formation of language through agglutination, as opposed to intussusception, it's hardly necessary to mention that when I refer to a Turanian family of speech, I use the term "family" in a different way than it applies to the Aryan and Semitic languages. In my Letter on the Turanian languages, which has faced intense criticism from those who believe in different origins for language and humanity, I explained this repeatedly. I preferred the term group for the Turanian languages to clearly express that the relationship between Turkish [pg 339] and Mandshu, between Tamil and Finnish, is different—not just in degree but in kind—from that between Sanskrit and Greek. “These Turanian languages,” I stated (p. 216), "cannot be seen as having the same relationship to each other as Hebrew and Arabic, or Sanskrit and Greek." “They are rays spreading out from a common center, not offspring of a shared parent.” Yet, they are not as far removed from each other as Hebrew and Sanskrit, because none of them has gone through that new phase of growth or decay (p. 218) that the Semitic and Aryan languages experienced after they became settled, individualized, and nationalized.

The real object of my Essay was therefore a defensive one. It was to show how rash it was to speak of different independent beginnings in the history of human speech, before a single argument had been brought forward to establish the necessity of such an admission. The impossibility of a common origin of language has never been proved, but, in order to remove what were considered difficulties affecting the theory of a common origin, I felt it my duty to show practically, and by the very history of the Turanian languages, how such a theory was possible, or as I say in one instance only, probable. I endeavored to show how even the most distant members of the Turanian family, the one spoken in the north, the other in the south of Asia, the Finnic and the Tamulic, have preserved in their grammatical organization traces of a former unity; and, if my opponents admit that I have proved the ante-Brahmanic or Tamulic inhabitants of India to belong to the Turanian family, they can hardly have been aware that if this, the most extreme point of my argument be conceded, [pg 340] everything else is involved, and must follow by necessity.

The true purpose of my essay was to defend a point. I aimed to show how reckless it is to claim there were different independent beginnings in the history of human language before any argument has been made to justify that claim. The idea that languages must have had a common origin has never been proven, but to address what were seen as challenges to the theory of a common origin, I felt it was necessary to demonstrate practically, using the history of the Turanian languages, how this theory could be possible—or, in one case, just likely. I tried to illustrate how even the most distant branches of the Turanian family, one spoken in the north and the other in the south of Asia, the Finnish and the Tamulic, have maintained traces of a former unity in their grammatical structure; and if my opponents concede that I have demonstrated the ante-Brahmanic or Tamulic inhabitants of India belong to the Turanian family, they may not realize that if this, the farthest point of my argument, is accepted, then everything else necessarily follows. [pg 340]

Yet I did not call the last chapter of my Essay, “On the Necessity of a common origin of Language,” but “On the Possibility;” and, in answer to the opinions advanced by the opposite party, I summed up my defence in these two paragraphs:—

Yet I didn't title the last chapter of my essay, "On the Need for a Shared Origin of Language," but “On the Possibility” and in response to the views presented by the opposing side, I summarized my defense in these two paragraphs:—

I.

I.

Nothing necessitates the admission of different independent beginnings for the material elements of the Turanian, Semitic, and Aryan branches of speech;—nay, it is possible even now to point out radicals which, under various changes and disguises, have been current in these three branches ever since their first separation.

There’s no need to believe that the Turanian, Semitic, and Aryan language families have completely separate and independent origins; in fact, we can even pinpoint fundamental roots that, despite numerous changes and adaptations, have been present in these three branches since they first diverged.

II.

II.

Nothing necessitates the admission of different beginnings for the formal elements of the Turanian, Semitic, and Aryan branches of speech;—and though it is impossible to derive the Aryan system of grammar from the Semitic, or the Semitic from the Aryan, we can perfectly understand how, either through individual influences, or by the wear and tear of speech in its own continuous working, the different systems of grammar of Asia and Europe may have been produced.

There’s no need to accept different origins for the formal features of the Turanian, Semitic, and Aryan language families;—and while we can't trace the Aryan grammatical system back to the Semitic one, or the other way around, we can clearly see how, either through individual influences or the natural evolution of language over time, the unique grammatical systems of Asia and Europe could have developed.

It will be seen, from the very wording of these two paragraphs, that my object was to deny the necessity of independent beginnings, and to assert the possibility of a common origin of language. I have been accused [pg 341] of having been biassed in my researches by an implicit belief in the common origin of mankind. I do not deny that I hold this belief, and, if it wanted confirmation, that confirmation has been supplied by Darwin's book “On the Origin of Species.”313 But I defy my adversaries to point out one single passage where I have mixed up scientific with theological arguments. Only if I am told that no “quiet observer would ever have conceived the idea of deriving all mankind from one pair, unless the Mosaic records had taught it,” I must be allowed to say in reply, that this idea on the contrary is so natural, so consistent with all human laws of reasoning, that, as far as I know, there has been no nation on earth which, if it possessed any traditions on the origin of mankind, did not derive the human race from one pair, if not from one person. The author of the Mosaic records, therefore, though stripped, before the tribunal of Physical Science, of his claims as an inspired writer, may at least claim the modest title of a quiet observer, and if his conception of the physical unity of the human race can be proved to be an error, it is an error which he shares in common [pg 342] with other quiet observers, such as Humboldt, Bunsen, Prichard, and Owen.314

It's clear from the wording of these two paragraphs that my goal was to challenge the need for independent beginnings and to support the idea of a shared origin of language. I've been accused of being biased in my research because of a belief in the common origin of humanity. I won't deny that I hold this belief, and if I needed confirmation, Darwin's book "On the Origin of Species." has certainly provided it. However, I challenge my critics to point to a single instance where I have confused scientific and religious arguments. If someone claims that no “a quiet observer would never have thought of the idea of tracing all humanity back to a single pair, unless the Mosaic records had suggested it.” I must respond that, on the contrary, this idea is so natural and consistent with all human reasoning that, to my knowledge, there hasn't been a nation on earth that, if it had any traditions about humanity's origin, didn't trace the human race back to one pair, if not one person. Thus, the author of the Mosaic records, despite being stripped of his claims as an inspired writer in the eyes of Physical Science, can at least claim the modest title of a quiet observer. If his view of the physical unity of the human race is proven incorrect, it is an error he shares with other quiet observers like Humboldt, Bunsen, Prichard, and Owen.

The only question which remains to be answered is this, Was it one and the same volume of water which supplied all the lateral channels of speech? or, to drop all metaphor, are the roots which were joined together according to the radical, the terminational, and inflectional systems, identically the same? The only way to answer, or at least to dispose of, this question is to consider the nature and origin of roots; and we shall then have reached the extreme limits to which inductive reasoning can carry us in our researches into the mysteries of human speech.

The only question that remains to be answered is this: Was it the same source of water that provided for all the different channels of speech? Or, to be straightforward, are the roots that are connected through the radical, terminal, and inflectional systems exactly the same? The only way to answer, or at least address, this question is to examine the nature and origin of roots; and in doing so, we will have reached the farthest limits that inductive reasoning can take us in our exploration of the mysteries of human speech.

[pg 343]

Lecture IX. Theoretical Stage and the Origin of Language.

“In examining the history of mankind, as well as in examining the phenomena of the material world, when we cannot trace the process by which an event has been produced, it is often of importance to be able to show how it may have been produced by natural causes. Thus, although it is impossible to determine with certainty what the steps were by which any particular language was formed, yet if we can show, from the known principles of human nature, how all its various parts might gradually have arisen, the mind is not only to a certain degree satisfied, but a check is given to that indolent philosophy which refers to a miracle whatever appearances, both in the natural and moral worlds, it is unable to explain.”315

"When examining human history and events in the physical world, if we can't pinpoint how something occurred, it's often helpful to show how it could have happened through natural processes. Although we can't know the precise steps that led to the creation of a specific language, if we can demonstrate, based on our understanding of human nature, how its various elements might have evolved over time, it enhances our comprehension. It also challenges the easy thinking that labels anything we can't explain—whether in nature or ethics—as a miracle."315

This quotation from an eminent Scotch philosopher contains the best advice that could be given to the student of the science of language, when he approaches the problem which we have to examine to-day, namely, the origin of language. Though we have stripped that problem of the perplexing and mysterious aspect which it presented to the philosophers of old, yet, even in its simplest form, it seems to be almost beyond the reach of the human understanding.

This quote from a well-known Scottish philosopher offers the best advice for anyone studying the science of language as they tackle today's topic: the origin of language. Although we've removed the confusing and mysterious elements that the ancient philosophers faced, even in its simplest form, it still appears to be nearly beyond human comprehension.

[pg 344]

If we were asked the riddle how images of the eye and all the sensations of our senses could be represented by sounds, nay, could be so embodied in sounds as to express thought and excite thought, we should probably give it up as the question of a madman, who, mixing up the most heterogeneous subjects, attempted to change color into sound and sound into thought.316 Yet this is the riddle which we have now to solve.

If we were asked the puzzling question of how images seen by the eye and all the sensations from our senses could be represented by sounds, or even how they could be embodied in sounds to express and provoke thought, we would likely dismiss it as a lunatic's inquiry, mixing the most unrelated topics, attempting to transform color into sound and sound into thought. 316 Yet this is the puzzle we now need to solve.

It is quite clear that we have no means of solving the problem of the origin of language historically, or of explaining it as a matter of fact which happened once in a certain locality and at a certain time. History does not begin till long after mankind had acquired the power of language, and even the most ancient traditions are silent as to the manner in which man came in possession of his earliest thoughts and words. Nothing, no doubt, would be more interesting than to know from historical documents the exact process by which the first man began to lisp his first words, and thus to be rid forever of all the theories on the origin of speech. But this knowledge is denied us; and, if it had been otherwise, we should probably be quite unable to understand those primitive events in the history of the human mind.317 We are told that the first man was the son of God, that God created him in His own image, formed him of the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life. These are simple [pg 345] facts, and to be accepted as such; if we begin to reason on them, the edge of the human understanding glances off. Our mind is so constituted that it cannot apprehend the absolute beginning or the absolute end of anything. If we tried to conceive the first man created as a child, and gradually unfolding his physical and mental powers, we could not understand his living for one day without supernatural aid. If, on the contrary, we tried to conceive the first man created full-grown in body and mind, the conception of an effect without a cause, of a full-grown mind without a previous growth, would equally transcend our reasoning powers. It is the same with the first beginnings of language. Theologians who claim for language a divine origin drift into the most dangerous anthropomorphism, when they enter into any details as to the manner in which they suppose the Deity to have compiled a dictionary and grammar in order to teach them to the first man, as a schoolmaster teaches the deaf and dumb. And they do not see that, even if all their premises were granted, they would have explained no more than how the first man might have learnt a language, if there was a language ready made for him. How that language was made would remain as great a mystery as ever. Philosophers, on the contrary, who imagine that the first man, though left to himself, would gradually have emerged from a state of mutism and have invented words for every new conception that arose in his mind, forget that man could not by his own power have acquired the faculty of speech which is the distinctive character of mankind,318 unattained and unattainable by the mute [pg 346] creation. It shows a want of appreciation as to the real bearings of our problem, if philosophers appeal to the fact that children are born without language, and gradually emerge from mutism to the full command of articulate speech. We want no explanation how birds learn to fly, created as they are with organs adapted to that purpose. Nor do we wish to inquire how children learn to use the various faculties with which the human body and soul are endowed. We want to gain, if possible, an insight into the original faculty of speech; and for that purpose I fear it is as useless to watch the first stammerings of children, as it would be to repeat the experiment of the Egyptian king who intrusted two new-born infants to a shepherd, with the injunction to let them suck a goat's milk, and to speak no word in their presence, but to observe what word they would first utter.319 The same experiment is said to have been repeated by the Swabian emperor, Frederic II., by James IV. of Scotland, and by one of the Mogul emperors of India. But, whether for the purpose of finding out which was the primitive language of mankind, or of discovering how far language was natural to man, the experiments failed to throw any light on the problem before us. Children, in learning to speak, do not invent language. Language is there ready made for [pg 347] them. It has been there for thousands of years. They acquire the use of a language, and, as they grow up, they may acquire the use of a second and a third. It is useless to inquire whether infants, left to themselves, would invent a language. It would be impossible, unnatural, and illegal to try the experiment, and, without repeated experiments, the assertions of those who believe and those who disbelieve the possibility of children inventing a language of their own, are equally valueless. All we know for certain is, that an English child, if left to itself, would never begin to speak English, and that history supplies no instance of any language having thus been invented.

It’s pretty clear that we have no way of solving the problem of how language originated historically, or explaining it as a fact that happened at a specific time and place. History starts long after humans developed the ability to speak, and even the oldest traditions don’t shed light on how humans first gained their earliest thoughts and words. It would certainly be fascinating to know from historical records the exact process by which the first human started to say their first words, putting an end to all the theories about the origin of speech. But this information is unavailable to us; and even if it were, we’d likely struggle to grasp those early events in human mental history.317 We’re told that the first human was the son of God, created in God’s image, made from the dust of the ground, and given life by God breathing into their nostrils. These are straightforward[pg 345] facts, and should be accepted as such; reasoning about them only leads to dead ends. Our minds are structured in a way that prevents us from understanding the absolute beginning or the absolute end of anything. If we try to imagine the first human as a child, gradually developing their physical and mental abilities, we can’t comprehend how they could live for one day without supernatural assistance. On the other hand, if we picture the first human as being fully formed in body and mind, the idea of an effect without a cause, or a fully developed mind without prior growth, would equally be beyond our reasoning capacities. The same goes for the origins of language. Theologians who argue for a divine origin of language fall into a risky anthropomorphism when they detail how they think God must have compiled a dictionary and grammar to teach the first human, like a teacher instructs the deaf and mute. They fail to realize that even if all their assumptions were valid, they would have explained only how the first human could have learned a language if one had been prepared for them. The creation of that language would remain as big a mystery as ever. Conversely, philosophers who believe that the first human, left to their own devices, would gradually emerge from silence and invent words for every new thought forget that humans couldn’t have developed the faculty team of speech, which is what defines humanity.318 This ability is beyond reach for the mute[pg 346] creation. If philosophers reference the fact that children are born without language and gradually move from silence to fluency in speech, they show a lack of understanding of the real dimensions of our problem. We don’t seek to understand how birds learn to fly since they’re created with the necessary adaptations. Nor do we inquire how children learn to use all the abilities given to the human body and soul. What we want, if possible, is insight into the original capacity for speech; and for that, I’m afraid, observing the initial stutterings of children is as futile as repeating the experiment of the Egyptian king who assigned two newborn infants to a shepherd with the instruction to let them drink goat's milk and speak no words in their presence, to see what word they would utter first.319 This same experiment is said to have been repeated by the Swabian emperor, Frederic II., by James IV. of Scotland, and by a Mogul emperor of India. However, whether for the purpose of discovering humankind's original language or understanding how intrinsic language is to humans, these experiments failed to clarify the issue at hand. Children don’t invent language as they learn to speak. Language exists, already formed, for[pg 347] them. It has been here for thousands of years. They learn to use a language, and as they grow, they may also learn a second and a third language. It's pointless to question whether infants would invent a language if left alone. It would be impossible, unnatural, and unethical to try such an experiment, and without repeated trials, the claims of those who believe or disbelieve in the possibility of children inventing their own language are equally worthless. All we know for sure is that an English child, if left to themselves, would never begin to speak English, and history provides no example of any language being invented this way.

If we want to gain an insight into the faculty of flying, which is a characteristic feature of birds, all we can do is, first, to compare the structure of birds with that of other animals which are devoid of that faculty, and secondly, to examine the conditions under which the act of flying becomes possible. It is the same with speech. Speech is a specific faculty of man. It distinguishes man from all other creatures; and if we wish to acquire more definite ideas as to the real nature of human speech, all we can do is to compare man with those animals that seem to come nearest to him, and thus to try to discover what he shares in common with these animals, and what is peculiar to him and to him alone. After we have discovered this, we may proceed to inquire into the conditions under which speech becomes possible, and we shall then have done all that we can do, considering that the instruments of our knowledge, wonderful as they are, are yet far too weak to carry us into all the regions to which we may soar on the wings of our imagination.

If we want to understand the ability to fly, which is a defining feature of birds, the first thing we can do is compare the body structure of birds with that of other animals that can't fly, and then look at the conditions that make flying possible. It's the same with speech. Speech is a unique ability of humans. It sets us apart from all other creatures; and if we want to get a clearer understanding of what human speech really is, we can compare humans with animals that are most similar to us, trying to find out what we have in common with them and what is unique to us. After figuring this out, we can then look into the conditions that make speech possible. That’s the most we can do, given that our tools for understanding, as amazing as they are, aren't strong enough to take us to all the places our imagination can reach.

[pg 348]

In comparing man with the other animals, we need not enter here into the physiological questions whether the difference between the body of an ape and the body of a man is one of degree or of kind. However that question is settled by physiologists we need not be afraid. If the structure of a mere worm is such as to fill the human mind with awe, if a single glimpse which we catch of the infinite wisdom displayed in the organs of the lowest creature gives us an intimation of the wisdom of its Divine Creator far transcending the powers of our conception, how are we to criticise and disparage the most highly organized creatures of His creation, creatures as wonderfully made as we ourselves? Are there not many creatures on many points more perfect even than man? Do we not envy the lion's strength, the eagle's eye, the wings of every bird? If there existed animals altogether as perfect as man in their physical structure, nay, even more perfect, no thoughtful man would ever be uneasy. His true superiority rests on different grounds. “I confess,” Sydney Smith writes, “I feel myself so much at ease about the superiority of mankind—I have such a marked and decided contempt for the understanding of every baboon I have ever seen—I feel so sure that the blue ape without a tail will never rival us in poetry, painting, and music, that I see no reason whatever that justice may not be done to the few fragments of soul and tatters of understanding which they may really possess.” The playfulness of Sydney Smith in handling serious and sacred subjects has of late been found fault with by many: but humor is a safer sign of strong convictions and perfect safety than guarded solemnity.

In comparing humans to other animals, we don’t need to dive into the scientific debate about whether the difference between an ape’s body and a human body is a matter of degree or kind. Whatever scientists determine, we need not worry. If the structure of something as simple as a worm can fill us with awe, and if just a glimpse of the incredible wisdom shown in even the simplest creatures hints at the wisdom of their Divine Creator—wisdom beyond our understanding—then how can we criticize or look down on the most complex beings in His creation, beings as incredibly made as ourselves? Are there not many creatures that are superior to humans in various aspects? Don’t we admire the strength of a lion, the keen eyesight of an eagle, and the wings of every bird? If there were animals that were just as perfect as humans in their physical structure, or even more perfect, no thoughtful person would ever feel anxious about it. Our true superiority lies on different grounds. "I admit," writes Sydney Smith, "I feel so at ease about the superiority of humanity—I have such a strong and clear disdain for the intelligence of every baboon I've ever encountered—I am so confident that the tailless blue ape will never match us in poetry, painting, and music, that I see no reason why we shouldn't acknowledge the few glimpses of soul and scraps of understanding that they might actually have." Recently, many have criticized Sydney Smith for his playful approach to serious and sacred topics, but humor can be a stronger indicator of firm beliefs and true safety than carefully controlled seriousness.

[pg 349]

With regard to our own problem, no one can doubt that certain animals possess all the physical requirements for articulate speech. There is no letter of the alphabet which a parrot will not learn to pronounce.320 The fact, therefore, that the parrot is without a language of his own, must be explained by a difference between the mental, not between the physical, faculties of the animal and man; and it is by a comparison of the mental faculties alone, such as we find them in man and brutes, that we may hope to discover what constitutes the indispensable qualification for language, a qualification to be found in man alone, and in no other creature on earth.

When it comes to our problem, it's clear that certain animals have all the physical capabilities needed for clear speech. There's no letter of the alphabet that a parrot can’t learn to say. The reason why parrots don’t have their own language must be due to a difference in their mental abilities, not their physical abilities, compared to humans. By only examining the mental capabilities found in both humans and animals, we can hope to figure out what makes humans uniquely qualified for language—something that isn’t found in any other creature on earth.

I say mental faculties, and I mean to claim a large share of what we call our mental faculties for the higher animals. These animals have sensation, perception, memory, will, and intellect, only we must restrict intellect to the comparing or interlacing of single perceptions. All these points can be proved by irrefragable evidence, and that evidence has never, I believe, been summed up with greater lucidity and power than in one of the last publications of M. P. Flourens, “De la Raison, du Génie, et de la Folie:” Paris, [pg 350] 1861. There are no doubt many people who are as much frightened at the idea that brutes have souls and are able to think, as by “the blue ape without a tail.” But their fright is entirely of their own making. If people will use such words as soul or thought without making it clear to themselves and others what they mean by them, these words will slip away under their feet, and the result must be painful. If we once ask the question, Have brutes a soul? we shall never arrive at any conclusion; for soul has been so many times defined by philosophers from Aristotle down to Hegel, that it means everything and nothing. Such has been the confusion caused by the promiscuous employment of the ill-defined terms of mental philosophy that we find Descartes representing brutes as living machines, whereas Leibniz claims for them not only souls, but immortal souls. “Next to the error of those who deny the existence of God,” says Descartes, “there is none so apt to lead weak minds from the right path of virtue, as to think that the soul of brutes is of the same nature as our own; and, consequently, that we have nothing to fear or to hope after this life, any more than flies or ants; whereas, if we know how much they differ, we understand much better that our soul is quite independent of the body, and consequently not subject to die with the body.”

I say cognitive abilities, and I mean to argue that a significant portion of what we refer to as our mental faculties also applies to higher animals. These animals experience feeling, perception, memory, gonna, and intelligence, although we should limit intellect to the comparison or combination of individual perceptions. All of these points can be backed by undeniable evidence, and I believe that evidence has never been summarized with greater clarity and strength than in one of the recent works by M. P. Flourens, "Of Reason, Genius, and Madness:" Paris, [pg 350] 1861. Surely, many people are just as alarmed by the idea that animals have souls and can think as they are by "the tailless blue ape." But their fear is entirely self-inflicted. If people use terms like soul or thought without clearly defining what they mean, those terms will become slippery, leading to confusion. If we ask the question, Do animals have souls? we will never reach a conclusive answer; spirit has been defined so many times by philosophers from Aristotle to Hegel that it conveys everything and nothing at once. The chaotic usage of poorly defined terms in mental philosophy has led Descartes to portray animals as living machines, while Leibniz argues that they possess souls, even immortal ones. "Alongside the mistake of those who deny God's existence," says Descartes, "Nothing is more likely to mislead fragile minds away from the true path of virtue than the belief that the souls of animals are the same as our own. As a result, people may think there’s nothing to fear or hope for after this life, just like flies or ants. However, if we realize how different they are, we understand much better that our soul is fully independent of the body and thus doesn’t die with it."

The spirit of these remarks is excellent, but the argument is extremely weak. It does not follow that brutes have no souls because they have no human souls. It does not follow that the souls of men are not immortal, because the souls of brutes are not immortal; nor has the major premiss ever been proved by any philosopher, namely, that the souls of brutes must [pg 351] necessarily be destroyed and annihilated by death. Leibniz, who has defended the immortality of the human soul with stronger arguments than even Descartes, writes:—“I found at last how the souls of brutes and their sensations do not at all interfere with the immortality of human souls; on the contrary, nothing serves better to establish our natural immortality than to believe that all souls are imperishable.”

The overall message of these comments is great, but the argument is really weak. Just because animals don't have human souls doesn’t mean they don’t have souls at all. And it doesn’t prove that human souls aren’t immortal just because animal souls aren’t; no philosopher has ever proved the main premise that animal souls must be destroyed and completely wiped out by death. Leibniz, who has defended the immortality of the human soul with even stronger arguments than Descartes, writes:—"I realized that the souls of animals and their feelings don’t affect the immortality of human souls at all; in fact, nothing supports our natural immortality better than the belief that all souls are eternal."

Instead of entering into these perplexities, which are chiefly due to the loose employment of ill-defined terms, let us simply look at the facts. Every unprejudiced observer will admit that—

Instead of getting caught up in these complexities, which are mainly caused by the vague use of unclear terms, let's just focus on the facts. Any unbiased observer will agree that—

1. Brutes see, hear, taste, smell, and feel; that is to say, they have five senses, just like ourselves, neither more nor less. They have both sensation and perception, a point which has been illustrated by M. Flourens by the most interesting experiments. If the roots of the optic nerve are removed, the retina in the eye of a bird ceases to be excitable, the iris is no longer movable; the animal is blind, because it has lost the organ of sensation. If, on the contrary, the cerebral lobes are removed, the eye remains pure and sound, the retina excitable, the iris movable. The eye is preserved, yet the animal cannot see, because it has lost the organs of perception.

1. Animals see, hear, taste, smell, and feel; in other words, they have five senses, just like we do—no more and no less. They experience both sensation and perception, a fact demonstrated through fascinating experiments by M. Flourens. If the roots of the optic nerve are cut, the retina in a bird's eye becomes unresponsive, and the iris stops moving; the animal is blind because it has lost the organ of feeling. On the other hand, if the cerebral lobes are removed, the eye remains intact and functional, the retina responsive, and the iris movable. The eye works, but the animal cannot see, as it has lost the organs of awareness.

2. Brutes have sensations of pleasure and pain. A dog that is beaten behaves exactly like a child that is chastised, and a dog that is fed and fondled exhibits the same signs of satisfaction as a boy under the same circumstances. We can only judge from signs, and if they are to be trusted in the case of children, they must be trusted likewise in the case of brutes.

2. Animals experience feelings of pleasure and pain. A dog that is abused reacts just like a child that is punished, and a dog that is given food and affection shows the same signs of happiness as a boy in similar situations. We can only assess based on visible cues, and if those cues are reliable for children, they should also be considered reliable for animals.

3. Brutes do not forget, or as philosophers would [pg 352] say, brutes have memory. They know their masters, they know their home; they evince joy on recognizing those who have been kind to them, and they bear malice for years to those by whom they have been insulted or ill-treated. Who does not recollect the dog Argos in the Odyssey, who, after so many years' absence, was the first to recognize Ulysses?321

3. Animals don’t forget, or as philosophers would say, animals have memory. They recognize their owners, they know where they live; they show happiness when they see those who have treated them well, and they hold grudges for years against those who have insulted or mistreated them. Who doesn’t remember the dog Argos in the Odyssey, who, after so many years apart, was the first to recognize Ulysses?321

4. Brutes are able to compare and to distinguish. A parrot will take up a nut, and throw it down again, without attempting to crack it. He has found that it is light; this he could discover only by comparing the weight of the good nuts with that of the bad: and he has found that it has no kernel; this he could discover only by what philosophers would dignify with the grand title of syllogism, namely, “all light nuts are hollow; this is a light nut, therefore this nut is hollow.”

4. Animals can compare and differentiate. A parrot will pick up a nut and drop it again, without trying to crack it. It has realized that it is light; it could only figure this out by comparing the weights of good nuts with bad ones. It has also noticed that it has no kernel; it arrived at this conclusion through what philosophers would grandly call a syllogism, namely, "All light nuts are hollow; this is a light nut, so this nut is hollow."

5. Brutes have a will of their own. I appeal to any one who has ever ridden a restive horse.

5. Animals have their own will. I ask anyone who has ever ridden a stubborn horse.

6. Brutes show signs of shame and pride. Here again any one who has to deal with dogs, who has watched a retriever with sparkling eyes placing a partridge at his master's feet, or a hound slinking away with his tail between his legs from the huntsman's call, will agree that these signs admit of but one interpretation. The difficulty begins when we use philosophical language, when we claim for brutes a moral sense, a conscience, a power of distinguishing good and evil; and, as we gain nothing by these scholastic terms, it is better to avoid them altogether.

6. Animals show signs of shame and pride. Again, anyone who has interacted with dogs, who has seen a retriever with bright eyes bringing a partridge to its owner's feet, or a hound sneaking away with its tail between its legs at the huntsman's call, will agree that these signs can only mean one thing. The trouble starts when we use complicated language and claim that animals have a moral sense, a conscience, or the ability to tell right from wrong; and since we don’t gain anything by using these academic terms, it's best to avoid them altogether.

7. Brutes show signs of love and hatred. There are well-authenticated stories of dogs following their [pg 353] masters to the grave, and refusing food from any one. Nor is there any doubt that brutes will watch their opportunity till they revenge themselves on those whom they dislike.

7. Animals demonstrate feelings of love and hatred. There are many verified accounts of dogs following their masters to the grave and turning down food from anyone else. It's also clear that animals will wait for the right moment to get back at those they don't like.

If, with all these facts before us, we deny that brutes have sensation, perception, memory, will, and intellect, we ought to bring forward powerful arguments for interpreting the signs which we observe in brutes so differently from those which we observe in men.

If we ignore all these facts and insist that animals don't have sensation, perception, memory, will, and intelligence, we need to present strong arguments for interpreting the signs we see in animals so differently from those we see in humans.

Some philosophers imagine they have explained everything, if they ascribe to brutes instinct instead of intellect. But, if we take these two words in their usual acceptations, they surely do not exclude each other.322 There are instincts in man as well as in brutes. A child takes his mother's breast by instinct; the spider weaves its net by instinct; the bee builds her cell by instinct. No one would ascribe to the child a knowledge of physiology because it employs the exact muscles which are required for sucking; nor shall we claim for the spider a knowledge of mechanics, or for the bee an acquaintance with geometry, because we could not do what they do without a study of these sciences. But what if we tear a spider's web, and see the spider examining the mischief that is done, and either giving up his work in despair, or endeavoring to mend it as well as may be?323 Surely here we have the instinct of weaving controlled by observation, by comparison, by reflection, by judgment. Instinct, whether mechanical or moral, is more prominent in [pg 354] brutes than in man; but it exists in both, as much as intellect is shared by both.

Some philosophers think they’ve explained everything when they attribute behavior to animals' intuition instead of intelligence. However, if we consider these two words in their typical meanings, they definitely don’t exclude each other.322 There are instincts in humans as well as in animals. A baby instinctively knows to take its mother's breast; the spider naturally spins its web; the bee instinctively builds its hive. No one would say that the baby understands physiology just because it uses the exact muscles needed for sucking; nor would we claim that the spider understands mechanics or that the bee knows geometry just because we couldn’t do what they do without studying these subjects. But what if we tear a spider's web and observe the spider examining the damage? It might either give up in despair or try to fix it the best it can.323 Clearly, here we see instinctive weaving influenced by observation, comparison, reflection, and judgment. Instinct, whether physical or moral, is more evident in animals than in humans; but it exists in both, just as intellect does.

Where, then, is the difference between brute and man?324 What is it that man can do, and of which we find no signs, no rudiments, in the whole brute world? I answer without hesitation: the one great barrier between the brute and man is Language. Man speaks, and no brute has ever uttered a word. Language is our Rubicon, and no brute will dare to cross it. This is our matter of fact answer to those who speak of development, who think they discover the rudiments at least of all human faculties in apes, and who would fain keep open the possibility that man is only a more favored beast, the triumphant conqueror in the primeval struggle for life. Language is something more palpable than a fold of the brain, or an angle of the skull. It admits of no cavilling, and no process of natural selection will ever distill significant words out of the notes of birds or the cries of beasts.

Where, then, is the difference between animals and humans? 324 What can humans do that we don't see any signs or hints of in the entire animal kingdom? I answer without hesitation: the one significant barrier between animals and humans is Language. Humans communicate, and no animal has ever spoken a word. Language is our Rubicon, and no animal would dare to cross it. This is our straightforward response to those who talk about evolution, who believe they see the beginnings of all human abilities in apes, and who would like to keep open the idea that humans are simply a more fortunate animal, the victorious survivor in the ancient struggle for existence. Language is something more tangible than a bump on the brain or a shape of the skull. It allows for no argument, and no process of natural selection will ever produce meaningful words from the sounds of birds or the calls of animals.

Language, however, is only the outward sign. We may point to it in our arguments, we may challenge our opponent to produce anything approaching to it from the whole brute world. But if this were all, if the art of employing articulate sounds for the purpose of communicating our impressions were the only thing [pg 355] by which we could assert our superiority over the brute creation, we might not unreasonably feel somewhat uneasy at having the gorilla so close on our heels.

Language, though, is just the external expression. We can reference it in our discussions, and we can challenge our opponent to find anything similar in the animal world. But if that were all there was—if using spoken words to share our thoughts was the only reason we could claim to be better than animals—we might understandably feel a bit anxious having the gorilla so close behind us. [pg 355]

It cannot be denied that brutes, though they do not use articulate sounds for that purpose, have nevertheless means of their own for communicating with each other. When a whale is struck, the whole shoal, though widely dispersed, are instantly made aware of the presence of an enemy; and when the grave-digger beetle finds the carcass of a mole, he hastens to communicate the discovery to his fellows, and soon returns with his four confederates.325 It is evident, too, that dogs, though they do not speak, possess the power of understanding much that is said to them, their names and the calls of their master; and other animals, such as the parrot, can pronounce every articulate sound. Hence, although for the purpose of philosophical warfare, articulate language would still form an impregnable position, yet it is but natural that for our own satisfaction we should try to find out in what the strength of our position really consists; or, in other words, that we should try to discover that inward power of which language is the outward sign and manifestation.

It’s undeniable that animals, even though they don't use spoken words, have their own ways of communicating with each other. When a whale is hit, the entire group, even if they're spread out, quickly becomes aware of a threat. Similarly, when a grave-digger beetle finds a dead mole, it rushes to inform its companions and soon comes back with its four

For this purpose it will be best to examine the opinions of those who approached our problem from another point; who, instead of looking for outward and palpable signs of difference between brute and man, inquired into the inward mental faculties, and tried to determine the point where man transcends the barriers of the brute intellect. That point, if truly determined, ought to coincide with the starting-point [pg 356] of language: and, if so, that coincidence ought to explain the problem which occupies us at present.

For this purpose, it’s best to look at the views of those who approached our issue from a different angle; who, instead of searching for obvious external signs of distinction between animals and humans, explored the internal mental abilities and tried to identify the point where humanity goes beyond the limits of animal intelligence. That point, if accurately identified, should align with the beginning point of language: and if that’s the case, this alignment should clarify the issue we’re currently focused on. [pg 356]

I shall read an extract from Locke's Essay concerning Human Understanding.

I will read a passage from Locke's Essay concerning Human Understanding.

After having explained how universal ideas are made, how the mind, having observed the same color in chalk, and snow, and milk, comprehends these single perceptions under the general conception of whiteness, Locke continues:326 “If it may be doubted, whether beasts compound and enlarge their ideas that way to any degree: this, I think, I may be positive in, that the power of abstracting is not at all in them; and that the having of general ideas is that which puts a perfect distinction betwixt man and brutes, and is an excellency which the faculties of brutes do by no means attain to.”

After explaining how universal ideas are formed, and how the mind, having observed the same color in chalk, snow, and milk, understands these individual perceptions under the general concept of whiteness, Locke continues:326 "If there's any uncertainty about whether animals synthesize and expand their ideas this way, I can say with confidence that they lack the ability to think abstractly; having general ideas is what sets humans apart from animals, as this is a trait that animals do not have."

If Locke is right in considering the having general ideas as the distinguishing feature between man and brutes, and, if we ourselves are right in pointing to language as the one palpable distinction between the two, it would seem to follow that language is the outward sign and realization of that inward faculty which is called the faculty of abstraction, but which is better known to us by the homely name of Reason.

If Locke is correct in seeing general ideas as what sets humans apart from animals, and if we are right in identifying language as the clear distinction between the two, then it follows that language is the visible sign and expression of that internal ability known as the faculty of abstraction, but which we more commonly refer to as Reason.

Let us now look back to the result of our former Lectures. It was this. After we had explained everything in the growth of language that can be explained, there remained in the end, as the only inexplicable residuum, what we called roots. These roots formed the constituent elements of all languages. This discovery has simplified the problem of the origin of language immensely. It has taken away all excuse for those [pg 357] rapturous descriptions of language which invariably preceded the argument that language must have a divine origin. We shall hear no more of that wonderful instrument which can express all we see, and hear, and taste, and touch, and smell; which is the breathing image of the whole world; which gives form to the airy feelings of our souls, and body to the loftiest dreams of our imagination; which can arrange in accurate perspective the past, the present, and the future, and throw over everything the varying hues of certainty, of doubt, of contingency. All this is perfectly true, but it is no longer wonderful, at least not in the Arabian Nights sense of that word. “The speculative mind,” as Dr. Ferguson says, “in comparing the first and last steps of the progress of language, feels the same sort of amazement with a traveller, who, after rising insensibly on the slope of a hill, comes to look from a precipice of an almost unfathomable depth to the summit of which he scarcely believes himself to have ascended without supernatural aid.” To certain minds it is a disappointment to be led down again by the hand of history from that high summit. They prefer the unintelligible which they can admire, to the intelligible which they can only understand. But to a mature mind reality is more attractive than fiction, and simplicity more wonderful than complication. Roots may seem dry things as compared with the poetry of Goethe. Yet there is something more truly wonderful in a root than in all the lyrics of the world.

Let’s take a moment to reflect on the results of our previous lectures. Here’s what we found: after explaining everything we could about how language develops, what was left as the only mystery was what we referred to as roots. These roots are the basic building blocks of all languages. This discovery has greatly clarified the issue of how language originated. It has removed any justification for the overly enthusiastic descriptions of language that usually led to the argument that it must have a divine origin. We won’t hear any more about that amazing tool that can express everything we see, hear, taste, touch, and smell; that reflects the entire world; that gives form to our fleeting feelings and substance to our highest dreams; that can accurately arrange the past, present, and future, and cast everything in shifting shades of certainty, doubt, and possibility. While all of this is indeed true, it’s no longer extraordinary, at least not in the way the phrase “Arabian Nights” implies. “The curious mind,” as Dr. Ferguson puts it, "Comparing the first and last steps in the evolution of language brings the same kind of amazement as a traveler who, after slowly ascending a hill, finds himself gazing down from a cliff of unimaginable depth to the summit he can hardly believe he reached without some sort of supernatural assistance." For some people, it’s disappointing to be gently led back down by history from that lofty peak. They prefer the incomprehensible, which they can admire, over the comprehensible, which they can only understand. But for a mature mind, reality is more appealing than fiction, and simplicity is more remarkable than complexity. Roots might seem boring compared to the poetry of Goethe. Yet there’s something far more genuinely wonderful in a root than in all the lyrics of the world.

What, then, are these roots? In our modern languages roots can only be discovered by scientific analysis, and, even as far back as Sanskrit, we may say that no root was ever used as a noun or as a verb. [pg 358] But originally roots were thus used, and in Chinese we have fortunately preserved to us a representative of that primitive radical stage which, like the granite, underlies all other strata of human speech. The Aryan root , to give, appears in Sanskrit dâ-nam, donum, gift, as a substantive; in do, Sanskrit dadâmi, Greek di-dō-mi, I give, as a verb; but the root DÂ can never be used by itself. In Chinese, on the contrary, the root TA, as such, is used in the sense of a noun, greatness; of a verb, to be great; of an adverb, greatly or much. Roots therefore are not, as is commonly maintained, merely scientific abstractions, but they were used originally as real words. What we want to find out is this, What inward mental phase is it that corresponds to these roots, as the germs of human speech?

What, then, are these roots? In our modern languages, roots can only be identified through scientific analysis, and even as far back as Sanskrit, we can say that no root was ever used as a noun or a verb. [pg 358] But originally, roots were used this way, and in Chinese, we still have a representative of that primitive radical stage which, like granite, forms the foundation of all other layers of human speech. The Aryan root , meaning to give, appears in Sanskrit as dynam, gift, meaning gift, as a noun; in do, Sanskrit dadâmi, Greek di-dō-mi, meaning I give, as a verb; but the root DÂ can never be used by itself. In Chinese, on the other hand, the root TA is used as a noun meaning greatness; as a verb, meaning to be great; and as an adverb, meaning greatly or much. So, roots are not just scientific abstractions, as is commonly believed, but were originally used as actual words. What we want to discover is this: What internal mental phase corresponds to these roots as the seeds of human speech?

Two theories have been started to solve this problem, which, for shortness' sake, I shall call the Bow-wow theory and the Pooh-pooh theory.327

Two theories have been proposed to address this problem, which, for simplicity, I will refer to as the Bow-wow theory and the Dismissive theory.327

According to the first, roots are imitations of sounds, according to the second, they are involuntary interjections. The first theory was very popular among the philosophers of the eighteenth century, and, as it is still held by many distinguished scholars and philosophers, we must examine it more carefully. It is supposed then that man, being as yet mute, heard the voices of birds and dogs and cows, the thunder of the clouds, the roaring of the sea, the rustling of the forest, the [pg 359] murmurs of the brook, and the whisper of the breeze. He tried to imitate these sounds, and finding his mimicking cries useful as signs of the objects from which they proceeded, he followed up the idea and elaborated language. This view was most ably defended by Herder.328 “Man,” he says, “shows conscious reflection when his soul acts so freely that it may separate, in the ocean of sensations which rush into it through the senses, one single wave, arrest it, regard it, being conscious all the time of regarding this one single wave. Man proves his conscious reflection when, out of the dream of images that float past his senses, he can gather himself up and wake for a moment, dwelling intently on one image, fixing it with a bright and tranquil glance, and discovering for himself those signs by which he knows that this is this image and no other. Man proves his conscious reflection when he not only perceives vividly and distinctly all the features of an object, but is able to separate and recognize one or more of them as its distinguishing features.” For instance, “Man sees a lamb. He does not see it like the ravenous wolf. He is not disturbed by any uncontrollable instinct. He wants to know it, but he is neither drawn towards it nor repelled from it by his senses. The lamb stands before him, as represented by his senses, white, soft, woolly. The conscious and reflecting soul of man looks for a distinguishing mark;—the lamb bleats!—the mark is found. The bleating which made the strongest impression, which stood apart from all other [pg 360] impressions of sight or touch, remains in the soul. The lamb returns—white, soft, woolly. The soul sees, touches, reflects, looks for a mark. The lamb bleats, and now the soul has recognized it. ‘Ah, thou art the bleating animal,’ the soul says within herself; and the sound of bleating, perceived as the distinguishing mark of the lamb, becomes the name of the lamb. It was the comprehended mark, the word. And what is the whole of our language but a collection of such words?”

According to the first idea, words come from imitating sounds; according to the second, they are unintentional exclamations. The first theory was very popular among philosophers in the eighteenth century and is still accepted by many esteemed scholars and thinkers, so we need to examine it closely. It is believed that early humans, being mute, listened to the sounds of birds, dogs, cows, thunder, the ocean's roar, rustling trees, the brook's murmurs, and the breeze's whispers. They attempted to imitate these sounds, and finding their mimicked cries useful as signs for the objects they originated from, they developed this concept further and created language. This perspective was strongly defended by Herder. He states, “Man shows conscious reflection when his soul acts so freely that it can isolate a single wave from the sea of sensations flooding in through his senses, pause to focus on it, remaining aware of that focus. Man demonstrates his conscious reflection when, out of the dream of images passing before his senses, he can gather himself and awaken momentarily, intensely focusing on one image, fixing it with a clear and calm gaze, and identifying the signs that tell him that this is this specific image and no other. Man shows his conscious reflection when he not only perceives all the details of an object vividly and clearly, but can also isolate and recognize one or more of those details as its distinctive features.” For example, “Man sees a lamb. He doesn’t perceive it like a hungry wolf. He isn’t driven by any uncontrollable instinct. He wants to understand it but isn’t instinctively attracted to or repulsed by it. The lamb stands before him, as shown by his senses: white, soft, woolly. The conscious, reflective soul of man looks for a distinguishing feature;—the lamb bleats!—the characteristic is found. The bleating, which left the strongest impression, different from all other sensory impressions, stays in the soul. The lamb returns—white, soft, woolly. The soul sees, touches, reflects, searches for a mark. The lamb bleats, and now the soul recognizes it. ‘Ah, you are the bleating animal,’ the soul thinks to itself; and the sound of bleating, recognized as the identifying feature of the lamb, becomes its name. It was the understood mark, the word. And what is our entire language but a collection of such words?”

Our answer is, that though there are names in every language formed by mere imitation of sound, yet these constitute a very small proportion of our dictionary. They are the playthings, not the tools, of language, and any attempt to reduce the most common and necessary words to imitative roots ends in complete failure. Herder himself, after having most strenuously defended this theory of Onomatopoieia, as it is called, and having gained a prize which the Berlin Academy had offered for the best essay on the origin of language, renounced it openly towards the latter years of his life, and threw himself in despair into the arms of those who looked upon languages as miraculously revealed. We cannot deny the possibility that a language might have been formed on the principle of imitation; all we say is, that as yet no language has been discovered that was so formed. An Englishman in China,329 seeing a dish placed before him about which he felt suspicious, and wishing to know whether it was a duck, said, with an interrogative accent,

Our answer is that, while every language has names that are just imitations of sounds, these make up a very small part of our vocabulary. They are the fun aspects of language, not its essential tools, and any effort to trace the most common and necessary words back to imitative roots ends in complete failure. Herder himself, after vigorously defending this theory of Onomatopoeia and winning a prize from the Berlin Academy for the best essay on the origin of language, eventually renounced it openly in his later years and turned in despair to those who believed languages were miraculously revealed. We can't deny the possibility that a language could be formed based on imitation; all we're saying is that no language has been found that works that way so far. An Englishman in China, seeing a dish placed in front of him that he was suspicious about and wanting to know if it was duck, said with a questioning tone,

Quack quack?

What’s up, duck?

He received the clear and straightforward answer,

He got a clear and simple answer,

Bow-wow!

Bow-wow!

[pg 361]

This, no doubt, was as good as the most eloquent conversation on the same subject between an Englishman and a French waiter. But I doubt whether it deserves the name of language. We do not speak of a bow-wow, but of a dog. We speak of a cow, not of a moo. Of a lamb, not of a baa. It is the same in more ancient languages, such as Greek, Latin, and Sanskrit. If this principle of Onomatopoieia is applicable anywhere, it would be in the formation of the names of animals. Yet we listen in vain for any similarity between goose and cackling, hen and clucking, duck and quacking, sparrow and chirping, dove and cooing, hog and grunting, cat and mewing, between dog and barking, yelping, snarling, or growling.

This was definitely as good as the most eloquent conversation on the same topic between an Englishman and a French waiter. But I wonder if it even qualifies as language. We don’t say “bow-wow,” but rather “dog.” We say “cow,” not “moo.” We talk about a lamb, not a “baa.” The same goes for older languages like Greek, Latin, and Sanskrit. If this idea of Onomatopoeia applies anywhere, it should be in naming animals. Yet we listen in vain for any connection between goose and cackling, hen and clucking, duck and quacking, sparrow and chirping, dove and cooing, hog and grunting, cat and mewing, or between dog and barking, yelping, snarling, or growling.

There are of course some names, such as cuckoo, which are clearly formed by an imitation of sound. But words of this kind are, like artificial flowers, without a root. They are sterile, and are unfit to express anything beyond the one object which they imitate. If you remember the variety of derivatives that could be formed from the root spac, to see, you will at once perceive the difference between the fabrication of such a word as cuckoo, and the true natural growth of words.

There are definitely some names, like cuckoo, that are clearly created by imitating sounds. However, words like these are, similar to artificial flowers, without any roots. They are barren and can’t express anything beyond the single object they mimic. If you think about the variety of derivatives that can be created from the root space, meaning to see, you will easily notice the difference between the creation of a word like cuckoo and the true natural development of words.

Let us compare two words such as cuckoo and raven. Cuckoo in English is clearly a mere imitation of the cry of that bird, even more so than the corresponding terms in Greek, Sanskrit, and Latin. In these languages the imitative element has received the support of a derivative suffix; we have kokila in Sanskrit, and kokkyx in Greek, cuculus in Latin.330 Cuckoo is, in fact, a modern word, which has taken the place [pg 362] of the Anglo-Saxon geac, the German Gauch, and, being purely onomatopoëtic, it is of course not liable to the changes of Grimm's Law. As the word cuckoo predicates nothing but the sound of a particular bird, it could never be applied for expressing any general quality in which other animals might share; and the only derivatives to which it might give rise are words expressive of a metaphorical likeness with the bird. The same applies to cock, the Sanskrit kukkuṭa. Here, too, Grimm's Law does not apply, for both words were intended to convey merely the cackling sound of the bird; and, as this intention continued to be felt, phonetic change was less likely to set in. The Sanskrit kukkuṭa is not derived from any root, it simply repeats the cry of the bird, and the only derivatives to which it gives rise are metaphorical expressions, such as the French coquet, originally strutting about like a cock; coquetterie; cocart, conceited; cocarde, a cockade; coquelicot, originally a cock's comb, then the wild red poppy, likewise so called from its similarity with a cock's comb.

Let’s compare two words like cuckoo and raven. Cuckoo bird in English is clearly just a mimicry of that bird's call, even more so than the equivalent terms in Greek, Sanskrit, and Latin. In those languages, the imitative aspect is reinforced by a derivative suffix; we have kokila in Sanskrit, and kokkyx in Greek, cuckoo in Latin.330 Cuckoo is, in fact, a modern term that has replaced the Anglo-Saxon geac, the German Gauche, and being purely onomatopoeic, it obviously isn't subject to the changes of Grimm's Law. Since the word cuckoo only reflects the sound of a particular bird, it could never be used to describe any general quality that other animals might have; and the only derivatives it might produce are words that metaphorically relate to the bird. The same goes for rooster, the Sanskrit chicken. Here again, Grimm's Law doesn’t apply, since both words are meant to convey just the clucking sound of the bird; and as this intention remained clear, phonetic change was less likely to occur. The Sanskrit chicken isn’t derived from any root, it simply mimics the bird's call, and the only derivatives it leads to are metaphorical phrases, such as the French flirt, originally describing a cock's strut; playful flirtation; cart, meaning conceited; badge, meaning cockade; poppy, originally referring to a cock's comb, and later the wild red poppy, also named for its resemblance to a cock's comb.

Let us now examine the word raven. It might seem at first, as if this also was merely onomatopoëtic. Some people imagine they perceive a kind of similarity between the word raven and the cry of that bird. This seems still more so if we compare the Anglo-Saxon hrafn, the German Rabe, Old High-German hraban. The Sanskrit kârava also, the Latin corvus, and the Greek korōnē, all are supposed to show some similarity with the unmelodious sound of Maître Corbeau. But as soon as we analyze the word we find that it is of a different structure from cuckoo or cock. It is derived from a root which has a general predicative [pg 363] power. The root ru or kru is not a mere imitation of the cry of the raven; it embraces many cries, from the harshest to the softest, and it might have been applied to the nightingale as well as to the raven. In Sanskrit this root exists as ru, a verb which is applied to the murmuring sound of rivers as well as to the barking of dogs and the mooing of cows. From it are derived numerous words in Sanskrit. In Latin we find raucus, hoarse; rumor, a whisper; in German rûnen, to speak low, and runa, mystery. The Latin lamentum stands for an original ravimentum or cravimentum. This root ru has several secondary forms, such as the Sanskrit rud, to cry; the Latin rug in rugire, to howl; the Greek kru or klu, in klaiō, klausomai; the Sanskrit kruś, to shout; the Gothic hrukjan, to crow, and hropjan, to cry; the German rufen. Even the common Aryan word for hearing is closely allied to this root. It is śru in Sanskrit, klyō in Greek, cluo in Latin; and before it took the recognized meaning of hearing, it meant to sound, to ring. When a noise was to be heard in a far distance, the man who first perceived it might well have said I ring, for his ears were sounding and ringing; and the same verb, if once used as a transitive, expressed exactly what we mean by I hear a noise.

Let’s take a look at the word blackbird. At first glance, it might seem like it's just imitating the sound of the bird. Some people think they can hear a connection between the word raven and the bird's call. This idea becomes even stronger when we compare it to the Anglo-Saxon raven, the German Rabe, and the Old High-German hraban. The Sanskrit word kârava, Latin crow, and Greek crown are all believed to have some connection to the harsh sound of Master Crow. However, when we break down the word, we discover that it has a different structure than cuckoo or rooster. It comes from a root that carries a general meaning of sound. The root ru or krew is not just a copy of the raven's cry; it includes a range of sounds, from harsh to gentle, and could apply to both the nightingale and the raven. In Sanskrit, this root appears as ru, a verb used for the murmuring sound of rivers, as well as for barking dogs and mooing cows. Numerous words in Sanskrit are derived from it. In Latin, we find raucous, meaning hoarse; gossip, meaning a whisper; in German rune, which means to speak quietly, and runa, meaning mystery. The Latin lament stands for an original paving or craving. This root ru has several variations, such as the Sanskrit rud, meaning to cry; the Latin carpet found in roaring, meaning to howl; the Greek krew or klu in klaiō, klausomai; the Sanskrit kush, which means to shout; the Gothic hrukjan, meaning to crow, and hropjan, to cry; the German call. Even the common Aryan word for hearing is closely related to this root. It is śru in Sanskrit, klyō in Greek, clue in Latin; and before it became known as hearing, it meant to sound or to ring. When a noise could be heard from a distance, the person who first noticed it might have said "I ring," because their ears were ringing; and the same verb, if used transitively, conveys what we mean by saying "I hear a noise."

You will have perceived thus that the process which led to the formation of the word kârava in Sanskrit is quite distinct from that which produced cuckoo. Kârava331 means a shouter, a caller, a crier. It might [pg 364] have been applied to many birds; but it became the traditional and recognized name for the crow. Cuckoo could never mean anything but the cuckoo, and while a word like raven has ever so many relations from a rumor down to a row, cuckoo stands by itself like a stick in a living hedge.

You can see that the way the word kārava was formed in Sanskrit is quite different from how cuckoo came about. Kârava331 means someone who shouts, calls, or cries out. It could have been used for many birds, but it became the accepted and traditional name for the crow. Cuckoo has always meant just the cuckoo, and while a word like raven has many connections—like gossip to a dispute—cuckoo stands alone like a stick in a living hedge.

It is curious to observe how apt we are to deceive ourselves when we once adopt this system of Onomatopoieia. Who does not imagine that he hears in the word “thunder” an imitation of the rolling and rumbling noise which the old Germans ascribed to their God Thor playing at nine-pins? Yet thunder is clearly the same word as the Latin tonitru. The root is tan, to stretch. From this root tan, we have in Greek tonos, our tone, tone being produced by the stretching and vibrating of cords. In Sanskrit the sound thunder is expressed by the same root tan, but in the derivatives tanyu, tanyatu, and tanayitnu, thundering, we perceive no trace of the rumbling noise which we imagined we perceived in the Latin tonitru and the English thunder. The very same root tan, to stretch, yields some derivatives which are anything but rough and noisy. The English tender, the French tendre, the Latin tener, are derived from it. Like tenuis, the Sanskrit tanu, the English thin, tener meant originally what was extended over a larger surface, then thin, then delicate. The relationship betwixt tender, thin, and thunder would be hard to establish if the original conception of thunder had really been its rumbling noise.

It’s interesting to see how easily we deceive ourselves when we embrace this concept of Onomatopoeia. Who doesn’t think they hear in the word "thunder" a representation of the rolling and rumbling noise that the old Germans attributed to their god Thor playing nine-pins? Yet thunder is clearly the same word as the Latin tonitrum. The root is tanning, meaning to stretch. From this root tan, we have in Greek tones, which gives us tone, as tone is produced by the stretching and vibrating of strings. In Sanskrit, the sound of thunder is represented by the same root tan, but in the derivatives tanyu, tanyatu, and tanayitnu, meaning thundering, we see no hint of the rumbling noise we thought we detected in the Latin tonitru and the English thunder. The very same root tan, meaning to stretch, produces derivatives that are anything but rough or loud. The English kind, the French tender, and the Latin to have all come from it. Similar to slender, the Sanskrit tanu, the English skinny, have originally meant what was stretched over a larger area, then slim, and later fragile. The connection between gentle, slim, and thunder would be difficult to establish if the original idea of thunder had truly been its rumbling sound.

Who does not imagine that he hears something sweet in the French sucre, sucré? Yet sugar came from India, and it is there called śarkhara, which is anything [pg 365] but sweet sounding. This śarkhara is the same word as sugar; it was called in Latin saccharum, and we still speak of saccharine juice, which is sugar juice.

Who doesn't imagine hearing something sweet in the French sugar, sweet? Yet sugar originated in India, where it's called sugar, a name that is anything but sweet-sounding. This sugar is the same word as sugar; in Latin, it was called sugar, and we still refer to sugary juice, which is sugar juice.

In squirrel again some people imagine they hear something of the rustling and whirling of the little animal. But we have only to trace the name back to Greek, and there we find that skiouros is composed of two distinct words, the one meaning shade, the other tail; the animal being called shade-tail by the Greeks.

In squirrel again, some people think they hear the rustling and whirling of the small animal. But if we trace the name back to Greek, we discover that squirrel is made up of two different words, one meaning shade and the other meaning tail; the Greeks referred to the animal as shade-tail.

Thus the word cat, the German katze, is supposed to be an imitation of the sound made by a cat spitting. But if the spitting were expressed by the sibilant, that sibilant does not exist in the Latin catus, nor in cat, or kitten, nor in the German kater.332 The Sanskrit mârjâra, cat, might seem to imitate the purring of the cat; but it is derived from the root mṛij, to clean, mârjâra, meaning the animal that always cleans itself.

Thus the word cat, the German cat, is thought to imitate the sound made by a cat spitting. However, if the spitting were represented by the hissing sound, that sound doesn't exist in the Latin cactus, nor in cat, or kitten, nor in the German hangover.332 The Sanskrit margarine, meaning cat, might seem to imitate the purring of the cat; but it comes from the root mṛij, meaning to clean, with margarine referring to the animal that constantly cleans itself.

Many more instances might be given to show how easily we are deceived by the constant connection of certain sounds and certain meanings in the words of our own language, and how readily we imagine that there is something in the sound to tell us the meaning of the words. “The sound must seem an echo to the sense.”

Many more examples could be provided to illustrate how easily we are misled by the consistent link between specific sounds and meanings in our language, and how quickly we assume that there’s something in the sound that reveals the meaning of the words. "The sound should feel like an echo to the mind."

Most of these Onomatopoieias vanish as soon as we trace our own names back to Anglo-Saxon and Gothic, or compare them with their cognates in Greek, Latin, or Sanskrit. The number of names which are really formed by an imitation of sound dwindle down to a very small quotum if cross-examined by the comparative philologist, and we are left in the end with the [pg 366] conviction that though a language might have been made out of the roaring, fizzing, hissing, gobbling, twittering, cracking, banging, slamming, and rattling sounds of nature, the tongues with which we are acquainted point to a different origin.333

Most of these onomatopoeias disappear as soon as we trace our names back to Anglo-Saxon and Gothic, or compare them with their counterparts in Greek, Latin, or Sanskrit. The number of names that are truly formed by imitating sound shrinks to a very small amount when examined by the comparative philologist, and we are ultimately left with the conviction that although a language could have originated from the roaring, fizzing, hissing, gobbling, twittering, cracking, banging, slamming, and rattling sounds of nature, the languages we know point to a different origin. [pg 366]

And so we find many philosophers, and among them Condillac, protesting against a theory which would place man even below the animal. Why should man be supposed, they say, to have taken a lesson from birds and beasts? Does he not utter cries, and sobs, and shouts himself, according as he is affected by fear, pain, or joy? These cries or interjections were represented as the natural and real beginnings of human speech. Everything else was supposed to have been elaborated after their model. This is what I call the Interjectional, or Pooh-pooh, Theory.

And so we see many philosophers, including Condillac, arguing against a theory that suggests humans are even lower than animals. They ask, why should we think that humans learned from birds and beasts? Don't we express ourselves with cries, sobs, and shouts depending on our feelings of fear, pain, or joy? These sounds or exclamations were seen as the natural and genuine origins of human speech. Everything else was thought to be built upon these. This is what I refer to as the Interjectional, or Pooh-pooh, Theory.

Our answer to this theory is the same as to the former. There are no doubt in every language interjections, and some of them may become traditional, and enter into the composition of words. But these interjections are only the outskirts of real language. Language begins where interjections end. There is [pg 367] as much difference between a real word, such as “to laugh,” and the interjection ha, ha! between “I suffer,” and oh! as there is between the involuntary act and noise of sneezing, and the verb “to sneeze.” We sneeze, and cough, and scream, and laugh in the same manner as animals, but if Epicurus tells us that we speak in the same manner as dogs bark, moved by nature,334 our own experience will tell us that this is not the case.

Our response to this theory is the same as the previous one. There’s no doubt that every language has interjections, and some of them can become traditional and mix into the formation of words. But these interjections are only the edges of actual language. Language starts where interjections stop. There’s as big a difference between a real word, like “to laugh,” and the interjection ha, ha! as there is between “I suffer” and oh! It's the same difference as between the involuntary action and sound of sneezing and the verb “to sneeze.” We sneeze, cough, scream, and laugh just like animals do, but if Epicurus claims we speak in the same way that dogs bark, driven by nature, our own experience tells us that’s not true.

An excellent answer to the interjectional theory has been given by Horne Tooke.

An excellent response to the interjectional theory has been provided by Horne Tooke.

“The dominion of speech,” he says,335 “is erected upon the downfall of interjections. Without the artful contrivances of language, mankind would have had nothing but interjections with which to communicate, orally, any of their feelings. The neighing of a horse, the lowing of a cow, the barking of a dog, the purring of a cat, sneezing, coughing, groaning, shrieking, and every other involuntary convulsion with oral sound, have almost as good a title to be called parts of speech, as interjections have. Voluntary interjections are only employed where the suddenness and vehemence of some affection or passion returns men to their natural state; and makes them for a moment forget the use of speech; or when, from some circumstance, the shortness of time will not permit them to exercise it.”

"Speaking power," he says,335 “is based on the breakdown of interjections. Without the clever nuances of language, humans would rely solely on interjections to express their emotions verbally. The neighing of a horse, the mooing of a cow, the barking of a dog, the purring of a cat, sneezing, coughing, groaning, shrieking, and every other involuntary vocal sound count as much as interjections do when it comes to being parts of speech. Voluntary interjections are used only when an intense rush of emotion brings people back to their basic instincts, making them momentarily forget how to speak, or when there's not enough time to communicate properly due to some situation.”

As in the case of Onomatopoieia, it cannot be denied [pg 368] that with interjections, too, some kind of language might have been formed; but not a language like that which we find in numerous varieties among all the races of men. One short interjection may be more powerful, more to the point, more eloquent than a long speech. In fact, interjections, together with gestures, the movements of the muscles of the mouth, and the eye, would be quite sufficient for all purposes which language answers with the majority of mankind. Lucian, in his treatise on dancing, mentions a king whose dominions bordered on the Euxine. He happened to be at Rome in the reign of Nero, and, having seen a pantomime perform, begged him of the emperor as a present, in order that he might employ him as an interpreter among the nations in his neighborhood with whom he could hold no intercourse on account of the diversity of language. A pantomime meant a person who could mimic everything, and there is hardly anything which cannot be thus expressed. We, having language at our command, have neglected the art of speaking without words; but in the south of Europe that art is still preserved. If it be true that one look may speak volumes, it is clear that we might save ourselves much of the trouble entailed by the use of discursive speech. Yet we must not forget that hum! ugh! tut! pooh! are as little to be called words as the expressive gestures which usually accompany these exclamations.

As with onomatopoeia, it's clear that interjections, too, could have formed some kind of language; but not a language like the many different ones we see among all human races. A single interjection can be more powerful, more direct, and more expressive than a lengthy speech. In fact, interjections, along with gestures, facial movements, and eye expressions, would be enough for most communication that language serves for most people. Lucian, in his writing on dance, refers to a king whose territories were near the Black Sea. He was in Rome during Nero's reign, and after watching a pantomime performance, he asked the emperor for the performer as a gift, so he could use him as an interpreter among the neighboring nations with whom he couldn’t communicate due to language differences. A pantomime is someone who can mimic everything, and there's hardly anything that can’t be conveyed this way. We, having language at our disposal, have overlooked the skill of communicating without words; however, in southern Europe, that skill is still alive. If it's true that a single glance can convey a lot, then we might spare ourselves a lot of the effort that comes with using lengthy speech. Yet, we shouldn't forget that hum! ugh! tch! oops! are just as much not words as the expressive gestures that typically accompany these exclamations.

As to the attempts at deriving some of our words etymologically from mere interjections, they are apt to fail from the same kind of misconception which leads us to imagine that there is something expressive in the sounds of words. Thus it is said “that the idea of [pg 369] disgust takes its rise in the senses of smell and taste, in the first instance probably in smell alone; that in defending ourselves from a bad smell we are instinctively impelled to screw up the nose, and to expire strongly through the compressed and protruded lips, giving rise to a sound represented by the interjections faugh! foh! fie! From this interjection it is proposed to derive, not only such words as foul and filth, but, by transferring it from natural to moral aversion, the English fiend, the German Feind.” If this were true, we should suppose that the expression of contempt was chiefly conveyed by the aspirate f, by the strong emission of the breathing with half-opened lips. But fiend is a participle from a root fian, to hate; in Gothic fijan; and as a Gothic aspirate always corresponds to a tenuis in Sanskrit, the same root in Sanskrit would at once lose its expressive power. It exists in fact in Sanskrit as pîy, to hate, to destroy; just as friend is derived from a root which in Sanskrit is prî, to delight.336

As for the attempts to trace some of our words back to simple interjections, they often fail because of the same misunderstanding that leads us to think there's something inherently expressive about the sounds of words. It's said that the idea of disgust originates from our senses of smell and taste, probably starting with smell. When we try to avoid a foul odor, we instinctively scrunch up our noses and exhale forcefully through pursed lips, making sounds represented by the interjections faugh! foh! fie! From this interjection, it’s suggested that we can derive not only words like bad and dirt, but also by shifting its meaning from natural to moral aversion, the English word villain and the German Enemy. If that were true, we would think that contempt was mainly expressed by the sound 'f', produced by the strong airflow through slightly opened lips. However, villain comes from a root fian, meaning to hate; in Gothic, it’s fijian. Since the Gothic aspirate always aligns with a tenuis in Sanskrit, the same root in Sanskrit would lose its expressive power. In fact, it appears in Sanskrit as pīe, which means to hate or destroy; just as friend derives from a root that in Sanskrit is prî, meaning to delight.

There is one more remark which I have to make about the Interjectional and the Onomatopoëtic theories, [pg 370] namely this: If the constituent elements of human speech were either mere cries, or the mimicking of the cries of nature, it would be difficult to understand why brutes should be without language. There is not only the parrot, but the mocking-bird and others, which can imitate most successfully both articulate and inarticulate sounds; and there is hardly an animal without the faculty of uttering interjections, such as huff, hiss, baa, &c. It is clear also that if what puts a perfect distinction betwixt man and brutes is the having of general ideas, language which arises from interjections and from the imitation of the cries of animals could not claim to be the outward sign of that distinctive faculty of man. All words, in the beginning at least (and this is the only point which interests us), would have been the signs of individual impressions and individual perceptions, and would only gradually have been adapted to the expression of general ideas.

There's one more point I need to make about the Interjectional and Onomatopoeic theories, [pg 370] specifically this: If the basic elements of human speech were just cries or mimicking nature's sounds, it would be hard to understand why animals don’t have language. Not only can parrots speak, but mockingbirds and others can also imitate both clear and unclear sounds effectively; and almost every animal has the ability to make interjections, like huff, hiss, baa, etc. It’s also clear that if the main thing that sets humans apart from animals is having general ideas, then language that comes from interjections and mimicking animal sounds couldn't be considered a clear sign of that unique human ability. All words, at least in the beginning (and that’s the only thing that matters to us), would have been signs of individual impressions and individual perceptions, and would only slowly have adapted to express general ideas.

The theory which is suggested to us by an analysis of language carried out according to the principles of comparative philology is the very opposite. We arrive in the end at roots, and every one of these expresses a general, not an individual, idea. Every name, if we analyze it, contains a predicate by which the object to which the name applies was known.

The theory that emerges from analyzing language based on the principles of comparative philology is actually the opposite. Ultimately, we identify roots, and each one represents a general concept rather than a specific one. Every name, when we break it down, holds a descriptor that identifies the object it refers to.

There is an old controversy among philosophers, whether language originated in general appellations, or in proper names.337 It is the question of the primum cognitum, and its consideration will help us perhaps in discovering the true nature of the root, or the primum appellatum.

There’s an old debate among philosophers about whether language started with general terms or with specific names.337 It's the question of the first known, and looking into it might help us figure out the true nature of the root, or the first call.

Some philosophers, among whom I may mention [pg 371] Locke, Condillac, Adam Smith, Dr. Brown, and with some qualification Dugald Stewart, maintain that all terms, as at first employed, are expressive of individual objects. I quote from Adam Smith. “The assignation,” he says, “of particular names to denote particular objects, that is, the institution of nouns substantive, would probably be one of the first steps towards the formation of language. Two savages who had never been taught to speak, but had been bred up remote from the societies of men, would naturally begin to form that language by which they would endeavor to make their mutual wants intelligible to each other by uttering certain sounds whenever they meant to denote certain objects. Those objects only which were most familiar to them, and which they had most frequent occasion to mention, would have particular names assigned to them. The particular cave whose covering sheltered them from the weather, the particular tree whose fruit relieved their hunger, the particular fountain whose water allayed their thirst, would first be denominated by the words cave, tree, fountain, or by whatever other appellations they might think proper, in that primitive jargon, to mark them. Afterwards, when the more enlarged experience of these savages had led them to observe, and their necessary occasions obliged them to make mention of, other caves, and other trees, and other fountains, they would naturally bestow upon each of those new objects the same name by which they had been accustomed to express the similar object they were first acquainted with. The new objects had none of them any name of its own, but each of them exactly resembled another object which had such an appellation. It was impossible that those savages could [pg 372] behold the new objects without recollecting the old ones; and the name of the old ones, to which the new bore so close a resemblance. When they had occasion, therefore, to mention or to point out to each other any of the new objects, they would naturally utter the name of the correspondent old one, of which the idea could not fail, at that instant, to present itself to their memory in the strongest and liveliest manner. And thus those words, which were originally the proper names of individuals, became the common name of a multitude. A child that is just learning to speak calls every person who comes to the house its papa or its mamma; and thus bestows upon the whole species those names which it had been taught to apply to two individuals. I have known a clown who did not know the proper name of the river which ran by his own door. It was the river, he said, and he never heard any other name for it. His experience, it seems, had not led him to observe any other river. The general word river therefore was, it is evident, in his acceptance of it, a proper name signifying an individual object. If this person had been carried to another river, would he not readily have called it a river? Could we suppose any person living on the banks of the Thames so ignorant as not to know the general word river, but to be acquainted only with the particular word Thames, if he were brought to any other river, would he not readily call it a Thames? This, in reality, is no more than what they who are well acquainted with the general word are very apt to do. An Englishman, describing any great river which he may have seen in some foreign country, naturally says that it is another Thames.... It is this application of the name of an individual [pg 373] to a great multitude of objects, whose resemblance naturally recalls the idea of that individual, and of the name which expresses it, that seems originally to have given occasion to the formation of those classes and assortments which, in the schools, are called genera and species.”

Some philosophers, including Locke, Condillac, Adam Smith, Dr. Brown, and with some qualifications, Dugald Stewart, argue that all terms initially used represent individual objects. I quote Adam Smith: “The assignment of specific names to indicate specific objects, that is, the creation of nouns, would likely be one of the first steps in forming language. Two people who had never learned to speak, but had been raised away from human societies, would naturally start to create a language to express their mutual needs by making certain sounds whenever they meant to refer to specific objects. Only those objects that were most familiar to them and that they needed to discuss most often would receive specific names. The particular cave that protected them from the weather, the particular tree that provided them with food, and the particular spring that quenched their thirst would initially be named “cave,” “tree,” and “spring,” or by whatever other names they thought appropriate in that primitive speech. Later, as their experiences expanded, and they found it necessary to refer to other caves, other trees, and other springs, they would naturally give each of those new objects the same name they had used for the similar object they had first known. The new objects wouldn’t have names of their own, but each would closely resemble another object that did have a name. It would be impossible for those people to see the new objects without recalling the old ones, and the name of the old objects to which the new resembled so closely. Therefore, when they needed to mention or indicate any of the new objects, they would naturally use the name of the corresponding old object, which would clearly come to their minds in the most vivid way at that moment. Thus, those words, which were originally the proper names of individuals, became the common names for many. A child who is just learning to speak calls every visitor to the house either ‘papa’ or ‘mamma,’ thus applying the names it learned for two individuals to the entire species. I once knew a simple man who didn’t know the proper name of the river that ran by his house. He referred to it as ‘the river,’ and he never heard it called anything else. It seems his experiences hadn’t led him to encounter any other river. Thus, the general term ‘river’ was, in his understanding, a proper name signifying an individual object. If he were taken to another river, would he not easily call it ‘a river’? Could we imagine anyone living along the Thames being so uninformed as to be unaware of the term ‘river’ but only know the specific name ‘Thames’? If brought to another river, would he not likely refer to it as ‘a Thames’? In reality, this is not unlike what those who are familiar with the general word often do. An Englishman, when describing any large river he has seen in another country, naturally says it is another Thames… It’s this use of the name of an individual for a vast number of objects that evoke the idea of that individual and the name that represents it, which seems to have initially inspired the creation of those categories and classifications known in schools as ‘genera’ and ‘species.’”

This extract from Adam Smith will give a clear idea of one view of the formation of thought and language. I shall now read another extract, representing the diametrically opposite view. It is taken from Leibniz,338 who maintains that general terms are necessary for the essential constitution of languages. He likewise appeals to children. “Children,” he says, “and those who know but little of the language which they attempt to speak, or little of the subject on which they would employ it, make use of general terms, as thing, plant, animal, instead of using proper names, of which they are destitute. And it is certain that all proper or individual names have been originally appellative or general.” And again: “Thus I would make bold to affirm that almost all words have been originally general terms, because it would happen very rarely that man would invent a name, expressly and without a reason, to denote this or that individual. We may, therefore, assert that the names of individual things were names of species, which were given par excellence, or otherwise, to some individual; as the name Great Head to him of the whole town who had the largest, or who was the man of the most consideration of the great heads known.”

This extract from Adam Smith will give a clear idea of one perspective on how thought and language are formed. I will now read another extract that presents the completely opposite perspective. It is taken from Leibniz,338, who argues that general terms are essential for the core structure of languages. He also refers to children. "Kids," he states, "Those who know very little about the language they're trying to use or who have limited knowledge of the topic they want to discuss often use general terms like thing, plant, and animal instead of specific names, which they don't have. It's clear that all proper or individual names originally came from general or descriptive terms." And he adds: I would confidently say that almost all words started as general terms because it's pretty uncommon for someone to create a name without a specific reason to identify a particular person. So, we can conclude that the names of individual things were once names for species, which were given par excellence, or in other ways, to certain individuals; like the name Great Head for the man in town who was the largest or most respected among the well-known figures.

It might seem presumptuous to attempt to arbitrate [pg 374] between such men as Leibniz and Adam Smith, particularly when both speak so positively as they do on this subject. But there are two ways of judging of former philosophers. One is to put aside their opinions as simply erroneous where they differ from our own. This is the least satisfactory way of studying ancient philosophy. Another way is to try to enter fully into the opinions of those from whom we differ, to make them, for a time at least, our own, till at last we discover the point of view from which each philosopher looked at the facts before him, and catch the light in which he regarded them. We shall then find that there is much less of downright error in the history of philosophy than is commonly supposed; nay, we shall find nothing so conducive to a right appreciation of truth as a right appreciation of the error by which it is surrounded.

It might seem a bit arrogant to try to mediate [pg 374] between thinkers like Leibniz and Adam Smith, especially since they both express their views so confidently on this topic. However, there are two ways to evaluate past philosophers. One way is to dismiss their opinions as simply wrong when they don't align with our own. This is the least satisfying way to study old philosophy. The other way is to fully engage with the ideas of those we disagree with, treating them, at least for a while, as if they were our own. This approach allows us to see the perspective each philosopher had concerning the facts they addressed and understand the context in which they viewed them. We will then realize that there is much less outright error in the history of philosophy than is often believed; in fact, we will discover that a proper understanding of the errors surrounding truth is essential to truly grasping that truth.

Now, in the case before us, Adam Smith is no doubt right, when he says that the first individual cave which is called cave gave the name to all other caves. In the same manner, the first town, though a mere enclosure, gave the name to all other towns; the first imperial residence on the Palatine hill gave the name to all palaces. Slight differences between caves, towns, or palaces are readily passed by, and the first name becomes more and more general with every new individual to which it is applied. So far Adam Smith is right, and the history of almost every substantive might be cited in support of his view. But Leibniz is equally right when, in looking beyond the first emergence of such names as cave or town or palace, he asks how such names could have arisen. Let us take the Latin names of cave. A cave in Latin is called antrum, cavea, spelunca. [pg 375] Now antrum means really the same as internum. Antar in Sanskrit means between and within.339 Antrum, therefore, meant originally what is within or inside the earth or anything else. It is clear, therefore, that such a name could not have been given to any individual cave, unless the general idea of being within, or inwardness, had been present in the mind. This general idea once formed, and once expressed by the pronominal root an or antar, the process of naming is clear and intelligible. The place where the savage could live safe from rain and from the sudden attacks of wild beasts, a natural hollow in the rock, he would call his within, his antrum; and afterwards similar places, whether dug in the earth or cut in a tree, would be designated by the same name. The same general idea, however, would likewise supply other names, and thus we find that the entrails were called antra (neuter) in Sanskrit, enteron in Greek, originally things within.

Now, in the case before us, Adam Smith is surely correct when he says that the first individual cave, which is called a cave, gave the name to all other caves. In the same way, the first town, although just a simple enclosure, named all other towns; the first imperial residence on the Palatine hill named all palaces. Minor differences between caves, towns, or palaces are often overlooked, and the original name becomes more general with each new individual to which it is applied. So far, Adam Smith is right, and the history of almost every noun could be cited to back up his point. But Leibniz is equally correct when, looking beyond the initial emergence of names like cave, town, or palace, he asks how such names could have come about. Let’s consider the Latin words for cave. A cave in Latin is called cavity, cage, cave. [pg 375] Now, cave essentially means the same as internship. Antar in Sanskrit means between and inside. Antrum, therefore, originally referred to what is inside the earth or something else. It is clear, then, that such a name could not have been given to any specific cave unless the general idea of being within or inwardness had been present in someone's mind. Once this general idea was formed and expressed by the pronominal root an or antar, the naming process is straightforward and understandable. The place where a primitive person could stay protected from rain and sudden attacks from wild animals, a natural hollow in the rock, would be called their inside, their antrum; and afterwards, similar places, whether dug in the ground or carved in a tree, would be referred to by the same name. However, this same general idea would also give rise to other names, and as a result, we find that the guts were called antra (neuter) in Sanskrit, enteron in Greek, originally referring to things within.

Let us take another word for cave, which is căvea or căverna. Here again Adam Smith would be perfectly right in maintaining that this name, when first given, was applied to one particular cave, and was afterwards extended to other caves. But Leibniz would be equally right in maintaining that in order to call even the first hollow cavea, it was necessary that the general idea of hollow should have been formed in the mind, and should have received its vocal expression cav. Nay we may go a step beyond, for cavus, or hollow, is a secondary, not a primary, idea. Before a cave was called cavea, a hollow thing, many things hollow had passed before the eyes of men. Why then was a hollow thing, or a hole, [pg 376] called by the root cav? Because what had been hollowed out was intended at first as a place of safety and protection, as a cover; and it was called therefore by the root ku or sku, which conveyed the idea of to cover.340 Hence the general idea of covering existed in the mind before it was applied to hiding-places in rocks or trees, and it was not till an expression had thus been framed for things hollow or safe in general, that caves in particular could be designated by the name of cavea or hollows.

Let's consider another word for cave, which is cave or cave. Here, Adam Smith would be completely correct in arguing that this name, when it was first used, referred to one specific cave and was later applied to other caves. But Leibniz would also be right in saying that in order to call the initial hollow cage, the general concept of hollow must have been established in the mind, and this idea would have been expressed vocally as cav. Moreover, we can take it a step further, because cavus, or hollow, is a secondary concept, not a primary one. Before a cave was labeled cage, there were many hollow objects that had caught people's attention. So why was a hollow object or a hole called by the root cav? Because what had been hollowed out was initially meant as a place of safety and protection, serving as a cover; and it was therefore named using the root ku or product code, which conveyed the idea of covering. 340 Therefore, the general concept of covering existed in the mind before it was used for hiding places in rocks or trees, and it wasn't until a term had been created for hollow or safe spaces in general that we could specifically call caves cage or hollows.

Another form for cavus was koilos, hollow. The conception was originally the same; a hole was called koilon because it served as a cover. But once so used koilon came to mean a cave, a vaulted cave, a vault, and thus the heaven was called cœlum, the modern ciel, because it was looked upon as a vault or cover for the earth.

Another form of cavus was koilos, which means hollow. The idea was originally the same; a hole was called koilon because it acted as a cover. But once used this way, koilon began to mean a cave, a vaulted cave, or a vault, and so the sky came to be called sky, the modern sky, because it was seen as a vault or cover for the earth.

It is the same with all nouns. They all express originally one out of the many attributes of a thing, and that attribute, whether it be a quality or an action, is necessarily a general idea. The word thus formed was in the first instance intended for one object only, though of course it was almost immediately extended to the whole class to which this object seemed to belong. When a word such as rivus, river, was first formed, no doubt it was intended for a certain river, and that river was called rivus, from a root ru or sru, to run, because of its running water. In many instances a word meaning river or runner remained the proper name of one river, without ever rising to the dignity of an appellative. Thus Rhenus, the Rhine, [pg 377] means river or runner, but it clung to one river, and could not be used as an appellative for others. The Ganges is the Sanskrit Gangâ, literally the Go-go; a word very well adapted for any majestic river, but in Sanskrit restricted to the one sacred stream. The Indus again is the Sanskrit Sindhu, and means the irrigator, from syand, to sprinkle. In this case, however, the proper name was not checked in its growth, but was used likewise as an appelative for any great stream.

It’s the same with all nouns. They all originally express one of many attributes of a thing, and that attribute, whether it’s a quality or an action, is necessarily a general idea. The word that was formed was initially meant for one specific object, but it was quickly extended to the whole class that this object seemed to belong to. When a word like stream, meaning river, was first created, it was likely meant for a certain river and that river was called stream, derived from a root ru or sru, which means to run, because of its flowing water. In many cases, a word meaning river or runner stayed as the proper name of one river without becoming a general term. For example, Rhenus, the Rhine, [pg 377] means river or runner, but it was attached to one river and couldn’t be used to refer to others. The Ganges is called Gang in Sanskrit, which literally means the Go-go; a term that works well for any majestic river but in Sanskrit is limited to that one sacred stream. The Indus is known as Sindhu in Sanskrit, meaning the irrigator, derived from syand, to sprinkle. In this case, however, the proper name wasn’t restricted in its use but was also applied as a general term for any large stream.

We have thus seen how the controversy about the primum cognitum assumes a new and perfectly clear aspect. The first thing really known is the general. It is through it that we know and name afterwards individual objects of which any general idea can be predicated, and it is only in the third stage that these individual objects, thus known and named, become again the representatives of whole classes, and their names or proper names are raised into appellatives.341

We’ve seen how the debate about the first known takes on a new and much clearer perspective. The first thing we truly understand is the general idea. It’s through this general concept that we recognize and label individual objects, for which any general idea applies. It’s only in the third stage that these identified and labeled individual objects again symbolize entire classes, and their names or proper names are elevated to common terms.341

There is a petrified philosophy in language, and if we examine the most ancient word for name we find it is nâman in Sanskrit, nomen in Latin, namo in Gothic. This nâman stands for gnâman, which is preserved in the Latin co-gnomen. The g is dropped as in natus, son, for gnatus. Nâman, therefore, and name are derived from the root gnâ, to know, and meant originally that by which we know a thing.

There’s a fixed philosophy in language, and if we look at the oldest word for name, we find it’s nâman in Sanskrit, nomen in Latin, and namo in Gothic. This naman represents gnâman, which is preserved in the Latin co-name. The g is dropped, similar to natus, meaning son, derived from child. Therefore, Nâman and name come from the root gnâ, which means to know, and originally referred to what allows us to know a thing.

[pg 378]

And how do we know things? We perceive things by our senses, but our senses convey to us information about single things only. But to know is more than to feel, than to perceive, more than to remember, more than to compare. No doubt words are much abused. We speak of a dog knowing his master, of an infant knowing his mother. In such expressions, to know means to recognize. But to know a thing, means more than to recognize it. We know a thing if we are able to bring it, and any part of it, under more general ideas. We then say, not that we have a perception, but a conception, or that we have a general idea of a thing. The facts of nature are perceived by our senses; the thoughts of nature, to borrow an expression of Oersted's, can be conceived by our reason only.342 Now the first step towards this real knowledge, a step which, however small in appearance, separates man forever from all other animals, is the naming of a thing, or the making a thing knowable. All naming is classification, bringing the individual under the general; and whatever we know, whether empirically or scientifically, we know it only by means of our general ideas. Other animals have sensation, perception, memory, and, in a certain sense, intellect; but all [pg 379] these, in the animal, are conversant with single objects only. Man has sensation, perception, memory, intellect, and reason, and it is his reason only that is conversant with general ideas.343

And how do we understand things? We perceive things through our senses, but our senses only give us information about individual things. However, to know is more than just feeling, perceiving, remembering, or comparing. Yes, words can be misused. We talk about a dog knowledge its owner, or an infant knowledgeable its mother. In these cases, to know means to recognize. But to truly know something means more than just recognition. We know something if we can categorize it and any part of it under broader concepts. We then say we have not just a perception, but a conception, or that we have a general idea of it. The facts of nature are perceived by our senses; the ideas of nature, borrowing a phrase from Oersted, can only be understood through our reasoning. 342 Now, the first step towards this true knowledge, which may seem small but separates humans forever from all other animals, is the name of a thing, or making a thing knowable. All naming is a form of classification, connecting the individual to the general; and everything we know, whether through experience or science, we know only through our general ideas. Other animals experience sensation, perception, memory, and, in some sense, intellect; but all of these in animals relate only to individual objects. Humans have sensation, perception, memory, intellect, and reason, and it is only our reason that deals with general concepts. 343

Through reason we not only stand a step above the brute creation: we belong to a different world. We look down on our merely animal experience, on our sensations, perceptions, our memory, and our intellect, as something belonging to us, but not as constituting our most inward and eternal self. Our senses, our memory, our intellect, are like the lenses of a telescope. But there is an eye that looks through them at the realities of the outer world, our own rational and self-conscious soul; a power as distinct from our perceptive faculties as the sun is from the earth which it fills with light, and warmth, and life.

Through reason, we don’t just rise above the animal kingdom; we exist in a different realm. We view our basic animal experiences—our sensations, perceptions, memories, and intellect—as aspects of ourselves, but not as the essence of our true and eternal selves. Our senses, memory, and intellect are like the lenses of a telescope. Yet there is an eye that sees through them at the realities of the outer world: our own rational and self-aware soul; a power that is as separate from our perceptive abilities as the sun is from the earth, which it fills with light, warmth, and life.

At the very point where man parts company with the brute world, at the first flash of reason as the manifestation of the light within us, there we see the true genesis of language. Analyze any word you like, and you will find that it expresses a general idea peculiar to the individual to which the name belongs. What is the meaning of moon?—the measurer. What is the meaning of sun?—the begetter. What is the meaning of earth?—the ploughed. The old name given to animals, such as cows and sheep, was pasú, the Latin pecus, which means feeders. Animal itself is a later name, and derived from anima, soul. This anima again meant originally blowing or breathing, like spirit from [pg 380] spirare, and was derived from a root, an, to blow, which gives us anila, wind, in Sanskrit, and anemos, wind, in Greek. Ghost, the German Geist, is based on the same conception. It is connected with gust, with yeast, and even with the hissing and boiling geysers of Iceland. Soul is the Gothic saivala, and this is clearly related to another Gothic word, saivs,344 which means the sea. The sea was called saivs from a root si or siv, the Greek seiō, to shake; it meant the tossed-about water, in contradistinction to stagnant or running water. The soul being called saivala, we see that it was originally conceived by the Teutonic nations as a sea within, heaving up and down with every breath, and reflecting heaven and earth on the mirror of the deep.

At the exact moment when humans separate from the animal kingdom, at the first glimpse of reason as the expression of the light inside us, we see the real beginning of language. Analyze any word you want, and you'll discover that it conveys a general idea unique to the individual it represents. What does "moon" mean?—the measurer. What does "sun" mean?—the creator. What does "earth" mean?—the ploughed. The old term for animals like cows and sheep was pasú, the Latin livestock, which means feeders. Animal itself is a later term, derived from soul, meaning soul. This soul originally referred to blowing or breathing, similar to spirit from breathe, and comes from a root, an, which means to blow, giving us anila, wind, in Sanskrit, and wind, wind, in Greek. Spirit, the German Spirit, is based on the same idea. It's connected to breeze, with yeast, and even with the hissing and boiling geysers of Iceland. Spirit is the Gothic saivala, which clearly relates to another Gothic word, saivs, which means the sea. The sea was referred to as saivs from a root si or siv, the Greek seiō, meaning to shake; it referred to the turbulent waters, in contrast to still or flowing water. The soul being called saivala, we see that it was originally understood by the Teutonic tribes as a sea within, rising and falling with every breath, and reflecting heaven and earth in the mirror of the deep.

The Sanskrit name for love is smara; it is derived from smar, to recollect; and the same root has supplied the German schmerz, pain, and the English smart.

The Sanskrit word for love is smara; it comes from smart, which means to remember; and the same root has given us the German word pain, meaning pain, and the English word clever.

If the serpent is called in Sanskrit sarpa, it is because it was conceived under the general idea of creeping, an idea expressed by the word srip. But the serpent was also called ahi in Sanskrit, in Greek echis or echidna, in Latin anguis. This name is derived from quite a different root and idea. The root is ah in Sanskrit, or anh, which means to press together, to choke, to throttle. Here the distinguishing mark from which the serpent was named was his throttling, and ahi meant serpent, as expressing the general idea of throttler. It is a curious root this anh, and it still lives in several modern words. In Latin it appears as ango, anxi, anctum, to strangle, in angina, quinsy,345 in [pg 381] angor, suffocation. But angor meant not only quinsy or compression of the neck; it assumed a moral import and signifies anguish or anxiety. The two adjectives angustus, narrow, and anxius, uneasy, both come from the same source. In Greek the root retained its natural and material meaning; in eggys, near, and echis, serpent, throttler. But in Sanskrit it was chosen with great truth as the proper name of sin. Evil no doubt presented itself under various aspects to the human mind, and its names are many; but none so expressive as those derived from our root, anh, to throttle. Anhas in Sanskrit means sin, but it does so only because it meant originally throttling,—the consciousness of sin being like the grasp of the assassin on the throat of his victim. All who have seen and contemplated the statue of Laokoon and his sons, with the serpent coiled round them from head to foot, may realize what those ancients felt and saw when they called sin anhas, or the throttler. This anhas is the same word as the Greek agos, sin. In Gothic the same root has produced agis, in the sense of fear, and from the same source we have awe, in awful, i.e. fearful, and ug, in ugly. The English anguish is from the French angoisse, the Italian angoscia, a corruption of the Latin angustiæ, a strait.

If the serpent is called in Sanskrit sarpa, it's due to the general notion of creeping, which is expressed by the word srip. However, the serpent was also referred to as ahi in Sanskrit, echis or spiny anteater in Greek, and snake in Latin. This name comes from a different root and idea. The root is ah in Sanskrit, or anh, meaning to press together, to choke, or to throttle. Here, the key characteristic from which the serpent got its name was its ability to throttle, and ahi meant serpent, reflecting the general idea of throttler. The root anh is quite interesting, as it still appears in several modern words. In Latin, it appears as ango, anxiety, sanctum, meaning to strangle, in chest pain, quinsy, 345 in [pg 381] anguish, suffocation. But anguish meant not just quinsy or throat compression; it also had a moral aspect and signifies anguish or anxiety. The two adjectives narrow, meaning narrow, and anxious, meaning uneasy, both come from the same source. In Greek, the root maintained its natural and physical meaning; in eggies, meaning near, and echis, meaning serpent or throttler. However, in Sanskrit it was accurately chosen as the name for sin. Evil undoubtedly presented itself in various forms to the human mind, and it has many names; but none are as expressive as those derived from our root, anh, to throttle. Anhas in Sanskrit means sin, but it does so because it originally meant throttling—the awareness of sin being similar to the grip of an assassin on their victim’s throat. Everyone who has seen and contemplated the statue of Laokoon and his sons, with the serpent wrapped around them from head to toe, can understand what those ancient people felt and saw when they labeled sin anhas, or the throttler. This anhas is the same word as the Greek agos, meaning sin. In Gothic, the same root has formed agis, meaning fear, and from the same source, we have awe, as in awful, meaning fearful, and ug, as in unattractive. The English suffering comes from the French anxiety, and the Italian anxiety, which is a distortion of the Latin narrowness, meaning a strait.

And how did those early thinkers and framers of language distinguish between man and the other animals? What general idea did they connect with the first conception of themselves? The Latin word homo, the French l'homme, which has been reduced to on in [pg 382] on dit, is derived from the same root which we have in humus, the soil, humilis, humble. Homo, therefore, would express the idea of a being made of the dust of the earth.346

And how did those early thinkers and creators of language differentiate between humans and other animals? What overall idea did they associate with their first understanding of themselves? The Latin word homo, the French the man, which has been shortened to on in they say, comes from the same root found in humus, meaning soil, and humble, meaning humble. Human thus conveys the concept of a being formed from the dust of the earth.346

Another ancient word for man was the Sanskrit marta,347 the Greek brotos, the Latin mortalis (a secondary derivative), our own mortal. Marta means “he who dies,” and it is remarkable that where everything else was changing, fading, and dying, this should have been chosen as the distinguishing name for man. Those early poets would hardly have called themselves mortals unless they had believed in other beings as immortal.

Another old word for man was the Sanskrit marta, the Greek buds, the Latin mortal (a secondary derivative), and our own human. Marta means "he who passes away," and it’s interesting that during a time when everything else was changing, fading, and dying, this was chosen as the defining name for man. Those early poets probably wouldn’t have called themselves mortals unless they believed in other beings as immortal.

There is a third name for man which means simply the thinker, and this, the true title of our race, still lives in the name of man. in Sanskrit means to measure, from which you remember we had the name of moon. Man, a derivative root, means to think. From this we have the Sanskrit manu, originally thinker, then man. In the later Sanskrit we find derivatives, such as mânava, mânusha, manushya, all expressing man. In Gothic we find both man, and mannisks, the modern German mann and mensch.

There’s a third name for humans that simply means the thinker, and this, the true name of our species, still exists in the name of guy. in Sanskrit means to measure, which you might recall is where we got the name for the moon. Man, a related root, means to think. From this, we have the Sanskrit manu, which originally meant thinker, and then evolved to mean man. In later Sanskrit, we find variations like human, mānuša, and human, all referring to man. In Gothic, we see both guy and humans, as well as the modern German man and human.

There were many more names for man, as there were many names for all things in ancient languages. Any feature that struck the observing mind as peculiarly characteristic could be made to furnish a new name. The sun might be called the bright, the warm, the golden, the preserver, the destroyer, the wolf, the lion, the heavenly eye, the father of light and life. Hence that [pg 383] superabundance of synonymes in ancient dialects, and hence that struggle for life carried on among these words, which led to the destruction of the less strong, the less happy, the less fertile words, and ended in the triumph of one, as the recognized and proper name for every object in every language. On a very small scale this process of natural selection, or, as it would better be called, elimination, may still be watched even in modern languages, that is to say, even in languages so old and full of years as English and French. What it was at the first burst of dialects we can only gather from such isolated cases as when Vón Hammer counts 5744 words relating to the camel.348

There were many more names for humans, just as there were many names for everything in ancient languages. Any feature that caught the attention of an observant mind could inspire a new name. The sun could be called bright, warm, golden, the preserver, the destroyer, the wolf, the lion, the heavenly eye, the father of light and life. This explains the excess of synonyms in ancient dialects and the fight for survival that occurred among these words, which led to the elimination of the weaker, less happy, and less productive words, resulting in the success of one as the accepted and appropriate name for every object in every language. On a much smaller scale, this process of survival of the fittest, or more accurately, removal, can still be observed in modern languages, even in those as old and established as English and French. What occurred at the initial emergence of dialects can only be inferred from isolated examples, such as when Vón Hammer lists 5,744 words related to camels.348

The fact that every word is originally a predicate, that names, though signs of individual conceptions, are all, without exception, derived from general ideas, is one of the most important discoveries in the science of language. It was known before that language is the distinguishing characteristic of man; it was known also that the having of general ideas is that which puts a perfect distinction betwixt man and brutes; but that these two were only different expressions of the same fact was not known till the theory of roots had been established as preferable to the theories both of Onomatopoieia and of Interjections. But, though our modern philosophy did not know it, the ancient poets and framers of language must have known it. For in Greek language is logos, but logos means also reason, and alogon was chosen as the name, and the most proper name, for brute. No animal thinks, and no animal speaks, except man. Language and thought are inseparable. Words without thought are dead [pg 384] sounds; thoughts without words are nothing. To think is to speak low; to speak is to think aloud. The word is the thought incarnate.

The idea that every word is originally a predicate, and that names, although they represent individual concepts, are all derived from general ideas, is one of the most significant findings in the study of language. It was previously understood that language differentiates humans from other creatures, and that having general ideas is what sets humans apart from animals. However, it wasn't realized until the theory of roots was developed—being favored over the theories of Onomatopoeia and Interjections—that these two concepts were actually different ways of expressing the same truth. Yet, while our modern philosophy might not have recognized this, ancient poets and language creators surely did. In Greek, the word for language is logos, which also means reason, and alogon was the chosen term, the most fitting one, for animals. No animal thinks, and no animal speaks, except for humans. Language and thought are inseparable. Words without thought are just empty sounds; thoughts without words are meaningless. To think is like speaking softly; to speak is to think out loud. The word is thought made tangible.

And now I am afraid I have but a few minutes left to explain the last question of all in our science, namely—How can sound express thought? How did roots become the signs of general ideas? How was the abstract idea of measuring expressed by , the idea of thinking by man? How did come to mean going, sthâ standing, sad sitting, giving, mar dying, char walking, kar doing?

And now I’m afraid I only have a few minutes left to explain the final question in our science, which is—How can sound convey thought? How did roots become symbols of general ideas? How was the abstract concept of measuring represented by , and the concept of thinking by dude? How did come to mean going, sthâ standing, unhappy sitting, giving, mar dying, char walking, kar doing?

I shall try to answer as briefly as possible. The 400 or 500 roots which remain as the constituent elements in different families of language are not interjections, nor are they imitations. They are phonetic types produced by a power inherent in human nature. They exist, as Plato would say, by nature; though with Plato we should add that, when we say by nature, we mean by the hand of God.349 There is a law which runs through nearly the whole of nature, that everything which is struck rings. Each substance has its peculiar ring. We can tell the more or less perfect structure of metals by their vibrations, by the answer which they give. Gold rings differently from tin, wood rings differently from stone; and different sounds are produced according to the nature of each percussion. It was the same with man, the most highly organized of nature's works.350 Man, in his primitive and perfect [pg 385] state, was not only endowed, like the brute, with the power of expressing his sensations by interjections, and his perceptions by onomatopoieia. He possessed likewise the faculty of giving more articulate expression to the rational conceptions of his mind. That faculty was not of his own making. It was an instinct, an instinct of the mind as irresistible as any other instinct. So far as language is the production of that instinct, it belongs to the realm of nature. Man loses his instincts as he ceases to want them. His senses become fainter when, as in the case of scent, they become useless. Thus the creative faculty which gave to each conception, as it thrilled for the first time through the brain, a phonetic expression, became extinct when its object was fulfilled. The number of these phonetic types must have been almost infinite in the beginning, and it was only through the same process of natural elimination which we observed in the early history of words, that clusters of roots, more or less synonymous, were gradually reduced to one definite type. Instead of deriving language from nine roots, like Dr. Murray,351 or from one root, a feat actually accomplished by a Dr. Schmidt,352 we must suppose that the first settlement of the radical elements of language was preceded by a period of unrestrained growth,—the spring of speech—to be followed by many an autumn.

I’ll try to answer as briefly as possible. The 400 or 500 roots that make up different language families are neither interjections nor imitations. They are phonetic categories created by a power inherent in human nature. They exist, as Plato would say, naturally; although, like Plato, we should add that when we say naturally, we mean by the hand of God.349 There is a law that runs through almost all of nature: everything that is struck rings. Each substance has its unique sound. We can determine the quality of metals by their vibrations, by the response they give. Gold rings differently than tin, wood rings differently than stone; and different sounds come from each type of impact. The same applies to humans, the most sophisticated of nature's creations.350 Humans, in their primitive yet perfect state, were not only able to express their feelings through interjections and perceptions through onomatopoeia, like animals. They also had the ability to articulate the rational ideas of their minds. That ability was not something they created themselves; it was an instinct, a mental instinct as powerful as any other instinct. Insofar as language stems from that instinct, it belongs to the realm of nature. Humans lose their instincts when they no longer need them. Their senses dull when, as with smell, they become irrelevant. Thus, the creative ability that gave voice to each conception, as it first sparked in the brain, faded away once its purpose was served. The number of these phonetic categories must have been nearly infinite at the start, and it was only through the process of natural waste removal we see in the early history of words that groups of roots, more or less synonymous, were gradually narrowed down to one defined type. Instead of tracing language back to nine roots, like Dr. Murray,351 or to one root, a feat actually completed by Dr. Schmidt,352 we should consider that the initial establishment of the fundamental elements of language likely followed a period of unrestricted growth—the spring of speech—followed by many cycles of decline.

[pg 386]

With the process of elimination, or natural selection, the historical element enters into the science of language. However primitive the Chinese may be as compared with terminational and inflectional languages, its roots or words have clearly passed through a long process of mutual attrition. There are many things of a merely traditional character even in Chinese. The rule that in a simple sentence the first word is the subject, the second the verb, the third the object, is a traditional rule. It is by tradition only that ngŏ ģin, in Chinese, means a bad man, whereas ģin ngŏ signifies man is bad. The Chinese themselves distinguish between full and empty roots,353 the former being predicative, the latter corresponding to our particles which modify the meaning of full roots and determine their relation to each other. It is only by tradition that roots become empty. All roots were originally full whether predicative or demonstrative, and the fact that empty roots in Chinese cannot always be traced back to their full prototypes shows that even the most ancient Chinese had passed through successive periods of growth. Chinese commentators admit that all empty words were originally full words, just as Sanskrit grammarians maintain that all that is found in grammar was originally substantial. But we must be satisfied with but partial proofs of this general principle, and must be prepared to find as many fanciful derivations in Chinese as in Sanskrit. The fact, again, that all roots in Chinese are no longer capable of being employed at pleasure, either as substantives, or verbs, or adjectives, is another proof that, even in this most primitive stage, language points back to a previous growth. Fu is father, [pg 387] mu is mother; fu mu parents; but neither fu nor mu is used as a root in its original predicative sense. The amplest proof, however, of the various stages through which even so simple a language as Chinese must have passed is to be found in the comparatively small number of roots, and in the definite meanings attached to each; a result which could only have been obtained by that constant struggle which has been so well described in natural history as the struggle for life.

Using the process of elimination, or natural selection, the historical aspect is incorporated into the science of language. No matter how basic Chinese may seem compared to languages with endings and inflections, its roots or words have clearly evolved through a long process of interaction and change. There are many elements that are purely traditional even in Chinese. The rule that in a simple sentence the first word is the subject, the second the verb, and the third the object is just a traditional guideline. It is only through tradition that ngŏ ģin in Chinese means a bad man, while ģin ngŏ means man is bad. The Chinese distinguish between full and empty roots, where the former are used as predicates, and the latter are similar to our particles that modify the meanings of full roots and define their relationships to one another. Roots become empty only through tradition. All roots were originally full, whether they expressed a predicate or demonstrated something, and the fact that empty roots in Chinese cannot always be traced back to their original full forms indicates that even the earliest Chinese underwent various stages of development. Chinese scholars acknowledge that all empty words originated as full words, much like Sanskrit grammarians argue that everything found in grammar was originally substantial. However, we have only partial evidence of this general principle and should be ready to discover as many fanciful origins in Chinese as in Sanskrit. Furthermore, the fact that all roots in Chinese can no longer be used freely as nouns, verbs, or adjectives is additional proof that, even in this very basic stage, language reflects a prior evolution. Fu means father, mu means mother; mother means parents; but neither fu nor mu is used as a root in its original predicate form. The strongest evidence of the different stages that even a simple language like Chinese must have gone through is found in the relatively small number of roots and the specific meanings assigned to each, a result that could only have emerged from the ongoing struggle described in natural history as the struggle for life.

But although this sifting of roots, and still more the subsequent combination of roots, cannot be ascribed to the mere working of nature or natural instincts, it is still less, as we saw in a former Lecture, the effect of deliberate or premeditated art, in the sense in which, for instance, a picture of Raphael or a symphony of Beethoven is. Given a root to express flying, or bird, and another to express heap, then the joining together of the two to express many birds, or birds in the plural, is the natural effect of the synthetic power of the human mind, or, to use more homely language, of the power of putting two and two together. Some philosophers maintain indeed that this explains nothing, and that the real mystery to be solved is how the mind can form a synthesis, or conceive many things as one. Into those depths we cannot follow. Other philosophers imagine that the combination of roots to form agglutinative and inflectional language is, like the first formation of roots, the result of a natural instinct. Thus Professor Heyse354 maintained that “the various forms of development in language must be explained by the philosophers as necessary evolutions, founded in the very essence of human speech.” This is not the [pg 388] case. We can watch the growth of language, and we can understand and explain all that is the result of that growth. But we cannot undertake to prove that all that is in language is so by necessity, and could not have been otherwise. When we have, as in Chinese, two such words as kiai and tu, both expressing a heap, an assembly, a quantity, then we may perfectly understand why either the one or the other should have been used to form the plural. But if one of the two becomes fixed and traditional, while the other becomes obsolete, then we can register the fact as historical, but no philosophy on earth will explain its absolute necessity. We can perfectly understand how, with two such roots as kûŏ, empire, and ćung, middle, the Chinese should have formed what we call a locative, kŭŏ ćung, in the empire. But to say that this was the only way to express this conception is an assertion contradicted both by fact and reason. We saw the various ways in which the future can be formed. They are all equally intelligible and equally possible, but not one of them is inevitable. In Chinese ỳaó means to will, ngò is I; hence ngò ỳaó, I will. The same root ỳaó, added to ḱiú, to go, gives us ngò ỳaó ḱiú, I will go, the first germ of our futures. To say that ngò ỳaó ḱiú was the necessary form of the future in Chinese would introduce a fatalism into language which rests on no authority whatever. The building up of language is not like the building of the cells in a beehive, nor is it like the building of St. Peter's by Michael Angelo. It is the result of innumerable agencies, working each according to certain laws, and leaving in the end the result of their combined efforts freed from all that proved superfluous or useless. From the first combination of two [pg 389] such words as ģin, man, kiai, many, to form the plural ģin kiai, to the perfect grammar of Sanskrit and Greek, everything is intelligible as the result of the two principles of growth which we considered in our second Lecture. What is antecedent to the production of roots is the work of nature; what follows after is the work of man, not in his individual and free, but in his collective and moderating, capacity.

But even though this sorting of roots, and even more the later combination of roots, can't just be attributed to the simple workings of nature or natural instincts, it's even less so, as we discussed in a previous lecture, the result of intentional or premeditated art, like a painting by Raphael or a symphony by Beethoven. If we have a root for flying or bird and another for heap, then linking them to express many birds is simply the natural outcome of the human mind's synthetic power, or, to put it simply, the ability to put two and two together. Some philosophers argue that this doesn't clarify anything and that the real mystery to be unraveled is how the mind can create a synthesis or conceive multiple things as one. We can't dive into those depths. Other philosophers assume that the combination of roots to create agglutinative and inflectional languages is, like the initial formation of roots, a result of a natural instinct. Thus, Professor Heyse maintained that “the various forms of development in language must be explained by the philosophers as necessary evolutions, founded in the very essence of human speech.” This is not the case. We can observe the evolution of language, and we can understand and explain everything that comes from that development. But we cannot claim that everything in language is there out of necessity and couldn't have been different. When we have, as in Chinese, two words like *kiai* and *tu*, both meaning a heap or quantity, we can completely understand why either one could be used to form the plural. But if one of the two becomes fixed and traditional, while the other falls out of use, we can note that as a historical fact, but no philosophy on earth can explain why it was absolutely necessary. We can definitely understand how, with two roots like *kûŏ*, empire, and *ćung*, middle, the Chinese created what we call a locative, *kŭŏ ćung*, in the empire. But to say that this was the only way to express this idea contradicts both fact and reason. We saw the various ways to form the future. All are equally understandable and possible, but none are inevitable. In Chinese, *ỳaó* means to will, *ngò* is I; thus, *ngò ỳaó*, I will. The same root *ỳaó*, added to *ḱiú*, to go, gives us *ngò ỳaó ḱiú*, I will go, the first element of our future tenses. To claim that *ngò ỳaó ḱiú* was the necessary future form in Chinese would introduce a fatalism into language that has no grounding in authority. The development of language isn't like building cells in a beehive, nor is it like constructing St. Peter's by Michelangelo. It's the result of countless forces, each operating according to specific laws, ultimately producing a result that discards everything that proved to be unnecessary or useless. From the initial combination of two words like *ģin*, man, and *kiai*, many, to create the plural *ģin kiai*, to the sophisticated grammar of Sanskrit and Greek, everything is understandable as the outcome of the two growth principles we discussed in our second lecture. What comes before the formation of roots is the work of nature; what follows is the work of humanity, not in individual and unrestrained ways, but in collective and moderating capacities.

I do not say that every form in Greek or Sanskrit has as yet been analyzed and explained. There are formations in Greek and Latin and English which have hitherto baffled all tests; and there are certain contrivances, such as the augment in Greek, the change of vowels in Hebrew, the Umlaut and Ablaut in the Teutonic dialects, where we might feel inclined to suppose that language admitted distinctions purely musical or phonetic, corresponding to very palpable and material distinctions of thought. Such a supposition, however, is not founded on any safe induction. It may seem inexplicable to us why bruder in German should form its plural as brüder; or brother, brethren. But what is inexplicable and apparently artificial in our modern languages becomes intelligible in their more ancient phases. The change of u into ü, as in bruder, brüder, was not intentional; least of all was it introduced to expressed plurality. The change is phonetic, and due to the influence of an i or j,355 which existed originally in the last syllable and which reacted regularly on the vowel of the preceding syllable; nay, which leaves its effect behind, even after it has itself disappeared. By a false analogy such a change, perfectly justifiable in a [pg 390] certain class of words, may be applied to other words where no such change was called for; and it may then appear as if an arbitrary change of vowels was intended to convey a grammatical change. But even into these recesses the comparative philologist can follow language, thus discovering a reason even for what in reality was irrational and wrong. It seems difficult to believe that the augment in Greek should originally have had an independent substantial existence, yet all analogy is in favor of such a view. Suppose English had never been written down before Wycliffe's time, we should then find that in some instances the perfect was formed by the mere addition of a short a. Wycliffe spoke and wrote:356 I knowlech to a felid and seid þus; i.e. I acknowledge to have felt and said thus. In a similar way we read: it should a fallen; instead of “it should have fallen;” and in some parts of England common people still say very much the same: I should a done it. Now in some old English books this a actually coalesces with the verb, at least they are printed together; so that a grammar founded on them would give us “to fall” as the infinitive of the present, to afallen as the infinitive of the past. I do not wish for a moment to be understood as if there was any connection between this a, a contraction of have in English, and the Greek augment which is placed before past tenses. All I mean is, that, if the origin of the augment has not yet been satisfactorily explained, we are not therefore to despair, or to admit an arbitrary addition of a consonant or vowel, used as it were algebraically or by mutual agreement, to distinguish a past from a present tense.

I’m not saying that every form in Greek or Sanskrit has been fully analyzed and explained. There are structures in Greek, Latin, and English that have perplexed all attempts at classification; and there are certain features, like the augment in Greek, vowel changes in Hebrew, and the Umlaut and Ablaut in the Germanic languages, where we might be tempted to think that language included purely musical or phonetic distinctions that correspond to clear and tangible differences in thought. However, such an assumption isn’t based on any reliable reasoning. It might seem puzzling to us why brother in German forms its plural as brothers; or bro, siblings. But what seems inexplicable and somewhat artificial in our modern languages becomes understandable in their older forms. The change from u to ü, as in brother, brothers, was not a deliberate choice; it certainly wasn’t introduced to denote plurality. The change is phonetic, influenced by an i or j, which was originally present in the last syllable and affected the vowel of the preceding syllable; indeed, it leaves its mark even after it has disappeared. Through a mistaken analogy, such a change, perfectly reasonable in a certain set of words, may be incorrectly applied to other words where no such change was necessary; and it might then seem as though an arbitrary vowel change was meant to indicate a grammatical change. But even into these depths, the comparative philologist can trace language, finding explanations for what is, in fact, illogical and incorrect. It’s hard to believe that the augment in Greek originally had a distinct and substantial existence, yet all evidence supports that idea. Imagine if English had never been written down before Wycliffe’s time; we would then see that in some cases, the perfect tense was formed simply by adding a short a. Wycliffe spoke and wrote: 355 I went to a cat and said this; i.e. I acknowledge to have felt and said thus. Similarly, we read: it should have fallen; instead of "it should have dropped;" and in some parts of England, common people still say something very similar: I should've done it. Now, in some old English texts, this a actually merges with the verb, at least they are printed together; such that a grammar based on them would give us “to drop” as the present infinitive, to a fallen as the past infinitive. I certainly don’t want to imply that this a, a contraction of have in English, is related to the Greek augment that precedes past tenses. All I intend to convey is that, if the origin of the augment hasn’t yet been clearly explained, we shouldn’t lose hope or accept the idea of an arbitrary addition of a consonant or vowel, used almost algebraically or by mutual agreement, to differentiate between past and present tenses.

[pg 391]

If inductive reasoning is worth anything, we are justified in believing that what has been proved to be true on so large a scale, and in cases where it was least expected, is true with regard to language in general. We require no supernatural interference, nor any conclave of ancient sages, to explain the realities of human speech. All that is formal in language is the result of rational combination; all that is material, the result of a mental instinct. The first natural and instinctive utterances, if sifted differently by different clans, would fully account both for the first origin and for the first divergence of human speech. We can understand not only the origin of language, but likewise the necessary breaking up of one language into many; and we perceive that no amount of variety in the material or the formal elements of speech is incompatible with the admission of one common source.

If inductive reasoning holds any value, we are justified in believing that what has been proven true on such a large scale, and in situations where it was least expected, is also true regarding language in general. We don’t need any supernatural intervention or a gathering of ancient wise men to explain the realities of human speech. Everything formal in language comes from logical combinations; everything material comes from a mental instinct. The earliest natural and instinctive expressions, if filtered differently by different groups, would fully explain both the initial origin and the first variations of human speech. We can comprehend not only how language originated but also how one language necessarily breaks into many. We see that no level of variety in the material or formal aspects of speech contradicts the idea of a common source.

The Science of Language thus leads us up to that highest summit from whence we see into the very dawn of man's life on earth; and where the words which we have heard so often from the days of our childhood—“And the whole earth was of one language and of one speech”—assume a meaning more natural, more intelligible, more convincing, than they ever had before.

The Science of Language takes us to the pinnacle where we can glimpse the very beginning of human life on earth. It’s where the phrases we’ve frequently heard since childhood—"And everyone on earth spoke the same language and used the same words."—gain a meaning that is more natural, clearer, and more persuasive than ever before.


And now in concluding this course of Lectures, I have only to express my regret that the sketch of the Science of Language which I endeavored to place before you, was necessarily so very slight and imperfect. There are many points which I could not touch at all, many which I could only allude to: there is hardly one to which I could do full justice. Still I feel grateful to the President and the Council of this Institution [pg 392] for having given me an opportunity of claiming some share of public sympathy for a science which I believe has a great future in store; and I shall be pleased, if, among those who have done me the honor of attending these Lectures, I have excited, though I could not have satisfied, some curiosity as to the strata which underlie the language on which we stand and walk; and as to the elements which enter into the composition of the very granite of our thoughts.

And now that we're wrapping up this series of lectures, I just want to express my regret that the overview of the Science of Language that I tried to present to you was necessarily so brief and incomplete. There are many topics I couldn't cover at all, and many that I could only mention in passing; there's hardly any topic to which I could give full consideration. Still, I'm grateful to the President and the Council of this Institution [pg 392] for giving me the chance to receive some public interest in a science that I believe has a bright future ahead. I hope that, among those who have honored me by attending these lectures, I've sparked some curiosity—even if I couldn't fully satisfy it—about the underlying layers of the language we use every day, and the building blocks that shape the very foundation of our thoughts.

[pg 394]

Appendix.

No. 1. Genealogical Table of the Aryan Family of Languages.

No. 1. Genealogical Table of the Aryan Family of Languages.

The Aryan Family consists of two Divisions: The Southern Division, and the Norther Division.

The Aryan Family includes two divisions: the Southern Division and the Northern Division.

The Southern Division consists of two Classes: the Indic and Iranic.

The Southern Division has two Classes: Indic and Iranic.

The Indic Class consists of the dead languages Prakrit and Pali, Modern Sanskrit, and Vedic Sanskrit, and the modern Dialects of India, and the Dialects of the Gipsies.

The Indic Class includes the dead languages Prakrit and Pali, modern Sanskrit, Vedic Sanskrit, the modern dialects of India, and the dialects of the Gypsies.

The Iranic Class consists of the dead languages Parsi, Pehlevi, Cuneiform Inscriptions, Zend, and Old Armenian; the the living languages of Persia, Afghanistan, Kurdistan, Bokhara, Armenia, and Ossethi.

The Iranic Class includes the dead languages of Parsi, Pehlevi, Cuneiform Inscription, Zend, and Old Armenian, as well as the living languages spoken in Persia, Afghanistan, Kurdistan, Bokhara, Armenia, and Ossethi.

The Northern Division consists of six Classes: Celtic, Italic, Illyric, Hellenic, Windic, and Teutonic.

The Northern Division has six Classes: Celtic, Italic, Illyric, Hellenic, Windic, and Teutonic.

The Celtic Class consists of two Branches: Cymric and Gadhelic.

The Celtic Class has two branches: Cymric and Gadhelic.

The Cymric Branch consists of the dead language Cornish, and the living languages of Wales and Brittany.

The Cymric Branch includes the extinct Cornish language and the currently spoken languages of Wales and Brittany.

The Gadhelic Branch consists of the living languages of Scotland, Ireland, and Man.

The Gadhelic Branch includes the spoken languages of Scotland, Ireland, and the Isle of Man.

The Italic Class consists of the dead languages Oscan, Latin, and Umbrian, together called Lingua Vulgaris, or Langue d'oc and Langue d'oil, and the living languages of Portugal, Spain, Provençe, France, and Italy.

The Italic Class includes the dead languages Oscan, Latin, and Umbrian, collectively known as Lingua Vulgaris, or Langue d'oc and Langue d'oil, along with the living languages of Portugal, Spain, Provence, France, and Italy.

The Illyric Class consists of the living languages of Wallachia, the Grisons, and Albania.

The Illyric Class includes the modern languages spoken in Wallachia, the Grisons, and Albania.

The Hellenic Class consists of the dead Κοινή languages, Doric, Æolic, Attic, and Ionic, and the living language of Greece.

The Hellenic Class includes the extinct Koine languages, Doric, Aeolic, Attic, and Ionic, as well as the modern language of Greece.

The Windic Class consists of three Branches: Lettic, South-East Slavonic, and West Slavonic.

The Windic Class is made up of three branches: Lettic, South-East Slavonic, and West Slavonic.

[pg 395]

The Lettic Branch consists of the dead language Old Prussian, and the living languages of Lithuania, Kurland and Livonia (Lettish).

The Lettic Branch includes the extinct language Old Prussian, along with the currently spoken languages of Lithuania, Kurland, and Livonia (Lettish).

The South-East Slavonic Branch consists of the dead language Ecclesiastical Slavonic, and the living languages of Bulgaria, Russia (Great, Little, White Russian), Illyria (Slovenian, Croatian, Servian).

The South-East Slavonic Branch includes the extinct language Ecclesiastical Slavonic, as well as the living languages of Bulgaria, Russia (Great, Little, White Russian), and Illyria (Slovenian, Croatian, Serbian).

The West Slavonic Branch consists of the dead languages Old Bohemian and Pelabian, and the living languages of Poland, Bohemian (Slovakian), and Lusatia.

The West Slavonic Branch includes the extinct languages Old Bohemian and Pelabian, along with the living languages of Polish, Czech (Slovak), and Lusatian.

The Teutonic Class consists of three branches: High-German, Low-German, and Scandinavian.

The Teutonic Class is made up of three branches: High German, Low German, and Scandinavian.

The High-German Branch consists of the dead languages Middle High-German Old High-German, and the living language of Germany.

The High German Branch includes the dead languages Middle High German and Old High German, as well as the modern language of Germany.

The Low-German Branch consists of the dead languages Gothic, Anglo-Saxon, Old Dutch, Old Friesian, and Old Saxon, and the living languages of England, Holland, Friesland, and North of Germany (Platt-Deutsch).

The Low-German Branch includes the dead languages Gothic, Anglo-Saxon, Old Dutch, Old Frisian, and Old Saxon, as well as the living languages of England, the Netherlands, Friesland, and northern Germany (Low German).

The Scandinavian Branch consists of the dead language Old Norse, and the living languages of Denmark, Sweden, Norway, and Iceland.

The Scandinavian Branch includes the extinct language Old Norse, along with the modern languages of Denmark, Sweden, Norway, and Iceland.

[pg 396]

No. 2. Genealogical Table of the Semitic Family of Languages.

No. 2. Family Tree of the Semitic Languages.

The Semitic Family Family consists of three Classes: the Arabic or Southern, the Hebraic or Middle, and the Aramaic or Northern.

The Semitic Family consists of three groups: the Arabic or Southern, the Hebraic or Middle, and the Aramaic or Northern.

The Arabic or Southern Class consists of the dead languages Ethiopic and the Himyaritic Inscriptions, and the living languages of Arabic and Amharic.

The Arabic or Southern Class includes the dead languages Ethiopic and the Himyaritic Inscriptions, along with the living languages of Arabic and Amharic.

The Hebraic or Middle Class consists of the dead languages Biblical Hebrew, the Samaritan Pentateuch (third century, a. d.), the Carthaginian, Phœnician Inscriptions, and the living language of the Jews.

The Hebraic or Middle Class includes the ancient languages like Biblical Hebrew, the Samaritan Pentateuch (third century, a.d.), the Carthaginian, Phœnician inscriptions, and the current language spoken by the Jews.

The Aramaic or Northern Class consists of the dead languages Chaldee (Masora, Talmud, Targum, Biblical Chaldee), Syriac (Peshito, second cent. a. d.), Cuneiform Inscriptions of Babylon and Nineveh, and the living language Neo-Syriac.

The Aramaic or Northern Class includes the ancient languages Chaldee (Masora, Talmud, Targum, Biblical Chaldee), Syriac (Peshito, second century a.d.), Cuneiform Inscriptions of Babylon and Nineveh, and the modern language Neo-Syriac.

[pg 397]

No. 3. Genealogical Table of the Turanian Family of Languages, Northern Division.

No. 3. Family Tree of the Turanian Language Family, Northern Branch.

The Northern Division of the Turanian Family consists of five Classes: the Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, Samoyedic, and Finnic (Uralic).

The Northern Division of the Turanian Family includes five classes: Tungusic, Mongolic, Turkic, Samoyedic, and Finnic (Uralic).

The Tungusic Class consists of two Branches: Western and Eastern.

The Tungusic Class has two branches: Western and Eastern.

The Western Branch consists of the languages of the Chapogires (Upper Tunguska), Orotongs (Lower Tunguska), and the People of Nyertchinsk.

The Western Branch includes the languages of the Chapogires (Upper Tunguska), Orotongs (Lower Tunguska), and the people of Nyertchinsk.

The Eastern Branch consists of the languages of the Lamutes (Coast of O'hotsk) and Mandshu (China).

The Eastern Branch includes the languages of the Lamutes (Coast of Okhotsk) and Manchu (China).

The Mongolic Class consists of three Branches: Eastern or Mongols Proper, Western Mongols, and Northern Mongols.

The Mongolic Class has three branches: Eastern or Mongols Proper, Western Mongols, and Northern Mongols.

The Eastern or Mongols Proper Class consists of the languages of the Sharra-Mongols (South of Gobi), Khalkhas (North of Gobi), and Sharaigol (Tibet and Tangut).

The Eastern or Mongols Proper Class includes the languages of the Sharra-Mongols (south of the Gobi), Khalkhas (north of the Gobi), and Sharaigol (Tibet and Tangut).

The Western Mongols Class consists of the languages of the Chosot (Kokonúr), Dsungur, Torgod, Dürbet, Aimaks (tribes of Persia), and Sokpas (Tibet).

The Western Mongols Class includes the languages of the Chosot (Kokonúr), Dsungur, Torgod, Dürbet, Aimaks (tribes of Persia), and Sokpas (Tibet).

The Northern Mongols Class consists of the language of the Buritäs (Lake Baikal).

The Northern Mongols Class includes the language spoken by the Buritäs people (Lake Baikal).

The Turkic Class consists of three Branches: Chagatic, S. E., Turkic, N., and Turkic, W.

The Turkic Class has three branches: Chagatic, Southeast Turkic, and Northwest Turkic.

The Chagatic Branch consists of the languages of the Uigurs, Komans, Chagatais, Usbeks, Turkomans, and People of Kasan.

The Chagatic Branch includes the languages spoken by the Uigurs, Komans, Chagatais, Usbeks, Turkomans, and the people of Kasan.

The N. Turkic Branch consists of the languages of the Kirgis, Bashkirs, Nogais, Kumians, Karachais, Karakalpaks, Meshcheryäks, People of Siberia, and Yakuts.

The N. Turkic Branch includes the languages spoken by the Kyrgyz, Bashkirs, Nogais, Kumians, Karachais, Karakalpaks, Meshcheryaks, Siberian people, and Yakuts.

The W. Turkic Branch consists of the languages of the People of Derbend, Aderbijan, Krimea, Anatolia, and Rumelia.

The W. Turkic Branch includes the languages spoken by the people of Derbend, Azerbaijan, Crimea, Anatolia, and Rumelia.

The Samoyedic Class consists of two Branches: Northern and Eastern.

The Samoyedic Class has two branches: Northern and Eastern.

The Northern Branch consists of the languages of the Yurazes, Tawgi, and Yenisei.

The Northern Branch includes the languages of the Yurazes, Tawgi, and Yenisei.

The Eastern Branch consists of the languages of the Ostiako-Samoyedes, and the Kamas.

The Eastern Branch includes the languages of the Ostiako-Samoyedes and the Kamas.

The Finnic (Uralic) Class consists of four Branches: Ugric, Bulgaric, Permic, and Chudic.

The Finnic (Uralic) Class has four branches: Ugric, Bulgaric, Permic, and Chudic.

The Ugric Branch consists of the languages of the Hungarians, Voguls, and Ugro-Ostiakes.

The Ugric branch includes the languages spoken by the Hungarians, Voguls, and Ugro-Ostiaks.

The Bulgaric Branch consists of the languages of the Tcheremissians and Mordvins.

The Bulgaric Branch includes the languages of the Tcheremissians and Mordvins.

The Permic Branch consists of the languages of the Permians, Sirianes, and Votiaks.

The Permic Branch includes the languages of the Permians, Sirianes, and Votiaks.

The Chudic Branch consists of the languages of the Lapps, Finns, and Esths.

The Chudic Branch includes the languages of the Sámi, Finns, and Estonians.

[pg 398]

No. 4. Genealogical Table of the Turanian Family of Languages, Southern Division.

No. 4. Family Tree of the Turanian Language Group, Southern Division.

The Southern Division of the Turanian Family consists of six Classes: the Taïc, Malaic, Gangetic, Lohitic, Munda (See Turanian Languages, p. 175), and Tamulic.

The Southern Division of the Turanian Family includes six Classes: the Taïc, Malaic, Gangetic, Lohitic, Munda (See Turanian Languages, p. 175), and Tamulic.

The Taïc Class consists of the languages of Ahom, Laos, Khamti, and Shan (Tenasserim).

The Taïc Class includes the languages of Ahom, Laos, Khamti, and Shan (Tenasserim).

The Malaic Class consists of the languages of the Malay and Polynesian Islands. (See Humboldt, Kavi Sprache.)

The Malaic Class includes the languages of the Malay and Polynesian Islands. (See Humboldt, Kavi Sprache.)

The Gangetic Class consists of two Branches: the Trans-Himalayan, and the Sub-Himalayan.

The Gangetic Class has two branches: the Trans-Himalayan and the Sub-Himalayan.

The Trans-Himalayan Branch consists of the languages Tibetan, Horpa (N.W. Tibet, Bucharia), Thochu-Sifan (N.E. Tibet, China), Gyarung-Sifan (N.E. Tibet, China), Manyak-Sifan (N.E. Tibet, China), and Takpa (West of Kwombo).

The Trans-Himalayan Branch includes the languages Tibetan, Horpa (Northwest Tibet, Bucharia), Thochu-Sifan (Northeast Tibet, China), Gyarung-Sifan (Northeast Tibet, China), Manyak-Sifan (Northeast Tibet, China), and Takpa (West of Kwombo).

The Sub-Himalayan Branch consists of the languages Kenaveri (Setlej basin), Sarpa (West of Gandakéan basin), Sunwár (Gandakéan basin), Gurung (Gandakéan basin), Magar (Gandakéan basin), Newár (between Gandakéan and Koséan basins), Murmi (between Gandakéan and Koséan basins), Limbú (Koséan basin), Kiranti (Koséan basin), Lepcha (Tishtéan basin), Bhutanese (Manaséan basin), and Chepang (Nepal-Terai).

The Sub-Himalayan Branch includes the languages Kenaveri (Setlej basin), Sarpa (west of the Gandakéan basin), Sunwár (Gandakéan basin), Gurung (Gandakéan basin), Magar (Gandakéan basin), Newár (between the Gandakéan and Koséan basins), Murmi (between the Gandakéan and Koséan basins), Limbú (Koséan basin), Kiranti (Koséan basin), Lepcha (Tishtéan basin), Bhutanese (Manaséan basin), and Chepang (Nepal-Terai).

The Lohitic Class consists of the languages of Burmese (Burmah and Arakan), Dhimâl (between Konki and Dhorla), Kachari-Bodo (Migrat. 80° to 93-1/2°, and 25° to 27°), Garo (90°-91° E. long.; 25°-26° N. lat.), Changlo (91°-92° E. long.), Mikir (Nowgong), Dophla (92° 50'-97° N. lat.), Miri (94°-97° E. long.?), Abor-Miri, Abor (97°-99° E. long.), Sibsagor-Miri, Singpho (27°-28° N. lat.), Naga tribes (93°-97° E. long.; 23° N. lat.) (Mithan) E. of Sibsagor, Naga tribes (Namsang), Naga tribes (Nowgong), Naga tribes (Tengsa), Naga tribes (Tablung N. of Sibsagor), Naga tribes (Khaü, Jorhat), Naga tribes (Angami, South), Kuki (N.E. of Chittagong), Khyeng (Shyu) (19°-21° N. lat. Arakan), Kami (Kuladan R. Arakan), Kumi (Kuladan R. Arakan), Shendus (22°-23° and 93-94°), Mru (Arakan, Chittagong), Sak (Nauf River, East), and Tungihu (Tenasserim).

The Lohitic Class includes the languages of Burmese (Burmah and Arakan), Dhimâl (between Konki and Dhorla), Kachari-Bodo (Migrat. 80° to 93.5°, and 25° to 27°), Garo (90°-91° E. long.; 25°-26° N. lat.), Changlo (91°-92° E. long.), Mikir (Nowgong), Dophla (92° 50'-97° N. lat.), Miri (94°-97° E. long.?), Abor-Miri, Abor (97°-99° E. long.), Sibsagor-Miri, Singpho (27°-28° N. lat.), Naga tribes (93°-97° E. long.; 23° N. lat.) (Mithan) E. of Sibsagor, Naga tribes (Namsang), Naga tribes (Nowgong), Naga tribes (Tengsa), Naga tribes (Tablung N. of Sibsagor), Naga tribes (Khaü, Jorhat), Naga tribes (Angami, South), Kuki (N.E. of Chittagong), Khyeng (Shyu) (19°-21° N. lat. Arakan), Kami (Kuladan R. Arakan), Kumi (Kuladan R. Arakan), Shendus (22°-23° and 93-94°), Mru (Arakan, Chittagong), Sak (Nauf River, East), and Tungihu (Tenasserim).

The Munda Class consists of the languages Ho (Kolehan), Sinhbhum Kol (Chyebossa), Sontal (Chyebossa), Bhumij (Chyebossa), Mundala (Chota Nagpur), and Canarese.

The Munda Class includes the languages Ho (Kolehan), Sinhbhum Kol (Chyebossa), Sontal (Chyebossa), Bhumij (Chyebossa), Mundala (Chota Nagpur), and Canarese.

The Tamulic Class consists of the languages Tamil, Telugu, Malayalam, Gond, Brahvi, Tuluva, Toduva, and Uraon-kol.

The Tamulic Class includes the languages Tamil, Telugu, Malayalam, Gond, Brahvi, Tuluva, Toduva, and Uraon-kol.

[pg 399]

Index.

Abdu-l-Kadir Maluk, Mulla, Shah of Badáún, his general history of India, and other works, 151 note.
Abhîra, or Âbhîra, at the mouth of the Indus, 204.
Abiria, the, of Ptolemy, 204.
Ablative, the, in Chinese, 119 note.
Abraham, the language of, 278.
Abu Saleh, his translation from Sanskrit into Arabic, 150.
Abyssinian language, ancient and modern, 281.
Academy, New, doctrines of the, embraced in Rome, 107.
Accusative, formation of the, in Chinese, 118 note.
Achæmenian dynasty, inscriptions of the, 210.
Adelung, his Mithridates, 142.
Adjectives, formation of, in Tibetan, 113 note.
in Chinese, 119 note.
Ælius Stilo, Lucius, his lectures in Rome, on Latin grammar, 109.
Affinity, indications of true, in the animal and vegetable world, 26, 27.
Afghanistan, the language of, 210.
Africa, South, dialects of, 64.
African language, an imaginary, 223.
Age, history of the French word, 292.
Agglutination in the Turanian family of languages, 291.
Aglossoi, the, of the Greeks, 92.
Agriculture of the Chaldeans, work on the, 279.
Punic work of Mago on, 94 note.
Ahirs, the, of Cutch, 204.
Akbar, the Emperor, his search after the true religion, 151.
Akbar, his foundation of the so-called Ilahi religion, 151.
works translated into Persian for him, 151.
not able to obtain a translation of the Veda, 152.
Albania, origin of the name, 242.
Albanian language, origin of the, 201.
Albertus Magnus, on the humanizing influence of Christianity, quoted, 129 note.
Alchemy, causes of the extinction of the science, 19.
Alexander the Great, influence of his expedition in giving the Greeks a knowledge of other nations and languages, 93.
his difficulty in conversing with the Brahmans, 93.
Alexandria, influence of, on the study of foreign languages, 96.
critical study of ancient Greek at, 97.
Algebra, translation of the famous Indian work on, into Arabic, 149.
Algonquins, the one case of the, 221 note.
America, Central, rapid changes which take place in the language of the savage tribes of, 62.
great number of languages spoken by the natives of, 62.
Hervas's reduction of them to eleven families, 63.
Amharic, or modern Abyssinian, 281.
Anatomy, comparative, science of, 27.
Anglo-Saxon, the most ancient epic in, 177.
Angora, in Galatia, battle of, 308.
[pg 400]
Anquetil Duperron, his translation of the Persian translation of the Upanishads into French, 154.
his translation of the works of Zoroaster, 168, 206.
Apollo, temple of, at Rome, 102.
AR, the root, various ramifications of, 252.
Arabic, influence of, over the Turkish language, 83.
ascendency of, in Palestine and Syria, 281.
original seat of Arabic, 281.
ancient Himyaritic inscriptions, 281.
earliest literary documents in Arabic, 281.
relation of Arabic to Hebrew, 281.
Aramaic division of Semitic languages, 276.
two dialects of, 276.
Ariana, the, of Greek geographers, 240.
Ariaramnēs, father of Darius, origin of the name, 241.
Aristotle on grammatical categories, 97, 126.
Armenia, origin of the name, 242.
Arpinum, provincial Latin of, 67.
Article, the, original meaning of the word, 98.
the Greek, restored by Zenodotus, 99.
Ârya. See Aryan.
Ârya-âvarta, India so called, 237.
Aryan, an Indo-European family of languages, 43, 80, 177.
mode of tracing back the grammatical fragments of the Aryan languages to original independent words, 231-233.
Aryan grammar, 234.
northern and southern divisions of the, 211.
the original Aryan clan of Central Asia, 212.
period when this clan broke up, 212.
formation of the locative in all the Aryan languages, 219.
Aryan civilization proved by the evidence of language, 235.
origin and gradual spreading of the word Arya, 236.
original seat of the Aryans, 238.
the Aryan and Semitic the only families of speech deserving that title, 282.
genealogical table, 394, 395.
Asia Minor, origin of the Turks of, 306.
Asiatic Society, foundation of the, at Calcutta, 158.
Aśoka, King, his rock inscriptions, 146.
Assyria, various forms of the name, 247.
Astrology, causes of the extinction of the science, 19.
Astronomy, origin of the word, 16.
the Ptolemæan system, although wrong, important to science, 26.
Auramazda, of the cuneiform inscriptions, 207. See Ormuzd.
Auxentius on Ulfilas, 181-186 note.
Baber, his Indian empire, 299.
Babylonia, literature of, 278.
probability of the recovery of, from the cuneiform inscriptions, 278.
Barabas tribe, in the steppes between the Irtish and the Ob, 304.
Barbarians, the, of the Greeks, 91.
seemed to have possessed greater facility for acquiring languages than either Greeks or Romans, 94.
the term Barbarian as used by the Greeks and Romans, 127.
unfortunate influence of the term, 127.
Bashkirs, race of the, in the Altaic mountains, 303.
Basil, St., his denial that God had created the names of all things, 40 note.
Baziane tribe, in the Caucasus, 303.
Beaver, the, sagacity of, 24.
Behar, Pâli once the popular dialect of, 146.
Beowolf, the ancient English epic of, 177.
Berber, dialects of Northern Africa, origin of the, 282.
[pg 401]
Berners, Juliana, on the expressions proper for certain things, 72.
Berosus, his study and cultivation of the Greek language, 94.
his history of Babylon, 95.
his knowledge of the cuneiform inscriptions, 95.
Bible, number of obsolete words and senses in the English translation of 1611, 45.
Bibliandro, his work on language, 131 note.
Birúni, Abu Rihan al, 150.
his "History of India," 150.
Bishop and sceptic derived from the same root, 257.
Boëthius, Song of, age of the, 196.
Bohemian, oldest specimens of, 201.
Bonaparte, Prince L., his collection of English dialects, 70.
Booker's “Scripture and Prayer Book Glossary” referred to, 45.
Books, general destruction of, in China in 213, b. c. 227.
Bopp, Francis, his great work, 166.
results of his "Comparative Grammar," 234.
Plant Science, origin of the word, 15.
the Linnæan system, although imperfect, important to science, 26.
Brahman, the highest being, known through speech, 88.
Brahmans, their deification of language, 87.
their early achievements in grammatical analysis, 88.
difficulties of Alexander in conversing with them, 93.
Brâhmanas, the, on language, 87.
Brennus, 199.
Brown, Rev. Mr. on the dialects of the Burmese, 63.
Brutes, faculties of, 351.
instinct and intellect, 353.
language the difference between man and brute, 354.
the old name given to brutes, 379.
Buddhism, date of its introduction into China, 147.
Bulgarian Kingdom on the Danube, 319.
language and literature, 200.
Bulgaric branch of the Finnic class of languages, 319.
Bulgarian tribes and dialects, 319.
Buriates, dialects of the, new phase of grammatical life of the, 64.
Burmese language and literature, 63.
dialects, 63.
Burnouf, Eugène, his studies of Zend, 168, 206.
and of cuneiform inscriptions, 168.
Cæsar, Julius, publication of his work “Of the analogy,” 110.
invented the term ablative, 110.
Carneades forbidden by Cato to lecture at Rome, 109.
Carthaginian language, closely allied to Hebrew, 280.
Case, history of the word, 111.
Cases, formation of, in the Aryan languages, 218.
Cassius, Dionysius, of Utica, his translation of the agricultural work of Mago, 95 note.
Castor and Pollux, worship of, in Italy, 102.
Castren on the Mongolian dialects, 64.
Cat, origin of the word, 365.
Catherine the Great of Russia, her "Comparative Dictionary," 143.
Cato, his history of Rome in Latin, 104.
his acquisition of the Greek language in his old age, 106.
reasons for his opposition to everything Greek, 106.
Caucasus, tribes of the, 303.
Celtic language, substantive existence of, 79.
Celtic, a branch of the Indo-European family of languages, 198.
Celts, their former political autonomy, 198.
Chaldee, in what it consisted, 276.
fragments in Ezra, 276.
language of the Targums, 277.
literature of Babylon and Nineveh, 278.
the modern Mendaïtes or Nasoreans, 279.
Changes, historical, affecting every variety of language. 44.
rapid changes in the languages of savage tribes, 44.
[pg 402]
words or senses obsolete in English since 1611, 45.
smaller changes, 45.
grammatical changes, 46.
laws of, in language, 73.
Children, probable influence of the language of, on the gradual disappearance of irregular conjugations and declensions, 75.
Chili, language of, 293 note.
China, date of the introduction of Buddhism into, 147.
Chinese Buddhist pilgrims to India, 149.
conquered by the Mongols, 299.
Chinese language, ancient, no trace of grammar in, 86, 117.
notes by M. Stanislas Julien, on Chinese substantives and adjectives, 118 note.
formation of the locative in Chinese, 218.
and of the instrumental, 218.
number of roots in Chinese, 265.
number of words in the Chinese dictionary, obsolete, rare, and in use, 265 note.
no analysis required to discover its component parts, 272.
mode of using a predicative root in, 268.
roots in Chinese, 287.
the parts of speech determined in Chinese by the position of the word in a sentence, 288.
rudimentary traces of agglutination in Chinese, 329.
imitative sounds in, 366 note.
list of Chinese interjections, 369 note.
natural selection of roots in, 386.
Chingis-Khán, founds the Mongolian empire, 296.
Christianity, humanizing influence of, 128.
Chudic branch of the Finnic languages, 317.
Chudic, the national epic of the Finns, 317.
Cicero, his provincial Latin, 67.
quoted as an authority on grammatical questions, 109.
Cæsar's The analogy dedicated to Cicero, 110.
Class dialects, 66.
Classical, or literary languages, origin of, 65.
stagnation and inevitable decay of, 68.
Classification, in the physical sciences, 24.
object of classification, 27.
Colchis, dialects of, according to Pliny, 61.
Conjugation, most of the terminations of, demonstrative roots, 270.
Constantinople, taking of, 308.
Copernicus, causes which led to the discovery of his system, 29.
Cornish, last person who spoke, 80.
Cosmopolitan Club, 107.
Crates of Pergamus, his visit to Rome, 109.
his public lectures, there on grammar, 109.
Cuckoo, the word, 361.
Cuneiform inscriptions, the, deciphered by Burnouf, 168.
importance of the discovery of the inscriptions of Darius and Xerxes, 206.
progress in deciphering, 278.
letter from Sir H. Rawlinson quoted, 278.
D, origin of the letter, in forming English preterites, 231.
Dacian language, the ancient, 126 note, 195 note.
Lady, origin of the word, 226.
Danish language, growth of the, 71, 191.
Darius, claimed for himself an Aryan descent, 241.
Dative, case in Greek, 221.
in Chinese, 118 note.
Daughter, origin of the word, 57.
Decay, phonetic, one of the processes which comprise the growth of language, 51.
instances of phonetic decay, 52-54.
Declension, most of the terminations of, demonstrative roots, 270.
Dello, dell, origins of the Italian, 75.
Democritus, his travels, 94.
Dialect, what is meant by, 58.
Dialects, Italian, 58, 69.
[pg 403]
French, 59.
Modern Greek, 58.
Friesian, 59.
English, 60.
the feeders rather than the channels of a literary language, 60, 70.
Grimm on the origin of dialects in general, 60.
difficulty in tracing the history of dialects, 61.
American dialects, 63.
Burmese, 63.
of the Ostiakes, 63.
Mongolian, 64.
Southern Africa, 64.
class dialects, 66.
unbounded resources of dialects, 71.
dialectical growth beyond the control of individuals, 74.
Dictionary, Comparative, of Catherine the Great of Russia, 143.
Did, origin of, as a preterite, 233.
Diez, Professor, his "Comparative Grammar of the Six Romance Dialects," 196.
Dionysius Thrax, the author of the first practical Greek grammar, 100.
Dionysius of Halicarnassus, on the Pelasgi, 125 note.
Talk, etymology of, 52.
Dorpat dialect of Esthonian, 318.
Du, origin of the French, 74.
Dual, the, first recognized by Zenodotus, 99.
Dumaresq, Rev. Daniel, his “Comparative Vocabulary of Eastern Languages,” 143.
Duret, Claude, his work on language, 132 note.
Dutch language, work of Goropius written to prove that it was the language spoken in Paradise, 135.
age of Dutch, 178.
Earl, origin of the title, 226.
Earth, guess of Philolaus as to its motion round the sun, 29.
Eddas, the two, 191.
the name Edda, 194 note.
Egypt, number of words in the ancient vocabulary of, 266.
Egyptian language, family to which it is referable, 282.
Elder, origin of the word, 226.
Elements, constituent, of language, 250.
English language, changes in the, since the translation of the Bible in 1611, 46.
richness of the vocabulary of the dialects of, 60.
real sources of the English language, 69.
Prince L. Bonaparte's collection of English dialects, 70.
the English language Teutonic, 80.
full of words derived from the most distant sources, 84.
proportion of Saxon to Norman words, 84.
tests proving the Teutonic origin of the English language, 85.
genitives in English, 117.
nominatives and accusatives, 119.
origin of grammatical forms in the English language, 120.
number of words in the English language, 266 note.
number of words in Milton, Shakspeare, and the Old Testament, 267.
Ennius, 105.
his translations from Greek into Latin, 105.
Eos, original meaning of the name, 21.
Ephraem Syrus, 276 note.
Epicharmus, his philosophy translated into Latin by Ennius, 105.
Epicurus, doctrines of, embraced, in Rome, 107.
Erin, Pictet's derivation of the name, 245.
Mr. Whitley Stokes's remarks on the word Erin, 245 note.
Playful, origin of the word, 260.
Esths, or Esthonians, their language, 318.
dialects of, 318.
Estienne, Henry, his grammatical labors anticipated by the Brahmans, 500 b.c. 88.
his work on language, 131 note.
[pg 404]
Ethiopic, or Abyssinian, origin of the, 281.
Eudemos, on the Aryan race, 241.
Euhemerus, of Messene, his neologian work translated into Latin, by Ennius, 105.
Eulalia, Song of, age of the, 196.
Euripides, first translated into Latin, by Ennius, 105.
Ewald, on the relation of the Turanian to the Aryan languages, 338.
Ezour-Veda, the, 156 note.
Ezra, Chaldee fragments in the Book of, 276.
Fabius Pictor, his history of Rome in Greek, 104.
Fa-hian, the Chinese pilgrim to India, his travels, 149.
Families of languages, tests for reducing the principal dialects of Europe and Asia to certain, 172.
Fate, original meaning of the name, 21.
Weak, origin of the word, 123.
Feizi and the Brahman, story of, 152.
Fire, origin of the French word, 123.
Finnic class of languages, 315.
branches of Finnic, 316.
the "Kalewala," the "Iliad" of the Finns, 318.
tribes, original seat of the, 315.
their language and literature, 317.
national feeling lately arisen, 317.
Finnish, peculiarity of its grammar, 119.
Firdusi, language in which he wrote his "Shahnameh," 210.
Fire-worshippers. See Parsis.
Firoz Shah, translations from Sanskrit into Persian, made by order of, 150.
Flaminius, his knowledge of Greek, 103.
Flemish language and literature, 178.
French dialects, number of, 58.
laws of change in the French language, 73.
nominatives and accusatives, 119.
French, origin of grammatical terminations in French, 229.
origin of the French future in rai, 229.
Friesian, multitude of the dialects of, 59.
language and literature, 178.
Cheese, origin of the French word, 123.
Future, the, in French, 229.
in Latin, 230.
in Greek, 230.
in Chinese, 388.
in other languages, 231.
Galatia, foundation and language of, 199.
Galla language of Africa, family to which it belongs, 282.
Ganas, the, or lists of remarkable words in Sanskrit, 116.
Garo, formation of adjectives in, 113 note.
Gâthâs, or songs of Zoroaster, 209.
Gebelin, Court de, his "Primitive World," 140.
compared with Hervas, 140.
Gees language, 281.
Genitive case, the term used in India, 111.
terminations of the genitive in most cases, identical with the derivative suffixes by which substantives are changed into adjectives, 112.
mode of forming the genitive in Chinese, 118 note.
formation of genitives in Latin, 220.
Geometry, origin of the word, 15.
German language, history of the, 179.
Gipsies, language of the, 211.
Glass, painted, before and since the Reformation, 20.
Gordon, Captain, on the dialects of Burmese, 63.
Goropius, his work written to prove that Dutch was the language spoken in Paradise, 135.
Gospel, origin of the word, 122.
Gothic, a modern language, 122.
similarity between Gothic and Latin, 127.
[pg 405]
class of languages to which Gothic belongs, 189.
number of roots in it, 265 note.
Goths, the, and Bishop Ulfilas, 187.
Grammar, the criterion of relationship in almost all languages, 85.
English grammar unmistakably of Teutonic origin, 85.
no trace of grammar in ancient Chinese, 86.
early achievements of the Brahmans in grammar, 88.
and the Greeks, 89.
origin of grammar, 90.
causes of the earnestness with which Greek grammar was taken up at Rome, 108.
the Hindú science of grammar, 116.
origin and history of Sanskrit grammar, 116.
origin of grammatical forms, 120.
historical evidence, 121.
collateral evidence, 122.
genealogical classification, 124.
comparative value of grammar in the classification of languages, 170.
comparative grammar, 214.
Bopp's "Comparative Linguistics," 214.
origin of grammatical forms, 215.
mode of tracing back the grammatical framework of the Aryan languages to original independent words, 231-234.
result of Bopp's "Comparative Grammar," 234.
Aryan grammar, 234.
Turkish grammar, 308.
Turkic grammar, 309.
Grammatici, the, at Rome, 103.
Greek language, the, studied and cultivated by the barbarians, Berosus, Menander, and Manetho, 94, 95.
critical study of ancient Greek at Alexandria, 97.
the first practical Greek grammar, 100.
generally spoken at Rome, 101.
Greek, earnestness with which Greek grammar was taken up at Rome, 108, 110.
principles which governed the formation of adjectives and genitives, 113 note.
spread of the Greek grammar, 114.
genitives in Greek, 117.
the principle of classification, never applied to speech by the Greeks, 124.
Greeks and Barbarians, 125.
Plato's notion of the origin of the Greek language, 126.
similarity between Greek and Sanskrit, 142.
affinity between Sanskrit and Greek, 159.
formation of the dative in Greek, 221.
the future in Greek, 230.
number of forms each verb in Greek yields, if conjugated through all its voices, tenses &c., 272 note.
modern, number of the dialects of, 58.
Greeks, their speculations on languages, 89.
the Grammarians, 90.
reasons why the ancient Greeks never thought of learning a foreign language, 92.
first encouragement given by trade to interpreters, 93.
imaginary travels of Greek philosophers, 94 note.
the Greek use of the term Barbarian, 127.
Gregory of Nyssa, St., his defence of St. Basil, 40 note.
Grimm, on the origin of dialects in general, quoted, 60.
on the idiom of nomads, quoted, 71.
his "German Grammar," 167.
Growth of language, 47, 66.
examination of the idea that man can change or improve language, 48.
causes of the growth of language, 50.
Guichard, Estienne, his work on language, 132 note.
Guebres. See Parsis.
[pg 406]
Halhead, his remarks on the affinity between Greek and Sanskrit, quoted, 159.
his “Gentoo Law Code,” 159 note.
Hamilton, Sir W., on the origin of the general and particular in language, 377 note.
Harald Ilaarfagr, King of Norway, his despotic rule and its consequences, 192.
Haru-spex, origin of the name, 259.
Harun-al-Rashid, translations made from Sanskrit works at his court, 149.
Haug, his labors in Zend, 209.
Haussa language of Africa, family to which it belongs, 282.
Hebrew, idea of the fathers of the church that it was the primitive language of mankind, 132.
amount of learning and ingenuity wasted on this question, 133.
Leibniz, the first who really conquered this prejudice, 135.
number of roots in, 265.
ancient form of the, 280.
Aramean modifications of, 280.
swept away by Arabic, 281.
Hekate, an old name of the moon, 22.
"Heljand," the, of the Low Germans, 178.
Hellenic branch of the Indo-European family of languages, 198.
Herat, origin of the name, 247.
Hermippus, his translation of the works of Zoroaster into Greek, 96.
Herodotus, his travels, 94.
on the Pelasgi, 125 note.
Hervas, his reduction of the multitude of American dialects to eleven families, 63.
his list of works published during the 16th century, on the science of language, 131 note.
account of him and of his labors, 139.
compared with Gebelin, 140.
his discovery of the Malay and Polynesian family of speech, 141.
Hickes, on the proportion of Saxon to Norman words in the English language, 84.
Himyaritic, inscriptions in, 281.
Hindústání, real origin of, 70.
the genitive and adjective in, 113 note.
Urdu-zeban, the proper name of Hindústání, 316.
Hiouen-thsang, the Chinese pilgrim, his travels into India, 149.
Hiram, fleet of, 202.
History and language, connection between, 76.
Hliod, or quida, of Norway, 193.
Saemund's collection of, 193.
Hoei-seng, the Chinese pilgrim to India, his travels, 149.
Homer, critical study of, at Alexandria, 97.
influence of the critical study of, on the development of grammatical terminology, 98.
Horace, on the changes Latin had undergone in his time, 67.
Hors, origin of the French word, 123.
Home, name for in Sanskrit, and other Aryan languages, 236, and note.
Humanity, the word not to be found in Plato or Aristotle, 128.
Humboldt, Alex. von, on the limits of exact knowledge, quoted, 29.
Humboldt, William von, his patronage of Comparative Philology, 167.
Hungarians, ancestors of the, 320.
language of the, 320, 321.
its affinity to the Ugro-Finnic dialects, 321.
Huron Indians, rapid changes in the dialects of the, 62.
Hyades, origin of the word, 17.
Ibn-Wahshiyyah, the Chaldean, his Arabic translation of "Nabatean Agriculture," 279.
account of him and his works, 279 note.
Iceland, foundation of an aristocratic republic in, 192.
intellectual and literary activity of the people of, 192.
[pg 407]
later history of, 193.
Icelandic language, 190.
Iconium, Turkish, sultans of, 307.
Illumination of Manuscripts, lost art of, 20.
Illyrians, Greek and Roman writers on the race and language of the, 126 note.
Illyrian language, the ancient, 196 note.
Illyrian languages, 200.
India, the Mulla Abdu-l-Kádir Maluk's general history of, 151 note.
origin of the name of India, 228.
Indian Philosophers, difficulty of admitting the influence of, on Greek philosophers, 94 note.
Indies, East and West, historical meaning of the names, 227.
Indo-European family of languages. See Aryan.
Inflectional stage of language, 324.
Instrumental, formation of the, in Chinese, 119 note, 218.
Interjectional theory of roots, 367.
Interpreters, first encouragement given to, by trade, 93.
Irán, modern name of Persia, origin of the, 242.
Iranic class of languages, 205.
Iron, name for, in Sanskrit and Gothic, 236.
Iron, the Os of the Caucasus calling themselves, 243.
Italian dialects, number of, 58, 197.
natural growth of, 67.
real sources of, 69.
Italians, the, indebted to the Greeks for the very rudiments of civilization, 101.
Italic class of languages, 196.
Italy, dialects spoken in, before the rise of Rome, 197.
Its, as a possessive pronoun, introduction of, 46.
Jerome, St., his opinion that Hebrew was the primitive language of mankind, 132.
Jews, literary idiom of the, in the century preceding and following the Christian era, 277.
and from the fourth to the tenth centuries, 277.
their adoption of Arabic, 277.
their return to a kind of modernized Hebrew, 277.
Jones, Sir William, his remarks on the affinity between Sanskrit and Greek, 159.
Julien, M. Stanislas, his notes on the Chinese language, 118 note.
Justinian, the Emperor, sends an embassy to the Turks, 302.
“Kalewala,” the, the “Iliad” of the Finns, 318.
Kalmüks, the, 296, 300.
Kapchakian empire, the, 297.
Kara-Kalpak tribes near Aral-Lake, 304.
Karelian dialect of Finnic, 318.
Karians, Greek authors on the, 125 note.
Kempe, André, his notion of the languages spoken in Paradise, 135 note.
Kepler, quoted, 129 note.
Khi-nie, the Chinese pilgrim, his travels into India, 149.
Kirgis tribe, the, 305.
Kirgis Hordes, the three, 305.
Kirgis-Kasak, tribe of the, 305.
Kumüks, tribe of the, in the Caucasus, 303.
Kuthami, the Nabatean, his work on “Nabataean Agriculture,” 280.
period in which he lived, 280 note.
Laban, language of, 278.
Language, science of, one of the physical sciences, 11, 31.
modern date of the science of, 13.
names of the science of, 14.
meaning of the science of, 14.
little it offers to the utilitarian spirit of our age, 20.
modern importance of the science of, in political and social questions, 22.
the barrier between man and beast, 23.
[pg 408]
importance of the science of, 33.
realm of, 35.
the growth of, in contradistinction to the history of, 38.
Dr. Whewell on the classification of, 38 note.
examination of objections against the science of, as a physical science, 39.
considered as an invention of man, 39.
the science of, considered as a historical science, 42.
historical changes of, 44.
almost stationary amongst highly civilized nations, 45.
growth of, 47.
the idea that man can change or improve language examined, 48.
causes of the growth of, 50.
processes of the growth of:—
1. phonetic decay, 51.
2. dialectical regeneration, 58.
laws of change in, 73.
futile attempts of single grammarians and purists to improve, 75.
connection between language and history, 77.
independent of historical events, 79.
no possibility of a mixed, 82.
the Empirical Stage in the historical progress of the science of, 87.
speculations of the Brahmans and Greeks, 87.
the classificatory stage of, 115.
empirical or formal grammar, 117.
genealogical classification of, 124.
Hervas's catalogue of works published during the 16th century on the science of language, 131 note.
Leibniz, 135 et seq.
Hervas, 139.
Adelung, 142.
Catherine the Great, 143.
importance of the discovery of Sanskrit, 146, 170.
value of comparative grammar, 170.
glance at the modern history of language, 173.
distinction between the radical and formal elements of, 215.
constituent elements of, 250.
morphological classification, 275, 286.
the inflectional stage of, 324.
consideration of the problem of a common origin of languages, 326 et seq.
former theories, 345.
proper method of inquiry, 347.
man and brutes, faculties of, 350.
the difference between man and brute, 354.
the inward power of which language is the outward sign and manifestation, 355.
universal ideas, 356.
general ideas and roots, 356.
the primum cognitum and primum appellatum, 370.
knowing and naming, 378.
language and reason, 383.
sound and thought, 384.
natural selection of roots, 386.
nothing arbitrary in language, 389.
origin and confusion of tongues, 391.
the radical stage of language, 285, 286.
the terminational stage, 285, 288.
the inflectional stage, 285.
Languages, number of known, 35.
teaching of foreign languages comparatively a modern invention, 91.
reason why the ancient Greeks never learned foreign languages, 91.
"The Languages Mountain," 93.
genealogical classification of, 166.
tests for reducing the principal dialects in Europe and Asia to certain families of languages, 174.
genealogical classification not applicable to all languages, 174.
radical relationship, 176.
comparative grammar, 214.
[pg 409]
Languages, formal and radical elements of, 216.
all formal elements of language originally substantial, 228.
degrees of relationship of, 284.
all languages reducible in the end to roots, 286.
Langue d'Oil, ancient song in the, 198.
Laps, or Laplanders, 319.
their habitat, 319.
their language, 319.
Latin, what is meant by, 67.
changes in, according to Polybius, 67.
the old Salian poems, 67.
provincialisms of Cicero, 67.
stagnation of Latin when it became the language of civilization, 68.
Latin genitives, 117.
similarity between Gothic and Latin, 127.
genealogical relation of Latin to Greek, 172.
the future in Latin, 230.
Leibniz, the first to conquer the prejudice that Hebrew was the primitive language of mankind, 135.
and the first to apply the principle of inductive reasoning to the subject of language, 135.
his letter to Peter the Great, quoted, 136.
his labors in the science of language, 137.
his various studies, 138.
on the formation of thought and language, quoted, 373.
Lesbos, dialects of the island of, 59.
Lettic language, the, 199.
Lewis, Sir Cornewall, his criticisms on the theory of Raynouard, 171.
Linnæus, his system, although imperfect, important to science, 26.
Literary languages, origin of, 65.
inevitable decay of, 68.
Lithuanian language, the, 199.
the oldest document in, 199.
Livius Andronicus, 104.
his translation of the Odyssey into Latin verse, 104.
Livonians, dialect of the, 318.
Locative, formation of the, in all the Aryan languages, 219.
in Chinese, 119 note, 218.
in Latin, 220.
Locke, John, on language as the barrier between man and brutes, quoted, 24.
on universal ideas, quoted, 356.
his opinion on the origin of language, 40.
Lord, origin of the word, 122.
Lord's Prayer, number of languages in which it was published by various authors in the 16th century, 131 note.
Lucilius, his book on the reform of Latin orthography, 109.
Lucina, a name of the moon, 21.
Luna, origin of the name, 21.
Lusatia, language of, 200.
Lycurgus, his travels mythical, 94.
Macedonians, ancient authors on the, 125 note.
Ma'am, origin of word, 226.
Mago, the Carthaginian, his book on agriculture in Punic, 94 note.
Person, ancient words for, 381.
Man and brutes, faculties of, 349.
difference between man and brutes, 354.
Mandshu tribes, speaking a Tungusic language, 296.
grammar of, 323.
imitative sounds in, 366 note.
Manetho, his study and cultivation of the Greek language, 95.
his work on Egypt, 95.
his knowledge of hieroglyphics, 95.
Manka, the Indian, his translations from Sanskrit into Persian, 149.
Masora, idiom in which it was written, 277.
Maulána Izzu-d-din Khalid Khani, his translations from Sanskrit into Persian, 150.
Même, origin of the French word, 57.
Menander, his study and cultivation of the Greek language, 95.
his work on Phenicia, 95.
Mendaïtes, or Nasoreans, the "Adam's Book" of the, 279.
[pg 410]
Ment, origin of the termination in French adverbs, 55.
Mescheräks, tribe of the, their present settlements, 304.
Milton, John, number of words used by, in his works, 267.
Ming-ti, the Emperor of China, allows the introduction of Buddhism into his empire, 147.
sends officials to India to study the doctrines of Buddha, 148.
Missionaries, their importance in elucidating the problem of the dialectical life of language, 62.
Moallakat, or “suspended poems,” of the Arabs, 281.
Moffat, Rev. Robert, on the dialects of Southern Africa, 64.
Monboddo, Lord, on language as the barrier between man and brutes, quoted, 24.
his "Old Metaphysics" quoted, 160 and note.
Mongolian dialects, entering a new phase of grammatical life, 64.
Mongolian class of languages, 296.
grammar of, 323.
Mongols, their original seat, 296.
three classes of them, 296.
their conquests, 297.
dissolution of the empire, 299.
their present state, 300.
their language, 300.
Moon, antiquity of the word, 16.
Moravia, devastated by the Mongols, 299.
Human, origin of the word, 382.
Much and Very, distinction between, 48.
Muhammed ben Musa, his translation of the Indian treatise on algebra into Arabic, 149.
Mythology, real nature of, 21, 237.
Nabateans, the, supposed to have been descendants of the Babylonians and Chaldeans, 279.
the work of Kuthami on “Nabataean Agriculture,” 280.
National languages, origin of, 64.
Nature, immutability of, in all her works, 42.
Dr. Whewell quoted, 42.
Nebuchadnezzar, his name stamped on all the bricks made during his reign, 283.
Neo-Latin dialects, 196.
Νεμέτζιοι, the, of Constantinus Porphyrogeneta, 91 note.
Nestorians of Syria, forms and present condition of their language, 276, note.
Nicopolis, battle of, 307.
No and no, as used by Chaucer, 225.
Nobili, Roberto de, 155.
his study of Sanskrit, 155.
Nogái tribes, history of the, 303.
Nomad languages, 290.
indispensable requirements of a nomad language, 292.
wealth of, 71.
nomadic tribes and their wars, 315.
their languages, 316.
Nominalism and Realism, controversy between, in the Middle Ages, 22.
Norman words in the English language, proportion of, to Saxon words, 84.
Norway, poetry of, 192.
the or quida,193.
the two Eddas, 191-194.
Norwegian language, stagnation of the, 70.
Number of known languages, 35.
Obsolete words and senses since the translation of the Bible in 1611, 45.
Onomatopoieia, theory of, 358.
Ophir of the Bible, 203.
Origen, his opinion that Hebrew was the primitive language of mankind, 132.
Origin of language, consideration of the problem of the common, 326 et seq.
Ormuzd, the god of the Zoroastrians, mentioned by Plato, 207.
discovery of the name Auramazda in the cuneiform inscriptions, 207.
origin of the name Auramazda or Ormuzd, 207.
Os, the, of Ossethi, calling themselves Iron, 243.
[pg 411]
Oscan language and literature, the 196.
Osmanli language, the, 301, 306.
Ostiakes, dialects of the, 63.
Owl-glass, stories of, 260.
Pâli, once the popular dialect of Behar, 146.
Panætius, the Stoic philosopher at Rome, 107.
Pânini, Sanskrit grammar of, 116.
Pantomime, the, and the King, story of, 368.
Paolino de San Bartolomeo, Fra, first Sanskrit grammar published by, 142, 158.
Paradise, languages supposed by various authors to have been spoken in, 135, 136.
Parsi, period when it was spoken in Persia, 210.
Parsis, or fire-worshippers, the ancient, 205.
their prosperous colony in Bombay, 205.
their various emigrations, 205 note.
their ancient language, 205, 210.
Pascatir race, the, 320.
Dad, origin of the Latin word, 57.
Pay to, origin of the word, 124,
Pedro, Padre, the missionary at Calicut, 154.
Pehlevi, or Huzvaresh language, 210.
Pelasgi, Herodotus on the, 125 note.
Dionysius of Halicarnassus on the, 125 note.
Drumming, etymology of, 53.
Perion, his work on language, 131 note.
Permian tribes and language, 320.
Permic branch of the Finnic class of languages, 319.
the name of Perm, 319.
the Permic tribes, 320.
Persia, origin of the Turkman, or Kisilbash of, 302.
Persian language, 83.
influence of the, over the Turkish language, 83.
the ancient Persian language. See Zend, Zend-avesta.
Persian, subsequent history of Persian, 210.
Peshito, meaning of the word, 276 note.
Philolaus, the Pythagorean, his guess on the motion of the earth round the sun, 29.
Philology, comparative, science of, 31.
a historical science, 32.
aim of the science, 81.
Phœnician, closely allied to Hebrew, 280.
Plato, his notion of the origin of the Greek language, 126.
on Zoroaster, quoted, 206 note.
Plautus, Greek words in the plays of, 104.
all his plays mere adaptations of Greek originals, 104.
Pleiades, the, origin of the word, 17.
Poland invaded by the Mongols, 299.
Polish, oldest specimens of, 200.
Polybius, on the changes Latin had undergone in his time, 67.
Pons, Father, his report of the literary treasures of the Brahmans, 157.
Pott, Professor, his “Etymology Research,” 167.
his advocacy of the polygenetic theory, 342 note.
Prâkrit idioms, the, 146.
Prâtiśâkhyas, the, of the Brahmans, 116.
Cleric, origin of the word, 122.
Priscianus, influence of his grammatical work on later ages, 114.
Protagoras, his attempt to change and improve the language of Homer, 48.
Provençal, the daughter of Latin, 171.
not the mother of French, Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese, 171.
the earliest Provençal poem, 196.
Prussian, the old, language and literature of, 200.
Ptolemy, his system of astronomy, although wrong, important to science, 26.
Ptolemy Philadelphus and the Septuagint, 96 note.
[pg 412]
Ptōsis, meaning of the word in the language of the Stoics, 111.
Publius Crassus, his knowledge of the Greek dialects, 106.
Pushtú, the language of Afghanistan, 210.
Pythagoras, his travels mythical, 94.
Pyrrha, original meaning of the name, 22.
Quatremère on the Ophir of the Bible, 204 note.
Quinsy, origin of the word, 380 note.
Quintilian, on the changes Latin had undergone in his time, 67.
on the omission of the final s in Latin, 68 note.
Radical relationship of languages, 176.
Radicals. See Roots.
Rask, Erasmus, his studies of Zend, 167, 206.
Raven, the word, 362.
Raynouard, his labors in comparative grammar, 171.
criticisms of his theory of the Langue Romane, 171.
Realism and Nominalism, controversy between, in the Middle Ages, 22.
Regeneration, dialectical, one of the processes which comprise the growth of language, 58.
Respectable, origin of the word, 256.
Reval dialect of Esthonian, 318.
Rig-Veda, the, quoted, 88 note.
Romance languages, their Latin origin, 170.
modifications of, 195.
their origin in the ancient Italic languages, 196.
Romane, the Langue, 171.
Romanese language of the Grisons, 196.
translation of the Bible into, 196 note.
lower, or Enghadine, 196 note.
Romans, their use of the term Barbarian, 127.
Rome, Greek generally spoken at, 101
influence of Greece on Rome 102.
changes in the intellectual atmosphere of, caused by Greek civilization, 106.
the religious life of Rome more Greek than Roman, 107.
expulsion of the Greek grammarians and philosophers from Rome, 108.
compromise between religion and philosophy, 108.
wide interest excited by grammatical studies in Roman society, 109.
Roots or radicals, 252.
classes of roots, primary, secondary, and tertiary, 262-264.
demonstrative and predicative roots, 267.
how many forms of speech may be produced by the free combination of these constituent elements, 275.
all languages reducible in the end to roots, 286.
the radical stage of language, 287.
general ideas and roots, 356.
origin of roots, 357.
the bow-wow theory, 358.
the pooh-pooh theory, 366.
natural selection of roots, 386.
Russia devastated by the Mongols, 299.
Sabius, a word not found in classical Latin, 103 note.
Sænund, Sigfusson, his collection of songs in Iceland, 193.
Sagard Gabriel, on the languages of the Hurons, quoted, 62.
Salian poems, the, and later Latin, 67.
Sálotar, translation of his work on veterinary medicine from Sanskrit into Persian, 150.
Sanskrit, formation of adjectives in, 113 note.
grammar, 116.
similarity between Greek and, 142.
importance of the discovery of, 146.
[pg 413]
history of the language, 146.
doubts as to its age and authenticity examined, 147.
accounts given by writers of various nations who became acquainted with the language and literature of India, 148.
the Muhammedans in India, and their translations of Sanskrit works into Arabic and Persian, 149.
European Missionaries, 155.
studies and work of Frederick Schlegel, 164.
importance of the discovery of, in the classification of languages, 172.
its genealogical relation to Greek and Latin, 172.
antiquity of, 202.
Iranic languages, relation to, 205.
formation of the locative in, 219.
number of roots in, 265.
Sassanian dynasty, Persian language of the, 210.
Saxon language, proportion of Saxon to Norman words in the English language, 84.
Savage tribes, rapid changes which take place in the languages of, 44, 62.
Scaliger, I. I., his "Critique of European Languages," 132 note.
Scandinavian branch of the Teutonic class of languages, 190.
the East and West Scandinavian races, 191.
Schlegel, Frederick, his Sanskrit studies, 164.
his work "On the Language and Wisdom of the Indians," 164.
how his work was taken up in Germany, 166.
his view of the origin of language, 216.
August W. von, his "Indian Library," 167.
his criticism of the theory of Raynouard, 171.
Sciences, uniformity in the history of most, 14.
the empirical stage, 15.
Sciences, the necessity that science should answer some practical purpose, 19.
the classificatory stage, 25.
the theoretical or metaphysical stage, 28.
impulses received by the physical sciences from the philosopher and poet, 29.
difference between physical and historical science, 32.
Scipios, influence of the "Cosmopolitan Club" at the house of the, 107.
Scythian words mentioned by Greek writers, 243.
Semitic family of languages, 43.
study of, 131.
constituent elements of the, 272.
divisions of the Semitic family of speech, 275.
Aramaic class, 276.
Hebraic class, 280.
Arabic class, 281.
intimate relations of the three classes to each other, 281.
Berber dialects, 282.
the Semitic and Aryan, the only families of speech deserving that title, 282.
genealogical table, 396.
Senior, the title, 226.
Septuagint, the, and Ptolemy Philadelphus, 96 note.
Snake, origin of the word, 380.
Shakespeare, William, total number of words used by, in his plays, 267.
Siberia, Tungusic tribes of, 296.
Turkic tribes settled there, in, 304.
dialects, 304.
Sibulla, meaning of the word, 103 note.
Sibylla of Cumæ, oracles of the, written in Greek, 103.
Sigfusson. See Sænund.
Sigismund, the Emperor, and the Bohemian schoolmaster, anecdote of, 47.
Silesia invaded by the Mongols, 299.
Sir, origin of the word, 226, 227.
Siriane tribes, their habitat, 320.
their language, 319.
Sister, origin of, 57.
[pg 414]
"Skalda," the, of Snorri Sturluson, 193.
Slavonic tribes, their settlement in Moesia, 196 note.
languages, properly so called, 200.
Slovinian language, the, 200.
Smith, Adam, his opinion on the origin of language, 40.
on the formation of thought and language, quoted, 371.
Sydney, on the superiority of mankind over brutes, quoted, 348.
Snorri Sturluson, his prose Edda, 193.
his “Heimskringla,” 193.
his “Skalda,” 193.
Solomon's fleet of Tharshish, 202.
Song-yun, the Chinese pilgrim to India, his travels, 149.
Sound, small number of names formed by the imitation of, 365.
Spec, offshoots of the root, 257.
Species, origin of the Latin, 260.
Squirrel, origin of the name, 365.
Stewart, Dugald, his opinion on the origin of language, 41.
his doubts as to the age and authenticity of Sanskrit, 147.
his view of the affinity of Greek and Sanskrit, 164.
on the origin of language, quoted, 343.
Stoics, philosophy of the, in Rome, 107.
Strabo on the Barbarians, 125 note.
Sturluson. See Snorri.
Sugar, origin of the word, 364.
Swedish language, growth of the, 71, 191.
Syria, origin of the Turks of, 306.
Syriac language, date of the translation of the Bible into the, 276.
meaning of Peshito, 276 note.
decline and present position of the language, 276.
Talmud of Jerusalem, and that of Babylon, literary idiom of the Jews in the, 277.
Targums, language in which they were written, 277.
Targums, most celebrated of them, 277 note.
"History of India," the, of Al Birúni, 150.
Tatar tribes, 297.
terror caused by the name, 297.
the Golden Horde, 298.
Tataric language, 297.
sometimes used in the same sense as Turanian, 297.
Tavastian dialect of Finnic, 318.
Terminations, grammatical, Horne Tooke's remarks on, quoted, 251.
Terminology, grammatical of the Greeks and Hindus, coincidences between the, 115.
Testament, the New, translated into Persian, 151.
Old, number of words in the, 267.
Teutonic class of languages, 177.
the English language, a branch of, 80.
Tharshish, Solomon's fleet of, 202.
Themistocles, his acquaintance with the Persian language, 93.
Thommerel, M., on the proportion Saxon words bear to Norman in the English language, 84.
Thracians, ancient authors on the, 126 note.
Thunder, origin of the word, 364.
Tiberius Gracchus, his knowledge of Greek, 103.
Tiberius the Emperor, and the grammarians, anecdote of, 47.
Tibetan language, how adjectives are formed in the, 113 note.
Timur, Mongolian empire of, 299.
Tooke, Horne, on grammatical terminations, quoted, 251.
his answer to the interjectional theory of roots, 367.
Torgod Mongols, the, 300.
Trade first encouraged the profession of interpreters, 93.
Turanian family of languages, 43.
origin of term Turanian, 238.
Turanian races, 243.
Turanian names mentioned by Greek writers, 243.
component parts of Turanian speech, 272.
Tungusic idioms, new phase of grammatical life of the, 64.
[pg 415]
Tungusic class of languages, 296.
geographical limits of the, 296.
grammar of, 323.
Turanian family of languages, 288.
a terminational or agglutinative family of languages, 288, 291.
divisions of the Turanian family, 289.
the name Turanian, 289.
characteristic features of the Turanian languages, 290, 291.
account of the languages of the Turanian family, 296.
genealogical table, 397.
Turkic class of languages, 300.
grammar, 309.
profuse system of conjugation, 323.
Turkish language, influence of imported words over the whole native aspect of the, 83.
two classes of vowels in, 295.
ingenuity of Turkish grammar, 308.
its advance towards inflectional forms, 337.
Turkman, or Kisil-bash, origin of the, of Persia, 302.
Turks, history of the, 301.
origin of the Turks of Asia Minor and Syria, 306.
origin and progress of the Osmanlis, 306.
spread of the Osmanli dialect, 306.
Turner, Sharon, on the proportion of Norman to Saxon words in the English language, 84.
Turvasa, the Turanian, 243.
Twenty, origin of the word, 52.
Ugric branch of the Finnic class of languages, 320.
Ulfilas, Bishop, notice of him and of his Gothic translation of the Bible, 181.
Umbrian language and literature, 197.
Upanishads, the, translated from Sanskrit into Persian by Dárá, 154.
translated into French by Anquetil Duperron, 154.
Uralic languages, 315.
Uran'hat tribes, on the Chulym, 304.
Urdu-zeban, the proper name of Hindustání, 316.
Usbeks, history of the, 302.
Vâch, the goddess of speech, her verses quoted from the Rig-Veda, 88 note.
Varro, de Re Rust, on Mago's Carthaginian agricultural work, quoted, 95 note.
his work on the Latin language, 109.
appointed by Cæsar librarian to the Greek and Latin library in Rome, 110.
Vasco da Gama, takes a missionary to Calicut, 154.
Vedas, the, 116.
differences between the dialect of the Vedas and later Sanskrit, 116.
objections of the Brahmans to allow the Vedas to be translated, 152.
story of Feizi, 152.
Verbs, formation of the terminations of, in the Aryan dialects, 222.
modern formations, 222.
Very and much, distinction between, 48.
Vibhakti, in Sanskrit grammar, 116.
Voguls, the, 320.
Votiakes, idiom of the, 319.
habitat of the, 320.
Vyâkarana, Sanskrit name for grammar, 116.
Wallachian language, the, 195 note.
Wends, language of the, 201.
Whewell, Dr., on the science of language, 38 note.
Wilkins, Mr., on the affinity between Sanskrit and Greek, 160.
Windic, or Slavonic languages, 199.
divisions and subdivisions of, 199.
Witsen, Nicholas, the Dutch traveller, his collection of words, 136 note.
[pg 416]
Xavier, Francis, his organization of the preaching of the Gospel in India, 154.
his gift of tongues, 154.
Yakuts, tribe of the, 304.
dialect of the, 305.
Yeah and Yes, as used by Chaucer, 225.
Zend, Rask's studies of, 167.
Burnouf's, 168.
Zend-avesta, the, 167.
antiquity of, 205, 206.
the words Zend and Zend-Avesta, 205 note.
Anquetil's translation of, 206.
Rask and Burnouf's labors, 206.
Zend-avesta, authority of the Zend-avesta for the antiquity of the word Arya, 239.
Zenodotus, his restoration of the article before proper names in Homer, 99.
the first to recognize the dual, 99.
Zeus, original meaning of the word, 21.
Zoroaster, or Zarathustra, his writings (the Zend-avesta) translated into Greek, 96.
translated by Anquetil Duperron, 168.
his Gâthâs, or songs, 209.
age in which he lived, 209.
not the same as Jaradashti in the Veda, 209.
Zoroastrians. Check it out Parsis.
original seat of the, 248.

References

1.
See Jessen, Was heisst Botanik? 1861.
2.
Kuhn's Zeitschrift für Vergleichende Sprachforschung, b. ix. s. 104.
3.
Horne Tooke, p. 27, note.
4.
See Curtius, Griechische Etymologie, s. 297.
5.
Ideler, Handbuch der Chronologie, b. i. s. 241, 242.
6.
As early as the times of Anaximenes of the Ionic, and Alcmæon of the Pythagorean, schools, the stars had been divided into travelling (ἄστρα πλανώμενα or πλανητά), and non-travelling stars (ἀπλανεῖς ἀστέρες, or ἀπλανῆ ἄστρα). Aristotle first used ἄστρα ἐνδεδεμένα, or fixed stars. (See Humboldt, Cosmos, vol. iii. p. 28.) Πόλος, the pivot, hinge, or the pole of the heaven.
7.
Bunsen's Egypt, vol. iv. p. 108.
8.
According to a writer in "Questions and Answers" (2d Series, vol. x. p. 500,) astrology is not so entirely extinct as we suppose. "One of our main writers," he states, "One of our top barristers, along with several members of various antiquarian societies, are skilled astrologers at this time. However, no one wants to reveal their studies, as the prejudice is so strong that it mixes a highly educated practice with the nonsense of a gypsy fortune-teller."
9.
"Humans have two abilities, or two passive powers, that are generally recognized: 1, the ability to receive various impressions from external objects, which is physical sensitivity; and 2, the ability to retain the impressions made by these objects, known as memory, or diminished sensation. These abilities, which are the main sources of thought, we share with animals.... Everything can be traced back to feeling."Helvetius.
10.
"The reproductive organs, being the ones least connected to an animal's habits and diet, have always seemed to me to provide very clear signs of its true relationships."Owen, as cited by Darwin, Origin of Species, p. 414.
11.
Die Pflanze und ihr Leben, von M. T. Schleiden. Leipzig, 1858.
12.
Sir J. Stoddart, Glossology, p. 22.
13.
Dr. Whewell classes the science of language as one of the palaitiological sciences; but he makes a distinction between palaitiological sciences treating of material things, for instance, geology, and others respecting the products which result from man's imaginative and social endowments, for instance, comparative philology. He excludes the latter from the circle of the physical sciences, properly so called, but he adds: "We started our investigation with the belief that any solid insights we could gain about the nature of truth in the physical sciences, and how to discover it, would also shed light on the nature and future of knowledge in all other areas. This would be beneficial for our moral, political, and linguistic studies. We expressed this as a confident expectation, and the evidence supporting our belief is already beginning to show. We have observed that biology leads us to psychology if we choose to follow that path; thus, the transition from the physical to the non-physical has already revealed itself at one juncture. We now recognize that there are several significant fields of speculation related to aspects of human immaterial nature, which are governed by the same principles as purely physical sciences. It’s not our aim to focus on the possibilities our philosophy opens up for us; however, we can allow ourselves, at this final stage of our journey through the foundations of physical sciences, to be uplifted by the light that shines upon us, even if it is faint, from a higher and brighter realm."Signs of the Creator, p. 146.
14.
Gen. ii. 19.
15.
St. Basil was accused by Eunomius of denying Divine Providence, because he would not admit that God had created the names of all things, but ascribed the invention of language to the faculties which God had implanted in man. St. Gregory, bishop of Nyssa in Cappadocia (331-396), defended St. Basil. "Even though God has given human nature its abilities," he writes, "It doesn't mean that He is responsible for all the actions we take. He has given us the ability to build a house and do other tasks; however, we are the builders, not Him. Similarly, our ability to speak comes from Him who has designed our nature, but the creation of words to name each object is our own mental work." See Ladevi-Roche, De l'Origine du Langage: Bordeaux, 1860, p. 14. Also, Horne Tooke, Diversions of Purley, p. 19.
16.
D. Stewart, Works, vol. iii. p. 27.
17.
History of Inductive Sciences, vol. iii. p. 531.
18.
Names ending in ic, are names of classes as distinct from the names of single languages.
19.
Lectures on the English Language, by G. P. Marsh: New York, 1860, p. 263 and 630. These lectures embody the result of much careful research, and are full of valuable observations.
20.
Marsh, p. 532, note.
21.
Marsh, p. 589.
22.
Sir J. Stoddart, Glossology, p. 60.
23.
Trench, English Past and Present, p. 114; Marsh, p. 397.
24.
As several of my reviewers have found fault with the monk for using the genitive neutrals, instead of neutrius, I beg to refer to Priscianus, 1. vi. c. i. and c. vii. The expression generis neutrius, though frequently used by modern editors, has no authority, I believe, in ancient Latin.
25.
Castelvetro, in Horne Tooke, p. 629, note.
26.
Bopp, Comparative Grammar, § 320. Schleicher, Deutsche Sprache, s. 233.
27.
Foucaux, Grammaire Tibetaine, p. 27, and Preface, p. x.
28.
Fuchs, Romanische Sprachen, s. 355.
29.
Quint., v. 10, 52. Bonâ mente factum, ideo palam; malâ, ideo ex insidiis.
30.
Sanskrit s = Persian h; therefore svasar = hvahar. This becomes chohar, chor, and cho. Zend, qaņha, acc. qaņharem, Persian, kháher. Bopp, Comp. Gram. § 35.
31.
Schleicher, Beiträge, b. ii. s. 392: dci = dough; gen. dcere = daughter.
32.
Hui = today, Ital. today and oggidi; day = daily, from dies.
33.
See M. M.'s Letter to Chevalier Bunsen, On the Turanian Languages, p. 67.
34.
See Marsh, p. 678; Sir John Stoddart's Glossology, s. 31.
35.
Glossology, p. 33.
36.
Ibid., p. 29.
37.
Nea Pandora, 1859, Nos. 227, 229. Zeitschrift für Vergleichende Sprachforschung, x. s. 190.
38.
Grimm, Geschichte der Deutschen Sprache, p. 668: Marsh, p. 379.
39.
"Some people, who might have been taught that the Dorset dialect is just a corrupted form of written English, may not be ready to accept that it is not only a distinct descendant of the Anglo-Saxon language, but also purer and, in some instances, richer than the dialect chosen as the national language."—Barnes, Dorset Dialect Poems, Preface, p. xiv.
40.
Geschichte der Deutschen Sprache, s. 833.
41.
Pliny, vi. 5; Hervas, Catalogo, i. 118.
42.
Pliny depends on Timosthenes, whom Strabo declares untrustworthy (ii. p. 93, ed. Casaub.) Strabo himself says of Dioscurias, συνέρχεσθαι ἐς αὐτὴν ἐβδομήκοντα, οἱ δὲ καὶ τριακόσια ἔθνη φασίν οἴς οὐδὲν τῶν ὄντων υέλει (x. p. 498). The last words refer probably to Timosthenes.
43.
Du Ponceau, p. 110.
44.
S. F. Waldeck, Lettre à M. Jomard des environs de Palenqué, Amérique Centrale. ("He couldn't use a vocabulary carefully crafted ten years earlier in 1833.")
45.
Catalogo, i. 393.
46.
Turanian Languages, p. 114.
47.
Ibid., p. 233.
48.
Turanian Languages, p. 30.
49.
Quintilian, ix. 4. "Neither do they think that Lucilius uses the same final words when he says that it was Serenus and that it was worthy of mention. Furthermore, Cicero recounts in the Orator that several ancients spoke this way." In some phrases the final s was omitted in conversation; e.g. abin for abisne, knowledge for videsne, opu'st for opus est, conabere for conaberis.
50.
Marsh, Lectures, pp. 133, 368.
51.
“There are fewer local differences in style and expression across our vast territory (U.S.) than on the relatively small land of Great Britain.”Marsh, p. 667.
52.
Marsh, Lectures, pp. 181, 590.
53.
The Gothic forms sijum, sijuth, are not organic. They are either derived by false analogy from the third person plural sind, or a new base sij was derived from the subjunctive sijau, Sanskrit syâm.
54.
Some excellent statistics on the exact proportion of Saxon and Latin in various English writers, are to be found in Marsh's Lectures on the English Language, p. 120, seq. and 181, seq.
55.
“In this state, which is the first step nations take to change their language, the Araucanians were forty years ago in the islands of Chiloe (as I have heard from the Jesuits, their missionaries), where the Araucanians barely spoke a word that wasn’t Spanish; however, they spoke it with the style and structure of their native language, called Araucanian.”Hervas, Catalog, t. i. p. 16. "This device has been, in my observation, the main tool I've used to understand the similarities or differences among known languages and to categorize them into specific classes."Ibid., p. 23.
56.
Colebrooke, Miscellaneous Essays, i. 32. The following verses are pronounced by Vâch, the goddess of speech, in the 125th hymn of the 10th book of the Rig-Veda: "Even I say this about what is welcome to the gods and to people: ‘Whom I love, I empower, I make a Brahman, I make a great prophet, I make wise. For Rudra (the god of thunder), I draw the bow to defeat the enemy, the hater of the Brahmans. I make war for the people; I reach throughout heaven and earth. I carry the father at the peak of this world; my origin is in the water of the sea; from there I emerge among all beings, and I touch this heaven with my height. I breathe out like the wind, embracing all beings; above this heaven, beyond this earth, that is my greatness.’ See also Atharva-Veda, iv. 30; xix. 9, 3. Muir, Sanskrit Texts, part iii. pp. 108, 150.
57.
Sir John Stoddart, Glossology, p. 276.
58.
The Turks applied the Polish name Niemiec to the Austrians. As early as Constantinus Porphyrogeneta, cap. 30, Νεμέτζιοι was used for the German race of the Bavarians. (Pott, Indo-Germ. Sp. s. 44. Leo, Zeitschrift für Vergleichende Sprachforschung, b. ii. s. 258.) Russian, njemez'; Slovenian, nĕmec; Bulgarian, némec; Polish, niemiec; Lusatian, njemc, mean German. Russian, njemo, indistinct; njemyi, dumb; Slovenian, nĕm, dumb; Bulgarian, nêm, dumb; Polish, njemy, dumb; Lusatian, njemy, dumb.
59.
Leo, Zeitschrift für Vergl. Sprachf. b. ii. s. 252.
60.
Humboldt's Cosmos, vol. ii. p. 141.
61.
This shows how difficult it would be to admit that any influence was exercised by Indian on Greek philosophers. Pyrrhon, if we may believe Alexander Polyhistor, seems indeed to have accompanied Alexander on his expedition to India, and one feels tempted to connect the scepticism of Pyrrhon with the system of Buddhist philosophy then current in India. But the ignorance of the language on both sides must have been an insurmountable barrier between the Greek and the Indian thinkers. (Fragmenta Histor. Græc., ed. Müller, t. iii. p. 243, b.; Lasson, Indische Alterthumskande, b. iii. s. 380.)
62.
On the supposed travels of Greek philosophers to India, see Lassen, Indische Alterthumskunde, b. iii. s. 379; Brandis, Handbuch der Geschichte der Philosophie, b. i. s. 425. The opinion of D. Stewart and Niebuhr that the Indian philosophers borrowed from the Greeks, and that of Görres and others that the Greeks borrowed from the Brahmans, are examined in my Essay on Indian Logic, in Thomson's Laws of Thought.
63.
See Niebuhr, Vorlesungen über Alte Geschichte, b. i. s. 17.
64.
The translation of Mago's work on agriculture belongs to a later time. There is no proof that Mago, who wrote twenty-eight books on agriculture in the Punic language, lived, as Humboldt supposes (Cosmos, vol. ii. p. 184), 500 b.c. Varro de R. R. i. 1, says: "In the case of the noble Mago of Carthage, the Punic language has been preserved through his works, which are compiled in 29 books. Cassius Dionysius of Utica translated these into 20 books in Greek and sent them to the praetor Sextilius. In these volumes, he added many elements from the Greek books I mentioned and extracted the equivalent of 8 books from Mago's works. Diophanes from Bithynia effectively condensed them into 6 books and sent them to King Dejotarus." This Cassius Dionysius Uticencis lived about 40 b.c. The translation into Latin was made at the command of the Senate, shortly after the third Punic war.
65.
Ptolemæus Philadelphus (287-246 b. c.), on the recommendation of his chief librarian (Demetrius Philaretes), is said to have sent a Jew of the name of Aristeas, to Jerusalem, to ask the high priest for a MS. of the Bible, and for seventy interpreters. Others maintain that the Hellenistic Jews who lived at Alexandria, and who had almost forgotten their native language, had this translation made for their own benefit. Certain it is, that about the beginning of the third century b. c. (285), we find the Hebrew Bible translated into Greek.
66.
Plin. xxx. 2. "Without a doubt, she originated in Persia from Zoroaster, as agreed among authors. However, it's not clear if there was just one or if there were others later. Eudoxus, who wanted to portray this school of thought as the most prominent and useful of all, revealed that this Zoroaster lived six thousand years before Plato's death. So did Aristotle. Hermippus, who wrote extensively about the entire subject, stated that Zoroaster composed twenty hundred thousand verses and explained them with indices of his works. He also mentioned Azonaces as the teacher from whom he learned, asserting that Zoroaster lived five thousand years before the Trojan War.""Diogenes Laertius attributes the book τὸ Μαγικόν to Aristotle. Suidas is aware of the book but doubts who wrote it." See Bunsen's Egypten, Va, 101.
67.
M. M.'s History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 163.
68.
ἄρθρον προτασσόμενον, ἄρθρον ὑποτασσόμενον.
69.
Suidas, s. v. Διονύσιος. Διονύσιος Ἀλεξανδρεός, Θρᾷξ δὲ ἀπὸ πατρὸς τούνομα κληθεὶς, Ἀριστάρχου μαθητὴς, γραμματικὸς ὁς ἐσοφίστευσεν ἐν Ῥώμη ἐπὶ Πομπηιοῦ τοῦ Μεγάλου.
70.
Quintilian, i. 1, 12.
71.
See Mommsen, Römische Geschichte, b. i. s. 197. "The Latin alphabet is the same as the modern alphabet used in Sicily; the Etruscan is equivalent to the old Attic alphabet. Epistola, which means letter, charta, meaning paper, and stilus are words that come from Greek."Mommsen, b. i. s. 184.
72.
Mommsen, Römische Geschichte, b. i. s. 186. Statera, the balance, the Greek στατήρ; machine, an engine, μηχανή; numus, a silver coin, νόμος, the Sicilian νοῦμμος; groma, measuring-rod, the Greek γνώμων or γνῶμα: clathrin, a trellis, a grate, the Greek κλῆθρα, the native Italian word for lock being claustra.
73.
Govern, to steer, from κυβεονᾶν; anchor, anchor, from ἀγκῦρα; prora, the forepart, from πρῶρα. Navis, remus, veil, &c., are common Aryan words, not borrowed by the Romans from the Greeks, and show that the Italians were acquainted with navigation before the discovery of Italy by the Phocæans.
74.
Mommsen, i. 154.
75.
Ibid. i. 408.
76.
Mommsen, i. 165.
77.
Sibylla, or sibyl, is a diminutive of an Italian sabus or sabius, wise; a word which, though not found in classical writers, must have existed in the Italian dialects. The French wise presupposes an Italian sapiens, for it cannot be derived either from humans or from sapiens.—Diez, Etymological Lexicon, p. 300. Sapiens has been preserved in nesapius, foolish. Sibulla therefore meant a wise old woman.
78.
Mommsen, i. 256.
79.
Ibid. i. 425, 444.
80.
Ibid. i. 857.
81.
Mommsen, i. 902.
82.
Mommsen, i. 892.
83.
Ibid. i. 843, 194.
84.
Ibid. i. 911.
85.
Mommsen, ii. 407.
86.
Mommsen, ii. 410.
87.
Ibid. ii. 408.
88.
Ibid. ii. 437, note; ii. 430.
89.
Zeno died 263; Epicurus died 270; Arcesilaus died 241; Carneades died 129.
90.
Mommsen, ii. 417, 418.
91.
Ibid. i. 845.
92.
Ibid. ii. 415, 417.
93.
Mommsen, ii. 413, 426, 445, 457. Lucius Ælius Stilo wrote a work on etymology, and an index to Plautus.—, The Language Philosophy of the Ancients, ii. 111.
94.
Lersch, ii. 113, 114, 143.
95.
Lersch, iii. 144.
96.
Mommsen, iii. 557. 48 b.c.
97.
Lersch, ii. 25. Περὶ σημαινόντων, or περὶ φώνης; and περὶ σημαινομένον, or περὶ πραγμάτων.
98.
Beiträge zur Geschichte der Grammatik, von Dr. K. E. A. Schmidt. Halle, 1859. Uber den Begriff der γενικὴ πτῶσις, s. 320.
99.
In the Tibetan languages the rule is, "Adjectives are created from nouns by adding the genitive sign." which might be inverted into, "The genitive is created from the nominative by adding the adjective sign." For instance, shing, wood; shin gi, of wood, or wooden: ser, gold; ser-gyi, of gold, or golden: mi, man; mi-yi, of man, or human. The same in Garo, where the sign of the genitive is ni, we have; mánde-ní jak, the hand of man, or the human hand; ambal-ní ketháli, a wooden knife, or a knife of wood. In Hindustání the genitive is so clearly an adjective, that it actually takes the marks of gender according to the words to which it refers. But how is it in Sanskrit and Greek? In Sanskrit we may form adjectives by the addition of tya. (Turanian Languages, p. 41, seq.; Essay on Bengálí, p. 333.) For instance, dakshiņâ, south; dakshiņâ-tya, southern. This tya is clearly a demonstrative pronoun, the same as the Sanskrit says, syâ, tyad, this or that. Tya is a pronominal base, and therefore such adjectives as dakshiņâ-tya, southern, or âp-tya, aquatic, from âp, water, must have been conceived originally as “water here,” or “down south.” Followed by the terminations of the nominative singular, which was again an original pronoun, âptyas would mean âp-tya-s, i.e., water-there-he. Now, it makes little difference whether I say an aquatic bird or a bird of the water. In Sanskrit the genitive of water would be, if we take udaka, udaka-sya. This saying is the same pronominal base as the adjective termination tya, only that the former takes no sign for the gender, like the adjective. The genitive udakasya is therefore the same as an adjective without gender. Now let us look to Greek. We there form adjectives by σιος, which is the same as the Sanskrit tya or sya. For instance, from δῆμος, people, the Greeks formed δημόσιος, belonging to the people. Here ος, α, ον, mark the gender. Leave the gender out, and you get δημοσιο. Now, there is a rule in Greek that an ς between two vowels, in grammatical terminations, is elided. Thus the genitive of γένος is not γένεσος, but γένεος, or γένους; hence δημόσιο would necessarily become δήμοιο. And what is δήμοιο but the regular Homeric genitive of δῆμος, which in later Greek was replaced by δήμου? Thus we see that the same principles which governed the formation of adjectives and genitives in Tibetan, in Garo, and Hindustání, were at work in the primitive stages of Sanskrit and Greek; and we perceive how accurately the real power of the genitive was determined by the ancient Greek grammarians, who called it the general or predicative case, whereas the Romans spoiled the term by wrongly translating it into genitive.
100.
See M. M.'s History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 158.
101.

The following and some other notes were kindly sent to me by the first Chinese scholar in Europe, M. Stanislas Julien, Membre de l'Institut.

The following notes and some others were generously sent to me by the first Chinese scholar in Europe, M. Stanislas Julien, Member of the Institute.

The Chinese do not decline their substantives, but they indicate the cases distinctly—

The Chinese don't decline their nouns, but they clearly show the cases—

A. By means of particles.
B. By means of position.

A. Using particles. B. Using position.

1. The nominative or the subject of a sentence is always placed at the beginning.

1. The subject of a sentence is always placed at the beginning.

2. The genitive may be marked—

2. The genitive can be marked—

(a) By the particle tchi placed between the two nouns, of which the first is in the genitive, the second in the nominative. Example, jin tchi kiun (hominum princeps, literally, man, sign of the genitive, prince.)

(a) By the particle tchi placed between two nouns, where the first is in the genitive and the second is in the nominative. For example, jin tchi kiun (hominum princeps, literally, man, sign of the genitive, prince.)

(b) By position, placing the word which is in the genitive first, and the word which is in the nominative second. Ex. koue (kingdom) jin (man) i.e., a man of the kingdom.

(b) By arrangement, putting the word that’s in the genitive first, and the word that’s in the nominative second. For example, cool (kingdom) jin (man) i.e., a man of the kingdom.

3. The dative may be expressed—

3. The dative can be expressed—

(a) By the preposition yu, to. Ex. sse (to give) yen (money) yu (to) jin (man).

(a) Using the preposition you, meaning "to." For example: sse (to give) currency (money) you (to) jin (man).

(b) By position, placing first the verb, then the word which stands in the dative, lastly, the word which stands in the accusative. Ex. yu (to give) jin (to a man) pe (white) yu (jade), hoang (yellow) kin (metal), i.e., gold.

(b) In terms of structure, start with the verb, followed by the word in the dative case, and finally the word in the accusative case. For example: you (to give) jin (to a man) pe (white) you (jade), hoang (yellow) family (metal), i.e. gold.

4. The accusative is either left without any mark, for instance, pao (to protect) min (the people), or it is preceded by certain words which had originally a more tangible meaning, but gradually dwindled away into mere signs of the accusative. [These were first discovered and correctly explained by M. Stanislas Julien in his Vindiciæ Philologicæ in Linguam Sinicam, Paris, 1830.] The particles most frequently used for this purpose by modern writers are pa and tsiang, to grasp, to take. Ex. pa (taking) tchoung-jin (crowd of men) t'eou (secretly) k'an (he looked) i.e., he looked secretly at the crowd of men (hominum turbam furtim aspiciebat). In the more ancient Chinese (Kouwen) the words used for the same purpose are i (to employ, etc.), iu, iu, hou. Ex. i (employing) jin (mankind) t'sun (he preserves) sin (in the heart), i.e., humanitatem conservat corde. I (taking) tchi (right) wêï (to make) k'iŏ (crooked), i.e., rectum facere curvum. Pao (to protect) hou (sign of accus.) min (the people).

4. The accusative is either left unmarked, such as pao (to protect) min (the people), or it is preceded by certain words that originally had a more concrete meaning but gradually turned into mere indicators of the accusative. [These were first identified and accurately described by M. Stanislas Julien in his Vindiciæ Philologicæ in Linguam Sinicam, Paris, 1830.] The particles most commonly used for this by modern writers are pa and tsiang, meaning to grasp or to take. For example, pa (taking) tchoung-jin (crowd of men) t'eou (secretly) k'an (he looked), meaning he secretly looked at the crowd of men (hominum turbam furtim aspiciebat). In older Chinese (Kouwen), the words used for the same purpose are i (to employ, etc.), iu, iu, howdy. For instance, i (employing) jin (mankind) sun (he preserves) wrongdoing (in the heart), meaning humanitatem conservat corde. I (taking) tchi (right) wêï (to make) k'iŏ (crooked), meaning rectum facere curvum. Paw (to protect) howdy (sign of accus.) min (the people).

5. The ablative is expressed—

The ablative is shown—

(a) By means of prepositions, such as thsong, yeou, tsen, hou. Ex. thsong (ex) thien (cœlo) laï (venire); te (obtinere) hou (ab) thien (cœlo).

(a) Using prepositions like the song, you, tsen, hou. For example, the song (to heaven) laï (to come); te (to obtain) hou (from) thien (heaven).

(b) By means of position, so that the word in the ablative is placed before the verb. Ex. thien (heaven) hiang-tchi (descended, tchi being the relative particle or sign of the genitive) tsaï (calamities), i.e., the calamities which Heaven sends to men.

(b) By changing the order, the word in the ablative comes before the verb. For example, thien (heaven) hiang-tchi (descended, with tchi being the relative particle or sign of the genitive) tsaï (calamities), i.e. the calamities that Heaven sends to people.

6. The instrumental is expressed—

The instrumental is conveyed—

(a) By the preposition yu, with. Ex. yu (with) kien (the sword) cha (to kill) jin (a man).

(a) By the preposition you, meaning with. For example: you (with) kien (the sword) cha (to kill) jin (a man).

(b) By position, the substantive which stands in the instrumental case being placed before the verb, which is followed again by the noun in the accusative. Ex. i (by hanging) cha (he killed) tchi (him).

(b) In this structure, the noun in the instrumental case comes before the verb, which is then followed by the noun in the accusative case. For example: i (by hanging) cha (he killed) tchi (him).

7. The locative may be expressed by simply placing the noun before the verb. Ex. si (in the East or East) yeou (there is) suo-tou-po (a sthúpa); or by prepositions as described in the text.

7. You can express location by simply putting the noun before the verb. For example, si (in the East or East) you (there is) suo-tou-po (a stupa); or by using prepositions as mentioned in the text.

The adjective is always placed before the substantive to which it belongs. Ex. meï jin, a beautiful woman.

The adjective always goes before the noun it describes. Ex. meijin, a beautiful woman.

The adverb is generally followed by a particle which produces the same effect as e in bene, or ter in celeriter. Ex. cho-jen, in silence, silently; ngeou-jen, perchance; kiu-jen, with fear.

The adverb is usually followed by a particle that has the same effect as e in bene, or ter in celeriter. Ex. cho-jen, in silence, silently; ngeou-jen, perhaps; kiu-jen, with fear.

Sometimes an adjective becomes an adverb through position. Ex. chen, good; but chen ko, to sing well.

Sometimes an adjective turns into an adverb based on its placement. Ex. chen, good; but chen ko, to sing well.

102.
See some criticisms on this division in Marsh's Lectures on the English Language, p. 48.
103.

“Goddspell onn Ennglissh nemmnedd iss
God word, annd god tiþennde,
God errnde,”
&c.—Ormulum, pref. 157.

"A good message in English is
God's word, and solid teaching,
God's purpose,"
&c.—Ormulum, pref. 157.

“And beode þer godes godd-spel.”Layamon, iii. 182, v. 29, 507.

"Deliver the message of God there."Layamon, iii. 182, v. 29, 507.

104.
Diez, Lexicon Comparativum. Columella, vii. 8.
105.
Strabo, viii. p. 833. Τὴν μὲν Ἰάδα τῇ παλαιᾷ Ἀτθίδι τὴν αὐτὴν φαμέν, τὴν δὲ Δωρίδα τῇ Αἰολίδι.
106.

Herodotus (vii. 94, 509) gives Pelasgi as the old name of the Æolians and of the Ionians in the Peloponnesus and the islands. Nevertheless he argues (i. 57), from the dialect spoken in his time by the Pelasgi of the towns of Kreston, Plakia, and Skylake, that the old Pelasgi spoke a barbarous tongue (βάρβαρον τὴν γλῶσσαν ἱέντες). He has, therefore, to admit that the Attic race, being originally Pelasgic, unlearnt its language (τὸ Ἀττικὸν ἔθνος ἐὸν Πελασγικόν, ἅμα τῇ μεταβόλη τῇ ἐς Ἕλληνας, καὶ τὴν γλῶσσαν μετέμαθε). See Diefenbach, Origines Europææ, p. 59. Dionysius of Halicarnassus (i. 17) avoids this difficulty by declaring the Pelasgi to have been from the beginning a Hellenic race. This however, is merely his own theory. The Karians are called βαρβαρόφωνοι by Homer (II. v. 867); but Strabo (xiv. 662) takes particular care to show that they are not therefore to be considered as βάρβαροι. He distinguishes between βαρβαροφωνεῖν, i.e., κακῶς ἑλληνίζειν, and Καριστὶ λαλαεῖν, καρίζειν καὶ βαρβαρίζειν. But the same Strabo says that the Karians were formerly called Λέλεγεs (xii. p. 572); and these, together with Pelasgians and Kaukones, are reckoned by him (vii. p. 321) as the earlier barbarous inhabitants of Hellas. Again he (vii. p. 321), as well as Aristotle and Dionysius of Halicarnassus (i. 17), considers the Locrians as descendants of the Leleges, though they would hardly call the Locrians barbarians.

Herodotus (vii. 94, 509) refers to the ancient name of the Æolians and the Ionians in the Peloponnesus and the islands as Pelasgi. However, he claims (i. 57) that the dialect spoken in his time by the Pelasgi from the towns of Kreston, Plakia, and Skylake was a primitive language (βάρβαρον τὴν γλῶσσαν ἱέντες). Consequently, he has to acknowledge that the Attic people, originally Pelasgic, lost their language (τὸ Ἀττικὸν ἔθνος ἐὸν Πελασγικόν, ἅμα τῇ μεταβόλη τῇ ἐς Ἕλληνας, καὶ τὴν γλῶσσαν μετέμαθε). See Diefenbach, Origines Europææ, p. 59. Dionysius of Halicarnassus (i. 17) sidesteps this issue by stating that the Pelasgi were originally a Hellenic race. However, this is just his personal theory. The Karians are called βαρβαρόφωνοι by Homer (II. v. 867); but Strabo (xiv. 662) is careful to clarify that they shouldn’t be considered as βάρβαροι. He differentiates between βαρβαροφωνεῖν, i.e., speaking Greek poorly, and Καριστὶ λαλαεῖν, καρίζειν καὶ βαρβαρίζειν. Nonetheless, the same Strabo states that the Karians were once referred to as Λέλεγεs (xii. p. 572); and he counts them, along with the Pelasgians and Kaukones, as the early cruel inhabitants of Hellas (vii. p. 321). Additionally, he (vii. p. 321), as well as Aristotle and Dionysius of Halicarnassus (i. 17), considers the Locrians to be descendants of the Leleges, although they would likely not label the Locrians as barbarians.

The Macedonians are mentioned by Strabo (x. p. 460) together with “the other Hellenes.” Demosthenes speaks of Alexander as a barbarian; Isokrates as a Heraclide. To judge from a few extant words, Macedonian might have been a Greek dialect. (Diefenbach, Orig. Europ. p. 62.) Justine (vii. 1) says of the Macedonians, “Populus Pelasgi, regio Pæonia dicebatur.” There was a tradition that the country occupied by the Macedonians belonged formerly to Thracians or Pierians (Thuc. ii. 99; Strabo, vii. p. 321); part of it to Thessalians (ibid.).

The Macedonians are mentioned by Strabo (x. p. 460) along with “the other Greeks.” Demosthenes referred to Alexander as a barbarian, while Isokrates called him a Heraclide. Judging by a few remaining words, Macedonian may have been a Greek dialect. (Diefenbach, Orig. Europ. p. 62.) Justine (vii. 1) describes the Macedonians as “Pelasgians, the region was called Paeonia.” There was a tradition that the land occupied by the Macedonians used to belong to the Thracians or Pierians (Thuc. ii. 99; Strabo, vii. p. 321); part of it to the Thessalians (ibid.).

The Thracians are called by Herodotus (v. 3) the greatest people after the Indians. They are distinguished by Strabo from Illyrians (Diefenbach, p. 65), from Celts (ibid.), and from Scythians (Thuc. ii. 96). What we know of their language rests on a statement of Strabo (vii. 303, 305), that the Thracians spoke the same language as the Getæ, and the Getæ the same as the Dacians. We possess fragments of Dacian speech in the botanical names collected by Dioskorides, and these, as interpreted by Grimm, are clearly Aryan, though not Greek. The Dacians are called barbarians by Strabo, together with Illyrians and Epirotes. (Strabo, vii. p. 321.)

The Thracians are referred to by Herodotus (v. 3) as the most significant people after the Indians. Strabo distinguishes them from the Illyrians (Diefenbach, p. 65), Celts (ibid.), and Scythians (Thuc. ii. 96). Our understanding of their language comes from Strabo’s statement (vii. 303, 305) that the Thracians spoke the same language as the Getæ, and the Getæ spoke the same language as the Dacians. We have fragments of Dacian language in the botanical names gathered by Dioskorides, which, as interpreted by Grimm, are clearly Aryan, though not Greek. Strabo describes the Dacians as barbarians, alongside the Illyrians and Epirotes. (Strabo, vii. p. 321.)

The Illyrians were barbarians in the eyes of the Greeks. They are now considered as an independent branch of the Aryan family. Herodotus refers the Veneti to the Illyrians (i. 196); and the Veneti, according to Polybius (ii. 17), who knew them, spoke a language different from that of the Celts. He adds that they were an old race, and in their manner and dress like the Celts. Hence many writers have mistaken them for Celts, neglecting the criterion of language, on which Polybius lays such proper stress. The Illyrians were a widely extended race; the Pannonians, the Dalmatians, and the Dardanians (from whom the Dardanelles were called), are all spoken of as Illyrians. (Diefenbach, Origines Europææ, pp. 74, 75.) It is lost labor to try to extract anything positive from the statements of the Greeks and Romans on the race and the language of their barbarian neighbors.

The Illyrians were seen as barbarians by the Greeks. They are now recognized as an independent branch of the Aryan family. Herodotus mentions the Veneti in relation to the Illyrians (i. 196); and the Veneti, according to Polybius (ii. 17), who was familiar with them, spoke a language different from that of the Celts. He also notes that they were an ancient race and had customs and clothing similar to the Celts. Because of this, many writers have confused them with Celts, ignoring the important distinction of language that Polybius emphasizes. The Illyrians were a widely spread race; the Pannonians, the Dalmatians, and the Dardanians (from whom the Dardanelles got their name) are all referred to as Illyrians. (Diefenbach, Origines Europææ, pp. 74, 75.) It's a futile effort to try to draw any concrete conclusions from the accounts of the Greeks and Romans regarding the race and language of their barbarian neighbors.

107.
Albert, Count of Bollstädten, or, as he is more generally called, Albertus Magnus, the pioneer of modern physical science, wrote: "God has given humanity His spirit, along with intellect, so that people can use it to know God. God is known through the soul and by faith from the Bible, and through intellect from nature." And again: "It is for the praise and glory of God, and for the benefit of our brothers and sisters, that we study the nature of created things. In all of creation, not only in the harmonious design of each individual creature but also in the variety of different forms, we can and should admire the majesty and wisdom of God."
108.

These are the last words in Kepler's “Harmony of the World,” “Thou who by the light of nature hast kindled in us the longing after the light of Thy grace, in order to raise us to the light of Thy glory, thanks to Thee, Creator and Lord, that Thou lettest me rejoice in Thy works. Lo, I have done the work of my life with that power of intellect which Thou hast given. I have recorded to men the glory of Thy works, as far as my mind could comprehend their infinite majesty. My senses were awake to search as far as I could, with purity and faithfulness. If I, a worm before thine eyes, and born in the bonds of sin, have brought forth anything that is unworthy of Thy counsels, inspire me with Thy spirit, that I may correct it. If, by the wonderful beauty of Thy works, I have been led into boldness, if I have sought my own honor among men as I advanced in the work which was destined to Thine honor, pardon me in kindness and charity, and by Thy grace grant that my teaching may be to Thy glory, and the welfare of all men. Praise ye the Lord, ye heavenly Harmonies, and ye that understand the new harmonies, praise the Lord. Praise God, O my soul, as long as I live. From Him, through Him, and in Him is all, the material as well as the spiritual—all that we know and all that we know not yet—for there is much to do that is yet undone.”

These are the final words in Kepler's "World Harmony," "You who, through the light of nature, have ignited in us the desire for the light of Your grace, helping us strive for the light of Your glory, thank You, Creator and Lord, for allowing me to take joy in Your works. I have completed the work of my life with the intellect that You have given me. I have shared the glory of Your creations with others, as far as my mind could grasp their infinite majesty. My senses were sharp to explore as best as I could, with purity and fidelity. If I, a lowly worm in Your sight, born into sin, have produced anything unworthy of Your wisdom, inspire me with Your spirit so I can correct it. If, influenced by the stunning beauty of Your works, I have acted boldly, if I have sought my own honor among men while striving to honor You, forgive me kindly and generously, and by Your grace, let my teachings reflect Your glory and benefit all humanity. Praise the Lord, you heavenly Harmonies, and all who understand the new harmonies, praise the Lord. Praise God, O my soul, for as long as I live. From Him, through Him, and in Him is everything, both material and spiritual—all that we know and all that remains unknown—because there is still much to accomplish."

These words are all the more remarkable, because written by a man who was persecuted by theologians as a heretic, but who nevertheless was not ashamed to profess himself a Christian.

These words are even more striking because they were written by a man who was persecuted by theologians as a heretic, yet he wasn't afraid to identify himself as a Christian.

I end with an extract from one of the most distinguished of living naturalists:—“The antiquarian recognizes at once the workings of intelligence in the remains of an ancient civilization. He may fail to ascertain their age correctly, he may remain doubtful as to the order in which they were successively constructed, but the character of the whole tells him they are works of art, and that men like himself originated these relics of by-gone ages. So shall the intelligent naturalist read at once in the pictures which nature presents to him, the works of a higher Intelligence; he shall recognize in the minute perforated cells of the coniferæ, which differ so wonderfully from those of other plants, the hieroglyphics of a peculiar age; in their needle-like leaves, the escutcheon of a peculiar dynasty; in their repeated appearance under most diversified circumstances, a thoughtful and thought-eliciting adaptation. He beholds, indeed, the works of a being thinking like himself, but he feels, at the same time, that he stands as much below the Supreme Intelligence, in wisdom, power, and goodness, as the works of art are inferior to the wonders of nature. Let naturalists look at the world under such impressions, and evidence will pour in upon us that all creatures are expressions of the thoughts of Him whom we know, love, and adore unseen.”

I’ll finish with a quote from one of the most respected naturalists alive today:—The antiquarian immediately sees signs of intelligence in the remnants of an ancient civilization. He might not be able to accurately determine their age, and he may be unsure about the order in which they were built, but their overall character indicates they are works of art made by people like him. Similarly, a perceptive naturalist will instantly recognize in nature's images the work of a higher Intelligence; he will see in the tiny perforated cells of coniferous trees, distinct from those of other plants, the hieroglyphics of a unique era; in their needle-like leaves, the emblem of a specific dynasty; and in their consistent appearance under various conditions, a thoughtful and thought-provoking adaptation. Indeed, he sees the works of a being thinking like himself, but he also knows he is far below the Supreme Intelligence in wisdom, power, and goodness, just as works of art are lesser than the wonders of nature. If naturalists approach the world with such perspectives, evidence will abound showing that all living beings reflect the thoughts of Him whom we know, love, and adore but cannot see.

109.
Rom. i. 20.
110.

Hervas (Catalogo, i. 37) mentions the following works, published during the sixteenth century, bearing on the science of language:—“Introductio in Chaldaicam Linguam, Siriacam, atque Armenicam, et decem alias Linguas,” a Theseo Ambrosio. Papiæ, 1539, 4to. “De Ratione communi omnium Linguarum et Litterarum Commentarius,” a Theodoro Bibliandro. Tiguri, 1548, 4to. It contains the Lord's Prayer in fourteen languages. Bibliander derives Welsh and Cornish from Greek, Greek having been carried there from Marseilles, through France. He states that Armenian differs little from Chaldee, and cites Postel, who derived the Turks from the Armenians, because Turkish was spoken in Armenia. He treats the Persians as descendants of Shem, and connects their language with Syriac and Hebrew. Servian and Georgian are, according to him, dialects of Greek.

Hervas (Catalogo, i. 37) lists the following works published in the sixteenth century related to the science of language:—"Introduction to the Chaldean Language, Syriac, Armenian, and ten other Languages," by Theseo Ambrosio. Papiæ, 1539, 4to. "On the Reason of the Commonality of All Languages and Writings: A Commentary," by Theodoro Bibliandro. Tiguri, 1548, 4to. It includes the Lord's Prayer in fourteen languages. Bibliander claims that Welsh and Cornish come from Greek, which he says was brought there from Marseilles through France. He notes that Armenian is very similar to Chaldee and references Postel, who argued that the Turks originated from the Armenians because Turkish was spoken in Armenia. He considers the Persians to be descendants of Shem and relates their language to Syriac and Hebrew. According to him, Servian and Georgian are dialects of Greek.

Other works on language published during the sixteenth century are:—“Perion. Dialogorum de Linguæ Gallicæ origine ejusque cum Græca cognatione, libri quatuor.” Parisiis, 1554. He says that as French is not mentioned among the seventy-two languages which sprang from the Tower of Babel, it must be derived from Greek. He quotes Cæsar (de Bello Gallico, vi. 14) to prove that the Druids spoke Greek, and then derives from it the modern French language!

Other works on language published during the sixteenth century include:—"Perion. Four books on the Dialogue of the Origin of the French Language and its Connection with Greek." Paris, 1554. He claims that since French isn't listed among the seventy-two languages that came from the Tower of Babel, it must come from Greek. He cites Caesar (de Bello Gallico, vi. 14) to support that the Druids spoke Greek, and then traces modern French back to it!

The works of Henri Estienne (1528-1598) stand on a much sounder basis. He has been unjustly accused of having derived French from Greek. See his “Traicté de la Conformité du Langage français avec le grec;” about 1566. It contains chiefly syntactical and grammatical remarks, and its object is to show that modes of expression in Greek, which sound anomalous and difficult, can be rendered easy by a comparison of analogous expressions in French.

The works of Henri Estienne (1528-1598) are much more reliable. He has been wrongly accused of deriving French from Greek. See his "Treatise on the Similarity Between the French Language and Greek;" from around 1566. It mainly includes syntactical and grammatical observations, aiming to demonstrate that expressions in Greek, which seem unusual and complex, can be understood more easily by comparing them to similar expressions in French.

The Lord's Prayer was published in 1548 in fourteen languages, by Bibliander; in 1591 in twenty-six languages, by Roccha (“Bibliotheca Apostolica Vaticana,” a fratre Angelo Roccha: Romæ, 1591, 4to.); in 1592 in forty languages, by Megiserus (“Specimen XL. Linguarum et Dialectorum ab Hieronymo Megisero à diversis auctoribus collectarum quibus Oratio Dominica est expressa:” Francofurti, 1592); in 1593, in fifty languages, by the same author (“Oratio Dominica L. diversis linguis,” cura H. Megiseri: Francofurti, 1593, 8vo.).

The Lord's Prayer was published in 1548 in fourteen languages by Bibliander; in 1591 in twenty-six languages by Roccha (“Vatican Apostolic Library,” by Brother Angelo Roccha: Rome, 1591, 4to.); in 1592 in forty languages by Megiserus ("Specimen XL. Languages and Dialects collected by Hieronymo Megisero from various authors, in which the Lord's Prayer is expressed:" Frankfurt, 1592); and in 1593 in fifty languages by the same author (“Lord's Prayer in various languages,” edited by H. Megiseri: Frankfurt, 1593, 8vo.).

111.

At the beginning of the seventeenth century was published “Trésor de l'Histoire des Langues de cet Univers,” par Claude Duret; seconde edition: Iverdon, 1619, 4to. Hervas says that Duret repeats the mistakes of Postel, Bibliander, and other writers of the sixteenth century.

At the start of the seventeenth century, “Treasure of the History of the Languages of this Universe,” by Claude Duret was published; second edition: Iverdon, 1619, 4to. Hervas notes that Duret makes the same mistakes as Postel, Bibliander, and other sixteenth-century writers.

Before Duret came Estienne Guichard, “l'Harmonie Etymologique des Langues Hebraique, Chaldaique, Syriaque—Greque—Latine, Françoise, Italienne, Espagnole—Allemande, Flamende, Anglaise, &c.:” Paris, 1606.

Before Duret, Estienne Guichard published, "The Etymological Connection of Hebrew, Chaldaic, Syriac—Greek—Latin, French, Italian, Spanish—German, Flemish, English, etc.:" Paris, 1606.

Hervas only knows the second edition, Paris, 1618, and thinks the first was published in 1608. The title of his book shows that Guichard distinguished between four classes of languages, which we should now call the Semitic, the Hellenic, Italic, and Teutonic: he derives, however, Greek from Hebrew.

Hervas only knows the second edition, Paris, 1618, and believes the first was published in 1608. The title of his book indicates that Guichard identified four classes of languages, which we would now refer to as Semitic, Hellenic, Italic, and Teutonic; however, he traces Greek back to Hebrew.

I. I. Scaliger, in his “Diatriba de Europæorum Linguis” (Opuscula varia: Parisiis, 1610), p. 119, distinguishes eleven classes: Latin, Greek, Teutonic, Slavonic, Epirotic or Albanian, Tartaric, Hungarian, Finnic, Irish, British in Wales and Brittany, and Bask or Cantabrian.

I. I. Scaliger, in his “Diatribe on European Languages” (Various Works: Paris, 1610), p. 119, identifies eleven classes: Latin, Greek, Germanic, Slavic, Albanian, Tartar, Hungarian, Finnish, Irish, British in Wales and Brittany, and Basque or Cantabrian.

112.
“Beginning of speech and common expression, and all that we speak, the Hebrew language is the one in which the Old Testament was written, as all of antiquity has handed down.” In another place (Isaia, c. 7) he writes, "The Hebrews use words from almost all languages."
113.
"The language originally given to Adam, as we believe, was Hebrew, in that part of humanity which is not part of any angel but is the portion that remained of God."
114.
Guichard went so far as to maintain that as Hebrew was written from right to left, and Greek from left to right, Greek words might be traced back to Hebrew by being simply read from right to left.
115.
Among the different systems of Rabbinical exegesis, there is one according to which every letter in Hebrew is reduced to its numerical value, and the word is explained by another of the same quantity; thus, from the passage, "All the people on earth spoke the same language." (Gen. xi. 1), is deduced that they all spoke Hebrew, שכה being changed for its synonym לשון, and הקרש, (5 + 100 + 4 + 300 = 409) is substituted for its equivalent אחת (1 + 8 + 400 = 409). Ecclesiastes, ed. Ginsburg, p. 31.
116.

Hermathena Joannis Goropii Becani: Antuerpiæ, 1580. Origines Antverpianæ, 1569. André Kempe, in his work on the language of Paradise, maintains that God spoke to Adam in Swedish, Adam answered in Danish, and the serpent spoke to Eve in French.

Hermathena Joannis Goropii Becani: Antwerp, 1580. Origins of Antwerp, 1569. André Kempe, in his work on the language of Paradise, argues that God spoke to Adam in Swedish, Adam replied in Danish, and the serpent talked to Eve in French.

Chardin relates that the Persians believe three languages to have been spoken in Paradise; Arabic by the serpent, Persian by Adam and Eve, and Turkish by Gabriel.

Chardin mentions that the Persians believe three languages were spoken in Paradise: Arabic by the serpent, Persian by Adam and Eve, and Turkish by Gabriel.

J. B. Erro, in his “El mundo primitivo,” Madrid, 1814, claims Bask as the language spoken by Adam.

J. B. Erro, in his "Primitive world," Madrid, 1814, states that Bask is the language spoken by Adam.

A curious discussion took place about two hundred years ago in the Metropolitan Chapter of Pampeluna. The decision, as entered in the minutes of the chapter, is as follows:—1. Was Bask the primitive language of mankind? The learned members confess that, in spite of their strong conviction on the subject, they dare not give an affirmative answer. 2. Was Bask the only language spoken by Adam and Eve in Paradise? On this point the chapter declares that no doubt can exist in their minds, and that “it is impossible to bring forward any serious or rational objection.” See Hennequin, “Essai sur l'Analogie des Langues,” Bordeaux, 1838. p. 60.

A curious discussion took place about two hundred years ago in the Metropolitan Chapter of Pampeluna. The decision, as noted in the chapter's minutes, is as follows:—1. Was Bask the original language of humanity? The knowledgeable members admit that, despite their strong beliefs on the topic, they don’t dare to provide a definitive answer. 2. Was Bask the only language spoken by Adam and Eve in Paradise? On this point, the chapter states that they have no doubts in their minds, and that "It’s impossible to offer any serious or reasonable objection." See Hennequin, "Essay on the Analogy of Languages," Bordeaux, 1838. p. 60.

117.
Guhrauer's Life of Leibniz, ii. p. 129.
118.
Guhrauer, vol. ii. p. 127. In his "Dissertation on the Origin of Nations," 1710, Leibniz says:—"The study of languages should only follow the principles of the exact sciences. Why start with what we don't know instead of what we do? It makes sense to begin by studying modern languages that we have access to so we can compare them, identify their differences and similarities, and then move on to the languages that came before them. This will help us understand their lineage and origins, and then gradually advance to the oldest languages, the analysis of which will guide us to reliable conclusions."
119.
Nicolaes Witsen, Burgomaster of Amsterdam, travelled in Russia, 1666-1677; published his travels in 1672, dedicated to Peter the Great. Second edition, 1705. It contains many collections of words.
120.
Catherinens der Grossen Verdienste um die Vergleichende Sprachkunde, von F. Adelung. Petersburg, 1815. Another letter of his to the Vice-Chancellor, Baron Schaffiroff, is dated Pirmont, June 22, 1716.
121.
Collectanea Etymologica, ii. 255. "I can gather German voices without distinction of dialects. I think certain origins will be clearer from the higher dialects; for example, from Ulfilas' Gothic and Otfrid's Francian."
122.
Monde primitif analysé et comparé avec le monde moderne: Paris, 1773.
123.
Catalogo, i. 63.
124.
"But they should consult grammars to understand their own character through their grammatical structure."Catalog, i. 65. The same principle was expressed by Lord Monboddo, about 1795, in his Ancient Metaphysics, vol. iv. p. 326. “My final observation is that the structure of a language is less random and more governed by rules than the sounds or meanings of words. This is one of the main ways we can identify the connections between different languages. So, when we see that two languages use these fundamental aspects of language—derivation, composition, and inflection—in the same manner, we can confidently conclude that one language is the source of the other, or that both are dialects of the same language.”
125.
Catalogo, ii. 468.
126.
Ibid. i. 49. Witsen, too, in a letter to Leibniz, dated Mai 22, 1698, alludes to the affinity between the Tataric and Mongolic languages. "I was told that these two languages (Moegale and Tartar) are roughly as different as German is from Flemish, and the same goes for the Kalmyks and Moegals."Collectanea Etymologica, ii. p. 363.
127.
Leibniz held the same opinion (see Hervas, Catalogo, i. 50), though he considered the Celts in Spain as descendants of the Iberians.
128.

Catalogo, i. 30. “Verá que la lengua llamada malaya, la qual se habla en la península de Malaca, es matriz de inumerables dialectos de naciones isleñas, que desde dicha península se extienden por mas de doscientos grados de longitud en los mares oriental y pacífico.”

Catalogo, i. 30. "You'll notice that the language known as Malayan, spoken in the Malay Peninsula, is the source of many dialects from island nations that stretch from this peninsula over more than two hundred degrees of longitude in the Eastern and Pacific Oceans."

Ibid. ii. 10. “De esta península de Malaca han salido enjambres de pobladores de las islas del mar Indiano y Pacífico, en las que, aunque parece haber otra nacion, que es de negros, la malaya es generalmente la mas dominante y extendida. La lengua malaya se habla en dicha península, continente del Asia, en las islas Maldivas, en la de Madagascar (perteneciente al Africa), en las de Sonda, en las Molucas, en las Filipinas, en las del archipiélago de San Lázaro, y en muchísimas del mar del Sur desde dicho archipiélago hasta islas, que por su poca distancia de América se creian pobladas por americanos. La isla de Madagascar se pone á 60 grados de longitud, y á los 268 se pone la isla de Pasqua ó de Davis, en la que se habla otro dialecto malayo; por lo que la extension de los dialectos malayos es de 208 grados de longitud.”

Ibid. ii. 10. From the Malay Peninsula, groups of settlers have spread across the islands of the Indian and Pacific Oceans. Even though there seems to be another nation made up of black people, the Malay are generally the most dominant and widespread. The Malay language is spoken not only in this peninsula but also on the Asian continent, in the Maldives, Madagascar (which is part of Africa), the Sundas, the Moluccas, the Philippines, the islands of the San Lazaro archipelago, and many islands in the South Sea, extending to islands that were thought to be populated by Americans due to their closeness to America. Madagascar is located at 60 degrees longitude, while at 268 degrees is Easter Island or Davis Island, where another Malay dialect is spoken; thus, the distribution of Malay dialects spans 208 degrees of longitude.

129.
Catalogo, ii. 134.
130.
Ibid. ii. 135.
131.
The first volume appeared in 1806. He died before the second volume was published, which was brought out by Vater in 1809. The third and fourth volumes followed in 1816 and 1817, edited by Vater and the younger Adelung.
132.
Evidence of this is to be found in Strahlenberg's work on the “North and East of Europe and Asia,” 1730; with tabula polyglotta, &c.; in Messerschmidt's "Traveling in Siberia," from 1729-1739; in Bachmeister, "Idea and desires for gathering language specimens:" Petropoli, 1773; in Güldenstädt's "Traveling in the Caucasus," &c.
133.
The empress wrote to Nicolai at Berlin to ask him to draw up a catalogue of grammars and dictionaries. The work was sent to her in manuscript from Berlin, in 1785.
134.
"Glossary of World Languages:" Petersburg, 1787. A second edition, in which the words are arranged alphabetically, appeared in 1790-91, in 4 vols., edited by Jankiewitsch de Miriewo. It contains 279 (272) languages, i.e. 171 for Asia, 55 for Europe, 30 for Africa, and 23 for America. According to Pott, "Inequality," p. 230, it contains 277 languages, 185 for Asia, 22 for Europe, 28 for Africa, 15 for America. This would make 280. It is a very scarce book.
135.
The Singhalese call Pali, Mungata; the Burmese, Magadabâsâ.
136.
Works, vol. iii. p. 72.
137.
M. M.'s Buddhism and Buddhist Pilgrims, p. 23.
138.
Méthode pour déchiffrer et transcrire les noms Sanscrits qui se rencontrent dans les livres chinois, inventée et démontrée par M. Stanislas Julien: Paris, 1861, p. 103.
139.
“Fan-chou (brahmâkshara), the characters of Indian writing, invented by Fan, that is to say Fan-lan-mo (brahmâ).”Stanislas Julien, Buddhist Pilgrims' Travels, vol. ii. p. 505.
140.
Sir Henry Elliot's Historians of India, p. 259.
141.
See Professor Flügel, in Zeitschrift der D. M. G., xi., s. 148 and 325.
142.
Elliot's Historians of India, p. 96. Al Birúni knew the Harivanśa, and fixes the date of the five Siddhântas. The great value of Al Birúni's work was first pointed out by M. Reinaud, in his excellent "Memoir on India," Paris, 1849.
143.
In the Persian work Mujmalu-t-Tawárikh, there are chapters translated from the Arabic of Abu Saleh ben Shib ben Jawa, who had himself abridged them, a hundred years before, from a Sanskrit work, called "Teaching of Kings" (Râjanîti?). The Persian translator lived about 1150. See Elliot, l. c.
144.
Sâlotar is not known as the author of such a work. Śâlotarîya occurs instead of Śâlâturîya, in Rája Rádhakant; but Śâlâturîya is a name of Pâņini, and the teacher of Suśruta is said to have been Divodâsa. An Arabic translation of a Sanskrit work on veterinary medicine by Châņakya is mentioned by Háji Chalfa, v. p. 59. A translation of the Charaka from Sanskrit into Persian, and from Persian into Arabic, is mentioned in the Fihrist, finished 987 a. d.
145.
See Vans Kennedy, "Notice about the religion introduced by Akbar:" Transactions of the Literary Society of Bombay: London, 1820, vol. ii. pp. 242-270.
146.
Elliot, Historians of India, p. 249.
147.
Müllbauer, Geschichte der Katholischen Missionen Ostindiens, p. 134.
148.
Elliot, Historians of India, p. 248.
149.
Ibid. pp. 259, 260. The Tarikh-i-Badauni, or Muntakhabu-t-Tawárikh, written by Mulla Abdu-l-Kádir Maluk, Shah of Badáún, and finished in 1595, is a general history of India from the time of the Ghaznevides to the 40th year of Akbar. The author is a bigoted Muhammedan and judges Akbar severely, though he was himself under great obligations to him. He was employed by Akbar to translate from Arabic and Sanskrit into Persian: he translated the Râmâyaņa, two out of the eighteen sections of the Mahâbhârata, and abridged a history of Cashmir. These translations were made under the superintendence of Faizi, the brother of the minister Abu-l-Fazl. "Abulfacel, minister of Akbar, utilized the Amarasinha and the Mahabharata, which he translated into Persian in the year 1586."Hervas, ii. 136.
150.
See M. M.'s History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 327.
151.
History of the Settlements of the Europeans in the East and West Indies, translated from the French of the Abbé Bernal by J. Justamond: Dublin, 1776, vol. i. p. 34.
152.
Müllbauer, p. 67.
153.
Ibid. p. 80. These Brahmans, according to Robert de Nobili, were of a lower class, not initiated in the sacred literature. They were ignorant, he says, “of the books Smarta, Apostamba, and Sutra.”Müllbauer, p. 188. Robert himself quotes from the Âpastamba-Sûtra, in his defence, ibid. p. 192. He also quotes Scanda Purâna, p. 193; Kadambari, p. 193.
154.
The Ezour-Veda is not the work of Robert de Nobili. It was probably written by one of his converts. It is in Sanskrit verse, in the style of the Pûraņas, and contains a wild mixture of Hindu and Christian doctrine. The French translation was sent to Voltaire and printed by him in 1778, “The Ezour Vedam translated from Sanskrit by a Brahmin.” Voltaire expressed his belief that the original was four centuries older than Alexander, and that it was the most precious gift for which the West had been ever indebted to the East. Mr. Ellis discovered the Sanskrit original at Pondichery. (Asiatic Researches, vol. xiv.) There is no evidence for ascribing the work to Robert, and it is not mentioned in the list of his works. (Bertrand, la Mission du Maduré, Paris, 1847-50, t. iii. p. 116; Müllbauer, p. 205, note.)
155.
In 1677 a Mr. Marshall is said to have been a proficient in Sanskrit. Elliot's Historians of India, p. 265.
156.
See an excellent account of this letter in an article of M. Biot in the “Journal of Scholars,” 1861.
157.
Sidharubam seu Grammatica Samscrdamica, cui accedit dissertatio historico-critica in linguam Samscrdamicam, vulgo Samscret dictam, in qua hujus linguæ existentia, origo, præstantia, antiquitas, extensio, maternitas ostenditur, libri aliqui in ea exarati critice recensentur, et simul aliquæ antiquissimæ gentilium orationes liturgicæ paucis attinguntur et explicantur autore Paulino a S. Bartholomæo. Romæ, 1790.
158.
The earliest publications were the “Bhagavad Gita,” translated by Wilkins, 1785; the “Hitopadesha,” translated by Wilkins, 1787; and the "Sakuntala," translated by W. Jones, 1789. Original grammars, without mentioning mere compilations, were published by Colebrooke, 1805; by Carey, 1806; by Wilkins, 1808; by Forster, 1810; by Yates, 1820; by Wilson, 1841. In Germany, Bopp published his grammars in 1827, 1832, 1834; Benfey, in 1852 and 1855.
159.
Halhed had published in 1776 the “Gentoo Law Code,” a digest of the most important Sanskrit law-books made by eleven Brahmans, by the order of Warren Hastings.
160.
"On the Origin and Development of Language," second edition, Edinburgh, 1774. 6 vols.
161.
"I used to think that language couldn't be created without some sort of supernatural help, so I've argued that it was invented by the Dæmon kings of Egypt, who were more than human. They first learned to speak themselves and then taught others. However, I believe that even among them, there was a development in the art of language, and that a language like Shanskrit wasn't created all at once."Monboddo, Ancient Metaphysics, vol. iv. p. 357.
162.
Origin and Progress of Language, vol. vi. p. 97.
163.
Antient Metaphysics, vol. iv. p. 322.
164.
Conjugationssystem: Frankfurt, 1816.
165.
New edition in 1856, much improved.
166.
Second edition, 1859 and 1861. Pott's work on the Language of the Gipsies, 1846; his work on Proper Names, 1856.
167.
Although the old Friesian documents are dated to a time that aligns more with Middle German rather than Old German, the Friesian language appears in a much older form, nearly resembling Old High German. The political isolation of the Friesians and their strong commitment to their traditional customs and rights have given their language a more conservative character. After the fourteenth century, the old inflections of Friesian decline quickly, while in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries, they compare closely to the Anglo-Saxon of the ninth and tenth centuries.Grimm, German Grammar (1st ed.), vol. i p. lxviii.
168.
The dialects of Swabia (the Allemannish), of Bavaria and Austria, of Franconia along the Main, and of Saxony, &c.
169.
Über das Leben und die Lehre des Ulfila, Hannover, 1840. Über das Leben des Ulfila von Dr. Bessell, Göttingen, 1860.
170.
Bessell, l. c. p. 38.
171.
Sozomenus, H. E. vii. 6.
172.

Auxentius thus speaks of Ulfilas, (Waitz, p. 19:) “Et [ita prædic]-ante et per Cristum cum dilectione Deo Patri gratias agente, hæc et his similia exsequente, quadraginta annis in episcopatu gloriose florens, apostolica gratia Græcam et Latinam et Goticam linguam sine intermissione in una et sola eclesia Cristi predicavit.... Qui et ipsis tribus linguis plures tractatus et multas interpretationes volentibus ad utilitatem et ad ædificationem, sibi ad æternam memoriam et mercedem post se dereliquid. Quem condigne laudare non sufficio et penitus tacere non audeo; cui plus omnium ego sum debitor, quantum et amplius in me laboravit, qui me a prima etate mea a parentibus meis discipulum suscepit et sacras litteras docuit et veritatem manifestavit et per misericordiam Dei et gratiam Cristi et carnaliter et spiritaliter ut filium suum in fide educavit.

Auxentius speaks of Ulfilas, (Waitz, p. 19:) “While preaching and through Christ, giving thanks to God the Father with love, he achieved these things and similar accomplishments, thriving magnificently as a bishop for forty years, preaching in Greek, Latin, and Gothic without interruption in the same Church of Christ. He also left behind many writings and interpretations in all three languages for the benefit and growth of those who wished, serving as an eternal reminder and reward. I can’t praise him enough, nor do I dare to stay completely silent; I owe him more than anyone else because he worked so hard for me. From a young age, he took me as a disciple from my parents, taught me the sacred texts, showed me the truth, and through God’s mercy and Christ’s grace, raised me up both physically and spiritually as his own son in faith.”

“Hic Dei providentia et Cristi misericordia propter multorum salutem in gente Gothorum de lectore triginta annorum episkopus est ordinatus, ut non solum esset heres Dei et coheres Cristi, sed et in hoc per gratiam Cristi imitator Cristi et sanctorum ejus, ut quemadmodum sanctus David triginta annorum rex et profeta est constitutus, ut regeret et doceret populum Dei et filios Hisdrael, ita et iste beatus tamquam profeta est manifestatus et sacerdos Cristi ordinatus, ut regeret et corrigeret et doceret et ædificaret gentem Gothorum; quod et Deo volente et Cristo aucsiliante per ministerium ipsius admirabiliter est adinpletum, et sicuti Josef in Ægypto triginta annorum est manifes[tatus et] quemadmodum Dominus et Deus noster Jhesus Cristus Filius Dei triginta annorum secundum carnem constitutus et baptizatus, cœpit evangelium predicare et animas hominum pascere: ita et iste sanctus, ipsius Cristi dispositione et ordinatione, et in fame et penuria predicationis indifferenter agentem ipsam gentem Gothorum secundum evangelicam et apostolicam et profeticam regulam emendavit et vibere [Deo] docuit, et Cristianos, vere Cristianos esse, manifestavit et multiplicavit.

Through God's providence and Christ's mercy, a man has been appointed bishop at the age of thirty for the salvation of many among the Goths. He is called not only to be an heir of God and a joint heir with Christ, but also, through Christ's grace, to imitate Christ and His saints. Just as the holy David became king and prophet at thirty to lead and instruct the people of God and the children of Israel, this blessed man has been revealed as a prophet and ordained as a priest of Christ, responsible for governing, guiding, teaching, and uplifting the Goths; all of which has been wonderfully achieved by God's will and with Christ's support through his ministry. Similarly, just as Joseph was revealed in Egypt at thirty, and as our Lord and God Jesus Christ, the Son of God, was consecrated and baptized at the age of thirty to begin preaching the gospel and nurturing souls, this holy man, through Christ's arrangement and appointment, has brought the Goth people, who were indifferent during times of famine and lack of preaching, into alignment with evangelical, apostolic, and prophetic teachings, teaching them to live for God and truly embodying and multiplying what it means to be Christians.

“Ubi et ex invidia et operatione inimici thunc ab inreligioso et sacrilego indice Gothorum tyrannico terrore in varbarico Cristianorum persecutio est excitata, ut Satanas, qui male facere cupiebat, nolens faceret bene, ut quos desiderabat prevaricatores facere et desertores, Cristo opitulante et propugnante, fierent martyres et confessores, ut persecutor confunderetur, et qui persecutionem patiebantur, coronarentur, ut hic, qui temtabat vincere, victus erubesceret, et qui temtabantur, victores gauderent. Ubi et post multorum servorum et ancillarum Cristi gloriosum martyrium, imminente vehementer ipsa persecutione, conpletis septem annis tantummodo in episkopatum, supradictus sanctissimus vir beatus Ulfila cum grandi populo confessorum de varbarico pulsus, in solo Romanie a thu[n]c beate memorie Constantio principe honorifice est susceptus, ut sicuti Deus per Moysem de potentia et violentia Faraonis et Egyptorum po[pulum s]uum l[iberav]it [et Rubrum] Mare transire fecit et sibi servire providit, ita et per sepe dictum Deus confessores sancti Filii sui unigeniti de varbarico liberavit et per Danubium transire fecit, et in montibus secundum sanctorum imitationem sibi servire de[crevit] ..... eo populo in solo Romaniæ, ubi sine illis septem annis, triginta et tribus annis veritatem predicavit, ut et in hoc quorum sanctorum imitator erat [similis esset], quod quadraginta annorum spatium et tempus ut multos ..... re et .... a[nn]orum ..... e vita.” .. “Qu[i] c[um] precepto imperiali, conpletis quadraginta annis, ad Constantinopolitanam urbem ad disputationem ..... contra p ... ie ... p. t. stas perrexit, et eundo in .... nn .. ne. p ... ecias sibi ax ..... to docerent et contestarent[ur] .... abat, et inge . e .... supradictam [ci]vitatem, recogitato ei im .... de statu concilii, ne arguerentur miseris miserabiliores, proprio judicio damnati et perpetuo supplicio plectendi, statim cœpit infirmari; qua in infirmitate susceptus est ad similitudine Elisei prophete. Considerare modo oportet meritum viri, qui ad hoc duce Domino obit Constantinopolim, immo vero Cristianopolim, ut sanctus et immaculatus sacerdos Cristi a sanctis et consacerdotibus, a dignis dignus digne [per] tantum multitudinem Cristianorum pro meritis [suis] mire et gloriose honoraretur.”

"When the enemy's envy and actions led to persecution against Christians stirred up by the irreligious and sacrilegious tyrant of the Goths, it was as if Satan, eager to do evil, did not want to do good. Instead of turning them into traitors and deserters, with Christ as their helper and defender, they became martyrs and confessors, so that the persecutor would be ashamed and those who were persecuted would be crowned. The one who tried to conquer would be defeated, and those who faced temptation would rejoice as victors. After the glorious martyrdom of many servants and maidservants of Christ, as the persecution intensified, and after only seven years in the episcopate, this most saintly man, blessed Ulfila, was honorably received in the land of Romania, driven away by barbaric forces along with a large group of confessors. Just as God freed His people from Pharaoh and the Egyptians through Moses, parting the Red Sea for them and providing for their service, God repeatedly freed the confessors of His only Son from barbaric forces and helped them cross the Danube. He decreed that, following the example of the saints, they would serve Him in the mountains... in the land of Romania, where for seven years without them, he preached the truth for thirty-three years, striving to be similar to those saints he imitated, enduring for forty years and beyond." .. “After serving for forty years, he went to the city of Constantinople for a debate by imperial decree... against p... ie... p. t. stas. On his way to... nn... ne. p... ecclesias to learn and testify, he began to feel weak; in this weakness, he was received in the manner of the prophet Eliseus. One must now reflect on the worth of the man who, guided by the Lord, traveled to Constantinople, truly the city of Christians, so that as a holy and pure priest of Christ, he could be honored wonderfully and gloriously by such a large number of Christians for his merits, among the saints and co-priests, deserving of such dignity.”

“Unde et cum sancto Hulfila ceterisque consortibus ad alium comitatum Constantinopolim venissent, ibique etiam et imperatores adissent, adque eis promissum fuisset conci[li]um, ut sanctus Aux[en]tius exposuit, [a]gnita promiss[io]ne prefati pr[e]positi heretic[i] omnibus viribu[s] institerunt u[t] lex daretur, qu[æ] concilium pro[hi]beret, sed nec p[ri]vatim in domo [nec] in publico, vel i[n] quolibet loco di[s]putatio de fide haberetur, sic[ut] textus indicat [le]gis, etc.”

“When Saint Hulfila and his companions got to another area, they reached Constantinople and met with the emperors, who had promised them a council, as Saint Auxentius described. Once this promise was recognized, the mentioned leaders of the heretics pushed hard for a law that would prevent the council from discussing faith, whether in private homes or in public, or anywhere else, just like the text of the law states, etc.”

173.
Theodoret. H. E. V., 30.
174.
For instances where Old High-German is more primitive than Gothic, see Schleicher, Zeitschrift für V. S., b. iv. s. 266. Bugge, ibid., b. v. s. 59.
175.
See Schleicher, Deutsche Sprache, p. 94.
176.
Ibid. s. 60.
177.
Weinhold, Altnordisches Leben, p. 27; Gunnlaugssaga, c. 7.
178.
See Dasent's Burnt Njal, Introduction.
179.
The name Edda is not found before the fourteenth century. Snorri Sturluson does not know the word Edda, nor any collection of ancient poems attributed to Saemund; and though Saemund may have made the first collection of national poetry, it is doubtful whether the work which we possess under his name is his.
180.

The people whom we call Wallachians, call themselves Romàni, and their language Romània.

The people we refer to as Wallachians call themselves Romàni, and their language Romània.

This Romance language is spoken in Wallachia and Moldavia, and in parts of Hungary, Transylvania, and Bessarabia. On the right bank of the Danube it occupies some parts of the old Thracia, Macedonia, and even Thessaly.

This Romance language is spoken in Wallachia and Moldavia, as well as in parts of Hungary, Transylvania, and Bessarabia. On the right bank of the Danube, it covers some areas of the old Thrace, Macedonia, and even Thessaly.

It is divided by the Danube into two branches: the Northern or Daco-romanic, and the Southern or Macedo-romanic. The former is less mixed, and has received a certain literary culture; the latter has borrowed a larger number of Albanian and Greek words, and has never been fixed grammatically.

It is split by the Danube into two branches: the Northern or Daco-Romanic, and the Southern or Macedonian-Romanic. The former is less mixed and has gained some literary culture; the latter has taken on a lot more Albanian and Greek words and has never established a consistent grammar.

The modern Wallachian is the daughter of the language spoken in the Roman province of Dacia.

The modern Wallachian is the descendant of the language spoken in the Roman province of Dacia.

The original inhabitants of Dacia were called Thracians, and their language Illyrian. We have hardly any remains of the ancient Illyrian language to enable us to form an opinion as to its relationship with Greek or any other family of speech.

The original inhabitants of Dacia were known as Thracians, and their language was Illyrian. We have very few remnants of the ancient Illyrian language to help us understand its connection to Greek or any other language family.

219 b. c., the Romans conquered Illyria; 30 b. c., they took Moesia; and 107 a. d., the Emperor Trajan made Dacia a Roman province. At that time the Thracian population had been displaced by the advance of Sarmatian tribes, particularly the Yazyges. Roman colonists introduced the Latin language; and Dacia was maintained as a colony up to 272, when the Emperor Aurelian had to cede it to the Goths. Part of the Roman inhabitants then emigrated and settled south of the Danube.

219 b. c., the Romans conquered Illyria; 30 b. c., they took Moesia; and 107 a.d., Emperor Trajan made Dacia a Roman province. At that time, the Thracian population had been pushed out by the advancing Sarmatian tribes, especially the Yazyges. Roman settlers brought the Latin language, and Dacia remained a colony until 272, when Emperor Aurelian had to give it up to the Goths. Some of the Roman inhabitants then moved and settled south of the Danube.

In 489 the Slavonic tribes began their advance into Mœsia and Thracia. They were settled in Mœsia by 678, and eighty years later a province was founded in Macedonia, under the name of Slavinia.

In 489, the Slavic tribes started their movement into Moesia and Thrace. They were settled in Moesia by 678, and eighty years later, a province was established in Macedonia, named Slavinia.

181.
The entire Bible has been published by the Bible Society in Romanese, for the Grisons in Switzerland; and in Lower Romanese, or Enghadine, as spoken on the borders of the Tyrol.
182.
"And the first, just like Dante, who started to speak as a vernacular poet, moved forward because he wanted to make his words understandable to a woman who found Latin verses difficult to comprehend."New Life.
183.
Schleicher, Beiträge, i. 19.
184.
Oldest dated MS. of 1056, written for Prince Ostromir. Some older written with Glagolitic letters. Schleicher, Beiträge, b. i. s. 20.
185.
Schleicher, s. 22.
186.
Schleicher, Deutsche Sprache, s. 77.
187.
1 Kings viii. 21.
188.
1 Kings ix. 26.
189.
1 Kings x. 11.
190.
Gutta in Malay means chewing gum, percha is the name of the tree (Isonandra gutta), or of an island from which the tree was first imported (Pulo-percha).
191.
See Lassen, Indische Alterthumskunde, b. i. s. 537.
192.
See also Sir Henry Elliot's Supplementary Glossary, s. v. Aheer.
193.
The arguments brought forward by Quatremère in his "Memoir on the Land of Ophir" against fixing Ophir on the Indian coast are not conclusive. The arguments derived from the names of the articles exported from Ophir were unknown to him. It is necessary to mention this, because Quatremère's name carries great weight, and his essay on Ophir has lately been republished in the Bibliothèque Classique des Célébrités Contemporaines. 1861.
194.
Job xxii. 24.
195.
Zend-Avesta is the name used by Chaqâni and other Muhammedan writers. The Parsis use the name “Avesta and Zend,” taking Avesta in the sense of text, and Zend as the title of the Pehlevi commentary. I doubt, however, whether this was the original meaning of the word Zend. Zend was more likely the same word as the Sanskrit verse (scandere) a name given to the Vedic hymns, and avesta, the Sanskrit avasthâna, a word which, though it does not occur in Sanskrit, would mean settled text. Avasthita, in Sanskrit, means laid down, settled. The Zend-avesta now consists of four books, Yasna, Vispered, Yashts, and Vendidad (Vendidad = vidaeva dâta; in Pehlevi, Juddivdad). Dr. Haug, in his interesting lecture on the "Origins of the Parsee Religion," Bombay, 1861, takes Avesta in the sense of the most ancient texts, Zend as commentary, and Pazend as explanatory notes, all equally written in what we shall continue to call the Zend language.
196.
According to the Kissah-i-Sanján, which is not very useful as a record of the early history of the Parsis, the fire-worshippers sought refuge in Khorassan forty-nine years before the time of Yezdegerd (632 A.D.), around 583. They remained there for 100 years, until 683, before moving to the city of Hormaz (Ormus, in the Persian Gulf). After staying there for fifteen years, they went to Diu, an island on the south-west coast of Katiawar, where they stayed for nineteen years, until 717. They then moved to Sanján, a town about twenty-four miles south of Damaun. After 300 years, they expanded to the nearby towns of Guzerat and established the sacred fire in Barsadah, Nauśari, near Surat, and Bombay.Mumbai Quarterly Review, 1856, No. viii. p. 67.
197.
Alc. i. p. 122, a. Ὁ μὲν μαγείαν διδάσκει τὴν Ζωροάστρου τοῦ Ὠρομάζον; ἔστι δὲ τοῦτο θεῶν θεραπεία.
198.
In the inscriptions we find, nom. Auramazda, gen. Auramazda, acc. Auramazda.
199.
Gen. Ahura Mazda, dat. mazdâi, acc. mazdam.
200.
Haug, Lecture, p. 11; and in Bunsen's Egypt.
201.

Berosus, as preserved in the Armenian translation of Eusebius, mentions a Median dynasty of Babylon, beginning with a king Zoroaster, long before Ninus; his date would be 2234 b. c.

Berosus, as preserved in the Armenian translation of Eusebius, talks about a Median dynasty of Babylon, starting with a king named Zoroaster, well before Ninus; his date would be 2234 b. c.

Xanthus, the Lydian (470 b. c.), as quoted by Diogenes Laertius, places Zoroaster, the prophet, 600 before the Trojan war (1800 b. c.).

Xanthus, the Lydian (470 B.C.), as quoted by Diogenes Laertius, states that Zoroaster, the prophet, lived 600 years before the Trojan War (1800 B.C.).

Aristotle and Eudoxus, according to Pliny (Hist. Nat. xxx. 1), placed Zoroaster 6000 before Plato; Hermippus 5000 before the Trojan war (Diog. Laert. proœm.).

Aristotle and Eudoxus, according to Pliny (Hist. Nat. xxx. 1), put Zoroaster 6000 years before Plato; Hermippus 5000 years before the Trojan War (Diog. Laert. proœm.).

Pliny (Hist. Nat. xxx. 2) places Zoroaster several thousand years before Moses the Judæan, who founded another kind of Mageia.

Pliny (Hist. Nat. xxx. 2) puts Zoroaster several thousand years before Moses the Jew, who established a different form of Mageia.

202.
Printed at the end of these Lectures.
203.
See Schleicher, Deutsche Sprache, s. 81.
204.
Farrar, Origin of Languages, p. 35.
205.
It has been common for grammarians to view these ending changes as having developed through some unknown process from the core of the noun, much like branches grow from a tree trunk—or as elements that have no meaning on their own but are used arbitrarily or by convention to alter the meanings of words. Schlegel supports this latter idea. “Languages with inflections,” Schlegel says, “are organic languages because they contain a living principle of growth and development, and they uniquely have, if I may put it this way, a rich and vibrant vegetation. The remarkable mechanism of these languages involves creating a vast variety of words and showing the connections between the ideas expressed by these words using a small number of syllables, which, when considered separately, have no meaning, but which accurately define the meaning of the words they are attached to. By altering root letters and adding derivative syllables to the roots, various types of derived words are created, and further derivatives can be formed from those. Words are combined from multiple roots to convey complex ideas. Lastly, nouns, adjectives, and pronouns are declined according to gender, number, and case; verbs are conjugated across voices, moods, tenses, numbers, and persons, using similar terminations and sometimes additions that, on their own, signify nothing. This approach allows for conveying the main idea, which is often considerably modified and highly complex, along with a whole set of associated ideas and changing relationships—all in a single word.”Philological Society Transactions, vol. ii. p. 39.
206.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, p. 172.
207.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, s. 172.
208.
"The Algonquins have only one grammatical case that can be considered locative." Du Ponceau, p. 158.
209.
Marsh, p. 579.
210.
In Old Portuguese, Diez mentions queen sir, my beautiful lady, my beautiful mistress.
211.
Marsh, p. 387. Barnes, Poems in Dorsetshire Dialect.
212.
Survey of Languages, p. 21.
213.
Fuchs, Romanische Sprachen, s. 344.
214.
The Greek term for the future is ὁ μέλλων, and μέλλω is used as an auxiliary verb to form certain futures in Greek. It has various meanings, but they can all be traced back to the Sanskrit man (manyate), to think. As Anya, other, is changed to ἄλλος, so many, I think, to μέλλω. Il. ii. 39: θήσειν ἔτ᾽ ἔμελλεν ἐπ ἀλγέα τε στοναchάς τε Τρωσί τε καὶ Δαναοῖσι, "he still believed in inflicting suffering on the Trojans and Greeks." Il. xxiii. 544: μέλλεις ἀφαιρήσεσθαι ἄεθλον, "You think you would have taken the prize from me." Od. xiii. 293: οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ἔμελλες λήξειν; "Didn't you think about stopping?" i.e. were you not going to stop? Or again in such phrases as Il. ii. 36, τὰ οὐ τελέσεσθαι ἔμελλον, "these things were not meant to be achieved," literally, these things did not mean to be accomplished. Thus μέλλω was used of things that were likely to be, as if these things themselves meant or intended to be or not to be; and, the original meaning being forgotten, μέλλω came to be a mere auxiliary expressing probability. Μέλλω and μέλλομαι, in the sense of “to pause,” are equally explained by the Sanskrit guy, to think or consider. In Old Norse the future is likewise formed by mun, to mean.
215.
Bopp, Comp. Grammar, § 620. Grimm, German Grammar, ii. 845.
216.
Barnes, Dorsetshire Dialect, p. 39.
217.
See M. M.'s Letter on the Turanian Languages, pp. 44, 46.
218.
Sk. lady; Gr. δόμος; L. home; Slav. domü; Celt. daimh.
219.
See M. M.'s Essay on Comparative Mythology, Oxford Essays, 1856.
220.
Ârya-bhûmi, and Ârya-deśa are used in the same sense.
221.
Pân. iii. 1, 103.
222.
In one of the Vedas, arya with a short a is used like ârya, as opposed to Śûdra. For we read (Vâj-San. xx. 17): "Whatever wrongs we have done in the village, in the forest, at home, outdoors, against a Śûdra, or against an Arya—You are our salvation."
223.
Lassen, Ind. Alt. b. i. s. 6.
224.
Ibid. b. i. s. 526.
225.
Ptolemy knows Ἀριάκαι, near the mouth of the Yaxartes. Ptol. vi. 14; Lassen, loc. cit. i. 6.
226.
Burnouf, Yaśna, notes, 61. In the same sense the Zend-avesta uses the expression, Aryan provinces, “airyanâm daqyunâm” gen. plur., or “air your grievances,” provincias Arianas. Burnouf, Yaśna, 442; and Notes, p. 70
227.
Burnouf, Notes, p. 62.
228.
Strabo, xi. 7, 11. Plin. Hist. Nat. vi. 19. Ptol. vi. 2. De Sacy, Mémoires sur diverses antiquités de la Perse, p. 48. Lassen, Indische Alterthumskunde, i. 6.
229.
Strabo. xi. 11; Burnouf, Notes, p. 110. “In another source, Eratosthenes is mentioned as describing the western boundary as a line that separates Parthiene from Media, and Karmania from Parætakene and Persia, thereby including Yezd and Kerman but excluding Fars.”Wilson, Ariana antiquus, p. 120.
230.
Hellanicus, fragm. 166, ed. Müller. Ἄρια Περσικὴ χώρα.
231.
Joseph Müller, Journal Asiatique, 1839, p. 298. Lassen, loc. cit. i. 6. From this the Elam of Genesis. Mélanges Asiatiques, i. p. 623.
232.
Heeren, Ideen, i. p. 337: ὁμόγλωττοι παρὰ μικρόν. Strabo, p. 1054.
233.
One of the Median classes is called Ἀριζαντοί, which may be âryajantu. Herod, i. 101.
234.
Μάγοι δὲ καὶ πὰν τὸ Ἄρειον γένος, ὡς καὶ τοῦτο γράφει ὁ Εὔδημος, οἱ μὲν, τόπον, οἱ δὲ χρόνον καλοῦσι τὸ νοητὸν ἅπαν καὶ τὸ ἡνωμένον; ἐξ οὐ διακριθῆναι ἡ θεὸν ἀγαθὸν καὶ δαίμονα κακὸν ἢ φῶς καὶ σκότος πρὸ τούτων, ὡσ ἐνίους λέγειν. Οὐτοι δὲ οὖν καὶ αὐτοὶ μετὰ τὴν ἀδιάκριτον φύσιν διακρινομένην ποιοῦσι τὴν διττὴν συστοιχὴν τῶν κρειττόνων, τῆς μὲν ἡγεῖσθαι τὸν Ὀρομάσδη, τῆς δὲ τὸν Ἀρειμάνιον.—Damascius, quæstiones de primis principiis, ed. Kopp, 1826, cap. 125, p. 384.
235.
De Sacy, Mémoire, p. 47; Lassen, Ind. Alt. i. 8.
236.
Burnouf, Notes, 107. Spiegel, Beiträge zur Vergl. Sprachf. i. 131. Anquetil had no authority for taking the Zend airyaman for Armenia.
237.
Bochart shows (Phaleg, l. 1, c. 3, col. 20) that the Chaldee paraphrast renders the Minî of Jeremiah by Har Minî, and as the same country is called Minyas by Nicolaus Damascenus, he infers that the first syllable is the Semitic Har, a mountain. (See Rawlinson's Glossary, s. v.)
238.
Lassen, Ind. Alt. i. 8, note. Arikh also is used in Armenian as the name of the Medians, and has been referred by Jos. Müller to Aryaka, as a name of Media. Journ. As. 1839, p. 298. If, as Quatremère says, ari and anari are used in Armenian for Medians and Persians, this can only be ascribed to a misunderstanding, and must be a phrase of later date.
239.
Sjögren, Ossetic Grammar, p. 396. Scylax and Apollodorus mention Ἄριοι and Ἀριάνια, south of the Caucasus. Pictet, Origines, 67; Scylax Perip. p. 213, ed. Klausen; Apollodori Biblioth. p. 433, ed. Heyne.
240.
Burnouf, Notes, p. 105.
241.
Ptol. vi. 2, and vi. 14. There are Ἀναριάκαι on the frontiers of Hyrcania. Strabo, xi. 7; Pliny, Hist. Nat. vi. 19.
242.
On Arimaspi and Aramæi, see Burnouf, Notes, p. 105; Plin. vi. 9.
243.
Qairizam in the Zend-avesta, Uvârazmis in the inscriptions of Darius.
244.
Stephanus Byzantinus.
245.
Grimm, Rechts alterthümer, p. 292, traces Arii and Ariovistus back to the Gothic harji, army. If this is right, this part of our argument must be given up.
246.
Pictet, Les Origines Indo-Européennes, p. 31. "Iar, the west, is never spelled er or eir, and the form Iarin does not appear anywhere for Erin." Zeuss gives iar-rend, insula occidentalis. But rend (recte rind) makes rendo in the gen. sing.
247.
Old Norse írar, Irishmen, Anglo-Saxon IRA, Irishman.
248.

Though I state these views on the authority of M. Pictet, I think it right to add the following note which an eminent Irish scholar has had the kindness to send me:—“The ordinary name of Ireland, in the oldest Irish MSS., is (h)ériu, gen. (h)érenn, dat. (h)érinn. The initial h, is often omitted. Before etymologizing on the word, we must try to fix its Old Celtic form. Of the ancient names of Ireland which are found in Greek and Latin writers, the only one which hériu can formally represent is Hiberio. The abl. sing. of this form—Hiberione—is found in the Book of Armagh, a Latin MS. of the early part of the ninth century. From the same MS. we also learn that a name of the Irish people was Hyberionaces, which is obviously a derivative from the stem of Hiberio. Now if we remember that the Old Irish scribes often prefixed h to words beginning with a vowel (e.g. h-abunde, h-arundo, h-erimus, h-ostium), and that they also often wrote b for the v consonant (e.g. bobes, fribulas, corbus, fabonius); if, moreover, we observe that the Welsh and Breton names for Ireland—Ywerddon, Iverdon—point to an Old Celtic name beginning with iver—, we shall have little difficulty in giving Hiberio a correctly latinized form, viz. Iverio. This in Old Celtic would be Iveriu, gen. Iverionos. So the Old Celtic form of Fronto was Frontû, as we see from the Gaulish inscription at Vieux Poitiers. As v when flanked by vowels is always lost in Irish, Iveriû would become ieriu, and then, the first two vowels running together, ériu. As regards the double n in the oblique cases of ériu, the genitive érenn (e.g.) is to Iverionos as the Old Irish anmann ‘names’ is to the Skr. nâmâni, Lat. nomina. The doubling of the n may perhaps be due to the Old Celtic accent. What then is the etymology of Iveriû? I venture to think that it may (like the Lat. Aver-nus, Gr. Ἄφορ-νος) be connected with the Skr. avara, ‘posterior,’ ‘western.’ So the Irish des, Welsh deheu, ‘right,’ ‘south,’ is the Skr. dakshina, ‘dexter,’ and the Irish áir (in an-áir), if it stand for páir, ‘east,’ is the Skr. pûrva, ‘anterior.’

Though I express these views based on the authority of M. Pictet, I find it important to add the following note that a distinguished Irish scholar kindly sent me:—The common name for Ireland in the earliest Irish manuscripts is (h)ériu, genitive (h)érenn, dative (h)érinn. The initial h is often omitted. Before we analyze the origin of the word, we need to determine its Old Celtic form. Among the ancient names for Ireland found in Greek and Latin texts, the only one that hériu can accurately represent is Hiberio. The ablative singular of this form—Hiberione—appears in the Book of Armagh, a Latin manuscript from the early ninth century. From the same manuscript, we also learn that a name for the Irish people was Hyberionaces, which clearly comes from the root of Hiberio. Now, if we remember that Old Irish scribes often prefixed h to words starting with a vowel (e.g. h-abunde, h-arundo, h-erimus, h-ostium), and that they often substituted b for the v consonant (e.g. bobes, fribulas, corbus, fabonius); if we also notice that the Welsh and Breton names for Ireland—Ywerddon, Iverdon—suggest an Old Celtic name that starts with iver, we should have little difficulty creating a correctly Latinized form of Hiberio, namely Iverio. In Old Celtic, this would be Iveriu, genitive Iverionos. Therefore, the Old Celtic form of Fronto was Frontû, as confirmed by the Gaulish inscription at Vieux Poitiers. Since v is usually lost in Irish when between vowels, Iveriû would become ieriu, and as the first two vowels merge, ériu. Regarding the double n in the oblique cases of ériu, the genitive érenn (e.g.) corresponds to Iverionos in the same way that the Old Irish anmann ‘names’ relates to the Sanskrit nâmâni, Latin nomina. The doubling of the n may be due to the accent in Old Celtic. So what is the origin of Iveriû? I suggest that it might be (like the Latin Aver-nus, Greek Ἄφορ-νος) connected to the Sanskrit avara, ‘posterior,’ ‘western.’ Thus, the Irish des, Welsh deheu, ‘right,’ ‘south,’ relates to the Sanskrit dakshina, ‘dexter,’ and the Irish áir (as in an-áir), if it represents páir, ‘east,’ is linked to the Sanskrit pûrva, ‘anterior.’

“M. Pictet regards Ptolemy's Ἰουερνια (Ivernia) as coming nearest to the Old Celtic form of the name in question. He further sees in the first syllable what he calls the Irish ibh, ‘land,’ ‘tribe of people,’ and he thinks that this ibh may be connected not only with the Vedic ibha, ‘family,’ but with the Old High German eiba, ‘a district.’ But, first, according to the Irish phonetic laws, ibha would have appeared as eb in Old, eabh in Modern-Irish. Secondly, the ei in eiba is a diphthong = Gothic ái, Irish ói, óe, Skr. ê. Consequently ibh and ibha cannot be identified with eiba. Thirdly, there is no such word as ibh in the nom. sing., although it is to be found in O'Reilly's dictionary, along with his explanation of the intensive prefix er—, as ‘noble,’ and many other blunders and forgeries. The form ibh is, no doubt, producible, but it is a very modern dative plural of úa, ‘a descendant.’ Irish districts were often called by the names of the occupying clans. These clans were often called ‘descendants (huí, , í) of such an one.’ Hence the blunder of the Irish lexicographer.”—W. S.

M. Pictet believes that Ptolemy's Ἰουερνια (Ivernia) is the closest to the original Celtic name in question. He also interprets the first syllable as the Irish ibh, ‘land,’ ‘tribe of people,’ and thinks that this ibh could be connected not only to the Vedic ibha, ‘family,’ but also to the Old High German eiba, ‘a district.’ However, first, according to Irish phonetic rules, ibha would show up as eb in Old Irish and eabh in Modern Irish. Secondly, the ei in eiba is a diphthong, similar to Gothic ái, Irish óis, óe, and Sanskrit ê. So, ibh and ibha cannot be compared to eiba. Thirdly, there’s no word ibh in the nominative singular, even though it appears in O'Reilly's dictionary, along with his definition of the intensive prefix er as ‘noble,’ along with many other mistakes and fabrications. The form ibh likely comes from a very modern dative plural of úa, ‘a descendant.’ Irish regions were often named after the clans that settled there. These clans were often referred to as ‘descendants (huí, , í) of such a person.’ Thus, this reflects the error of the Irish lexicographer.—W. S.

249.
See Rawlinson's Glossary, s. v.
250.
W. Ouseley, Orient. Geog. of Ebn. Haukal. Burnouf, Yasna, Notes, p. 102.
251.
Ptol. vi. c. 17.
252.
It has been supposed that harôyûm in the Zend-avesta stands for haraêvem, and that the nominative was not Harôyu, but Haraêvô. (Oppert, Journal Asiatique, 1851, p. 280.) Without denying the possibility of the correctness of this view, which is partially supported by the accusative vidôyum, from vidaêvo, enemy of the Divs, there is no reason why Harôyûm should not be taken for a regular accusative of Harôyu. This Harôyu would be as natural and regular a form as Sarayu in Sanskrit, nay even more regular, as harôyu would presuppose a Sanskrit sarasyu or saroyu, from saras. M. Oppert identifies the people of Haraiva with the Ἀρεῖοι, but not, like Grimm, with the Ἄριοι.
253.
It is derived from a root sar or sri, to go, to run, from which sara's, water, sarit, river, and Sarayu, the proper name of the river near Oude; and we may conclude with great probability that this Sarayu or Sarasyu gave the name to the river Arius or Heri, and to the county of Ἄρια or Herat. Anyhow Ἄρια, as the name of Herat, has no connection with Ἄρια the wide country of the Âryas.
254.
Diversions of Purley, p. 190.
255.
AR might be traced back to the Sanskrit root, ṛi, to go (Pott, Etymologische Forschungen, i. 218); but for our present purposes the root, AR, is sufficient.
256.
If, as has been supposed, the Cornish and Welsh words were corruptions of the Latin plow they would have appeared as areuder, arawd, respectively.
257.
Grimm remarks justly that airtha could not be derived from arjan, on account of the difference in the vowels. But airtha is a much more ancient formation, and comes from the root ar, which root, again, was originally ṛi or ir (Benfey, Kurze Gr., p. 27). From this primitive root ṛi or ir, we must derive both the Sanskrit irâ or iḍâ, and the Gothic airtha. The latter would correspond to the Sanskrit ṛita. The true meaning of the Sanskrit iḍâ has never been discovered. The Brahmans explain it as prayer, but this is not its original meaning.
258.
Grimm derives work, Gothic arbaiths, Old High-German arapeit, Modern High-German work, directly from the Gothic arbja, heir; but admits a relationship between arbja and the root arjan, to plough. He identifies arbja with the Slavonic, rab, servant, slave, and work with work, unpaid labor, supposing that sons and heirs were the first natural slaves. He supposes even a relationship between work and the Latin work. German Dictionary, s. v. Work.
259.
Latin remus (O. Irish rám) for resmus, connected with ἐρετμός. From ἐρέτης, ἐρέσσω; and ὑπηρέτης, servant, helper. Podium from rodere.
260.
Cf. Eur. Hec. 455, κώπη ἁλιήρης. Ἀμφήρης means having oars on both sides.
261.
From Sanskrit plu, πλέω; cf. fleet and float.
262.
Other similes: ὕνις, and ὕννις, ploughshare, derived by Plutarch from ὗς, boar. A plough is said to be called a pigsnose. The Latin porca, a ploughed field, is derived from pig, hog; and the German furicha, furrow, is connected with Farah, boar. The Sanskrit wolf, wolf, from vraśch, to tear, is used for plough, Rv. i. 117, 21. Godaraņa, earth-tearer, is another word for plough in Sanskrit. Gothic hoha, plough = Sk. koka, wolf. See Grimm, Deutsche Sprache, and Kuhn, Indische Studien, vol. i. p. 321.
263.
In the Vale of Blackmore, a waggon is called plow, or plough, and zull (A.-S. syl) is used for plow (Barnes, Dorset Dialect, p. 369).
264.
Pott, Etymologische Forschungen, p. 267; Benfey, Griechisches Wurzelwörterbuch, p. 236.
265.
The Greek υποδρα, askance, is derived from ὑπὸ, and δρα, which is connected with δέρκομαι, I see; the Sanskrit, dṛiś.
266.
Generi coloniali, colonial goods. Marsh, p. 253. In Spanish, generos, merchandise.
267.
Many derivatives might have been added, such as sample, viewer, the show, specialty, spectrum, glasses, misleading, speculative, &c.
268.
Benloew, Aperçu Général, p. 28 seq.
269.

Benfey, Grammatik, § 147:—

Benfey, Grammar, § 147:—

Roots of the 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9 classes: 226
Roots of the 1, 4, 6, 10 classes: 1480
Total: 1706, including 143 of the 10th class.

Roots of the 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9 classes: 226
Roots of the 1, 4, 6, 10 classes: 1480
Total: 1706, including 143 from the 10th class.

270.
Renan, Histoire des Langues sémitiques, p. 138. Benloew estimates the necessary radicals of Gothic at 600, of modern German at 250, p. 22. Pott thinks that each language has about 1000 roots.
271.
The exact number in the Imperial Dictionary of Khang-hi amounts to 42,718. About one-fourth part has become obsolete; and one-half of the rest may be considered of rare occurrence, thus leaving only about 15,000 words in actual use. The exact number of classical characters is 42,718. Many of them are not used in modern language, but they do appear in canonical and classical texts. You can sometimes find them in official documents when there’s an effort to mimic the old style. A significant number of these are names of people, places, mountains, rivers, etc. To qualify for the position of imperial historian, it was necessary to know 9,000 of these, which were compiled in a separate manual.Stanislas Julien.
272.
The study of the English language by A. D'Orsey, p. 15.
273.
This is the number of words in the Vocabulary given by Bunsen, in the first volume of his Egypt, pp. 453-491. Several of these words, however, though identical in sound, must be separated etymologically, and later researches have still further increased the number. The number of hieroglyphic groups in Sharpe's “Egyptian Hieroglyphs,” 1861, amounts to 2030.
274.
Marsh, Lectures, p. 182. M. Thommerel stated the number of words in the Dictionaries of Robertson and Webster as 43,566. Todd's edition of Johnson, however, is said to contain 58,000 words, and the later editions of Webster have reached the number of 70,000, counting the participles of the present and perfect as independent vocables. Flügel estimated the number of words in his own dictionary at 94,464, of which 65,085 are simple, 29,379 compound. This was in 1843; and he then expressed a hope that in his next edition the number of words would far exceed 100,000. This is the number fixed upon by Mr. Marsh as the minimum of the word copy in English. See Saturday Review, Nov. 2, 1861.
275.
Renan, Histoire, p. 138.
276.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, § 128.
277.

If two words are placed like jin ta, the first may form the predicate of the second, the second being used as a substantive. Thus jin ta might mean the greatness of man, but in this case it is more usual to say jin tci ta.

If two words are put together like jin ta, the first can act as the predicate for the second, which is used as a noun. So, jin ta could mean the greatness of man, but in this case, it's more common to say jin tci ta.

“Another instance, chen, virtue; Ex. jin tchi chen, the virtue of man; chen, virtuous; Ex. chen jin, the virtuous man; chen, to approve; Ex. chen tchi, to find it good; chen, well; Ex. chen ko, to sing well.”Stanislas Julien.

"Another example, chen, means virtue; For example, jin tchi chen refers to the virtue of man; chen also means virtuous; For instance, chen jin means the virtuous man; chen can mean to approve; For example, chen tchi means to find it good; chen can also mean well; For example, chen ko means to sing well."Stanislas Julien.

278.
Grimm, Deutsche Grammatik, b. ii. s. 521.
279.
Each verb in Greek, if conjugated through all its voices, tenses, moods, and persons, yields, together with its participles, about 1300 forms.
280.
Histoire Générale et Système Comparé des Langues sémitiques, par Ernest Renan. Seconde édition. Paris, 1858.
281.
Peshito means simple. The Old Testament was translated from Hebrew, the New Testament from Greek, about 200, if not earlier. Ephraem Syrus lived in the middle of the fourth century. During the eighth and ninth centuries the Nestorians of Syria acted as the instructors of the Arabs. Their literary and intellectual supremacy began to fail in the tenth century. It was revived for a time by Gregorius Barhebræus (Abulfaraj) in the thirteenth century. See Renan, p. 257.
282.
Messrs. Perkins and Stoddard, the latter the author of a grammar, published in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, vol. v. 1.
283.
Renan, p. 214 seq., "The biblical Chaldean would be a slightly Hebraicized Aramaic dialect."
284.
Arabic, tarjam, to explain; Interpreter, Arabic, translator.
285.
The most ancient are those of Onkelos and Jonathan, in the second century after Christ. Others are much later, later even than the Talmud. Renan, p. 220.
286.
Renan, pp. 220-222.
287.
Talmud (instruction) consists of Mishnah and Gemara. Mishna means repetition, viz. of the Law. It was collected and written down about 218, by Jehuda. Gemara is a continuation and commentary of the Mishna; that of Jerusalem was finished towards the end of the fourth, that of Babylon towards the end of the fifth, century.
288.
First printed in the Rabbinic Bible, Venice, 1525.
289.
Quatremère, Mémoire sur les Nabatéens, p. 139.
290.
Renan, p. 241.
291.
Ibid. p. 237.
292.
Quatremère, Mémoire sur les Nabatéens, p. 116.
293.
Ibn-Wahshiyyah was a Mussulman, but his family had been converted for three generations only. He translated a collection of Nabatean books. Three have been preserved, 1, the Nabatean Agriculture; 2, the book on poisons; 3, the book of Tenkelusha (Teucros) the Babylonian; besides fragments of the book of the secrets of the Sun and Moon. The Nabatean Agriculture was referred by Quatremère (Journal Asiatique, 1835) to the period between Belesis who delivered the Babylonians from their Median masters, and the taking of Babylon by Cyrus. Prof. Chwolson, of St. Petersburg, who has examined all the MSS., places Kuthami at the beginning of the thirteenth ceatury b.c.
294.
Renan, Mémoire sur l'âge du livre intitulé Agriculture Nabatéenne, p. 38. Paris, 1860.
295.
See Letter on Turanian Languages, p. 62.
296.
Renan, Histoire des Langues sémitiques, p. 137.
297.
Pococke, Notes to Abulfaragius, p. 153; Glossology, p. 352.
298.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, p. 223.
299.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, p. 339.
300.
In this word tse (tseu) does not mean son; it is a common addition used after nouns, adjectives, and verbs. For example, lao, meaning old, + tseu translates to father; neï, meaning the interior, + tseu means wife; hiang, meaning scent, + tseu denotes clove; hoa, meaning to beg, + tseu, refers to a mendicant; hi, meaning to act, + tseu, refers to an actor.Stanislas Julien.
301.
Letter on the Turanian Languages, p. 24.
302.
Survey of Languages, p. 90.
303.
The Abbé Molina states that the language of Chili is entirely free from irregular forms. Du Ponceau, Mémoire, p. 90.
304.
Letter on Turanian Languages, p. 206.
305.
Of these I can only give a tabular survey at the end of these Lectures, referring for further particulars to my “Letter on Turanian Languages.” The Gangetic and Lohitic dialects are those comprehended under the name of Bhotîya.
306.
Professor Boller of Vienna, who has given a most accurate analysis of the Turanian languages in the “Vienna Academy Transactions,” has lately established the Turanian character of Japanese.
307.
Letter on the Turanian Languages, p. 75.
308.

M. Stanislas Julien remarks that the numerous compounds which occur in Chinese prove the wide-spread influence of the principle of agglutination in that language. The fact is, that in Chinese every sound has numerous meanings; and in order to avoid ambiguity, one word is frequently followed by another which agrees with it in that particular meaning which is intended by the speaker. Thus:—

M. Stanislas Julien points out that the many compounds found in Chinese demonstrate the extensive influence of agglutination in that language. In fact, in Chinese, every sound has multiple meanings, and to prevent confusion, one word is often followed by another that matches its specific intended meaning. So:—

chi-youen (beginning-origin) signifies beginning.
ken-youen (root-origin) signifies beginning.
youen-chin (origin-beginning) signifies beginning.
meï-miai (beautiful-remarkable) signifies beautiful.
meï-li (beautiful-elegant) signifies beautiful.
chen-youen (charming-lovely) signifies beautiful.
yong-i (easy-facile) signifies easily.
tsong-yong (to obey, easy) signifies easily.

chi-youen (beginning-origin) means beginning.
ken-youen (root-origin) means beginning.
younger sibling (origin-beginning) means beginning.
meï-miai (beautiful-remarkable) means beautiful.
meili (beautiful-elegant) means beautiful.
chen-youen (charming-lovely) means beautiful.
yung-i (easy-facile) means easily.
tsong-yong (to obey, easy) means easily.

In order to express “to boast,” the Chinese say king-koua, king-fu, &c., both words having one and the same meaning.

In order to express "to brag," the Chinese say king-koua, kung fu, etc., both words having the same meaning.

This peculiar system of juxta-position, however, cannot be considered as agglutination in the strict sense of the word.

This unusual system of juxtaposition, however, cannot be seen as agglutination in the strict sense of the term.

309.
Turanian Languages, p. 24.
310.
These “Outlines” form vols. iii. and iv. of Bunsen's work, “Christianity and Humanity,” in seven vols. (London, 1854: Longman), and are sold separately.
311.
Göttingische Gelehrte Anzeigen, 1855, p. 298.
312.
Ibid., p. 302, note.
313.

“Here the lines converge as they recede into the geological ages, and point to conclusions which, upon Darwin's theory, are inevitable, but hardly welcome. The very first step backward makes the negro and the Hottentot our blood-relations; not that reason or Scripture objects to that, though pride may.” Asa Gray, “Natural Selection not inconsistent with Natural Theology,” 1861, p. 5.

“Here the lines converge as they stretch back through geological time, leading to conclusions that, according to Darwin's theory, are inevitable, though not particularly reassuring. Just the initial step back shows that Africans and the Hottentots are our blood relatives; it’s not that reason or the Scriptures contradict this, although pride might.” Asa Gray, "Natural selection is not incompatible with natural theology," 1861, p. 5.

“One good effect is already manifest, its enabling the advocates of the hypothesis of a multiplicity of human species to perceive the double insecurity of their ground. When the races of men are admitted to be of one species, the corollary, that they are of one origin, may be expected to follow. Those who allow them to be of one species must admit an actual diversification into strongly marked and persistent varieties; while those, on the other hand, who recognize several or numerous human species, will hardly be able to maintain that such species were primordial and supernatural in the ordinary sense of the word.” Asa Gray, Nat. Sel. p. 54.

“One clear benefit is already obvious: it helps supporters of the concept of multiple human species recognize the flaws in their argument. When it's accepted that all humans are one species, it follows that they came from a single origin. Those who assert we are one species must also acknowledge that there are significant and enduring differences among us; on the other hand, those who believe in multiple human species will have a hard time arguing that these species were original and originated from a supernatural source in the usual sense.” Asa Gray, Nat. Sel. p. 54.

314.
Professor Pott, the most distinguished advocate of the polygenetic dogma, has pleaded the necessity of admitting more than one beginning for the human race and for language in an article in the Journal of the German Oriental Society, ix. 405, "Max Müller and the Characteristics of Linguistic Affinity," 1855; in a treatise "Racial inequality," 1856; and in the new edition of his "Etymological Studies," 1861.
315.
Dugald Stewart, vol. iii. p. 35.
316.
Herder, as quoted by Steinthal, "Origin of language," s. 39.
317.
"In all these research paths, when we look far back, the earlier parts look very different from the advanced part we’re currently on; but in every case, the trail fades into obscurity as we trace it back to its starting point: it becomes not just invisible but also unimaginable; it is not only a break but an abyss that separates us from any understandable beginning of things." Whewell, Indications, p. 166.
318.
"Humans are only human through language; however, to create language, they must already be human."W. von Humboldt, Complete Works, b. iii. s. 252. The same argument is ridden to death by Süssmilch, "An attempt to prove that the first language did not originate from humans, but was solely given by the Creator." Berlin, 1766.
319.
Farrar, Origin of Language, p. 10; Grimm, Ursprung der Sprache, s. 32. The word βεκός, which these children are reported to have uttered, and which, in the Phrygian language, meant bread, thus proving, it was supposed, that the Phrygian was the primitive language of mankind, is derived from the same root which exists in the English, to bake. How these unfortunate children came by the idea of baked bread, involving the ideas of corn, mill, oven, fire, &c., seems never to have struck the ancient sages of Egypt.
320.
The use of hands, walking on two feet, and the somewhat crude resemblance of the face—these traits that arise from this similarity in structure—led humans, who were themselves only half civilized, to label the monkey as a “wild man,” based solely on outward appearances. What if, through some natural combination just as possible as any other, the monkey had the voice of a parrot and, like it, the ability to speak? A talking monkey would have left all of humanity speechless in amazement and would have been so enchanting that philosophers would have struggled to prove that, despite all these appealing human attributes, the monkey was still an animal. It is, therefore, fortunate for our understanding that nature has kept the imitation of speech and our gestures separate, placing them in two very different species.Buffon, as quoted by Flourens, p. 77.
321.
Odyssey, xvii. 300.
322.
"The clear signs of reasoning in other animals—reasoning that I can only see as undeniable as the instincts that are part of it."Brown, Works, vol. i. p. 446.
323.
Flourens, De la Raison, p. 51.
324.
To allow that "Animals share some mental abilities with humans." ... “desires, feelings, memory, basic imagination, or the ability to recreate past experiences in our minds, as well as simple judgment or intuition;”—that "they critique and evaluate," (Mem. Amer. Acad. 8, p. 118,)—is to concede that the intellect of brutes really acts, so far as we know, like human intellect, as far as it goes; for the philosophical logicians tell us that all reasoning is reducible to a series of simple judgments. And Aristotle declares that even reminiscence,—which is, we suppose, “bringing the past to life in our minds through images,”—is a sort of reasoning (τὶ ἀναμιμνήσκεσθαί ἐστι οἱον συλλογισμός τισ.) Asa Gray, Natural Selection, &c., p. 58, note.
325.
Conscience, Boek der Natuer, vi., quoted by Marsh, p. 32.
326.
Book ii. chapter xi. § 10.
327.
I regret to find that the expressions here used have given offence to several of my reviewers. They were used because the names Onomatopoetic and Interjectional are awkward and not very clear. They were not intended to be disrespectful to those who hold the one or the other theory, some of them scholars for whose achievements in comparative philology I entertain the most sincere respect.
328.
A fuller account of the views of Herder and other philosophers on the origin of language may be found in Steinthal's useful little work, “Origin of Language:” Berlin, 1853.
329.
Farrar, p. 74.
330.
Pott, Etymologische Forschungen, i. 87; Zeitschrift, iii. 43.
331.
Kârava, explained in Sanskrit by ku-rava, having a bad voice, is supposed to be a mere dialectical corruption of cow or karva. Κορώνη presupposes κορων = κοροον = h(a)raban. The Sanskrit kârava may, however, be derived from car, singer; but in that case car must not be derived from kri.
332.
See Pictet, Aryas Primitifs, p. 381.
333.

In Chinese the number of imitative sounds is very considerable. They are mostly written phonetically, and followed by the determinative sign “mouth.” We give a few, together with the corresponding sounds in Mandshu. The difference between the two will show how differently the same sounds strike different ears, and how differently they are rendered into articulate language:—

In Chinese, there are a lot of imitative sounds. They are mainly written phonetically and are accompanied by the determinative sign “mouth.” We'll provide a few examples along with the corresponding sounds in Mandshu. The differences between the two will illustrate how the same sounds can be perceived differently by different ears, and how they are expressed in articulate language in various ways:—

The cock crows kiao kiao in Chinese, dchor dchor in Mandshu.
The wild goose cries kao kao in Chinese, kôr kor in Mandshu.
The wind and rain sound siao siao in Chinese, chor chor in Mandshu.
Waggons sound lin lin in Chinese, koungour koungour in Mandshu.
Dogs coupled together sound ling-ling in Chinese, kalang kalang in Mandshu.
Chains coupled together sound tsiang-tsiang in Chinese, kiling kiling in Mandshu.
Bells coupled together sound tsiang-tsiang in Chinese, tang tang in Mandshu.
Drums coupled together sound ḱan ḱan in Chinese, tung tung in Mandshu.

The rooster crows "kiao kiao" in Chinese, "dchor dchor" in Manchu.
The wild goose honks "kao kao" in Chinese, "kôr kor" in Manchu.
The wind and rain make a sound like "siao siao" in Chinese, "chor chor" in Manchu.
Wagons make a sound like "lin lin" in Chinese, "koungour koungour" in Manchu.
Dogs mating sound like "ling-ling" in Chinese, "kalang kalang" in Manchu.
Chains clanking together sound like "tsiang-tsiang" in Chinese, "kiling kiling" in Manchu.
Bells ringing together sound like "tsiang-tsiang" in Chinese, "tang tang" in Manchu.
Drums beating together sound like "ḱan ḱan" in Chinese, "tung tung" in Manchu.

334.
Ὁ γὰρ Ἐπίκουρος ἔλεγεν, ὅτι οὑχὶ ἐπιστημόνως οὖτοι ἔθεντο τὰ ὀνόματα, ἀλλὰ φυσικῶς κινούμενοι, ὡς οἱ βήσσοντες καὶ πταίροντες καὶ μυκώμενοι καὶ ὐλακτοῦντες καὶ στενάζοντες.—Lersch, Sprach-philosophie der Alten, i. 40. The statement is taken from Proclus, and I doubt whether he represented Epicurus rightly.
335.
Diversions of Purley, p. 32.
336.

The following list of Chinese interjections may be of interest:—

The following list of Chinese interjections might be interesting:—

hu, to express surprise.
fu, the same.
tsai, to express admiration and approbation.
i, to express distress.
tsie, vocative particle.
tsie tsie, exhortative particle.
ài, to express contempt.
ŭ-hu, to express pain.
shin-ĭ, ah, indeed.
pŭ sin, alas!
ngo, stop!

hu, to express surprise.
fu, the same.
tsai, to express admiration and approval.
i, to express distress.
tsie, vocative particle.
tsie tsie, exhortative particle.
ài, to express contempt.
ŭ-hu, to express pain.
shin-ĭ, ah, indeed.
pŭ sin, alas!
ngo, stop!

In many cases interjections were originally words, just as the French hélas is derived from lassus, tired, miserable. Diez, Lexicon Etymologicum, s. v. lasso.

In many cases, interjections started out as words, just like the French alas comes from lassus, meaning tired or miserable. Diez, Lexicon Etymologicum, s. v. lasso.

337.
Sir W. Hamilton's Lectures, ii. p. 319.
338.
Nouveaux Essais, lib. iii. c. i. p. 297 (Erdmann); Sir W. Hamilton, Lectures, ii. 324.
339.
Pott, Etymologische Forschungen, p. 324, seq.
340.
Benfey, Griech. Wurzel Lex. p. 611. From SKU or ku, σκῦτος, skin; skin, high.
341.
Sir William Hamilton (Lectures on Metaphysics, ii. p. 327) holds a view intermediate between those of Adam Smith and Leibniz. "As we know," he says, “Language moves from the confused to the clear, from the vague to the specific. In the speech of children, language initially doesn’t convey something that is precisely general or clearly individual; instead, it reflects the vague and confused. From this, the universal is developed through generalization, while the particular and individual are shaped through specification and individualization.” Some further remarks on this point in the Literary Gazette, 1861, p. 173.
342.
"We perceive the experience of a large mass of water falling, always from the same height and with the same intensity. The way the water drops scatter, the froth that forms, and the sound of the waterfall, which roars and churns, are always produced by the same forces, and thus, they remain consistent. The initial impression we get from all this may seem varied, but it quickly comes together as a whole. In other words, we recognize the diversity of these individual impressions as part of a significant physical activity resulting from the specific characteristics of the location. Until we learn more, we might refer to everything that is consistent in this phenomenon as the thoughts of nature."Oersted, Spirit in Nature, p. 152.
343.
"What misleads man is that he sees animals doing many of the same things he does, and he doesn't realize that, in those very actions, animals only use a basic, limited intelligence, while he employs a more advanced, spirited intelligence."Flourens, On Reason, p. 73.
344.
See Heyse, System der Sprachwissenschaft, s. 97.
345.
The word quinsy, as was pointed out to me, offers a striking illustration of the ravages produced by phonetic decay. The root anh has here completely vanished. But it was there originally, for tonsillitis is the Greek κυνάγχη, dog-throttling. See Richardson's Dictionary, s. v. quinancy.
346.
Greek χαμαί, Zend zem, Lithuanian earth, and skins, people. See Bopp, Glossarium Sanscritum, s. v.
347.
See Windischmann, Fortschritt der Sprachenkunde, p. 23.
348.
Farrar, Origin of Language, p. 85.
349.
Θήσω τὰ μὲν φύσει λεγόμενα ποιεῖσθαι θείᾳ τέχνη.
350.
This view was propounded many years ago by Professor Heyse in the lectures which he gave at Berlin, and which have been very carefully published since his death by one of his pupils, Dr. Steinthal. The fact that wood, metals, cords, &c., if struck, vibrate and ring, can, of course, be used as an illustration only, and not as an explanation. The faculty peculiar to man, in his primitive state, by which every impression from without received its vocal expression from within, must be accepted as an ultimate fact. That faculty must have existed in man, because its effects continue to exist. Analogies from the inanimate world, however, are useful, and deserve farther examination.
351.
Dr. Murray's primitive roots were, ag, bag, dwag, cwag, lag, mag, nag, rag, swag.
352.
Curtius, Griechische Etymologie, p. 13. Dr. Schmidt derives all Greek words from the root e, and all Latin words from the arch-radical hi.
353.
Endlicher, Chinesische Grammatik, p. 163.
354.
System der Sprachwissenschaft, p. 16.
355.
See Schleicher, Deutsche Sprache, p. 144.
356.
Marsh, p. 388.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!